Trade Briefs

TENDERING GENERAL
TENDERING
Worksection application
This worksection reflects the principles of the main Australian codes of practice, including AS 4120 (Code of tendering) which is
cited in a number of state governments codes of practice. A tender pro-forma is also provided. The worksection assumes head-
contract tendering and so does not deal with tendering for nominated subcontractors and suppliers. The worksection is
applicable to non-contractual material and so does not form part of the contract documents.
1 CONDITIONS OF TENDERING
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
General: Provide a complete bona fide tender.
This worksection should be edited to suit the requirements of the project. It covers material sometimes given in the invitation to
tender and tender form, permitting those documents to be brief and simple.
1.2 GENERAL
Status
General: These conditions of tendering will not form part of the contract.
Code of practice
General: Tendering procedure will be in accordance with the principles of the following:
>
The code of practice, if any, which the principal will comply with and which the tenderers are to comply with e.g. AS 4120.
Definition
General: In these conditions of tendering, the word “principal” has the same meaning as “owner” and
“proprietor”.
ABIC MW-1 and ABIC SW-1 use the term “owner”. Delete if AS 2124 or AS 4000 is used, both of which use the term “principal”.
Number of tenders invited >
Anticipated order of cost >

Delete if you prefer not to give an indication of anticipated cost to tenderers.
1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION

Refer to RAIA Advisory Note AN15.08.101 clause 2.1, and to AS 4120 clauses 4(i) and 6.1.2. Topics covered in these
references deal mainly with the contents of the tender documents, most of which are addressed in this worksection. Provisional
sums, nominated sub-contracts and separate contracts are dealt with, and the number of documents, including envelopes and
pro-formas, is discussed. The principal may be asked by tenderers to provide proof of ability to fund the project.
Outline description of the works >
Provide an outline description if it assists in identifying the project. A scope of works is often considered ill advised.
Description of the site
Location: >
e.g. title, address.
Investigations carried out: >
e.g. geotechnical, environmental, traffic studies.
Tender documents
The tender documents comprise the following:
- These conditions of tendering.
- Tender form.
- Schedule of rates.
NATSPEC i [Insert date]

TENDERING GENERAL
- Bills of quantities.
- General conditions of contract.
- Geotechnical site investigation reports, as follows:
>
- Special conditions of contract.
- Appendix or annexure to general conditions of contract, partly pre-completed.
- Specifications.
- Drawings.
- Nominated subcontracts.
- Deeds of novation for nominated subcontracts.
- Subcontract interfacing information, including services and facilities.
- Other documents issued by the principal for the purpose of tendering, as follows:
>
Edit as appropriate. For example, there may be no special conditions of contract. Tender costing requirements are a major
factor in selecting the documents to be issued to tenderers. If a simple lump sum is all that’s required, schedules of rates and
contractual bills of quantities will not be necessary. If contractual bills are to be priced, a schedule of rates is not necessary, and
only general arrangement drawings need be issued – even the specification may not be issued. In this case, the specification
and other drawings should be available for examination by tenderers. The documents themselves should state whether they are
contractual, for information only, or to be completed by tenderers. In the pre-completed appendix or annexure of the contract,
indicate which items are negotiable, if any.
Security: Do not disclose to third parties tender documents marked with a classification such as
“Restricted”, “Confidential” or “Secret”, except with prior written approval of the principal and subject to
conditions imposed.
1.4 FURTHER INFORMATION

Refer to RAIA Advisory Note AN15.08.101 clauses 2.2, 2.3, 2.4 and 2.5, and to AS 4120 clauses 6.2.2, 6.2.4, 6.2.5 and 7.3.
Topics covered in these references include nomination of a contact officer, tender period, inquiries and amendments, evaluation
of tender documents, site inspection, meetings with principal, and information made available to non-tenderers.
Contact person
Rules for the behaviour of this person are given in the codes of tendering. This person should facilitate visits to the site and the
viewing of useful material, such as models, mock-ups and the like, by tenderers.
Ideally inquiries, notification of discrepancies etc., should be advised to the contact person in good time e.g. no later than a
week before the close of the tender period.
Inquiries: Refer inquiries to the following:
- Name: >
- Telephone: >
- Facsimile: >
Examination
General: A full set of documents is available for examination, which may be arranged through the
contact person.
If only the general arrangement drawings (e.g. 1:100) are issued to tenderers (e.g. where a contractual bill is provided), other
drawings – especially details – should also be available for examination.
Other material available for examination: >
May include models, photographs, prototypes, reports and studies.
Site inspections
General: Information on dates and times at which the site will be available for inspection can be
obtained from the contact person.
If a visit has been pre-arranged, say so (venue, time, date).
Conferences
General: Information on dates and times of tender conferences can be obtained from the contact
person.
If a meeting has been pre-arranged, say so (venue, time, date).
NATSPEC ii [Insert date]

TENDERING GENERAL
Addenda
General: Written addenda issued by the principal are the only recognised explanations of, or
amendments to, the tender documents.
1.5 PREPARATION OF TENDERS

Refer to RAIA Advisory Note AN15.08.103 and to codes of tendering as follows AS 4120 clauses 4(d), (f), (g), (h) and (k), and
clauses 7.1, 7.4 and 7.5.
Topics covered in these references include conditions of tendering, provision of supplementary information, design by
tenderers, ethical formulation of tenders (particularly attestation of probity, and tenderers to bid only if genuine and capable),
and conditions for submission of alternative tenders.
Tender form
See the instruction to the Tender form.
Form: Submit the tender on the Tender form provided.
Addenda: Confirm on the Tender form that allowance has been made of each addendum and any
extensions of the tender period.
Name and address of tenderer: State the following:
- If an individual, the name in full and address of the individual.
- If an unincorporated body, the registered business name and address of the body and the name in
full and address of each member of the body.
- If a company, the name, ABN and registered office address of the company.
Address for service of notices: Include on the Tender form an address for service of notices for the
purpose of this tender and any subsequent contract arising out of this tender.
Execution: Sign the Tender form or, if a company, comply with the relevant provisions of the
Corporations Law and regulations.
Scope
Scope: Tender for the whole of the work described in the tender documents unless the tender
documents provide otherwise.
Exclusions: If unable to tender on parts of the works, inform the contact person in writing as soon as
possible, defining the relevant parts and giving reasons.
Completion
General: Complete in full the Tender form and other required documents.
Alterations: Do not alter or add to tender documents except as may be required by these conditions of
tendering.
Selected subcontracts
General: Submit with the tender the identity of subcontractors proposed for selected subcontract work.
Alternatives
Alternative proposals are encouraged (i.e. innovation), provided that a conforming tender is also submitted. The codes deal with
the tenderer’s rights to intellectual property, and design work expected of tenderers.
Examples of alternative methods include use of the contractor’s own proprietary windows, precast concrete floors rather than in
situ, or a different type of foundation pile.
General: Alternative proposals may be submitted with the tender for consideration, but:
- A conforming tender must be submitted, which complies with the tender documents.
- A detailed description of the alternative must be submitted, stating clearly the manner in which it
differs from the requirements of the tender documents whilst complying with the principal’s
commercial and technical objectives.
Alternative time for practical completion: Consideration will be given to alternative tenders which offer
different times for practical completion. The prescribed liquidated damages will apply to those different
times.
Alternative working hours and working days: If the tender includes an allowance for work at times
other than the working hours or working days prescribed in the tender documents, submit the working
hours and days proposed.
NATSPEC iii [Insert date]

TENDERING GENERAL
Evidence of contractor’s registration or licensing

General: If it is a statutory requirement of the state or territory in which the works are located that a
contractor (as defined by the statutory requirement) be registered or licensed to carry out the work
described in the tender documents, submit with the tender evidence of registration or licence.
Delete where pre-tender evaluation has dealt with this issue.
Supporting costing information
Complete and submit the following supporting costing information:
>
Time for submission: >
If more than a simple lump sum is required. Supporting information may comprise priced bills of quantities, a priced specification
(rare), a priced schedule of rates, or a contract sum analysis. Edit the Tender form to match these requirements. The tender
documents should include pro-formas, with instructions as necessary.
Priced bills of quantities may be submitted with the tenders, but in separate envelopes, or as soon as possible after the tenders
– say, within 4 working days. Likewise the other items, whichever is required, may be required to be submitted with the tender,
within one week of request, before execution of the contract, or whenever.
If an unpriced schedule of rates is not provided, but a priced schedule is required, stipulate the items of work to be priced. State
whether the rates are to include contractor’s overheads and profit. You may care to define default rates and prices in the event
none are provided by tenderers e.g. award rates plus 100%, unit prices in Rawlinsons “Australian Construction Handbook”
(state which edition).
Similarly, for a contract sum analysis, state the categories required for the breakdown.
Design and documentation

Undertake and submit the following design and documentation work:
>
Cost: The cost of this work will not be reimbursed.
Alternatively, for example, “The cost of this work will be reimbursed. Advise the cost of this work”.
Prototypes
Produce and submit the following prototypes: >
Cost: The cost of this work will not be reimbursed.
Alternatively, for example, “The cost of this work will be reimbursed. Advise the cost of this work”.
Program
General: Submit a construction program in the form of a preliminary bar chart and network diagram,
showing the following:
- Sequence of work.
- Periods within which various stages or parts of the work are to be executed.
- Critical paths of activities related to the work.
- Allowance for holidays.
- Restraints imposed by the contract documents.
- Significant milestones including separable parts, if any.
- Activity inter-relationships, including those activities to be undertaken by subcontractors and
suppliers, both on and off site.
- External dependencies including provision of access, document approvals and work by others.
- The estimated value of work completed for each month.
Edit to suit the project. It is generally advisable to obtain at least a summary before accepting the tender. The contractor may fail
to produce the construction program proper in a timely manner, and you should check that the tenderer’s proposals will not
cause problems with supply of information, site access, early partial possession, etc.
Method statements
Submit method statements describing proposals for the following:
>
NATSPEC iv [Insert date]

TENDERING GENERAL
Use where methods or sequences of construction will have significant implications which need to be considered at tender stage.
Examples include interior refurbishment and decanting, re-roofing and temporary roof, excavating and forming retaining walls to
deep basements and access proposals to restricted sites.
Quality system
Optional. Delete if QA is not required. A statement of proposed quality control resources may be sought instead.
Tenderer’s submission: Submit a statement of quality control resources.
Alternative: Import the quality system requirements set out in the Commentary and include here as default text.
1.6 SUBMISSION OF TENDERS

Refer to RAIA Advisory Note AN15.08.105 and AS 4120 clauses 6.1.2(i) and 6.4. Topics covered in these references include
defaults for closing date and time, and methods of lodgement.
Lodgement
Procedure: Enclose tenders in a sealed envelope marked with the description of the work and tender
item (if any) and lodge in the tender box at, or send by prepaid post to, the nominated place, by the
date and time for closing of tenders.
Facsimile: Facsimile tenders received by the date and time for closing of tenders may be considered
provided that a conforming tender, in the form required, is submitted within 24 hours.
Oral tenders: Oral tenders will not be considered.
Franking: Impressions of franking machines are not acceptable evidence of timely posting or dispatch.
Supporting information: Enclose in a separate sealed envelope marked with the description of the
work and the identity of the tenderer.
Late tenders
Prepaid post or facsimile: Late tenders submitted by prepaid post or facsimile may be considered, if
the principal is satisfied that in the ordinary course of post or transmission they would have been
received by the date and time for closing of tenders.
Hand delivery: Late tenders delivered by hand may be considered if the principal is satisfied that under
normal circumstances they would have been received by the date and time for closing of tenders and
that the delay was beyond the control of the tenderer.
Other: Late tenders sent by other forms of delivery or transmission will not be considered.
Closing of tenders
Generally allow at least 4 weeks. See AS 4120 clause 6.4 for defaults.
Date: >
Time: >
Place for lodgement
Tender box location: >
Address for postal tenders: >
1.7 PROCEDURES AFTER TENDER PERIOD

Refer to RAIA Advisory Note AN15.08.105 and to AS 4120 clauses 4(j), 4(l), 6.3, 6.5, 6.6, 7.2 and 8.
Topics covered in these references include return of tender documents, confidentiality and rights to intellectual property, late
tenders, tender validity period, opening of tenders, errors in tenders, time extension if too few received, re-calling tenders,
notification of tenderers, ethical evaluation of tenders including criteria, non-conforming tenders, tender negotiation, publication
of tenders, return of tender documents, tender report and recommendations, interviews, initiation of contract and preparation of
contract documents.
On qualified tenders, see also RAIA Advisory Note AN15.08.601.
Tender validity period
General: Unless withdrawn, tenders must remain valid from the date and time for closing of tenders,
for the following period: >
Commonly no more than 4 weeks, rarely more than 8 weeks. Stipulate here, or require tenderers to nominate on the tender
form.
Public opening of tenders
Date: >
NATSPEC v [Insert date]
TENDERING GENERAL
Time: >
Public acknowledgment of tenders received
General: A list of tenderers may be posted by the close of business on the day following the closing of
tenders. Do not consider this listing to be advice of which tender, if any, will be accepted.
Location of notice board: >
Evaluation of tenders
Edit the list to suit the project (e.g. CADD format is significant only where a lot of design work will be required of the contractor,
and where the principal has particular requirements). Some of these criteria should have largely been resolved during the pre-
tender period e.g. resources, experience, commitments and performance.
If listing the criteria in order of priority, say so. Weightings would also be very useful to tenderers.
Refer also to the CIDA (Construction and Industry Development Agency) Pre-Qualification Criteria, CIDA 17, 18 and 19
(available from Standards Australia).
General: In evaluating the tenders, the principal may take into consideration the following:
- Conformity with tender documents.
- Capital cost compared with estimated cost.
- Construction period.
- Proposed use of local subcontractors and suppliers.
- Proposed alternatives.
- Alternative working times proposed by the tenderer, and the cost to the principal of providing
contract administration for the work under the contract at those times.
- Maintenance and running costs.
- Design proposals.
- Quality of prototypes.
- Construction program.
- Proposed methods.
- Quality assurance.
- Conflicts of interest.
- Life of proposed equipment.
- Standardisation of proposed equipment.
- Tenderer’s CADD format.
- Value for money.
- Tenderer’s resources.
- Tenderer’s current commitments.
- Tenderer’s previous performance.
- Industrial relations and safety records.
Qualifications: Tenders containing unauthorised alterations, additions or qualifications may be
rejected.
Unpriced items: Costs relating to items not priced will be assumed to have been included elsewhere in
the tender.
Correction of errors in tenders >
State procedures e.g. “Correction of errors in priced bills of quantities is not permitted”. See AS 2124 clause 4.3, AS 4000
clause 2.3. If correction is not permitted, the preferred tenderer (in error) is given the choice of confirming or withdrawing his/her
offer. If correction is permitted, the preferred tenderer is given the choice of confirming or correcting genuine errors in his/her
offer. The choice, and corrections, should all be in writing. In either case, if the tenderer confirms the offer, the priced bill (if any)
should be endorsed to the effect that all rates or prices (except preliminary items and provisional sums) are reduced or
increased in the same proportion as the corrected total. The endorsement should be signed by both parties to the contract.
Arithmetical evaluation of tenders should be confidential; for larger projects a quantity surveyor should be used, particularly
where priced bills are submitted.
Additional information
General: If required, submit additional information, by the stipulated date and time, to allow further
consideration of the tender before any tender is accepted. Failure to meet this requirement may result
in the tender being rejected.
NATSPEC vi [Insert date]

TENDERING GENERAL
Confidentiality
General: Treat as confidential any information provided after the tender period.
Acceptance of tender
Non-acceptance: The principal is not bound to accept the lowest or any tender, nor to give reasons.
Establish and document reasons for non-acceptance, particularly where the lowest tender is not accepted (unlikely except in
public tenders).
Acceptance: A tender is not accepted until notice in writing of acceptance is:
- Handed to the tenderer.
- Sent by prepaid post to, or left at, the address for service of notices stated in the Tender form.
- Transmitted by facsimile to the tenderer’s facsimile number.
The date of acceptance of tender may be contractually significant. See, for example, AS 2124 clauses 5.4, 5.10, 6.2 and 33.1,
and AS 4000 clauses 6 and 32.
Partial acceptance: Tenders may be accepted for the whole of the work or for the following specific
worksections: >
Include if worksections of work may be awarded separately and state what contracts may be awarded separately.
Formal instrument of agreement: Required.
This paragraph exercises the option in AS 2124 clause 6.2 and AS 4000 clause 6, which describes the procedure for
preparation and execution. AS 2127 is the matching form of the formal instrument of agreement. See also AS 2124 clause 6.1.
Delete the paragraph if not required, or where ABIC MW-1 or ABIC SW-1 are used.
Arrangements for return of tender documents
>
Terms of refund of tender documents deposit:
>
Terms of refund of tender documents deposit: e.g. return of tender documents undamaged within 2 weeks of notification of
acceptance of tender.
Period between acceptance of tender and possession of site
Anticipated maximum period: >
Delete if date for possession is given elsewhere.
NATSPEC vii [Insert date]

TENDERING GENERAL
2 TENDER FORM
Name of principal
Name of project
Tender
I/We tender to perform the work for the above project as described in, and in accordance with, the
tender documents referenced in the Conditions of tendering and in accordance with the attached
Schedule of rates/Contract sum analysis/priced Bills of quantities and for the lump sum (which
includes specified provisional sums) of
…………………………………………………………………….. including GST (sum in words and figures)
The contract duration will be ....................................................weeks from the date of site possession.
This tender remains open for consideration for ........................weeks from the date and time of closing
of the tender period.
I/We acknowledge the receipt of addenda numbered .......................................during the tender period.
Name of tenderer
ABN/ACN
Telephone
Facsimile
Tenderer’s address or registered business
office address
Address for service of notices
Tenderer’s bank and branch address
Execution if tenderer is an individual or
unincorporated body
Tenderer’s signature
Witness’ signature
Execution of tenderer is a company
The common seal of the tenderer was affixed in
accordance with the Articles of Association
Director’s signature
Secretary’s signature
OR
Authorised officer’s signature
Witness’ signature
Date of tender
Customise the form to suit the project, before issuing. Leave in keywords and relevant instructions to tenderers. Tenderers may
retype the form. See also the subclause Tender form, in the Conditions of tendering, which gives further instructions to
tenderers.
Name of principal
Specifier to complete. Offer is to the principal.
Name of project
Specifier to complete.
Tender
Tender documents may need to be listed, by the specifier, in their entirety. See AS 2125 for example.
Specifier to edit costing information requirements initially. Options include the following:
NATSPEC viii [Insert date]

TENDERING GENERAL
• Lump sum only.

• Lump sum and one of Schedule of rates, Contract sum analysis or Bills of quantities.
• Schedule of rates only.
Lump sum prompt is to be completed by tenderers. GST will be identified and levied progressively as work is completed.
Specifier may delete contract duration prompt or pre-complete if the period is specified, or leave blank if tenderers are to
nominate a period.
Specifier may delete tender validity period prompt or pre-complete if the period is specified, or leave blank if tenderers are to
nominate a period.
On the GST refer to RAIA Advisory Note AN02.04.604.
Addenda prompt to be completed by tenderers. Extensions of the tender period should also be acknowledged.
Name of tenderer, etc.
To be completed by tenderers. Offer is from the tenderer.
Tenderer’s bank and branch address
If a bond is sought by the principal as surety, the identity of sureties, the sum of the bond, and the amount in the tender sum for
the provision of the bond, may need to be stated here.
Date of tender
The date of the tender may be contractually significant.
NATSPEC ix [Insert date]

PRELIMINARIES GENERAL
PRELIMINARIES
This worksection is applicable to the general requirements of the owner and allows for the selection of a contract. The project
specific version may include site security arrangements, occupancy constraints, adjoining properties constraints, owner's site
office and other temporary facilities, project signage, provisional sums, requirements for progress photographs, authority
requirements, survey requirements, owner-supplied items, separate contracts, some aspects of cost adjustment, and pest
eradication.
Related material located elsewhere in NATSPEC
For example Preliminaries for the following contracts have also been prepared:
• ABIC MW-1 – Major works contract.
• ABIC SW-1 – Simple works contract.
• AS 2124 – General conditions of contract.
• AS 4905 – Minor works contract conditions (Superintendent administered).
Worksection(s) on which this worksection relies
The following worksections must be included, with this worksection, to provide a complete specification:
• None.
Material not included in NATSPEC
Some projects may include items not covered by NATSPEC. For these you may need to create new text, modify this text or use
an applicable worksection. For example:
• On incorporation of the owner’s policies (e.g. apprentice employment, prohibition of smoking, union labour employment,
existing site allowances, procurement policies, insurance arrangements), see RAIA Advisory Note AN15.01.603 (the
standard preliminaries of many public works authorities include clauses on policy - this worksection includes some prompts
but no text).
• The contractor’s preliminaries are not included (e.g. scaffolds, lunch sheds, cranes, site security) except where these relate
to ‘persons other than contractor’ (who may be either separate contractors or persons identified by the architect who
become subcontractors).
Worksection cross referencing
Other worksections that cross reference this worksection are:
• None.
Documenting this and related work
You may document this and related work as follows:
• An outline description of the works should be located in the contract and the contract documents should be listed.
• Consider incorporating development approval conditions that are the responsibility of the Contractor.
• This worksection should be read in the context of the general conditions of contract, any special conditions of contract, and
any separately specified quality assurance requirements.
See also the Commentary.
1 GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
General conditions
Contract: >
Insert the name of the contract selected for the project.
This reference properly belongs in the Tendering worksection. Include here if Tendering is not used.
Interpretation
General: The words “principal”, and “contract administrator” have the same meaning, respectively, as
“owner” and “architect”, unless the context requires otherwise.
The selected contract form may use the terms “architect”, “owner”, and “contractor”, as does this NATSPEC Preliminaries
material. Edit this worksection to suit the selected contract .If the terms “owner” and “architect” are used in the selected contract

and are also used throughout the project specification (e.g. by global change to the NATSPEC worksections), this clause is
unnecessary and should be deleted. However, NATSPEC technical worksections use the terms “principal” and “contract
administrator”, as these have more general application.
Cross reference: The clause Interpretation, in the General requirements worksection, also applies.
1.2 THE SITE

See the selected contract section on the site.
Site restrictions
Entry permits: Make available, to persons entering designated secure areas, valid entry permits.
Ensure these persons comply with conditions of entry.
For high security projects only. Delete default security arrangements if not required.
Designated secure areas: >
Show the area (which may be the whole site) on the drawings, or describe here if this is straightforward.
Conditions of entry: >
e.g. Identification, security checks and the like, imposed by the owner.
List: At least 10 working days before entry is required, submit the full name, address, and date and
place of birth of persons required to enter designated secure areas.
- Purpose of submission: Review.
The specified 10 working day period is arbitrary - vary as required.
Site limitations: Comply with the following restrictions on the use of the site:
>
If not shown on the drawings, give details of easements, restrictions arising out of the actions of adjoining land owners,
limitations related to continued occupancy by the owner, toxic ground conditions and the like, including maximum noise levels
and hours of work not covered by local authority conditions (dealt with under Miscellaneous, below). See also the
Commentary.
Access: Access on to and within the site, use of the site for temporary works and constructional plant,
including working and storage areas, location of offices, workshops, sheds, roads and parking, is
restricted to the following areas:
>
e.g. “Shown on drawing A001”, “To be determined”.
Occupied premises
Refer also to clauses of the selected contract on possession and access.
General: For the parts of the site designated as occupied premises in the Occupied premises
schedule:
- Allow occupants to continue in secure possession and occupancy of the premises for the required
period.
- Make available safe access for occupants.
- Arrange work to minimise nuisance to occupants and ensure their safety.
- Protect occupants against weather, dust, dirt, water or other nuisance, by such means as temporary
screens.
Proposals: Submit details of proposed methods.
- Purpose of submission: Information only.
Occupied premises schedule
Occupants Occupied premises Period of occupancy
Complete the schedule if the owner or occupants authorised by the owner will remain in possession of part of the site.

Occupants: e.g. “The owner”, “The owner’s ... department”, “The public”, or name other persons or organisations.
Occupied premises: Describe, or refer to marked areas on the drawings.
Period of occupancy: e.g. “Duration of the contract”.
No smoking policy >
Appropriate for work in occupied premises where the occupants are similarly constrained. Sometimes a standard owner’s policy
for all projects.
Protection of persons and property
Temporary works: Provide and maintain required barricades, guards, fencing, shoring, temporary
roadways, footpaths, signs, lighting, watching and traffic flagging.
Edit to complement local authority requirements scheduled in Authority conditions schedule under Miscellaneous, below.
This paragraph should describe the owner’s requirements only. The responsibility for these items is usually the contractor’s.
Public viewing area: >
Describe or locate on drawings.
Accessways, services: Do not obstruct or damage roadways and footpaths, drains and watercourses
and other existing services in use on or adjacent to the site. Determine the location of such services.
Delete if noted in the Authority conditions schedule.
Property: Do not interfere with or damage property which is to remain on or adjacent to the site,
including adjoining property encroaching onto the site, and trees.
Control of run off stormwater: >
Generally, the contractor’s responsibility. Delete or describe here any particular requirements of the owner.
Rectification
Accessways, services: Rectify immediately any obstruction or damage to roadways and footpaths,
drains and watercourses and other existing services in use on or adjacent to the site. Provide
temporary services whilst repairs are carried out.
Property: Rectify immediately any interference or damage to property which is to remain on or
adjacent to the site, including adjoining property encroaching onto the site, and trees.
Delete if rectification is included in the Authority conditions schedule.
Existing services
General: Attend to existing services as follows:
- If the service is to be continued, repair, divert or relocate as required. If the service crosses the line
of a required trench, or will lose support when the trench is excavated, provide permanent support
for the existing service.
- If the service is to be abandoned, cut and seal or disconnect, and make safe.
Proposals: Submit proposals for action to be taken with respect to existing services before starting this
work. Minimise the number and duration of interruptions.
- Purpose of submission: For review.
Adjoining property
Notice: At least 10 working days before commencing work, submit to owners and occupants of
adjoining property written notice of intention to commence work and an outline description of the type
and extent of work.
Conditions for work on adjoining property: >
The owner is responsible for obtaining permission from adjoining owners, including for work such as swinging crane jibs,
erection of scaffolding and construction of formwork. Describe any conditions that may have been agreed to by the owner.
Revealed encroachments: If the works reveal unknown encroachments of adjoining property on to the
site or of existing site structures on to adjoining property, immediately seek instructions.
Records: For properties described in the Adjoining properties to be recorded schedule:
- Inspect the properties with the architect and owners and occupants of the properties, before
commencement of work.
- Make detailed records of conditions existing within the properties, especially structural defects and
other damage or defacement.

- Arrange for at least 2 copies of each record, including drawings, written descriptions, and
photographs, to be endorsed by the owners and occupants, or their representatives, as evidence of
conditions existing before commencement of work.
See RAIA Advisory Note AN11.01.101 on project record keeping.
Endorsed copies: Submit one endorsed copy of each record. Keep the other endorsed copy on site.
Adjoining properties to be recorded schedule
Title Owner Description
Complete the schedule if there is danger of damage to adjoining property, including the owner’s own, and if precautionary
inspections and records need to be made. See RAIA Advisory Note AN13.01.102 on party walls, AN13.04.100 on inspections,
and AN18.01.401 on inadvertent building on adjoining property.
1.3 CONSTRUCTION PLANT

Access roads
Temporary roads: >
Include if the construction of temporary roads is required to protect or minimise damage to the owner’s property.
Owner’s existing roads: Use only designated roads.
- Location: >
Parking
Owner’s existing parking areas: Use only designated parking areas.
- Number of spaces: >
- Location: >
Indicate designated roads on the drawings. Proposals for control of traffic on the owner’s property by the contractor should be
submitted for review. Off-site traffic control needs authority approval - the contractor’s responsibility.
Use of existing services
General: Existing services may be used as temporary services for the performance of the contract
subject to conditions stated in the Existing services schedule.
Existing services schedule
Service Conditions of use
If existing services, including telephones or permanent building lighting, may be used for contract purposes, list them here and
state any conditions applying to their use, e.g. “The existing water service on the site, at no charge”, “Do not disrupt continuous
service to owner”, “Pay for connections”, “Provide separate metering and reimburse owner”, “Fully maintain the service”. You
may wish to clarify the situation after practical completion i.e. the owner is not liable for services, water, fuel used by the
contractor after this point.
Owner’s site office
General: Provide a weather-tight site office for the use of the owner or the owner’s agents before
major site operations are started and as follows:
- Pay charges for services.
- Maintain in good order and in clean condition, with secure access, for duration of the work.
- Obtain permission for removal.
- Remove on completion.

Vary as necessary to suit the circumstances. A standard drawing, if available, may be substituted for part or all of this item,
including the schedule. The subclause and schedule assume that only one office is required (i.e. the architect and other
consultants share with the clerk of works, if any - see RAIA Advisory Note AN16.01.101 on the Clerk of Works. ABIC MW-1
makes no mention of a Clerk of Works, however accordingly this Preliminaries assumes that there will not be one, since the role
of the Clerk of Works is not defined). The contractor need only provide what has been specified. Reformat as required.
Owner’s site office schedule
User: >
Floor area: >
Structure: >
Floor: >
Furniture and fittings: >
Desk, chairs, filing cabinet, set-out table, plan rack, locker, shelving, meeting table and chairs for six people.
Telephones: >
Facsimile: >
Modem: >
Services: >
Tea making facilities, evaporative cooler, fans, toilet facilities (any gender requirements), lights, power points, heater, walkie-
talkie, public address link-up and the like.
Signage: >
Security: >
Parking: >
Protective clothing
Safety helmets: Make available safety helmets for the use of visitors.
- Standard: To AS/NZS 1801, Type 1.
- StandardsMark: Required.
Number of helmets: >
Temporary services >
Temporary services are generally the business of the contractor. If it is necessary to specify particular requirements, do so here,
e.g. temporary services for owner’s facilities if construction activities interfere, power for testing, temporary distribution boards,
special lighting requirements, water for testing, metering and payments for services. Consider other temporary services, e.g.
gas, compressed air. Use of lift cars, new services, stairs and escalators (i.e. the works) may also need to be addressed -
generally not to be used without consent and protection, maintenance and restoration required.
Temporary fence >
Provide text only if a fence is required by the owner to secure occupied premises or the like. Normally site security is the
responsibility of the contractor. Specify in the Fences and external walls worksection for example, and cross-refer, or specify
here. A clause of this name does not exist as such in NATSPEC material. Requirements of regulatory authorities may conflict.
Note that hoardings are generally a local authority requirement and need not be specified in most circumstances.
Project signboards
General: Provide project-specific signboards and the following:
- Locate where directed.
- Maintain in good condition for duration of the work.
Other signboards: Obtain approval before display of advertisements or provision of other signboards.
Project signboard description
Best shown on the drawings. Components may be provided by the architect - modify as required.
Location: >
Size: >
Text, graphics: >
Insert, e.g. name of the project, the owner, contractor, architect, engineer, quantity surveyor.
Other details: >

1.4 BUILDING THE WORKS

Surveys
Edit Surveys if instructions are required additional to those in selected contract sections dealing with Owner’s obligations and
Contractor’s obligations e.g. employment of licensed surveyor to check tolerances of structural elements such as position of
columns, verticality of columns and facades, and floor levels. Also, provision of equipment and labour to assist checks by the
architect. See RAIA Advisory Note AN13.01.101.
Setting out: >
Check the selected contract. Additional information required here may include data and survey marks (pegs, bench marks etc.)
necessary for setting out. If this information is available, state how it can be obtained e.g. identify and supply the survey. If it is
not, state how it is to be provided by the owner e.g. source, timing, or leave it to the administering architect to sort out.
Check surveys: >
e.g. “Required”.
Final survey: >
Survey marks
Protection of the contractor’s survey marks is the contractor’s obligation. Check the selected contract.
Definition: The term “survey mark” means a survey peg, bench mark, reference mark, signal,
alignment, level mark or any other mark used or intended to be used for the purpose of setting out,
checking or measuring the work.
Care of survey marks: Preserve and maintain the owner’s survey marks in their true positions.
Rectification: If the owner’s survey marks are disturbed or obliterated, immediately give notice and
rectify the disturbance or obliteration.
Safety
Accidents: Promptly notify the architect of the occurrence of the following:
- Accidents involving death or personal injury.
- Accidents involving loss of time.
- Incidents with accident potential such as equipment failure, slides and cave-ins.
Accident reports: Submit reports of accidents.
Contractor's representative
General: Must be accessible, and fluent in English and technical terminology.
Subcontracting
General: Submit a complete list of proposed subcontractors and suppliers.
Program of work
Construction program: Show the following:
- Sequence of work.
- Activity inter-relationships.
Revise these submission requirements as necessary.
Time scale: Working days.
Updated program: Identify changes since the previous version, and show the estimated percentage of
completion for each item of work.
Program chart: Display in the contractor’s site office an up-to-date bar chart and network diagram
based on the construction program.

Order of work schedule

Portion of work Order of work Time of work
If it is necessary to direct the contractor to perform the works in a particular order, or to complete stages or parts of the work in a
particular sequence or at stated times, give the directions here. For example, the contractor will need to know the dates by
which different parts of an existing building will be vacated, or the beginning and end of the building “season” (if any) in a
national park or campus.
Alternatively, the directions may be given in the form of a construction program issued to the contractor as part of the contract
documents. Either way the requirements are contractual, unlike the program of work.
Site meetings
General: Hold and attend site meetings throughout the contract and ensure attendance of appropriate
subcontractors, the architect, and appropriate consultants.
Frequency: >
The frequency of meetings is best agreed by the architect and contractor, as being the most appropriate for the particular
project, and may vary. It is helpful if meetings coincide with the timing of progress claims, though not essential.
Minutes: Keep minutes of site meetings. Within 5 working days after each meeting, submit to each
party written copies of the minutes.
Delete if the architect is to take and distribute the minutes.
Contacts: At the first site meeting, submit names and telephone numbers of responsible persons who
may be contacted after hours during the course of the contract.
Progress photographs
General: Take colour progress photographs within 5 working days before each site meeting. At each
site meeting submit 2 sets of glossy prints, and the negatives or digital files. Identify the project, date,
time, location and orientation.
Delete this subclause if these will be taken by the architect or by a separate contractor. If the latter, list in ‘Persons other than
contractor’, below. Consider mounting, size, and a default number e.g. 2 site photographs from different directions, and 5
interior photographs.
Purpose of submission: Information only.
Minimum frequency: >
Minimum number: >
Format: >
Items supplied by owner
General: Materials and other items identified in the Items to be supplied schedule will be supplied
free of charge to the contractor for installation in the execution of the works. Unload and take delivery
of them, inspect them for defects and then take care of them. If defects are found, advise. Return
unused items to the owner.
Conditions of supply: >
Notice: >
Notice: For delivery of critical items under the control of the architect/owner (e.g. statues, electrical equipment). If there is not
adequate storage available, action may be required.

Items to be supplied schedule

Location Item Quantity Date
Date: Of delivery or availability, to permit preparation of program.

Changes to existing
General: At least 5 working days before changing the following existing items, give notice:
>
The items may be part of existing structures, services, survey marks, etc.
1.5 COMPLETION OF THE WORKS

Final cleaning
General: Before practical completion, clean throughout, including interior and exterior surfaces
exposed to view. Vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces. Clean debris from the site, roofs, gutters,
downpipes and drainage systems. Remove waste and surplus materials.
Samples: Remove non-incorporated samples, prototypes and sample panels.
Reinstatement
General: Before practical completion, clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of
temporary work and restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition.
Adjoining property
Evaluation: At practical completion, for properties described in the Adjoining properties to be
recorded schedule inspect the properties with the architect and owners and occupants of the
properties, recording any damage that has occurred since the pre-commencement inspection.
Pest eradication
General: Employ suitably qualified pest exterminators. At practical completion submit a certificate
stating that completed works are free of pest types identified in the Pest eradication treatments
schedule.
Pest eradication treatments schedule
Pest type to be treated Eradication method
e.g. “Exterminator’s recommendation”. On birds and buildings, see BDP EDG DES56.
Removal of plant
General: Within 10 working days after practical completion, remove temporary works and construction
plant no longer required. Remove the balance before the end of the defects liability period.
Separable parts
Further conditions: >
Check the selected contract allows for the inclusion of separable parts in practical completion.
There may be further conditions regarding separable parts not identified in the selected contract, which should therefore be
defined here.
1.6 PAYMENT FOR THE WORKS

Import costs
Include the following in the contract price only if risk of change is being taken by the owner. It is contrary to the policy of many
public sector authorities. In such cases, delete the entire clause.

Definition: Import costs include costs attributable to exchange rates, customs or import duty, and
primage of imported content of items purchased for incorporation in the works.
Adjustment: If there are changes in rates applying to import costs of items listed in the Import cost
adjustment schedule, add or deduct the amount of the difference to or from the contract sum, as
applicable.
Import cost adjustment schedule
Item Country of origin Import cost
Anticipated progress claims schedule

Adjust if necessary to align with the procedure for progress claims set out in the selected contract. Ideally the schedule will
address each trade or package, not just the total claim. This will be intimately linked to the program of work.
General: At commencement of the works, submit a schedule of anticipated progress claims which will
be made throughout the contract. Submit a revised schedule with each progress claim.
Progress claims
Break-down: With each progress claim, submit a statement of amounts claimed in respect of each
worksection or trade heading designated in the specification.
This subclause should be modified if there is a priced bill of quantities.
Purpose of submission: Review.
Method of measurement
General: In accordance with the principles of the Australian Standard Method of Measurement of
Building Works (ASMM).
Other civil engineering work: To AS 1181.
1.7 MISCELLANEOUS
Contractor and owner to observe confidentiality
Publicity: Do not issue information concerning the project for publication in the media without prior
written approval of the owner. Refer to the owner enquiries from the media concerning the project.
Check the selected contract. It may be optional.
Compliance with the law
Requirements of authorities: The owner, before entering into the contract, has given the notices, paid
the fees, and obtained the permits, approvals and other authorisations stated in the Prior
applications and approvals schedule.
On occupational health and safety requirements see RAIA Advisory Note AN14.01.102. The roles of private certifiers are not
covered in these Notes or in this Commentary, and vary between jurisdictions.
Prior applications and approvals schedule
Prior notices given and Fees paid Permits, approvals and
applications made authorisations received
List the applications made, e.g. “Building application to ... Council”, fees paid, and approvals received, e.g. “Building approval
dated ...”. See RAIA Advisory Note AN13.02.00.100 on local government and other authorities.
This information may also be provided in Tendering.

Authority conditions schedule

Authority Document Condition
Authorities commonly impose conditions governing noise, access, dust, hours of operation, inspections and traffic control. The
contractor is obliged by law to comply with environmental protection legislation and with local authority requirements. The
contract cannot interfere with that obligation, but may stipulate more stringent requirements for contract purposes. Consider
specifying any such requirements here in a separate schedule. Responsibility for conditions, if any, imposed by local authorities
needs to be resolved. Consider scheduling here those conditions which affect the contractor. Coordinate with Site limitations:
under Site restrictions, above. Ultimately, all the conditions are the responsibility of the applicant (owner) as far as the local
authorities are concerned.
NATSPEC x [Insert date]

PRELIMINARIES – ABIC MW-1 GENERAL
PRELIMINARIES – ABIC MW-1
This worksection is applicable to the general requirements of the owner. The project specific version may include site security
arrangements, occupancy constraints, adjoining properties constraints, owner’s site office and other temporary facilities, project
signage, provisional sums, requirements for progress photographs, authority requirements, survey requirements, owner-
supplied items, separate contracts, some aspects of cost adjustment, and pest eradication.
For example Preliminaries for the following contracts have also been prepared for:
• None.
but no text).
become subcontractors).
• None.
• An outline description of the works should be located in the Introduction to ABIC MW-1 at Item 6, and the listing of contract
documents, should be located in the Schedules to ABIC MW-1 at Schedule 3 Order of precedence of contract documents.
1 GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
General conditions
Contract: To ABIC MW-1 Australian Building Industry Contract – Major works contract, issued by the
Royal Australian Institute of Architects and Master Builders Association.
This information is included in the Tendering worksection. If Tendering is included in the project specification omit this
subclause.
Interpretation
See ABIC MW-1 Section S Definitions.
General: The words “principal”, and “contract administrator” have the same meaning, respectively, as
“owner” and “architect”, unless the context requires otherwise.

The ABIC MW-1 forms use the terms “architect”, “owner”, and “contractor”, as does this NATSPEC Preliminaries material. If the
terms “owner” and “architect” are also used throughout the project specification (e.g. by global change to the NATSPEC
worksections), this clause is unnecessary and should be deleted. However, NATSPEC technical worksections use the terms
“principal” and “contract administrator”, as these have more general application.
1.2 THE SITE

See ABIC MW-1 Section F The site.
Site restrictions
For high security projects only. Delete default security arrangements if not required.
Identification, security checks and the like, imposed by the owner.
Personnel: At least 10 working days before entry is required, submit the full name, address, and date
and place of birth of persons required to enter designated secure areas.
The specified 10 working day period is arbitrary - vary as required.
>
limitations related to continued occupancy by the owner, toxic ground conditions and the like, including maximum noise levels
and hours of work not covered by local authority conditions in the Authority conditions schedule below. See also the
Commentary.
Access: Access on to and within the site, use of the site for temporary works and constructional plant,
>
Occupied premises
Refer also to ABIC MW-1 clauses F1 and F2 on possession of and access to the site.
schedule:
period.
screens.

No smoking policy >
for all projects.
Rectification
Existing services
Adjoining property
and extent of work.
See RAIA Advisory Note AN11.01.101 on project records.


Access roads
Temporary roads: >
Include, if the construction of temporary roads is required to protect or minimise damage to the owner’s property.
Owner’s existing roads: Use only designated roads.
- Location: >
Parking
Owner’s existing parking areas: Use only designated parking areas.
- Location: >
Indicate designated roads on the drawings. Proposals for control of traffic on the owner’s property by the contractor should be
submitted for review. Off-site traffic control needs authority approval - the contractor’s responsibility.
Owner’s site office
General: Provide a weather-tight site office for the use of the owner or the owner’s agents before
major site operations are started and as follows:
including the schedule. The subclause and schedule assume that only one office is required (i.e. the architect and other
consultants share with the Clerk of Works, if any - see RAIA Advisory Note AN16.01.101 on the Clerk of Works. ABIC MW-1

makes no mention of a Clerk of Works, however accordingly this Preliminaries assumes that there will not be one, since the role
of the Clerk of Works is not defined). The contractor need only provide what has been specified. Reformat as required.
Owner’s site office schedule
User: >
Floor area: >
Structure: >
Floor: >
Telephones: >
Facsimile: >
Modem: >
Services: >
Tea making facilities, evaporative cooler, fans, toilet facilities (any gender requirements), lights, power points, heater, walkie-
talkie, public address link-up and the like.
Signage: >
Security: >
Parking: >
Protective clothing
generally not to be used without consent and protection, maintenance and restoration required.
Temporary fence >
Project signboards
General: Provide project-specific signboards and the following:
Best shown on the drawings. Components may be provided by the architect - modify as required.
Location: >
Size: >
Text, graphics: >
Other details: >


See ABIC MW-1 Section G Building the works.
Surveys
Edit Surveys if instructions are required additional to those in ABIC MW-1 clause G1 Owner’s obligations and G2 Contractor’s
obligations e.g. employment of licensed surveyor to check tolerances of structural elements such as position of columns,
verticality of columns and facades, and floor levels. Also, provision of equipment and labour to assist checks by the architect.
See RAIA Advisory Note AN13.01.101 on survey information.
Setting out: >
Mentioned in ABIC MW-1 clause G1 and G2. Information required may include data and survey marks (pegs, bench marks etc.)
Check surveys: >
Final survey: >
Survey marks
Inferred in ABIC MW-1 clause G1. Protection of the contractor’s survey marks is the contractor’s business.
Safety
Health and safety is mentioned in ABIC MW-1 clause G2 the Contractor’s obligations.
Subcontracting
See ABIC MW-1 clause G4 Subcontracting.
Program of work
- Sequence of work.
Revise these submission requirements as necessary.
See ABIC MW-1 clause G6 on the Contractor updating his program.

national park or campus. Alternatively, the directions may be given in the form of a construction program issued to the
contractor as part of the contract documents. Either way the requirements are contractual, unlike the program of work.
Site meetings
Frequency: >
General: Take colour progress photographs within 5 working days before each site meeting. At each
site meeting submit 2 sets of glossy prints, and the negatives or digital files. Identify the project, date,
time, location and orientation.
Delete this subclause if these will be taken by the architect or by a separate contractor. If the latter, list in ‘Persons other than
contractor’, below. Consider mounting, size, and a default number e.g. 2 site photographs from different directions, and 5
interior photographs.
Minimum number: >
Format: >
Notice: >
For delivery of critical items under the control of the architect/owner (e.g. statues, electrical equipment). If there is not adequate
storage available, action may be required.



Changes to existing
General: At least 5 working days before changing the following existing items, give notice >

See ABIC MW-1 Section M Completion of the works.
Final cleaning
Reinstatement
Adjoining property
Pest eradication
schedule.
e.g. “Exterminator’s recommendation”. On birds and buildings, see BDP EDG DES56.
Removal of plant
Separable parts
Further conditions: >
See ABIC MW-1 clauses M1.3, M8 and M9, and Schedule 1 at Item 21 on Completion of the works. There may be further
conditions regarding separable parts not identified in ABIC MW-1, which should therefore be defined here.

Import costs
See ABIC MW-1 clause N1 Contract price. Include only if risk of change is being taken by the owner. It is contrary to the policy
of many public sector authorities. In such cases, delete the entire clause.

applicable.
Anticipated progress claims

Progress claims
Break-down: With each progress claim, submit a statement of amounts claimed in respect of each
This subclause should be modified if there is a priced bill of quantities. Bills of quantities are referred to under Section H, Claims
to adjust the contract.
1.7 MISCELLANEOUS
See ABIC MW-1 Section R Miscellaneous.
Compliance with the law
See ABIC MW-1 clause R9 on Compliance with the law. On occupational health and safety requirements see RAIA Advisory
Note AN14.01.102. This may be covered by ABIC MW-1 clause G2 Contractor’s obligations. The roles of private certifiers are
not covered in these Instructions or in this Commentary, and vary between jurisdictions.



PRELIMINARIES – ABIC SW-1 GENERAL
PRELIMINARIES – ABIC SW-1
This worksection is applicable to the general requirements of the owner. The project specific version may include site security
arrangements, occupancy constraints, adjoining properties constraints, owner’s site office and other temporary facilities, project
signage, provisional sums, requirements for progress photographs, authority requirements, survey requirements, owner-
supplied items, separate contracts, some aspects of cost adjustment, and pest eradication.
Preliminaries for the following contracts have also been prepared for:
• None.
A number of topics are not covered by this worksection but may need to be considered.
but no text).
become subcontractors). See ABIC SW-1 clause K3 – Architect may instruct contractor to use particular person for
provisional or prime cost sum.
Worksection cross-referencing
• None.
• An outline description of the works, and the schedule of contract documents, should be located in Item 5 The works of the
Introduction to ABIC SW-1 and Schedule 3 Order of precedence of contract documents, respectively.
• This worksection should be read in the context of the general conditions of contract, any special conditions of contract
(including state variation), and any separately specified quality assurance requirements.
1 GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
See ABIC SW-1 Section A Overview.
General conditions
General: To ABIC SW-1 (2002) Simple Works Contract, issued by the Royal Australian Institute of
Architects and Master Builders Association.
This information is included in the Tendering worksection. If Tendering is included in the project specification omit this
subclause.
Interpretation
See ABIC SW-1 Section S Definitions.
General: The words “principal”, and “contract administrator”, have the same meaning, respectively, as
“owner”, and “architect”, unless the context requires otherwise.
The ABIC forms use the terms architect, owner, and contractor, as does this NATSPEC Preliminaries material. If the terms
“owner” and “architect” are also used throughout the project specification (e.g. by global change to the NATSPEC Template),
this clause is unnecessary and should be deleted. However, NATSPEC technical worksections use the terms “principal” and
“contract administrator”, as these have more general application.
1.2 THE SITE

See ABIC SW-1 Item 6 Architect to administer contract of the Introduction and Section F The site.
Site restrictions
>
e.g. Jackhammer and compressor silencing may need to be stipulated. See AS 2436, on construction site noise control. On
excavation, for example, see RAIA Advisory Note AN16.09.401.
Access: Access onto and within the site, use of the site for temporary works and constructional plant,
>
Occupied premises
Refer also to ABIC SW-1 clauses F1 Owner to give contractor possession of the site and F2 Contractor’s obligations in relation
to the site on possession and access.
schedule:
period.
screens.
No smoking policy >
for all projects.

Rectification
Existing services
Adjoining property
and extent of work.
See RAIA Advisory Note AN11.01.101 on project records.


Protective clothing
special lighting requirements, water for testing, metering and payments for services.
Temporary fence >
Project signboards
General: Provide project-specific signboards and as follows:
Best shown on the drawings. Components may be provided by the architect modify as required.
Location: >
Size: >
Text, graphics: >
Other details: >

See ABIC SW-1 Section G Building the works.
Surveys
Edit Surveys if instructions are required additional to those in ABIC SW-1 clause G2 e.g. employment of licensed surveyor to
check tolerances of structural elements such as position of columns, verticality of columns and facades, and floor levels. Also,

provision of equipment and labour to assist checks by the architect. See RAIA Advisory Note AN13.01.101 on survey
information.
Setting out: >
Mentioned in ABIC SW-1 clause G2. Information required may include data and survey marks (pegs, bench marks etc.)
Survey marks
Inferred in ABIC SW-1 clause G2. Protection of the contractor’s survey marks is the contractor’s business.
Safety
Health and safety is mentioned in ABIC SW-1 clause G2 The contractor’s obligations while building the works.
Subcontracting
See ABIC SW-1 clause G4 Subcontracting.
Program of work
- Sequence of work.
Revise default submission requirements as necessary.
See ABIC SW-1 clause G6.1 Contractor to give an updated program.

national park or campus. Alternatively, the directions may be given in the form of a construction program issued to the
contractor as part of the contract documents. Either way the requirements are contractual, unlike the program of work.
Site meetings
Frequency: >
Notice: >
For delivery of critical items under the control of the architect/owner (e.g. statues, electrical equipment). If there is not adequate
storage available, action may be required.

Changes to existing
Notice: At least 5 working days before changing the following existing items, give notice:
>

See ABIC SW-1 Section M Completion of the works.
Final cleaning
Lamp and filter replacement, and the like, is dealt with in the various SERVICES worksections.
Reinstatement

Adjoining property
Pest eradication
schedule.
e.g. “Exterminator’s recommendation”. On birds and buildings, see BDP EDG Note DES56.
Removal of plant

See ABIC SW-1 Section N Payment for the works. It is assumed that the contingency sum is reserved outside the contract.
Import costs
See ABIC SW-1 clause N1Contract price. Include only if risk of change is being taken by the owner. It is contrary to the policy of
many public sector authorities. In such cases, delete the entire clause.
applicable.
Anticipated progress payments

See ABIC SW-1 clauses N3-N15. Ideally the schedule will address each trade or package, not just the total claim. This will be
intimately linked to the program of work.
Progress claims
Break down: With each progress claim, submit a statement of amounts claimed in respect of each
This subclause should be modified if there is a priced bill of quantities (not apparently anticipated in ABIC SW-1).
1.7 MISCELLANEOUS
See ABIC SW-1 Section R Miscellaneous.
Governing law
See ABIC SW-1 clause R8 Governing law. On occupational health and safety requirements see RAIA Advisory Note
AN14.01.102. This may be covered by ABIC SW-1 clause G2 Contractor’s obligations. The roles of private certifiers are not
covered in these Notes or in this Commentary, and vary between jurisdictions.
See ABIC SW-1 clause A4 Obligations of owner. The owner is obliged to obtain and provide to the contractor, any statutory
approvals required to build the works.

PRELIMINARIES – AS 2124 GENERAL
PRELIMINARIES – AS 2124
This worksection is applicable to the general requirements of the principal. The project specific version may include site security
arrangements, occupancy constraints, adjoining properties constraints, principal’s site office and other temporary facilities,
project signage, provisional sums, requirements for progress photographs, authority requirements, survey requirements,
principal-supplied items, separate contracts, some aspects of cost adjustment, and pest eradication.
Preliminaries for the following contracts have also been prepared:
• None.
A number of topics are not covered by this worksection but may need to be considered:
• On incorporation of the principal’s policies (e.g. apprentice employment, prohibition of smoking, union labour employment,
but no text).
• On security of payment, AS 2124 Amdt. No.1 directs that expert advice be sought on any relevant jurisdiction legislation.
• This worksection does not cover contractor’s preliminaries (e.g. scaffolds, lunch sheds, cranes, site security) except where
these relate to selected subcontractors.
• None.
• The location and general description of the works should be given only on the tender form (e.g. AS 2125). There is no
provision for it to be given elsewhere. AS 2124 seems to take the view that a short contractual description may be more
trouble than it’s worth - due to potential conflict with the scope of works as defined by the totality of the contract documents.
1 GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
General conditions
General: To AS 2124, General conditions of contract, published by SAI Global.
This subclause is optional - the reference is usually from the general conditions to the specification. This reference properly
belongs in Tendering (see AS 2125) and the Form of agreement (AS 2127), and does not need to be repeated. Similarly the
schedule of contract documents should be covered in these other documents, and not here as well.
Interpretation
General: The word “contract administrator” has the same meaning as “superintendent”.
AS 2124 uses the term “superintendent”. If the term “superintendent” is used throughout the project specification (e.g. by global
change to the NATSPEC Template), this clause is unnecessary and should be deleted. However, NATSPEC technical
worksections use the term “contract administrator” as this has more general application.

1.2 SELECTED AND NOMINATED SUBCONTRACTORS

See AS 2124 clause 10 Selected and nominated subcontractors. Clause 9 Assignment and subcontracting deals with approvals
of general subcontractors for work identified in Annexure A – note clause 9.2 paragraph 3 – any global requirements could be
stipulated here.
Nominated subcontract work
If nominated subcontractors or suppliers are known at tender, the nominations may be included in the tender and contract
documents. Nominated subcontractors to be assigned or novated to the contractor should be identified in the tender documents
(see AS 2124 clause 10.3, paragraphs 2 and 3). Note AS 2124 clause 10.4 paragraph 3, on contractor responsibility for design
or suitability.
Facilities: Refer to nominated subcontract documentation.
See AS 2124 clause 10.3 paragraph 4, and AS 2545 clause 47 and Annexure A Services and facilities. Supplement as
necessary e.g. site access, storage areas, additional “attendance”, cranage, cleaning up, protection, car parking, safe working,
other temporary services, temporary supports.
Contractor/nominated subcontractor interfaces: Refer to nominated subcontract documentation.
Separate contracts
Work concurrent to this contract: The following works on site, to be executed by persons engaged by
the principal, are not included in this contract:
>
List here separate works by entities such as artists, special tradesmen and their assistants, the site photographer and the like.
Do this only if there would otherwise be ambiguity e.g. something necessarily shown on the drawings such as equipment
installed “by others” or designated “not in contract” which could be mistaken for part of this contract.
Work before this contract: >
Work subsequent to this contract: >
Work before this contract: and Work subsequent to this contract: Only if necessary for clarification and then only if not covered
elsewhere. Demolition is an example of the former. The latter is important where the present contract includes provision for
future installations, additions and the like.
1.3 PROVISIONAL SUMS

See AS 2124 clause 11.
Provisional sums
General: Provisional sums identified in the Provisional sums schedule are for purposes stated in
relevant worksections of the specification.
If bills of quantities are used, this information should be located there, in which case delete this subclause (but include a
reference).Try to avoid using provisional sums. They may be used for dealing with the work of nominated subcontractors and
suppliers. Try also to avoid the use of provisional quantities. There is no provision for them in AS 2124 (but see the definition of
“Schedule of Rates” in AS 2124 clause 2 Interpretation). Valuation would also need to be resolved. See also the Commentary.
Provisional sums schedule
Item Where specified Provisional sum ($)
Item: The list may include the contingency sum, if any, although many principals require that this element of the budget is not
revealed to the contractor. Refer to RAIA Advisory Note AN16.05.101 on financial control. Identify each item by quoting the
specification clause title which refers to it. The sums themselves should only be scheduled here.
1.4 LATENT CONDITIONS


General
General: Other conditions which are latent conditions:
>
List here any other conditions to be regarded as latent conditions. See AS 2124 clause 12.1(b) Definition. SAA HB42 includes a
pro-forma for clause 12.2 Notification.
1.5 PATENTS, COPYRIGHT AND OTHER INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS

See AS 2124 clause 13. Patents, copyright and other intellectual property rights.
General
Infringement: >
The principal warrants that there are no infringements “unless otherwise provided in the Contract” – identify them here, if any, or
in the relevant technical worksection. This clause should be rarely used.
1.6 STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS

See AS 2124 clause 14 Statutory requirements.
Requirements of authorities
General: The principal, before entering into the contract, has given the notices, paid the fees, and
obtained the permits, approvals and other authorisations stated in the Prior applications and
approvals schedule.
On occupational health and safety requirements see RAIA Advisory Note AN14.01.102. This may be covered by AS 2124
clause 14.1 Complying with statutory requirements. . The roles of private certifiers are not covered in these Notes or in this
Commentary, and vary between jurisdictions.
dated ...”. This may be of limited application to projects in the public sector. See AS 2124 clause 14.1, last paragraph.
Responsibility for conditions, if any, imposed by local authorities needs to be resolved. Consider scheduling here those
conditions which affect the contractor. It is suggested that the superintendent should incorporate authorities’ requirements in the
documents as far as possible. Coordinate with Site limitations: under Site restrictions, below. Ultimately, all the conditions are
the responsibility of the applicant (principal) as far as the local authorities are concerned.
1.7 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY

See AS 2124 clause 15 Protection of people and property.
General
Occupied premises
If premises are occupied, the selection of the insurance alternative in AS 2124 clauses 18 Insurance of the works and 19 Public
liability insurance will be affected - in most circumstances it would be sensible for the principal to insure (second alternative); the

principal should obtain advice. Do not give advice on insurance matters. Note that some domestic policies void automatically
during construction.
schedule:
- Permit occupants to continue in secure possession and occupancy of the premises for the required
period.
screens.
Complete the schedule if the principal or occupants authorised by the principal will remain in possession of part of the site.
Occupants: e.g. “The principal”, “The principal’s ... department”, “The public”, or name other persons or organisations.
No smoking policy >
Appropriate for work in occupied premises where the occupants are similarly constrained. Sometimes a standard principal’s
policy for all projects.
Safety
Accidents: Promptly notify the superintendent of the occurrence, of the following:
Accidents: and Accident reports: The contractor is subject to stringent public and occupational health and safety law. Delete the
clause if it is not considered appropriate. See also the Commentary
Access roads
Temporary roads: >
If construction of temporary roads is required to protect or minimise damage to the principal’s property.
Principal’s existing roads: Use only designated roads.
- Location: >
Indicate designated roads on the drawings. Proposals for control of traffic on the principal’s property by the contractor should be
submitted for review. Off-site traffic control needs authority approval – the contractor’s responsibility.
Protective clothing
- Standards: To AS/NZS 1801, Type 1.

1.8 CARE OF THE WORK AND REINSTATEMENT OF DAMAGE/DAMAGE TO PERSONS AND

PROPERTY OTHER THAN THE WORKS
See AS 2124 clauses 16 Care of the work and reinstatement of property and 17 Damage to persons and property other than the
works.
General
Damage to services: Do not obstruct or damage roadways and footpaths, drains and watercourses
Rectify immediately any obstruction or damage to such services and provide temporary services whilst
repairs are carried out.
Damage to property: Do not interfere with or damage property which is to remain on or adjacent to the
site, including adjoining property encroaching onto the site, and trees. Rectify immediately any
interference or damage to such property.
Existing services
- If the service is to be continued, repair, divert or relocate as required. If such a service crosses the
line of a required trench, or will lose support when the trench is excavated, provide permanent
support for the existing service.
Adjoining property
Notice: At least 14 days before commencing work, submit to owners and occupants of adjoining
property written notice of intention to commence work and an outline description of the type and extent
of work.
The principal may have obtained permission from adjoining owners, including for work such as swinging crane jibs, erection of
scaffolding and construction of formwork. Some indication of the type and extent of the work may therefore already have been
given by the principal.
- Inspect the properties with the superintendent and owners and occupants of the properties, prior to
and on completion of the works.
- At the initial inspection, make detailed records of conditions existing within the properties, especially
structural defects and other damage or defacement.
See RAIA Advisory Note AN11.01.101.
Complete the schedule if there is danger of damage to adjoining property, including the principal’s own, and if precautionary
inspections and records need to be made. See RAIA Advisory Note AN13.01.102 for party walls, AN13.04.100 for inspections,

Reinstatement
General: Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work and restore
existing facilities used during construction to original condition.
An expansion of AS 2124 clause 16.2 Reinstatement. Delete if considered redundant.
Excepted risks >
Excepted risks are referred to at AS 2124 clause 16.3(b) Excepted risks.
1.9 CLERK OF WORKS AND INSPECTORS

See AS 2124 clause 22 Clerk of works and inspectors.
Identity: If not known, state “To be advised”, or delete. AS 2124 seems to anticipate that this notice will be provided during the
course of the contract.
Identity and functions of the superintendent’s representative may also be defined in the preliminaries - see AS 2124 clause 24
Superintendent’s representative, paragraph 2.
Clerk of works
Identity: >
Inspectors
Identity: >
1.10 SITE
See AS 2124 clause 27 Site.
Access
Not including clerk of works, inspectors, separate contracts (persons engaged to execute work). If not known, state “To be
advised”.
General: Further to AS 2124 clause 27.2, the following persons require, and are authorised to have,
access to the work: >
Delivery before possession >
AS 2124 clause 27.3 Delivery of materials to and work on site before possession permits such delivery only with approval.
Site restrictions
For high security projects only.
Identification, security checks and the like, imposed by the principal.
List: At least 14 days before entry is required, submit the full name, address, and date and place of
birth of persons required to enter designated secure areas.
The specified 14 day period is arbitrary – vary as required.
>
limitations related to continued occupancy by the principal, toxic ground conditions and the like, including maximum noise levels
and hours of work not covered by local authority conditions. Jackhammer and compressor silencing may need to be stipulated,
for example. See AS 2436 on construction site noise control. On excavation, for example, see RAIA Advisory Note
AN16.09.401.
Exemptions to the general requirements of AS 2124 clause 27.4 Use of site by contractor should also be given.
Restrictions: Access on to and around the site, and use of the site for temporary works and
constructional plant, including working and storage areas, location of offices, workshops, sheds, roads
and parking is restricted to the following areas:
>

1.11 SETTING OUT THE WORKS

See AS 2124 clause 28 Setting out the works. Survey marks other than those necessary to set out the works should also be
“specified” (clause 28.1).
Surveys
Use if instructions are required additional to those in AS 2124 clause 28.1 Setting out e.g. employment of licensed surveyor to
check tolerances of structural elements such as position of columns, verticality of columns and facades, and floor levels. Also,
provision of equipment and labour to assist checks by the superintendent. See RAIA Advisory Note AN13.01.101. SAA HB31 is
a useful collection of extracts from standards dealing with building construction tolerances.
Setting out: >
Check surveys: >
Final survey: >
1.12 MATERIALS, LABOUR AND CONSTRUCTIONAL PLANT

See AS 2124 clause 29 Materials, labour and construction plant.
Apprentice employment policy >
Public sector principals, in particular, commonly have such a policy and require that it be stated in the preliminaries. There is no
clear consensus on inclusion of policy in the preliminaries.
Principal’s site office
Provide a weather-tight site office for the use of the principal or the principal’s nominees before major
site operations are started and include the following:
including the schedule.
The subclause and schedule assume that only one office is required (i.e. the superintendent and other consultants share with
the clerk of works, if any – see RAIA Advisory Note AN16.01.101 no reference to AS 2124). The contractor need only provide
what has been specified. Reformat as required.
Principal’s site office schedule
User: >
Floor area: >
Structure: >
Floor: >
Telephones: >
Facsimile: >
Services: >
Tea making facilities, evaporative cooler, fans, toilet facilities (any gender requirements?), lights, power points, heater, walkie-
talkie, public address link-up.
Signage: >
Security: >
Parking: >
e.g. temporary services for principal’s facilities if construction activities interfere, power for testing, temporary distribution boards,

generally, not to be used without consent, and protection, maintenance and restoration required.
Temporary fence >
Provide text only if a fence is required by the principal to secure occupied premises or the like. Normally site security is the
responsibility of the contractor.
Specify in the Fences and external walls worksection, and cross-refer, or specify here. A clause of this name does not exist as
such in NATSPEC material. Requirements of regulatory authorities may conflict. Note that hoardings are generally a local
authority requirement and need not be specified in most circumstances.
Existing services may be used as temporary services for the performance of the contract subject to
conditions stated in the Existing services schedule.
service to principal”, “Pay for connections”, “Provide separate metering and reimburse principal”, “Fully maintain the service”.
You may wish to clarify the situation after practical completion i.e. the principal is not liable for services, water, fuel used by the
Parking
Principal’s existing parking areas: Use only designated parking areas.
- Location: >
Project signboard
Provide project-specific signboards:
- Obtain written permission for removal.
Project signboard schedule
Best shown on the drawings. Components may be provided by the superintendent - modify as required.
Location: >
Size: >
Text, graphics: >
Insert, e.g. name of the project, the principal, contractor, superintendent, engineer, quantity surveyor.
Other details: >
Product particulars schedule
Items Particulars required
Stipulate items (e.g. mechanical plant), and particulars required (e.g. performance characteristics), further to AS 2124 clause
29.3 - if any. Coordinate with mechanical engineer etc.

1.13 MATERIALS AND WORK

See AS 2124 clause 30.1 Quality of materials and work, which defaults to new materials. Be clear where second-hand materials
are permitted or required.
The requirement for full-time competent supervisors, with appropriate experience and training, may need to be specified in
some cases. See also AS 2124 clause 25 Contractor’s representative on off-site representatives. Remember the advice in RAIA
Advisory Note AN16.01.605.
Requirements vary across the country for many trades. General plumbers and electricians (special class) must be licensed in
every state and territory.
Options in AS 2124 clauses 30.3 Defective materials or work, 30.5 Acceptance of Defective materials or work and 30.6
Generally are best dealt with on a case-by-case (reactive) basis.
Items supplied by principal
Materials and other items identified in the Items to be supplied schedule will be supplied free of
charge to the contractor for installation in the execution of the works. Unload and take delivery of them
and inspect them for defects. If defects are found, advise. Return unused items to the principal.
Contractor is to care for these items as required in AS 2124 clause 16.1 Care of the work under the contract paragraph 2. The
value of these items is to be given in Annexure A.
If quality assurance is required, the principal as a supplier to the contractor will need to supply items which are consistent with
quality requirements of the works, and certify this, or advise which items are not consistent. This could be extended to the
contract documents themselves – are they current, complete, unambiguous?


Notice: >
For delivery of critical items under the control of the superintendent/principal (e.g. statues, electrical equipment). If there is not
Changes to existing
At least 7 days before changing the following existing items, give notice:
>
Run off >
Generally, the contractor’s business. However, requirements for control of run off onto or from the principal’s property need to
be stated.
1.14 WORKING HOURS

See AS 2124 clause 32 Working hours.
General
Hours: >
Days: >
1.15 PROGRESS AND PROGRAMMING OF THE WORKS

See AS 2124 clause 33 Progress and programming of he works.
Order of work >
This subclause exercises the option in AS 2124 clause 33.1 Rate of progress paragraph 5.

documents. Either way the requirements are contractual, unlike the program of work (see below).
Program of work
This subclause establishes only the basic requirements for a construction program. See RAIA Advisory Note AN16.06.102, and
AS 2124 clause 33.2 Construction program– this subclause exercises the option in that clause. The program may be either
furnished (non-contractual) or contractual, according to clause 33.2 – this subclause assumes that it is non-contractual.
Construction program: Within 14 days after the date for possession of the site, submit a construction
program showing the following:
- Sequence of work.
Revise default submission requirements as necessary. For larger projects this list may be supplemented by the following:
• Plant and labour resources and projected productivity rates for each activity.
• Site mobilisation.
• Procurement activities, such as subcontract tendering and appointment.
• Order dates and lead times for major components.
• Time allowed for product certification of imported goods.
• Time allowed for testing and commissioning of major items of equipment.
• Preparation and approvals for contractor’s documents.
Identification of critical path activities, and network formatting rather than bar chart or tables, may be appropriate in some cases
(unlikely for small building works). Edit the text accordingly.
Revisions: Revise the construction program as required by the progress of the work. Submit revisions
with each progress claim. Identify changes since the previous version, and show the estimated
percentage of completion for each item of work.
For larger projects, this clause may be extended to cover extensions of time granted, and actions dealing with deviations from
program. A progress report dealing with off-site work may also be required.
based on construction program.
Purpose of submissions: Information only.
Site meetings
Refer to RAIA Advisory Notes AN02.01.301, AN02.01.302, AN11.01.100, and AN16.06.102 recommendation 3.09. Agendas
may be required on large projects.
Hold and attend site meetings throughout the contract and ensure attendance of appropriate
subcontractors, the superintendent, and appropriate consultants.
Frequency: >
The frequency of meetings is best agreed by the superintendent and contractor as being the most appropriate for the particular
Delete if the superintendent is to take and distribute the minutes.
See AS 2124 clause 25 Contractor’s representative paragraph 2.

Delete this subclause if these will be taken by the superintendent or by a separate contractor. If the latter, list in Separate
contracts. Consider mounting, size, and a default number e.g. 2 site photographs from different directions, and 5 interior
photographs.
AS 2124 clause 8.4 Supply of documents by contractor defaults to 5 copies of “documents” or the number stated in the
Annexure.
Take colour progress photographs within 7 days before each site meeting. At each site meeting
submit 2 sets of glossy prints, and the negatives. Identify project, date, time, location and orientation.
Minimum number: >
Format: >
1.16 TIMES FOR COMMENCEMENT AND PRACTICAL COMPLETION

See AS 2124 clause 35 Times for commencement and practical completion.
General
Options in AS 2124 clause 35.1 Time for commencement of work on the site. There is no provision for these options in
Annexure A, though they may be better dealt with as special conditions of contract.
Period of notice for commencement of work on site:
>
Time from possession for commencement of work on site:
>
1.17 CLEANING UP
See AS 2124 clause 38 Cleaning up.
Final cleaning
exposed to view. Vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces. Clean debris from site, roofs, gutters,
downpipes and drainage systems. Remove waste, surplus materials and rubbish.
Removal of temporary works and constructional plant
See also AS 2124 clause 29.2 Removable of materials and constructional plant, which is more about non-removal. A global
requirement not to remove plant or materials from the site may be provided here.
Time for removal: >
AS 2124 clause 38 Cleaning up paragraphs 2 and 3 deal with general removal and allow for postponement. If anticipated at
documents (unlikely), resolve here. Otherwise, delete.
Pest eradication
Employ suitably qualified pest exterminators. Submit certificate to the superintendent stating that
completed works are free of pest types identified in the Pest eradication treatments schedule.
Eradication method: e.g. “Exterminator’s recommendation”.
1.18 CERTIFICATES AND PAYMENTS

See AS 2124 clause 42 Certificates and payments.
NATSPEC xi [Insert date]

Payment claims break-down

This subclause partly exercises the option in AS 2124 clause 42.1 Payment claims, certificates, calculations and time for
payment paragraph 1, but should be modified if there is a priced bill of quantities. Proof of payment of subcontractors and
suppliers is covered by AS 2124 clause 43Payment of workers and subcontractors.
Break down: With each progress claim submit a statement of amounts claimed in respect of each
worksection or trade heading designated in the specification, together with variations included in the
claim.
Bills of quantities: >
Import costs
Include only if risk of change is being taken by the principal. It is contrary to the policy of many public sector authorities. In such
cases, delete the subclause. See also AS 2124 clause 42.1 Payment claims, certificates, calculations and time for payment
paragraph 6(i).
applicable.
NATSPEC xii [Insert date]

• None.
but no text).
• On security of payments, AS 4000 Amdt. No.2 directs that expert advice be sought on any relevant jurisdiction legislation.
• None.
• The location and general description of the works should be given only on the tender form. There is no provision for it to be
given elsewhere. AS 4000 seems to take the view that a short contractual description may be more trouble than it’s worth –
due to potential conflict with the scope of works as defined by the totality of the contract documents. On scope, see
AS 4000 clause 28 paragraph 1 which states that the contractor is to provide everything necessary “for the proper
performance of the Contractor’s obligations”, except as otherwise provided.
given elsewhere. AS 4000 seems to take the view that a short contractual description may be more trouble than it’s worth –
due to potential conflict with the scope of works as defined by the totality of the contract documents.
1 GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
General conditions
General: To AS 4000–1997, General conditions of contract, published by SAI Global.
This subclause is optional - the reference to the contract is usually from the general conditions to the specification. This
reference properly belongs in Tendering and the Form of agreement, and does not need to be carried over here. Similarly the
schedule of contract documents should be covered in AS 4000 Annexure Part A Item 15, and not here as well.

Interpretation
change to the NATSPEC worksections), this clause is unnecessary and should be deleted. However, NATSPEC technical

Refer to AS 4000 clause 3 Provisional sums.
Provisional sums
General: Provisional sums identified in the Provisional sums schedule are for purposes stated in
relevant worksections of the specification.
If bills of quantities are used, this information should be located there, in which case substitute text and schedule with a
reference to them in the bills of quantities. Refer also to the Commentary.
The list may include the contingency sum, if any, although many principals require that this element of the budget is not
specification clause title (and number) which refers to it. The sums themselves should only be scheduled here.
1.3 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

Refer to AS 4000 clause 8 Contract documents.
Contractor-supplied documents
Number of copies: >
A general default responding to AS 4000 clause 8.3 paragraph 1. The various documents required are stipulated in each
technical worksection. Check the General requirements worksection for duplication.
Documents required to be checked by superintendent:
>
Better stated where the documents are listed. Responding to AS 4000 clause 8.3 paragraph 2(a).
Confidential information
The following principal-supplied information is confidential:
>
Responding to AS 4000 clause 8.5 paragraph 1.
Confidentiality agreement: Required.
Or, “Not required”. Responding to AS 4000 clause 8.5 paragraph 2.
1.4 ASSIGNMENT AND SUBCONTRACTING

Refer to AS 4000 clause 9 Assignment and subcontracting. Clause 9 deals with approvals of general subcontractors for work
identified in Annexure Part A – note clause 9.2 paragraph 3 - any global requirements could be stipulated here.
Selected subcontract work
According to AS 4000 clause 9.3 paragraph 1, a Selected subcontractors schedule should be provided in Tendering, and not
here, because decisions about which if any of these subcontractors are to be employed should be taken before the contract is
agreed. There is no provision in this contract for nominated subcontracts. See also the Commentary.
Facilities: Refer to selected subcontract documentation.
Contractor/selected subcontractor interfaces: Refer to selected subcontract documentation.

Novated subcontract work

Refer to AS 4000 clause 9.4. A pro-forma deed of novation prepared with the advice of the principles legal advisors must be
included in the tender documents.
Facilities: Refer to novated subcontract documentation.
Contractor/novated subcontractor interfaces: Refer to novated subcontract documentation.
Contractor’s responsibility
Exceptions: >
Responding to AS 4000 clause 9.5. There are unlikely to be any exceptions.
Separate contracts
Work concurrent to this contract: The following works on site, to be executed by persons engaged by
Coordinate with Site – Access for others, below. List here separate works by entities such as artists, special tradesmen and
their assistants, the site photographer and the like. Do this only if there would otherwise be ambiguity e.g. something
necessarily shown on the drawings such as equipment installed “by others” or designated “not in contract” which could be
mistaken for part of this contract.
1.5 INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS

Refer to AS 4000 clause 10 Intellectual property rights.
General
Infringements: >
Responding to AS 4000 clause 10 paragraph 1. The principal warrants that there are no infringements “unless otherwise
provided in the Contract”. List known infringements by the principal of intellectual property rights, if any, here or in the relevant
technical worksection. This subclause should be rarely used.
1.6 LEGISLATIVE REQUIREMENTS

Refer to AS 4000 clause 11 Legislative requirements.
Compliance
The principal, before entering into the contract, has given the notices, paid the fees, and obtained the
permits, approvals and other authorisations stated in the Prior applications and approvals
schedule.
On occupational health and safety requirements see RAIA Advisory Note AN14.01.612. This may be covered by AS 4000
clause 11.1. The roles of private certifiers are not covered in these Notes or in this Commentary, and vary between jurisdictions.
applications made Authorisations received
Responds to AS 4000 clause 11.1, and intended to deal proactively where possible with exceptions “directed by the
Superintendent”. Others will be given in Annexure Part A, for which the same sort of detail should be given. The Administration
Manual provides a form for directing the principal to satisfy certain legal requirements. List the applications made, e.g. “Building
application to ... Council”, fees paid, and approvals received, e.g. “Building approval dated ...”. This may be of limited application
to projects in the public sector. This information may also be provided in Tendering.


Responsibility for conditions, if any, imposed by local authorities needs to be resolved.

Consider scheduling here those conditions which affect the contractor. It is suggested that the superintendent should
incorporate authorities’ requirements in the documents as far as possible. Coordinate with Site - Site restrictions/Site limitations,
below. Ultimately, all the conditions are the responsibility of the applicant (generally the principal) as far as the local authorities
are concerned.

Refer to AS 4000 clause 12 Protection of people and property.
General
Occupied premises
If premises are occupied, the selection of the insurance alternatives in AS 4000 clauses 16 and 17 will be affected – in most
circumstances it would be sensible for the principal to insure (second alternative); the principal should obtain advice. Do not give
advice on insurance matters. Note that some domestic policies void automatically during construction.
For the parts of the site designated as occupied premises in the Occupied premises schedule:
period.
screens.
No smoking policy >
Safety
Accidents: Promptly notify the superintendent of the occurrence of the following:


Accidents: and Accident reports: The contractor is subject to stringent public and occupational health and safety law. See also
the Commentary.
Protective clothing
Rubber boots and safety boots are also often required on building sites, but it is perhaps unreasonable to expect the contractor
to supply them in a full range of sizes to visitors without charge and without notice. The superintendent should supply a properly
fitting helmet and boots for his, or her, own use.
Adjoining property
Protection: Do not interfere with or damage property which is to remain on or adjacent to the site,
of work.
For keeping project records, see RAIA Advisory Note AN11.01.101.
- Inspect the properties with the superintendent and owners and occupants of the properties, before
Complete the schedule if there is danger of damage to adjoining property, including the principal’s own, and if precautionary
Access roads
Temporary roads: >
- Location: >

Services
General: Do not obstruct or damage roadways and footpaths, drains and watercourses and other
existing services in use on or adjacent to the site. Determine the location of such services.
1.8 CARE OF THE WORK AND REINSTATEMENT OF DAMAGE

Refer to AS 4000 clause 14 Care of work and reinstatement of damage.
Existing services
Attendance: Attend to existing services as follows:
Excepted risks >
Responds to AS 4000 clause 14.3(b).
1.9 DAMAGE TO PERSONS AND PROPERTY OTHER THAN WUC

Refer to AS 4000 clause 15 Damage to persons and property other than WUC (work under the Contract)
Property on the site
Repair of services: Rectify immediately any obstruction or damage to roadways and footpaths, drains
and watercourses and other existing services in use on the site. Provide temporary services whilst
Repair of property: Rectify immediately any interference or damage to property which is to remain on
the site, including trees.
Reinstatement
General: Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work and restore
existing facilities used during construction to original condition.
An extension of AS 4000 clause 14.2.
Adjoining property
Repair of services: Rectify immediately any obstruction or damage to roadways and footpaths, drains
and watercourses and other existing services adjacent to the site. Provide temporary services whilst
Repair of property: Rectify immediately any interference or damage to property which is adjacent to
the site, including adjoining property encroaching onto the site, and trees.
Records: For properties described in the Adjoining properties to be recorded schedule inspect the
properties with the superintendent and owners and occupants of the properties, on completion of the
works, recording any damage that has occurred since the pre-commencement inspection.
Direction
Oral direction not permitted: >
Written confirmation not required: >
Responds to AS 4000 clause 20 paragraph 2, which is a little ambiguous - are the exceptions about oral direction or written
confirmation, or both? In any case, there are unlikely to be any. If you can think of any in advance, list them here.
1.10 SUPERINTENDENT’S REPRESENTATIVE

Refer to AS 4000 clause 21on the Superintendent’s representative.
Further to AS 4000 clause 22 Contractor’s representative, the requirement for full-time competent supervisors, with appropriate
experience and training, may need to be specified in some cases. Remember the advice in RAIA Advisory Note AN16.01.605 –
the Architect does not supervise the works.
Superintendent’s representatives
Responds to AS 4000 clause 21(c). More can be nominated as the work progresses, of course. The Administration Manual
provides a form for the purpose.

Name: >
Delegated function: >
1.11 SITE
Refer to AS 4000 clause 24 Site.
Possession
Approved uses not connected with WUC: >
Responds to AS 4000 clause 24.1 paragraph 2.
Access for others
The following persons are engaged by the principal to carry out work on the site other than WUC: >
Responds to AS 4000 clause 24.2 paragraph 1. Not including clerk of works, inspectors, separate contracts (persons engaged
to execute work). If not known, state “To be advised”. There is no explicit provision in this contract for principal’s clerks of works
and inspectors. The Administration Manual provides a form for authorising other persons to have site access.
Site restrictions
The specified 14 day period is arbitrary - vary as required.
>
If not shown on the drawings, give details here. See also the Commentary.
>
1.12 SETTING OUT THE WORKS

Refer to AS 4000 clause 26 Setting out the works.
Setting out
Supply of information: >
Responding to AS 4000 clause 26.1 – includes data and survey marks (pegs, benchmarks etc.) necessary for setting out. If this
information is available, state how it can be obtained e.g. identify and supply the survey. If it is not, state how it is to be provided
by the principal e.g. source, timing, or leave it to the superintendent to sort out. The Administration Manual provides a form for
the supply of setting out information.
Surveys
Use if instructions are required additional to those in AS 4000 clause 26.1 e.g. employment of licensed surveyor to check
tolerances of structural elements such as position of columns, verticality of columns and facades, and floor levels. Use also for
provision of equipment and labour to assist checks by the superintendent. See RAIA Advisory Note AN13.01.101 on survey
information.
Setting out: >
Check surveys: >
Final survey: >

1.13 CLEANING UP
Refer to AS 4000 clause 27 Cleaning up.
Final cleaning
Lamp and filter replacement, and the like, are dealt with in the various SERVICES worksections. Progressive cleaning is
generally, the contractor’s business, though the Administration Manual provides a form for directing the contractor to clean up.
Work in occupied premises, or where debris may find its way off-site onto principal’s property or adjoining property, will need to
be dealt with here.
exposed to view. Vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces. Clean debris from site, roofs, gutters,
downpipes and drainage systems. Remove waste, surplus materials and rubbish.
Removal of temporary works and constructional plant
Time for removal: >
AS 4000 clause 27 paragraph 2 deals with general removal and allows for postponement. If anticipated at documents (unlikely),
resolve here. Otherwise, delete.
Pest eradication
Eradication method: e.g. “Exterminator’s recommendation”. On birds and buildings, see BDP EDG Note DES56.
1.14 MATERIALS, LABOUR AND CONSTRUCTION PLANT

Refer to AS 4000 clause 28 Materials, labour and construction plant and clause 29 Quality. Clause 29.1 Quality of material and
work is the subject matter of the specification at large, of course. It defaults to new materials. Be clear where second-hand
materials are permitted or required. Clause 29.2 is expanded in the Quality worksection. Options in AS 4000 clauses 29.3, 29.4
and 29.5 are best dealt with on a case-by-case (reactive) basis. Clause 30 Examination and testing, is expanded in the General
requirements worksection.
A partial response to AS 4000 clause 28 paragraph 1. The contractor is to care for these items as required in AS 4000 clause
14.1 paragraph 2. The value of these items is to be given in Annexure Part A Item 20(d).
contract documents themselves - are they current, complete, unambiguous?
of them and inspect them for defects. If defects are found, advise. Return unused items to the
principal.
Notice: >



A partial response to AS 4000 clause 28 paragraph 1.
Parking
- Location: >
A partial response to AS 4000 clause 28 paragraph 1.
Items supplied by contractor
Responds to AS 4000 clause 28 paragraph 2. Generally, best dealt with in the appropriate technical worksection. Stipulate
items (e.g. mechanical plant), and particulars required (e.g. performance characteristics). Coordinate with mechanical engineer
etc. The Administration Manual provides a form for arranging inspection of manufacture and so forth of materials, and another
for the supply of particulars.
Removal of materials and constructional plant

>
Responds to AS 4000 clause 28 paragraph 3, which is more about non-removal. A global requirement not to remove plant or
materials from the site may be appropriate here. The Administration Manual provides a form for directing the contractor to not
remove materials or plant.

clear consensus on inclusion of policy in the preliminaries.
Principal’s site office

including the schedule.

The subclause and prompts assume that only one office is required (i.e. the superintendent and other consultants share – on
the clerk of works, see RAIA Advisory Note AN16.01.101, no reference to AS 4000). The contractor need only provide what has
been specified. Reformat as required.
Provide a weather-tight site office for the use of the principal or the principal’s nominees before major
site operations are started and include the following:
Principal’s site office description
User: >
Floor area: >
Structure: >
Floor: >
Telephones: >
Facsimile: >
Services: >
Tea making facilities, evaporative cooler, fans, toilet facilities (any gender requirements?), lights, power points, heater, walkie-
talkie, public address link-up.
Signage: >
Security: >
Parking: >
Temporary fence >
Specify in the Landscape – fences and barriers worksection, and cross-refer, or specify here. A clause of this name does not
exist as such in NATSPEC material. Requirements of regulatory authorities may conflict. Note that hoardings are generally a
local authority requirement and need not be specified in most circumstances.
Project signboard
General: Provide project-specific signboards and include the following:
Location: >
Size: >
Text, graphics: >
Other details: >

Changes to existing
>
Run off >
Generally, the contractor’s business. However, requirements for control of run off onto the principal’s property need to be stated.
1.15 WORKING HOURS

Responds to AS 4000 clause 31 Working hours.
General
Working hours and days must be notified before work commences on site. Local authority requirements on this topic, if any,
should be stated here.
Working hours: >
Working days: >
1.16 PROGRAMMING
Refer to AS 4000 clause 32 Programming.
Responds to AS 4000 clause 32 paragraph 3. If it is necessary to direct the contractor to perform the works in a particular order,
or to complete stages or parts of the work in a particular sequence or at stated times, give the directions here. For example, the
contractor will need to know the dates by which different parts of an existing building will be vacated, or the beginning and end
of the building “season” (if any) in a national park or campus. The Administration Manual includes a form for the purpose.
documents. Either way the requirements are contractual.
Program of work
Responds to AS 4000 clause 32 paragraph 5. This subclause establishes only the basic requirements for a construction
program. The Administration Manual provides a form for the purpose. On the architect’s role in expediting the works, see RAIA
Advisory Note AN16.06.102. The program is contractual.
- Sequence of work.
Revise default submission requirements as necessary. See also the Commentary.
For larger projects, this clause may be extended to cover extensions of time granted, and actions dealing with deviations from
program. A progress report dealing with off-site work may also be required.
NATSPEC xi [Insert date]

Site meetings
Refer to RAIA Advisory Notes AN02.01.301, AN02.01.302, AN11.01.100, and AN16.06.102 recommendation 3.09 on the
principle attending site meetings. Agendas may be required on large projects.
Frequency: >
See AS 4000 clause 22 paragraph 2.
photographs.
AS 4000 Annexure Part A Item 15 defaults to 5 copies for principal-supplied documents. Coordinate with Contract documents –
Contractor-supplied documents/Number of copies, above.
General: Take colour progress photographs within 7 days before each site meeting. At each site
meeting submit 2 sets of glossy prints, and a digital record. Identify project, date, time, location and
orientation.
Define the digital record format.
Minimum number: >
Format: >
1.17 PAYMENT
Refer to AS 4000 clause 3 Payment.
Progress claims
This subclause expands the requirement in AS 4000 clause 37.1 paragraph 3, but should be modified if there is a priced bill of
quantities. Proof of payment of subcontractors and suppliers is covered by AS 4000 clause 38.
claim.
Bills of quantities: >
Import costs
Include only if risk of change is being taken by the principal. It is contrary to the policy of many public sector authorities. In such
cases, delete the subclause.
applicable.
NATSPEC xii [Insert date]


NATSPEC xiii [Insert date]

• None.
but no text).
• On the subject of security of payments and limiting liability the preface directs that expert advice be sought on any relevant
jurisdiction legislation.
• None.
given elsewhere. AS 4000 seems to take the view that a short contractual description may be more trouble than it’s worth -
due to potential conflict with the scope of works as defined by the totality of the contract documents. On scope, see
AS 4000 clause 28 paragraph 1 which states that the contractor is to provide everything necessary “for the proper
performance of the Contractor’s obligations”, except as otherwise provided.
• The location and general description of the works should be given only on the tender form (e.g. AS 2125). There is no
provision for it to be given elsewhere. AS 2124 seems to take the view that a short contractual description may be more
trouble than it’s worth - due to potential conflict with the scope of works as defined by the totality of the contract documents.
1 GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
General conditions
General: To AS 4905, Minor works contract conditions (superintendent administered), published by
SAI Global.
This information is included in Tendering worksection. If Tendering is included in the project specification omit this subclause.

Interpretation
change to the NATSPEC Template), this clause is unnecessary and should be deleted. However NATSPEC technical
1.2 SUBCONTRACTING
See AS 4905 clause 6.2. which deals only with approval for part of the work to be subcontracted without relieving the Contractor
of liability.
Separate contracts
Work concurrent to this contract: The following works on site, to be carried out by persons engaged by
>
List here separate works by entities such as artists, special tradesmen and their assistants, the site photographer and the like.
Do this only if there would otherwise be ambiguity e.g. something necessarily shown on the drawings such as equipment
installed “by others” or designated “not in contract” which could be mistaken for part of this contract.

Provisional sums
Provisional sums identified in the Provisional sums schedule are for purposes stated in relevant
worksections of the specification.
See the Commentary.
Item: The list may include the contingency sum, if any, although many principals require that this element of the budget is not
specification clause title which refers to it. The sums themselves should only be scheduled here.
1.4 LATENT CONDITIONS

General
Other conditions which are latent conditions: >
List here any other conditions to be regarded as latent conditions.
1.5 STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS

Requirements of authorities
The principal, before entering into the contract, has given the notices, paid the fees, and obtained the
permits, approvals and other authorisations stated in the Prior applications and approvals
schedule.


dated ...”. This may be of limited application to projects in the public sector.
Responsibility for conditions, if any, imposed by local authorities needs to be resolved. Consider scheduling here those
conditions which affect the contractor. It is suggested that the superintendent should incorporate authorities’ requirements in the
documents as far as possible. Coordinate with Site limitations: under Site restrictions, below. Ultimately, all the conditions are
the responsibility of the applicant (principal) as far as the local authorities are concerned.

See AS 4905 clause 8 Protection.
General
Occupied premises
If premises are occupied the insurance will be affected - in most circumstances it would be sensible for the principal to insure;
the principal should obtain advice. Do not give advice on insurance matters. Note that some domestic policies are rendered void
automatically during construction.
For the parts of the site designated as occupied premises in the Occupied premises schedule:
period.
- Provide safe access for occupants.
screens.

No smoking policy >

Safety
Accidents: Promptly notify the superintendent of the occurrence, of the following:
Accidents: and Accident reports: The contractor is subject to stringent public and occupational health and safety law. Delete the
clause if it is not considered appropriate. See also the Commentary
Access roads
Temporary roads: >
- Location: >
Protective clothing
- Standards: To AS/NZS 1801, Type 1.
1.7 CARE OF THE WORK AND REINSTATEMENT OF DAMAGE/DAMAGE TO PERSONS AND

PROPERTY OTHER THAN THE WORKS
See AS 4905 clauses 8 Protection and 9 Care of the work and reinstatement of damage.
General
Damage to services: Do not obstruct or damage roadways and footpaths, drains and watercourses
and other existing services in use on or next to the site. Determine the location of such services.
Rectify immediately any obstruction or damage to such services and provide temporary services whilst
Damage to property: Do not interfere with or damage property which is to remain on or next to the site,
including adjoining property encroaching onto the site, and trees. Rectify immediately any interference
or damage to such property.
Existing services
Attend to existing services as follows:
Adjoining property
of work.

On project records, see RAIA Advisory Note AN11.01.101.
- Inspect the properties with the superintendent and owners and occupants of the properties, before
and on completion of the works.
- At the initial inspection, make detailed records of conditions existing within the properties, especially
structural defects and other damage or defacement.
Prepare a schedule if there is danger of damage to adjoining property, including the principal’s own, and if precautionary
Reinstatement
Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work and restore existing facilities
used during construction to original condition.
An expansion of AS 4905 clauses 9.2 and 10. Delete if considered redundant.
Excepted risks >
See AS 4905 clause 9.3 Excepted risks.
1.8 REPRESENTATIVES
See AS 4905 clause 16 Representatives.
Superintendent’s representative
Identity: >
If not known, state “To be advised”, or delete. AS 4905 seems to anticipate that this notice will be provided during the course of
the contract.
Contractor’s representative
Identity: >
Identity and functions of the contractor’s representative may also be defined in the preliminaries - see AS 4905 clause 16
paragraph 2 which refers to a competent representative. The requirement for full-time competent supervisors, with appropriate
experience and training, may need to be specified in some cases. Remember the advice in RAIA Advisory Note AN16.01.605,
architects do not supervise
1.9 SITE
See AS 4905 clause 17 Site.
Access
Not including superintendent's representative, inspectors, separate contracts (persons engaged to execute work). If not known,
state “To be advised”.
General: Further to AS 4305 clause 15, the following persons require, and are authorised to have,
access to the work: >

Delivery before possession >

Site restrictions
The specified 14 day period is arbitrary – vary as required.
>
If not shown on the drawings, give details here. See also the Commentary.
>
Surveys
Use if instructions are required e.g. employment of licensed surveyor to check tolerances of structural elements such as position
of columns, verticality of columns and facades, and floor levels. Also, provision of equipment and labour to assist checks by the
superintendent. See RAIA Advisory Note AN13.01.101. SAA HB31 is a useful collection of extracts from standards dealing with
building construction tolerances.
Setting out: >
Check surveys: >
Final survey: >
Temporary fence >
Specify in the Fences and external walls worksection, and cross-refer, or specify here. A clause of this name does not exist as
such in NATSPEC material. Requirements of regulatory authorities may conflict. Note that hoardings are generally a local
authority requirement and need not be specified in most circumstances.

Parking
- Location: >
Project signboard
Provide project-specific signboards and do the following:
Project signboard schedule
Location: >
Size: >
Text, graphics: >
Other details: >
Product particulars schedule
Stipulate items (e.g. mechanical plant), and particulars required (e.g. performance characteristics). Coordinate with mechanical
engineer etc.
Final cleaning
Before practical completion, clean throughout, including interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view.
Vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces. Clean debris from site, roofs, gutters, downpipes and drainage
systems. Remove waste, surplus materials and rubbish.
Pest eradication
1.10 MATERIALS AND WORK

See AS 4905 clause 18.1 Quality of material and work, which refers to new materials. Be clear where second-hand materials
are permitted or required. Options in AS 4905 clause 18.2 Defective work are best dealt with on a case-by-case (reactive) basis.


clear consensus on inclusion of policy in the preliminaries. Delete if not required.
Materials and other items identified in the Items to be supplied schedule will be supplied free of
charge to the contractor for installation in the execution of the works. Unload and take delivery of them
and inspect them for defects. If defects are found, advise. Return unused items to the principal.
The contractor is to care for these items as generally required in AS 4905 clause 9.1 (a) although not specifically stated. The
value of these items is to be given in the items to be supplied schedule.
contract documents themselves - are they current, complete, unambiguous?

Value of materials: >
Notice: >
Changes to existing
>
Progressive cleaning >
Generally, the contractor’s business. Work in occupied premises, or where debris may find its way off-site onto principal’s
property will need to be dealt with here.
Final cleaning >
Lamp and filter replacement, and the like, is dealt with in the various SERVICES worksections.

Eradication method: >
e.g. “Exterminator’s recommendation”. On birds and buildings, see BDP EDG Note DES56.
Run off >
Generally, the contractor’s business. However, requirements for control of run off onto or from the principal’s property need to
be stated.
1.11 WORKING HOURS

General
Hours: >
Days: >
AS 4905 makes no reference to working hours, however if required these may be stated in the preliminaries, if not then they
may be notified before work commences on site. Local authority requirements, if any, should be stated here.
1.12 PROGRESS, PROGRAMMING AND SUSPENSION

See AS 4905 clause 19 Programming and suspension.

Order of work >

documents. Either way requirements are contractual, unlike the program of work below.
Program of work
This clause establishes only the basic requirements for a construction program. See RAIA Advisory Note AN16.06.102, and
AS 4905 clause 19- this subclause exercises the option in that clause. The program may be either furnished (non-contractual)
or contractual, - this subclause assumes that it is non-contractual.
- Sequence of work.
Revise default submission requirements as necessary.
Purpose of submissions: Information only.
Site meetings
Hold and attend site meetings throughout the contract and ensure attendance of appropriate
Refer to RAIA Advisory Notes AN02.01.301, AN02.01.302, AN11.01.100, and AN16.06.102 recommendation 3.09.
Frequency: >
See AS 4905 clause 4 Service of notice.
photographs.
Take colour progress photographs within 7 days before each site meeting. At each site meeting
submit 2 sets of glossy prints, and the negatives. Identify project, date, time, location and orientation.
Minimum number: >
Format: >

1.13 CERTIFICATES AND PAYMENTS

See AS 4905 clause 23 Payment.
Payment claims break-down
This subclause partly exercises the option in AS 4905 clause 2.1 Performance and payment.
claim.
Import costs
Delete if contrary to policy of the principle. Include only if risk of change is being taken by the principal. It is contrary to the policy
of many public sector authorities. In such cases, delete the subclause.
applicable.
Delete if contrary to policy of the principle.

In accordance with the principles of the Australian Standard Method of Measurement of Building
Works (ASMM).

QUALITY GENERAL
QUALITY
This worksection is based on AS/NZS ISO 9001, with default choices made for options within that standard. In common with
NATSPEC worksections, it addresses a head contractor. The head contractor will, as part of a project quality system, pass on to
subcontractors and suppliers any relevant QA requirements required by the head contract.
Pre-contract assessment is covered in the NATSPEC Tendering worksection.
None. No quality-related issues are dealt with in NATSPEC Preliminaries.
Projects may include items not covered by NATSPEC
None.
Specifying quality systems
In terms of each technical worksection in the project specification there are four quality assurance options:
1. Overall QA is not required, and QA is not required for the particular worksection.
• This is the likely scenario for most projects in the near future (where QA is either not required by the client or is not
available in the market place), and for most small or simple contracts.
• Recommendation: Do nothing
2. Overall QA is not required, but QA is required for all, or part, of the particular worksection.
• This is likely to apply to traditional projects in which one or two packages are design-and-construct (D&C) e.g.
airconditioning, curtain walls. D&C subcontractors are more likely to have quality systems in place than either other
subcontractors or general contractors, in the short term.
• Recommendation: It is best to prepare a version of the Quality worksection which is specific to the requirements of the
technical worksection, titled accordingly e.g. “Light timber framing - Quality”. In the technical worksection, under the clause
Cross references, refer to this document e.g. “Light timber framing - Quality, for quality assurance”.
3. Overall QA is required, and the same standard applies to the particular worksection.
• This will apply to projects which are entirely D&C, or which are entirely based on working drawings and specification (the
traditional situation), or which are entirely installation-only, for example. The second is becoming less common, especially
on larger projects.
• Recommendation: Only worksection-specific variations (e.g. traceability) need to be scheduled. These can be either
scheduled centrally, in the Quality worksection itself, or under a new clause, Quality assurance in each technical
worksection - in which case import the relevant schedules from the Quality worksection and complete them as required. If
scheduled centrally, simply provide a Quality worksection in the documents.
4. Overall QA is required, but a different (more demanding) standard applies to all, or part, of the particular
worksection.
• This will become progressively more common. It applies, for example, to projects which are generally traditional but which
have one or more D&C packages (especially services). This will be the norm for many government projects.
• Recommendation: Worksection-specific variations will be more extensive than for the third option. They might cover
design and servicing, for example. Import the relevant schedules from the Quality worksection and complete them as
required. Note that it is not possible, in this option, for a lesser (or even no) standard to apply to the technical worksection.
1 GENERAL
1.1 INTERPRETATION
Definitions
The base document for quality systems definitions is AS/NZS ISO 9000. The terms defined in this worksection are terms used in
this worksection and not defined satisfactorily, if at all, elsewhere.
General: For the purposes of this worksection the following definitions apply:
- Quality package: A designated part of the works, which may include the whole works, for which an
individual quality system is required.

QUALITY GENERAL
- Superintendent: Agent of the principal i.e. of the purchaser or customer.

- Contractor: The supplier of a product to the principal, for the defined quality package, and the
supplier’s subcontractors and suppliers in turn.
- Product: That which is supplied by the contractor, which may be either of the following:
. Tangible (e.g. a built item).
. Intangible (including services such as design and delivery of tangible product).
. Both.
- Servicing: “After sales” service, repairs, maintenance.
1.2 QUALITY SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

Quality system schedule
Quality package Activities included Standard Options
The whole of the works All AS/NZS ISO 9001 See below
This schedule has been pre-completed for the simplest option – amend as appropriate. Complete the remainder only where the
general requirements governing the head contract need to be varied for a few particular packages. Alternatively prepare an
entire Quality system schedule for each affected technical worksection of the specification.
Quality package: Generally equates to a trade worksection or a subcontract/supply package.
Activities included: Probably clear from the quality package but may specifically comprise design, development, production,
installation, maintenance or inspection and test.
Options: Some of the options may be clarified in the other schedules in this worksection, or even in other worksections – do not
repeat.
Document control
Changes to documents: Review and approve changes to documents using the same functions or
organisations that performed the original review and approval of those documents, except as
described in the Document control schedule.
Refer to AS/NZS ISO 9001 clause 4.2.3 Control of documents.
Document control schedule
Quality package Documents to be reviewed and Other designated organisation
approved
You may decide that other organisations can, in some cases, review and approve the changes, in which case these
organisations must be identified, using the schedule, along with the particular characteristics/limitations of their role. Otherwise,
delete this schedule, and modify the text of Changes to documents.
Purchasing
External audits: Carry out pre-tender surveys of subcontractors and suppliers and audit subcontractors
and suppliers as necessary. The surveys and audits are to be performed by an approved auditor.
Include audit and surveillance proposals in the package quality plan along with results of pre-tender
surveys.
Not explicitly required by the AS/NZS ISO 9000 series. Strictly, audits of quality systems should be carried out by qualified
auditors. The contractor is unlikely to possess such skills. It is therefore in everyone’s interest if these audits are carried out by a
suitable third party such as a certified auditor. Delete if not required.
Verification: The superintendent may verify at source, or upon receipt, that purchased product
conforms to requirements.

QUALITY GENERAL
Refer to AS/NZS ISO 9001 clause 7.4.3 Verification of purchased product. The right to verify product only exists where
specified, as here. Delete if you do not wish to exercise this option.
Product identification and traceability
General: Conform to the Product identification and traceability schedule.
Product identification and traceability schedule
Quality package Product Traceability Product Method
required identification
required
If only a few products need to be identified or traceable, schedule them here, otherwise schedule in each worksection as
necessary. Delete if you do not wish to exercise this option.
Control of nonconforming product

Concession: Before the provision or repair of nonconforming product, report the proposal to the
superintendent for concession. Do not provide or repair nonconforming product without concession.
Delete if you do not wish to exercise this option.
Concession: (i.e. waiver) Refer to AS/NZS ISO 9001 clause 8.3 Control of nonconforming product. The text may need to be
qualified to avoid excessive intervention by the superintendent.
Quality records
Retention: Conform to the Quality records retention schedule.
Assumes the documents will be retained by the contractor – vary if not the case. Refer to AS/NZS ISO 9001 clause 4.2.4
Control of records.
Evaluation: Make quality records available to the superintendent for evaluation, within 2 days of the
initial request.
AS/NZS ISO 9001 (clause 4.2.4) states that “records shall remain legible, readily identifiable and retrievable”.
Delete if you do not wish to exercise this option.
Period of evaluation: To be agreed at each request, but at least 5 working days.
Needs to be specified, or agreed. It should be a reasonable period and may vary depending on which records are being
evaluated. The Template gives 5 days as a default minimum.
Quality records retention schedule
Quality package Retention period Location during Form for retention Content of
retention period documents
Quality package: e.g. The whole of the works.

Retention period: e.g. 7 years from the date of final completion. T
Location during retention period: e.g. Principal’s office, contractor’s office, superintendent’s office, fire-proof safe, etc.
Form for retention: e.g. Digitised on computer, microfiche, paper copies (consider environmental conditions).
Content of documents: e.g. Completed pro-formas evidencing compliance with the system, including audit reports. They do not
comprise all project documents.
1.3 SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS

Note that the AS/NZS ISO 9000 series requires only that the contractor document procedures and instructions. Quality plans
and quality manuals as such are not required, hence their inclusion under this clause title.

QUALITY GENERAL
Quality plan approval

General: Submit to the superintendent, for approval, a quality plan for each quality package, at least
10 working days before work on that package commences. Keep on site a copy of the approved
quality plan.
Quality plan
General: Comply with the recommendations of AS/NZS ISO 9004.5. Include inspection and test plans.
Quality manual: Conform to the recommendations of AS/NZS ISO 10013.
Audit plan: Conform to the recommendations of AS ISO 19011 clause 6.4.
Extrinsic audits
Identity of the auditor: >
e.g. Auditors employed by organisations such as National Association of Testing Authorities (NATA), Quality Assurance
Services, Bureau Veritas Australasia, and Lloyd’s Register.
Other compliance audits
General: Compliance audits of particular activities will be carried out by the auditor at times to be
agreed.
Particular activities: >
Nominate the activities considered critical to achieving the program. Resolve timing as the job progresses.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS GENERAL
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
This worksection draws together administrative material which is common to most if not all of the technical worksections and
which should therefore be brought to the attention of subcontractors and others using that material. Each technical worksection
includes a cross reference to that effect. General requirements covers topics such as referenced documents, interpretation,
inspection and tests, samples and contractor’s submissions, materials and components, installation, marking and completion.
The project specification for this worksection may describe acceptable forms of warranty, notice required for inspections, and
acceptable testing authorities. It will also define the relationship between the complete project specification and the drawings.
The worksection should be read in the context of the general conditions of contract, any special conditions of contract, the
project preliminaries, and any separately specified quality assurance requirements.
Related material may be found in other worksections. For example:
• Interiors general requirements for Interiors fitout works.
• Mechanical general requirements for Mechanical Services.
• Hydraulic general requirements for Hydraulic Services
• Electrical general requirements for Electrical Services.
NATSPEC worksection(s) on which this worksection relies
The following worksections must be included, if this worksection is used, to provide a complete specification:
• None.
Associated material not included in NATSPEC
Some projects may include items not covered by this worksection. For which you may need to create new text.
Other worksections that reference this worksection are:
• All.
1 GENERAL
NATSPEC does not recommend the use of SCOPE OF WORK clauses. If you wish to include such a general description you
may add it here, or in the corresponding location of selected worksections.
1.1 PRECEDENCE
Precedence
General: Requirements of subsequent worksections of the specification override conflicting
requirements in this worksection.
1.2 CROSS REFERENCES

Common technical requirements
Associated worksections: Conform to the following:
- Quality.
- Adhesives, sealants and fasteners.
- Fire-stopping.
- Metals and prefinishes.
- Termite management.
- Timber finishes and treatment.
Delete as appropriate.
Cross referencing
Within the text:
- Worksection titles are indicated by Italicised text.
- Clause titles are indicated by Bold text.

1.3 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

Contractual relationships
General: Responsibilities and duties of the principal, contractor and contract administrator are not
altered by requirements in the documents referenced in this specification.
Current editions
General: Use referenced documents which are the editions, with amendments, current 3 months
before the closing date for tenders, except where other editions or amendments are required by
statutory authorities.
Editions cited in the BCA (for example) may not accord with the general requirement, hence the exception.
- Site copies: >
List here any copies of standards required to be held on site.
1.4 INTERPRETATION
Abbreviations
General: For the purposes of this worksection the abbreviations given below apply.
- APAS: Australian Paint Approval Scheme.
- AS: Australian Standard.
- BCA: Building Code of Australia.
- CFC: Compressed fibre cement.
- DPC: Damp proof course.
- MS: Mild steel.
- NATA: National Association of Testing Authorities.
- NZS: New Zealand Standard.
- PCA: Plumbing Code of Australia.
- SS: Stainless steel.
- SSL: Scientific Services Laboratory – ActivFire register or fire protection equipment.
Define here any you wish to include globally, otherwise define in the worksections they appear. Add/delete as appropriate.
Definitions
General: For the purposes of this worksection the definitions given below apply.
As a technical generic worksection it is beyond the scope of NATSPEC to offer any management system to handle the approval
process. Consequently definitions and directions such as“approved” do not appear as default text. Where appropriate, a prompt
is given indicating an approval could be required. If adding a definition, the following text may be useful:
Approved: “Approved”, “reviewed”, “directed”, “rejected”, “endorsed” and similar expressions mean “approved (reviewed,
directed, rejected, endorsed) in writing by the contract administrator”.
- Attendance: “Attendance”, “provide attendance” and similar expressions mean “give assistance for
examination and testing”.
- Contract administrator: “Contract administrator” has the same meaning as “architect” or
“superintendent” and is the person appointed by the “owner” or “principal”.
- Geotechnical site investigation: The process of evaluating the geotechnical characteristics of the
site in the context of existing or proposed construction.
- Give notice: “Give notice”, “submit”, “advise”, “inform” and similar expressions mean “give notice
(submit, advise, inform) in writing to the contract administrator”.
- Hold point: The activity cannot proceed without the approval of the contract administrator.
- IP: "IP", "IP code", "IP rating" and similar expression have the same meaning as "IP Code" in
AS 60529.
- Maintenance period: Synonymous with “Defects liability period”.
- Obtain: “Obtain”, “seek” and similar expressions mean “obtain (seek) in writing from the contract
administrator”.
- Professional engineer: A person who is listed on the National Professional Engineers Register
(NPER) in the relevant discipline at the relevant time.

- Metallic-coated steel: Includes zinc-coated steel, zinc/iron alloy-coated steel, and aluminium/zinc-
coated steel.
- Pipe: Includes pipe and tube.
- Principal: “Principal” has the same meaning as “owner”, “client” and “proprietor” and is the party to
whom the Contractor is legally bound to construct the works.
- Proprietary: “Proprietary” mean identifiable by naming manufacturer, supplier, installer, trade name,
brand name, catalogue or reference number.
- Provide: “Provide” and similar expressions mean “supply and install”. Installation shall include
development of the design beyond that documented.
- Tests:
. Pre-completion tests: Tests carried out before completion tests.
* Type tests: Tests carried out on an item identical with a production item, before delivery to
the site.
* Production tests: Tests carried out on a purchased item, before delivery to the site.
* Site tests: Tests carried out on site.
. Completion tests: Tests carried out on completed installations or systems before the date for
practical completion, to demonstrate that the installation or system, including components,
controls and equipment, operates correctly, safely and efficiently, and meets performance and
other requirements. The superintendent may direct that completion tests be carried out after the
date for practical completion.
- Registered testing authority:
. The CSIRO Division of Manufacturing and Infrastructure Technology (CSIRO-MIT).
. An authority registered by the National Association of Testing Authorities (NATA) to test in the
relevant field.
. An organisation outside Australia recognised by NATA through a mutual recognition agreement.
- Required: Means required by the documents, the local council or statutory authorities.
- If required: A conditional specification term for work which may be shown in the documents or be a
legislative requirement.
- Samples: Includes samples, prototypes and sample panels.
- Supply: “Supply”, “furnish” and similar expressions mean “supply only”.
- Verification: Provision of evidence or proof that a performance requirement has been met or a
default exists.
- Witness points: Provides an opportunity to attend an activity but does not involve an obligation. The
activity can proceed without approval from the contract administrator.
1.5 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

Services diagrammatic layouts
General: Layouts of service lines, plant and equipment shown on the drawings are diagrammatic only,
except where figured dimensions are provided or calculable.
Before commencing work:
- Obtain measurements and other necessary information.
- Coordinate the design and installation in conjunction with all trades.
Levels
General: Spot levels take precedence over contour lines and ground profile lines.
1.6 PERFORMANCE
General
General: If required, provide structures, installations and components as follows:
- Fixed access ways: To AS 1657.
- Structural design actions: To AS/NZS 1170.0 and the Structural design actions schedule.
The independent application by professionals or specialist contractors of the requirements of structural codes for the design and
construction of building components or elements is an established and integral part of the construction process.

Certain actions for which design methods are set out in the various parts of AS/NZS 1170 Structural design actions need to be
specified by means of the appropriate quantities which must be described using the correct terms, symbols and units
1.7 INSPECTION
Notice
General: Minimum notice for inspections to be made:
>
e.g. on-site: 4 hours, off-site: 2 working days. Increase if your office is remote from the site.
Inspection: If notice of inspection is required in respect of parts of the works that are to be concealed,
advise when the inspection can be made before concealment.
Attendance
General: Provide attendance.
1.8 SUBMISSIONS
Some NATSPEC technical worksections provide for specifying particular requirements for shop drawings, contractor’s
schedules, and other documentation, including their content. Contractor’s submissions may include manufacturer-generated
material and contractor-generated material, required where selection of important items has been by the contractor.
Authorities
Authorities’ approvals: Submit documents showing approval by the authorities whose requirements
apply to the work.
Correspondence: Submit copies of correspondence and notes of meetings with authorities whose
requirements apply to the work.
Electronic submissions
File format: >
e.g. Drawing: AutoCAD dwg., Text document: pdf.
Transmission medium: >
e.g. email, floppy disk, CD ROM. Note that email may be limited to 4 or 5 MB file size and some systems reject zip files.
Hard copy submissions
Quantity:
- Bound documents: >
e.g. As follows or as called for in the proposed contract:
• 3 sets as paper prints.
• 1 set as reproducible (plastic) prints.
• 2 sets as CAD files in AutoCad *.DXF format on disk using approved layering and drawing conventions.
• 2 sets as CAD files in AutoCad *.DWG format on disk using approved layering and drawing conventions.
- Loose documents larger than A3: One transparency on heavyweight plastic film the same size as
the standard contract drawings.
- Loose documents up to and including A3: One copy.
Standard contract drawing size: >
e.g. A1, B1. If you can photocopy documents of this size you may not need transparencies – edit the subclause to suit.
Drawings and documents to be supplied or transferred in electronic format may have special requirements.
Errors
General: If a submission contains errors, make a new or amended submission as appropriate,
indicating changes made since the previous submission.
Identification
General: Identify the project, contractor, subcontractor or supplier, manufacturer, applicable product,
model number and options, as appropriate and include pertinent contract document references.
Include service connection requirements and product certification. Identify proposals for non-
compliance with project requirements, and characteristics which may be detrimental to successful
performance of the completed work.

Inspection and testing plan

General: Submit an inspection and testing plan which is consistent with the construction program.
Include particulars of test stages and procedures.
Test reports: Submit written reports on nominated tests.
Notice
Minimum notice: >
e.g. 5 working days. Timing for particular submissions, such as QA manuals, should be specified in the appropriate technical
worksections. The requirement here is a catch-all default.
Materials and components
Product certification: If products must conform to product certification schemes, submit evidence of
conformance.
Product data: For proprietary equipment, submit the manufacturer’s product data as follows:
- Technical specifications and drawings.
- Type-test reports.
- Performance and rating tables.
- Recommendations for installation and maintenance.
- Additional product data for services equipment:
. Model name, designation and number.
. Country of origin and manufacture.
. Capacity of all system elements.
. Size, including required clearances for installation.
. Materials used in the construction.
Proposed products schedules: If major products are not specified as proprietary items, submit a
schedule of those proposed for use within 3 weeks of site possession.
Samples
Consider setting up a procedure for acceptance criteria, storage and location, and verification with site deliveries.
Submission: Submit nominated samples.
Incorporation of samples: If it is intended to incorporate samples into the works, submit proposals.
Incorporate samples in the works which have been endorsed for incorporation. Do not incorporate
other samples.
Retention of samples: Keep endorsed samples in good condition on site, until practical completion.
Where prototypes are called for in worksections consider setting up a protocol for approval and for the approved prototype to be
the benchmark of quality for all subsequent work.
Shop drawings
Specific requirements for shop drawings should be specified in the appropriate worksection. See RAIA Advisory Note
AN16.01.100 for advice on the processing of shop drawings. The “Review” stamp suggested in that document should also be
used. If a contractor’s submission is rejected, reasons must be given
General: If required, submit dimensioned drawings showing details of the fabrication and installation of
services and equipment, including relationship to building structure and other services, cable type and
size, and marking details.
.See the Commentary on Shop drawing administration.
Diagrammatic layouts: Coordinate work shown diagrammatically in the contract documents, and
submit dimensioned set-out drawings.
Submission medium:
- Electronic: >
- Hard copy: >
Nominate alternatives or include both.
Quantity and format
General: Refer to Submissions.

2 PRODUCTS
2.1 TESTS
Notice
Notice: Give notice of time and place of nominated tests.
Minimum notice for inspections to be made: >
e.g. on-site: 4 hours, off-site: 2 working days. Increase if your office is remote from the site.
Attendance
General: Provide attendance on tests.
Testing authorities
General: Except for site tests, have tests carried out by a Registered testing authority.
- Reports: Submit copies of test reports, including certificates for type tests, showing the observations
and results of tests and conformance or non-conformance with requirements.
- Site tests: Use instruments calibrated by authorities accredited by a Registered testing authority.
2.2 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS

Consistency
General: For the whole quantity of each material or product use the same manufacturer or source and
provide consistent type, size, quality and appearance.
Corrosion resistance
General: Conform to the following corrosivity category with regard to worksection corrosion resistance
tables.
Corrosivity category: >
Edit to suit the project with regard to the location of the building and the degree of exposure of external walls e.g. High, Medium,
Low as defined in the Commentary Corrosivity table.
Corrosion resistance tables are provided in worksections covering materials that require corrosion protection. The project
corrosivity category will then determine which of the Corrosion resistance tables are applicable. Where these corrosion
resistance tables occur you should edit out the ones not applicable to eliminate any design/selection decisions by the builder.
Such as:
• Adhesives, sealants and fasteners.
• Brick and block construction.
• Partitions – brick and block
• Plastering.
• Mechanical general requirements.
Manufacturers’ or suppliers’ recommendations
Proprietary items: Select, if no selection is given, and transport, deliver, store, handle, protect, finish,
adjust, prepare for use, and provide manufactured items in accordance with the current written
recommendations and instructions of the manufacturer or supplier.
Proprietary systems/assemblies: Assemble, install or fix to substrate in accordance with the current
written recommendations and instructions of the manufacturer or supplier.
Project modifications: Advise of activities that supplement, or are contrary to, manufacturer’s or
suppliers’ written recommendations and instructions.
Product certification: If products must comply with product certification schemes, provide them in
accordance with the certification requirements.
Proprietary items
Implication: Identification of a proprietary item does not necessarily imply exclusive preference for the
item so identified, but indicates the necessary properties of the item.
Alternatives: If alternatives are proposed, submit proposed alternatives and include samples, available
technical information, reasons for proposed substitutions and cost. If necessary, provide an English
translation. State if provision of proposed alternatives will necessitate alteration to other parts of the
works and advise consequent costs.
Consider adding the following: The builder shall be responsible for the cost of evaluation of proposed alternatives, whether
approved or not. The costs shall be calculated at the current charge-out rates of the relevant consultant(s).

Sealed containers
General: If materials or products are supplied by the manufacturer in closed or sealed containers or
packages, bring the materials or products to point of use in the original containers or packages.
Sources policy
General: >
e.g. A preference for Australian or New Zealand goods.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 COMPLETION
Samples
General: Remove unincorporated samples on completion.
Warranties
General: Name the Principal as warrantee in conformance with the Warranty schedule. Register with
manufacturers as necessary. Retain copies delivered with components and equipment.
Check that the principal/proprietor is to be the warrantee - vary accordingly. The principal/proprietor may not be the owner or
end user in every case, for example.
Commencement: Commence warranty periods at practical completion or at acceptance of installation,
if acceptance is not concurrent with practical completion.
Approval of installer: If installation is not by manufacturer, and product warranty is conditional on the
manufacturer’s approval of the installer, submit the manufacturer’s written approval of the installing
firm.
Schedule all warranties in the Warranty schedule of this worksection or in the appropriate technical worksection. If located in
technical worksections edit this clause and delete the schedule. See also the Commentary.
3.2 RECORD DRAWINGS

General
General: Submit record drawings. Show the “as installed” locations of building elements, plant and
equipment. Include “as installed” amendments to shop drawings. Show off-the-grid dimensions where
applicable.
Date for submission: Within 2 weeks after practical completion.
Changes made during the defects liability (maintenance) period may require a re-issue of the drawings completed at practical
completion. Specify if this requirement is applicable.
Accuracy
Documents: Incorporate all modifications made during the progress of the work and testing period.
Show any provisions for the future.
Endorsement: Sign and date all record drawings. Keep one set of shop drawings on site at all times
expressly for the purpose of marking changes made during the progress of the works.
Drawing layout
General: Use the same borders and title block as the contract drawings.
Quantity and format
General: Refer to Submissions.
3.3 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

General
General: Submit operation and maintenance manuals for installations.
Authors and compilers: Personnel experienced in the maintenance and operation of equipment and
systems installed, and with editorial ability.
Referenced documents: If referenced documents or technical worksections require that manuals be
submitted, include corresponding material in the operation and maintenance manuals.
Subdivision: By installation or system, depending on project size.
Date for submission: Within 2 weeks after practical completion.

Contents
General: Include the following:
- Certificates:
. Certificates from authorities.
. Copies of manufacturers’ warranties.
. Product certification.
- Directory: Names, addresses, and telephone and facsimile numbers of principal consultant,
subconsultants, contractor, subcontractors and names of responsible parties.
- Drawings:
. Record drawings, full size.
- Drawings and technical data: As necessary for the efficient operation and maintenance of the
installation.
- Equipment descriptions:
. Name, address and telephone and facsimile numbers of the manufacturer and supplier of items of
equipment installed, together with catalogue list numbers.
. Schedules (system by system) of equipment, stating locations, duties, performance figures and
dates of manufacture. Provide a unique code number cross-referenced to the record and
diagrammatic drawings and schedules, including spare parts schedule, for each item of
equipment installed.
- Maintenance procedures:
. Detailed recommendations for preventative maintenance frequency and procedures.
. Manufacturer’s technical literature as appropriate. Register with manufacturer as necessary.
Retain copies delivered with equipment.
. Safe trouble-shooting, disassembly, repair and reassembly, cleaning, alignment and adjustment,
balancing and checking procedures. Provide logical step-by-step sequence of instructions for
each procedure.
. Schedule of spares recommended to be held on site, being those items subject to wear or
deterioration and which may involve the principal in extended deliveries when replacements are
required. Include complete nomenclature and model numbers, and local sources of supply.
- Operation procedures:
. Manufacturers’ technical literature as appropriate.
- Table of contents: For each volume. Title to match cover.
Format – electronic copies
Printing: Provide material that can be legibly printed on A4 size paper.
Scope: Provide the same material as specified for hardcopy in electronic format.
Quantity and format: Refer to Electronic submissions.
Format – hard copy
General: A4 size loose leaf, in commercial quality, 4 ring binders with hard covers, each indexed,
divided and titled. Include the following features:
- Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title “OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
MANUAL”, to spine. Identify title of project, volume number, volume subject matter, and date of
issue.
- Dividers: Durable divider for each separate element, with typed description of system and major
equipment components. Clearly print short titles under laminated plastic tabs.
- Drawings: Fold drawings to A4 size and accommodate them in the binders so that they may be
unfolded without being detached from the rings. Provide with reinforced punched binder tabs.
- Pagination: Number pages.
- Ring size: 50 mm maximum, with compressor bars.
- Text: Manufacturers’ printed data, including associated diagrams, or typewritten, single-sided on
bond paper, in clear concise English.
Number of copies: 3.

3.4 CLEANING
Final cleaning
General: Before practical completion, clean throughout, including all exterior and interior surfaces
except those totally and permanently concealed from view.
Labels: Remove all labels not required for maintenance.
4 SELECTIONS
4.1 SCHEDULES
Structural design actions schedule
For sources of quantities see the Commentary under Structural design actions.
Quantity and symbol Type or location

A B C
Permanent, imposed and other actions
Additional to AS/NZS 1170.1
Earthquake actions
Acceleration coefficient, α
Earthquake design category
Probability factor, Kp
Snow and ice actions
Characteristic value of snow load on ground, sg
Exposure reduction coefficient, Ce
Hill shape multiplier, Mh
Wind actions
Direction multiplier, Md
Regional ultimate limit state design wind speed,
VR(ultimate)
Regional serviceability limit state design wind
speed, VR(serviceability)
Shielding multiplier, Ms
Terrain category
Topographic multiplier, Mt
AS/NZS 1170.0 specifies general procedures and criteria for the structural design of a building or structure in limit states format.
It covers the following actions:
• Permanent action (formerly dead load).
• Imposed action (formerly live load).
• Wind.
• Snow.
• Earthquake.
• Liquid pressure.
• Ground water.
• Rainwater ponding.
• Earth pressure.

Use this schedule to specify design values to be used by contractors undertaking detailed design of components.
Warranty schedule
Warranty Form Period
Refer to RAIA Advisory Note AN14.02.100 which offers a form of warranty with an appendix, as a guide only. The form(s)
required should be provided as part of the contract documentation.

ADHESIVES, SEALANTS AND FASTENERS GENERAL
ADHESIVES, SEALANTS AND FASTENERS
There is a Product Partner for this worksection. Click the logo to be redirected to their page.
This worksection is applicable to the most commonly used adhesives, sealants and fastener and provides basic defaults.
• There are no directly related NATSPEC worksections.
• General requirements.
This worksection does not include adhesives for:
• Lining.
• Joinery.
• Ceramic tiling and Stone and terrazzo tiling.
• Resilient finishes.
• Applied timber flooring.
• Wall papering.
which are specific to particular some worksections and will be found there.
This worksection does not include sealants for:
• Fire-stopping
• Curtain walls.
• Windows.
• Structural glazing.
• Glass blockwork.
• Tiling.
• Stainless steel benching.
which are specific to particular worksections and will be found there.
• Hydraulic general requirements.
• Hydraulic design and install.
• Electrical general requirements.
• Add any novel material to this specification.
1 GENERAL

General
General: Conform to the General requirements worksection.

The General requirements worksection contains umbrella requirements for referenced documents, inspections, tests, samples,
contractor’s submissions, proprietary items, manufacturers’ recommendations, warranties, record drawings, operation and
maintenance manuals, and the like.
They need not be specified here unless you need to relocate them, for example if this is to be the specification for a package
contract. In this case make sure that the interlocking contracts leave no loopholes, such as work by non-existent ‘others’, and
have no overlaps.
Associated worksections
>
List worksections cross referenced by this worksection. (General requirements references the other general worksections e.g.
Metals and prefinishes do not repeat them here.) You may also wish to direct the contractor to other worksections where there
may be work that is closely associated with this work.
2 EXECUTION
2.1 ADHESIVES AND SEALANTS

Standards
Many types of adhesives in widespread use are not covered by Australian standards.
There is some overlap between adhesives and sealants. For example, silicone sealants are widely used as construction
adhesives.
Mastic adhesive: To AS 2329.
Non-structural adhesive for timber: To AS 2754.3.
Polymer emulsion adhesive for timber: To AS 2754.2, not inferior to Type 3 if required to be water-
resistant.
Sealing compound (polyurethane, polysulphide, acrylic):
- Single component: To ASTM C920.
Sealing compound (silicone):
- Single component: To TT-S-1543B.
Performance
General: Provide adhesives and sealants capable of transmitting imposed loads, sufficient to ensure
the rigidity of the assembly, or integrity of the joint and which will not cause discolouration of finished
surfaces.
Installed sealant tests
Sampling: For each sealant test take 3 samples of installed and cured sealant, each at least 50 mm
long, from completed joints.
Testing: Test to the standard applicable to the sealant type, and to conform to the Installed sealant
tests schedule.
Reinstatement: Make good the joints from which the samples were taken.
Installed sealant tests schedule
Item to be tested Property to be tested Applicable standard
2.2 SEALANT JOINTING

Preparation for jointing
General: Immediately before jointing remove loose particles from the joint, using oil-free compressed
air.

Taping
General: Protect the surface on each side of the joint using 50 mm wide masking tape or equivalent
means. On completion of pointing remove the tape and remove any stains or marks from the surface.
Jointing materials
General: Provide recommended jointing and pointing materials which are compatible with each other
and with the contact surfaces and non staining to finished surfaces. Do not provide bituminous
materials on absorbent surfaces.
Priming: Apply the recommended primer to the surfaces in contact with sealant materials.
Sealant colour: >
Extend these selections to cover multiple locations, or omit and note in the Selections of applicable worksections.
Foamed materials (in compressible fillers and backing rods): Closed cell or impregnated types which
do not absorb water.
Bond breaking: Provide backing rods, and other back-up materials for sealants, which do not adhere
to the sealant.
Sealant proportions
Depth of elastomeric sealant: One half the joint width, or 6 mm, whichever is the greater.
Sealant application
General: Apply the sealant to dry joint surfaces using a pneumatic applicator gun. Do not apply the
sealant in unsuitable weather conditions (e.g. when the ambient temperature is outside the range 5 –
40°C) or outside the recommended working time for the material or the primer.
Joint finish
General: Produced a smooth, slightly concave surface using a tool designed for the purpose.
Protection
General: Protect the joint from inclement weather during the setting or curing period of the material.
Edge to edge joints
Method of sealing: >
2.3 FASTENERS
Conformance to these standards is particularly important for structural applications and where durability is an issue (e.g.
exposed coastal sites). A number of these standards exist partly to ensure dimensional compatibility e.g. between nuts and
bolts, and are based on international standards.
Mild steel, aluminium and zinc-plated fasteners should not be used in CCA treated timbers. Epoxy coated, brass, silicon bronze,
monel or stainless steel are preferred.
The product grade in the Bolts, Nuts and Screws cited standards refers to the quality of the product and to the size of the
tolerances where grade A is the most precise and grade C is the least precise.
General
Masonry anchors: To be proprietary expansion or chemical types.
Plain washers: To AS 1237.1.
- Provide washers to the heads and nuts of bolts, and the nuts of coach bolts.
Plugs: To be proprietary purpose-made plastic.
Powder-actuated fasteners: To AS/NZS 1873.4.
Steel nails: To AS 2334.
- Length: At least 2.5 x the thickness of the member being secured, and at least 4 x the thickness if
the member is plywood or building board < 10 mm thick.
Unified hexagon bolts, screws and nuts: To AS/NZS 2465.
Bolts
Coach bolts: To AS/NZS 1390.
Hexagon bolts Grades A and B: To AS 1110.1.
Hexagon bolts Grade C: To AS 1111.1.
Corrosion resistance
Designate the corrosivity category of the project in General requirements. Delete from the following the tables for corrosivity
categories that do not apply.

Steel products: Conform to the Corrosion resistance table or provide proprietary products with
metallic and/or organic coatings of equivalent corrosion resistance.
Corrosion resistance table – Low corrosivity category
Situation1 Self Threaded fasteners and Powder actuated fasteners: Material or
drilling anchors: Material or minimum local metallic coating
screws to minimum local metallic thickness (µm)
AS 3566: coating thickness (µm)
Class
Internal 1 Electroplated zinc 4 Electroplated zinc 4
External 3 Electroplated zinc or galvanize Stainless 316
30
1
Situation:
- Internal: Includes building fabric protected from salt and moisture by vapour barriers, sarking,
sheathing and building wraps.
- External: Includes external leaf and air spaces behind single skin brickwork or blockwork walls.
Corrosion resistance table – medium corrosivity category

Class
Internal 2 Electroplated zinc 12 Electroplated zinc 12
External 4 Hot-dip galvanize 50 Stainless 316
1
Situation:
Corrosion resistance table – high corrosivity category

Class
Internal 3 Electroplated zinc or galvanize Stainless 316
30
External Stainless Stainless 316 Stainless 316

316
1
Situation:
This table is an interpretation of various standards and the BCA. Edit to suit the project. Do not expect the contractor to
determine the Corrosivity category. Coordinate with other worksections.
Note that the Corrosivity categories relate to those in AS/NZS 2312 which are more recent than in AS 3700. See General
requirements for more discussion.
AS/NZS 2312 has two categories ‘Very high’ and ‘Inland tropical’ which are not addressed here nor in AS 3700. Outside the
categories given in the table, particularly closer to surf coasts consider corrosion protection requirements in more detail.
Finishes
Electroplating:
- Metric thread: To AS 1897.

- Imperial thread: To AS 4397.

Galvanizing:
- Threaded fasteners: To AS 1214.
- Other fasteners: To AS/NZS 4680.
Mild steel fasteners: Galvanize if:
- Exposed to weather.
- Embedded in masonry.
- In external timbers such as weatherboards or decking.
- In contact with chemically treated timber.
Nuts
Hexagon chamfered thin nuts Grades A and B: To AS 1112.4.
Hexagon nuts Grade C: To AS 1112.3.
Hexagon nuts Style 1 Grades A and B: To AS 1112.1.
Hexagon nuts Style 2 Grades A and B: To AS 1112.2.
Performance
Provide fasteners capable of transmitting the loads imposed, and sufficient to ensure the rigidity of the
assembly.
Screws
Coach screws: To AS/NZS 1393.
Hexagon screws Grades A and B: To AS 1110.2.
Hexagon screws: Grade C To AS 1111.2.
Hexagon socket screws: To AS 1420 and AS/NZS 1421.
Machine screws: To AS/NZS 1427.
Self-drilling screws: To AS 3566.1 and AS 3566.2.
Tapping screws:
- Crossed recessed countersunk (flat – common head style): To AS/NZS 4407.
- Crossed recessed pan: To AS/NZS 4406.
- Crossed recessed raised countersunk (oval): To AS/NZS 4408.
- Hexagon: To AS/NZS 4402.
- Hexagon flange: To AS/NZS 4410.
- Hexagon washer: To AS/NZS 4409.
- Slotted countersunk (flat – common head style): To AS/NZS 4404.
- Slotted pan: To AS/NZS 4403.
- Slotted raised countersunk (oval – common head style): To AS/NZS 4405.

FIRE-STOPPING GENERAL
FIRE-STOPPING
This worksection is applicable to the requirements for fire-stopping which flow from the deemed-to-satisfy BCA clauses C3.15
(Fire protection of openings for service installations) and C3.16 (Fire protection of construction joints).
Clauses which are deemed-to-satisfy in the BCA must be specified if they are to apply in the project. BCA clause C3.15
references several alternatives including:
• AS 4072.1 (and AS 1530.4), for type testing of service penetration fire protection.
• BCA Specification C3.15, for installation of certain metal pipes, sanitary plumbing, wires and cables, and electrical switches
and outlets.
Clause C3.16 references AS 1530.4, for type testing of construction joint fire protection.
For fire-stopping the relevant requirements boil down to those in AS 4072.1, which references AS 1530.4, and those in BCA
Specification C3.15 clause 7. It is suggested that the specification be based on AS 4072.1, for simplicity. AS 4072.1 contains
several options which need to be addressed.
• Ductwork fire-stopping. For fire dampers in ductwork at penetrations – see the Ductwork worksection. C3.15 references
AS/NZS 1668.1, for installation of HVAC ducts and equipment (not relevant to this worksection). It may be necessary to
remove combustible insulation from insulated pipes and ducts where such services penetrate fire-rated elements, and
replace it with mineral wool (non-combustible) insulation.
• Curtain wall fire-stopping (between slabs and curtain walls, and inside hollow curtain walls at the floor slab) may be
specified in that worksection (see Curtain walls – Fire-stopping), or here.
• Fire-stopping of penetrations. Fire-stopping of penetrations and of control joints is quite different. The former are static –
simple friction-fitting of mineral wool is often enough. The latter are dynamic - adhesion and the ability to move are
essential.
Coordination with services engineers for service penetrations e.g. locations, sleeving (see General requirements - Building
penetrations), re-penetration, penetrant details (e.g. materials, contents and sizes) and penetration sizes, is essential. The
number of service penetrations should be minimised, and they should be kept as small as practicable. Fire-stopping of power
wiring at penetrations must conform to the Wiring Rules (AS/NZS 3000 clause 1.7.13).
Coordination with structural engineers is also required, for control joint fire-stopping and to ensure that service penetrations are
non-loadbearing.
Ensure that fire-stopping is specified consistently, without duplication or gaps - ideally only once, in this worksection. Service
penetrations will often contain several services e.g. fire, power, water supply. The specification of fire-stopping can easily get
out of hand if tackled in more than one worksection.
• Individual penetrations to be fire-stopped could be identified and coded, for scheduling here, for example.
• Coordination with drawings is also vital.

1 GENERAL

General
have no overlaps.
>
1.2 GENERAL STANDARDS

General
Because fire-stopping is controlled through the BCA, specification of proprietary items must conform to BCA requirements,
reflected in this worksection. In particular, type testing to AS 4072.1 and/or AS 1530.4 and/or BCA Specification C3.15 clause 7
will be required. Type testing to overseas standards may be acceptable to the building control officer, but in this case one is
working outside the deemed-to-satisfy solutions in the BCA, on which this worksection is based. Amend accordingly.
Service penetration fire-stopping systems: To BCA clause C3.15.
The deemed-to-satisfy BCA clauses C3.15(a) & (b) require, somewhat redundantly, type testing to both AS 4072.1 and
AS 1530.4. AS 4072.1 covers design, type testing, installation and certification of fire-stopping at service penetrations through
fire-rated elements, and control joints between fire-rated elements. Clause C3.15(b) offers a partial exemption in return for some
restrictions.
The deemed-to-satisfy BCA clauses C3.15(d), (e), (f) & (g) require installation of fire-stopping to BCA Specification C3.15 Part 7
Fire-stopping. This covers material, installation and type testing. If these clauses are to be worked to, then the design of the
penetrations must take into account the restrictions imposed in them, and in Specification C3.15 at large.
The BCA clauses are alternatives - C3.15(a) is the most straightforward, effectively just citing AS 4072.1. Amend the paragraph
if appropriate.
Control joint fire-stopping systems: To AS 4072.1.
Or, to BCA clause C3.16.
The deemed-to-satisfy BCA clause C3.16 requires type testing to AS 1530.4, which is cited in AS 4072.1, so these alternatives
amount to nearly the same thing. But AS 4072.1 (Appendix A, clause A6) advises that “The standard fire test (i.e. AS 1530.4) on
elements containing control joints is a test for joints within elements and not between different elements”. Nevertheless, it is the
standard fire test which is used, and supplemented by other tests, in AS 4072.1.
Use of AS 4072.1 is probably preferred. Amend the paragraph if desired.
1.3 INSPECTION
A pre-installation conference before beginning fire-stopping might be appropriate. If so, say so e.g. “Hold a meeting at the job
site with the fire-stopping materials manufacturer and installer to review the fire-stopping requirements. Give notice.”
Notice
Inspection: Give sufficient notice so that inspection may be made of the following:
- Service penetrations completed and ready for fire-stopping.
- Finished fire-stopping, before being concealed.
Include authority inspections if appropriate. Consider an inspection to check for adhesion and curing.
Add Hold points, if required.

1.4 TESTS
AS 4072.1 provides several options which may need to be addressed.
Service penetration fire-stopping systems
Insulation measurements: Required.
See AS 4072.1 clause 3.1.5. BCA clause C3.15(b) allows an exemption for the insulation criteria if the penetrating service is
protected so that combustible material cannot be located within 100 mm of it, and is not in a required exit. If this is not the case,
or if this specification is to clause C3.15(a) (the default provided above), then insulation failure needs to be evaluated.
Control joint fire-stopping systems
Physical performance: In accordance with the recommendations of AS 4072.1 Appendix C.
- Project joint width (mm): >
- Project movement amplitude (mm): >
- Number of 24 hour cycles (minimum): >
Informative in the standard. See AS 4072.1 clause 2.4.2. The manufacturer should have type-tested the system to this test
already. Provide the prompted information to ensure that the width and amplitude used in the test correspond to the project
width and amplitude.
• Project movement amplitude: Expected settlement, live load and thermal movement and so on. Consult structural
engineer.
• Number of 24 hour cycles: To be agreed between sponsor i.e. manufacturer, and testing authority. Specify only if no type
test has been done, and if the project is paying for the test.
Multiple penetration fire-stopping systems
Insulation measurements: Required.
See AS 4072.1 clause 3.1.8. If insulation failure needs to be evaluated, say so.
Services
End conditions: >
i.e. Sealed or unsealed on the exposed side. See AS 4072.1 clause 3.1.9, which defaults to unsealed.
Support: >
i.e. Allow for relative movement, or not. See AS 4072.1 clause 3.1.11.
1.5 SAMPLES
Sample panels
General: Supply a sample panel of each fire-stopping assembly, on representative substrates. If built
into the works, mark them.
Perhaps limit to those assemblies exposed to view, since quality of finish will be more important e.g. colour, pattern and to those
assemblies specified without reference to brand.
Size: 500 mm run for junction seals and 500 x 500 mm area for penetration seals.
1.6 SUBMISSIONS
Consider shop drawings for penetrations, wall/slab intersections, changes of plane, control joints, expansion joints and blank
openings.
Manufacturers’ information
Type tests: Submit type test certificates, including drawings of tested details, for each specified or
proposed fire-stopping system.
- Physical performance: Submit report to AS 4072.1 Appendix C.
See the Commentary for more information.
Product data: Submit evidence that systems specified without reference to brand conform to specified
requirements.
Instructions: Submit copies of relevant manufacturers’ instructions, for systems specified without
reference to brand.
Material safety data sheets (MSDS): Submit MSDS for systems specified without reference to brand.
Notice
General: Give notice if substrates or penetrants or both are not suitable for fire-stopping.

2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
General
Shelf life: Ensure materials used have not exceeded their shelf life.
Toxic materials: Free of asbestos and lead and free of, nor requiring the use of, toxic solvents.
Specify low-VOC solvents if desired. Some clues might be had from SUSDP Appendix P Uniform Paint Standard.
Toxicity in fire: Non-toxic.
Fire-stop mortars
Type: Re-enterable cement-based compound, mixed with water. Non-shrinking, moisture resistant.
Insoluble in water after setting.
For large penetrations. Setting time typically 60 min., curing time 24 hours depending upon the temperature and humidity during
curing.
Formulated compound of incombustible fibres
Material: Formulated compound mixed with mineral fibres, non-shrinking, moisture resistant. Insoluble
in water after setting.
Not for joints.
Fibre stuffing
Not for joints. Alkaline water contamination of the backer or filler materials may cause corrosion of metallic penetrating items.
Material: Mineral fibre stuffing insulation, dry and free of other contaminants.
Or, ceramic. Or, glass fibre and thermosetting resins.
Standard: >
e.g. ASTM C 665, Type I.
Sealant: >
To keep in the dust. e.g. Lightweight, low density, PVC based, non-asbestos setting compound formulated to mix easily with
water.
Fire-stop composite sheets >
Usually for re-penetrations. Mechanically fixed, sealed with intumescents.
Fire-stop sealants
Material: Elastomeric sealant. Soft, permanently flexible, non-sag, non-shrinking, moisture resistant.
Capable of providing a smoke-tight, gas-tight and waterproof seal when properly installed. Insoluble in
water after setting.
Supplied in sealants and foams. For joints. Working time typically 10 min., curing time 7 days.
Material: Or, multiple component.
Fire-stop foams
Material: Single component compound of reactive foam ingredients, non-shrinking, moisture resistant.
Insoluble in water after setting.
For joints. Setting time typically 1 – 4 min. at 24°C.
Material: Or, multiple component. Two component is common.
Fire-stop putty
Material: Single component, mouldable, permanently flexible, non-shrinking, moisture resistant,
intumescent compound which expands on exposure to surface heat gain, forming a high-volume
thermally insulating char that closes gaps and voids, resists the turbulence of a severe fire. Capable of
being placed by hand to form an immediate fire seal. Insoluble in water after setting.
For joints. Intumescent materials come as sealants, wraps, mastics, putty and coatings, and as part of collar systems for pipes.
Setting time typically 15 - 30 min., curing time over 3 hours. Intumescents are used for combustible penetrants such as
insulated and plastic piping.
Product certification
Certifire: >

Certifire Australia Pty Ltd, a partnership between Scientific Services Laboratories (SSL) and Warrington Fire Research (Aust),
operates the Certifire Scheme for passive fire protection systems. The scheme covers suppliers of fire protection systems and
the contractors who install these systems. The scheme certifies that the system has been assessed against a specific Certifire
schedule. The schedules require testing to relevant Australian standards and a quality assurance scheme to be in place. A
register of current certificates is available on the Certifire Australia website at www.certifire.com.au.
Fire-stopping materials schedule
Properties Fire-stopping codes
FS1 FS2 FS3
Material or component
Elongation/shrinkage (%)
Potential expansion (minimum)
Adhesion and bond to substrate (kPa)
Compressive strength (kPa)
Density (kg/m³)
Vapour permeability (ng/Pa.s.m2)
Air permeability (L/s.m2)
Durability in service
Surface durability
Toxicity
Recycled content
Re-penetrability
Surface texture
Colour
Also consider where dust-free applications are required.

Elongation/shrinkage: Can vary from 5 to 1800%, depending on the material.
Potential expansion: Intumescents only. Should be at least 200 to 300%. Most intumescents offer 800 to 1000%.
3
Density: Very variable. For mineral fibre stuffing - at least 8kg/m .
Vapour permeability: If penetrated wall is in the plane of the of the vapour retarder.
Air permeability: If penetrated wall is in the plane of the of the air barrier.
Durability in service: e.g. 10 years, 25 years.
Surface durability: When traffic runs over the fire-stop.
Recycled content: Mineral fibre products may well contain a % of recycled content. A minimum could be specified for these
products.
Colour: e.g. Black, dark grey. If being used in areas exposed to view, in which case this may not be the only extra consideration.
Final cured colour can also indicate the correct mix formulation and expected performance.
2.2 COMPONENTS
Fire-stop collars
Material: Mechanical device with incombustible intumescent fillers covered with sheet steel jacket.
Airtight and watertight.
Not for joints.
Material: Or, may be filled with fire-stop silicone.

Fire-stop pillows
Material: Formed self-contained compressible flexible mineral fibre in cloth bags, rated to permit
frequent changes in service.
Usually for re-penetrations.
Material: Or, may be filled with intumescent material.
Accessories
Primer: >
As recommended by manufacturer for substrates.
Permanent dam material: Non-combustible.
For intumescents, fire-stop mortars and fire-stop silicones. Delete if dam material is not to be permanent.
- Type: >
e.g. Mineral fibreboard, ceramic fibre matting, mineral fibre matting, sheet metal, alumina silicate fibre board. Backers may
include urethane foam rod, or glass fibre rope.
Metal lath: >
For cable tray penetrations - used to enclose both sides of the vertical penetration, to keep fire-stop pillows in place, and to
prevent unauthorised or accidental removal of fire-stopping.
Installation accessories: Provide clips, collars, fasteners, temporary stops and dams, and other
devices required to position, support and contain fire-stopping and accessories.
Mineral wool often needs clips or retainers to hold it in place.
Certifire: >
3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXECUTION GENERALLY

AS 4072.1 clause 1.5 requires installation to conform to manufacturer’s instructions, and to the standard.
General
Extent: Fire-stop and smoke-stop interruptions to fire-rated assemblies, materials and components,
including penetrations through fire-rated elements, breaks within fire-rated elements (e.g. expansion
joints), and junctions between fire-rated elements. The Fire-stopping systems schedule is not
necessarily comprehensive.
For this paragraph to work, fire-rated elements must be identified, either on the drawings, or in a schedule. Add curtain wall fire-
stopping if not covered in that worksection - this is at a junction between a fire-rated element (slab) and a non-fire-rated element
(curtain wall), so doesn’t fit into the description provided.
Sequence: Fire-stop after services have been installed through penetrations and properly spaced and
supported, after sleeving where appropriate, and after removal of temporary lines, but before
restricting access to the penetrations, including before dry lining.
Installer qualifications: >
e.g. “Experienced (minimum 5 years documented) in the installation of fire-stopping that is similar in material, design, and extent
to that specified.” Contractor’s certification that the installer has the specified experience may also be required, as might
evidence of the manufacturers’ approval, licensing and supervision of the installer(s).
Ventilation: Supply ventilation for non-aqueous solvent-cured materials.
Density: Apply fire-stopping material to uniform density.
Fire-stopping exposed to view: Finish surfaces to a uniform and level condition.
Cable separation: Maintain.
Protection: Protect adjacent surfaces from damage arising through installation of fire-stopping. Protect
completed fire-stopping from damage arising from other work.
Loose or damaged fire-stopping material: Remove and replace.
Penetrations by pipes and ducts: Allow for thermal movement of the pipes and ducts.

Preventing displacement: Reinforce or support fire-stopping materials with non-combustible materials

when:
- The unsupported span of the fire-stopping materials > 100 mm.
- The fire-stopping materials are non-rigid (unless shown to be satisfactory by test).
Environmental management: >
Intumescents, fire-stop mortar and fire-stop silicone require special handling - refer to material safety data sheets for OH&S and
environmental issues.
Ambient conditions: >
Consider a blanket requirement to maintain building temperature at over 5°C during and after installation. Some specifications
suggest that the permanent HVAC should be in operation. Application temperature for multi-component foams and water based
products is critical. Consult manufacturer’s data. Generally do not apply materials when temperature of substrate material and
ambient air is below 5°C, and maintain this minimum temperature before, during, and for 3 days after installation of materials.
Cold-temperature products are available.
Large openings: Provide fire-stopping capable of supporting the same loads as the surrounding
element or provide similar structural support around the opening.
Applies to vertical and horizontal openings. Alternatively, protect to ensure that the fire-stopping never has to support such
loads. One specification suggests that openings in floors larger than 100 mm would require this. Fire-stopping is supposed to be
non-load-bearing in the sense of carrying structural loads.
Preparation
Cleaning: Clean substrates of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, and other matter which may affect
bond of fire-stop material.
Primer: Clean and dry substrates for primers and sealants.
Restraint: Install backing and/or damming materials to arrest liquid material leakage. Remove
temporary dams after material has cured.
3.2 SYSTEMS
A fire-stopping system can be defined as the sum of the fire-stopping, substrates and penetrants. This worksection can only
describe the first.
Fire-stop mortars
Ambient conditions: Do not install below 5°C.
Formulated compound of incombustible fibres
Installation: >
Adapt manufacturer’s instructions to project requirements to completely close openings.
Fibre stuffing
Installation: Compress to 40% of its uncompressed volume.
Installation of inert stuffing is not temperature dependant.
Fire-stop composite sheets
Installation: >
Fire-stop sealants
Ambient conditions: Do not store above 32°C. Do not install outside the temperature range
recommended by the sealant manufacturer. Do not install when humidity exceeds that recommended
by the sealant manufacturer for safe installation.
Fire-stop foams
Ambient conditions: Do not store above 32°C. Do not install below 15°C or above 32°C. Do not apply
when temperature of substrate and air is below 15°C. Maintain this minimum temperature before,
during and for 3 days after installation.
Refer to product information.
Installation: Test substrates for adhesion and prime if necessary. Place in layers to ensure
homogenous density, filling cavities and spaces. Place sealant to completely seal junctions with
adjacent dissimilar materials.

Fire-stop putty
Ambient conditions: Do not install below 5°C. Do not allow the material to freeze.
Installation: >
Fire-stop collars
Installation: >
Fire-stop pillows
Ambient conditions: Do not install in conditions outside of the manufacturer’s recommendations.
Fire-stopping systems schedule
Location Substrate Penetrants Fire-stopping FRL Resistance to
code the incipient
spread of fire
Fire walls
Stair walls
Room to room n/a
partitions -
head/slab
junction
Room to room metallic pipe
partitions and conduit
Room to room non-metallic
partitions pipe and
conduit
Floors metallic pipe
and conduit
Curtain wall, n/a
between slab
and inner face of
curtain wall
Other matters which should be considered include exposure to view, protection against mechanical damage, and access to
penetrations e.g. for penetrations subject to servicing or modification, or for penetrations for future expansion.
Location: These are only some examples. The nature of the penetrating service(s) is an important consideration. The BCA
restricts some installations e.g. clause C3.15(e) is restricted to sanitary plumbing, metal or UPVC, penetrating floors, and
located in a fire isolated sanitary compartment. So maybe C3.15 types need to be identified here (but see commentary to
General standards). May need to be more specific, unless shown on the drawings e.g. which walls are fire walls? Individual
penetrations, coded on the drawings, may need to be identified instead e.g. penetrations P1, P4 and P22 may have fire-
stopping code FS3, etc. The point is to avoid ambiguity.
A list of some typical applications for fire-stopping follows:
• Penetrations through fire-rated masonry, concrete and plasterboard partitions and walls.
• Edge of floor slabs at curtain wall and precast concrete panels.
• Top of fire-rated masonry and plasterboard partitions.
• Intersection of fire-rated masonry and plasterboard partitions.
• Control and sway joints in fire-rated masonry and plasterboard partitions and walls.
• Openings for building services through fire-rated floor slabs, ceilings and roofs.
• Openings and sleeves installed for future use through fire separations.
• Around mechanical and electrical assemblies penetrating fire separations.
Fire-stopping code: Defined in the Fire-stopping materials schedule, above. These codes could also be used on the
drawings, though this might be redundant, depending on how Location: has been described.
FRL: See BCA clause C3.15. The same fire-stopping system may be able to provide different levels of fire rating.

Resistance to the incipient spread of fire: See BCA clause C3.15. The same fire-stopping system may be able to provide
different levels of fire rating.
Labelling
Label each fire-stopping installation with a permanently fixed tag or sticker containing the following
information:
- Manufacturer’s name.
- Name and address of installer.
- Date of installation.
3.3 COMPLETION SUBMISSIONS

Consider specifying completion tests, involving (for example) a series of 5 fog tests at random locations. Fog units (machines)
should have a formulation output range of 6.8 L/h. Formulation particle size 0.5 – 25 microns. Fogging agent should be non-
toxic, non-staining and should provide a heavy fog at 30 ppm with a permissible airborne level concentration of 50 ppm. Fog at
3
a rate of 4 s / 2.8 m . Maintain the fog density until inspection is complete. Failure occurs if any penetration, joint or void, under
this worksection, emits visible fog.
Certification
General: Submit evidence of compliance, in accordance with the recommendations of AS 4072.1
Appendix B.
Informative in the standard.
Certification: Submit a completed certification document for installed fire-stopped penetrations and
control joints.
- Form: To Figure B1 of AS 4072.1.
Schedule: Submit a schedule of installed fire-stopped penetrations and control joints.
- Form: To Figure B2 of AS 4072.1.
User manual
For fire-stopping systems which are intended to be modified in service, submit user manual.
3.4 MAINTENANCE
Cleaning
Remove spilled and excess fire-stopping materials without damaging other work.

METALS AND PREFINISHES GENERAL
METALS AND PREFINISHES
This worksection is applicable to aluminium and aluminium alloys, steel, coated steel and stainless steel, copper and copper
alloys, brazing, welding, electroplating, anodising, metal spraying, powder coating and prepainting. It identifies relevant
standards for metal alloys and forms, and for prefinishing, selecting default grades in some instances for the most commonly
used metals and a variety of shop finishes. There are many relevant standards, but none are central.
• Steel - hot dip galvanized coatings, for fabrication.
• General requirements, for corrosion resistance defaults.
• Linishing.
• Specify metals and prefinishes in the office Schedule of finishes format.
• Define mill, sand blasted, bead blasted, scratched, linished, polished and other self finishes by reference to approved
samples.
• Note General requirements text default “Retention of samples: Keep endorsed samples in good condition on site, until
practical completion”.
1 GENERAL

General
have no overlaps.
>

2 PRODUCTS
2.1 METALS
Generally particular grades or alloys should be specified in the appropriate worksection, though some defaults are provided
here.
Aluminium and aluminium alloys
Drawn pipe: To AS/NZS 1867.
Drawn rod, bar and strip: To AS/NZS 1865.
Extrusions: To AS/NZS 1866.
Plate and sheets: To AS/NZS 1734.
Coated steel
Electrogalvanizing ferrous hollow and open sections: To AS 4750.
Hot-dip galvanizing (zinc):
- Ferrous open sections by an in-line process: To AS/NZS 4791.
- Ferrous hollow sections by a continuous or specialised process: To AS/NZS 4792.
Metallic-coated sheet: To AS 1397.
- Thickness: Metal thicknesses specified are base metal thicknesses.
Steel wire: To AS/NZS 4534.
Copper and copper alloys
Casting: To AS 1565.
Plate, sheet and strip: To AS 1566.
Rods, bars and sections: To AS/NZS 1567.
Stainless steel
Bars: To ASTM A276.
Plate, sheet and strip: To ASTM A240/A240M.
Welded pipe (round): To AS 1769.
Welded pipe (square): To ASTM A554.
Steel
Sheet: To AS/NZS 1595.
Structural bars and sections: To AS/NZS 3679.1.
Structural hollow section: To AS 1163.
Steel for prefinishes
Cold rolled bar: To AS 1443 “bright”.
Cold rolled sheet: To AS/NZS 1595.
- Designation: CA2S-E.
Electric resistance welded pipe: To AS 1450 “bright”.
3 EXECUTION
Specify the type of metal finish when specifying the article to which it applies. If the minimum coating thicknesses in the
worksection are not acceptable, specify the preferred thickness. See also the Finishes subsection in Structural steel. On
terminology see AS 4108.
3.1 GENERAL
Brazing
General: Ensure brazed joints have sufficient lap to provide a mechanically sound joint.
Butt joints: Do not use butt jointing for joints subject to loads. If butt joints are used, do not rely on the
filler metal fillet only.
Filler metal: To AS 1167.1.

Damage
General: If prefinishes are damaged, including damage caused by unauthorised site cutting or drilling,
remove and replace the damaged item.
Finishing
Visible joints: Finish visible joints made by welding, brazing or soldering using methods appropriate to
the class of work (including grinding or buffing) before further treatment such as painting, galvanizing
or electroplating. Ensure self-finished metals are without surface colour variations after jointing.
Preparation
General: Before applying decorative or protective prefinishes to metal components, complete welding,
cutting, drilling and other fabrication, and prepare the surface using a suitable method.
Standard: To AS 1627.
Priming steel surfaces: If site painting is specified to otherwise uncoated mild steel or similar surfaces:
- Prime after fabrication and before delivery to the works.
- After installation, repair damaged priming and complete the coverage to unprimed surfaces.
Repair
General: If a repair is required to metallic coated sheet or electrogalvanized on inline galvanized steel
products, clean the affected area and apply a two-pack organic primer to AS/NZS 3750.9 or APAS-
2916.
Welding
Aluminium: To AS 1665.
Stainless steel: To AS/NZS 1554.6.
Steel: To AS/NZS 1554.1.
3.2 SELF FINISHING

Mechanical finishes
Bright finished copper alloy surfaces: For indoor applications, apply a clear lacquer protecting coating.
3.3 ELECTROPLATING
For information on some related occupational health and safety issues, see NOHSC Guide “Electroplating”.
Electroplated coatings
Chromium on metals: To AS 1192.
Nickel on metals: To AS 1192.
Service condition number: At least 2.
Service condition number: 2 is for moderate indoor (e.g. bathrooms) and 1 for mild service conditions.
Zinc on iron or steel: To AS 1789.
3.4 ANODISING
Anodising
Thickness grade:
- Indoor applications: At least AA10.
- Outdoor applications: At least AA25.
3.5 METAL SPRAYING

Metal spray
Standard: To ISO 2063.
Minimum thicknesses:
- Indoor applications: 125 µm.
- Outdoor applications: 175 µm.
Process: Electric arc.
Seal coat: Cover the metal spray finish with two coats of vinyl seal to a total dry film thickness of
80 µm.

Seal coat: For enhanced performance in aggressive environments, or as a decorative finish. If a seal coat is required to metal
spray finishes, state “Seal coat: Required” when specifying the article to be metal sprayed.
3.6 POWDER COATING

Preparation
General: Use chemical pretreatments. If recommended, provide conversion coatings.
Aluminium: Pretreat to AS 3715 Appendix G.
Galvanized steel: Clean by immersing in a suitable alkaline or acidic solution, apply a zinc phosphate
chemical conversion coating, rinse and degas.
Unprotected steel: Remove rust to the recommendations of AS 1627.4 to grade Sa 2½ of AS 1627.9.
Clean by immersing in trichloroethylene or an alkaline solution, and apply a coat of iron phosphate.
AS 1627.9 grade Sa 2½ is for “very thorough blast cleaning”.
Thermoset powder coating
Standards: To AS 3715 or AS/NZS 4506 as appropriate.
External use: APAS-0155/2.
Finish: Full gloss.
Internal use: APAS-0155/1.
3.7 PREPAINTING
Air-drying enamel
Application: Spray or brush.
Finish: Full gloss.
General use:
- Primer: Two-pack epoxy primer to APAS-2971.
- Top coats: 2 coats to APAS-0015/1.
Oil resistant use:
- Primer: Two-pack epoxy primer to APAS-2971.
- Top coats: 2 coats to APAS-0024/1.
Equipment paint system
Description: Brush or spray application using paint as follows:
- Full gloss enamel finish coats, oil and petrol resistant: APAS-0024/1, two coats.
- Prime coat to metal surfaces generally: APAS-0032 or APAS-0162/1.
- Prime coat to zinc-coated steel: APAS-0134.
- Undercoat: APAS-0029.
High performance organic coatings
Description: Factory applied spray coatings on aluminium products, including polyvinylidene fluoride
(PVF2) coatings.
Standards: To AAMA 2604 and AS/NZS 2728.
Prepainted metal products
Standard: To AS/NZS 2728.
Product finish: >
AS/NZS 2728 provides for three levels of finish, standard, enhanced and industrial.
Product type: Not lower than the type appropriate to the field of application.
See AS/NZS 2728 clause 1.4.
Stoving enamel
Application: Spray or dip.
Internal use:
- Primer: To APAS-0065.
- Topcoat: To APAS-0066/3.

Two-pack liquid coating

Application: Spray.
Finish: Full gloss.
Primer: Two pack epoxy primer to APAS-2971.
Topcoat:
- Internal use: Proprietary polyurethane or epoxy acrylic system.
- External use: Proprietary polyurethane system.
4 SELECTIONS
Nominate the finish for metal items in the appropriate worksection.

TERMITE CONTROL MANAGEMENT GENERAL
TERMITE CONTROL MANAGEMENT
This worksection is applicable to various chemical and non-chemical systems which may be used, alone or in combination, to
provide termite management. They need to be integrated to be effective and so are located together. They may impact on
Earthwork, In situ concrete, Brick and block construction, and so on. The core standard is AS 3660.1 (Termite management –
New building work), cited in the BCA.
• The concrete slab where used as a termite barrier to AS 3660.1, Coordinate with the concrete worksections where slabs-
on-ground to AS 2870 are used as part of the termite control system. AS 3660.1 cites this standard for this purpose.
• Concrete in situ where a concrete slab is used as a termite barrier.
• Systems and materials not specifically cited in AS 3660.1 but which meet the performance criteria of this Standard. See
AS 3660.1 clause 1.3.
• Termite barriers are not described elsewhere - having the different types collected in one worksection permits ready
specification coordination of composite installations. Nevertheless coordination with other worksections, such as Concrete
in situ, Brick and block construction, Structural timber and Light timber framing, is essential.
5 GENERAL
5.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
Provide termite management materials and systems.
Conform to the Schedule.

General
have no overlaps.
>

5.3 STANDARD
General
Termite barriers: To AS 3660.1.
AS 3660.1 is cited in the BCA which allows impervious termite shields to be used as damp-proof courses.
See AS 3660.2 and AS 3660.3 for termite management in existing buildings and for timber pest inspections of existing buildings,
see AS 4349.3.
5.4 INSPECTION
Notice
Inspection: Give sufficient notice so that inspection may be made of the completed termite barriers.
Hold points, if required, should be inserted here.
5.5 TESTS
Chemical soil barriers – reticulation systems
Type testing: To AS 3660.1 Appendix E.
5.6 SUBMISSIONS
Tests
Submit a Registered testing authority laboratory analysis certificate of chemical soil barrier type testing
to Appendix E.
6 PRODUCTS
Many termite control problems will be avoided if termite resistant structural materials are used.
6.1 NON-CHEMICAL BARRIERS

Concrete slab barrier
Standard: To AS 3660.1 Section 4.
Services penetration barrier type: >
Proprietary UPVC pipe shields at slab penetrations may be used as termite barriers, at least in NSW, Victoria and NT.
Proprietary stainless steel pipe shields at slab penetrations may be used as termite barriers, at least in NSW, Victoria and parts
of Queensland. The manufacturers claim compliance with AS 3660.1. Stainless steel mesh can also be used. It is assumed that
the slab is built to AS 2870 - coordinate. One such barrier, the Alumite Collar, has a CSIRO Appraisal (No. 221).
Termite cap and strip shields
Material: >
Galvanized steel, sheet copper, stainless steel, aluminium alloy, alloys of copper and zinc and woven stainless steel mesh. See
AS 3660.1 clause 5.1.
Woven stainless steel mesh barriers
The Termi-Mesh Termite Control System is what is described in the standard.
Graded stone particles barriers
The Granitgard Physical Termite Barrier System is what is described in the standard, and has a CSIRO Appraisal (No. 166). It
also has an ABCB Certificate of National Accrediation.
Capping system: >
Include additional termite strip shielding, ant capping or cap sealing, to complete the system for certification and warranty.

6.2 CHEMICAL SOIL BARRIERS

General
Spray application
Chemical: >
Chlorpyrifos and synthetic pyrethroids are not persistent in soils and must be reapplied regularly.
Under slabs-on-ground, such a barrier will probably require renewal within 6-10 years - well within the economic life of most
buildings. For example, the Dursban and Remfos (no longer available) product label advises that the expected life of an
underfloor barrier is 6 years north of the Tropic of Capricorn, and 10 years south of it, and for an external barrier the expected
life is 3 and 5 years respectively.
Renewal of spray applied termiticide under slabs-on-ground can be a very messy operation and may expose occupants to the
chemicals used. Accordingly renewal is usually limited to the slab perimeter, particularly because this is where around 60% of
termite attacks occur, and because any termites that were under the slab should be long dead, having been exposed to
termiticide for a number of years.
Reticulation systems
Chemical: >
An alternative approach using termiticides is the use of under-slab reticulation systems, developed to overcome the problem of
reapplication under the slab. These systems include:
• ALTIS Anti-Termite Irrigation System, by ALTIS (CSIRO Appraisal No. 145 and 222).
• SlabSet.
• Termiguard systems (CSIRO Appraisals No. 198, 212 and 230).
Chemical: NRA-approved chemicals include David Grays Micro-Lo Chlorpyrifos Termiticide and Insecticide, and Standard
Remfos Post-Construction Termiticide and Insecticide, by BMD Investments/ Australian Chemical Engineering. Some under-
slab reticulation systems, for example, rely on the slab forming part of the barrier, as do slab penetration systems.
Non-soil matrix barrier
Type: >
See AS 3660.1 clause 2.3.4 and Table 1 which refers to barriers in a non-soil matrix. KORDON TMB and KORDON TB are
manufactured by Aventis ES. KORDON TMB can also be used as a damp-proof membrane (CSIRO Appraisal No. 216).
KORDON TB is a perimeter and penetration barrier (CSIRO Appraisal No. 255).
7 EXECUTION
7.1 NON-CHEMICAL BARRIERS

Concrete slab barrier
Termite cap and strip shields
Woven stainless steel mesh barriers
Graded stone particles barriers
7.2 CHEMICAL SOIL BARRIERS

General
7.3 COMPLETION
Consider including a requirement for an insurance policy, if one is available in the market.
Termite barrier notice
Provide a durable notice permanently fixed in a prominent location to BCA Volume 1 Part B1.4 (i) (ii)
and AS 3660.1 Appendix A.

This sign is nominated in Signs and display statutory signs. If Signs and display is included in the project specification delete
and cross refer as appropriate.
Waste materials
Progressively cleaning: Ensure that no waste materials which could attract termites remain on the site.
Warranty
Terms: >
Completion inspection
At the end of the defects liability period, inspect the termite control systems and submit a report on
their efficacy and status.
Annual inspection is recommended. Accordingly, there should be one at the end of the normal 12 month defects liability period.
8 SELECTIONS
8.1 SCHEDULE
Termite barriers schedule
Barrier designation TB1 TB2 TB3
Location
Slab
Slab penetrations
Slab control joints and footing/slab joints
Under slabs
Building perimeters
Under suspended floors
Timber poles and posts
Composite barriers are possible, as are different types in different locations (e.g. some parts of the building may have slab-on-
ground floors, others may have suspended timber floors). Careful reading of AS 3660.1 is essential. See the Commentary for an
example of a completed schedule.

TIMBER FINISHES AND TREATMENT GENERAL
TIMBER FINISHES AND TREATMENT
This worksection is applicable to timber durability and preservative treatment, to the AS 1604 series (Specification for
preservative treatment). It is aligned to regulations in NSW and Queensland and with other general issues such as moisture
content.
• Floor sanding and finishing.
an applicable worksection.
• None.
Cross reference to this worksection for timber finishes and treatment and finishes, as applicable, from:
• Structural timber.
• Light timber framing.
• Flooring and decking.
A schedule of a timber finishes and treatments may also be appropriate.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
General: Provide finished and treated timbers.

General
have no overlaps.
>

1.3 INTERPRETATION
Definitions
- Plywood: To AS/NZS 4491.
- “Standard trade common names”: To AS/NZS 1148.
- Groups of timbers: Terms employed for that purpose in relevant Australian standards.
The Definitions subclause can be edited to suit the project or deleted if not required.
1.4 SUBMISSIONS
Materials
Rainforest species: Submit source certification.
You may wish to introduce exclusions.
Pressure preservative treatment: For timber required to be pressure treated, submit a certificate or
other satisfactory evidence showing that the timber has been treated.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 TIMBER
Durability
General: Provide timbers having natural durability appropriate to the conditions of use, or preservative-
treated timber of equivalent durability.
Natural durability class of heartwood: To AS 5604.
Minimum requirements:
- Class 1: Timbers in contact with ground.
- Class 2: Timbers above ground, not in continuous contact with moisture, well ventilated, protected
from moisture but exposed to the weather.
- Class 3: Timbers above ground, not in continuous contact with moisture, well ventilated, protected
with a finish, and well maintained.
- Class 4: Timbers fully protected from moisture, indoors, above ground, and well ventilated.
Durability schedule
Location or application Natural durability
Lyctus susceptible timbers

General: Do not provide timbers containing Lyctus susceptible sapwood.
This subclause does not preclude the use of Lyctus susceptible species. If the sapwood has been suitably immunised it is not
longer Lyctus susceptible, and can be used. See AS 1604.1 Appendix A, for hardwoods not susceptible to lyctid attack.
Preservative treatment
For a simple walk-through of the generic concepts as well as the main requirements of the AS/NZS 1604 series, see
SAA HB164.
Glued laminated timber products: To AS/NZS 1604.5.
- Hazard classification: To Table A1.
Laminated veneer lumber (LVL): To AS/NZS 1604.4.
- Hazard classification. To Table A1.
Plywood: To AS/NZS 1604.3.
Reconstituted wood-based products: To AS/NZS 1604.2.

Sawn and round timber: To AS 1604.1.
- Hazard classification: To Table D1.
Preservative treatment schedule
Type of timber Location Preservative treatment
Water-repellent treatment
Repellent: To APAS-0096.
Moisture content
Tolerance: Make milled and dressed products from timbers seasoned as follows:
- To within 3% of the equilibrium moisture content appropriate to the timber and its intended
conditions of use.
- To 10 – 15% moisture content.
- With no more than 3% difference between any 2 pieces in any one group.
Test: To AS/NZS 1080.1.
Moisture content for special site conditions: >
Protection: Protect timber and timber products stored on site from moisture and weather. For milled,
prefinished, prefabricated and similar elements which are protected in the final structure, provide
temporary weather protection until the permanent covering is in place.
Finished sizes
General: Provide milled timbers with actual dimensions which are at least the stated dimensions,
except for dimensions qualified by a term such as “nominal” or “out of” to which industry standards for
finished sizes apply.
Unseasoned timber
General: If unseasoned timber is used, or if variations in moisture are likely, allow for shrinkage,
swelling and differential movement.
Surface finish
Hardwood: To AS 2796.1 Table B1.
Softwood: To AS 4785.1 Table B1.
Terms such as “sawn”, “fine sawn”, “dressed”, “sanded” and “fine sanded” may be sufficient for ordinary purposes. Timber
advisory services and timber promotion bodies can advise on timber surfaces.
AS 2796.1 Table B1 and AS 4785.1 Table B1 specify limits of machining imperfections and surface finish imperfections on
exposed surfaces.
2.2 VENEERS
Tabulate if more than one type of decorative timber or vinyl veneer is required. Use schedule only if basic defaults in Template
are not suitable for certain applications. A blanket reference to the standard will not necessarily give you the material or the
standard you require.
Timber veneer
Veneer quality: To AS/NZS 2270.
Grades (minimum requirement):
- Select grade, veneer quality A, for visible surfaces to have clear finish or to have no coated finish.
- General purpose grade, veneer quality B, for other visible surfaces.
Decorative timber veneer (grade S)
Veneered item: >
e.g. “Flush doors”, “Cupboard doors”, “Cupboard ends”, “Bench tops”.
Veneer timber species: >

Type of cut: >

e.g. “Sliced”, “Semi-rotary peeled” or “Rotary peeled”.
Matching arrangement: >
“Book”, “Centre”, “Diamond”, “Random” or “Slip”.
Vinyl veneer
Type: Proprietary unbacked vinyl fabric factory-bonded to the designated surface.
Veneered item: >
Type and pattern: >
Use manufacturer’s brand name or “To approved sample”.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 WORKMANSHIP
Ploughing
General: Back plough boards liable to warp (e.g. if exposed externally on one face). Make the width,
depth and distribution of ploughs appropriate to the dimensions of the board and degree of exposure.
Painting
Edges: Chamfer edges of work to receive paint or similar coatings.
Priming: For woodwork to be painted, prime hidden surfaces before assembly.

DEMOLITION SITE
DEMOLITION
This worksection is applicable to demolition of existing buildings, structures and services including planning and execution of the
work, protection and support of adjacent structures and removal of demolished material.
• Permanent shoring or underpinning which should be detailed on the project drawings.
• Provisions to be set in place for the use of explosives.
• None.
• Prepare a demolition plan to your office documentation policy
1 GENERAL

General
have no overlaps.
>
1.2 STANDARD
General
Demolition: To AS 2601.
1.3 INTERPRETATION
Demolished materials classes
Salvaged for re-use: Demolished materials scheduled for re-use in the works.
Salvaged for disposal: Demolished materials scheduled for re-use elsewhere.
Demolished for re-use: Non-scheduled demolished materials proposed by contractor for re-use in the
works.
Demolished for removal: Other demolished materials.

DEMOLITION SITE
Dilapidation record
The photographic and written record made before commencement of demolition work of the condition
of the existing building, adjacent buildings, and other relevant structures or facilities.
1.4 INSPECTION
Notice
- Adjacent structures before commencement of demolition.
- Services before disconnection or diversion.
- Trees specified to be retained, before commencement of demolition.
- Contents of building before commencement of demolition.
- Structure after stripping and removal of roof coverings and other external cladding.
- Underground structures after demolition above them.
- Excavations remaining after removal of underground work.
- Site after removal of demolished materials.
- Services after reconnection or diversion.
1.5 SUBMISSIONS
Authorities
Conditions of contract cover compliance with authorities’ requirements and protection of persons and property. Do not repeat.
Use this clause only if evidence of compliance is required, and if necessary, amend the list given.
Evidence of compliance: Before commencing demolition, submit evidence of the following:
- Requirements of authorities relating to the work under the contract have been ascertained.
- A permit to demolish has been obtained from the appropriate authority.
- A scaffold permit has been obtained from the appropriate authority (if scaffolding is proposed to be
used).
- Precautions necessary for protection of persons and property have been taken and suitable
protective and safety devices provided to the approval of the relevant authority.
- Treatment for rodent infestation has been carried out and a certificate has been obtained from the
appropriate authority.
- Fees and other costs have been paid.
Investigation and work plan
An investigation and work plan is required by AS 2601 for all work involving structures or hazardous materials. The amount of
investigation and planning will vary with the extent and complexity of the work. The principal may make available drawings of
the existing structure and other information relevant to the investigation. On contractual considerations see AS 2601 clause
B2.4 and B2.5 on plans and specifications.
Work plan: Submit the work plan before demolition or stripping work. Include the following information:
- The method of protection and support for adjacent property.
- Locations and details of necessary service deviations and terminations.
- If removal of asbestos or of material containing asbestos is required, the information specified in
NOHSC 2002 Code of Practice for the Safe Removal of Asbestos. Include information to be
supplied to the removalist clause 1.1, and information to be supplied by the approved removalist
clause 1.2.
Refer also to RAIA Advisory Note AN14.01.902, to the Construction, Forestry, Mining and Energy Union (CFMEU) document
“Asbestos Kills” and AS 2601 clause 1.6.2 on removal of hazardous substances. AS 4964 provides laboratories with a method
of qualitative identification of amosite, crocidolite and chrysotile asbestos in bulk building materials and soils by polarised light
microscopy and dispersion staining techniques.
- Confirmation of the sequence of work if specified in Demolition below.
- To AS 2601 Section 2.
Approval of a local authority may not apply to minor work. If not required, delete.

DEMOLITION SITE
Records
Dilapidation record: Submit a copy of the dilapidation record for inspection. Submit to each owner of
each adjacent property a copy of the part of the record relating to that property, and obtain their written
agreement to the contents of the record, prior to commencement of demolition.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

Most forms of general conditions of contract (e.g. AS 2124, AS 4000) include provisions for valuable minerals, fossils and relics
found on the site. These remain the property of the principal. ABIC MW-1 and ABIC SW-1 do not include this provision.
Demolished materials
Ownership: Ownership of demolished materials is described in the Demolished materials classes
table.
Reuse: If it is proposed to reuse demolished materials in the works, submit proposals.
Relocation details are commonly shown on the drawings. Salvage and re-use should be encouraged from an environmental
point of view and make sense where it is difficult to match existing items for maintenance, replacement or alteration purposes.
Local authorities often need to know the extent of use of second hand material. Reworking of existing material before re-use
should be specified in the appropriate worksections.
Salvage: Recover without damage materials to be salvaged, for reuse in conformance with the
Salvaged materials for reuse schedule or for disposal in conformance with the Salvaged materials
for disposal schedule.
Removal: Remove from the site demolished materials which are the property of the contractor. Do not
burn or bury on site.
- Transit: Prevent spillage of demolishing materials in transit.
Burial of harmless non-degradable material such as bricks may be permitted to reduce costs. If so say so and allocate a
location.
Demolished materials classes table
Class Ownership
Salvaged for reuse Principal/Proprietor
Salvaged for disposal Principal/Proprietor
Demolished for re-use Principal/Proprietor
Demolished for removal Contractor
Salvaged for re-use: e.g. hardware, equipment. If re-use is not permitted either delete or state “Re-use not permitted”.
Demolished for re-use: e.g. hardcore. On the use of recycled concrete and masonry materials, see SAA HB155.
Salvaged materials for re-use schedule
Item for re-use Location for re-use
Salvaged materials for disposal schedule

Item for disposal Location for disposal

DEMOLITION SITE
For items “salvaged for disposal”. The contractor may be required to deliver them to storage or to another construction site e.g.
“Deliver to ...”.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 SUPPORT
Major support work, if known in advance to be necessary, should usually be designed by the structural engineer and included as
part of the contract, in which case it should be shown on the drawings and specified.
Temporary support
General: If temporary support is required, certification for its design and installation is required from a
professional engineer engaged by the contractor.
Existing buildings: Until permanent support is provided, provide temporary support for sections of
existing buildings which are to be altered and which normally rely for support on work to be
demolished.
Ground support: Support excavations for demolition of underground structures.
Adjacent structures: Provide supports to adjacent structures where necessary, sufficient to prevent
damage resulting from the works.
- Lateral supports: Provide lateral support equal to that given by the structure to be demolished.
- Vertical supports: Provide vertical support where necessary using piling or underpinning or both.
See AS 2601 clause 1.7 for protection of adjoining buildings and E5.1 on basements and other below-ground structures.
Permanent supports
General: If permanent supports for adjacent structures are necessary and are not described, give
notice and obtain instructions.
3.2 PROTECTION
Encroachment
General: Prevent the encroachment of demolished materials onto adjoining property, including public
places.
Weather protection
General: If walls or roofs are opened for alterations and additions or the surfaces of adjoining buildings
are exposed, provide temporary covers to prevent water penetration. Provide covers to protect
existing plant and equipment and materials intended for re-use.
Dust protection
General: Provide dust-proof screens, bulkheads and covers to protect existing finishes and the
immediate environment from dust and debris.
Security
General: If a wall or roof is opened for alterations and additions, provide security against unauthorised
entry to the building.
Temporary screens
General: Fill the whole of designated temporary openings or other spaces using dust and
weatherproof temporary screens, fixed securely to the existing structure, and install to ensure
appropriate shedding of water to avoid damage to retained existing elements or adjacent structures
and contents.
Type: Timber framed screens sheeted with fibre cement and painted. Seal the junctions between the
screens and the openings.
Designated openings: >
Temporary access
General: Provide a substantial temporary doorset fitted with a rim deadlock, and remove on
completion of demolition.
Exposed surfaces
The treatment of exposed surfaces of adjoining properties will vary according to the circumstances, and can usually be
determined only after the surfaces are exposed. Specify here any anticipated treatment,

DEMOLITION SITE
General: Where necessary protect and weatherproof the surfaces of adjacent structures exposed by
demolition.
Treatment of exposed surface: >
e.g. 200 µm thick pigmented polyethylene sheeting lapped and taped at joints and fixed with 75 x 38 mm battens at 600 mm
centres both ways, or permanent covering such as cement render or metal cladding. Special consideration will need to be given
to horizontal surfaces over building elements being retained.
3.3 DEMOLITION
Scope of work clauses are not recommended. Preferably show the extent of demolition on drawings supplemented with drawing
notes. Refer to AS 2601 clauses 1.5 for health and safety, 1.6 for hazardous surfaces and 1.7 for protection.
Dilapidation record
Include the dilapidation record in the contract documents which are signed by the parties.
Purpose: Use the dilapidation record to assess the damage and making good arising out of demolition
work.
Availability: Keep the records of the investigations on site and available for inspection until practical
completion of the contract.
Encroachment
General: If encroachments from adjacent structures are encountered and are not described, give
Sequence >
If a particular sequence is required and is not shown on the drawings, specify it here. This could apply to structural alterations or
work to be completed in stages, and should be incorporated in the work plan prepared by the contractor.
Concrete slabs
General: Using a diamond saw, neatly cut back or trim to new alignment with a clean true face existing
concrete slabs to be partially demolished or penetrated.
Explosives
General: Do not use explosives.
3.4 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS

AS 2601 clause 1.6 specifies examination of the site to determine the presence of noxious, toxic or explosive materials or
conditions, and identification of hazardous materials as part of the investigation of the structure and site. This clause is
additional and requires notice to be given in all cases where hazardous materials are found.
General
General: Hazardous materials that have already been identified are set out in the Identified
hazardous materials schedule.
Identified hazardous materials schedule
Item Hazardous material Component
Complete where known or shown on the drawings. Delete if no survey of hazardous materials has been undertaken.
Hazardous materials
General: Give notice immediately hazardous materials or conditions are found, including the following:
- Asbestos or material containing asbestos.
- Flammable or explosive liquids or gases.
- Toxic, infective or contaminated materials.
- Radiation or radioactive materials.
- Noxious or explosive chemicals.
- Tanks or other containers which have been used for storage of explosive, toxic, infective or
contaminated substances.

DEMOLITION SITE
3.5 COMPLETION
Notice of completion
General: Give at least 7 working days’ notice of completion of demolition so that adjacent structures
may be inspected following completion of demolition.
Making good: Make good any damage arising out of demolition work. Obtain written acceptance from
the owner of each adjoining property of completeness and standard of making good.
Temporary support
General: Clear away at completion of demolition.

SITE PREPARATION SITE
SITE PREPARATION
This worksection is applicable to clearing, environmental protection and retention of trees.
• Earthwork.
• None.
• None.
• Show the location and type of temporary and permanent erosion and sediment control on the drawings.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
General: The aim of this worksection is to clear the site and put in place adequate environmental
controls to allow the commencement of earthworks and/or building works.

General
have no overlaps.
>
1.3 INSPECTION
Notice
- Enclosures to trees to be retained.
- Trees to be removed.
NATSPEC 7 [Insert date]

1.4 SUBMISSIONS
Materials
Submit details of materials proposed, including the following:
- Provision of cleared vegetation for mulching.
Execution
Submit the methods and equipment proposed for the earthworks, including the following:
- Dewatering and groundwater control and disposal of surface water.
- Control of erosion, contamination and sedimentation of the site, surrounding areas and drainage
systems.
- Dust control.
- Noise control.
- Vibration control.
2 EXECUTION
2.1 TEMPORARY LANDSCAPE FENCING

Fence dimensions
Height: 1200 mm.
Maximum post spacing: 5000 mm.
Components sizes
Corner and gate posts: Hardwood or preservative-treated softwood, 250 mm diameter.
Intermediate posts: Star picket.
Gate: Provide a suitable hinged gate with a gate latch.
Wire: Top, intermediate and bottom rows of 3.2 mm plain galvanized steel wire. Thread the top wire
through pieces of plastic tube and through corner posts.
Removal
Completion: Remove the fence at the end of the planting establishment period.
2.2 TREES
Tree protection
Warning sign: Display a sign in a prominent position at each entrance to the site, warning that trees
and plantings are to be protected during the contract. Remove on completion.
Lettering: Road sign type sans serif letters, 100 mm high, in red on a white background, to AS 1744.
Trees to be retained
Describe species, location, etc., if not shown on the drawings. For evaluating damages to trees, refer to the draft Australian
standard DR 99307 Trees: Amenity Valuation. For tree surgery, refer to the Landscaping worksection.
Marking: Mark trees and shrubs to be retained using suitable non-injurious, easily visible and
removable means of identification.
Tags: 100 x 50 mm zincanneal tags, painted yellow and lettered to conform with the tree number on
the drawings. Secure tags to trees using loose galvanized steel wire bands.
Trees to be retained: >
e.g. “Trees which need not be removed for construction operations”. If trees to be retained are not shown on the drawings
describe them here, particularly those within the contractor’s site area.
Tree enclosures: Provide temporary protective enclosures or guards at the drip line.
Delete this paragraph if enclosures are not required, or the method of protecting trees is to be left to the contractor. Ideally the
enclosure should be at or beyond the drip line to minimise the possibility of damage to root areas.
Wire enclosures: Four strands of fencing wire, or plastic mesh barrier, supported on star pickets
spaced at not more than 4 m.
Mesh enclosures: F62 reinforcing mesh 1800 mm high wired to 2400 mm long star pickets, driven
600 mm into the ground, spaced 1800 mm apart at a minimum distance of 1 m from the tree trunk.

Sheeting to excavations: Where excavations are to be made near trees, add continuous 900 mm high
corrugated galvanized steel sheeting, bedded 150 mm into the ground, wired to the enclosure.
Trees to be enclosed: >
If not shown on the drawings specify them here.
Type of enclosure: >
More robust methods of enclosure may be appropriate in some cases.
Work on trees: If it is proposed to perform work on trees, give notice and obtain instructions.
Removal: If a tree is damaged and repair work is considered impractical, or is attempted and fails, give
Consider the implications of local government tree preservation orders and the normal requirements for approval before trees
can be removed.
Work near trees
Harmful materials: Keep the area within the dripline free of construction material and debris. Do not
place bulk materials and harmful materials under or near trees. Do not place spoil from excavations
against tree trunks. Prevent wind-blown materials such as cement from harming trees and plants.
Damage: Prevent damage to tree bark. Do not attach stays, guys and the like to trees.
Work under trees: Do not remove topsoil from, or add topsoil to, the area within the dripline of the
trees.
Excavation: If excavation is required near trees to be retained, give notice and obtain instructions.
Open up excavations under tree canopies for as short a period as possible.
Hand methods: Use hand methods to locate, expose and cleanly remove the roots on the line of
excavation. If it is necessary to excavate within the drip line, use hand methods such that root systems
are preserved intact and undamaged.
Roots: Do not cut tree roots exceeding 50 mm diameter. Where it is necessary to cut tree roots, use
means such that the cutting does not unduly disturb the remaining root system. Immediately after
cutting, apply a bituminous fungicidal sealant to the cut surface to prevent the incursion of rot or
disease.
Backfilling: Backfill to excavations around tree roots with a mixture consisting of three parts by volume
of topsoil and one part of well rotted compost with a neutral pH value, free from weed growth and
harmful materials. Place the backfill layers, each of 300 mm maximum depth, compacted to a dry
density similar to that of the original or surrounding soil. Do not backfill around tree trunks to a height
greater than 300 mm above the original ground surface. Immediately after backfilling, thoroughly water
the root zone surrounding the tree.
Compacted ground: Do not compact the ground under trees. If compaction occurs, give notice and
obtain instructions.
Watering: Water trees as necessary, including where roots are exposed at ambient temperature
> 35°C.
2.3 TREE PROTECTION

Warning sign
General: Display a sign in a prominent position at each entrance to the site, warning that trees and
plantings are to be protected during the contract. Remove on completion.
Lettering: Road sign type sans serif letters, 100 mm high, in red on a white background, to AS 1744.
Tree enclosures
General: Provide temporary protective enclosures or guards at the drip line.
Wire enclosures: Four strands of fencing wire, or plastic mesh barrier, supported on star pickets
spaced at not more than 4 m.
Mesh enclosures: F62 reinforcing mesh 1800 mm high wired to 2400 mm long star pickets, driven
600 mm into the ground, spaced 1800 mm apart at a minimum distance of 1 m from the tree trunk.
Sheeting to excavations: Where excavations are to be made near trees, add continuous 900 mm high
corrugated galvanized steel sheeting, bedded 150 mm into the ground, wired to the enclosure.
Trees to be enclosed: >
Type of enclosure: >

2.4 EXISTING SERVICES

Marking
General: Before commencing earthworks, locate and mark existing underground services in the areas
which will be affected by the earthworks operations including clearing, excavating and trenching.
Excavation
General: Do not excavate by machine within 1 m of existing underground services.
DIAL 1100 BEFORE YOU DIG is a free service, from anywhere in Australia, of locating underground pipe and cables (possible
within two working days). See www.dialbeforeyoudig.com.au.
2.5 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION

See AS ISO 14050 for definitions of fundamental concepts related to environmental management and BDP DES29 for a
checklist of environmental issues on major construction sites.
Dust protection
Provide dust-proof screens, bulkheads and covers to protect existing finishes and the immediate
environment from dust and debris.
Erosion control
General: Plan and carry out the work so as to avoid erosion, contamination, and sedimentation of the
site, surrounding areas, and drainage systems.
Permanent erosion control measures should be designed as part of the works. Temporary measures are the responsibility of the
contractor; however in special cases it may be necessary to specify particular requirements for some of the temporary measures
to be adopted.
Temporary erosion control measures
Staging: Stage operations (e.g. clearing, stripping).
Restoration: Progressively restore disturbed areas.
Drains: Provide temporary drains and catch drains.
Dispersal: Divert and disperse concentrated flows to points where the water can pass through the site
without damage.
Spreader banks or other structures: Disperse concentrated run-off.
Silt traps: Construct and maintain silt traps to prevent discharge of scoured material to downstream
areas.
Temporary grassing: Required.
Or other treatment to disturbed areas (e.g. contour ploughing).
Temporary fencing: Required.
Maintenance: After each rain inspect, clean, and repair if required, temporary erosion and sediment
control works.
Removal: Remove temporary erosion control measures when they are no longer required.
Dewatering
General: Keep groundworks free of water. Provide and maintain slopes, crowns and drains on
excavations and embankments to ensure free drainage. Place construction, including fill, masonry,
concrete and services, on ground from which free water has been removed. Prevent water flow over
freshly laid work.
Dewatering operations as necessary to keep the works free of surface water. These could include, where necessary, pumping
from excavations or external dewatering by deep wells or well points.
Dewatering system: >
Where a particular dewatering system is necessary for design reasons or as part of the permanent work, specify requirements
here or show on the drawings.
2.6 SITE CLEARING

Extent
Ensure that landscaped areas are shown as such on the drawings if they are to be cleared as specified. If site clearing is
sufficiently variable and extensive, consider making a special drawing.
General: Clear only the following site areas:

- Areas to be occupied by works such as buildings, paving, excavation, regrading and landscaping.
- Other areas designated to be cleared.
Contractor’s site areas: If not included within the areas specified above, clear generally only to the
extent necessary for the performance of the works.
Clearing and grubbing
Clearing: Remove everything on or above the site surface, including rubbish, scrap, grass, vegetable
matter and organic debris, scrub, trees, timber, stumps, boulders and rubble.
Grubbing: Grub out stumps and roots over 75 mm diameter to a minimum depth of 500 mm below
subgrade under buildings, embankments or paving, or 300 mm below finished surface in unpaved
areas. Holes remaining after grubbing shall be backfilled with sand material to prevent ponding of
water. The material shall be compacted to the relative density of the existing adjacent ground material.
Clearing: and Grubbing: Will apply to most areas.
Old works: Remove old works, including slabs, foundations, pavings, drains and manholes found on
the surface.
2.7 DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS

Disposal
General: Remove cleared and grubbed material from the site and dispose of legally.
Surplus material: >
If cleared and grubbed material is to be disposed of other than by removal from the site specify here.
Mulch
Put cleared vegetation through a chipper. Reduce to pieces not larger than 75 x 50 x 15 mm and
stockpile for re-use as mulch.
Include if mulch can be reused on site. Exclude noxious weeds and material which it may not be possible to chip (e.g. ironbark).

EARTHWORK SITE
EARTHWORK
This worksection is applicable to topsoil removal, excavation, filling and compaction.
• Demolition.
• Site preparation.
• Gabions and retaining structures.
• Pavement base and subbase.
• Show earthwork levels, extent and slope of permanent/temporary batters and location of temporary/permanent retaining
structures required as part of the earthworks on the drawings.
• Approximate locations of unsuitable materials/contaminated materials identified in the geotechnical report should be shown
on the drawings.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
General: Provide earthwork surfaces for building, pavement and landscaping works that are as
follows:
- In conformance with the level tolerances specified.
- Have been tested by a NATA registered geotechnical testing authority.
- In conformance with the compaction requirements specified.

General
have no overlaps.
>

EARTHWORK SITE
1.3 INTERPRETATION
Definitions
- Standard: To AS 1348.
The terms “subgrade”, “subbase”, “base course”, “intermediate course”, etc., are used in this worksection in accordance with the
definitions in AS 1348.
Add specific terms if needed. See AS 1348 and AS 2870.
- Description and classification of soils: To AS 1726.
- Bad ground: Ground unsuitable for the purposes of the works, including fill liable to subsidence,
ground containing cavities, faults or fissures, ground contaminated by harmful substances and
ground which is or becomes soft, wet or unstable.
- Base: One or more layers of material usually constituting the uppermost structural element of a
pavement and on which the surfacing may be placed, which may be composed of fine crushed rock,
natural gravel, broken stone, stabilised material, asphalt or Portland cement concrete.
- Discrepancy: A difference between contract information about the site and conditions encountered
on the site, including but not limited to discrepancies concerning the following:
. The nature or quantity of the material to be excavated or placed.
. Existing site levels.
. Services or other obstructions beneath the site surface.
- Line of influence: A line extending downward and outward from the bottom edge of a footing, slab or
pavement and defining the extent of foundation material having influence on the stability or support
of the footings, slab or pavement.
- Rock: Monolithic material with volume greater than 0.5 m3 which cannot be removed until broken up
either by explosives or by rippers or percussion tools.
Alternatively a different definition for rock may be given. Use definitions appropriate to the size of project and likely excavation
methods. A definition in general use in the locality may be appropriate. Another definition is given in AS 2870.
- Subbase: The material laid on the subgrade below the base either for the purpose of making up
additional pavement thickness required, to prevent intrusion of the subgrade into the base, or to
provide a working platform.
- Subgrade: The trimmed or prepared portion of the formation on which the pavement or slab is
constructed. Generally taken to relate to the upper line of the formation.
See AS 3798 clause 1.3.11, where “pavement” has a wider meaning.
Refer also to Records of measurement, below.
1.4 GEOTECHNICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SITE INVESTIGATION

Report
General: The geotechnical and environmental site investigation report provided is for information only.
The geotechnical information and information on contaminants given is information on the nature of
the ground at each tested part. It is not a complete description of conditions existing at or below
ground level.
Include the report in the tender documents, or inform tenderers where the report is available. If no geotechnical and
environmental site investigation has been carried out, delete the clause. See AS 1726. See also “Guidelines for the provision of
geotechnical information in construction contracts” published by the Institution of Engineers, Australia. On selective provision of
available data, see AS 3798 clause 3.3(b).
For potentially contaminated soil see ANZECC/NRMMC, the guide standards AS 4874, AS 4482.1 and AS 4482.2 and
BDP EDG GEN32. On contaminants, see AS 3798 clauses 2(x) and 4.2(b), AS 4482 Parts 1 and 2 and ANZECC/NRMMC.
AS 4964 provides laboratories with a method of qualitative identification of amosite, crocidolite and chrysotile asbestos in bulk
building materials and soils by polarised light microscopy and dispersion staining techniques.

EARTHWORK SITE
1.5 NOTICE
As found site conditions
General: If the following are encountered, give notice immediately and obtain instructions before
carrying out any further work in the affected area:
- Bad ground.
If bad ground is known but the extent is uncertain, consider including a provisional quantity for removal and replacement of
unsuitable material.
Procedures for dealing with rock and bad ground will depend on the conditions of contract.
- Discrepancies.
- Rock.
- Springs, seepages.
- Topsoil > 100 mm deep.
1.6 RECORDS OF MEASUREMENT

Notice that the items are ready for measurement is required to be given in Inspection. Once notice has been given the onus is
on the contract administrator to act so as to avoid delay, either by completing the measurement or by giving a direction to
proceed.
You may care to state that the contractor is not entitled to contract variation or extension of time for excavation in excess of that
required by the contract, including excavation below required depths, or additional excavation which the contractor may elect to
undertake to permit the use of certain constructional plant, and any consequent additional backfilling, compacting or testing.
Excavation and backfilling
Agreed quantities: If a schedule of rates applies, provisional quantities are specified, or there are
variations to the contract levels or dimensions of excavations, do not commence backfilling or place
permanent works in the excavation until the following have been agreed and recorded:
- Depths of excavations related to the datum.
- Final plan dimensions of excavations.
- Quantities of excavations in rock.
Method of measurement: To be by registered surveyor unless otherwise agreed.
If excavation or rock excavation is to be measured for payment purposes ensure that the method of measurement is specified,
and that the conditions for measurement and payment are defined in the contract. Method of measurement may be deleted here
if covered in the conditions of contract or preliminaries.
Rock
Level and class: If rock is to be measured for payment purposes, whether as extra over excavation of
material other than rock or for adjustment of provisional measurements, do not remove the rock until
the commencing levels and the classes of rock have been determined.
If rock is not to be paid for at a separate rate, delete or substitute a subclause such as the following:
“Rock excavation
Excavate the ground as found. No additional payment will be made for rock excavation.”
1.7 PROVISIONAL DEPTHS

Contract depths
General: The footing or pier depths shown on the drawings are provisional.
Use this clause only if there is uncertainty about the depths to attain designed bearing values.
1.8 EXPLOSIVES
General
Or, if explosives are only permitted in particular locations specify the restrictions here. If there is any likelihood that the
contractor may be permitted to use explosives for removal of rock, state that approval is required and list the information
required in the submission for approval such as name of specialist subcontractor, type of explosives, protection and safety
measures. Refer to AS 2187.1 and AS 2187.2.

EARTHWORK SITE
1.9 INSPECTION
Notice
- Items to be measured as listed in Records of measurement.
- Areas to be cleared and/or stripped of topsoil.
- Areas stripped of topsoil.
- Excavation completed to contract levels or founding material.
- Proof roll subgrade prior to placing fill.
- Filling completed to contract levels.
- Stockpiled topsoil before spreading.
1.10 TESTS
This worksection does not rely on statistical methods as outlined in AS 3798 Appendix D. The use of these methods is common
practice for large projects, e.g. major roadworks. See AS 3789 clause 5.1. For testing rock, see AS 4133. If the density test
locations and frequency given in this worksection do not apply, state the requirements here.
Geotechnical testing authority
General: Use a NATA registered geotechnical testing authority.
From AS 3798 clause B2. Or, give the name of a geotechnical testing authority here.
Level of responsibility to AS 3798 Appendix B:
>
i.e. Level 1, Level 2 or Level 3.
Compaction control tests
Compaction control tests: To AS 1289.5.4.1 or AS 1289.5.7.1.
Compaction control test frequency
2
From AS 3798 Table 8.1. Alter as required e.g. per 1000 m , per 1000 t, per load, or number of tests required. If frequency of
testing depends on location state the different requirements for each location. The required frequency may need adjustment on
large scale or concentrated operations e.g. filling of gullies, farm dams. Where specific recommendations for test frequency are
given in the geotechnical report for the site these should replace the AS 3798 outline listed below.
Standard: To AS 3798 Table 8.1.
Site area > 1500 m2: At least (whichever requires the most tests):
- 1 test per layer or 200 mm thickness per material type per 2500 m2.
- 1 test per 500 m3 distributed evenly throughout full depth and area.
- 3 tests per visit.
Site area 500 – 1500 m2: At least (whichever requires the most tests):
- 1 test per layer or 200 mm thickness per 1000 m2.
- 1 test per allotment per layer.
Site area < 500 m2: At least (whichever requires the most tests):
- 1 test per layer or 200 mm thickness per 500 m2.
Confined operations: 1 test per 2 layers per 50 m2.
Imported fill tests
Imported fill: >
Consult the geotechnical and environmental engineer in relation to geotechnical and environmental tests required and the
frequency of these test and outline here. Delete where imported fill is not required.

EARTHWORK SITE
1.11 SUBMISSIONS
Design
Calculations: Submit calculations to show that proposed excavations and temporary supports,
including where applicable supports for adjacent structures, will be stable and safe.
Tests
Imported fill: Submit certification or test results which establish the compliance of imported fill with the
contract.
Compaction: Submit certification and/or test results in accordance with the specified level of
responsibility to AS 3798.
Materials
General: Submit details of materials proposed, including the following:
- Sources of imported fill.
Execution
General: Submit the methods and equipment proposed for the groundworks, including the following:
- Dewatering and groundwater control and disposal of surface water.
- Excavation methods, stages, clearances, batters and temporary supports.
- Stockpiles and borrow pits.
- Placing and compaction methods and stages.
1.12 TOLERANCES
Tolerances
Finish: Finish the surface to the required level, grade and shape within the following tolerances:
- Under building slabs and loadbearing elements: + 0, -25 mm.
- Pavement subgrades; + 0, - 40 mm.
- Batters: No steeper than the slope shown on the drawings. Flatter slopes shall not impact on
boundaries or required clearances to buildings, pavements or landscaping.
- Other ground surfaces: ± 50 mm, provided the area remains free draining and matches adjacent
construction where required. Provide smoothness as normally produced by a scraper blade.
AS 3798 clause 3.3(a)(v) refers to “standard of surface trim”. State any other tolerances on levels or dimensions. Particular
tolerances may be required for work prepared for separate or future contracts.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FILL MATERIALS

See AS 3798 Section 4.
Fill material generally
General: Inorganic, non-perishable material.
On terminology, see AS 3798 clause 3.3(a)(iv).
Sulfur content: Do not provide filling with sulfur content exceeding 0.5% within 500 mm of cement
bound elements (for example concrete structures or masonry) unless such elements are protected by
impermeable membranes or equivalent means.
Excluded materials:
- Organic soils.
- Materials contaminated through past site usage.
- Materials which contain substances which can be dissolved or leached out, or which undergo
volume change or loss of strength when disturbed and exposed to moisture.
- Silts or silt-like materials.
- Fill containing wood, metal, plastic, boulders or other deleterious material.
Re-use of material recovered from excavation
General: Re-use of excavated material: >

EARTHWORK SITE
“Permitted” or “Not permitted” based on advice from the geotechnical and environmental engineer. Excavated material may not
be suitable for reuse where it is contaminated or possesses problematic geotechnical properties.
Excluded areas: >
Where use of site excavated material is permitted, describe here any areas of contamination or unsuitable material which are
excluded from reuse or make reference to the drawings. Delete if not applicable.
Imported fill
Imported fill: Material complying with the following:
>
Consult the geotechnical and environmental engineer for specific requirements applicable to the site. Delete where no
importation of fill is required.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 REMOVAL OF TOPSOIL

General
From AS 3798 clause 6.1.5.
Extent: Areas to be cut and areas to be filled and areas to be occupied by structures, pavements,
embankments and the like.
Maximum depth: 100 mm.
The depth specified should be varied to suit the recommendations of the geotechnical report.
Re-use of removed topsoil

General: Re-use of removed topsoil: >
“Permitted’ or “Not permitted” based on available area for respreading and advice from environmental engineer in relation to
contamination.
Topsoil stockpiles
General: Stockpile site topsoil intended for re-use and imported topsoil where necessary. Establish
stockpiles to heights not exceeding 1.5 m. Provide adequate drainage and erosion protection. Do not
burn off or remove plant growth which may occur during storage. Do not allow traffic on stockpiles. If a
stockpile is to remain for more than four weeks, sow with temporary grass. Protect the topsoil
stockpiles from contamination by other excavated material, weeds and building debris.
Delete this subclause where reuse of topsoil is not permitted.
Disposal of excess topsoil
General: Remove excess topsoil from the site and dispose of legally.
Delete this subclause where all topsoil is being reused.
3.2 EXCAVATION
Ensure that the drawings give the information necessary to enable the contractor to perform the groundworks accurately. Show
the required finished surface levels of slabs, paving, filled or landscaped areas and the like, and show or specify the thickness of
the materials superimposed on the subgrade surface - slabs, slab bases, topsoil layers, and so on. It is the contractor’s
responsibility to make allowance for these, and for compaction or settlement, when determining the site surface levels and
profiles. See AS 3798 clauses 6.1.6 and 6.1.7.
Extent
Site surface: Excavate over the site to give correct levels and profiles as the basis for construction,
pavements, filling and landscaping. Make allowance for compaction or settlement.
Arrange levels and grading to prevent surface water flowing into or under habitable areas during storms.
Footings: Excavate for footings, pits, wells and shafts, to the required sizes and depths. Confirm that
bearing capacity is adequate.
Crawl space: Provide clear space under timber floor bearers.
Provide access to subfloor areas for inspection and maintenance. Timber floors require regular termite inspection. Where
services and drains run in subfloor areas access for inspection and maintenance must also be provided.
- Minimum clearance: 400 mm.

EARTHWORK SITE
Or 600 mm. May be specified here or shown on the drawings. Local regulations may apply.
Existing footings
If excavation is required below the line of influence of an existing footing, use methods including
(temporary) shoring or underpinning which maintain the support of the footing and ensure that the
structure and finishes supported by the footing are not damaged.
Proof rolling
Extent: Proof roll excavations for pavements, filling and non-spanning slabs on ground to determine
the extent of any bad ground.
Proof rolling method:
Refer to AS 3798. Consult geotechnical engineer.
- Roller type and size: >
e.g. “10 t (or 20 t) vibrating (or static) smooth drum”.
- Number of passes: >
- Settlement limit (mm): >
Rock excavation
General: Excavate the ground as found. No additional payment will be made for rock excavation.
Disposal of excess excavated material
General: Remove excess excavated material from the site and dispose of legally.
Include this subclause where volume of excavated material exceeds the fill required for the site. Where the fill is contaminated
consult the environmental engineer for advice in relation to classification of fill and disposal requirements.
3.3 SUBGRADES AFFECTED BY MOISTURE

General
General: Where the subgrade is unable to support construction equipment, or it is not possible to
compact the overlying pavement only because of a high moisture content, perform one or more of the
following:
- Allow the subgrade to dry until it will support equipment and allow compaction.
- Scarify the subgrade to a depth of 150 mm, work as necessary to accelerate drying, and recompact
when the moisture content is satisfactory.
- Excavate the wet material and remove to spoil, and backfill excavated areas.
3.4 BEARING SURFACES

General
General: Provide even plane bearing surfaces for loadbearing elements including footings. Step to
accommodate level changes. Make the steps to the appropriate courses if supporting masonry.
Show steps in footings on the drawings.
Deterioration
General: If the bearing surface deteriorates because of water or other cause, excavate further to a
sound surface before placing the loadbearing element.
3.5 REINSTATEMENT OF EXCAVATION

General
General: Where excavation exceeds the required depth, or deteriorates, reinstate to the correct depth,
level and bearing value.
Particular
General: Below or within the “line of influence” of footings, beams, or other structural elements:
Concrete of strength equal to the structural element, minimum 15 MPa.
Below slabs or pavements: Provide selected filling compacted to the specified density. In cut
subgrades if the over excavation is less than 100 mm, do not backfill, but make good by increasing the
thickness of the layer above. Backfill rock depressions and over excavation of subsoil drains using
coarse subsoil filter.

EARTHWORK SITE
3.6 SUPPORTING EXCAVATIONS

Removal of supports
General: Remove temporary supports progressively as backfilling proceeds.
Voids
General: Guard against the formation of voids outside sheeting or sheet piling if used. Fill and
compact voids to a dry density similar to that of the surrounding material.
3.7 ADJACENT STRUCTURES

Temporary supports
General: Provide supports to adjacent structures where necessary, sufficient to prevent damage
arising from the works.
Lateral supports: Provide lateral support using shoring.
Vertical supports: Provide vertical support where necessary using piling or underpinning or both.
Permanent supports
General: If permanent supports for adjacent structures are necessary and are not described, give
Major work, if known in advance to be necessary, should usually be designed by the structural engineer and included as part of
the contract, in which case it should be shown on the drawings.
Encroachments
General: If encroachments from adjacent structures are encountered and are not shown on the
drawings, give notice and obtain instructions.
Line of influence
Angle from horizontal: >
The angle may be defined here or left for site determination.
Typical angles are 30° for granular material, 45° for stiff clay.
3.8 ROCK BOLTING

General
General: Provide proprietary high strength steel bars or tubes anchored into holes drilled in the rock
and tensioned against plates bearing on the rock face to provide temporary or permanent support for
the rock face.
Show rock bolting requirements, if any, on the drawings.
Protection
General: Protect permanent rock bolts by grouting the drilled hole with cement grout after tensioning
the rock bolt. Protect the bearing plate and the exposed portion of rock bolt and anchorage with a
protective coating or by embedment in concrete.
3.9 PREPARATION FOR FILLING

See AS 3798 clause 6.1.
General
General: Prepare the ground surface before placing fill (including topsoil fill), ground slabs or load
bearing elements. Shape to assist drainage. Remove materials which will inhibit or prevent satisfactory
placement of fill layers, loose material, debris and organic matter. Compact the ground exposed after
stripping or excavation in conformance with the Compaction schedule.
Benching
General: If fill is to be placed on a surface which slopes more than 1:4, bench the surface to form a
key for the fill. As each layer of fill is placed, cut the existing ground surface progressively to form a
series of horizontal steps > 1 m in width and > 100 mm deep. Recompact the excavated material as
part of the filling. Shape to provide free drainage.
See AS 3798 clause 6.1.6.
Under earth mounds
General: Cultivate the ground to a depth of 200 mm before mound formation.

EARTHWORK SITE
Under slabs, paving and embankments

General: Compact the ground to achieve the densities specified in the Compaction schedule. If
necessary loosen the ground to a depth of > 200 mm and adjust the moisture content before
compaction to a density consistent with subsequent filling.
Rock ledges
General: Remove overhanging rock ledges.
3.10 PLACING FILL

AS 2870 and AS 3798 provide guidance on construction requirements and the specification of earthworks generally, including
filling and compaction. AS 2870 is cited in the BCA at clause F1.10, for damp-proofing under slabs on ground. AS 3798 clause
5.1 recommends placing material directly from cut to fill, to minimise problems with moisture content.
General
Layers: Place fill in near-horizontal layers of uniform thickness, deposited systematically across the fill
area.
Extent: Place and compact fill to the designated dimensions, levels, grades, and cross sections so that
the surface is always self draining.
Edges: At junctions of fill and existing surfaces, do not feather the edges.
Mix: Place fill in a uniform mixture.
Previous fill: Before placing subsequent fill layers, ensure that previously accepted layers still conform
to requirements, including moisture content.
Protection: Protect the works from damage due to compaction operations. Where necessary, limit the
size of compaction equipment or compact by hand. Commence compacting each layer at the structure
and proceed away from it.
Partially completed structures are vulnerable to damage during compaction.
Their protection is the contractor’s responsibility, but consider whether special precautions need to be taken.
Protective covering: Do not disturb or damage the protective covering of membranes during
backfilling.
Protective boarding for membranes is specified in the Waterproofing worksection.
Placing at structures
General: Place and compact fill in layers simultaneously on both sides of structures, culverts and
pipelines to avoid differential loading. Carefully place first layers of fill over the top of structures.
Concrete: Do not place fill against concrete until the concrete has been in place for 21 days unless the
structure is supported by struts or 85% of the design concrete strength is achieved.
3.11 COMPACTION REQUIREMENTS FOR FILL AND SUBGRADE

See AS 3798 Section 5 for guidelines on compaction criteria for commercial and residential developments.
Testing to AS 1289 generally does not apply to use of ripped rock or coarse material as fill i.e. soils with more than 20% by
mass of particles coarser than 37.5 mm. See AS 3798 clauses 5.3 and 5.4. Where use of coarse fill material is proposed seek
geotechnical advice.
Density
General: Compact the subgrade and each layer of fill to the required depth and density, as a
systematic construction operation and to conform to the Compaction table. Shape surfaces to
provide drainage and prevent ponding.

EARTHWORK SITE
Compaction table
Location Cohesive soils. Cohesionless soils.
Minimum dry density Minimum density
ratio (standard index to AS 1289.5.6.1
compaction) to
AS 1289.5.1.1
Residential:
- Lot fill, house sites. 95 std 65
Commercial:
- Fills to support minor loadings incl. floor loadings 98 std 70
< 20 kPa and isolated pad or strip footings
< 100 kPa.
Pavements:
- Fill to support pavements 95 std 65
- Subgrade to 300 mm deep 98 std 80
Based on AS 3798 Table 5.1.

AS 1289 provides two standards of compaction for laboratory determination of maximum dry density. Method 5.1.1 specifies a
3
compactive effort of 596 kJ/m and the result is reported as “standard maximum dry density”. Method 5.2.1 specifies a
3
compactive effort of 2703 kJ/m and the result is reported as “modified maximum dry density”.
While standard maximum dry density is commonly used in building works, the modified maximum density is more often specified
for civil engineering works. The compactive effort required in the field to obtain a given dry density ratio using modified
maximum density is considerably more than it is using standard maximum dry density.
Excavated and stripped ground surface: After excavation and/or stripping, these surfaces should also
be compacted in conformance with the Compaction table to a minium depth of 150 mm.
From AS 3798 Table 5.1 Note 7.
Maximum rock and lump size in layer after compaction: 2/3 compacted layer thickness.
AS 3798 clause 6.2.2.
Fill batter faces: Either compact separately, or overfill and cut back. Form roughened surfaces to the
faces.
Moisture content
General: Adjust the moisture content of fill during compaction within the range of 85 – 115% of the
optimum moisture content determined by AS 1289.5.1.1 or AS 1289.5.2.1 as appropriate, in order to
achieve the required density.
This worksection requires adjustment of the moisture content of filling at time of compaction to 85 – 115% of optimum. If
different or more particular requirements apply specify them here. If specifying moisture content in Compaction schedule
delete this subclause.
3.12 GRADING
External areas
General: Grade to give falls away from buildings, minimum 1:100.
Subfloor areas
General: Grade the ground surface under suspended floors to drain ground or surface water away
from buildings without ponding.
3.13 COMPLETION
Protection and repair
Protection: Protect from damage the trees and shrubs to be retained, including those beyond the site
area, both above and below ground.
Repair: Repair trees damaged during the work.
Temporary works
Tree enclosures: Remove temporary tree enclosures at completion.
Tree marking: Remove temporary marks and tags at completion.

EARTHWORK SITE
Temporary supports: Remove temporary supports to adjacent structures at completion.

Records
Certified records of measurement: Submit a certified copy of the agreed records of measurement.
Construction records
General: Submit the following:
- Geotechnical site visit record; and
- Earthworks summary report, or daily geotechnical reports.
Earthworks summary report, or daily geotechnical reports: Alternatives – select first for smaller projects, second for large
projects.
Content: At least the following:
From AS 3798 clause 3.4.
- The areas in which fill is placed.
- Levels after stripping.
- Location of any trees or large shrubs that may have been removed.
- Materials exposed after stripping and the criteria upon which the decision to cease stripping was
made.
- Levels after completion of the filling.
- Types of fill materials in various zones.
- Location and level of each compliance test, together with test results. State if a test is a retest of an
area which was previously rejected.
- Action taken where testing indicated that the specified criteria had not been met.
- Any areas where fill material or compaction was to be of a greater or lesser standard than
elsewhere on site.
Format: To AS 3798 Appendix C.
Modify as appropriate.
3.14 SITE RESTORATION

Requirement
General: Where existing ground surfaces are not required to be varied as part of the works, restore
them to the condition existing at the commencement of the contract.

SERVICE TRENCHING SITE
SERVICE TRENCHING
This worksection is applicable to trenching for underground services.
• Site preparation for work near trees.
• This worksection does not include any particular laying and bedding requirements such as clearance under pipe collars,
mortar bedding and the like, and any special requirements for trench widths, depths, gradients.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
General: Provide trenching safe for workers and adjacent structures, and suitable for receiving
services and to be backfilled so as to have no adverse impact on following work or the completed
project.

General
have no overlaps.
>
1.3 DESIGN
Shoring and lining systems
Steel shoring and trench lining systems: To AS 4744.1.

1.4 INSPECTION
Notice
Inspection: Give sufficient notice so that inspection may be made at the following stages:
- Service trenches excavated before laying the service.
- Services laid in trenches and ready for backfilling.
1.5 TESTS
Density tests
Testing authority: Have density tests of pipe bedding and backfilling carried out by a Registered
testing authority.
Test methods:
- Field dry density: AS 1289.5.3.2 or AS 1289.5.3.5.
- Standard maximum dry density: AS 1289.5.1.1.
- Dry density ratio: AS 1289.5.4.1.
- Density index: AS 1289.5.6.1.
2 EXECUTION
2.1 EXCAVATING
Existing surfaces
General: Before excavating trenches, saw-cut existing concrete and bituminous surfaces on each side
of the trench to provide a straight even joint. Lift and store unit paving for later reinstatement.
Excavation
General: Excavate for underground services:
- To required lines and levels.
- Straight between personnel access ways, inspection points and junctions.
- With vertical sides and uniform grades.
Trench widths
General: Keep trench widths to the minimum consistent with the laying and bedding of the relevant
service and construction of personnel access ways and pits.
Trench depths
General: As required by the relevant service and its bedding method.
Notice: If excavation is necessary below the zone of influence of the underside of adjacent footings,
give notice, and provide support for the footings as instructed.
Obstructions
General: Clear trenches of sharp projections. Cut back roots encountered in trenches to at least
600 mm clear of services. Remove other obstructions including stumps and boulders which may
interfere with services or bedding.
See also Work near trees in the Site preparation worksection, regarding cutting of roots. If Site preparation is not included in
the project specification import the clause here.
Dewatering
General: Keep trenches free of water. Place bedding material, services and backfilling on firm ground
free of surface water.
Excess excavation
General: If trench excavation exceeds the correct depth, reinstate to the correct depth and bearing
value using compacted bedding material or sand stabilised with 1 part of cement to 20 parts of sand
by weight.

2.2 BORING
Subcontractor
General: If under road boring is required in lieu of trenches, engage a suitably qualified subcontractor
to do the work.
Process
General: Ensure a tight fit to the service pipes. If voids are encountered, fill by pressure grouting.
2.3 BACKFILLING
General
General: Backfill service trenches as soon as possible after the service has been laid and bedded, if
possible on the same working day. Place the backfill in layers ≤ 150 mm thick and compact to the
nominated density which applies to the location of the trenches as shown on the drawings or in
conformance with the Backfill density schedule.
Backfill density schedule
Density test Test sample Location
method frequency
A B C
Ensure that the required densities are nominated in the drawings or nominate them here.
Marking services
Underground marking tape: To AS/NZS 2648.1.
Backfill material
General: General fill with no stones greater than 25 mm occurring within 150 mm of the service, or
other materials as required for particular services or locations. Well graded, inorganic, non-perishable
material, maximum size 75 mm, plasticity index ≤ 55%.
Under roads and paved areas and within 4 m of building: Coarse sand, controlled low strength
material or fine crushed rock.
In topsoil areas: Complete the backfilling with topsoil for at least the top 100 mm.
In reactive clay: In sites classified M, M-D, H, H-D or E to AS 2870, reuse excavated site material at a
moisture content within ± 1% of that of the adjoining in situ clay.
2.4 REINSTATEMENT OF SURFACES

General
General: Reinstate existing surfaces removed or disturbed by trench excavations to match existing
and adjacent work.
Lawn areas
General: Provide 150 mm of loam and resow the lawn over the trench and other disturbed areas.
Paving and roads
General: Reinstate to match adjacent work, paved surfaces and assets disturbed or removed during
excavation of trenching.
Concrete surfaces
General: Reinstate concrete surfaces to the original level. If required, provide steel reinforcement with
dowels into the adjacent concrete.
Bituminous surfaces
General: Provide crushed rock base and subbase to match the existing pavement. Prime coat the
edges of the existing surfacing with bitumen. Lay and compact hot-mix asphalt so that the edges are
flush and the centre is cambered 10 mm above the existing pavement. If hot pre-mix is not available,
cold pre-mix may be used.
Minimum asphalt thickness: 50 mm or the adjacent pavement thickness, whichever is thicker.

Segmental paving
General: Provide sand bedding and compacted crushed rock base, if required to match the existing
construction. Reinstate the paving units.

STORMWATER – SITE SITE
STORMWATER – SITE
This worksection is applicable to stormwater drainage principally associated with pavements.
This template overlaps with Stormwater – building and the latter should be used for internal stormwater piping as roof water and
for simple external systems. Both may be used on a project according to the division of professional and/or contracting
responsibility.
• Stormwater – buildings.
• Stormwater detention.
• None.
• You should detail the stormwater system on the drawings including the point of connection to the Network Utility Operator
mains.
• Typical issues to be considered in packaging include:
. - Connection to Network Utility Operator services.
. - Drains (underlay, surrounds).
. - If part of the stormwater work is detained by a hydraulic consultant under Stormwater – building consider the means
of demarcation (e.g. 1 m from the building).
• Substantial cable and pipe ducts for other services may require connection to the stormwater system. If so, coordinate
work.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
General: Provide stormwater installation.
If this worksection is used in conjunction with Stormwater – building you may need to define what part of the work this
worksection covers to and what Stormwater – building covers.
Selections: Conform to the Selections.
Design
If the contractor is to design part of the system include details of the design responsibility here. For example specify only the
minimum requirements, if any, and arrange for the contractor to supply the additional information needed to specify the system.
See also Hydraulic design and install.

General

have no overlaps.
>
Delete worksections if they are not relevant (e.g. Hydraulic pumps).
The Hydraulic general requirements worksection should not be deleted as it contains material on which this worksection
depends.
1.3 INTERPRETATION
Definitions
- Pipe surround: Includes pipe overlay, pipe side support, side zone and haunch zone.
1.4 STANDARDS
Stormwater drainage
Standard: To AS/NZS 3500.3.
AS/NZS 3500.3 is a comprehensive specification for the supply, installation and testing of stormwater drains. It may be relied
upon subject to the particular requirements, if any, of the Network Utility Operator and of the project. AS 3500.3 also covers
scope and performance requirements.
1.5 INSPECTION
Notice
- Excavated surfaces prior to placing pipe bedding material.
- Formwork and reinforcement prior to placing cast in situ concrete.
- Pipe joints prior to covering.
- Placing of cast in situ concrete.
- Upon completion.
Add or delete as required. Hold points, if required, should be inserted here.
1.6 SUBMISSIONS
Samples
General: Submit samples of the following:
- Each type of imported pipe bedding material.
- Each type of filter material.
If samples are to be tested, the size is determined by the type of test. AS 1141.0 lists the aggregate tests.
Products – documentation
Conformance: Produce documentary evidence that the pipes conform to the requirements of this
worksection.

2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
Concrete and mortar
Concrete: To AS 1379.
- Grade: N20.
Portland cement: To AS 3972.
- Type: GP.
Steel reinforcement: To AS/NZS 4671.
Joints
Solvent cement and priming fluid: To AS/NZS 3879.
Pipe and fittings
Fibre reinforced cement (FRC): To AS 4139.
- < 450 mm diameter: To be pre-socketed at one end with a factory fitted Adcol coupling.
- > 450 mm diameter: To have a purpose machined internal spigot and socket system within the pipe
wall.
Glass-reinforced polyester (GRP): To AS 3571.
Manhole covers and frames: To AS 1830 and AS 1831.
Polyvinyl chloride (PVC): To AS 1254, AS/NZS 1260, AS 1273.
Polyethylene (PE): To AS/NZS 4129, AS/NZS 4130 or ISO 8770, AS 2033.
Precast concrete: To AS 4058.
Rubber ring joints/elastomeric seals: To AS 1646.
Subsoil: To AS 2439.1.
Vitrified clay or ceramic: To AS 1741.
Bedding material
General: Bedding material for the bed and haunch zones shall consist of a granular material having a
grading, determined by AS 1141.
Conformance: Comply with the Bedding material grading table.
Bedding material grading schedule
Sieve size (mm) Weight passing %
Bed and haunch Side zones
75.0 - 100
19.0 100 -
9.5 - 50-100
2.36 50-100 30-100
0.60 20-90 15-50
0.30 10-60 -
0.15 0-25 -
0.075 0-10 0-25

3 EXECUTION
See the Commentary for more information on surface and subsoil drainage systems
3.1 TOLERANCES
General
General: Conform to the Pipeline tolerances table. These tolerances are conditional on falls to
outlets being maintained and no part of a pipeline being at less than the designated gradient.
Pipeline tolerances table
Permissible angular deviation Permissible displacement from
from alignment alignment
Horizontal 1 in 300 15 mm
Vertical 1 in 500 5 mm
These are fair and reasonable tolerances. But delete if you do not intend to enforce them or have you own objective or
subjective standards which you prefer to rely on.
3.2 STORMWATER DRAINS

Location
General: Provide stormwater drains to connect downpipes, surface drains, subsoil drains and drainage
pits to the outlet point or point of connection. Make sure that location of piping will not interfere with
other services and building elements not yet installed or built. Subject to the preceding and
documented layouts, follow the most direct route with the least number of changes in direction.
Downpipe connections: Turn up branch pipelines with bends to meet the downpipe, finishing 50 mm
(nominal) above finished ground or pavement level. Seal joints between downpipes and drains.
Laying
General: Lay in straight lines between changes in direction or grade with socket end placed upstream.
If other pipes are adjacent, set each pipe true to line and complete each joint before laying the next
pipe. If work is not continuous cap open ends to prevent entry of foreign matter.
Bedding
General: Grade the underlay evenly to the gradient of the pipeline.
Standard: In accordance with AS 3725 and AS 3725 Supplement 1.
Bedding type: >
U, H1, H2, H3, HS1, HS2, HS3 in accordance with AS 3725. Alternatively specify the bedding type on the drawings.
Layers: All material shall be compacted in layers not exceeding 150 mm compacted thickness.
Lifting holes
General: Lifting holes in all pipes shall be sealed with plastic preformed plugs or 3:1 sand:cement
mortar, before the commencement of backfilling.
Trench backfill
General: The remainder of the trench to the underside of the subgrade shall be backfilled with fill
material in accordance with the Earthwork worksection.
Anchor blocks
General: If necessary to restrain lateral and axial movement of the stormwater pipes provide anchor
blocks at junctions and changes of grade or direction.
Encasement
General: Conform to the Stormwater pipeline schedule.
Location: Encase the pipeline in concrete at least 150 mm above and below the pipe, and 150 mm
each side or the width of the trench, whichever is the greater.
Concrete: Grade N20 to AS 1379.
State where encasement is required in the Stormwater pipeline schedule or show extent on the drawings. Delete the
subclause if concrete encasement is not required.

3.3 SUBSOIL DRAINS

Preferably show the pipework, pipe surround and filter fabric (if any) on the drawings. Alternatively, specify the requirements in
the Subsoil pipeline schedule. Do not duplicate.
General
General: Provide subsoil drains to intercept groundwater seepage and prevent water build-up behind
walls and under floors and pavements. Connect subsoil drains to surface drains or to the stormwater
drainage system as applicable. Conform to the Subsoil pipeline schedule.
Trench width: ≥ 450 mm.
Pipe depth: Provide the following minimum clear depths, measured to the crown of the pipe, where the
pipe passes below the following elements:
- 100 mm below subgrade level of the pavement, kerb or channel.
- 100 mm below the average gradient of the bottom of footings.
- 450 mm below the finished surface of unpaved ground.
This text may not suit the project requirements. See AS/NZS 3500.3 Section 7. Select the pipe and surround to suit the material
being protected or retained and the permeability required.
Jointing
General: At junctions of subsoil pipes provide tees, couplings or adaptors to AS 2439.1.
Pipe underlay
General: Grade the trench floor evenly to the gradient of the pipeline. If the trench floor is rock, correct
any irregularities with compacted bedding material. Bed piping on a continuous underlay of bedding
material, at least 75 mm thick after compaction. Lay the pipe with one line of perforations at the
bottom.
Chases: If necessary, form chases to prevent projections such as sockets and flanges from bearing on
the trench bottom or underlay.
This text may not suit the project requirements.
See AS/NZS 3500.3 Figures 6.1 and 7.1. Pipe bedding is specified in AS/NZS 3500.3 clause 7.4.3.
For other than minor works, if bedding requirements are not shown on the drawings, consult the engineer and specify the
bedding for each application (pipe type and trench condition) consistent with assumptions made in the design.
Pipe surrounds
General: Place the material in the pipe surround in layers ≤ 200 mm loose thickness, and compact
without damaging or displacing the piping.
Depth of overlay:
- To the underside of the bases of overlying structures such as pavements, slabs and channels.
- To within 150 mm of the finished surface of unpaved or landscaped areas.
For material, see AS/NZS 3500.3 clause 7.3.6. If the pipe surround is not shown on the drawings, specify it here.
Filter fabric
General: Provide polymeric fabric formed from plastic yarn composed of at least 85% by weight
propylene, ethylene, amide or vinyledenechloride, and containing stabilisers or inhibitors which
provide resistance to deterioration due to ultraviolet light.
Consider including the type: e.g. woven or non woven. Be clear also about whether trench is to be partly filled with aggregate
and over wrapped by filter fabric.
Marking: To AS 3705.
Protection: Provide heavy duty protective covering. Store clear of the ground and out of direct sunlight.
During installation do not expose the filter fabric to sunlight for more than 14 days.
Filter socks
General: Provide polyester permeable socks capable of retaining particles of 0.25 mm size. Securely
fit or join the sock at each joint.
3.4 PITS

Finish to exposed surfaces

General: Provide a smooth, seamless finish, using steel trowelled render or concrete cast in steel
forms.
Corners: Cove or splay internal corners.
Metal access covers and grates
Cover levels: Top of cover or grate, including frame:
- In paved areas: Flush with the paving surface.
- In landscaped areas: 25 mm above finished surface.
- Gratings taking surface water runoff: Locate to receive runoff without ponding.
3.5 TESTING
Pre-completion tests
General: Before backfilling or concealing, carry out the following tests:
- Site stormwater drains and main internal drains: Air or water pressure test to AS 3500.3 Section 10.
Leaks: If leaks are found, rectify and re-test.
3.6 COMPLETION
Cleaning
General: Clean and flush the whole installation.
4 SELECTIONS
4.1 STORMWATER
Stormwater pipeline schedule
Type or location
A B C
Pipe material and nominal size
Class
Jointing
Bedding
Pipe support
Concrete encasement
Notes on the Stormwater pipeline schedule.

Type or location: Preferably show the type and size of stormwater pipelines and jointing and bedding requirements on the
drawings. Alternatively, requirements not shown on the drawings or specified in AS/NZS 3500.3 or the Template may be
specified here.
See AS/NZS 3500.3 Section 2 for types of materials and limitations on the use of each material for stormwater installations i.e.
AS 2032 (for flexible pipes as defined) which allows the use of various bedding materials subject to approval, but does not
specify required densities. Consult with relevant authorities about other restrictions on the use of particular materials.
List all locations or functions for which there is a different type, class or size of pipe.
Pipe material: Class:, and Jointing: Specify the material, including load and size class or grade, and jointing (e.g. for concrete
pipes, rubber ring) by reference to the appropriate Australian standard or by proprietary name. Pipe standards include
AS/NZS 1254, AS/NZS 1260, AS 1281, AS 1741, AS 4058 and AS 4139. See, for example, Appendix B to AS 4058, for items to
be specified.
Concrete encasement: Nominate locations where encasement is required e.g. Required, Not required. If no encasement is
required or extent is shown on the drawings, delete row from table.

Pipe bedding schedule

Type or location
A B C
Bedding application
Bedding zone
Material and grading
Required density
Notes on the Pipe bedding schedule.

Bedding application: Use a mark number (1, 2, 3 etc.) or describe the pipe and trench condition.
Bedding zone: e.g. underlay, haunch, side, overlay. See AS/NZS 3500.3 Figure 7.1 and clause 7.3.6.
Material and grading: Specify locally available materials.
Required density: Specify the required dry density ratio or density index.
Lined surface drain schedule
Type or location
A B C
Lining material
Size (mm)
Grating
Notes on the Lined surface drain schedule.

Lining material: Insert lining material and, if appropriate, its class.
Subsoil pipeline schedule
Type or location
A B C
Trench depth (mm)
Pipe size (nominal)
Pipe type
Pipe class
Other requirements
Notes on the Subsoil pipeline schedule.

Pipe type: and Pipe class: e.g. Type 1 corrugated pipe class 200 to AS 2439.1. AS/NZS 3500.3 clause 2.7 specifies plastic pipe
to AS 2439.1 which is a performance specification covering both corrugated (Type 1) and smooth wall (Type 2) pipe. It classifies
the pipe by strength class and allows use of any suitable plastic material. Other types of porous pipe (terra cotta, concrete, etc.)
may be more suitable in some locations.
Pit schedule
Type or location
A B C
Size (mm)
Cover type
Remarks

LANDSCAPE – WALLING SITE
LANDSCAPE – WALLING
This worksection is applicable to retaining and free standing walls up to 750 mm high.
Related material may be found in other worksections. See for example:
• Earthwork for excavation and filling.
• Landscape – fences and barriers for lightweight fences and barriers.
• Landscape – soils for soils.
• Landscape – soft surfaces for grassed surfaces.
• Landscape – plants for plants and planting.
• Trees supply for the supply of new trees.
• Irrigation for irrigation.
• Landscape – furniture and fixtures for installed equipment associated with landscaped works.
• Segmental pavers – mortar bed for external stone, ceramic and cementitious paving.
• Segmental pavers – sand bed for external unit paving.
• Concrete formwork, Concrete reinforcement and Concrete in situ for footings and other concrete structures.
• Brick and block construction for masonry walls.
• Tensioned membrane structures for shade structures.
• None.
• This worksection relies on fully detailed landscape drawings including location and type of walls, dimensions, pattern or
bond and size of units.
• Retaining walls over 750 mm high. Obtain structural engineering advice. See also the guidance given in Clay Brick and
Paver Institute Technical Notes 21A and 21B.
• Import the appropriate building specification worksections for landscape structures.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
General: Provide for walls of ≤ 750 mm in height:
- Complete for their function.

General

have no overlaps.
- Termite control management for protection of timber elements from termite attack.
- Timber finishes and treatment for preservative treatment.
- Concrete formwork, Concrete reinforcement and Concrete in situ for footings and other concrete
structures.
- Brick and block construction for masonry walls.
Metals and prefinishes, do not repeat them here.). You may also wish to direct the contractor to other worksections where there
1.3 INSPECTION
Notice
Inspection: Give sufficient notice so inspection may be made of the following:
- Setting out before commencement of construction.
- Filter fabric and subsurface drainage in place before backfilling.
1.4 SUBMISSIONS
Samples
Submit samples as follows: >
Insert samples required such as masonry units, timber units, the shade structure fabric.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 TIMBER
Hazard class
General: As defined in AS 1604.1.
Site hazard class: >
Select the appropriate hazard class. AS 1604 1 identifies 6 hazard classes (H1 – H6).Table
Hardwood
General: To AS 2796.1 Section 2.
- Grade: To AS 2796.2: >
AS 2796.2 specifies Grades in Appendix A.
For structural purposes: To AS 2082.
Durability class: To AS 1720.2.
- Class: >
Nominate Durability class 1 unless a service life of less than 25 years is appropriate. Alternatively, using Hazard class, nominate
a preservative treatment.
Softwood
General: To AS 4785.1 Section 2.
- Grade: To AS 4785.2: >
Seasoned cypress pine: To AS 1810 Section 2.
- Grade: >

AS 1810 specifies, Grades 1 and 2, in descending order, in Appendix A,

For structural purposes: To AS 2858.
Preservative treatment: Provide only timbers with preservative treatment appropriate to the Hazard
class.
Cut surfaces: Provide supplementary preservative treatment to all cut and damaged surfaces.
2.2 STEEL
Steel tubes
Posts, rails, stays: To AS 1163.
- Grade: C350L0.
Posts are available shop painted but may be site painted.
Wire
Chainwire, cable wire, tie wire and barbed wire: To AS 2423.
AS 2423 covers fencing wire, wire netting and chainwire and requires that all products for fencing be protected against corrosion
by application of a metallic coating during manufacture, optionally overlaid with an organic coating. See AS 2423 clause 1.3.13.
Coating: >
Organic coatings include PVC (black or green), PE (polyethylene or polythene), plastic and powder. Barbed wire may be
supplied with a metallic coating or with a plastic or a thin organic coating. See AS 2423 clause 3.3.7.
2.3 CONCRETE
General
Exposure classification: To AS 3600 Table 4.3.
Grade: Where there are cast in metal items:
- Exposure classification:
. A1, A2: N25.
. B1: N32.
. B2, C: N40.
. Otherwise: N20.
For Engineer designed concrete structures delete this clause and provide appropriate concrete worksections from Building
Standard or Basic packages.
2.4 DRY STONE WALLS

Preferably show location, wall dimensions (height, thickness), pattern or bond, stone sizes and shapes, coursing, copings, face
finish, etc., on the drawings.
Walling stone
Weathered stone is more expensive than quarried, and generally not as readily available.
Natural stone: Stone of uniform quality, sound and free from defects liable to affect its strength,
appearance or durability.
Field stone: Local weathered uncut random sized natural stones.
Quarried stone: Cut or uncut random or regular size stone.
Source of supply: >
e.g. “Boulders recovered from excavations”.
Minimum unit size (mm): >
Dimensions, volume, or both.
2.5 SLEEPER WALLS

Preferably show location, wall dimensions and other relevant defaults on the drawings.
Sleepers
General: To AS 3818.2.

Hardwood: Sound durability class or preservative treated hardwood railway sleepers.

Softwood: Sound preservative-treated softwood sleepers.
Source of supply: >
2.6 CRIB WALLS

General
Type: Proprietary system of interlocking precast concrete or preservative treated timber cribs with
selected backfill placed and compacted progressively with the crib to form a retaining wall.
Product: >
2.7 GABIONS
General
Type: Proprietary system of rock filled wire baskets.
Product: >
2.8 EARTH REINFORCEMENT

General
Type: Proprietary system of galvanized steel strips or steel mesh strips placed in layers with
compacted selected fill and connected to precast concrete facing panels to form vertical retaining
walls. Provide the necessary accessories including levelling pad, bearing pads, and joint fillers or
covers to keep the selected fill material out of the panel joints.
Product: >
2.9 FILTER FABRIC

Consult manufacturers for information about available fabrics, including their properties and recommended applications. See
AS 3704 for a glossary of terms used for geotextiles.
General
Type: Polymeric fabric formed from a plastic yarn composed of at least 85% by weight of propylene,
ethylene, amide or vinyledenechloride and containing stabilisers or inhibitors to make the filaments
resistant to deterioration due to ultraviolet light.
Identification and marking: To AS 3705.
Product: >
Location: >
Protection
General: Provide heavy duty protective covering. Store clear of the ground and out of direct sunlight.
During installation do not expose the filter fabric to sunlight for more than 14 days.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
Set out
General: Set out the positions of walls and furniture and mark the positions of furniture.
Clearing
Extent: Except trees or shrubs to be retained, clear vegetation within 1 m of the landscape walls. Grub
out stumps and roots of removed trees or shrubs and trim the grass to ground level, but do not remove
the topsoil.
Excavation
Extent: Excavate for foundations and footings.
3.2 DRY STONE WALLS

Construction
Generally: Select the stones for their locations and lay them in the wall with the minimum of
stonecutting as follows:

- Each stone is stable, non-rocking, and firmly interlocked with its neighbours without mortar.
- The wall face shows reasonably regular, flat and vertical stone faces.
- Vertical joints or perpends between stones are spanned by the next stone above.
- Stones are laid generally as through stones whenever possible.
- At least 50% of footings, 30% of wall stones, and all coping stones are laid as through stones.
Pattern or bond: >
e.g. “ Random rubble”, “Squared rubble”, “Rubble brought to courses”. Preferably show typical pattern on elevations.
Face finish: >
e.g. “Natural weathered face”, “Quarry faced”.
Footings: Select the largest, flattest and most regular stones for footings, and set them one third of
their depth into the ground.
Copings: Select stones of reasonably uniform size and finish the top of the wall to a level line.
Retaining walls
Construction: Where dry stone walls act as retaining walls, construct the stonework to be free draining
through the wall. Batter back the wall face 50 – 70 mm for every 300 mm in height. Cap the top of the
wall. Backfill progressively, with a layer at least 300 mm thick of porous material, such as coarse
aggregate or crushed rock in the size range 20 – 40 mm.
Minimum thickness: 450 mm.
Wall face batter: >
Rip-rap retaining walls
Construction: Construct as dry stone retaining walls with large random sized boulders recovered from
excavations, to form gravity walls retaining, and supported by, embankments. Place boulders with
large face down and stepped back from boulders below.
3.3 SLEEPER WALLS

Construction
Wall: Erect sleeper posts at 2 m centres, buried one third. Brace at half height of wall with sleepers
returned into embankment, spiked to posts. Lay sleepers in stretcher bond behind the verticals and
securely spike together at joints and at 2 m centres. Back with hessian or geotextile and place a
100 mm draining layer of coarse sand or fine gravel between the fabric and backfill.
Backing: Backfill to ground level with compacted fine crushed rock, gravels or cement stabilised
rammed earth.
3.4 CRIB WALLS

Construction
Construction: Construct walls in conformance with the manufacturer’s written requirements.
Specify and detail to the recommendations of the product supplier.
3.5 GABIONS
Assembly
Construction: Assemble the baskets and join them together by wiring along edges both horizontally
and vertically before placing the rock fill. Fix the top of the basket by wiring to both the sides and the
diaphragms.
3.6 EARTH REINFORCEMENT

Construction
Construction: Construct walls in conformance with the manufacturer’s written requirements.
Specify and detail to the recommendations of the product supplier.

LANDSCAPE – FENCES AND BARRIERS SITE
LANDSCAPE – FENCES AND BARRIERS
This worksection is applicable to basic fencing including picket and paling (plain paling and lap and cap) fencing, generally for
domestic use; chainwire and welded mesh fencing for industrial, commercial and institutional use; and some types of vehicle
barriers.
• Landscape – walling for walls under 750 mm in height.
• Brush fencing. Brush fencing reportedly relies on brush removed from vulnerable scrubland. Such harvesting may result in
environmental degradation such as erosion.
• Post and rail and post and wire agricultural fencing.
• Tubular fencing, available with a variety of tube patterns and decorative features which can be specified as a proprietary
item.
• Roll formed steel panel fencing which can be specified as a proprietary item.
• Electric fences: For electric fences, see AS 3014 and for electric security fences, see AS 3016.
• Temporary fences (e.g. chainwire fencing) for site security, if a requirement of the principal, may be specified here and
cross referenced by the Preliminaries. A full description in the Preliminaries is probably better.
• Termite management of fences and susceptible to attack.
• None.
• Retaining walls over 750 mm high. Obtain structural engineering advice. See also the guidance given in Clay Brick and
Paver Institute Technical Notes 21A and 21B.
• It is likely that there will be local variations on the practice specified here. Check with fencing contractors in your area and
amend the specification material as necessary.

• Show on the drawings the location of the fence(s) and the size and position of any gates. Also show or specify the height of
the fence and its relationship to finished ground and any special footing requirements. For example, the default
specification for timber fencing is earth footings. Indicate if and where concrete footings are required.
• If your project has no fencing as such, export separate items from this worksections to other worksections, as required e.g.
bollards, wheel stops and chainwire barriers to Metal fixtures.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
General: Provide fences and barrier systems:
- Conforming to the detail and location drawings.
- Firmly fixed in position.

General
have no overlaps.
>
may be work that is closely associated with this work such as:
• Termite management for protection of timber elements from termite attack.
• Timber finishes and treatment for preservative treatment.
1.3 INSPECTION
Notice
- Setout prior to construction.
- Footings prior to pouring concrete.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 TIMBER
Posts and rails
Hardwood: To AS 2082.
Softwood: To AS 2858.
Delete references to the standards if you are prepared to accept local industry practice or prefer to use locally accepted terms.
A preservative treated radiata pine fence will almost certainly be a more economic proposition compared with hardwood fencing.
AS 2082 and AS 2858 apply, respectively, to hardwoods and softwoods for structural purposes. Stainless steel mesh “boots”
can be used to termite-proof posts in the ground.

Pickets and palings

Hardwood: To AS 2796.1, Section 8.
- Grade to AS 2796.2: >
AS 2796.2 specifies Select, Medium feature, High feature and Parquet clear Grades in Appendix A.
Softwood: To AS 4785.1, Section 7.
- Grade: To AS 4785.2: >
Seasoned cypress pine: To AS 1810, Section 5.
- Grade: >
AS 1810 specifies, Grades 1 and 2, in descending order, in Appendix A.
2.2 STEEL
Steel tubes
Posts, rails, stays and pickets: To AS 1163.
- Grade: C350L0.
Fence posts are available shop painted but may be site painted.
Wire
Chainwire, cable wire, tie wire and barbed wire: To AS 2423.
AS 2423 covers fencing wire, barbed wire, wire netting and chainwire and requires that all products for fencing be protected
against corrosion by application of a metallic coating during manufacture, optionally overlaid with an organic coating. AS 2423
clause 1.3.13 defines organic coatings.
Coating: >
Organic coatings include PVC (black or green), PE (polyethylene or polythene), plastic and powder. Barbed wire may be
supplied with a metallic coating or with a plastic or a thin organic coating. AS 2423 clause 3.3.7 deals with the topic.
2.3 CONCRETE
General
Standard: To AS 1379 Grade N20.
2.4 VEHICLE BARRIERS

Log barriers
Material: Sawn hardwood, or preservative-treated radiata posts and rails to AS 1604.1.
Size: Diameter range 125 – 150 mm.
Precast concrete wheel stops
Material: Precast concrete units with predrilled holes located 300 mm from each end for fixing to
ground surface.
Size: 2000 x 150 x 100 mm high.
Steel tube bollards
Type: Bollards fabricated from heavy steel tube, to minimum nominal size DN 100, to AS 1074. Seal
free ends with fabricated end caps, spot welded and ground smooth.
Finish: Galvanize after fabrication.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 CONSTRUCTION GENERALLY

Set out
General: Set out the fence line and mark the positions of posts, gates and bracing panels.
Clearing
Fence line: Except trees or shrubs to be retained, clear vegetation within 1 metre of the fence
alignment. Grub out the stumps and roots of removed trees or shrubs and trim the grass to ground
level, but do not remove the topsoil.

Excavation
Posts: Excavate post holes so that they have vertical sides and a firm base. Spread surplus material
on the principal’s side of the fence.
Erection
Line and level: Erect posts vertically. Set heights to follow the contours of natural ground.
Earth footings
Compaction: Backfill with earth around posts, compacting firmly by hand or machine in 150 mm deep
layers.
Concrete footings
In ground: Place mass concrete around posts and finish with a weathered top falling 25 mm from the
post to ground level.
On slabs: Provide welded and drilled post flanges and fix with 3 masonry anchors per post.
3.2 GATES
Hardware
Provide the following:
- Drop bolt and ferrule to each leaf of double gates.
- Latch to one leaf of double gates.
- Provision for locking by padlock.
- Hinges to ensure smooth operation.
Schedule any particular requirements here e.g. signage, ball bearing lubricated hinges, spring closer, motor drive.
Hand access
General: Where required, provide hand holes to give access from outside to reach locking provision.
3.3 TIMBER FENCING

Radiata pine picket fence
There is no standard for timber fencing.
Height (mm): >
Picket pattern: >
Member sizes (dressed):
- Posts: 90 x 90 mm.
- Rails: 70 x 40 mm.
- Pickets: 70 x 19 mm.
Picket spacing: 125 mm maximum.
Footing type: Earth.
Footing size: 200 mm diameter x 600 mm depth.
Picket pattern and Picket spacing: e.g. “gothic”, “pointed”, “rounded”, “colonial” pattern and vary the spacing if required.
Radiata pine paling fence
Height (mm): >
Type: >
Maximum post spacing:
- General: 2400 mm.
- For lap and cap: 2700 mm.
Member sizes (sawn):
- Intermediate posts: 140 x 45 mm.
- End, corner and gate posts: 100 x 100 mm.
- Capping for lap and cap type: 120 x 35 mm dressed with weathered top.
- Palings:

. General: 100 x 15 mm.

. For lap and cap: 150 x 15 mm.
Hardwood paling fence
Height (mm): >
Type: >
Member sizes (sawn):
- Intermediate posts: 125 x 50 mm.
- End, corner and gate posts: 125 x 125 mm.
- Capping for lap and cap type: 100 x 50 mm dressed with weathered top.
Or 125 x 75 mm.
- Palings:
. General: 100 x 13 mm.
Or 100 x 19 mm.
. For lap and cap: 150 x 13 mm.
Or compacted fine crushed rock, gravel or cement stabilised earth.
Installation
General: Mortice posts, taper splice rails and nail twice in mortices. Set pickets and palings clear of the
ground.
Or bolt fix to housings.
Picket fence: Nail twice to each rail.
Plain paling fence: Provide 2 rails for fences up to 1800 mm high, and locate 200 mm from the tops
and bottoms of the palings. Close butt palings and nail twice to each rail.
Lap and cap paling fence: Provide 3 rails for fences up to 1800 mm high with the top rail located to
receive the capping, and bottom rail located 200 mm from the bottom of the palings. Close butt larger
palings and nail twice to each rail. Fix smaller palings over joints and nail twice to each rail. Nail
capping to the top rail.
Gates
Ledges and braces: Match fence rails.
Pickets or palings: Match fence.
Or substitute a galvanized steel tube frame if you prefer it for durability and stability.
Steel tube picket fencing
Some products are supplied with pickets of insufficient strength to operate as a security fence.
Product: >
Ensure the pickets comply with AS 1163 Grade C350LO
Finish: >
e.g. Powdercoat
Height: >
Fencing for swimming pools
Design, construction and performance: To AS 1926.1.
Location of fencing for private swimming pools: To AS 1926.2.
Check the local council for additional requirements. AS 1926.1 and AS 1926.2 are referenced in the BCA for safety fencing of
swimming pools. For children’s services centres, the Victoria BCA Appendix references AS 1926.1. AS 2820 covers gate units
for private swimming pools.

3.4 CHAINWIRE BARRIERS

Chainwire fencing of the type described here may be used with no rails or with one or two rails and with or without barbed
extensions.
Standard
General: To AS 1725.
Fence dimensions
Component sizes
Intermediate posts: 42.4 mm diameter, 2.6 mm wall thickness.
End, corner and gate posts: 60.3 mm diameter, 2.9 mm wall thickness.
Chainwire: 3.15 mm diameter wire woven to form uniform mesh.
- Selvedges: Knuckled.
- Mesh generally: 50 mm.
- Mesh at playing end of sports enclosures: 40 mm.
Tie wire: 2 mm diameter.
Post and rail barriers:
- Rails and gooseneck stay: 33.7 mm diameter, 2.6 mm wall thickness.
Railless barriers:
- Struts: 42.4 mm diameter, 2.6 mm wall thickness.
- Cable wires:
. Two strands: 3.15 mm diameter wire.
. One strand: 4 mm helicoil wire.
Security barriers:
- Chainwire selvedges: Twisted and barbed.
- Barbed wire to security fencing post extensions: Barbs at 95 mm maximum centres.
Installation
Posts: Do not splice members except in posts when splice is embedded at least 150 mm into
concrete. Fit tightly fitting steel caps to posts, except where fixed to overhead structure.
Chainwire: Lace chainwire to end and gate posts. Tie chainwire twice around members at 250 mm
maximum intervals. Twist ends twice and cut off neatly.
Cable wire: Tension cable wire(s) to support chainwire after at least 24 hour curing of concrete
footings.
Footing type: Concrete.
- Footing size:
. Intermediate and end posts: 225 mm diameter x 600 mm depth.
. Corner posts and gate: 225 mm diameter x 900 mm depth.
Bracing:
- Internal partitions: If at least each alternate point is fixed to the overhead structure, bracing is not
required.
- Rails: Connect rail(s) to posts using bolted split pipe fittings and purpose-made caps and brackets
with rail apertures.
- Continuous rail type fences: Join the rails together in long lengths using purpose-made sleeves or
socketed connections, and pass them through the apertures of caps and brackets on intermediate
posts.
Railless barriers:
- Struts: Provide struts at ends, corners and gates.
Security barriers:
- Security fencing: Strain barbed wire between post extensions.

Special purpose enclosures

Tennis court enclosures (railless): Provide double bracing stays to corner posts and every twentieth
intermediate post in multiple (side by side) enclosures. Provide support cables at top and bottom and
at 900 and 1800 mm height. Fix the chainwire on the inside of single enclosures.
Cricket practice net enclosures: Provide a top rail, and support cables at the centre and bottom of the
enclosure’s sides and back, and additional cables at the back at 300 and 600 mm height. Fix the
chainwire on the inside of single enclosures, and on the offside of the (right handed) batsman in
multiple enclosures.
Gates
The gate post sizes and gate details described here should be increased if a pair of gates wider than 3600 mm is required. In
addition sliding gates and motorised gates are available. Draw from the standard manufacturer’s specification if you require
more detail.
Frame tubes: 33.7 mm diameter, 2 mm wall thickness.
Chainwire: Match fence.
Maximum width: 3600 mm.
Security barriers:
- Barbed wire security gate extension supports: 26.9 mm diameter, 2 mm wall thickness.
- Barbed wire: Match fence.
Chainwire barriers schedule
Designation CB1 CB2 CB3
Type of barrier
Height (excluding post extension, if any) (mm)
- Number of rails
Railless barriers:
- Number of cable wires
Security barriers:
- Post extension height (mm)
- Post extension form
Gates:
- Size (h x w)
- Locking
Height: The standard height of 1850 mm (excluding barbed wire extension) may be used, or varied to suit requirements but
ensure any different height specified suits wire roll widths e.g. 2100 mm or 2400 mm.
Number of rails: and No. of cable wires: The total must equal 3, e.g. a railless fence has three cable wires which are tensioned
to support the chainwire. A two rail fence has one central cable wire.
Post extension form: State “Not applicable”, “Straight” or “Cranked”. If the cranked extension is not to be “indented” state the
direction of cranking.
3.5 WELDED MESH FENCING

The type specified here is for heavy duty industrial, commercial and institutional use. Heights available are 900, 1200, 1500 and
1800 mm.
Lighter grades are available, particularly for domestic use, and a thermoset powder coated system is available.
Fence dimensions
Height (mm): >
Component sizes
End, corner and intermediate posts: 42.4 mm diameter, 2.6 mm wall thickness.
Gate posts (personnel): 60.3 mm diameter, 2.9 mm wall thickness.
Gate posts (vehicle): 88.9 mm diameter, 3.2 mm wall thickness.

Panel wire:
- Horizontal: 4.95 mm diameter at 75 mm centres.
- Vertical: 4.95 mm diameter at 50 mm centres.
Installation
General: Fit tightly fittings caps to steel posts. Attach panels to posts with fixing clips and M8 x 75 mm
hexagon head bolts before concreting footing.
Footing type: Concrete.
Gates
Frame tubes: 33.7 mm diameter, 2 mm wall thickness.
Wire: Match fence.
3.6 TEMPORARY LANDSCAPE FENCING

If it is felt that temporary fencing measures for tree protection during the contract cannot be left to the contractor, specify them
here, and cross reference from the Site preparation worksection to this worksection.
Fence dimensions
Height: 1200 mm.
Component sizes
Corner and gate posts: Hardwood or preservative-treated softwood, 250 mm diameter.
Intermediate posts: Star picket.
Gate: Provide a suitable hinged gate with a gate latch.
Wire: Top, intermediate and bottom rows of 3.2 mm plain galvanized steel wire. Thread the top wire
through pieces of plastic tube and through corner posts.
Removal
Completion: Remove the fence at the end of the planting establishment period.
3.7 VEHICLE BARRIERS

Log barriers
Installation: Check out the posts to receive the rails. Set each post 600 mm into the ground and
surround with compacted fine crushed rock, gravel or cement stabilised rammed earth. Bolt rails to
posts with M12 diameter galvanized bolts and washers, with bolt heads and nuts recessed.
Precast concrete wheel stops
Installation: Drive 12 mm diameter galvanized steel rods 600 mm into the ground to finish 25 mm
below the top of the wheel stop, or bolt the stop to masonry anchors in concrete slabs. Grout the holes
flush to match the concrete finish.
Steel tube bollards
Footing: Encase in a concrete footing at least 600 mm deep x 250 mm diameter.
On slabs: Weld on a 10 mm thick baseplate drilled for 4 bolts, and bolt to masonry anchors.
Filling: Fill the tube with 15 MPa concrete.
Check that wheel stops and bollards are not duplicated in Metal fixtures for general building work.

LANDSCAPE – SOILS SITE
LANDSCAPE – SOILS
This worksection is applicable to soils for landscaping including, rock work, filling, topsoil, topsoil additives, compost and mulch.
Geotechnical site investigation and soil related earthworks are also covered.
• Concrete formwork, Concrete reinforcing and Concrete in situ for footings and other concrete structures.
• Some projects may include items not covered by NATSPEC. For these you may need to create new text, modify this text or
use an applicable worksection.
• None.
• Show on the drawings the locations and depths of soils to be removed and soils to be provided.
• If the extent of soils to be removed is uncertain, consider allowing for provisional volumes here.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities

General
have no overlaps.

- Earthwork.
1.3 STANDARDS
Soils
1.4 INTERPRETATION
Definitions
Bad ground: Ground unsuitable for the purposes of the works, including fill liable to subsidence,
ground containing cavities, faults or fissures, ground contaminated by harmful substances and ground
which is or becomes soft, wet or unstable.
Site rock: Rocks approved for salvage.
Site topsoil: Soil excavated from the site which has the following characteristics:
- Contains organic matter.
- Supports plant life.
- Free from unwanted matter.
Unwanted matter (in topsoil):
- Stones over 25 mm diameter.
- Clay lumps.
- Weeds and tree roots.
- Sticks and rubbish.
- Material toxic to plants.
Imported topsoil:
- Fine: Clay loam, fine sandy loam, sandy clay loam, silty loam, loam.
- Medium: Sandy loam, fine sandy loam.
- Coarse: Sand, loamy sand.
Topsoil mixture: Topsoil and compost or other additives, thoroughly mixed before placing.
Top dressing: A soil which is suitable for surface application to lawn.
1.5 GEOTECHNICAL SITE INVESTIGATION

Report
The geotechnical site investigation report provided is for information only. The geotechnical
information and information on contaminants given is information on the nature of the ground at each
tested part. It is not a complete description of conditions existing at or below ground level.
Include the report in the tender documents, or inform tenderers where the report is available. If no geotechnical site investigation
has been carried out, delete the clause. For the minimum requirements of a geotechnical site investigation, see AS 1726. See
also “Guidelines for the provision of geotechnical information in construction contracts” published by the Institution of Engineers,
Australia. On selective provision of available data, see AS 3798 clause 3.3(b).
Notice
If the following are encountered, give notice immediately and obtain instructions before carrying out
any further work in the affected area:
- Bad ground.
If bad ground is known but the extent is uncertain, consider including a provisional quantity for removal and replacement of
unsuitable material.
Procedures for dealing with rock and bad ground will depend on the conditions of contract.

- Discrepancies.
- Rock.
- Springs, seepages.
- Topsoil > 100 mm deep.
1.6 INSPECTION
Notice
- Setting out completed.
- Subgrades cultivated or prepared for placing topsoil.
- Topsoil spread before planting.
- Grassing bed prepared before turfing, seeding, or temporary grassing.
The following may also need to be witnessed:
• Clearing completed.
• Topsoil stockpiles before placing topsoil.
1.7 TESTS
Soil tests
Sampling: As recommended in AS 4419 Appendix A.
Phosphorous content testing: >
AS 4419 Table 1. This standard requires the bulk density and organic matter content of all soils to be determined. The Table
stipulates the testing regime. Only phosphorous content testing is left unresolved.
1.8 SUBMISSIONS
Samples
General: Submit representative samples of each material, packed to prevent contamination and
labelled to indicate source and content.
Bulk materials: Submit a 5 kg sample of each type specified. Submit bulk material samples, with
required test results, at least 5 working days before bulk deliveries.
Bulk materials include filling, topsoil, topsoil additives, compost and mulch.
Suppliers
The suppliers of topsoil and mulch should generally be approved.
Statements: Submit statements from suppliers of soils and other materials, giving the following, where
applicable:
- Particulars of the supplier’s experience in the required type of work.
- Production capacity for material of the required type, sizes and quantity.
- Lead times for delivery of the material to the site.
Materials
Supplier’s data: Submit supplier’s data including the following:
- Material source of supply for topsoil, filling, stone and filter fabrics.
Compost: Submit a certificate of proof of compost pH value.
Execution
Program: Submit a work program in the form of a bar chart, for the landscape works.
See the Commentary on execution for additional information that may be required.

2 PRODUCTS
2.1 TOPSOIL
Source
General: Import topsoil to the Selections unless the topsoil type can be provided from material
recovered from the site.
Additives
Compliance: If using additives to raise topsoil to the required standard, ensure compliance with the
relevant test criteria.
2.2 COMPOST AND FERTILISER

Compost
General: Provide well rotted vegetative material or animal manure, free from harmful chemicals, grass
and weed growth.
If organic matter is called for, compost may not be necessary. See AS 4454 Table 3.1 for physical and chemical requirements
for composts, mulches and soil conditioners.
Compost schedule
Compost key Location Type Application rate
Type: e.g. spent mushroom compost, if available. Mushroom compost may be alkaline and not generally recommended for use
with native plants in the eastern states. Consider the supply conditions.
Application rate: e.g. 4:1 topsoil:compost, by volume.
Fertiliser
Provide proprietary fertilisers, delivered to the site in sealed bags marked to show manufacturer or
vendor, weight, fertiliser type, N:P:K ratio, recommended uses and application rates.
Fertiliser schedule
Fertiliser key Location N:P:K ratio Application rate
N:P:K ratios and application rates vary greatly depending on conditions of use. Obtain specialist advice. Proprietary fertilizers
meeting the requirements may be named if desired. Consult manufacturers for application rates suitable for individual plantings.
If nothing is stated in the schedule, the General requirements worksection requires the contractor to follow the manufacturers’
recommendations.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
Vegetative spoil
Remove vegetative spoil from site. Do not burn.
Burning destroys soil bacteria. Avoid if possible. Check with local authority regarding burning before permitting it. If vegetative
spoil is not to be chipped and reused it should be removed from the site.

Earth mounds
Place clean filling in layers approximately 150 mm thick compacted to 85% of the dry density ratio of
the surrounding soil as determined by AS 1289.5.4.1. Minimise slumping and further internal packing
down. Construct changes in grade over a minimum width of 500 mm to smooth, gradual and rounded
profiles.
Embankment stabilisation
General: Where necessary to prevent erosion or soil movement, stabilise embankments.
Method: Either matting overlay or hydromulching.
Matting generally: Biodegradable fibre reinforced with lightweight polymer mesh. Provide lightweight
material for seeding, medium or heavy weight material for planting.
Matting in high erosion zones: Flexible carbon black UV stabilised interwoven nylon mesh.
Matting installation: Sow before matting is installed, where sowing is required. Plant after matting is
installed, where planting is required. Peg the matting into 300 x 300 mm anchor trenches at top and
bottom, backfill the trenches with soil and compact.
Matting pegs: U-shape galvanized steel, at 1000 x 1000 mm intervals generally, 250 mm at overlaps.
Matting overlay schedule
Location or area Matting description
Type Weight (kg/m2) Thickness (mm)
Matting description: If matting is described as a proprietary item, it may not be necessary to specify the other characteristics
(type, weight, thickness).
3.2 ROCKWORK
Rock work
General: Place rocks while ground formation work is being carried out. Provide site rock, otherwise
provide imported rock. Bury rock two thirds by volume, with weathered faces exposed. Protect the
weathered faces from damage.
Site rock: Stockpile for future placement and accessibility for lifting. Dispose of other rock off site.
Imported rock: Provide rock which has been selected before delivery.
Placed rock schedule
Source Rock type and description Size (mm)
Storage and handling procedures may need special consideration, particularly for very large rocks and rocks from distant
sources.
Source: e.g. quarry or stone supplier (proprietary item).
Rock type and description: May be shown on the drawings. Show or specify the size, especially if the item is unusually large.
Quarried rock is unweathered and generally cheaper and more readily available than weathered rock.
Rock outcrops
General: Protect existing rock, rock shelves and rock outcrops from mechanical damage and surface
defacement.

Rock outcrops schedule

Item Value for damages ($)
Landscape feature rocks would be rocks of such an age, condition or size that they would not be easy to replace. Either show
them as such on the drawings or schedule them here by description. It may also be advisable to arrange for identification on
site.
Value for damages: Monetary compensation if the item cannot be restored or replaced. A true valuation (not a penalty) may be
difficult to assess.
3.3 SUBSOIL
Ripping
General: Rip parallel to the final contours wherever possible. Do not rip when the subsoil is wet or
plastic. Do not rip within the dripline of trees and shrubs to be retained.
Ripping depths: Rip the subsoil to the following typical depths:
- Compacted subsoil: 300 mm.
- Heavily compacted clay subsoil: 450 mm.
- Ripline planting areas: >
e.g. 450 mm. This depth may result in bringing subsoil to the surface, and requires a fairly heavy machine. Consider resolving
depth on site.
Planting beds
Excavated: Excavate to bring the subsoil to at least 300 mm below finished design levels. Shape the
subsoil to fall to subsoil drains where applicable. Break up the subsoil to a further depth of 100 mm.
Unexcavated: Remove weeds, roots, builder’s rubbish and other debris. Bring the planting bed to
75 mm below finished design levels.
Cultivation
Minimum depth: 100 mm.
The 100 mm minimum depth assumes that the subsoil is of sufficiently good quality and it therefore is not necessary to
excavate and to import topsoil. This depth may not be achievable on rocky or steep areas. Vary if required.
Cultivation depths (mm):
- Grassed areas (seeded, turf, strip turf, stolonized):
>
- Hydroseeded or hydromulched areas: >
- Planting areas: >
Services and roots: Do not disturb services or tree roots; if necessary cultivate these areas by hand.
Cultivation: Thoroughly mix in materials required to be incorporated into the subsoil. Cultivate
manually within 300 mm of paths or structures. Remove stones exceeding 25 mm, clods of earth
exceeding 50 mm, and weeds, rubbish or other deleterious material brought to the surface during
cultivation. Trim the surface to design levels after cultivation.
Subsoil preparation schedule
Location Cultivation method
Additives
General: Apply additives after ripping or cultivation and incorporate into the upper 100 mm layer of the
subsoil.
Gypsum: Incorporate at the rate of 0.25 kg/m2.

Subsoil additives schedule
Location Additive type Additive rate
Gypsum may be used where the site topsoil is heavy clay, provided planting is not lime-sensitive, or where the subsoil is heavy
clay, to improve drainage. Other additives include lime or dolomite to reduce acidity in highly acidic soils, and sulfur to reduce
alkalinity in highly alkaline soils. Test the subsoil by chemical and physical analysis to determine appropriate remedial methods.
3.4 TOPSOIL
Placing topsoil
Preferably show on the drawings the areas to be topsoiled and the topsoil depths. Typically the areas would be those required
to be grassed, turfed, or mass planted.
General: Spread the topsoil on the prepared subsoil and grade evenly, making the necessary
allowances to permit the following:
- Required finished levels and contours may be achieved after light compaction.
- Grassed areas may be finished flush with adjacent hard surfaces such as kerbs, paths and mowing
strips.
Contamination: Where diesel oil, cement or other phytotoxic material has been spilt on the subsoil or
topsoil, excavate the contaminated soil, dispose of it off the site, and replace it with site soil or
imported topsoil to restore design levels.
Spreading: On steep batters, if using a chain drag, ensure there is no danger of batter disturbance.
Finishing: Feather edges into adjoining undisturbed ground.
Consolidation
General: Compact lightly and uniformly in 150 mm layers. Avoid differential subsidence and excess
compaction and produce a finished topsoil surface which has the following characteristics:
- Finished to design levels.
- Smooth and free from stones or lumps of soil.
- Graded to drain freely, without ponding, to catchment points.
- Graded evenly into adjoining ground surfaces.
- Ready for planting.
Topsoil depths
Vary if the typical depths specified in the Template are not acceptable.
Spread topsoil to the following typical depths:
- Excavated planting areas: If using organic mulch, 225 mm. If using gravel mulch, 250 mm.
- Irrigated grassed areas generally: 150 mm.
- Irrigated grassed areas, heavy use (e.g. playing fields, playgrounds, public parks): 200 mm.
- Non-irrigated grass areas: 100 mm.
Topsoil application schedule
Soil key Location Type Depth (mm)
Soil key, texture, use and depth may be shown on the drawings. The examples given below are by way of illustration only; vary
as necessary. Obtain specialist advice.

Depth: Delete if Template defaults are acceptable.

Surplus topsoil
General: Spread surplus topsoil on designated areas on site, if any; otherwise, dispose off site.
Designated areas: >
4 SELECTIONS
Schedules refer to selection of proprietary products or to generic products by their properties. Provide their locations either here
or on the drawings.
Duplicate and customise this Schedule, adding and deleting rows and columns, as required.
4.1 TOPSOIL
Topsoil source schedule
Soil key Soil type Mixture
Topsoil particle size table (% passing by mass)

AS sieve aperture Soil textures
Fine Medium Coarse
2.36 100 100 100
1.18 90 – 100 95 – 100 95 – 100
0.60 75 – 100 75 – 100 70 – 90
0.30 57 – 90 55 – 85 30 – 46
0.15 45 – 70 38 – 55 10 – 22
0.075 35 – 55 25 – 35 5 – 10
0.002 2 – 15 2–8
The table is precompleted with typical values. Vary as necessary to suit the project. On large particles, see AS 4419 clause
5.14.
Topsoil properties schedule
Property Type Amount
Nutrient levels Phosphorus (P) (mg/L) 0.7 – 4
Potassium (K) (mg/L) 35 – 250
Sulfur (S) (mg/L) > 40
Calcium (Ca) (mg/L) 50 – 350
Nitrogen (N) (mg/L) ≤ 100
Manganese (Mn) (mg/L) 1 – 15
Nitrogen drawdown
Additives Gypsum (% by volume)
Compost
Other properties Organic matter (% by mass) 20 maximum

Property Type Amount

Wettability
Soil reaction (pH) 6–7
Electrical conductivity
(dS/m)
Dispersibility
Soluble salts (% by mass) 0.1
Moisture content (% by mass)
Toxicity index to AS 3743
Permeability
The schedule is partially precompleted with typical values. Vary as necessary to suit the project.
Nutrient levels: For other elements see AS 3743 Table 2.1.
• Phosphorous: See AS 4419 clause 5.8.
• Nitrogen: See AS 4419 clause 5.7.
• Nitrogen drawdown: See AS 4419 clause 5.9.
Other properties:
• Organic matter: See AS 4419 clause 5.3 and Appendix K.
• Wettability: See AS 4419 clause 5.4.
• Soil reaction: See AS 4419 clause 5.5.
• Electrical conductivity: See AS 4419 clause 5.6.
• Dispersibility: See AS 4419 clause 5.11.
• Toxicity index to AS 3743: See AS 4419 clauses 5.7 and 5.10.
• Permeability: See AS 4419 clause 5.12.
Use of soils schedule
Soil texture classification Use for Depth
Sandy clay
Light clay
Silty clay
Medium clay
Heavy clay
Complete the schedule. Refer to “Soil texture classifications” AS 4419 Appendix I Table I1.
Refer to “Guidance for the selection and use of soils” of AS 4419 Appendix K. Generally, these soil texture classifications are
considered unsuitable for general landscaping purposes, according to this Appendix.

LANDSCAPE –SOFT SURFACES SITE
LANDSCAPE – SOFT SURFACES
This worksection is applicable to grass seeding, hydroseeding and hydromulching, turfing, stolonising and temporary grassing.
• Landscape – walling for walls up to 750 mm in height.
• Asphaltic concrete.
• Spayed bituminous surfacing.
• Concrete pavement.
• None.
• This worksection relies on fully detailed landscape drawings.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
Generally: Provide surfaces to the schedules that have been grown to a standard that allows them to
establish rapidly.

General

have no overlaps.
- Site preparation.
- Earthwork.
- Landscape – soils.
1.3 INTERPRETATION
Definitions
- Clay lumps.
Imported topsoil:
Top dressing: A soil which is suitable for surface application to lawn.
1.4 INSPECTION
Notice
Inspection: Give sufficient notice so inspection may be made of the following
- Clearing completed.
- Grassing bed prepared before turfing, seeding, or temporary grassing.
- Grassing or turfing completed.
1.5 SUBMISSIONS
Samples

Samples schedule
Item Quantity
Item: and Quantity: List any required samples or quantities.

The idea is that the entire material represented by rejected samples may be rejected.
Suppliers
Statements: Submit statements from suppliers, giving the following, where applicable:
- Production capacity for material of the required type and quantity.
Materials
- Material source of supply.
Execution
Maintenance program: Submit a proposed planting maintenance program.
Material storage on site: Submit proposal.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GRASS SEED

Seed
Mixtures: Provide seed mixtures which are thoroughly pre-mixed with a bulking material such as
safflower meal. Deliver to the site in bags marked to show weight, seed species and supplier’s name.
Provide fresh, clean, uncoated new seed. Do not provide wet, mouldy, or otherwise impaired seed.
Purity (minimum): 98%.
Germination viability (minimum): 86%.
Age (maximum) from date of harvest: 2 years.
2.2 FERTILISER
Fertiliser
General: Provide proprietary fertilisers, delivered to the site in sealed bags marked to show
manufacturer or vendor, weight, fertiliser type, N:P:K ratio, recommended uses and application rates.
Fertiliser schedule
N:P:K ratios and application rates vary greatly depending on conditions of use. The examples given below are by way of
illustration only. Obtain specialist advice. Proprietary fertilizers meeting the requirements may be named if desired. Consult
manufacturers for application rates suitable for individual plantings. If nothing is stated in the schedule, the General
requirements worksection requires the contractor to follow the manufacturers’ recommendations.
Location N:P:K ratio
Hydroseeding 11:34:11

Temporary grassing 10:4:6

Turfing 10:4:6
Grassing at time of sowing 11:34:11
Grassing after germination 10:4:6
Individual plantings an approved prolonged release type
Stolonized areas 11:34:11
Planting beds 63:18:28
3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
Weed eradication
Herbicide: Eradicate weeds using environmentally acceptable methods, such as a non-residual
glyphosate herbicide in any of its registered formulae, at the recommended maximum rate.
Manual weeding: Regularly remove, by hand, rubbish and weed growth throughout grassed, planted
and mulched areas. Remove weed growth from an area 750 mm diameter around the base of the
trees in grassed areas. Continue eradication throughout the course of the works and during the
planting establishment period.
Weed eradication schedule
Weed type Eradication method or treatment
Acceptable Unacceptable
Specify acceptable (and unacceptable) methods if there is heavy infestation of particular weed types (especially if they are
noxious weeds). Manual removal is preferred when practical.
Vegetative spoil
Disposal: Remove vegetative spoil from site. Do not burn.
Burning destroys soil bacteria. Avoid if possible. Check with local authority regarding burning before permitting it. If vegetative
spoil is not to be chipped and reused it should be removed from the site.
3.2 GRASS SEEDING

See the Commentary on grass seeding.
Preparation
General: Prepare the areas to be sown. Spread the fertiliser evenly over the cultivated bed within 48
hours before sowing, and rake lightly into the surface. If a prepared area becomes compacted from
any cause before sowing can begin, rework the ground surface before sowing.
Sowing
Conditions: Do not sow if frost is likely before the plant has reached an established state, or in periods
of extreme heat, cold or wet, or when wind velocities exceed 8 km/h. Provide even distribution. Lightly
rake the surface to cover the seed.
Sowing schedule
Mix Seed species Location Sowing Application Mowing height
designation method rate (kg/ha) (mm)

Use this schedule to identify and describe each of the grass seed mixes to be used in the project, whether for sowing,
hydroseeding, temporary grassing, etc. A separate schedule for each mix designation may be necessary.
Mix designation: e.g. Type A. See the Commentary.
Seed species: and Application rates: Set out as in the typical examples. Identify and describe each of the grass seed mixes to
be used in the project, whether for sowing, hydroseeding, temporary grassing, etc.
Sowing method: Specify any particular requirements additional to those in the Template, or delete this column. The method may
comprise broadcast sowing in two transverse directions, or row sowing, etc., depending on the equipment used and the
conditions.
Mowing height: Different for non-irrigated and irrigated grasses. 30 mm for stoloniferous grasses, 75-150 mm for species with
coarse growth, such as Oats or Rye. Mowing may not be possible on steep banks and may not be desirable where seed mix
includes species with coarse growth.
Rolling
General: Roll the seed bed immediately after sowing.
Roller weight (maximum):
- Clay and packing (heavy) soils: 90 kg/m width.
- Sandy and light soils: 300 kg/m width.
Watering
Before germination: Water the seeded area with a fine spray until the topsoil is moistened to its full
depth. Continue watering until germination to keep the surface damp and the topsoil moist but not
waterlogged.
After germination: Water to maintain a healthy condition, progressively hardened off to the natural
climatic conditions.
Germination
General: Maintain sown areas until the attainment of a dense continuous sward of healthy grass over
the whole of the seeded area, evenly green and of a consistent height.
Reseeding: If germination has not been attained within one month, reseed the sown areas.
Reseeding mixture: >
e.g. the original seed mixture or a modified mixture.
Weeding
Identify special requirements for areas such as steep embankments and broad scale sites where germination is to be by rainfall
only.
Removal: Remove weeds that occur in sown areas.
Spraying: Where necessary spray with a selective herbicide for broad leafed weeds. Do not spray
grass seeded areas within 3 months of germination.
Protection
General: Protect the newly sown areas against traffic until well established.
Protection method: >
e.g. temporary fencing.
Fertilising after germination
Six weeks after germination: Spread fertiliser evenly over the sown area and then water in. Do not
apply the fertiliser to wet grass.
Ten weeks after grass germination: If the planting establishment period carries through the summer
months, spread pelleted sulphate of ammonia at the rate of 250 kg/ha.
Vary the type and timing of the post-sowing application as necessary. Sulphate of ammonia may be required more frequently in
warm wet conditions. On the other hand, it does not suit clover.
Mowing
Height: Mow to maintain the grass height within the required range. Do not remove more than one
third of the grass height at any one time. Carry out the last mowing within 7 days before the end of the
planting establishment period. Remove grass clippings from the site after each mowing.
Removal of grass clippings may not be required - it results in depletion of fertility. Edit as required.

3.3 HYDROSEEDING AND HYDROMULCHING

Seed pretreatment
General: Place in a calico bag those species of seed to be pretreated, and immerse for 10 minutes in
water kept at a temperature between 80°C and 95°C. Do not boil. Allow to cool, soak for 24 hours,
then apply immediately.
Obtain advice from the seed supplier on the appropriate pretreatment for the seed species specified and specify here if different
from the Template.
Seed species to be pretreated: >
Obtain advice from the seed supplier.
Hydroseeding mixture
General: A slurry of seed mixture, fertiliser, and water.
Alternatively the fertilizer may be applied as a separate application.
Hydromulching mixture
General: A slurry of seed mixture, fertiliser, mulch and water.
Hydroseeding and hydromulching are alternatives. Edit the above and the schedule as required.
Hydroseeding and hydromulching schedule
Location Seed mix and Mulch type Slurry type Water Binder type
type application and rate
rate (L/ha)
Seed mix and type: e.g. one of the types (A, B, etc.) from the Sowing schedule. May include other than grass seeds (e.g.
shrubs and trees).
Mulch type: Specify mulch type such as straw, fibre.
Slurry type: Either “Hydroseeding mixture” or “Hydromulching mixture”. The materials may be applied in one or several
combinations to suit particular requirements.
Water application rate: The rate will vary according to site conditions, availability and coverage.
Binder type and rate: Specify a binder if required (e.g. on steep slopes or areas exposed to high winds) or write “Not applicable”.
The binder may be applied separately or as part of the mixture. See also the subclause Embankment stabilisation.
Fertiliser
Type and application rate: >
Refer to the Fertilizer schedule.
Application method: >
e.g. “Included in the slurry” or “Separately applied”.
Mixing
Mixer: Thoroughly mix the slurry in a purpose-made mechanical mixer.
Application rates
Seed mixture: The rate applicable to the mix type.
Mulch: At least 2.5 t/ha with seed, or 5 t/ha without seed.
Bitumen emulsion binder: 2000 L/ha of residual bitumen.
Polymer binder: 250 L/ha.
Water: Suitable for the site conditions, and sufficient to assist in the distribution of the seed, fertiliser
and mulch.
Preparation
Bed: Scarify the area to be seeded to provide a firm friable seed bed. If the area is to have added
topsoil, place it before scarifying.

Application
General: Moisten the topsoil to its full depth before applying the slurry. Apply the slurry using high
pressure pumping equipment operated by trained personnel. Spray the mixed slurry under pressure,
maintaining a thoroughly mixed supply, operating on a front so that the mixture is evenly distributed
over the area. Complete each front before commencing the next.
Watering
Before germination: Water the seeded area with a fine spray until the topsoil is moistened to its full
depth. Continue watering until germination to keep the surface damp and the topsoil moist but not
waterlogged.
After germination: Water to maintain a healthy condition, progressively hardened off to the natural
climatic conditions.
3.4 TURFING
Turf
Supplier: Obtain turf from a specialist grower of cultivated turf. Provide turf of even thickness, free from
weeds and other foreign matter.
Supply
Elapsed time: Deliver the turf within 24 hours of cutting, and lay it within 36 hours of cutting. Prevent it
from drying out between cutting and laying.
Fertilising
General: Mix the fertiliser thoroughly into the topsoil before placing the turf. Apply lawn fertiliser at the
completion of the first and last mowings, and at other times as required to maintain healthy grass
cover.
Laying
If turf is not laid within 36 hours it should be rolled out on a flat surface with the grass up, and watered as necessary to maintain
a good condition.
General: Lay the turf in the following manner:
- In stretcher pattern with the joints staggered and close butted.
- Parallel with the long sides of level areas, and with contours on slopes.
- To finish flush, after tamping, with adjacent finished surfaces of ground, paving edging, or grass
seeded areas.
Strip turf laying: Close butt the end joints and space the strips 300 mm apart. Apply a layer of top
dressing between the strips of turf. Finish with an even surface.
Tamping
General: Lightly tamp to an even surface immediately after laying. Do not use a roller.
Pegging
Stabilising: On steep slopes peg the turf to prevent downslope movement. Remove the pegs when the
turf is established.
Watering
General: Water immediately after laying until the topsoil is moistened to its full depth. Continue
watering to maintain moisture to this depth. Keep the grass in a healthy condition.
Mowing
Height: Mow to maintain the grass height within the required range. Do not remove more than one
third of the grass height at any one time. Carry out the last mowing within 7 days before the end of the
planting establishment period. Remove grass clippings from the site after each mowing.
Turfing schedule
Turf key Species or Minimum Turf roll size Location Mowing height
variety thickness (mm) (mm)
(mm)

Species or variety: and Minimum thickness: e.g. “Couch 20 mm”, “Kikuyu 30 mm”, “Buffalo 30 mm”. Thicker for sandy soils. Site
conditions such as topography or soil conditions may dictate different thicknesses.
Turf roll size: e.g. “1000 x 300 mm”.
Mowing height: Mowing height will vary depending on species and local conditions. Generally lawn heights range between 25 to
50 mm.
Maintenance
General: Maintain turfed areas until the attainment of a dense continuous sward of healthy grass over
the whole turfed area, evenly green and of a consistent height.
Failed turf: Lift failed turf and relay with new turf.
Levels: Where levels have deviated from the design levels after placing and watering, lift turf and
regrade topsoil to achieve design levels.
Top dressing
General: When the turf is established mow, remove cuttings and lightly top dress to a depth of 10 mm.
Rub the dressing well into the joints and correct any unevenness in the turf surface.
3.5 STOLONISING
Stolons
Characteristics: Well established fibrous runners 50 – 100 mm in length, with minimum green leaf
material, obtained from a specialist grower of cultivated turf.
Stolons schedule
Species or variety Stolon length (mm)
Supply
Elapsed time: Deliver stolons to the site within 24 hours of harvesting, and plant them within 36 hours
of arrival on site. Prevent them from drying out between harvesting and planting.
Preparation
General: Prepare the area to be planted by cultivating, fertilising and watering. Ensure that the topsoil
is moistened to its full depth, loose, friable and weed free.
Fertilising
Application: Mix the fertiliser thoroughly into the topsoil before planting the stolons.
Planting
Method: Using a disk sprigger or row planter, mechanically sprig the stolons into the prepared soil to a
minimum depth of half the stolon length, at maximum centre to centre spacings of 150 mm in both
transverse directions over the whole of the planting area, and extending 1 m into adjacent grassed
areas.
Watering
General: Water thoroughly on completion of planting. Keep the topsoil moist to its full depth.
Stimulant
General: Three days after planting, spray with hormone root growth stimulant.
Binding
Application: Immediately after planting in erosion areas, including slopes and drainage swales, spray
with binder at the rate of 250 L/ha.

Stolonizing schedule
Stolonizing on slopes greater than 1:3 is not recommended.
Location Species or variety Mowing height (mm) Stimulant
Making good
General: Replant areas that fail to grow.
3.6 TEMPORARY GRASSING

Location >
e.g. stockpiles and earthworks to minimise erosion and weed invasion.
Seed mix type >
Select seed mix based on the required period of cover. Generally use only annual grasses, particularly where areas are to be
permanently planted later.
Preparation
General: Prepare the areas to be sown. Spread fertiliser evenly over the cultivated bed within 48 hours
before sowing, and rake lightly into the surface. If a prepared area becomes compacted before sowing
begins, rework the ground surface before sowing.
Sowing
General: Provide even distribution. Lightly rake the surface to cover the seed.
Watering
General: Immediately after sowing, water to a depth of 100 mm. Thereafter water to obtain
germination and establish grasses. After establishment water only as necessary.
Maintenance
General: Maintain temporary grassing areas until no longer required.
Existing grass
General: Where existing grass or planting is within the landscape contract area, maintain it as for the
corresponding classifications of new grass or planting.
Grassed areas
Maintenance: Commence grass maintenance works at the completion of sowing, hydroseeding and
turfing. Maintain healthy weed-free growth.
Log book
Records: Keep a log book recording when and what maintenance work has been done and what
materials, including toxic materials, have been used. Make the log book available for inspection on
request.

LANDSCAPE – PLANTS SITE
LANDSCAPE – PLANTS
This worksection is applicable to plants, composts, fertilisers, binders, mulching, insect spraying transplanting, tree pruning and
anchorage and is principally concerned with so-called “softworks”.
• Landscape – walling for retaining walls and associated masonry or stone walls.
• None.
• This worksection relies on fully detailed landscape drawings.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
General: Provide plants to that have been grown to a standard that allows them to establish rapidly
and grow to maturity.

General
The General requirements worksection contains ‘umbrella’ requirements for referenced documents, inspections, tests, samples,
They need not be specified here unless you want to relocate them, for example if this is to be the specification for a multiple-
prime contract package. In this case make sure that the interlocking contracts leave no loopholes, such as work by non-existent
‘others’, and have no overlaps.

- Landscape – soils.
- Trees supply.
1.3 INTERPRETATION
Definitions
- Clay lumps.
Imported topsoil:
1.4 INSPECTION
Notice
- Plant holes excavated and prepared for planting.
- Plant material set out before planting.
- Planting, staking and tying completed.
- Completion of planting establishment work.
The following may also need to be witnessed:
• Plant materials delivered to the site.
• Clearing completed.
• Plant materials available at the source of supply.
• Inspections during the planting establishment period, which NATSPEC assumes to be the same as the defects liability
period, may require the presence of the contractor. If this is the case, give sufficient notice.
1.5 SUBMISSIONS
Suppliers
The suppliers of plants, mulch and seed should generally be approved.
Statements: Submit statements from suppliers of plants and other materials, giving the following,
where applicable:


Materials
- Material source of supply.
Compost: Submit a certificate of proof of compost pH value.
Execution
Maintenance program: Submit a proposed planting maintenance program.
Planting machine: If a planting machine is to be used as an alternative to hand planting, submit
proposal.
Spraying: Submit proposal.
Plants – open rooted stock: If open rooted stock is to be used, submit proposal.
Material site storage: Submit proposal.
Samples
Plant materials - quantity: Submit one plant sample for each 100 of each species or variety, in the
condition in which it is proposed to supply that plant to the site.
The idea is that the entire material represented by rejected samples may be rejected, except that plants with a correctable
defect may be accepted subject to satisfactory corrective treatment.
Samples schedule
Item Quantity
Item: and Quantity: List any required samples or quantities which differ from those in the template.
Soil – type tests
Evidence: Submit test results as follows:
- Sampling: As recommended in AS 4419 Appendix A.
- Phosphorous content testing: >
AS 4419 Table 1. This standard requires the bulk density and organic matter content of all soils to be determined. The Table
stipulates the testing regime. Only phosphorous content testing is left unresolved.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 COMPOST AND FERTILISER

Compost
General: Provide well rotted vegetative material or animal manure, free from harmful chemicals, grass
and weed growth.
If organic matter is called for, compost may not be necessary. See AS 4454 Table 3.1 for physical and chemical requirements
for composts, mulches and soil conditioners.

Compost schedule
Compost key Location Type Application rate
Type: e.g. Spent mushroom compost, if available. Mushroom compost may be alkaline and not generally recommended for use
with native plants in the eastern states. Consider the supply conditions.
Application rate: e.g. 4:1 topsoil:compost, by volume.
Fertiliser
General: Provide proprietary fertilisers, delivered to the site in sealed bags marked to show
manufacturer or vendor, weight, fertiliser type, N:P:K ratio, recommended uses and application rates.
Fertiliser schedule
N:P:K ratios and application rates vary greatly depending on conditions of use. The examples given below are by way of
illustration only. Obtain specialist advice. Proprietary fertilizers meeting the requirements may be named if desired. Consult
manufacturers for application rates suitable for individual plantings. If nothing is stated in the schedule, the General
requirements worksection requires the contractor to follow the manufacturers’ recommendations.
Location N:P:K ratio
Hydroseeding 11:34:11
Temporary grassing 10:4:6
Turfing 10:4:6
Grassing at time of sowing 11:34:11
Grassing after germination 10:4:6
Individual plantings an approved prolonged release type
Stolonized areas 11:34:11
Planting beds 63:18:28
2.2 PLANTS
Plants
Characteristics: Provide plants with the following characteristics:
- Large healthy root systems, with no evidence of root curl, restriction or damage.
- Vigorous, well established, free from disease and pests, of good form consistent with the species or
variety.
- Hardened off, not soft or forced, and suitable for planting in the natural climatic conditions prevailing
at the site.
Trees: Provide trees which, unless required to be multi-stemmed, have a single leading shoot.
Replacement: Replace damaged or failed plants with plants of the same type and size.
Plant containers
General: Supply plants in weed-free containers of the required size.
Open rooted stock: If trees are to be supplied as open rooted stock, ensure this is appropriate to the
species, variety, size, and time of year for planting.
Potting-on: Do not carry out potting-on.

Potting-on is the transfer of plants into larger soil-filled containers, to prevent them from becoming root-bound. If a need for
potting-on (i.e. long delays) is considered to be likely, tenderers should be required to nominate actual contract rates at the time
of tender. In any case, agree the rates before authorising potting-on, if the principal/proprietor is to bear the cost.
Plant schedule
Plant key Plant Roots Number Plant size (mm)
species required
Container Minimum Plant height
size trunk caliper
Delete if the information is shown on the drawings.

Plant species: Depending on location and species, plants may be open-rooted or balled. Specify accordingly.
Roots: Depending on location and species, plants may be open-rooted or balled. Specify accordingly. Check availability of bare
or open-rooted plants - not for all species, not all year round, not all sizes.
Minimum trunk caliper: For some species the trunk caliper may not relate to height due to growing characteristics of the species.
Labelling
Tag: Label at least one plant of each species or variety in a batch with a durable, readable tag.
Storage
Timing: Deliver plant material to the site on a day to day basis, and plant immediately after delivery.
Specify details of storage requirements, if any, additional to those in the Template. Site storage should be avoided if the plants
can be held off-site until needed. If site storage cannot be avoided, the plants must be kept in good condition on the site,
adequately protected from frost, wind, sun and vermin by appropriate storage methods, including an on-site nursery of sufficient
size, with provision for watering the stock.
2.3 MULCH
Mulch
General: Provide mulch which is free of deleterious and extraneous matter such as soil, weeds and
sticks.
Organic mulches: Free of stones.
Mulch material: Brush chippings and leaf litter recovered from site clearing, if available; otherwise, pine
bark.
Organic mulch types
Brush chippings and leaf litter: Vegetative material processed through a chipper to pieces not larger
than 75 x 50 x 15 mm.
- Material permitted: Leaf matter and tree loppings from Eucalyptus, Tristania and Pinus species.
- Material not permitted: Leaf matter and tree loppings from privet, camphor laurel, coral tree, poplar,
willow, and noxious weeds.
Pine bark: From mature trees, graded in size from 50 x 50 x 25 mm to 25 x 15 x 15 mm, free from
wood slivers.
Pine flake: Pinus species sapwood slivers of size range 250 x 25 mm to 30 x 3 mm, including
fragments of pine bark.
Straw: Cereal straw, wood fibre, or other suitable vegetative material (but not meadow hay) free from
weeds and seeds, applied in conjunction with a bitumen emulsion or polymer binder.
Inorganic mulch types
Washed river pebble: Uniform size or graded material in the size range 6 – 10 mm.
Decomposed granite gravel: Uniform size or graded material in the size range 5 – 20 mm, of uniform
colour and low plasticity. Keep clear of plant stems.
Crushed quartz: Uniform size or graded material in the size range 5 – 20 mm, of uniform colour.
Marble chip gravel: Uniform size or graded material in the size range 5 – 20 mm, of uniform colour.

Slate: Plum slate slivers in the size range 5 – 25 mm.

Shale: Uniform size or graded material, no particles smaller than 0.1 mm diameter.
Scoria: Uniform size or graded material.
Binders
Generally: Provide materials suitable for cold spray application to stabilise mulched or seeded
surfaces on banks or high erosion areas.
Type: >
Binder type: Specify a binder if required (e.g. on steep slopes).
Bitumen emulsion
Designation: ASS/170-60, containing no ingredients toxic to plants.
Polymer
A suitable polymer based emulsion.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
Weed eradication
Herbicide: Eradicate weeds using environmentally acceptable methods, such as a non-residual
glyphosate herbicide in any of its registered formulae, at the recommended maximum rate.
Removal: Regularly remove, by hand, rubbish and weed growth throughout grassed, planted and
mulched areas. Remove weed growth from an area 750 mm diameter around the base of the trees in
grassed areas. Continue eradication throughout the course of the works and during the planting
establishment period.
Weed eradication schedule
Weed type Eradication method or treatment
Acceptable Unacceptable
It may be advisable to specify acceptable (and unacceptable) methods if there is heavy infestation of particular weed types
(especially if they are noxious weeds). Manual removal is preferred when practical.
Vegetative spoil
Disposal: Remove vegetative spoil from site. Do not burn.
3.2 PLANTING
Individual plantings in grassed areas
Method: Excavate a hole to twice the diameter of the root ball and at least 100 mm deeper than the
root ball. Break up the base of the hole to a further depth of 100 mm, and loosen compacted sides of
the hole to prevent confinement of root growth.
Ripline planting
Method: Rip the row and excavate a plant hole for each plant large enough to accept the root ball plus
0.1 m³ of backfilling with topsoil. Clear weeds and other vegetative material within 300 mm radius of
the plants. If planting holes are excavated by mechanical means increase the hole size by 100 mm
and loosen compacted sides to prevent confinement of root growth.
Developments in tubestock planting using purpose-made machinery show this to be an economically viable tool for broadscale
revegetation. Specification will depend on machinery and site conditions. Backfilling with topsoil may not be necessary.

Locations
General: If it appears necessary to vary plant locations and spacings to avoid service lines, or to cover
the area uniformly, or for other reasons, give notice.
Planting conditions
Weather: Do not plant in unsuitable weather conditions such as extreme heat, cold, wind or rain. In
other than sandy soils, suspend excavation when the soil is wet, or during frost periods.
Watering
Timing: Thoroughly water the plants before planting, immediately after planting, and as required to
maintain growth rates free of stress.
Placing
Method: Remove the plant from the container with minimum disturbance to the root ball, ensure that
the root ball is moist and place it in its final position, in the centre of the hole and plumb, and with the
top soil level of the plant root ball level with the finished surface of the surrounding soil.
If individual locations are not nominated or required show those areas on the drawings.
Fertilising
Pellets: In planting beds and individual plantings, place fertiliser pellets around the plants at the time of
planting.
Application rate (kg/ha): >
Nominate a rate if manufacturer’s recommendations are not acceptable.
Backfilling
General: Backfill with topsoil mixture. Lightly tamp and water to eliminate air pockets. Ensure that
topsoil is not placed over the top of the root ball, so that the plant stem remains the same height above
ground as it was in the container.
Watering basins for plants in grass
Method: Except in irrigated grassed areas and normally moist areas, construct a watering basin
around the base of each individual plant, consisting of a raised ring of soil capable of holding at least
10 L.
Plant surrounds schedule
Plant key Plant Watering Mulch depth Mulch area Matting type Matting size
species basin size (mm) (m2) (mm)
(L)
A watering basin may not be required in high rainfall areas or naturally wet soils.
Watering basin size: Specify here only if different from the minimum capacity in the Template. This will vary with site conditions
and species. For large deciduous trees, for example, a minimum of 20 L would be appropriate. Common dimensions are
750 mm diameter and 100 mm deep for pots up to 5 L, and 1000 mm diameter and 100 mm deep for pots larger than 5 L.
Matting type: A proprietary weed suppressant matting can be used instead of mulch.
3.3 TRANSPLANTING
Use only for small trees and shrubs up to 3 m high; not for general application. Seek specialist advice on transplanting
significant plants. The majority of native trees and shrubs do not readily transplant.
Notice
General: Give sufficient notice before transplanting.
Conditions
Timing: Select a time for transplanting having regard to the appropriate season, time of actual
operation, root ball diameter and depth, lifting methods, weather conditions and the like.
Lifting
Method: Two days before transplanting of each specimen, thoroughly irrigate it to the full depth of the
root ball. Minimise the cutting of roots. Cut roots with sharp tools. Do not fracture the ball of soil

around the root system, but maintain it in firm condition during transplanting by wrapping in
appropriate open weave material (e.g. hessian), securely tied.
Planting
Disturbance: Avoid disturbance to the root ball and plant. Remove the root ball wrapping and ties by
cutting.
Pruning
General: Prune as directed where selective pruning of branches or canopy is necessary.
Watering
General: At the completion of transplanting, water the root ball thoroughly and continue to water until
established.
Transplanting schedule
Species Method Pruning Notification
Pruning: Some plants require canopy pruning, some require stem pruning, and some require no pruning. Site conditions and
species will dictate.
Notification: Nominate lead time before transplanting.
3.4 MULCHING
Placing mulch
General: Place mulch to the required depth, clear of plant stems, and rake to an even surface flush
with the surrounding finished levels. Spread and roll mulch so that after settling, or after rolling, it is
smooth and evenly graded between design surface levels sloped towards the base of plant stems in
plantation beds, and not closer to the stem than 50 mm in the case of gravel mulches.
In mass planted areas: Place after the preparation of the planting bed but before planting and other
work.
In smaller areas (e.g. planter boxes): Place after the preparation of the planting bed, planting and
other work.
Extent: To surrounds of plants planted in riplines and grass areas, provide mulch to 750 mm diameter.
Depths: Spread organic mulch to a depth of 75 mm, and gravel mulch to a depth of 50 mm.
Mulching schedule
Mulch key Location Mulch type Depth Stabilisation
method
Use the schedule only to provide information not shown on the drawings or specified in the Template.
Location: e.g. “Watering basins of individual plantings”, “Mass planting areas”, “Garden beds”.
Mulch type: Select the types with regard to local availability, proposed use, and prevailing conditions (slope, wind, etc.).
Mulch type: and Depth:
• Brush chippings and leaf litter: 75 mm.
• Pine flake: 75 mm.
• Pine bark: 75 mm.
• Chipper waste: 75 mm.
• River gravel (state size): 50 mm.
Select the types with regard to local availability, proposed use, and prevailing conditions (slope, wind, etc).

Materials such as leaf litter, pine flake and pine bark require stabilisation (i.e. meshing) on slopes greater than 1:3. Materials
such as river pebbles and gravels are not suitable for use on slopes greater than 1:6.
3.5 SPRAYING
Notice
General: Immediately give notice of evidence of insect attack or disease amongst plant material.
Spraying
Product: Where required, spray with insecticide, fungicide or both.
Check whether local registers of pesticides or fungicides place restrictions, and if residuals will be unacceptable to the users of
finished works, e.g. schools. Edit as required.
3.6 STAKES AND TIES

Stakes
Material: Hardwood, straight, free from knots or twists, pointed at one end.
Installation: Drive stakes into the ground at least one third of their length, avoiding damage to the root
system.
Stake sizes:
- For plants ≥ 2.5 m high: Three 50 x 50 x 2400 mm stakes per plant.
- For plants 1 – 2.5 m high: Two 50 x 50 x 1800 mm stakes per plant.
- For plants < 1 m high: One 38 x 38 x 1200 mm stake per plant.
Ties
General: Provide ties fixed securely to the stakes, one tie at half the height of the main stem, others as
necessary to stabilise the plant.
Tie types:
- For plants ≥ 2.5 m high: Two strands of 2.5 mm galvanized wire neatly twisted together, passed
through reinforced rubber or plastic hose, and installed around stake and stem in a figure of eight
pattern.
- For plants < 2.5 m high: 50 mm hessian webbing stapled to the stake.
Marker stakes
Material: Timber offcuts 25 x 25 x 1200 mm. Dip the top 200 mm in white paint.
Installation: Drive firmly into the ground at least 300 mm from the plant. Do not tie to the plant.
Location of marker stakes:
- Trees in grass: Mark each tree.
- Ripline planting areas: Mark each ripline at every fifth plant along the line.
Stake and tie schedule
Species Stake size (mm) Stakes per plant Tie type Marker stakes
Use this schedule only if the template requirements are insufficient. Large trees or shrubs may require special consideration.
Edit as required.
Stake size: Show on the drawings if staking for large plants is to differ from Template.
Marker stakes: Generally used to mark small plantings in grassed areas.
3.7 EARTH ANCHORS

Used for the stabilisation of large plants and those in exposed positions. Detailed drawing recommended.

Requirement
Support: Provide temporary support where necessary to trees, root balls or stakes using galvanized
steel cables attached to proprietary aluminium anchors or drive rods, which have been hand or power
driven at an angle into the ground.
Earth anchor schedule
Type Location Number required
3.8 TREE SURGERY

In all operations involving the removal of limbs and branches, the visual and structural effect on each tree and group of trees
should be considered.
Notice
General: Give notice before commencing tree surgery.
Qualifications
General: Employ suitably qualified persons to carry out tree surgery work in a safe and progressive
manner.
Pruning
Operations
General: Remove dead and decayed wood or limbs that have been broken. Make cuts into live wood.
If the trees show signs of deterioration after the work has been done, carry out a program of feeding or
soil amelioration such as soil aeration, irrigation or incorporation of organic material. Continue this
program until the end of the planting establishment period.
Precautions
Damage: Avoid damage to trees being treated or to nearby trees and surroundings. Do not use trees
as anchors for winching operations or bracing. Provide bracing as necessary before cutting to prevent
uncontrolled breakages and damage to surroundings.
Dressing
Treatment: Prevent incursion of rot or disease after cutting.
Root pruning
Disturbance: Do not unduly disturb the remaining root system.
Tree surgery schedule
Plant Work required
Work required: Tree surgery may include the following:

• Removal of dead, diseased or inferior growth.
• Removal of limbs causing damage to one or other limbs.
• Removal of mistletoe, or insect damaged wood.
• Removal of limbs to shape or balance the crown.
• Removal of dead trees.
• Repairs to damaged or insect infected limbs.
• Specialised feeding to promote growth.
• Root pruning.

If possible, show the nature and extent of work on the drawings, or specify here. Root pruning of large specimens should begin
at least twelve months before transplanting, with subsequent feeding, to create a dense fibrous root ball.
3.9 PLANTING ESTABLISHMENT

Period
If planting is a separable part it may not achieve practical completion at the same time as the rest of the works, in which case
the planting establishment period commences at the date of practical completion of the planting works. The Template assumes
that the planting works are not a separable part. Modify the text if this is not the case. Separable parts must also be scheduled
in Preliminaries.
Commencement: The planting establishment period commences at the date of practical completion.
Required period: >
Specify a number of weeks, preferably equal to and concurrent with the defects liability period (but consider location, climate,
season, costs, etc.). This subparagraph applies if the landscape work is a separable part.
Practical completion of the planting works includes, but is not limited to, the germination of grassed areas, establishment of
turfed areas, and replacement of plants which have failed, been damaged or been stolen during the works.
Existing planting and grass

Maintenance: Where existing grass or planting is within the landscape contract area, maintain it as for
the corresponding classifications of new grass or planting.
Recurrent works
General: Throughout the planting establishment period, carry out maintenance work including,
watering, mowing, weeding, rubbish removal, fertilising, pest and disease control, reseeding, returfing,
staking and tying, replanting, cultivating, pruning, hedge clipping, aerating, reinstatement of mulch,
renovating, top dressing, and keeping the site neat and tidy.
Replacements
Plants: Continue to replace failed, damaged or stolen plants.
Grassed areas
Maintenance: Commence grass maintenance works at the completion of sowing, hydroseeding and
turfing. Maintain healthy weed-free growth.
Log book
Records: Keep a log book recording when and what maintenance work has been done and what
materials, including toxic materials, have been used. Make the log book available for inspection on
request.
3.10 COMPLETION
Product warranty
Certification: Submit the supplier’s written statement certifying that plants are true to the required
species and type, and are free from diseases, pests and weeds.
Maintenance manual
General: Submit recommendations for maintenance of plants.
Cleaning
Stakes and ties: Remove those no longer required at the end of the planting establishment period.
Temporary fences: Remove temporary protective fences at the end of the planting establishment
period.

IRRIGATION SITE
IRRIGATION
This worksection is applicable to automatically controlled fixed watering systems.
For water efficient design, refer to BDP EDG Notes DES 13 and DES 14. For information on PVC piping, refer to BDP EDG
Notes PRO 13 and PRO 14.
• Roofing for rainwater tanks.
• Cold and heated water.
• None.
• Show the layout and arrangement of the watering system on the drawings. Specify here particular requirements, if any,
which are not shown on the drawings or specified in the worksection.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
General: Provide automatically controlled fixed irrigation systems as follows and to the Selections.
- Achieve the documented flow rates over the area to be irrigated.
- Meet statutory requirements for backflow prevention.
Design
This worksection is intended for use when the specifier designs the system. If the contractor is to design part of the system,
specify the design responsibility here. Include any design constraints and relevant information such as the location of power for
automatic controllers, the presence of existing features like rock and intended planting. Specify minimum performance
requirements such as pipe material using this worksection and require that he contractor supply additional information needed
to specify the system and components.
Include, if appropriate, relevant information that may affect the design such as site constraints, conditions of authority approvals
etc.

General
have no overlaps.

IRRIGATION SITE
- Hydraulic general requirements.
- Cold and heated water.
depends.
1.3 STANDARDS
Water supply
General: To AS/NZS 3500.1.
1.4 INSPECTION
Notice
- Excavated surfaces ready for installation.
- Concealed or underground services ready for backfilling.
1.5 SUBMISSIONS
Shop drawings
General: Submit drawings and schedules showing the layout and details of the system, including the
following:
- Micro-irrigation stake layout.
- Irrigation controller cabinets.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 AUTOMATIC CONTROL VALVES

General
Type: 24 V solenoid actuated hydraulic valves with flow control and a maximum operating pressure
rating ≥ 1 MPa.
Construction: Stainless steel bonnet holding down bolts and internal metal parts of stainless steel,
able to be serviced without removal from the line.
Isolating valve: Provide a gate valve of the same size immediately upstream of each automatic control
valve.
Housing: House both valves in the same valve box.
2.2 FIXED LOCATION SYSTEMS

Heads
Performance: Provide heads that:
- Maintain a preset arc of throw.
- Are adjustable for radius during watering operations
- Are appropriately vandal-resistant.
Pop-up type heads:
- Type: Designed to rise > 50 mm out of their housings under supply pressure.
- Construction: Provide wiper seals, stainless steel return springs and removable internal filters.
- Playing fields: Provide covers designed and constructed to prevent injury to players.
Sprinkler heads:

IRRIGATION SITE
- Type: Gear driven and spray sprinklers which have matched precipitation rates for the various areas
of throw.
- Flow rate adjustment To be adjustable down to zero.
Impact sprinkler heads: Bronze bodies in high impact plastic cases with drainage holes.
Valves
Check valves: If a rotating head is more than 300 mm below the highest head on the same automatic
valve, fit an internal or external anti-drain check valves to prevent low head drainage.
Pressure regulating valves: At off-take points provide pressure regulating valves as follows:
- Adjustable between 100 and 700 kPa.
- Complete with 800 µm filter sized to suit the flow and installed immediately upstream from the
pressure regulating valve
- Installed with gate valves upstream from the filter and downstream from the pressure regulating
valve.
- Fitted for backflow prevention.
- Mount the assembly in an accessible position in a valve box, access pit or adjacent building.
Soil moisture sensors
Type: Fixed ceramic moisture sensors.
Connection: To the irrigation controller via moisture control units.
Irrigation controllers
Construction: Provide automatic controllers that are easily programmed and include the following:
- Manual cycle and individual control valve operation.
- Manual on/off operation of irrigation without loss of program.
- ≥ 4 on/off cycles per day.
- Day omit (e.g. every second day, third day etc.).
- 240 V input and 24 V output capable of operating 2 control valves simultaneously.
- ≥ 24 hour battery program backup.
- Power surge protection.
- Cabinet: In external locations mount in a lockable cabinet minimum IP54 to AS 60529.
- Electrical connection: Provide 240 V supply and isolating switch at the controller.
2.3 MICRO-IRRIGATION SYSTEMS

Components
Polyethylene micro-irrigation pipe:
- Standard: To AS 2698.1 Class IRRIG.
- Fittings: Barbed fittings rated for the pressure class of the pipe, fastened with ratchet type clamps.
Drippers: Turbulent flow types, easily dismantled for cleaning.
Valve boxes: In each box provide:
- Automatic control valve.
- Isolating valve.
- Filter:
. Microsprays: 200 µm.
. Drippers: 100 µm.
- Pressure reducing valve with 170 kPa outlet pressure.
2.4 VALVE BOXES

General
Construction: To be UV resistant high impact plastic with high impact snap lock plastic cover.
Location: Support on bricks at each side. Install with top:
- Within playing fields: 150 mm below the surface.
- Other locations: At finished ground level.

IRRIGATION SITE
3 EXECUTION
3.1 FIXED LOCATION SYSTEMS

Control wiring
General: Connect the automatic control valves and soil moisture sensors to the controller as follows:
- Cable type: Double insulated.
- Cable runs: Underground and laid alongside piping where possible.
- Connectors: Waterproof.
- Jointing: loop cables and join only at valves, sensors and controllers.
- Movement provision: Provide expansion loops at changes of direction and at joints.
Quick coupling
General: Provide DN 20 double lugged bronze quick coupling valves with neoprene seats mounted on
DN 20 copper risers offset at least 150 mm from the supply pipe. Install in valve boxes.
Heads
Impact sprinkler heads: Provide granular fill for at least 75 mm around the base of the case.
Risers: Mount as follows:
- Above ground heads: Mount on fixed risers.
- Galvanized steel risers: Set in 300 x 300 x 200 mm deep concrete blocks.
- In-ground heads: Mount on reticulated risers.
3.2 MICRO-IRRIGATION SYSTEMS

General
Connections: Connect micro-tube laterals with proprietary push in or screw in fittings.
Drippers: Connect directly into piping or provide appropriately sized micro-tubes
Microsprays: Mount microsprays 300 mm above ground on stakes and connect to the piping with
appropriately sized micro-tubes.
Piping: Lay polyethylene pipe on finished ground surface under planting bed mulch and anchor at
1.5 m maximum intervals with U-shaped stakes.
3.3 COMPLETION
General
On completion:
- Flush system thoroughly, check heads, sprays and drippers and clean if blocked.
- Clean strainers.
- Adjust for even distribution with no dry areas.
4 SELECTIONS
Property values can be in words or numbers with units.
4.1 IRRIGATION
Fixed location systems schedule
Property Type
A B C
Performance
- Coverage (mm of water over area to be delivered
in each water period)
- Watering period
System type to AS/NZS 3500.1

IRRIGATION SITE
Property Type
A B C
Backflow prevention device
Controls
Storage
Pumps
Performance:
• Coverage: e.g. 6 mm.
• Watering period: e.g. overnight, 3 hours per day, 6 hours alternate days.
System type to AS/NZS 3500.1: e.g. A, B or C to AS/NZS 3500.1 clause 7.2.
Backflow prevention device: See AS/NZS 3500.1 clause 7.3.
Micro irrigation systems schedule

Property Type
A B C
Coverage (mm of water over area to be delivered
in each water period)
Watering period
Head type
Sprinklers
Sprays
Materials:
- Piping
- Heads
- Valves
Controls
Materials:
• Piping: e.g. UPVC, black polyethylene.
• Heads: e.g. cast bronze, stainless steel, bronze.

TREES SUPPLY SITE
TREES SUPPLY
This worksection is applicable to trees supplied by nurseries, which have been grown under any style (or combination of styles)
of production. It provides for meaningful comparisons between stock from different suppliers describing their trees in different
ways e.g. by container size or by height and calliper.
• Work relating to existing trees.
• None.
• Show all locations on the drawings.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
General: Provide trees that have been grown to a standard that allows them to establish rapidly and
grow to maturity.

General

TREES SUPPLY SITE
have no overlaps.
>
1.3 STANDARD
General
Guidance: Follow the guidance given in NATSPEC Guide: Specifying Trees – a guide to assessment
of tree quality (Clark R. 2003).
There are no relevant standards, other than Ross Clark’s book, on which this specification is based and AS 4373 (Pruning of
amenity trees).
1.4 INTERPRETATION
Definitions
Calliper: The stem or trunk diameter at a nominated point. Generally measured at 300 mm above
ground.
Size Index: Product of height (m) x calliper (mm).
Tubes or plant cells: Trees grown in small containers or cells in trays with a height:diameter ratio
> 3:2, typically < 0.75 L.
Small trees: Trees grown in containers < 20 L (other than tubes or plant cells), and ex-ground trees of
Size Index < 35.
Large trees: Trees grown in containers ≥ 20 L, and ex-ground trees of Size Index ≥ 35.
External inspection: Tree inspection without washing away of soil from the rootball which assesses the
following:
- The tree’s ability to be self-supporting.
- Its balance.
- Its root development.
Investigative inspection: Any method of root inspection that involves the washing away of all or
portions of the soil from the rootball to expose a section or all the roots.
Investigative inspection may be waived if an accredited quality assurance system is in place.
- Destructive inspection: The washing away of all soil from a rootball to allow inspection of rootball
development.
Where inspection is destructive, trees will be sacrificed. The trees sacrificed should be in addition to the number of trees
ordered. The cost of these plants can either be built into the supplier’s price when quoting for supply or itemised as an additional
cost.
- Partial inspection: A method of exposing a section of a root system to enable inspection of root
development by washing the soil away in a wedge-shaped section from the stem to the extremity of
the rootball. This soil can be gently replaced so the tree is not damaged.
1.5 PRECOMPLETION TESTS

Production tests
External inspection:
- Frequency: Inspect trees before shipment.
- Inspector: Supplier.

TREES SUPPLY SITE
A default is given. However the contract administrator may wish to carry out the inspections or appoint an agent (landscape
architect or arborist) or the purchaser. Edit as required.
- Sampling: To the External inspection sampling table for each batch of trees. Select sample trees
at evenly distributed intervals within each batch.
External inspection sampling table
Number of trees per batch Number of trees to sample
0 – 20 4
21 – 50 8
51 – 100 15
101 – 500 15 for the first 100 + 5% of the balance of the order
501 – 2000 35 for the first 500 + 2% of the balance of the order
2001+ 65 for the first 2000 + 1% of the balance of the
order
Investigative inspection:
- Frequency: Inspect trees before shipment.
- Inspector: Qualified person authorised by contract administrator.
- Destructive inspection: Use for trees with rootballs/containers ≤ 200 mm.
- Allowance: Allow for sample trees in addition to quantity ordered.
- Partial inspection: Use for trees with rootballs/containers > 200 mm.
- Sampling: To the Investigative inspection sampling table for each batch of trees. Select sample
trees at evenly distributed intervals throughout each batch.
Investigative inspection sampling table
Number of trees per batch Number of trees to sample
0 – 20 1
21 – 50 2
51 – 100 4
101 – 500 4 for the first 100 + 2% of balance of order
501 – 2000 12 for first 500 + 1% of balance of order
2001+ 27 for the first 2000 + 0.5% of balance of order
1.6 SUBMISSIONS
Test results
General: Complete and return the Tree inspection form for each batch inspected.
Rejection: Non-compliance may lead to rejection of the entire batch.
Corrective action: Comply with corrective action procedures for each order as instructed.
Substitution: If non-complying trees are proposed, submit a proposal in writing to the contract
administrator for approval.
Suppliers must indicate any deviations from the specification. Small variations may be acceptable.
Authentication: Supply a copy of the written approval of substitution with any non-complying trees.
Forward order contracts
Reports: Complete regular reports using the pro forma Tree inspection form. Include checks against
specification requirements.
- Photographs: Provide current colour copies with date verification.
- Submissions: To the contract administrator.

TREES SUPPLY SITE
- Inspection: Complete and return the attached pro-forma Tree inspection form before despatch of
every batch, and at the following frequencies:
. Inspections: At 3 monthly intervals.
A default is given. Inspections may be at three or six monthly intervals, carried out at the same time as the reports. Edit as
required.
. Reports: At time of inspections.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 BALANCE
Small trees
Conformance at inspection: To Balance (small trees) assessment requirements.
Balance (small trees) assessment requirements:
- Tubes or plant cells: height above soil level must be between 1.5 and 2.5 times the height of the
tube or plant cell.
- Trees in containers < 20 L (other than tubes or plant cells) or ex-ground trees of Size Index < 35
(e.g. 1.4 m high x 25 mm calliper); height must fall within the range indicated for the container size
in the Small container-grown trees table.
- Containers/rootballs (other than tubes or plant cells) must remain flat on the ground when the stem,
held at 80% of height above ground, is deflected 30º from the vertical, side to side.
Exempt: Species that naturally produce hard inflexible wood in the early stages of their development.
e.g. Tuckeroo [Cupaniopsis anacardioides].
Small container-grown trees table
Tubes or plant cells Tree height between 1.5 and 2.5 x the height of the container
Container size or Height range (m)
minimum rootball diameter
Thin-stemmed species Thick-stemmed species
150 mm (1.8 L) 0.4 – 0.6 0.3 – 0.5
170 mm (2.6 L) 0.5 – 0.7 0.4 – 0.6
200 mm pot (4 L) 0.7 – 0.9 0.6 – 0.8
200 mm bag (5 L) 0.8 – 1.0 0.7 – 0.9
250 mm (8 L) 1.0 – 1.2 0.8 – 1.0
300 mm (15 L) 1.2 – 1.5 1.0 – 1.2
Large trees
Conformance at inspection: To Balance (large trees) assessment requirements.
Balance (large trees) assessment requirements:
- For trees grown in containers ≥ 20 L, the Size Index must lie within the range for the nominal
container size shown in the Common container volumes table.
- Ex-ground trees with a Size Index ≥ 35 (e.g. 1.4 m high x 25 mm calliper) must have rootball
diameters ≥ the minimum rootball diameters shown in the Ex-ground trees table.
Common container volumes table
Size Index Nominal container Size Index Nominal container
volume (L) volume (L)
26-33 20 371-480 450
32-41 25 412-518 500
45-58 35 453-587 550

TREES SUPPLY SITE
Size Index Nominal container Size Index Nominal container

volume (L) volume (L)
57-74 45 495-640 600
77-99 60 533-716 700
83-107 75 632-818 800
111-143 100 711-921 900
154-200 150 791-1023 1000
194-251 200 842-1089 1100
227-314 250 918-1188 1200
273-353 300 1148-1485 1500
289-373 350 1530-1980 2000
330-427 400 1913-2475 2500
Ex-ground trees table

Size Index Minimum rootball Size Index Minimum rootball
diameter (mm) diameter (mm)
36–55 350 341–383 850
56–72 400 384–429 900
73–106 450 430–530 1000
107–131 500 531–642 1100
132–156 550 643–732 1200
157–173 600 733–859 1300
174–228 650 860–1144 1500
229–249 700 1145–1507 1750
250–299 750 1508–1968 2000
300–340 800 1969–3075 2500
Balance assessment for large trees outside the range shown. Use the formula:
• Size Index = Container or rootball volume x 1.08.
The rootball volume is calculated for the actual soil volume (and not the container size). For both container-grown and ex-
2
ground trees, calculate the rootball volume (L) by multiplying the surface area (m ) by the rootball depth (mm). In the event that
the containers/rootballs offered are > 550 mm deep, only the top 550 mm is assessable for balance purposes.
Trees outside the ranges shown in the Common container volumes table and the Ex-ground trees
table.
- Height: >
- Calliper: >
- Rootball volume: >
Photographs: Provide current colour copies with date verification.
2.2 ABOVE-GROUND
Labelling
General: Clearly label individual trees and batches.
- Label type: To withstand transit without erasure or misplacement.
- Label frequency: >

TREES SUPPLY SITE
Health and vigour

Health: Supply trees with foliage size, texture and colour at time of delivery consistent with the size,
texture and colour shown in healthy specimens of the nominated species.
Vigour: Supply trees with extension growth consistent with that exhibited in vigorous specimens of the
species nominated.
Freedom from pests and disease
Pests and disease: Supply trees with foliage free from attack by pests or disease.
Native species with a history of attack by native pests: Restrict evidence of previous attack to < 15% of
the foliage and ensure absence of actively feeding insects.
Supply
Supply only trees that:
- Are free from injury.
- Are self-supporting.
- Have the calliper at any given point on the stem greater than the calliper at any higher point on the
stem.
Pruning
Specific form: >
Nominate any specific form requirement or specific clean stem height.
Clean stem height: < 40% of total tree height.
Pruning wounds
Extent: Restrict fresh (i.e. recent, non-calloused pruning wounds) to < 20% of total tree height.
Type: Ensure a clean-cut at the branch collar.
Diameter of wound: < 50% of the calliper immediately above the point of pruning.
Apical dominance
Species with an excurrent form: Supply trees with a defined central leader and the apical bud intact.
Crown symmetry
Crown distribution: Difference on opposite sides of the stem axis < 20%.
Stem structure
Species with excurrent form: Supply trees with a single stem roughly in the centre of the tree with any
deviation from vertical < 15º.
Species with decurrent form: Supply trees where the central stem is not divided at any point lower
than the clean stem height nominated, and that the stem junction at the point of division is sound.
All species: Ensure that branch diameter is less than or equal to one-half of the calliper immediately
above the branch junction.
Included bark
General: Supply trees where the branch/stem bark ridges at junctions between stems and branches
and between co-dominant stems are convex, except for species prone to include bark that are known
to remain strong.
Trunk position
General: Supply trees with the distance from the centre of the trunk to the extremity of the rootball not
varying by > 10%.
Compatibility of graft unions
General: Supply trees where the union between the scion and rootstock is sound for the entire
perimeter of the graft, and the diameter of the scion immediately above the graft is equal to the
diameter of the rootstock immediately below the graft (± 20%).
Indication of north
Trees in containers > 100 L or of Size Index > 140: Indicate the northerly aspect during growth in the
nursery to withstand transit without erasure or misplacement.
2.3 BELOW-GROUND
Root division
Trees in containers ≤ 45 L or ex-ground trees with a Size Index ≤ 70: Primary division of roots at
< 100 mm intervals.

TREES SUPPLY SITE
Trees in containers > 45 L or ex-ground trees with a Size Index > 70: Primary division of roots within
the outer 50% of the rootball at < 100 mm intervals.
Root direction
General: Ensure that roots, from the point of initiation, generally grow in an outwards (radial) or
downwards direction, and that any deviation from the established direction < 45º.
Trees with a calliper at ground level < 40 mm: Ensure that the diameter of any nonconforming roots at
the extremity of the rootball < 25% of the calliper.
Trees with a calliper at ground level ≥ 40 mm: Ensure that the diameter of any nonconforming roots at
the extremity of the rootball < 10 mm.
Rootball occupancy
Soil retention: On shaking or handling the unsupported rootball at least 90% of the soil volume to
remain intact.
Rootball depth
Rootball depth assessment for containers/rootballs ≥ 45 L or larger:
- Depth: ≤ maximum depth specified and no rootball (regardless of size) > 550 mm in depth.
- Diameter: ≥ depth.
Height of root crown
General: Ensure that root crown is at the surface of the rootball.
Non-suckering rootstock
Grafted cultivars/varieties: Supply trees grafted onto non-suckering rootstock.
3 SELECTIONS
3.1 SCHEDULES
Plant schedule
Plant species Number Rootball or Height (m) Calliper (mm)
container volume
(L)

TREES SUPPLY SITE
3.2 TREE INSPECTION FORM

General
Date Reference
Purchaser
Supplier Inspected by
(supplier/purchaser/agent)
Species Batch identification
Number of trees in batch Container/rootball size
Height range Calliper range
Special requirements
Above ground
Labelling ❑
Health and vigour ❑
Freedom from pests/disease ❑
Freedom from injury ❑
Self-supporting ❑
Stem taper ❑
Pruning ❑
Apical dominance ❑
Crown symmetry ❑
Stem structure ❑
Included bark ❑
Trunk position ❑
Compatibility of graft unions ❑
Indication of north ❑
Below ground
Inspection method used ❑ External only
❑ External plus investigative
❑ destructive ❑ partial
Number of trees in sample ❑
Root division ❑
Root direction ❑
Diameter nonconforming roots at rootball ❑
extremity
Rootball occupancy ❑
Rootball depth ❑
Height of root crown ❑
Non-suckering rootstock ❑

TREES SUPPLY SITE
Balance
Balance ❑
Conformance with specification

Conforming ❑ Yes ❑ No
Comments
Name and signature (inspector)

LANDSCAPE – FURNITURE AND FIXTURES SITE
LANDSCAPE – FURNITURE AND FIXTURES
This worksection is applicable to the supply and installation of proprietary items associated with landscape works.
Related material located elsewhere in NATSPEC.
• Signs and display for interpretative signage.
• None.
• Locate furniture and fixtures on drawings of in a schedule of fixtures and equipment to your office documentation policy.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities

General
have no overlaps.

>
1.3 INSPECTION
Notice
- Custom-built fixtures fabricated and ready to be delivered to the site.
- Furniture items delivered to site before installation.
- Site locations or substrates prepared to receive furniture or fixtures before installation.
1.4 SUBMISSIONS
Subcontractors
General: Submit names and contact details of proposed suppliers and installers.
Installation
General: Submit the manufacturer’s standard drawings and details showing methods of construction,
assembly and installation; with dimensions and tolerances.
2 EXECUTION
2.1 FIXING
Erection
Line and level: Erect posts or poles vertically. Erect furniture items level. Provide a level area around
benches and seats where installed on slopes.
Add any particular installation requirements here. The installation of all proprietary items to the manufacturer’s instructions is
noted in General requirements.
2.2 COMPLETION
Maintenance manual
General: Submit the manufacturers’ data as follows:
- Recommendations for service use, care and maintenance.
- List of manufacturers and suppliers of replacement parts.
3 SELECTIONS
3.1 FURNITURE
Barbeque
Type: >
Description: >
Supplier: >
Product No.: >
Finish: >
Fixing: >
Benches
Type: >
Description: >
Supplier: >

Product No.: >

Finish: >
Fixing: >
Seats and tables
Type: >
Description: >
Supplier: >
Product No.: >
Finish: >
Fixing: >
Play equipment
Type: >
Description: >
Supplier: >
Product No.: >
Finish: >
Fixing: >
Repeat as required for each item of play equipment.
3.2 PLANTING FITTINGS

Planter boxes
Type: >
Description: >
Size: >
Supplier: >
Product No.: >
Finish: >
Fixing: >
Pots
Type: >
Description: >
Size: >
Supplier: >
Product No.: >
Finish: >
Fixing: >
Tree grates
Type: >
Description: >
Size: >
Supplier: >
Product No.: >
Material: >
Finish: >
Fixing: >
3.3 FIXTURES
Flag pole
Type: >
Description: >
Size: >
Supplier: >
Product No.: >
Size: >
Finish: >
Fixing: >
Drinking fountain
Type: >
Description: >
Supplier: >
Product No.: >
Finish: >
Fixing: >
Water feature
Type: >
Description: >
Supplier: >
Product No.: >
Finish: >
Connection: >
Fixing: >
If the water feature is not a proprietary item provide detail and specification notes.
Litter bins
Type: >
Description: >
Supplier: >
Product No.: >
Finish: >
Fixing: >

PAVEMENT BASE AND SUBBASE SITE
PAVEMENT BASE AND SUBBASE
This worksection is applicable to the supply, spreading, compaction and trimming of base and subbase courses of flexible
pavements.
• Sprayed bituminous surfacing.
• Segmental pavers – mortar bed.
• Segmental pavers – sand bed.
• Earthwork.
• Stormwater – site.
• Pavement ancillaries.
• Base and subbase courses in public roads. Where works are to be completed within public roads the relevant government
authority specifications and requirements will apply.
• Where bound base and subbase is proposed, consult the engineer.
• Base and subbase course thicknesses and levels should be shown on the drawings.
• Design traffic in (ESA’s) to be shown on the drawings.
4 GENERAL
4.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
General: Provide base and subbase courses that are as follows:
- Tested by a geotechnical testing authority.
- In conformance with the compaction requirements supplied.


General
have no overlaps.
>
4.3 INTERPRETATION
Definitions
- Absolute level tolerance: Maximum deviation from design levels.
- Relative level tolerance: Maximum deviation from a 3 m straight edge laid on the surface.
4.4 INSPECTION
Notice
- Prepared subgrade.
- Proof rolling of subbase prior to spreading of base.
- Proof rolling of base prior to sealing.
4.5 TESTS
Compaction control tests
Standard: To AS 1289.5.4.1 and AS 1289.5.4.2.
4.6 SUBMISSIONS
Frequency of compaction control tests
General: Not less than the following (whichever requires the most tests):
- 1 test per layer per 25 lineal metres for 2-lane roads.
- 1 test per layer per 1000 m2 for carparks.
- 3 tests per layer.
Standard: To AS 3798 Table 8.1.
Extract from AS 3798 Table 8.1. The required frequency may need adjustment on large scale projects or confined areas. Where
specific recommendations are given in the geotechnical report, for the site, these should replace the extract from AS 3798 Table
8.1 listed above.
Source of material: State the supplier name, nature of material (crushed rock, natural gravel, recycled,
etc.) and source quarry or recycling site.
Compliance of material: Provide certification and test results from a NATA registered laboratory
confirming that the material complies with the requirements of the specification.

Execution
This worksection lists the information which may be required for a major project. Modify the list as required. Alternatively delete
the subclause entirely if these matters are to be left to the contractor.
General: Submit proposals for the methods and equipment to be used for the roadworks, including the
following:
- Staging of the work, access and traffic control methods.
- Disposal of surface water, control of erosion, contamination and sedimentation of the site,
surrounding areas and drainage systems.
- Methods and equipment for each operation.
- Sources of materials.
- Material stockpiles.
Compaction: If it is proposed that a layer is to exceed 150 mm in thickness, submit evidence
demonstrating that the proposed compaction equipment can achieve the required density throughout
the layer.
5 PRODUCTS
5.1 BASE AND SUBBASE MATERIAL

General
Compliance: Base and subbase materials shall comply with the Base and subbase compliance
table.
Base and subbase compliance table
Course Source Compliance requirement
Base Crushed rock or natural To AUS-SPEC1 (applicable in your state) Tables C242.1,
gravel C242.2, C242.3.
Subbase Crushed rock or natural AUS-SPEC1 (applicable in your state) Tables C242.1,
gravel C242.2, C242.4.
The Base and subbase compliance table is based on the requirements of AUS-SPEC 1. State Road Authority specifications
are also commonly used for specification of base and subbase materials but differ from state to state. Modify the compliance
requirements as necessary.
6 EXECUTION
6.1 SUBGRADE PREPARATION

General
General: Subgrade preparation to be undertaken in accordance with the Earthwork worksection.
6.2 TOLERANCES
Surface level
General: Provide a finished surface which is free draining and evenly graded between level points.
Edges abutting gutters: Within ± 5 mm of the level of the actual gutter edge.
Tolerances: The tolerances in the Surface level tolerances table apply to the finished level of each
layer, unless overridden by the requirements (including tolerances) for the finished level and thickness
of the wearing course.

Surface level tolerances table

Item Level tolerance
Absolute Relative
Subbase surface ± 10 mm 10 mm
Base surface ± 10 mm 10 mm
6.3 SUBBASE AND BASE COMPACTION

General
General: Compact each layer of fill to the required depth and density, as a systematic construction
operation and to conform to the minimum relative compaction table.
Minimum relative compaction table
Item description Minimum dry density ratio (modified
compaction) to AS 1289.5.2.1
Subbase 95
Base 98
Based on AS 3798 Table 5.1. Modify where geotechnical engineer’s requirements differ. Modify to suit locally available
materials giving consideration to the potential for some natural materials to break down if over compacted.
Unstable areas: Any unstable areas which develop during rolling or are identified by proof rolling shall
be removed for the full depth of the layer and disposed of and replaced with fresh material. Materials
used as replacement materials shall comply with the requirements of the specification. The placing
and compaction of the replacement materials shall also comply with the requirements of the
specification.
Compaction requirements
General: Apply uniform and sufficient compactive effort over the whole area to be compacted. Use
rollers appropriate to the materials and compaction requirements.
“Sufficient compactive effort” implies that compaction will continue until the required density is achieved, or until failure is
acknowledged; for the latter case, the subclause Rectification applies.
For critical works, where the method of achieving the performance requirement (i.e. density) cannot be left to the contractor’s
discretion, detailed prescription of compaction plant characteristics may be desirable. Standard method of testing may be
unsuitable where the materials contain a high proportion of large or “oversize” particles. Consult the engineer.
Moisture content
General: During spreading and compaction, maintain materials at the optimum moisture content
(modified compaction) within the range of -2% to +1% from the optimum moisture content.
If the requirements of this worksection are not appropriate other requirements may be specified here. The tolerance of + 1%, -
2% is appropriate for base materials which have been mixed with water in a pugmill before placing on the pavement. However
if base materials are placed dry and water is subsequently added, a tolerance of ± 2% may be used. Alternatively the moisture
content limits may be specified by percentage of optimum (e.g. 60% to 90% of optimum).
Spraying: Maintain moisture content. Use water spraying equipment capable of distributing water
uniformly in controlled quantities over uniform lane widths.
Rectification
General: If a section of pavement material fails to meet the required density or moisture content after
compaction remove the non-complying material, replace with fresh material, and recompact.
Level corrections
General: Rectify incorrect levels as follows:
- High areas: Grade off.
- Low areas: Remove layers to a minimum depth of 75 mm, replace with new material and
recompact.

6.4 PLACING BASE AND SUBBASE

General
Weak surfaces: Do not place material on a surface which has been so weakened by moisture that it
will not support, without damage, the constructional plant required to perform the work.
Spreading: Spread material in uniform layers without segregation.
Moisture content: Maintain wet mixed materials at the required moisture content before and during
spreading. Add water to dry mixed materials through fine sprays to the entire surface of the layer after
spreading, to bring the material to the required moisture content.
Layer thickness: 150 mm maximum and 75 mm minimum (after compaction). Provide equal layers in
multilayer courses.
Joints
General: Plan spreading and delivery to minimise the number of joints. Offset joints in successive
layers by at least 300 mm.
Final trimming
General: Trim and grade the base course to produce a tight even surface without loose stones or a
slurry of fines.

ASPHALTIC CONCRETE SITE
ASPHALTIC CONCRETE
This worksection is applicable to the supply and laying of asphaltic concrete.
For general guidance on asphalt paving refer to AS 2734.
AS 2150 Section 7 consists of two pages on plant requirements and manufacture. Given that this is the contractor’s
responsibility under most contracts in any case, little if anything needs to be said on the subject in the project specification.
Accordingly, most material on this subject in the previous edition of this worksection and commentary has been dropped.
• Earthwork.
• Stormwater – site.
• None.
• None.
• The extent of asphaltic concrete and applicable nominal mix size and layer thickness should preferably be shown on a
pavement plan.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
General: Provide a finished surface which is as follows:
- Free draining and evenly graded between level points.
- Even and smooth riding
Standards
Asphalt (hot-mixed): Follow the guidance in AS 2734.
See AS 2734 Tables 3.1 and 3.3 on mix types in general use.
Tolerances
General: Conform to the Surface level tolerances table which applies to the finished level of each
layer, unless overridden by the requirements (including tolerances) for the finished level and thickness
of the surface course.


Absolute Relative
Longitudinal direction ± 10 mm 5 mm
Transverse direction ± 10 mm 10 mm
Compacted layer thickness:

- Any one sample: + 10 mm, - 5 mm.
- The mean thickness of the core samples in a lot: + unspecified, - 0.

General
have no overlaps.
- Pavements base and subbase.
- Pavements ancillaries.
1.3 INTERPRETATION
Definitions
- Relative level tolerance: Maximum deviation from a 3 m straightedge laid on the surface.
- Relative compaction: The ratio between the field bulk density and the bulk density of the job mix
when compacted in the laboratory.
1.4 INSPECTION
Notice
- Surface prepared for priming, sealing or asphalt surfacing.
- Commencement of asphalt surfacing.
- Completion of asphalt surfacing.
1.5 TESTS
General
Tests: Perform tests of the type and frequency necessary to adequately control the materials and
processes used in the construction of the works and in conformance with the Tests table.

Performed by the contractor (or a testing authority appointed by and reporting to the contractor) to maintain control during the
course of the works over his materials and processes, independently of compliance assessment testing. It is usual to specify a
minimum requirement. The contractor may elect to perform additional tests for his own purposes and at his expense.
Process control tests
Records: Show the results of process control tests on control charts or graphs displayed on site in a
readily accessible location and updated daily.
Methods: Use wet preparation methods where applicable.
If subsidiary, rather than standard, test methods are required, and are not specified in the Template, they should be specified in
the schedules.
Sampling: Determine timing and location.
Compliance assessment tests
Timing: Obtain materials samples at the time of delivery to the site.
Location: Sample from selected sample sites within designated uniform test lots, consisting of an area
placed, or compacted or both in one day. Test lots must be uniform in terms of material properties and
density.
Mix properties
See the Commentary on variations to the required Marshall properties.
General: Take samples from trucks at the mixing plant and test for mix properties using one of the
following methods as applicable:
- Tar mixes: To AS 2891.4.
- Marshall stability of compacted mix:
. Compactive effort: 50 – blow.
35 blows may suffice for light traffic mix designs; 75 will be necessary for heavy or very heavy traffic, and for deep lifts.
Variations in mix properties
General: Ensure that the maximum variation between the mix property of each sample and the job mix
value conforms to the Mix property table.
The requirements in this worksection may differ from those in AS 2150 Table 1.
Mix property table
Mix property Maximum variation from job mix value
Aggregate passing 4.75 mm sieve or larger ± 4% by mass
Aggregate passing 2.36 to 0.3 mm sieves ± 3% by mass
Aggregate passing 0.15 mm sieve ± 2% by mass
Aggregate passing 0.075 mm sieve ± 1% by mass
Bitumen content ± 0.3% by mass
Added filler content ± 0.5% by mass
Mixing temperature ± 10°C
Compaction tests
Density tests: Perform a field bulk density test for each test site from either of the following:
- On a core sample taken from the asphalt surfacing layer.
- If the nominal layer thickness is ≥ 50 mm, measured in situ using a nuclear gauge.
Sample preparation: To AS 2891.2.1 and AS 2891.2.2, as applicable.
Characteristic value of relative compaction: Calculate the value of relative compaction using the
formulae in the Relative compaction table, in which X and S are the mean and the standard
deviation, respectively of the individual relative compaction test values for the lot.
See AS 2734 clause 9.4 on density. If asphalt compaction tests are required, specify here test method, test frequency and
acceptance criteria. Applicable standard methods are AS 2891 for sampling and for determination of field bulk density.
For larger jobs acceptance criteria for relative compaction should be based on a statistical analysis.

Relative compaction table

Number of tests per lot Characteristic value
6 X - 0.92S
10 X - 0.88S
Acceptance criteria: The relative compaction of each lot of pavement must meet the criteria of the
Asphalt compaction acceptance criteria table.
Asphalt compaction acceptance criteria table
Test criteria scale
A B
Number of test sites per lot:
- Core sample tests 6 3
- Nuclear gauge tests 10 5
Lot value for relative compaction Characteristic value Mean value
Minimum value:
- Layer thickness up to 50 mm 96% 94%
- Layer thickness 50 mm or more 96% 96%
Scale A and Scale B are alternatives. Select one.
1.6 SUBMISSIONS
Certificate of compliance: As an alternative to testing a product, submit the manufacturer’s certificate
together with the results of recent tests undertaken by the manufacturer, showing conformance with
test criteria.
Products – proposals
General: Submit the following details before commencing production:
- Combined aggregate particle size distribution.
- Binder content expressed as a percentage of the total mix.
- The filler content expressed as a percentage by mass of the combined aggregates.
- The asphalt mix properties.
- The proposed mixing temperature.
See AS 2150 clause 6.1 on mix design requirements.
Products – samples
Samples: Submit samples of the following at least one month before use:
- Granular materials: One 50 kg sample of each proposed type and size of asphalt aggregate and
cover aggregate.
Identification: Attach a tag to each sample showing relevant information including description, source
and nominal size of material.
Consider specifying in the Conditions of tendering that tenderers are to nominate their proposed sources of supply of materials
required under the contract (including details such as location, geological and petrological description of the rock to be crushed,
crushing and screening processes, etc.) and to supply samples from the sources for testing. Appropriate tests and test limits for
materials supplied from each source can then be based on this testing and incorporated into the specification.
Execution – proposals
General: Submit proposals for the methods and equipment to be used, including the following:

2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCTS
Alternatively specify asphalt surfacing complying with the standard requirements of local authorities such as RTA (NSW) or
Vicroads.
Mineral filler to AS 2357, which is cited in AS 2150.
Asphalt
Standards:
- Hot mix asphalt: To AS 2150.
- Medium cut back bitumen: To AS 2157, containing no fluxing oil.
- Tack coat mix: 3:2 bitumen emulsion:water.
- Bitumen emulsion: To AS 1160.
. Designation: ARS/170-60.
Vary if a different emulsion is required, e.g. for cool damp conditions “Designation CRS/170”.
Aggregate
Description: To be clean, sound, hard, angular, of uniform quality, free from deleterious matter in
conformance with the Aggregate properties table.
Standard: To AS 2758.5.
Crushed slag: To be air-cooled blast furnace slag of uniform quality, generally free from vesicular,
glassy or other brittle pieces.
Fine aggregate: To be clean, sound, hard, durable particles of natural sand or particles derived from
crushed stone, gravel or slag, free from injurious coating or particles of clay, silt, loam or other
deleterious matter.
Aggregate properties table
Property Test method Value
Particle shape AS 1141.14 ≤ 25 for wearing course
≤ 30 for binder course and
corrective course
Wet strength AS 1141.22 ≥ 50 kN
Wet/dry strength variation - ≤ 35%
These requirements may not be appropriate in some areas. It may be necessary to specify additional or different tests or test
limits.
Particle shape: Or, specify flakiness index to AS 1141.15.
Wet strength: and Wet/dry strength variation: Or, specify Los Angeles value to AS 1141.23 and either sodium sulfate soundness
or unsound and marginal stone content.
Binder
General: To be bitumen binder, class 170.
Specify Class 320 for very heavy traffic.
Asphalt mix
General: Design the asphalt mix using the Marshall method as follows:
- Marshall stability: > 4.5 kN.
- Marshall flow:< 4.5 mm.
- Voids in total mix (maximum theoretical density based on apparent specific gravity of aggregates):

. Wearing courses: 3% – 5%.

. Binder courses and 7 mm mixes: 4% – 6%.
- Voids in aggregate filled with bitumen:
. Wearing courses: 75% – 85%.
. Binder courses and 7 mm mixes: 70% – 80%.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
Cleaning
General: Immediately before priming or tack coating remove loose stones, dust and foreign material
from the base surface using a power broom or blower. Keep traffic off the cleaned surface.
Priming
General: Prime the base surface as soon as possible after compaction and finishing.
A primer may be applied to protect the base against weather and to assist in achieving a bond between the granular surface
and the asphalt layer. It will also provide limited protection from traffic. See AS 2734 Section 4 on surface preparation. Delete if
priming is not required.
Potholes
General: Trim to a regular shape and a uniform depth of at least 75 mm, tack coat the edges and
patch with asphaltic concrete.
3.2 SURFACING
Protection
General: Protect adjacent surfaces during spraying. Protect freshly sprayed surfaces from
contamination.
Tack coating
General: Apply tack coat 30 – 120 minutes before asphalt surfacing is placed. Cover the surface
uniformly at an application rate of 0.10 – 0.30 L/m2 of residual bitumen.
See AS 2734 Section 5 on tack coating. Vary the tack coat material grade and application rate if necessary. Alternatively the
tack coat may be omitted entirely.
Spreading
General: Place asphalt surfacing in dry weather on a dry pavement surface at a pavement
temperature of at least 10°C.
Operations: Spread the mix in layers covering the full width of the pavement, or, in the case of
carriageways and wide pavements, in lanes of minimum width 3 m. Place layers in adjoining lanes to
the same compacted thickness.
See AS 2734 Section 7 and 8 for information about placing and compaction methods and equipment. Preferably leave the
selection of plant to the contractor.
The direction of placing may affect levels. In certain cases, it is essential that direction of placing be shown on the drawings.
Abutting structures
General: Place asphalt surfacing to match the level of abutting surfaces such as kerbs, gutters, edge
strips, manholes, or adjoining pavement in the same manner as for longitudinal and transverse joints.
Fill spaces left unfilled between the spreader run and abutting edges with sufficient material to the
proper height before compaction.
Matched junctions
General: If asphalt surfacing is to match an existing pavement, bridge deck, rail or other fixture, place
the material to provide a smooth riding surface across the junction. Where necessary, remove
sufficient of the existing pavement for this purpose. Where it is necessary to taper the thickness of a
layer to provide a smooth riding junction, terminate the layer at a chase cut into the existing pavement
about 20 mm deep and 400 mm wide. Where necessary, remove coarse particles from a layer of
tapering thickness using hand raking.

Tack coat: Where the thickness of the layer tapers to less than twice the nominal size of the mix, tack
coat the area upon which material of such thickness is to be placed uniformly at an application rate
0.50 - 0.75 L/m2.
In some cases it may be necessary to determine in advance the manner in which particular surfaces are to be matched and
whether removal of existing pavement beyond the cutting of the specified chase is required. Include special clause as
necessary.
Compaction
General: Before commencing compaction, correct any irregularities in line or level. Trim lane edges to
a straight line. Compact asphalt surfacing uniformly as soon as it will support rollers without undue
displacement, and complete rolling while the mix temperature is above 80°C.
For some projects this subclause may need to touch on methods e.g. “Compact asphalt surfacing uniformly using vibratory steel
wheeled rollers. Commence compacting as soon as the material will support the rollers without displacement and complete
rolling while the mix temperature is above 80°C. Perform final rolling with a steel wheeled non-vibrating roller to eliminate all
roller marks.”.
3.3 JOINTS
Joints
General: Minimise the number of joints. Make joints that are well bonded and sealed and provide a
smooth riding surface across the joint.
Transverse joints: Construct a transverse joint if the operation is stopped for more than 20 minutes or
the pavement temperature falls below 90°C. Construct to a straight vertical face for the full depth of
the layer, and offset in adjoining spreader runs and layer to layer by at least 2 m.
Longitudinal joints: Offset joints from layer to layer by at least 150 mm. Position longitudinal joints in
the wearing course to coincide with the lane line.
Edges: Form exposed edges of each spreader run while hot to a straight line with a dense face
inclined between vertical and 45°.
Cold joints: Tack coat the surface of cold longitudinal and transverse joint before placing the adjoining
asphalt.
3.4 COMPLETION
Defective compaction
Minimum criteria for retention:
- Characteristic value of relative compaction of the lot: ≥ 90%.
- Mean of the individual relative compaction test values of the lot: ≥ 90%.
Defective layer thickness
Minimum criterion for retention:
- Mean thickness of the core sample in the lot: ≤ 10 mm below the required layer thickness.
Rejection
Extent: Remove areas of rejected asphalt surfacing, including defective joints and finish, to the full
depth of the layer, and replace with complying pavement.
Joints: Treat edges of remedial work as specified for cold joints.
Reinstating adjacent surfaces
General: Reinstate surfaces next to new pavements and associated elements. Where an existing
flexible road pavement has been disturbed, trim it back to a straight and undisturbed edge 250 –
300 mm from and parallel to the new concrete for the full depth of the slab. Backfill with asphalt
rammed solid, using suitable rammers.
Traffic on pavement
General: Give notice before opening the pavement to traffic before the work is completed. Provide
adequate means of protection.
If a pavement base is to be opened to traffic before the specified asphalt surfacing is completed, nominate special requirements.
Junctions with existing pavements

Trimming: Where the pavement is to be joined to an existing pavement remove a strip of the existing
pavement at least 300 mm wide for its full depth and trim the edge to an angle of approximately 45° in
steps of maximum height 150 mm before placing new pavement material.

Existing sealed pavement: Trim the seal to a neat edge.
4 SELECTIONS
4.1 SCHEDULES
Tests schedule
Tests Occurrence Method Acceptance Status
criteria
Process control
Compliance
assessment
May be performed by the contract administrator, or by an independent testing authority, or partly by the contract administrator
and partly by an independent authority.
Tests performed by the contract administrator have contractual implications and must be specified in the schedules.
Use these schedules to specify the items to be tested, the test method, and the frequency, where these requirements are not
specified in the Template or standards or shown on the drawings. This will include material property tests, (base, subbase,
aggregates, cement, bitumen, asphalt joint seals), density tests (subgrade, base, subbase, asphalt), and asphalt mix tests.
Special or additional concrete tests may also be specified here.
Type of test: If the test relates to properties or tests specified in the Template, use the terms from the Template to describe the
test.
Testing authority: e.g. “Contract administrator” or “Independent testing authority”.
2
Test frequency: e.g. per 1000 t, per load, per 1000 m , per day.
Resistance to polishing: See AS 2758.5 Appendix D for guidance on frictional characteristics..
Properties schedule
Properties Types
A B C D
Asphalt surfacing
- Nominal mix size
- Combined aggregate grading
- Binder content %
- Layer thickness
Preferably show details on the drawings. Use this schedule as a checklist of information to be provided. Refer to Notes on
selection of asphalt mix size in the Commentary.
Resistance to polishing (wearing course): >

Water absorption: >
Particle density: >
Fibre: >
Reclaimed asphalt pavement: >
Asphalt mix design: >
Proposed job mix: >
Application rate (L/m2): >

SPRAYED BITUMINOUS SURFACING SITE
SPRAYED BITUMINOUS SURFACING
This worksection is applicable to bituminous sprayed surfacing including priming, primer sealing and resealing.
• Earthwork.
• Stormwater –site.
• None.
• None.
• The location of the required types of sprayed bituminous surfacings including binder types and sizes of aggregate should
be shown on the drawings.
1 GENERAL
The aim of the worksection is to provide sprayed bituminous surfaces that are as follows:
• In conformance with the level tolerances.
• Comply with material requirements.
• Have been placed in accordance with execution requirements.

General
have no overlaps.
- Pavement base and subbase.

1.2 INTERPRETATION
Definitions
Absolute level tolerance: Maximum deviation from design levels.
Relative level tolerance: Maximum deviation from a 3 m straightedge laid on the surface.
1.3 INSPECTION
Notice
- Surfaces prepared for priming, sealing or surfacing.
- Commencement of bituminous spraying.
1.4 TESTS
General
Standards: Testing of materials shall be in accordance with the relevant materials standards referred
to in this specification, by a NATA registered laboratory.
1.5 SAMPLES
General
Standards: Sampling of materials shall be in accordance with the relevant materials standards referred
to in this specification, by a NATA registered laboratory.
1.6 SUBMISSIONS
Tests
Compliance assessment: If compliance assessment tests are to be carried out by an independent
testing authority, have the authority submit 3 copies of each test result.
Certificate of compliance: If a certificate of compliance is acceptable as an alternative to testing a
manufactured material, submit the manufacturer’s certificate together with the results of recent tests
undertaken by the manufacturer, showing compliance with test criteria.
Execution
The Template lists the information which may be required for a major project. Modify the list as required. Alternatively delete the
subclause entirely if these matters are to be left to the contractor.
General: Submit proposals for the methods and equipment to be used for the roadworks, including the
following:
Spraying equipment: Submit a current certificate and calibration chart issued by the state road
authority.
Hand spraying: If intended, submit proposals.
Spraying: Submit proposals for start, finish and width of each spray run.

Bituminous surfacing records

General: Submit certified records of the work carried out as follows:
>
Specify the areas of work, if any, for which certified records of measurement are required.
Records of measurement
Records: Submit certified records of work performed.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
Bituminous surfacing may include any of the following operations:
• Priming.
• Primersealing.
• Bitumen sealing.
• Bitumen emulsion sealing.
Select the appropriate system for the project.
Material grades
Bitumen: To AS 2008 Class 170.
Bitumen emulsion: To AS 1160.
Cut back bitumen: To AS 2157.
Cover aggregate
- Precoating agent: Precoating agents shall be capable of satisfying plate stripping tests. The
percentage of stripping shall not exceed 10% in accordance with AS 1141.50.
2.2 MEASURING MATERIALS

Bitumen and cutter
General: Measure by volume at 15°C.
Temperatures higher than 15°C: Use the Bitumen volume conversion formula for primers and binders,
where T is the temperature of the material at which the volume has been measured. For calculation
purposes, assume that the conversion factors are the same for bitumen, bituminous mixes and cutter.
Bitumen volume conversion formula: Volume at 15°C = Volume at T°C x (1-(T-15)/1667).
3 EXECUTION
3.1 TOLERANCES
Finished levels
General: Provide a finished surface which is free draining and evenly graded between level points.
3.2 PRECOATING
General
General: Precoat sealing aggregates immediately before the aggregate is loaded into the spreader
trucks.
7 mm cover aggregate: Precoat at least 48 hours in advance of spreading.
Where special coloured aggregates are to be used, standard precoating may not be applicable. Specify alternative treatments,
e.g. use of additives in binder or water-based or other non-staining precoating agent.
Preconditions
General: Prime and seal in dry and reasonably calm weather, on a dry pavement surface at a
temperature of at least 15°C.

Application
General: Apply precoating agent thinly and evenly using a fine pressure spray to a moving stream of
aggregate, or by other suitable means, so that particles are fully coated but without excess material.
Wet aggregate: If the aggregate is too wet to precoat, or contains enough moisture to cause uneven
distribution of the precoating agent, dry the aggregate by turning the stockpile over. Do not provide
precoated aggregate containing moisture until the moisture has evaporated and the precoating agent
has adhered efficiently.
Application rate: In the range 3 – 10 L/m3 of aggregate.
3.3 CUTTING BITUMEN

Generally
Temperature: Heat sufficient bitumen for immediate needs only. Do not keep the material at spraying
temperature for longer than 10 hours. Do not reheat.
Mixing and heating (on site)
General: Heat the bitumen at a rate not exceeding 40°C/h, and circulate cutback bitumen for 20
minutes to ensure thorough mixing.
Heating devices
General: Use devices capable of uniform heating without damaging bituminous materials.
3.4 SPRAYING EQUIPMENT

Hand spraying
Areas not accessible to the mechanical sprayer: Spray using hand spray equipment attached to the
mechanical sprayer.
3.5 PREPARATION FOR SPRAYING

Cleaning
General: Immediately before spraying remove loose and foreign material on the finished base surface,
including dust, debris and sand spread on primed surfaces, and until a mosaic of well embedded
stone shows on the surface. Keep traffic off the cleaned surface.
Method: Use suitable power blowers or power brooms (or using hand methods where inaccessible to
the power equipment).
Potholes
General: Trim to a regular shape and a uniform depth of at least 75 mm. Tack coat the sides, and
patch with a suitable bituminous premix, sanded after completion. Allow sufficient time for the premix
to cure before spraying the surface.
3.6 SPRAYING OPERATIONS

Protection
General: Protect adjacent surfaces during spraying. Place drip trays under spray bars when the
sprayer is stationary. Clean bituminous materials from adjacent surfaces or, if this is not possible,
replace and make good the surface. Protect freshly sprayed surfaces from contamination.
Spraying
General: Completely and uniformly cover the surface to be treated. Prevent the spray overlapping
previously treated areas, except that where part-width spraying is used, lap the longitudinal joint
between adjacent runs by 50 mm.
Preventing spray overlap may be achieved by starting and finishing each run on masking paper.
Priming
General: Prime the granular pavement to achieve and maintain a strong bond between granular
surface and pavement treatment seal.
Edges: At underbed edges, extend the primer 150 mm beyond the edge of the seal.
Sealing and primersealing
Process: Allow at least 3 days between priming and sealing and between first and second seals.
Incorporate the first course of aggregate thoroughly into the binder before a second course is applied.
Remove loose particles from the sealed area by sweeping lightly, without disturbing embedded
aggregate.

Spraying temperature ranges:

- Bitumen without cutter: 160 – 190°C.
- Primerbinder Grade AMC3: 95 – 115°C.
- Bitumen emulsion binder: Ambient temperature.
Application rates
General: Comply with the Sprayed bituminous road surfacing schedule.
Sprayed bituminous road surfacing schedule
Operation Primer or binder Cover aggregate
Material Grade or Application Size (mm) Spread rate
class rate at 15°C (m2/m3)
(L/m2)
Priming Primer AMC1 1.0 - -
Primersealing Primerbinder AMC3 1.5 7 100
10 80
First sealing Residual bitumen 1.0 14 80
binder
Second Residual bitumen 0.5 7 160
sealing binder
Single sealing/ Residual bitumen 0.75 10 120
resealing binder 1.6 20 60
Bituminous Bituminous 1.1 7 160
emulsion emulsion 1.4 10 120
sealing
Primer or binder:
• Grade or class: To be completed or varied as appropriate. See AS 2157 and AS 1160.
• Application rate: The optimum rate depends on a number of factors including surface condition, aggregate type and size,
ambient and pavement temperature, traffic volume and loadings. The rate of application may have to be varied to suit the
site conditions. This can be specified in a number of ways:
. - Specify an application rate for pricing purposes and include a schedule of rates for variations to the rate of application
as directed by the contract administrator.
. - Specify a minimum rate based on local experience, but require the contractor to carry the risk.
. - Leave it to the contractor.
Cut back bitumen and bitumen emulsions are diluted with cutting oil or water. Application rates must allow for this. Alternatively
specify the application in terms of residual bitumen.
Cover aggregate: Spread rates are measured by volume in the truck.
3.7 PLACING COVER AGGREGATE

Placing cover aggregate
Spreading: Immediately after the binder or primerbinder has been sprayed, cover with a uniform layer
of dry aggregate.
Rolling: Immediately after spreading roll and drag broom the area until it is uniformly covered with
aggregate thoroughly embedded in the binder. Roll uniformly over the whole area. Complete rolling as
soon as possible but not later than 3 days after spraying.
Steel rolling
General: Roll using a maximum of two coverages of a steel-wheeled roller of maximum axle load
5 tonne. Discontinue steel rolling if aggregate shows signs of breaking down.
Delete if not required. Do not specify if aggregate is known to be susceptible to breakdown.
Pneumatic tyred rolling

Roller: After steel rolling, roll the area using a pneumatic-tyred roller of minimum mass 10 t and with
tyre pressures adjustable in the range 550 – 700 kPa.
Rolling:

- Minimum rate: 4 roller hours per 4500 L of binder or primerbinder sprayed.

- Timing: At least one roller pass within 2 minutes of covering, over the whole of the area. After an
initial slow pass increase the speed of rolling to the maximum practicable for the area being sealed.
Complete at least 25% of the rolling within 2 hours of covering, and 50% within 24 hours of
covering. Roll during daylight hours.
Loose aggregate
General: When the aggregate has been evenly spread and embedded, remove loose particles
remaining on the pavement and apply additional aggregate as required.
Surface finish
General: Provide an even, smooth riding and free draining surface.
3.8 DEFECTIVE SURFACING

Primer
Actual rate of application < 90% of that ordered: Make up the deficiency with a second spray run.
Actual rate of application > 110% of that ordered: Cover the surface with sand.
Binder and primerbinder
Actual rate of application < 90% or > 110% of that ordered: Reseal the surface.
Minimum criteria for retention
Actual rate of application: 90 – 110% of that ordered.
3.9 JUNCTIONS WITH EXISTING PAVEMENTS

Pavement base: Protect using a suitable temporary seal or primerseal.
Primed surface: Keep traffic off the primed surface for at least 3 days after spraying. Commence
sanding 4 – 24 hours after spraying.
3.10 COMPLETION
Traffic on pavement
Notice: Give notice before opening the pavement to traffic before the work is completed. Provide
If a pavement base is to be opened to traffic before the specified bituminous surfacing is completed, special requirements
should be specified. Consult the engineer.

CONCRETE PAVEMENT SITE
CONCRETE PAVEMENT
This worksection is applicable to the supply and placement of concrete for the purposes of internal concrete pavements such as
loading docks, carparks and internal roadways.
• Earthwork.
• Industrial pavements with loads exceeding highway loading.
• The thickness of concrete pavements and required reinforcement should be shown on the drawings.
• Show location, types of joints and joint details on the drawings.
• Show required concrete finish (e.g. broom finish) on the drawings.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
General: Provide a finished surface as follows:
- Free draining and evenly graded between level points.
- Even and smooth riding.
Standards
Materials and construction: To AS 3600.
AS 3600 is cited in the BCA, but not on this topic.
Tolerances
Rigid pavement surface:
- Absolute tolerance: ± 10 mm.
- Relative tolerance: 5 mm.
Concrete surface course: + unspecified, - 5 mm.
Joint locations (rigid pavement): 15 mm.

General

have no overlaps.
1.3 INTERPRETATION
Definitions
- Relative level tolerance: Maximum deviation from a 3 m straightedge laid on the surface.
1.4 INSPECTION
Notice
- Concrete formwork, reinforcement and dowels in position.
- Commencement of concrete placing.
- Completion of concrete placing.
1.5 SUBMISSIONS
General: As an alternative to testing a product, submit the manufacturer’s certificate together with the
results of recent tests undertaken by the manufacturer, showing compliance with test criteria.
Products – proposals
Curing compounds: If it is proposed to use a liquid membrane-forming curing compound submit
certified test results for water retention to AS 3799 Appendix B.
Reinforcement: Submit the manufacturer’s certificate of compliance with AS/NZS 4671, or submit test
certificates from an independent testing authority.
Curing by the covering sheet method: Submit details of the proposed covering material.
Repair materials: Submit proposals for epoxy resin/grout and elastomeric sealant.
General: Submit proposals for the methods and equipment to be used for the pavement works,
including the following:
- Methods of concrete manufacture.
- Temperature control, curing and protection methods for concrete.

Trial mix design report: Six weeks before commencing production, submit a report for each mix design
containing the information required in AS 1012.2, the individual and combined aggregate particle size
distribution, and the records and reports for the tests.
See AS 1012.2 clause 14.
Mix design variation: If a variation is proposed, submit a further mix design report.
Joint sealants: Submit proposals for installation methods and sealant performance.
Concrete placing: Submit proposals for size of the area to be placed and the spacing of planned
construction joints before placement commences.
Crack repair: Drill 100 mm diameter core holes along unplanned cracks in the finished pavement, and
submit the cores for examination.
Formed weakened plant joints: Before concrete placing submit details of the proposed equipment.
Execution – prototypes
General: Demonstrate by placing a test section that the proposed method of placement will produce a
pavement complying with requirements. Remove test sections which do not comply with requirements
and dispose of as directed.
Delete if not required.
Minimum area of test section: >
2 2
e.g. 100 m for fixed form placement, 200 m for slip form placement.
1.6 TESTS
General
General: Perform tests of the type and frequency necessary to adequately control the materials and
processes used in the construction of the works and in conformance with the Tests table.
Performed by the contractor (or a testing authority appointed by and reporting to the contractor) to maintain control during the
course of the works over his materials and processes, independently of compliance assessment testing. It is usual to specify a
minimum requirement. The contractor may elect to perform additional tests for his own purposes and at his expense.
Standard: To AS 1379, including Appendix B, and the requirements for project assessment.
AS 1379 Section 5 and 6 specify the testing and assessment requirements for slump, strength, air content, chloride and
sulphate content, drying shrinkage and uniformity of mixing.
Dissemination of production information: Submit copies of the reports
Process control tests
Records: Show the results of process control tests on control charts or graphs displayed on site in a
readily accessible location and updated daily.
Methods: Use wet preparation methods where applicable.
If subsidiary, rather than standard, test methods are required, and are not specified in the Template, they should be specified in
the schedules.
Sampling: Determine timing and location.
Compliance assessment tests
Timing: Obtain materials samples at the time of delivery to the site.
Location: Sample from selected sample sites within designated uniform test lots, consisting of an area
placed, or compacted or both in one day. Test lots must be uniform in terms of material properties and
density.
Discharge slump tests
General: Carry out slump tests at approximately one quarter and three quarter points of the load
during discharge.
Standard: To AS 1012.3.1.
Maximum slump variation: 25 mm.
Flexural strength assessment of concrete
Standard: To AS 1012.8.2 and AS 1012.11.

AS 1379 clause 5.3.1 provides for indirect control of flexural strength by first establishing a relationship between mean
compressive strength and mean flexural strength, and then monitoring the mean compressive strength. The worksection
provides for direct assessment where this is required.
Acceptance criterion: The average strength of any set of 3 consecutive project samples must not
exceed the specified maximum value.
Drying shrinkage of concrete
General: Sample and test every 3 months for each type of concrete.
AS 1379 clause 1.6.3.1 specifies drying shrinkage strain for normal-class concrete (after 56 days drying) not exceeding 1000 x
-6
10 . Compliance assessment is specified in clause 5.6.1. The worksection provides for project testing if drying shrinkage is
specified. Alternatively drying shrinkage may be assessed from trial mixes, in which case amend this paragraph.
Acceptance criterion: The average strain of 3 specimens from each sample must not exceed the
required value.
Tests schedule
Tests Occurrence Method Acceptance Status
criteria
Process control
Compliance
assessment
Compliance assessment schedule:

• May be performed by the contract administrator, or by an independent testing authority, or partly by the contract
administrator and partly by an independent authority.
• Tests performed by the contract administrator have contractual implications and must be specified in the schedules.
• Use these schedules to specify the items to be tested, the test method, and the frequency, where these requirements are
not specified in the worksection or standards or shown on the drawings. This will include material property tests, (base,
subbase, aggregates, cement, bitumen, asphalt joint seals), density tests (subgrade, base, subbase, asphalt), and asphalt
mix tests. Special or additional concrete tests may also be specified here.
• Type of test: If the test relates to properties or tests specified in the Template, use the terms from the Template to describe
the test.
• Testing authority: e.g. “Contract administrator” or “Independent testing authority”.
2
• Test frequency: e.g. per 1000 t, per load, per 1000 m , per day.
Coarse aggregate durability assessment schedule: AS 2758.1 clause 9.3 provides alternative assessment methods for durability
of coarse aggregate. Consult the engineer and specify here the properties to be assessed.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCTS
Reinforcement
- Grade: 250D.
Identification: Supply reinforcement which is readily identifiable as to grade and origin.
Show on the drawings sizes and location of reinforcement and dowels.
Dowels
General: Provide each dowel in one piece, straight, cut accurately to length with ends square and free
from burrs.
- Grade: 250R.
End tolerances: Ensure that deformation of an end from its true circular shape does not exceed 1 mm
nor extend more than 1 mm from the end.

Aggregate
Aggregate size:
- For fixed form placement: < 40 mm.
- For slip form placement: To be a size compatible with the paving machine.
Washing: Wash aggregate as necessary or as directed to achieve requirements for soluble salt
content or concrete drying shrinkage.
Concrete exposure classification (for durability assessment): Severe.
Consider specifying in the Conditions of tendering that tenderers are to nominate their proposed sources of supply, and to
supply samples from the sources for testing. Appropriate tests and limits would then be derived for the approved reference
samples. Test methods and limits such as those given in AS 2758.1 may not be applicable to material from a particular source.
Vary as necessary.
Cement
- Type: GP.
Curing products
Curing compounds: To AS 3799, Type 2, white pigmented or containing aluminium reflective
pigments.
Covering sheet materials: To be white opaque polyethylene film, or white burlap-polyethylene sheet,
or equivalent material.
- Standard: To ASTM C171.
Concrete
Accuracy of batching (% by mass):
- Cement: ± 1.
- Aggregates: ± 2.
- Water: ± 1.
- Admixture: ± 3.
Admixtures: Introduce in solution in a portion of the mixing water. Ensure a uniform distribution of the
admixture in the batch within the mixing period.
Mixing time: Measure the mixing time after solid materials are in the mixer, provided that mixing water
is introduced before a quarter of the mixing time has elapsed. Increase mixing time if necessary to
obtain the required uniformity and consistence of concrete. Do not overmix such that additions of
water are needed.
Uniformity: Differences specified in AS 1379 apply to samples taken from 3 locations in a batch. Do
not exceed 2% difference in moisture content of the 3 samples.
See AS 1379 Table A1.
Transport: Transport and discharge the concrete without segregation.
Elapsed delivery time: Discharge truck mixed concrete within a time (t hours) determined as follows,
where T is the temperature of the concrete in degrees Celsius:
- t = 2 - 0.05T.
Preformed elastomeric seals
Description: To have vertical sidewalls, marked durably on the top surface every 300 mm ± 2 mm at
the time of manufacture and in conformance with the Preformed elastomeric seal properties table.
This type may be inserted in formed joints made with inert form strips or in sawn rebated groove joints.
Standard: To ASTM D2628.
Depth: To be adequate to retain the seal in the joint, but not greater than 50 mm when the seal is
compressed laterally to 50% deflection.
Lubricant adhesive: To be a compound of the same base polymer as the seal, blended with suitable
volatile solvents of viscosity suitable to the installation equipment, with the following properties:
- Average net mass per litre: 0.784 kg ± 5%.
- Film tensile strength: 15 MPa minimum.

- Elongation before breaking: 750% minimum.

Preformed elastomeric seal properties table
Nominal width of seal Deflection range (% of Required force (N/m) range
nominal width) before
and after heat aging Before heat aging After heat aging
< 10 mm 20 – 50 350 – 2100 175 – 2100

> 12 mm 20 – 50 350 – 2100 260 – 2100
Inert form strip

General: To be fibreboard or polystyrene foam strip for use with preformed elastomeric seals. After
forming, remove the upper section of the inert form strip and insert the preformed elastomeric seal.
Sealants
General: Do not use pourable sealants.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
Fixed formwork
Description: To be as follows:
- Steel forms.
- Seasoned, dressed timber planks, free of warps, bends or kinks, with the full width of their top and
bottom edges covered with steel angle sections finishing flush with the form face.
Depth: Equal to the edge thickness of the slab and in one piece.
Tolerances on position:
- Absolute level tolerance: ± 5 mm (maximum departure of top surface from the required level).
- Relative level tolerance: 5 mm (maximum departure of top surface from a 3 m straightedge).
- Horizontal tolerance: ± 10 mm (maximum departure of face from a plane surface).
- Verticality: 3 mm departure from vertical.
Staking: Stake forms in position using at least 3 steel stakes per form, not more than 1.5 m apart. Lock
joints between form sections to prevent movement.
Release agent: Before placing reinforcement, apply a release agent compatible with the contact
surfaces, to the interior of the formwork, except where the concrete is to receive an applied finish for
which there is no compatible release agent. Clean the reinforcement to remove all traces of release
agent.
Re-use: Clean and recoat the forms each time before placing concrete.
Keyways: Form the keyways of keyed construction joints using steel form strips accurately located at
the mid-depth of the slab and securely fastened flush against the formwork face.
Dowels and tie bars
Location: Across joints at the required spacings and vertical locations correctly aligned parallel to the
finished pavement surface and perpendicular to the joint in plan. If the construction methods require
alterations to the designed spacing, space closer with additional dowels or tie bars.
Placing in fixed-form paving: Use the bonded-in-place method. Embed the unpainted half of the
dowels in the slab placed first.
Placing in longitudinal joints in slip-form paving: Place using machine or vibrate into the plastic
concrete using a suitable template.
Movement: Do not distort or displace beyond the alignment tolerances under testing or during
construction. Do not remove and replace dowels in pre-formed holes.
Removal and replacement not allowed for any reason, including to assist in form stripping.
Horizontal and vertical location: ± half the diameter of the dowel.

Alignment: Locate bars in the joint within 2 mm in 300 mm and adjacent bars which do not differ in
alignment by more than 2 mm in 300 mm.

3.2 PLACING
See AS 3600 clauses 19.1.3 and 19.1.4.
Rate
General: Place at a rate of at least 25 linear metres of pavement per hour.
Cold weather
Subbase: Ensure that the subbase surface is free of frost.
Aggregate: Ensure that aggregate is free of ice, snow, and frozen lumps.
Temperature: Maintain the concrete at a temperature of at least 10°C for at least 24 hours after
placing. Prevent the concrete from freezing during the curing period.
Admixtures
General: Do not add calcium chloride, salts, chemicals or other material to the mix to lower the
freezing point of the concrete.
Hot weather
General: Avoid premature stiffening of the mix and reduce water absorption and evaporation losses. If
the temperature of the surrounding air is higher than 32°C:
- Mix, transport, place and compact the concrete as rapidly as possible, and cover with an impervious
membrane or hessian kept wet until moist curing begins.
- Hold the concrete to a temperature < 32°C when placed.
Placing in fixed forms
General: Place concrete uniformly over the width of the slab or lane and so that the face is generally
vertical and normal to the direction of placing. Hand spread concrete using shovels, not rakes.
Vibration: Compact concrete using internal mechanical vibration of sufficient amplitude to produce
noticeable vibrations at 300 mm radius. Insert vibrators into the concrete to the depth which will
provide the best compaction, but not deeper than 50 mm above the surface of the subbase, and for a
duration sufficient to produce satisfactory compaction, but not longer than 30 seconds in any one
location.
This clause assumes that the concrete will be spread, compacted and finished by hand. If a paving machine is to be used some
modification may be needed to the subclauses Spreading and Vibration, and the clause Finishing. Consult the engineer.
Slip form placing
Spreading: Place the plastic concrete in a uniform layer over the width of the slab being placed. Do not
damage the existing surface and edge of previously constructed concrete.
Vibration: Use suitable internal vibrators or surface type equipment with vibrating beam or beams of
adequate power to fully compact the whole depth of the concrete.
Slab edges: Use supplementary immersion type vibrators next to slab edges if necessary to ensure
that the sides of slabs present a uniform dense appearance free from honeycombing or areas deficient
in fines over at least 95% of the surface.
This clause is appropriate for small-scale projects. For major works (large pavement areas, heavy traffic, heavy loadings, etc.)
additional requirements may need to be specified. Consult the engineer.
Finishing
General: Immediately after placement and spreading and compaction of the plastic concrete, start
finishing operations to achieve finish shown on the drawings.
Curing
General: Protect fresh concrete from premature drying and from excessively hot or cold temperatures.
Maintain the concrete at a reasonably constant temperature with minimum moisture loss for the curing
period.
- Temperature: Maintain the concrete at a temperature > 5°C for at least 7 days.
Curing compound method: Spray the entire surface including edges using a mechanical sprayer, at a
uniform application rate of at least 0.35 L/m2. Respray defective areas within 30 minutes. Respray
within 3 hours after heavy rain. Apply as a continuous coating without visible breaks or pinholes.
Covering sheet method: Immediately after finishing operations cover concrete using damp hessian or
cotton mats overlapped at least 150 mm and anchored against displacement by wind or other
interference. Keep the mats continuously damp until covered by the covering sheet material. Repair
tears and the like immediately.

- Joint sawing: Sheet materials may be removed for the minimum distance and period to permit joint
sawing, provided the concrete is kept moist by other means.
Moist curing method: Immediately after finishing operations keep the concrete surface continuously
damp by spraying constantly with water, fog, or mist, using suitable spraying equipment.
Minimum curing time: 7 days.
If a particular curing method is required select it here.
3.3 JOINTS
Joints
General: Construct expansion, contraction and construction joints straight and plumb. Make
transverse joints normal to longitudinal joints. Extend transverse expansion and contraction joints
continuously from edge to edge of the pavement through interconnected slabs.
Transverse construction joints: To be as follows:
- Planned location: Terminate each day’s placing operation at a transverse construction joint located
to coincide with a planned contraction or expansion joint.
- Unplanned joints: If placement is interrupted for 30 minutes or longer, form a tied transverse
construction joint within the middle third of the distance between planned joints but no closer than
1.5 mm to the nearest planned joint. If necessary remove placed concrete back to the required
location.
Expansion joints: Provide formed full depth joints around structures and features which project
through, into or against the pavement, and elsewhere as required.
Formed joints
Full depth joints: Form the edge of the concrete placed first to provide a smooth, vertical face. After
stripping and cleaning fix the joint filler with a suitable waterproof adhesive to the face of the slab, and
place the adjoining concrete after the adhesive has set.
Weakened plane joints: Cut a crack-inducing groove by machine in the plastic concrete during
finishing of the concrete surface. Compact and refinish the plastic concrete around the groove after
inserting the joint filler.
Rebated groove joints: Form the rebate by securely fixing removable steel form strips to the form or
forms on the slab which is placed first, so that the top of the steel strip is flush with the top of the form.
After stripping and cleaning, fix the joint filler in the rebate before placing the adjoining concrete.
Sawn joints
Because of the critical nature of the operation, a sawn contraction jointing system should be adopted only when the project
warrants the level of supervision necessary for success.
Any requirement for stand-by sawing machines may be relaxed or omitted for smaller projects in major population centres where
replacement machines can be readily obtained.
Weakened plane joints: Saw the hardened concrete to at least 45 mm depth, and to a uniform width in
the range of 3 - 5 mm as follows:
- Timing: Commence sawing, regardless of time or weather conditions, as soon as the concrete has
hardened sufficiently to permit cutting without defects, occurring to such a degree as to cause
structural weakness or excessive cleaning difficulty. Complete sawing at least 24 hours after
concrete placement.
Defects such as uncontrolled cracking, chipping, spalling, undercutting or washing out.
- Sequence: If possible, saw every third transverse joint initially, then saw the intermediate joints.
- Cracking: If the concrete has already cracked near the location chosen for a joint, do not saw a joint
in that location. If a crack develops ahead of the saw cut, discontinue sawing. If uncontrolled
cracking occurs, suspend concrete placing.
- Stand-by machines: Provide one stand-by sawing machine for each machine planned to be used.
- Cleaning and protection: Immediately after each joint is sawn, flush the saw cut and adjacent
concrete surface using water, until the waste from sawing is removed from the joint. Temporarily
caulk the joint using plastic or rubber tubing, or a suitable “Tee” shaped extrusion. Leave the
caulking in place until grooving and sealing.

Rebated groove joints: Saw straight, parallel sided grooves for joint seals on top of and centred on the
sawn weakened plane joints.
- Timing: Commence sawing after the curing period has ended, immediately before joint sealing. Saw
during daylight hours and when the concrete temperature is at least 10°C.
- Cracking: If cracks occur beneath initial saw cuts, increase the width of the groove by an amount
equal to the width of the crack.
Dowelled joints
General: To be formed or sawn joints reinforced with dowels and sealed.
Tied joints
General: To be formed or sawn joints reinforced with tie bars. Omit grooves and sealing unless shown
on the drawings.
Stripping time
General: To be at least 12 hours.
Preparing joints
General: Immediately before installation of the sealer ensure that the joint space is dry, clean and free
from loose material. Remove laitance, curing compound and protrusions of hardened concrete from
the sides and upper edges of the joint.
Formed full depth and rebated groove joints: After form stripping and when the concrete has cured
sufficiently, clean formed arrises using a rotary saw.
Sawn joints: Remove loosened material from the joint using compressed air or high pressure water jet.
Installing preformed elastomeric seals
General: Apply a bead of lubricant adhesive to the top edge of each side of the joint, then install the
seal by easing it into the joint, using a suitable roller, to finish 4 - 6 mm below the finished concrete
surface.
3.4 COMPLETION
Protection
General: Keep traffic, including construction plant, off the pavement entirely during curing, and
thereafter permit access only to necessary constructional plant vehicles until the pavement is at least
14 days old.
Reinstating adjacent surfaces
General: Reinstate surfaces next to new pavements and associated elements. Where an existing
flexible road pavement has been disturbed, trim it back to a straight and undisturbed edge 250 -
300 mm from and parallel to the new concrete for the full depth of the slab. Backfill with asphalt
rammed solid, using suitable rammers.
Traffic on pavement
General: Give notice before opening the pavement to traffic before the work is completed. Provide
Trimming: Where the pavement is to be joined to an existing pavement remove a strip of the existing
pavement at least 300 mm wide for its full depth and trim the edge to an angle of approximately 45° in
steps of maximum height 150 mm before placing new pavement material.
Existing sealed pavement: Trim the seal to a neat edge.

SEGMENTAL PAVERS – MORTAR BED SITE
SEGMENTAL PAVERS – MORTAR BED
This worksection is applicable to external paving in stone, industrial cast stone, terrazzo and manufactured cementitious pavers
on a cement mortar bed or screed to concrete substrates.
• Segmental pavers – sand bed for segmented pavers laid dry.
• Stone cladding for external or internal stone cladding, mechanically fixed.
Some projects may include items not covered by this worksection. You may need to create new text, modify this text or use an
applicable worksection. Examples include:
• External wall tiling directly exposed to weather.
• Tiling fixed to substrates subject to vibration.
• Tiling fixed to previously tiled or painted substrates.
• Tiling subject to permanent immersion e.g. swimming pools.
• None.
• Use the Concrete formwork, Concrete reinforcement, Concrete in situ and Concrete finishes worksections for concrete
substrates.
• Use the Waterproofing – external worksection for waterproofing membranes.
• Layout, set-out point, paving pattern and movement joints to your office documentation policy.
The appointment of a specialist stonework consultant is advisable for all stages of most projects involving stonework design and
construction.
4 GENERAL
4.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
General: Provide external paving:
- Consistent in colour and finish.
- Firmly bonded to substrates for the expected life of the installation.
- Resistant to expected impacts in use.
- Set out with joints accurately aligned in both directions.
- To direct all water flowing from supply points to drainage outlets without leakage to the substrate or
adjacent areas.

General

have no overlaps.
>
may be work that is closely associated with this work. For example:
• Concrete formwork, Concrete reinforcement, Concrete in situ and Concrete finishes worksections for concrete substrates.
• Waterproofing – external worksection for waterproofing membranes.
4.3 INTERPRETATIONS
Definitions
- Adhesives:
. Cementitious (C): Adhesives in which the binders are hydraulic, e.g. Portland cement, with
aggregates and organic additives.
. Dispersion ( D): Adhesives in which the binders are in the form of aqueous polymer dispersion
with mineral fillers and organic additives.
. Reaction resin ( R): Adhesives in which in the binders are synthetic resins with mineral fillers and
organic additives. The curing occurs by chemical reaction.
These definitions of adhesive types ( C), (D) and ( R) are based on AS 4992.1 Int.
- Substrates: The surfaces on which pavers are bedded.
- Bedding: Mixtures of materials which are applied to substrates in a plastic state and dry and cure to
adhere tiles to substrates.
. Adhesive bedding: Tiling adhered by adhesives.
. Mortar bedding: Tiling adhered in a cementitious mortar bed.
- Pavers: Slabs made from clays, stone, precast concrete and/or other inorganic raw materials
generally over 20 mm thick used as coverings for floors and supported over continuous substratess.
. Terrazzo – cementitious: Manufactured cementitious terrazzo tiles formed in a suitable machine
to give sufficient compaction and density to the finished surface, and moisture cured before
grinding and honed at the place of manufacture. Thickness usually 35mm.
4.4 INSPECTION
Notice
- Substrate immediately before tiling.
- Trial set-outs before execution.
- Control joints before sealing and grouting.
4.5 SUBMISSIONS
Samples
General: Submit labelled samples of pavers, grout and sealants, illustrating the range of variation in
colour and finish.
Rely on approved samples for general quality compliance. Samples of sand may be required for major works, where testing for
grading is necessary. Where tiles and accessories are specified as proprietary items use this clause as a means of
confirmation.
Sample panels
General: Prepare a sample panel of each type of finish as follows:

- Size: ≥ 2 m2.
- Include samples of junction details and trim.
- Obtain approval.
- Preserve each panel until related work is complete.
The sample panel shall be the benchmark of quality of execution for the project.
Size: ≥ 2 m2.
If the project size does not justify sample panels: Delete
For large projects consider asking for a prototype room comprising the complete wall and floor tiling.
Execution
Refer to AS 3958.1 and AS 3958.2, for guidance and also to BRANZ 003 and SAA HB52.
Grouting: Submit proposals for grouting methods and materials.
Margins: If it appears that minor variations in joint widths or overall dimensions will avoid cut pavers,
submit a proposal.
4.6 TESTS
General
Type tests: Submit as follows:
- Slip resistance to AS 4586: >
See Commentary notes under Slip resistance.
- Stone tile properties: >
See Commentary notes under Stone tile selection regarding CSIRO BEST tests for stone tiles. Select the test you may
require and call for the recommended outcome. Alternately, seek the advice of a stonework consultant.
- Impact sound insulation: >
See Commentary notes under Impact sound insulation regarding the options available for BCA compliance. If the impact
insulation field test option for verification of conformance with the BCA is adopted, nominate tests as determined under ISO
717.2.
Flood tests: Submit a report of flood tests conducted on site as follows:
>
Tiling should not proceed without a successful flood test of waterproof membranes. A method is suggested in the Commentary
under Flood test and should be specified in Waterproofing
Salt efflorescence: Provide prototype testing of cementitious tiles for salt efflorescence as follows:
>
See Commentary notes under Salt efflorescence for prototype testing of cementitious pavers.
4.7 PRODUCT CONFORMITY

General
General: Submit current assessments of conformity as follows:
- Declaration of conformity by an AS ISO 9001 quality management system certified supplier:
. Slip resistance of tiles to AS/NZS 4586.
. Marking and Classification of tile adhesive to AS 4992 (Int).
4.8 TOLERANCES
Completed paving
General: Conform to the Surface level tolerances table:


Absolute Relative
Vehicular pavements ± 5 mm 5 mm
Pedestrian pavements ± 10 mm <10 mm
5 PRODUCTS
5.1 ADHESIVES
The inclusion of adhesives in this worksection is to cover adhesive fixed pavers on a cementitious screed. If pavers are laid
directly on a wet cement mortar bed, delete this clause. See also the Commentary.
General
Standard: To AS 2358 or AS 4992.1 (Int).
AS 4992.1(Int) is expected to replace AS 2358 in 2005.
Type
General: Provide adhesives to the Paving schedule and compatible with the materials and surfaces
to be adhered.
Prohibited uses: Do not provide the following combinations:
- Organic PVC-based adhesives and organic natural rubber latex adhesives in damp or wet
conditions.
- PVA (polyvinyl acetate) based adhesives in wet areas or externally.
5.2 MORTAR
Materials
Cement type to AS 3972: GP.
- White cement: Iron salts content ≤ 1%.
- Off-white cement: Iron salts content ≤ 2.5%.
Lime: To AS 1672.1.
Sand: Fine aggregate with a low clay content selected for grading, sharp and free from efflorescing
salts.
Water: To the recommendations of AS 3958.1.
The installation of stone tiles or pavers commonly follows the practices outlined in AS 3958..
Measurement of volume: Measure binders and sand by volume using buckets or boxes. Do not allow
sand to bulk by absorption of water.
Bedding mortar
Proportioning: Select proportions from the range 1 cement:3 sand – 1 cement:4 sand: to obtain
satisfactory adhesion. Provide minimum water.
Mixing: To AS 3958.1.
Gauging: Site gauged.
Site gauged mixes are preferred by experienced tradesmen as it gives them the opportunity to make adjustments for moisture
content.
5.3 GROUT
The selection of the grout type is integral to the performance of the tiling system as a whole and is best left to the warrantor as
noted for adhesives. Pigments for coloured grout: See BS EN 12878 for specifications. Grout colour can be nominated in the
Schedules.
Type
Cement based proprietary grout: Mix with water. Fine sand may be added as a filler in wider joints.

Portland cement based grout: Mix with fine sand. Provide minimum water consistent with workability.
- For joints < 3 mm: 1 cement:2 sand.
- For joints ≥ 3 mm: 1 cement:3 sand.
Pigments
Pigments for coloured grout: Provide colourfast fillers compatible with the grout material. For cement-
based grouts, provide lime-proof natural or synthetic metallic oxides compatible with cement.
Water
General: To be clean and free from any deleterious matter.
Grout to resin terrazzo tiles: Resinous material supplied by the tile supplier.
6 EXECUTION
6.1 SUBSTRATES
Drying and shrinkage
General: Before paving, allow at least the following times to elapse (for initial drying out and
shrinkage) for these substrates:
- Concrete slabs: 42 days.
- Toppings on slabs: A further 21 days.
6.2 PREPARATION
Trial set-out
General: Prepare a trial paving set-out to each area as follows to:
- Maximise the size of equal margins of cut pavers.
- Locate movement joints.
- Note minor variations in joint widths to eliminate cut tiles at margins.
Ambient temperature
General: It the ambient temperature is < 5 or > 35°C, do not lay pavers.
Substrates
General: Ensure substrates are as follows:
- Clean and free of any deposit or finish which may impair adhesion or location of pavers.
- Excessive projections are hacked off and voids and hollows are filled with a cement:sand mix not
stronger than the substrate nor weaker than the bedding.
Absorbent substrates: If suction is excessive, control it by dampening but avoid over-wetting and do
not apply mortar bedding to substrates showing surface moisture.
Dense concrete: If not sufficiently rough to provide a mechanical key, roughen by scabbling or the like
to remove 3 mm of the surface and expose the aggregate; then apply a bonding treatment.
If there are particular requirements for substrate preparation, specify them here or schedule them later.
Fixtures
General: Before paving ensure that fixtures interrupting the surface are accurately positioned in their
designed or optimum locations relative to the paving layout.
6.3 PAVING GENERALLY

Variations
General: If necessary, distribute variations in hue, colour, or pattern uniformly, by mixing pavers or
paving batches before laying.
Paving joints
Patterns should be shown on the drawings, as should locations of movement joints.
Joint widths: Set out pavers to give uniform joint widths of 6 < 12 mm.
Margins
General: Provide whole or purpose-made pavers at margins where practicable, otherwise set out to
give equal margins of cut pavers. If margins less than half paver width are unavoidable, locate the cut
pavers where they are least conspicuous.
Protection
Traffic: Keep pedestrian and vehicular traffic off paving until the bedding has set and attained its
working strength.
Cleaning: Keep the work clean as it proceeds and protect finished work from damage.
6.4 MORTAR BEDDING

Preparation of pavers
Suction: Soak porous pavers in water for half an hour and then drain until the surface water has
disappeared.
Bedding
General: Use bedding methods and materials which are appropriate to the paver, the substrate, the
conditions of service, and which leave the paver firmly and solidly bedded in the bedding material and
adhered to the substrate. Form falls integral with the substrate.
Mortar beds
General: Either lightly dust the screeded bed surface with dry cement and trowel level until the cement
is damp, or spread a thin slurry of neat cement, or cement-based thin bed adhesive, on to the tile
back. Do not provide mortar after initial set has occurred.
Nominal thickness: >
Nominal thickness: 30 to 60 mm.
Bed thickness to suit the roughness of the back of the paver. If using split stone setts seek the advice of the supplier.
6.5 ADHESIVE BEDDING

Delete this clause if pavers are not adhesive fixed.
Preparation of pavers
Adhesive bedding: Fix pavers dry.
Bedding
General: Use bedding methods and materials which are appropriate to the paver, the substrate, the
conditions of service, and which leave the paver firmly and solidly bedded in the bedding material and
Thick adhesive beds
General: Provide on substrates with deviations up to 6 mm when tested with a 2 m straight edge, and
with tiles having deep keys or frogs.
Nominal thickness: 6 mm.
Adhesive bedding application
General: Apply adhesive by notched trowel to walls and floors and direct to tiles if required, to provide
evenly distributed coverage of > 90%.after laying.
Pattern of distribution of adhesive: As illustrated in AS 3958.1. Verify by examining one paver in ten as
work proceeds.
These values are more strict than in AS 3958.1.
Allow the adhesive to cure for the period nominated by the manufacturer prior to grouting or allowing
traffic.
6.6 MOVEMENT JOINTS

Sometimes called expansion joints. Their purpose is to accommodate movement in the pavers or the substrate, or both.
Movement may be caused by paver growth, substrate shrinkage, thermal expansion and contraction, and the like.
General
General: Provide movement joints to the Movement joints schedule and as follows:
- Location:
. Over structural (isolation, contraction, expansion) joints.
. At internal corners.
. Close to external corners in large tiled areas.
. Around the perimeter at abutments.
. At junctions between different substrates.
. To divide large paved areas into bays, maximum 5 m wide, maximum 16 m2.
. At abutments with the building structural frame and over supporting walls or beams where flexing
of the substrate is anticipated.
The location and details of all movement control joints should be shown on the drawings. Check the expected movement of
structural joints with the structural engineer and ensure the joint width is > 4 times the anticipated movement.
- Depth of joint: Right through to the substrate.
- Sealant width: 6 – 25 mm.
- Depth of elastomeric sealant: One half the joint width, or 6 mm, whichever is the greater.
Movement joint materials
Divider strip: A proprietary expansion joint consisting of a neoprene filler sandwiched between plates
with lugs or ribs for mechanical keying. Set flush with the finished surface.
Proprietary slide plate divider strip: An arrangement of interlocking metal plates grouted into pockets
formed in the concrete joint edges.
Sealant: Two-pack self-levelling non-hardening mould resistant, one-part silicone or polyurethane
sealant applied over a backing rod. Finish flush with the tile surface.
- Floors: Trafficable, shore hardness > 35.
Backing rod: Compressible closed cell polyethylene foam with a bond-breaking surface.
Movement joints schedule
Location
Divider strip:
- Joint side-plate
material
- Neoprene colour
- Width
- Fixing
Proprietary slide plate:
- Product
- Material
- Insert colour
Sealant:
- Type
- Colour
- Width (mm)
Location: State here or refer to a Finishes schedule.

Divider strip:
• Joint side-plate material: e.g. “Perforated brass angles”.
• Joint fixing: e.g. “Mortar bed”.
• Material: e.g. stainless steel.
• Insert colour: Nominate colour or omit if no insert.
Sealant:
• Type: e.g. “Polysulphide (two part)”. For major movement joints a proprietary system of sliding plates may be required.
• Colour: State requirement if sealant is to be specially coloured.
Edit joint strip type as required.

6.7 GROUTED AND CAULKED JOINTS

Grouted joints
General: Commence grouting as soon as practicable after bedding has set. Clean out joints as
necessary before grouting.
Face grouting: Fill the joints solid and tool flush. Clean off surplus grout. Wash down when the grout
has set. When grout is dry, polish the surface with a clean cloth.
6.8 COMPLETION
Spare pavers
General: Supply spare matching pavers of each type for future replacement purposes. Store the spare
materials on site.
Quantity: At least 1% of the quantity installed.
Specify a quantity here only if the requirement of the Template is not adequate.
Storage location: >
Cleaning
Completion: Leave pavements clean on completion.
Operation and maintenance manuals
General: Submit a manual describing care and maintenance of the tiling, including procedures for
maintaining the slip-resistance grading stating the expected life of the slip-resistance grade.
7 SELECTIONS
These schedules refer to the selections of the product/material by its properties, but does not locate it within the project. For this
you should prepare a separate document e.g. a Finishes schedule to locate the various finishes by reference to a designation
code or abbreviation of the finish. See also the Commentary on Stone tile and paver selection.
7.1 SCHEDULES
Paving schedule
Properties Types
FT 1 FT 2 FT 3
Pavers:
- Name
- Work size
- Material:
. Stone type
. Manufacturer’s stone product
. Cementitious product
. Terrazzo product
- Colour
- Surface finish
- Slip resistance:
. Wet pendulum
. Wet bare foot ramp
. Oil wet ramp
Beddings:
- Mortar bedding
- Adhesive bedding

Properties Types
FT 1 FT 2 FT 3
Grout colour
Sealer product name:
- Stone
- Terrazzo
Tile type: e.g. Stone type or product identifier. Rely on approved samples for general quality compliance.
Adhesive bedding: Specify the type, either generically, using the generic terms employed in the standards, or by a proprietary
item designation. Delete if bedded in mortar.
Grout:
Type: e.g. “Cement-based proprietary grout.
Slip resistance grade: Refer to Commentary
Separation layer:
• Type: e.g. “Building paper”, “Polyethylene film”, or “Bituminous felt membrane”.
Bedding:
• Type: e.g. “Bedding mortar” or “Adhesives.” If “adhesive” it will be necessary to specify the type, either generically using
the generic terms employed in the standards or by a proprietary item designation. Select either, or both if tiles are to be
adhered over a cured mortar screed.
• Thickness: Mortar beds laid over separation layers may need to be reinforced.
• Reinforcement: Usually a light gauge galvanized steel mesh.
The impact insulation laboratory value should be the deemed to satisfy value nominated in the BCA. If the field test option is
adopted the value for the impact insulation field test should satisfy the BCA.
Stone sealer: Select a product with a demonstrated ability to maintain slip resistance.

SEGMENTAL PAVERS – SAND BED SITE
SEGMENTAL PAVERS – SAND BED
This worksection is applicable to proprietary clay and concrete segmental paving on sand bedding for use in vehicular
pavements, footpaths and landscaped areas.
This worksection does not apply to industrial pavements, or to public roads and streets.
• Earthwork.
• None.
• Show laying pattern and extent on the drawings.
• Specify proprietary paver and traffic loading capacity on the drawings.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
General: Provide segmental paving surfaces for pavement, footpath and landscape works that are as
follows:
adjacent areas.
It is the aim of the designer to ensure the pavers selected are resistant to expected impacts in use.

General
have no overlaps.

- Earthwork.
- Pavement ancillaries.
1.3 INTERPRETATION
Definitions
- Base: One or more layers of material usually constituting the uppermost structural element of a
pavement and on which the surfacing may be placed, which may be composed of fine crushed rock,
natural gravel, broken stone, stabilised material, asphalt or Portland cement concrete.
- Density ratio: Percentage of the maximum density at optimum moisture content as determined by
AS 1289.5.2.1.
From AS 2870 clause 2.1 and AS 3727 clause 3. Edit to suit the project or deleted if not required.
1.4 INSPECTION
Notice
- Completed base preparation.
- Completed trial set-out for segmental paving.
- Completed paving.
Testing authority
General: Independent third party Registered testing authority.
1.5 SAMPLES
Use only where large areas are specified.
General
Segmental paving pattern: Prepare a trial set-out for each area.
Ensure that the specification of the material includes texture, colour, etc., where applicable, e.g. for masonry units and
segmental pavers.
1.6 SUBMISSIONS
Execution
Segmental pattern: If it appears that minor variations to joint widths will obviate cutting, submit
proposals.
1.7 TOLERANCES
Tolerances
General: Conform to the Surface level tolerances table:
Absolute Relative
Vehicular pavements ± 10 mm 10 mm
Footpaths ± 10 mm 5 mm

Level discontinuity: Between adjacent pavers and other surface features for footpath areas 1.5 mm
and roadway areas 2.0 mm.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
See the Commentary on materials and maintenance.
Bedding sand
Grading: To the Bedding sand grading schedule when tested in accordance with AS 1141.11.
Moisture content: Uniform in moisture content with spread.
Deleterious material: Free of deleterious material, such as soluble salts which may cause
efflorescence.
Bedding sand grading schedule
Sieve aperture Percentage passing (by mass)
9.52 100
4.75 95 – 100
2.36 80 – 100
1.18 50 – 85
600 25 – 60
300 10 – 30
150 5 – 15
75 0 – 10
Coordinate with Bedding sand/Grading. Complete if those requirements are insufficient. More detailed grading tables for
bedding materials are available from the Clay Brick and Paver Institute (CBPI) and the Cement and Concrete Association of
Australia (CCAA).
Joint filling sand
General: Well-graded sand and free of deleterious material such as soluble salts which may cause
efflorescence.
Grading: To the Joint filling sand grading schedule when tested in accordance with AS 1141.11.
Joint filling sand grading schedule
Sieve aperture Percentage passing
2.36 mm 100
1.18 90 – 100
600 µm 60 – 90
300 30 – 60
150 15 – 30
75 5 – 10
Moisture content: The sand shall be dry when spread.
2.2 COMPONENTS
Concrete and clay segmental paving units
Dimensional category: DPA1 and DPB1.

Log roundels
Softwood: Each section 75 mm thick x 200 mm minimum diameter, debarked.
Logs for edging
Size: At least 2.5 m long and 200 mm average diameter.
Sawn timber for edging
General: Select from sawn hardwood or preservative-treated softwood.
Size: 3000 x 100 x 25 mm nominal edgings; 50 mm square pegs, 400 mm long.
Sleepers
Hardwood: Sound hardwood railway sleepers to AS 3818.2.
Softwood: Sound preservative-treated softwood sleepers.
General: Hazard class 4 to AS 1604.1.
AS 1604.1 Table 1 Hazard class H4 is suitable for outside in-ground exposure, typical uses being fence posts, greenhouses,
pergolas and landscaping timbers. Hazard classes H5 and H6 are for more extreme exposures.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 SUBGRADE PREPARATION

General
Conformance: The subgrade shall be prepared in accordance with the Earthwork worksection.
3.2 SUBBASE
General
Conformance: The subbase shall be prepared in accordance with the Pavement base and subbase
worksection.
3.3 BASE
General
Conformance: The base course shall be prepared in accordance with the Pavement base and
subbase worksection.
3.4 EDGE RESTRAINT

Lateral restraint to segmental paving
State type or preferably show on the drawings. It is important to restrain the edge units from movement and keep the sand bed
in position. A concrete footing is one method. Others include units set on edge or on end, timber boards, concrete kerbs
(unnecessary if the paving surface is flush with the adjacent ground surface).
Perimeter: Provide edge restraints to bedding and units, where not provided by other structures.
Type: >
Concealed or exposed. Some specific exposed types described below.
Log edging
General: Excavate to lay logs at least half diameter into the ground. Fix the logs in position by spiking
with two 13 mm diameter galvanized mild steel rods per log, penetrating at least 500 mm into the
subgrade. Drive the rods flush with the upper surface of the log. Butt the logs together to a close neat
fit. Select adjacent logs for similar diameter.
Sawn timber edging
General: Set edgings flush with adjoining surfaces to define planting, grass areas or both. Fix to pegs
using galvanized nails, two per fixing. Drive pegs into the ground at 1200 mm centres on the planting
side of the edging and on both sides of joints between boards, with peg tops 15 mm below the top of
the edging.
Curving: Where the timber edge is to be curved, space the pegs to hold it to a uniform curve. Reduce
edging thickness to 15 mm if required to enable it to be bent.

Sleeper edging
General: Fix sleepers in position by spiking with two 13 mm diameter galvanized mild steel rods per
sleeper, penetrating at least 400 mm into the subgrade. Drive the rods flush with the upper surface of
the sleeper. Arris the upper exposed sleeper edges to produce a 15 mm wide face at 45° to the edges.
Concrete edging
General: Place in a shallow trench between timber forms. Wood float finish flush with the adjacent
finished grass level. Provide movement joints, filled with resilient bituminous material, at 3 m maximum
centres.
3.5 BEDDING SAND

General
Preparation: Remove all loose material from the prepared base.
Spreading: Screed uncompacted sand over prepared base in a uniform manner to achieve a 30 mm
thick layer. Maintain sand at a uniform loose density.
3.6 LAYING PAVING

General
Pattern: Paving units are to be laid on the screeded sand bedding to the nominated pattern shown on
the drawings.
Joints: Paving units are to be laid with a 2 – 3 mm gap between adjoining units.
Cut courses: Do not use cut units with a plain dimension of less than 50 mm. On footpaths and other
linear elements, use at least two cut courses and maintain symmetry.
Control joints: Where paving units are to be placed over control joints in an underlying concrete base,
a joint is to be provided in the pavers. The joint shall be 10 mm wide and filled with bitumen
impregnated fibreboard or other approved jointing material.
3.7 COMPACTION OF BEDDING

General
General: After laying of the paving units the sand bedding shall be fully compacted using a vibrating
plate compactor. Compaction needs to continue until lipping between adjoining units is eliminated.
Joint filling: All paving units are to be compacted to design levels prior to the commencement of joint
filling.
3.8 JOINT FILLING

General
General: Spread dry sand over the paving units and fill the joints by brooming. Undertake one or more
passes with the vibrating plate compactor and refill the joints with sand. Repeat the process until the
joints are completely filled.
Timing: Fill joints on the same day that pavers are compacted.
3.9 PROTECTION OF THE WORK

General
Protection: All vehicular and pedestrian traffic shall be prevented from using the pavement until all
compaction and joint filling is completed and all edge restraints are in place.
3.10 CLEANING
Cleaning
General: Leave pavements clean on completion.
Final inspection
From AS 3727 clause 5. Assumes inspection at the end of one year.
Cracking in bound pavements: Width ≤ 1.5 mm.

Subsidence: Offset under 1.5 m length of the design profile, ≤ 15 mm.
Stepping: Between adjacent elements within the pavement area, ≤ 5 mm.
Chipping and spalling to pavement units: Maximum 10 per 100 units with chipped or spalled arrises.

Ponding: Maximum 10 mm deep 15 minutes after rain ceases.

Masonry units: Refill joints as required.
4 SELECTIONS
code or abbreviation of the finish.
4.1 SCHEDULES
Paving schedule
Properties Types
FT 1 FT 2 FT 3
Pavers
Material
Colour
Slip resistance:
- Wet pendulum
- Wet bare foot ramp
- Oil wet ramp
Pavers: Select masonry units and segmental pavers for abrasion resistance, compressive strength, non-slip and weathering
properties. For advice on selection, see CBPI Manual 1. Tabulate if more than one type of unit is used. Consult manufacturers
for detailed specifications, or specify as proprietary items. The manufacturer’s name and product brand name is usually the best
way to specify particular (as distinct from generic) products.
Material: e.g. Clay, cementitious.

PAVEMENT ANCILLARIES SITE
PAVEMENT ANCILLARIES
This worksection is applicable to the installation of channels, kerbs and linemarking.
• Earthwork.
• Show all kerb types and kerb details on the drawings.
• Show all linemarking types and locations on the drawings.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
General: Provide channels, kerbs and linemarking.
Selections: Conform to Execution.
Tolerances
Kerbs and channels conform to the following:
- Absolute level tolerance: ± 10 mm.
- Maximum deviation from design alignment: 25 mm.
- Maximum deviation from a 3 m straightedge placed on horizontal, vertical, or sloping surfaces
required to be straight: 5 mm.
Linemarking to conform to the following:
- The location of markings shall not vary from the locations shown on the drawings by more than
20 mm.

General

have no overlaps.
>
1.3 INTERPRETATION
Definitions
- Relative level tolerance: Maximum deviation from a 3 m straightedge laid on the surface
- Channels and kerbs: Includes all forms of concrete gutters, dish drains, grated drains and
mountable median and barrier kerbing.
1.4 SUBMISSIONS
Linemarking materials
General: Submit NATA Registered Laboratory Test Reports, at least seven days before work is
scheduled to commence, on the quality of the materials, including paint.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
Concrete
Standard: To AS 1379 – Grade N20.
Pavement marking paint
Standard: To AS 4049.1 and AS 4049.3.
See Appendix A of AS 2876 for typical details of sections.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 LINEMARKING
Setting out
General: Set out the work to ensure that all markings are placed in accordance with the drawings.
Surface preparation
Clean dry surface: Pavement markings shall only be applied to clean dry surfaces. Clean the surface
to ensure a satisfactory bond between the markings and wearing surface of the pavement.
Wet weather: Pavement marking shall not be carried out during wet weather or if rain is likely to fall
during the process.
Scabbling: Where raised pavement markers are specified for pavements having a concrete wearing
surface, the full area under each raised pavement marker shall be lightly scabbled to removed fine
mortar material (laitance).
Provision for traffic: Provide for traffic while undertaking the work and protect the pavement markings
until the material has hardened sufficiently so that traffic will not cause damage.
Mixing of paint: All paint shall be thoroughly mixed in its original container before use to produce a
smooth uniform product consistent with the freshly manufactured product.

Application of paint
Longitudinal lines: All longitudinal lines shall be sprayed by an approved self propelled machine. The
two sets of lines forming a one-way or two-way barrier line pattern shall be sprayed concurrently.
Hand spraying: Hand spraying with the use of templates to control the pattern and shape shall be
permitted for transverse lines, symbols, legends, arrows and chevrons.
Paint thickness: The paint shall be applied uniformly and the wet film thickness shall be neither less
than 0.35 mm nor more than 0.40 mm.
Finish; Pavement markings shall be straight or with smooth, even curves where intended. All edges
shall have a clean, sharp cut off. Any marking material applied beyond the defined edge of the
marking shall be removed leaving a neat and smooth marking on the wearing surface of the
pavement.
Tolerances
Longitudinal lines: The lengths of longitudinal lines shall not vary by more than 20 mm from the
lengths shown in AS 1742.2. The widths of longitudinal lines shall not vary by more than 10 mm from
the widths shown in AS 1742.2.
Transverse lines: The lengths and widths of transverse lines shall not vary by more than 10 mm from
the lengths and widths shown in AS 1742.2.
Dimensions: The dimensions of arrows, chevrons, painted medians, painted left turn islands and
speed markings shall not vary by more than 50 mm from the dimensions shown on the drawings or in
AS 1742.2 as appropriate. Arrows and speed markings shall be placed square with the centreline of
the traffic lane.
Removal of pavement markings
General: Remove pavement markings, no longer required, from the wearing surface of pavements
without significant damage to the surface.
3.2 CHANNELS AND KERBS

General
General: Before placing any kerb and/or gutter, the foundation material shall be shaped and
compacted to form a firm base. Other than for kerb and gutter constructed on pavement courses, the
relative compaction, shall be in accordance with the requirements of AS 2876. Where placed on
pavement courses, the foundation shall be compacted to the requirements of the Pavement base and
subbase worksection.
Standard: Kerb and/or gutters may be constructed in fixed forms, by extrusion or by slip forming in
accordance with AS 2876. The foundation, concrete quality, curing and testing details shall be in
accordance with AS 2876.
Tolerances
General: The level at any point on the surface of the gutters shall be within ± 10 mm of design levels.
When a straight edge 3 m long is laid on top of or along the face of the kerb or on the surface of
gutters, the surface shall not vary more than 5 mm from the edge of the straight edge, except at kerb
laybacks, grade changes or curves or at gully pits requiring gutter depression.
Joints
Contraction joints: Formed every 3 m of gutter length for a minimum of 50% of cross sectional area.
The joint shall be tooled 20 mm in depth to form a neat groove of 5 mm minimum width.
Expansion joints: 15 mm in width for the full depth of the kerb and gutter shall be constructed at
intervals not exceeding 15 m and where the gutter abuts against pits, retaining walls and at both sides
of kerb laybacks for vehicular or pedestrian access. Expansion joints shall consist of preformed
jointing material of bituminous fibreboard.
Concrete pavement: Where kerbs and/or gutters are cast adjacent with a concrete pavement the
same type of contraction, construction and expansion joints specified in the concrete base shall be
continued across the kerb and/or gutter.
Backfill
Timing: After the new kerb and gutter has been constructed and not earlier than three days after
placing, the spaces on both sides of the kerb and/or gutters shall be backfilled and reinstated in
accordance with the drawings.
Material: Backfill material behind the kerb shall consist of granular material, free of organic material,
clay and rock in excess of 50 mm diameter.

Compaction: Backfill material behind the kerb shall be compacted in layers not greater than 150 mm
thick, to a relative compaction of 95% when tested in accordance with AS 1289.5.4.1, for standard
compactive effort.
Pavement: Pavement material adjacent to new gutter shall be backfilled in accordance with the
drawings and the Pavement base and subbase worksection.

PILING STRUCTURE
PILING
This worksection is applicable to piling for the support of building structures.
• Concrete reinforcement.
• Concrete in situ.
• Structural steel.
• Piling for detached Class 1 buildings (houses). For residential timber piles, see AS 2870 Appendix G.
• None.
• Design loads and settlement limits should be shown on the drawings.
• Piles to be load tested should be shown on the drawings.
4 GENERAL
4.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
General: Provide installed piles which carry the design loads within the required settlement
limits/acceptance criteria and with pile heads ready for incorporation into the structure.
Retain only if the contractor is responsible for this.
Design
General: Design piles which, when properly installed, meet performance requirements.
See AS 2159 clause 3.1. Show on the drawings the required working loads and settlement limits.
Design responsibility >
Select design by the Principal or design by the Contractor.
Principal responsible for design: In this case the drawings or specification need to show all the determining characteristics of the
system (such as type of system, materials, sizes, depths, installation methods, driving energies, sets). The contractor is
responsible for, and may be required to warrant, only the materials and workmanship.
Contractor responsible for design: Here there are two possibilities:
• (i) Only the design loads are specified, and the contractor is required to nominate the system it proposes to use to meet the
performance requirement; or
• (ii) In addition to the design loads, certain minimum prescriptive requirements are specified, which may include system
type, materials, minimum sizes and depths, protection methods, etc. The contractor is required to design the system
subject to these limitations, and to provide whatever additional information is necessary to define it contractually.
In either of these cases (i) or (ii) add text to cover the following:

PILING STRUCTURE
The contractor should be required to provide, as part of its tender, the additional information required to define the proposed
system characteristics; and in the case of (ii) may be invited to submit alternatives to the specified system.
The contractor should be required to provide a certificate from a professional engineer in relation to design adequacy, as well as
warranting the materials and workmanship.

General
have no overlaps.
4.3 STANDARD
General
Design and performance: To AS 2159.
Retain only if the contractor is responsible for this, in which case check that the contract is appropriate (some forms are for
construct-only).
Materials and installation: To AS 2159.
4.4 INSPECTION
Notice
- Setting out.
- Piles and piling material after delivery to site and before installation.
- Installation of piling.
- Pile heads after preparation.
- Pile load tests.
Concrete piles: Give sufficient notice so that inspection may be made of the following:
- Reinforcement cages after assembly and before installation;
- Excavated shafts, including casings and sockets before placing reinforcement.
- Reinforcement in excavated shafts, before concreting.
- Concreting of piles.
4.5 LOAD TESTS

Based on the “Schedule of Load Test Requirements” in the body of AS 2159. Show on the drawings the location of piles to be
load tested.
In the case of preformed piles, one or more test piles may be specified in order to assess the driving depth and conditions prior
to manufacturing the rest of the piles. Test piles may also be required for load testing. If preliminary test piles are required and
are not shown on the drawings, state the requirements here. Consult the design engineer and do not specify preliminary test
piles or preliminary load tests unless they are necessary. Significant time and cost increases may be incurred.
Preliminary test piles

See AS 2159 clause 4.2.3, for example, on the use of test piles to determine geotechnical strength.

PILING STRUCTURE
Test piles: Install preliminary test piles and carry out preliminary load tests as follows:
- Piles to be installed before commencing other piling:
>
- Piles to be load tested before commencing other piling:
>
Test data
Data: Record the results of the pile load tests.
The intent of AS 2159 is that pile tests be carried out under the direction of a professional engineer. See notes to clauses 8.3.6,
8.4.7 and 8.5.9. This paragraph makes it the contractor’s responsibility.
Failure
General: If a test pile fails to meet the load test requirements, give notice.
Piles
Type: >
Size (mm): >
Number of piles to be load tested: >
Method of installation >
e.g. “Driven cast-in-place piles”, “Bored cast-in-place piles”, “Grout injected piles”, “Precast concrete piles”, “Steel H piles”,
“Steel tube piles”, or if a proprietary system is being adopted, give the proprietor’s name and brand name of the system. Avoid
giving the requirements for pile driving equipment such as hammer type, ram mass, driving energy. This is the contractor’s
affair.
Type of test
Select those required. See AS 2159 clause 8.2.1.
Compression: >
Tension (uplift): >
Lateral load: >
Dynamic tests: >
Integrity tests: >
Loading and measuring system
Minimum loading capacity (kN): >
Minimum pile movement (mm):
- Use a loading and measuring system capable of accommodating the following pile movement,
measured at the pile head or cap:
>
Commencement of loading
Minimum period between installation of the test pile and commencement of the pile test (days):
>
Rate of pile movement (varying AS 2159)
Rate of movement for CRP or CRU tests (mm/min.):
>
Tension (uplift) load test program >
Lateral load test program >
Additional requirements
Maximum differential settlement between any two piles (mm):
>
Method of measuring settlement under load: >
Requirements additional to or different from those specified in AS 2159. Differential settlement, if a criterion, is not covered
there. Add this and other criteria as required.
Acceptance criteria (varying AS 2159) >

PILING STRUCTURE
Pile driving analyser

Test piles to be analysed: >
Delete if not required, or give individual pile numbers. For driven piles, load test requirements may be reduced if a pile driving
analyser is used to assess the hammer performance and pile capacity during installation of the test piles.
Preservative treated timber piles

Testing to AS 2209 Appendix E: >
e.g. “Required”. Delete if not required.
4.6 SUBMISSIONS
Subcontractors
General: Submit name and contact details for the proposed subcontractor specialising in foundation
engineering.
Use this heading where proprietary or specialist piling systems are required. Many general contractors (civil engineering) have
the necessary resources and experience to install preformed piles (steel, timber, precast), sheet piles and bored cast-in-place
piles. Such contractors would usually only subcontract piling requiring special equipment and methods e.g. driven cast-in-place,
grout injected, proprietary systems, bored cast-in-place piles where the size or depth of pile or the ground conditions require
special equipment and methods.
Design
Retain only if the contractor is responsible for this.
Performance: Submit calculations demonstrating that the proposed piling will meet the performance
requirements. Submit the sources of geotechnical information and design parameters used in the
calculations.
Safety: Submit calculations demonstrating that the piles can be safely installed to the specified levels
by the proposed methods, without damaging the piles or adjacent piles or structures.
Tests
Load tests: Submit 2 copies of load test report.
Execution
General: Submit details of proposed piling methods, equipment and sequence.
Jetting and pre-boring: If jetting or pre-boring methods are proposed in conjunction with pile driving,
submit details of the proposed equipment and methods.
Concrete piles: If it is intended that high alumina and early strength cements are to be used, submit
proposals.
Records
General: Submit 2 copies of records of data.
Preservative treated timber piles: Submit treatment records.
4.7 TOLERANCES
Displacement piles
General: Conform to AS 2159 Section 7.3 and to the Tolerances table.
Tolerances table
Property Tolerance criteria: Permitted deviation (mm)
Add specific requirements not covered by AS 2159, or delete the table.

PILING STRUCTURE
5 PRODUCTS
5.1 UNTREATED HARDWOOD PILES

Standard
AS 3818.3 sets out the minimum requirements for visually graded hardwood and softwood piles complying with AS 3818.1.
AS 2209 also applies (cited in AS 2159).
Timber
Species: >
Appendix C to AS 3818.3 provides a list of timber species and their properties. Appendix B to AS 3818.1 provides information
on the natural durability of timber species.
Durability class (to AS 2209): >
1 or 2 only. Classifications differ from those in AS 1604.1 and AS 1720.2.
Strength group (to AS/NZS 2878): >
5.2 PRESERVATIVE TREATED TIMBER PILES

AS 2209 Appendix B lists the standard species brands for timber poles suitable for preservative treatment (both softwoods and
hardwoods).
Standard
Treatment
General: Provide full length preservative treatment and air dry after treatment.
AS 2209 applies (cited in AS 2159).
Timber
Type: >
“Hardwood” or “Softwood”. Softwood is usually limited to domestic and light industrial applications involving relatively light
loading and shallow driving depths. However softwood piles are structurally capable of carrying large loads provided they are
not damaged during installation.
Species: >
If necessary list the timber species, or alternatively give the required minimum durability class and strength group.
Durability class (to AS 2209): >
Classifications differ from those in the AS 1604 series and AS 1720.2.
Strength group (to AS/NZS 2878): >
S1 to S7 for unseasoned timber and SD1 to SD8 for seasoned timber. AS/NZS 2878, Tables 3.1 and 3.2 give the strength
groups of timbers grown in Australia and elsewhere, respectively.
Species branding: >
“Required” or “Not required”. To AS 2209 clause 1.9.
5.3 PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT

Double treatment, first with CCA (copper, chromium and arsenic salts) then with creosote, is recommended for piles in salt or
brackish water, to provide protection against marine borers.
State regulations apply in New South Wales and Queensland. Refer also to Commentary to Preservative treatment – in the
Timber finishes and treatment worksection.
Consult the manufacturer and if needed, vary the charge retention specified for individual piles in AS 2209 Table 5.4.
Refer also to AS 1604.1 Table 1. If necessary other limits may be specified either as a mass of commercial preservative per
3
cubic metre of treatable volume (kg/m ) or, in the case of water-borne preservatives (CCA), as the total active elements
expressed as a percentage of the oven dry wood mass in the analytical zone. The analytical zone is defined as follows:
• Queensland: The inner one third of the sapwood.
• For hardwoods: The outer 20 mm or the full sapwood thickness, whichever is the less.
• For softwoods: The outer 30 mm of the sapwood.

PILING STRUCTURE
Standard
Preservative type
See AS 2159 Supp 1 clause 4.3.1. Obtain manufacturers’ recommendations for preservatives suited to the species of timber
and exposure hazard. AS 1604.1 Tables H5 and H6.1 give retention levels applicable to piling.
Acidic ground water: Creosote.
Alkaline ground water: Waterborne multisalt (CCA).
Identification
Disc location: On the butt end.
Disc format: 3.
5.4 CONCRETE PILES

Performance requirements >
If concrete in piles is to be specified by performance, and the information is not shown on the drawings, provide a schedule of
characteristic requirements selected from Concrete tests schedule – Concrete in situ. Take account of exposure to aggressive
ground conditions.
When determining the required characteristic strength, take account of design for durability in accordance with AS 3600
Section 4. AS 3600 is cited in the BCA. AS 2159 specifies minimum characteristic strengths for precast and prestressed
concrete piles, clause 5.3.7.
Minimum cement content
Generally: 320 kg/m3.
3
For tremie-placed concrete, AS 2159 clause 7.5.5(g) nominates 400 kg/m .
High alumina and high early strength cements
General: Do not use.
Reinforcement
Clearance: Provide spacers on the reinforcement cage to maintain the correct cover. During
installation of reinforcement in uncased holes keep the reinforcement cage clear of the sides of the
hole.
Minimum cover (mm): >
AS 2159 requires 25 mm generally and 40 mm for precast piles exposed to sea water or other corrosive contact. See Tables 6.1
and 6.2. Refer also to AS 3600 clause 4.10. Consider additional cover for bored cast-in-place piles without permanent casing.
5.5 STEEL PILES

Standards
Generally: To AS 4100.
Steel tubes: To AS 1579.
6 EXECUTION
6.1 ADJOINING PROPERTY

Damage
General: If damage is caused to adjoining property, stop piling operations and give notice.
6.2 SETTING OUT

Requirement
General: Peg the position of each pile and establish a grid of recovery pegs to enable the setting out
to be checked.
6.3 INSTALLATION
Inspection
General: Provide facilities necessary for inspection of piling including safe access, lighting and
ventilation.

PILING STRUCTURE
Concrete bored piles

Loose material: Do not allow loose material to fall down pile holes before or during concreting.
Liner: Pack well into position.
See AS 2159 clause 7.4.2, and clause 7.5.3(b).
Piling system
Steel piles:
- Steel grade: >
- Coating system: >
See AS 2159 clause 6.3.5. See AS 2159 clause 6.3.6 on cathodic protection.
Grout injected piles:
- Grout strength: >
Protection
Method of protection against deterioration: >
Specify any requirements if not shown on the drawings e.g. “Wrapping”, “Encasing”, “Cathodic protection”. For sacrificial anodes
see AS 2239 and, on cathodic protection generally, AS 2832.
Pile capacity
Conform to the Pile capacity schedule.
Pile capacity schedule
Pile designation Design loads (kN) Pile size (section) Installation criteria
For piles designed by the principal, show the structural details, working load and founding levels on the drawings, or schedule
the information here. For piles designed by the contractor, give the working loads and other requirements, if any (e.g. minimum
section, minimum penetration).
Design loads: May include vertical loads, horizontal loads, bending moments.
Pile size: e.g.
• For steel piles: Section type, dimensions, mass.
• For concrete piles: Section shape, dimensions, reinforcement, casing.
• For timber piles: Nominal toe size.
Installation criteria: e.g. founding level (or penetration), or (for driven piles) driving resistance measured by set for the specified
hammer and driving energy or by pile driving analyser, or (for bored piles) socket length in rock of specified quality, or (for bored
or grout injected piles) torque measurement on the drill, or any combination of the above.
Tolerances
See AS 2159 clauses 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.4.1 and 7.5.1.
Maximum permissible deviations:
- Cut off level: >
e.g. “± 20 mm”.
- Pile position at cut off level: >
- Straightness: >
Pile position at cut off level and straightness: AS 2159 clause 7.2 gives these as 75 mm and 4% respectively. These may be too
generous for small diameter piles on land and may be too restrictive for large diameter piles or marine piles driven from floating
plant. If so give the required tolerances here.
6.4 PREPARING PILE HEADS

On restoring preservative treatment, see AS 2159 clauses 6.4.4 and 7.2.3.
Requirement
General: Prepare pile heads for incorporation into the structure.

PILING STRUCTURE
Defective material
General: If the pile at or below cut off level, is damaged by driving, or is otherwise unsound, give
notice.
AS 2159 clause 7.2.5.
Concrete piles
General: Roughen the surface at cut-off level. Clean and straighten any projecting reinforcement.
AS 2159 clause 7.2.3.
Steel piles
General: Clean the surfaces to be embedded in concrete. Remove temporary protective treatment
where appropriate, but maintaining it intact for at least 75 mm inside encasing concrete.
6.5 OVERDRIVEN PILES

Notice
General: If the pile is driven below the specified level, give notice.
May be due to over driving or driving resistance being lower than expected. See AS 2159 clause 7.2.4.
6.6 RECORDS OF DATA

Ground level
General: Record the level of the surrounding ground at the time when the pile is installed.
Refer to AS 2159 clause 7.6.
6.7 COMPLETION
Warranties
Some piling contractors offer standard forms of guarantee. If these are unsatisfactory it may be possible to negotiate better
terms. But bear in mind that a guarantee is only as reliable as the firm that gives it. If the piling system is specified prescriptively,
the contractor’s warranty would be merely in terms of faulty materials and workmanship.
General: Submit a warranty to correct faults and make good damage which is caused by the pile
installation or subsequent movement to that part of the superstructure supported on the piling, or to
adjacent property, or to both.
Warranty period: >
e.g. “Two years”.
Warranty sum: >

CONCRETE FORMWORK STRUCTURE
CONCRETE FORMWORK
This worksection is applicable to the production of formwork for concrete work in buildings and associated structures.
Related material may be found in other worksections.
• None.
• Precast concrete.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
General: Provide finishes to formed concrete surfaces which are as follows:
- Appropriate to the importance (visual or physical) of the concrete elements.
- Compatible with following trades and finishes.
Formwork: Design and construct formwork so that the concrete, when cast in the forms, will have the
required:
- Dimensions.
- Location.
- Profile.
- Shape.
- Surface finish.
Allowances: Allow for dimensional changes, deflections and cambers resulting from the following:
- Applied loads.
- Concrete shrinkage and creep.
- Temperature changes.
- The application of prestressing forces (if any).
Design
General: The design of the formwork is the contractor’s responsibility.
This applies to all formwork types, including conventional, proprietary or purpose-made formwork.

General

have no overlaps.
- Concrete reinforcement.
- Concrete cast in situ.
- Concrete finishes.
1.3 STANDARDS
General
Formwork design and construction: To AS 3610.
Reinforced concrete design and construction To AS 3600.
Steel decking including sheet connectors: To AS 2327.
1.4 INTERPRETATIONS
Definitions
- Jump formwork: Incrementally moved formwork.
- Slip formwork: Continuously slipped or moving formwork.
- Table forms: Prefabricated and reuseable formwork systems for slabs and beams.
1.5 TOLERANCES
General
Plumb of elements ≥ 8 m high: 1 in 1000.
Position: Construct formwork so that finished concrete is in conformance with the Position tolerances
table.
Position tolerances table
Surface finish class to AS 3610 1 2 3 4 5
Permissible deviation from designed 10 15 20 25 40
position (mm)
1.6 INSPECTION
Notice
- Completed formwork before concrete placing.
- Evaluation of the finish.
- Used formwork, after cleaning and before reuse.
1.7 SUBMISSIONS – DOCUMENTATION

Design – documentation
Certification: Submit certification by a qualified structural engineer experienced in formwork design
verifying conformance of the design.

Execution – documentation
Calculations: Submit calculations by a qualified structural engineer experienced in formwork design to
show that allowable concrete stresses will not be exceeded if it is proposed that:
- Formwork procedures or loadings differ from the information included in the project documentation.
- Props above a floor coincide with the props below.
- Project documentation does not include formwork shoring or stripping procedures or allowable
loadings from stacked materials.
Certification: Submit certification by a qualified structural engineer experienced in formwork design
and construction for verifying conformance of the completed formwork.
Propping details: Submit details of support propping required for construction loads which exceed
design loads for concrete of that age.
Reshoring: If reshoring is intended, submit proposals.
Shop drawings: Submit formwork shop drawings including details of proposed form linings, form bolt
positions, form facings, release agents and, where applicable, reuse of formwork.
Moveable formwork: Show on formwork drawings for table forms, slip or sump forms the method of
moving the forms and the sequence method. For slip forms show the average rate of movement.
Demonstrate that the proposed procedures will permit the production of concrete of the specified
quality and surface finish.
Stripping multi-storey suspended work: If the requirements of AS 3610 cannot be met, or if shores are
not concentric floor to floor, submit formwork documentation referencing loads and concrete
properties.
Stripping single storey suspended work: If the requirements of AS 3610 cannot be met, give notice.
Surface repair method: If required, submit details of the proposed method before commencing repairs.
Void formers: Submit test certificates to confirm that the formers comply with the following
requirements under laboratory conditions, when placed on damp sand and loaded with a mass of wet
concrete equal to at least the mass of the beams or slabs they are required to support:
- Deflection during placing and compaction of the concrete is less than the span of the beam or slab
divided by 1000.
- Additional deflection between initial set and 7 days does not exceed span/400.
- Collapse and loss of load carrying capacity will occur not more than 48 hours after flooding with
water, creating a void at least 60% of the original depth of the void former.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
Form linings and facings
Compatibility: To be compatible with finishes to be applied to concrete.
Lost formwork
General: Not to contain timber or chlorides and not to impair the structural performance of the
concrete members.
Release agents
Compatibility: To be compatible with finishes to be applied to the concrete.
Void formers
Material: To be cardboard or fibreboard, collapsible on absorption of moisture.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
Cleaning
General: Before placing concrete, remove free water, dust, debris and stains from the forms and the
formed space.

3.2 CONSTRUCTION
General
General: Conform to the Formed surfaces schedule.
Removable bolts: Remove the bolts without causing damage to the concrete.
Bolt hole filling
Cover: Position formwork tie bolts left in the concrete so that the tie does not project to within 50 mm
of finished surface.
Durability: Provide material with durability and colour matching the concrete.
Recessed filling: Fill or plug the hole to 6 mm below the surface.
Corners
Work above ground: Chamfer at re-entrant angles, and fillet at corners.
- Face of bevel 25 mm.
Embedments
General: Fix embedments through formwork to prevent movement, or loss of slurry or concrete, during
concrete placement.
Openings
General: In vertical forms provide form openings or removable panels for inspection and cleaning, at
the base of columns, walls and deep beams.
Access: For thin walls and columns, provide access hatches for placing concrete.
Release agents
Application: Before placing reinforcement, apply a release agent to form linings and facings.
Slip formwork
Provision for inspection: Provide a hanging scaffold below the moving formwork, from which surface
treatment and inspection may be carried out.
Steel decking
Fixing: If sheeting cannot be fixed to structural steel supports with puddle welds, or with welded shear
studs in composite construction, provide details
Steel linings
Rust: Clean off any rust and apply rust inhibiting agent prior to reuse.
Visually important surfaces
General: For concrete of surface finish classes 1, 2 or 3, set out the formwork to give a regular
arrangement of panels, joints, bolt holes, and similar visible elements in the formed surface.
Void formers
Use: Cast designated suspended ground floor slabs and beams on void formers.
Protection: Keep void formers dry until use, place them on a firm level surface and place
reinforcement and concrete with minimum delay.
3.3 COMPLETION
Formwork removal
Extent: Remove formwork, other than steel reinforcement decking, including formwork in concealed
locations, but excepting lost formwork.
Timing: Do not disturb forms until concrete is hardened enough to withstand formwork movements and
removal without damage.
Stripping:
- General: To AS 3600 where it is more stringent than AS 3610.
- Multi-storey work: Provide for stripping without disturbing props supporting succeeding floors.
- Post-tensioned concrete: Remove formwork supporting post-tensioned concrete members only
when sufficient prestress has been added to support the loads.
Loading before stripping
General: Do not erect masonry walls or other brittle elements on beams and slabs while they are still
supported by formwork.

4 SELECTIONS
4.1 SCHEDULES
Surface finish class 1 formwork
Colour control: >
Critical faces of elements: >
Distance between face steps (mm): >
Form face span and direction of span: >
Repairs: Not permitted.
Surface pattern details and accuracy: >
Surface treatment pattern of part of surface: >
Tie rod pattern: >
Surface finish class 2 and class 3 formwork
Colour control: >
Distance between face steps (mm): >
Form face span and direction of span
(class 2 only): >
Liner details, pattern and accuracy: >
Surface treatment of whole: >
Tie rod pattern: >
Dimensional tolerance schedule
Dimension or measurement Location or element Tolerance (mm)
A typical Dimensional tolerance schedule for low rise structural work is noted in the Commentary.
Formed surfaces schedule

Concrete element or Surface finish class to Form lining type Bolt hole filling
surface AS 3610

CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT STRUCTURE
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
This worksection is applicable to the use of reinforcement in concrete for buildings and associated structures. Reference to fibre
reinforcement is included as it relates to Portland cement based concretes.
• Concrete post-tensioned.
There are no directly related NATSPEC worksections.
• Fibres used in the production of fibre cement sheeting products.
• Shotcrete.
• Show on the drawings the required reinforcement including the location, type, size and spacing of bars, any special
requirement for types of supports, and the concrete cover. Show the location and minimum length for lapped splices.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
General: Design and provide reinforcement which is as follows:
- Enhances the concrete works.
- Performs appropriately for strength, serviceability and durability.

General
have no overlaps.
- Concrete in situ.

1.3 STANDARDS
General
Tolerances
Fabrication and fixing: To AS 3600.
1.4 INSPECTION
Notice
- Cores and embedments fixed in place.
- Reinforcement fixed in place, with formwork completed.
1.5 SUBMISSIONS
Changes: If changes are proposed to reinforcement show on the drawings, submit detail.
Damaged galvanizing: If repair is required, submit proposals to AS/NZS 4680 Appendix E.
Mechanical splices: If mechanical bar splices are proposed or required, submit details and test
certificates for each size and type of bar to be spliced.
Provision for concrete placement: If spacing or cover of reinforcement does not comply give notice.
Splicing: If splicing not documented is proposed, submit details.
Welding: Give notice before welding reinforcement.
Type-tests: Submit type-test reports to verify conformance for each reinforcement type as follows:
- Strength and ductility: To AS 3600 Table 6.2.1.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
Fibre reinforcement
Reference: CIA CPN35.
Protective coating
General: For concrete elements containing protective coated reinforcement, provide the same coating
type to all that element’s reinforcement and embedded ferrous metal items, including tie wires, stools,
spacers, stirrups, plates and ferrules, and protect other embedded metals with a suitable coating.
Epoxy coating: To be high build, high solids chemically resistant coating.
- Thickness: 200 µm minimum.
Galvanizing: To AS/NZS 4680:
- Sequence: If fabrication is to occur after galvanizing, submit proposals for galvanizing repair and
coating of cut ends.
- Zinc-coating (minimum): 600 g/m2.
Reference CIA CPN17.
Steel reinforcement
- Ductility grade: Class N.
Surface condition: Free of loose mill scale, rust, oil, grease, mud or other material which would reduce
the bond between the reinforcement and concrete.

AS/NZS 4671 considers only 3 strength grades 250 MPa, 300 MPa and 500 MPa, and 3 ductility classes L (low), N (normal)
and E (seismic). The previous 400 MPa (bars) and 450 MPa (mesh) grades have been replaced.
See AS 3600 clause 19.2 for materials and construction requirements.
Tie wire
General: To be annealed steel 1.25 mm diameter (minimum).
External and corrosive applications: Galvanized.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 CONSTRUCTION
Dowels
Fixing: If a dowel has an unpainted half, embed this in the concrete placed first.
Tolerances:
- Alignment: 2 mm in 300 mm.
- Location: ± half the diameter of the dowel.
Grade: 250 N.
Amend this default if required.
Supports
General: Provide proprietary concrete, metal or plastic supports to reinforcement in the form of chairs,
spacers, stools, hangers and ties, as follows:
- To be adequate to withstand construction and traffic loads.
- With a protective coating if they are ferrous metal extending to the surface of the concrete, or are
used with galvanized or zinc-coated reinforcement.
Minimum spacing:
- Bars: ≤ 60 diameters.
- Fabric: ≤ 750 mm.
Supports over membranes: Prevent damage to waterproofing membranes or vapour barriers. Place a
metal or plastic plate under each support.
For special conditions pieces of stainless steel reinforcement welded to standard reinforcement may be used as a support
medium in place of the standard accessories
Projecting reinforcement
General: If ‘starter’ or other bars project beyond reinforcement mats or cages, through formwork or
from cast concrete, provide a plastic protective caps to each bar until it is incorporated into
subsequent work.
Tying
General: Secure the reinforcement against displacement by tying at intersections with either wire ties,
or clips. Bend the ends of wire ties away from nearby faces of forms so that the ties do not project into
the concrete cover.
Beams: Tie stirrups to bars in each corner of each stirrup. Fix other longitudinal bars to stirrups at 1 m
maximum intervals.
Bundled bars: Tie bundled bars together so that the bars are in closest possible contact. Provide tie
wire at least 2.5 mm diameter at centres ≤ 24 times the diameter of the smallest bar in the bundle.
Columns: Secure longitudinal column reinforcement to all ties at every intersection.
Mats: For bar reinforcement in the form of a mat, secure each bar at alternate intersections
Tolerances: To AS 3600 Section 19.
AS 3600 clause 13.2 specifies requirements for mechanical splices. Determine whether limits on non elastic deformation (slip)
are also needed.
Welding
General: If welding of reinforcement is proposed, provide details.

3.2 COMPLETION
Unencased reinforcement
General: If ‘starter bars’ and other items project from cast concrete for future additions and are
exposed to the weather, provide details of protection.

CONCRETE POST-TENSIONED STRUCTURE
CONCRETE POST-TENSIONED
This worksection is applicable to prestressed concrete elements that are post-tensioned on site as part of the concrete
construction process. It anticipates the possibility of contractor design.
• It is important that the structural drawings either define performance criteria (loading, deflection, exposure) for anticipated
contractor design or detail fully the work. If the former is adopted, independent certification by a professional engineer of
the design and documentation, and of the erected framing, are appropriate.
• Show on the drawings any further special requirements.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
Provide post-tensioned concrete as follows:
- In conformance with the performance criteria nominated.
- Integrated into the building.
- Suitable for the fixing to it of flooring, linings and cladding.
- Independently designed and documented.
- Independently certified by a professional engineer for the design and the erected framing.
Delete non applicable wording from the text. Delete the first, fourth and last points if the work is fully documented in the contract
documents.
Design
General: Design and provide post-tensioning in conformance with the Structural design actions
schedule in General requirements and the following:
Exposure classification: >
Deflection: Long term incremental deflection shall not exceed span divided by:
>
Delete this entire subclause if the works have been fully documented and do not require contractor design.

General

have no overlaps.
1.3 STANDARD
General
Post-tensioning: To AS 3600.
AS 3600 is cited in the BCA for structural sufficiency and fire resistance. See AS 3600 clause 19.3.
1.4 INTERPRETATION
Definition
- Grouted pre-packed aggregate: Concrete made by grout intrusion into pre-packed aggregate.
The Definitions subclause can be augmented to suit the project or deleted if not required.
1.5 INSPECTION
Notice
- Tendons fixed in place.
- Commencing initial or incremental stressing.
- Stressing tendons.
- Grouting tendons.
1.6 TESTS
General
General: Sample, test and assess the concrete for compliance.
Frequency of sampling: Spread site sampling evenly throughout the pour. For each prestressed
element take at least 3 samples for 3 day, 7 day and 28 day testing, at the rate of at least one sample
per 2 batches, from well distributed locations including the anchorage area. Cure 3 day and 7 day
samples by the same method as the prestressed element.
Grout for tendon ducts
Minimum requirements for grout are specified in the clause Grout. Grout mixes for post-tensioned tendon ducts are usually
determined by the contractor. Performance and testing requirements, if any, may be specified here if not shown on the
drawings.
Compressive strength (75 mm cube) (MPa): >
- Sampling frequency: >
- Number of specimens per sample: >
- Acceptance criterion: >
Bleeding:
- Test method: >
e.g. “Use a metal or glass cylinder approximately 100 mm in diameter filled with grout to a depth of approximately 100 mm and
covered to prevent evaporation”.
- Acceptance criterion: >
e.g. “Bleeding must not exceed 2% of the volume 3 hours after mixing and 4% of the volume at any time. The separated water
must be reabsorbed after 24 hours.”
Shrinkage (% at 24 hours): >
- Test method: >

1.7 SAMPLES
Materials
Tendon materials: If manufacturer’s certification of compliance with AS 3600 is not available, submit
samples for testing.
1.8 SUBMISSIONS
Subcontractor
Details: Submit the proposed system and the name and contact details of the post-tensioner.
Design
Calculations: Submit calculations of tendon jacking forces, extensions and losses for each stressing
stage. Submit amount of draw-in expected in seating anchorages, and value of friction wobble
coefficient and friction curvature coefficient for tendons and duct-forming material.
Substantiating field data may also be required.
Shop drawings
General: Submit shop drawings of post-tensioned work showing details of the proposed system,
14 days before delivery.
- Profiles, sizes and details of tendons, proprietary anchorages, ducts, duct formers, splicing,
sheathing, end block reinforcement and other associated components.
- Stressing requirements including sequence of stressing, jacking forces, tendon elongations, gauge
pressures, and the basis of assumed loss calculations.
- Number, size and position of grout openings, vents and drain holes in the ducts.
- Proposed fabrication, handling and fixing methods for tendons and sheathing.
Tests
Grout: Before grouting submit certified test results for compressive strength and shrinkage of the
proposed grout mix.
Anchorages: Submit performance test certificates for each type and size of anchorage and coupler.
If not available, ensure that the steel to concrete bearing surface is big enough to keep bearing stresses within those allowed in
AS 3600 clause 12.3.
High tensile steel: Submit test certificates.
Tendons: Submit test certificate.
Materials
Grout: Submit proposed grout mix including admixtures, if any.
Certificate of compliance: Submit the manufacturer's certificate of compliance with the relevant
Australian standard for each delivery of prestressing steel and each delivery of anchorage
components.
Grouted pre-packaged aggregate: Submit proposed details including aggregate grading and grout
materials and proportions.
Epoxy grout: If required, submit proposed formulation.
Execution
Equipment: Submit details of proposed gauging, stressing and grouting equipment. Submit current
calibration certificates for tensioning and tension measuring equipment.
Records
Post-tensioning: Record and submit the following data:
- Concrete mix.
- Details of placing and curing including dates.
- Details of placing of reinforcement and tendons.
- Dates of post-tensioning operations.
- Name of operator.
- Type and identification numbers of equipment used.
- Identification of tendons.

- Stressing method (single or double end, monostrand or multistrand).

- Calculated tendon extension at each stressing stage.
- Initial force or pressure where tendons are marked for measurement of elongations.
- Final force or pressure and elongation on completion of tensioning.
- Typical certified stress-strain curves for each 10 coils of wire or strand, or each parcel of tendon
materials.
- Elongation remaining after release of jacks.
- Tendon breakage.
- Calibration records for gauges, dynamometers and jacks.
Grouting: For each duct grouted, record and submit a record identifying the duct and tendons, giving
the stressing and grouting dates, and showing the composition of the grout (water:cement ratio,
admixtures), grout tests, and details of grouting (including pumping or supply interruptions, topping
up).
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GROUT
Grout properties
Maximum shrinkage: 1% by volume after 24 hours.
Maximum water:cement ratio: 0.45 (by weight).
Minimum compressive strength (75 mm cube): 30 MPa at 28 days.
Grout materials
Fine aggregate: Do not include in the grout for ducts, unless gross inside cross-sectional area of ducts
exceeds 5x tendon cross-sectional area, in which case fine aggregate may be added.
- Grade: Passing 1.18 mm sieve.
Admixtures: Do not provide admixtures containing chlorides, nitrates, sulphides or sulphites. Include
an anti-bleed additive.
Cement type to AS 3972: SL, free from calcium chloride and less than one month old from date of
manufacture.
Fly ash: Maximum 10% of cement by weight.
Epoxy grout
Type: Commercial epoxy formulation of compressive strength exceeding 40 MPa.
2.2 DUCTS
Material
Robustness: Ducts shall have sufficient strength to retain their shape, resist damage during
construction, and prevent entrance of cement paste and water from the concrete. Material to be left in
place must not cause deterioration or electrolytic action.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 TENDONS
Tendons
General: Provide post-tensioning tendons, anchorages, ducts, supports, grout and anchorage
protection.
The technical requirements for prestressed tendons are generally covered by AS 3600 clause 19.3. Depending on the
application you may need to specify other matters such as shop drawings, calculations, tests, certificates, prestressing records
etc.
Standards: To AS 1310, AS 1311 and AS 1313.
Care: Do not weld tendons, nor expose them to sparks, ground current or excessive temperatures.

Minimum concrete cover: >

See AS 3600 clause 4.10 or AS 3735 clause 4.4 as applicable.
Other requirements: >
Tendons and anchorages: On completion of stressing and grouting, permanently protect anchorage
parts and parts of tendons anchored to them. Provide at least 40 mm of cover over the cut tendons
when the recesses are concreted. Keep free of foreign matter end anchorages which are to be
protected.
Such as loose rust, grease, oil and paint.
Grout fittings and ducts: For bonded construction, protect from collapse and other damage.
Conformance: Provide tendons in conformance with the Tendon schedule.
Tendon schedule
Structural element Tendon material Tendon size (mm)
It is preferable for the tendon material and size to be shown on the drawings. Only if it is not, it may be scheduled here (do not
duplicate). If it is delete this clause/schedule.
Tendon material: Specify the type and grade of strand, wire or bar. See AS 1310, AS 1311 and AS 1313.
Tendon size: State the number and nominal diameter of strands, wires or bars in each tendon.
3.2 POST-TENSIONING EQUIPMENT

Gauges
Maximum error in pressure indication: 1% of the maximum scale value.
Calibration of gauges and dynamometers
Period: Calibrate at intervals not exceeding 6 months.
Dynamometers are sensitive to rough handling and may require more frequent calibration.
Jacks
Calibration: Calibrate and measure friction losses at least once a year, or after re-sealing, matched
with the gauge calibration.
3.3 POST-TENSIONING
Sheathing
General: If ducts are formed with sheaths, provide sheathing material strong enough to transfer the
tendon stresses into the body of the concrete.
Stiffening: If tendons are to be installed after concreting, provide temporary stiffening within the sheath
such that the duct shape and profile are maintained during concreting. After concreting remove the
temporary stiffening and prove the duct using a suitable gauge before installing the tendon.
Splicing
Arrangement: Enclose splices in housing long enough to permit the necessary movements. Give
spliced strands the same lay to prevent rotation.
Protection
Unbonded tendons: Provide galvanized or lead coated steel sheathing for lengths of tendon required
to be unbonded, such that the tendon is permanently protected from corrosion.
Stressing
Procedure: Apart from light initial stressing to avoid early shrinkage cracking, do not commence
stressing until the concrete has demonstrably attained the required transfer strength. When more than
one wire or strand is stressed simultaneously, stress them equally. Do not leave tendons partially
stressed.
Stressing sequence: >

Preferably show on the drawings.

Cutting tendons
Timing: Do not cut tendons until 7 days after grouting.
3.4 GROUTING DUCTS

Preparation
Pressure test the ducts at the grout pressure using water before grouting, and rectify leaks/repair
holes. Remove water from ducts immediately after slab curing has started, using oil-free compressed
air. Keep ducts dry until grouting starts.
Grouting
Timing: Grout within 48 hours of completion of acceptance of stressing.
Procedure: Prevent damage to grout vents and fittings during grouting. Do not use manually powered
grouting machines. Completely fill the duct during grouting. Inject grout until grout flows from vents
without air bubbles. Close vents as they fill, progressively in the direction of flow. If there is a blockage
or interruption, completely flush grout from the duct using water.
Temperature: Maintain concrete around grouted tendons at ≥ 5°C for at least 3 days after grouting.
External tendons: Encase external tendons in dense concrete designed to minimise shrinkage
cracking, and secured to the main concrete.
If encasing of external tendons is required, provide details of proposed procedure and materials.
Grout openings
Provision: Provide grout openings, vents and drain holes as necessary, including at each end, and at
high points except where tendon curvature is small and tendon is relatively level.
Removal: Remove protruding vents and drains after the grout has set and make good to match the
adjacent surfaces.
Maximum spacing: 15 m.
Grout pressure
Duct sealing: Seal the duct on completion of grouting at a pressure ≥ 210 kPa. Fit pressure tap
connections to each duct for this purpose.

CONCRETE IN SITU STRUCTURE
CONCRETE IN SITU
This worksection is applicable to the use of in situ concrete for building and associated structures. It is the central and core
worksection for concrete construction specification, and will almost invariably be used in conjunction with a combination of the
related concrete worksections. In the event that related work is so limited as to not warrant a separate worksection parts of
related worksections that are applicable should be incorporated into this worksection. For example, surface finishes for a slab
on ground may require specification only of a class of finish for formed (edge) surfaces and a flatness class and finish type for
the unformed surface. Similarly, formwork may be limited to simple forms.
• Concrete formwork.
• Concrete finishes.
• Concrete post-tensioning.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
General: Provide cast in situ concrete that:
- Can be readily placed into corners and angles of forms, and around reinforcement without
segregation
- Is not porous, cracked or honeycombed.
- Has acceptable plastic settlement cracking.
- Has acceptable levels of bleed water.

General requirements
have no overlaps.

- Concrete formwork.
1.3 STANDARDS
General
Concrete structures for retaining liquids: To AS 3735.
1.4 INTERPRETATIONS
Definitions
- Assessment:
. Production: An assessment procedure for concrete specified by strength grade, carried out by the
supplier on concrete produced by a specific supplying plant and based on the statistical
assessment of standard compressive strength tests on concrete.
. Project: An assessment procedure for concrete specified by strength grade, specified at the
customer’s option, which provides additional test data for the statistical assessment of concrete
supplied to a specific project.
- Concrete class:
. Normal: Concrete which is specified primarily by a standard compressive strength grade and
otherwise in accordance with AS 1379 clause 1.6.3.
. Special: Concrete which is specified to have certain properties or characteristics different from, or
additional to, those of normal-class concrete and otherwise in accordance with AS 1379 clause
1.6.4.
If special class concrete is nominated for the project, specify the relevant parameters in the Properties table – performance.
- Batch: A quantity of concrete containing a fixed quantity of ingredients and produced in a discrete
operation.
- Early age: A mean compressive strength at 7 days exceeding the values shown in AS 1379 Table 2.
- Joint:
. Construction: A joint provided to suit construction sequence with reinforcement continuous across
the joint.
. Contraction: An unreinforced joint with a bond-breaking coating separating the concrete joint
surfaces.
. Control: A weakened plane contraction joint created by forming a groove, extending at least one
quarter the depth of the section, either by using a grooving tool, by sawing, or by inserting a
premoulded strip.
. Expansion: An unreinforced joint with the joint surfaces separated by a compressible filler.
. Isolation: A joint without keying, dowelling, or reinforcement, which imposes no restraint on
movement.
Contraction joint: Movement in the plane of the joint may be restrained by keying or dowels. Bond breaking material may include
curing compound, bitumen emulsion or form oil.
Expansion joint: Movement in the plane of the joint may be restrained by dowels.
Isolation joint: Joints between cladding panels are of this type.
.
- Outdoor temperature: The air temperature at the time of mixing and the predicted or likely air
temperature at any time during the 48 hours following a concrete pour.

- Sample: A portion of the material used in the works, or to take such a sample.
- Specimen: A portion of a sample which is submitted for testing.
- Weather:
. Cold: Surrounding outdoor shade temperature < 10°C.
. Hot: Surrounding outdoor shade temperature > 32°C.
1.5 INSPECTION
Notice
- Base or subgrade before covering.
- Membrane or film underlay installed on the base.
- Completed formwork, and reinforcement, cores, fixings and embedded items fixed in place.
- Surfaces or elements to be concealed in the final work before covering.
1.6 TESTS
General
Sampling and testing of specimens: Submit test certificates, and also retain results on site.
If this is important to the specification for the project, insert the following text.
Material tests: Before supplying concrete submit test certificates based on samples from the most recent production or from
stockpiles for the project, for the materials and properties listed in the Material tests schedule. Submit additional certificates at
the scheduled frequency during the course of the works.
Construction tests
Frequency: Conform to AS 1379. For each property test at least two specimens from each sample.
If it is intended to include the Tests table in Selections, add after AS 1379 “and to the Tests table”
Concrete testing methods
Sampling, identification and testing: Sample the concrete on site, at the point of discharge from the
agitator to AS 1012.
Drying shrinkage: Test 3 specimens of each type of concrete every 3 months or every 3000 m3 placed
concrete. Base assessments on the average of the 3 specimens test results. Conduct 2 sets of tests
on trial mixes.
Refer also to Instruction text Shrinkage sensitive structures below. Delete reference to drying shrinkage here if Tests table is
being included and nominated frequency details there.
Slump: Test at least one sample from each batch before placing concrete from that batch in the work.
Strength grade/Characteristic compressive strength: Spread the site sampling evenly throughout the
pour.
- Sampling frequency: To the Project assessment strength grade sampling table.
- Specimen size: Nominally 200 x 100 mm diameter but, if aggregate size exceeds 20 mm, nominally
300 x 150 mm diameter.
Control tests
General: Determine strength using site cured specimens.
Embedded pressure pipes
General: If leak tests have not been successfully completed, do not embed pipes.
Liquid retaining structures
Testing for liquid tightness (to AS 3735): XXX
Production assessment
If you wish to receive production assessment information from the supplier, insert the following text:
Concrete testing
Production information: Verify conformance in accordance with AS 1379 clause 6.4.3.

Project assessment
If it is intended to include the Test table, add here “and in conformance with the Tests table”.
Test authority
General: Concrete supplier or NATA registered laboratory.
Test records
Records and reports: To AS 1012.
Project assessment strength grade sampling table
Number of batches for each Minimum number of samples
type and grade of concrete per
day Columns, loadbearing wall and Other elements per day
post tensioned slab/beam
elements per batch
1 1 1
2-5 1 2
6-10 1 3
11-20 1 4
each additional 10 1 1 additional
1.7 SHRINKAGE SENSITIVE STRUCTURES

Concrete performance
Drying shrinkage (maximum including tolerances): 650 µm for concrete up to and including strength
grade 32; 700 µm for higher strength grades.
Nomination of drying shrinkage of less than 1000 µm after 56 days of drying means that the concrete is technically a special
class. If no other special grade properties are nominated, include the drying shrinkage requirement here, otherwise delete here
and include in the Properties table – special class.
- Duration of air drying: 56 days
1.8 COLOURED CONCRETE

Standard
General: To AS 3610
Manufacture
General: Using the same mix and method to be used in the works, supply sample blocks of concrete
to be coloured with mineral oxides.
- Number: 4.
- Size (nominal): 300 x 300 x 50 mm.
1.9 SAMPLES AND SUBMISSIONS

Product conformity
- Certificate of conformity by a JAS-ANZ accredited third party:
. (e.g. Reinforcement: To AS/NZS 4671).
- Declaration of conformity by an ISO 9001 quality management system certified supplier:
. (e.g. Premixed concrete: Production assessment to AS 1379).
- Mark of conformity of a JAS-ANZ accredited third party applied to the product:
. (e.g. Milled radiata pine products: Plantation Timber Certification).
- Report by a NATA accredited laboratory describing tests and giving results which demonstrate that
the product conforms.
Design documentation
Loading: Submit details of proposed construction systems, loads and procedures, including propping
and re-shoring.

Construction proposals
Concrete: Submit proposals for mixing, placing, finishing and curing concrete including the following:
- Addition of water at the site.
- Changes to the plastic concrete mix.
- Curing and protection methods.
- Curing period for low-pressure steam curing, if proposed.
- Cutting or displacing reinforcement, or cutting hardened concrete.
- Handling, placing, compaction and finishing methods and equipment, including pumping.
- Placing under water.
- Sequence and times for concrete pours, and construction joint locations and relocations.
- Site storage, mixing and transport methods and equipment, if applicable.
- Temperature control methods.
Cutting or coring: If cutting or coring of hardened concrete is proposed, provide details.
Loading: If proposed construction systems, loads and procedures, including propping and re-shoring,
differ from submitted design documentation, submit details.
Sequence of pours: If sequential pouring of slab segments is proposed, provide details.
Sawn joints: Submit proposed methods, timing and sequence of sawing joints.
Multi-storey work: If any of the following occurs, submit details:
- Formwork procedures or construction loadings differ from the information included in the project
documentation.
- Project documentation does not include formwork shoring or stripping procedures or allowable
loadings from stacked materials.
Props: Props above a floor do not coincide with the props below.
Delete if not applicable.
Product proposals
If it is proposed to include the Material tests table, insert the following clause here.
General: Submit details of proposed sources of materials and type-test reports to verify conformance with the Material tests
table.
Concrete mixes: Submit details, for each grade and type of concrete including proposed use of
special-purpose cement types.
General purpose cements:
• Type GP – general purpose Portland.
• Type GB – general purpose blended.
Special purpose cements.
• Type HE – high early strength.
• Type LH – low heat.
• Type SR – Sulphate resisting.
• Type SL – Shrinkage limited.
Curing compounds: If it is proposed to use a liquid membrane-forming curing compound submit the
following information:
- Certified test results for water retention to AS 3799 Appendix B.
It is likely that PVA-based products will not comply with water retention requirements.
- Evidence of compatibility with concrete, and with applied finishes including toppings and render, if
any, including methods of obtaining the required adhesion.
- For visually important surfaces, evidence that an acceptable final surface colour will be obtained.
Pre-mixed supply
Delivery docket: For each batch, submit a docket listing the information required by AS 1379, and the
- For special class performance concrete, specified performance and type of cement binder.
- For special class prescription concrete, details of mix, additives, and type of cement binder.

- Method of placement and climate conditions during pour.

- Name of concrete delivery supervisor.
- Project assessment carried out each day.
- The amount of water, if any, added at the site.
- The concrete element or part of the works for which the concrete was ordered, and where it was
placed.
- The total amount of water added at the plant and the maximum amount permitted to be added at the
site.
Subcontactors: Submit names and contact details of proposed pre-mixed concrete suppliers, and
alternative source of supply in the event of breakdown of pre-mixed or site mixed supply.
Construction documentation
Cores, fixings and embedded items: If the locations of these items are not shown or are shown
diagrammatically, submit shop drawings showing the proposed locations, clearances and cover.
Indicate proposed repositioning of reinforcement.
2 EXECUTION
2.1 POLYMERIC FILM UNDERLAY

Standard
Vapour barriers and damp-proofing membranes: To AS 2870.
Location
General: Under slabs on ground including integral ground beams and footings, provide a vapour
barrier or, in areas prone to rising damp or salt attack, a damp-proofing membrane.
Provision of a vapour barrier for external slabs on ground prevents water loss to the subgrade and has the potential to reduce
slab curling at edges and corners.
Installation
General: Lay over the base, lap joints at least 200 mm and seal the laps and penetrations with
waterproof adhesive tape. Face the laps away from the direction of concrete pour. Take the underlay
up vertical faces past the damp proof course where applicable, and tape fix at the top. Patch or seal
punctures or tears before pouring concrete. Cut back as required after concrete has gained strength
and forms have been removed.
Base preparation
General: According to base type, as follows:
- Concrete working base: Remove projections above the plane surface, and loose material.
- Graded prepared subgrade: Blind with sufficient sand to create a smooth surface free from hard
projections. Wet the sand just before laying the underlay.
2.2 CONCRETE MATERIALS

Bagged cement
- Age: Less than 6 months old.
- Type: GP.
Chemical admixtures
Contents: Free of chlorides, fluorides and nitrates.
2.3 CONCRETE
General
General: Provide concrete in conformance with the following:
- The Properties table – performance.
- The Properties table – prescriptive.

Elapsed delivery time

General: Ensure that the elapsed time between the wetting of the mix and the discharge of the mix at
the site is in conformance with the Elapsed delivery time table. Do not discharge below 10°C or
above 32°C.
Elapsed delivery time table
Concrete temperature at time of discharge (°C) Maximum elapsed time (hours)
10 – 24 2.00
24 – 27 1.50
27 – 30 1.00
30 – 32 0.75
NOTE: AS 1379 nominates a limit of 90 minutes which can be waived by agreement between the customer and supplier, if, after
that period, the consistency of the concrete is such that it can be properly placed without the addition of any more water to the
mixer.
Pre- mixed supply

Addition of water: If water is to be added, comply with AS 1379 Section 4.2.3.
Transport: Mode must prevent segregation, loss of material and contamination of the environment,
and must not adversely affect placing or compaction.
Site mixed supply
Emergencies: If mixing by hand is carried out, provide details.
Plant: Mix concrete in a plant located on the construction site.
2.4 CORES, FIXINGS AND EMBEDDED ITEMS

Adjoining elements
General: For adjoining elements to be fixed to or supported on the concrete, provide for the required
fixings. If required, provide for temporary support of adjoining elements during construction of the
concrete.
Protection
General: Grease threads. Protect embedded items against damage.
Compatibility: Ensure inserts, fixings and embedded items are compatible with each other, with the
reinforcement and with the concrete mix to be used.
Corrosion: If in external or exposed locations, galvanize anchor bolts and embedded fixings.
Structural integrity
General: Fix cores and embedded items to prevent movement during concrete placing. In locating
cores, fixings and embedded items, reposition but do not cut reinforcement, and maintain cover to
reinforcement.
Tolerances
General: Maximum deviation from correct positions:
- Anchor bolt groups for structural steel: To AS 4100.
- Cores and embedded items generally: 10 mm.
- Other fixing bolts: 3 mm.
2.5 CONCRETE WORKING BASE

Finish
Membrane support: Wood float finish or equivalent.
Installation
General: Lay over the base or subgrade and screed to the required level.
Surface tolerance
Deviation: 5 mm from the correct plane; 5 mm from a 2 m straight edge.

2.6 PLACING AND COMPACTION

Compaction
Methods: Use immersion and screed vibrators accompanied by hand methods as appropriate to
remove air bubbles and to fully compact the mix.
Vibrators: Do not allow vibrators to come into contact with partially hardened concrete, reinforcement
or items including pipes and conduits embedded in concrete. Do not use vibrators to move concrete
along the forms. Avoid over-vibration that may cause segregation.
Horizontal transport
General: Use suitable conveyors, clean chutes, troughs or pipes.
Placing
General: Use placing methods which avoid segregation and loss of concrete, and which minimise
plastic settlement. Maintain a generally vertical and plastic concrete edge at faces of a pour.
Layers: Place concrete in layers ≤ 300 mm thick, such that each succeeding layer is compacted before
previous layer has taken initial set.
Placing records
General: Keep on site and make available for inspection a log book recording each placement of
concrete, including the following:
- Date.
- Specified grade and source of concrete.
- Slump measurements.
- The portion of work.
- Volume placed.
Rain
General: Do not expose concrete to rain before it has been placed and set.
Time between adjacent pours
General: Conform to the Minimum time delay schedule.
Vertical elements
General: In vertical elements, limit the free fall of concrete to 1500 mm per 100 mm element thickness,
up to a maximum free fall of 3000 mm, using enclosed vertical chutes or access hatches in forms.
2.7 PLACING IN COLD WEATHER

Cement
General: Do not use high alumina cement.
Placing
Concrete: Maintain the temperature of the freshly mixed concrete in conformance with the Cold
weather placing table.
Formwork and reinforcement: Before and during placing maintain temperature at ≥ 5°C.
Severe weather
General: If severe weather conditions are predicted, use high early strength cement.
Temperature control
General: Heat the concrete materials, other than cement, to the minimum temperature necessary to
ensure that the temperature of the placed concrete is within the limits specified.
Admixtures: Do not use calcium chloride, salts, chemicals or other material in the mix to lower the
Frozen materials: Do not allow frozen materials or materials containing ice to enter the mixer, and
keep free of frost and ice any forms, materials, and equipment coming in contact with the concrete.
Maximum temperature of water: 60°C when it is placed in the mixer.
Plastic concrete: Prevent plastic concrete from freezing, without using salts or chemicals.

Cold weather placing table

Outdoor air temperature Temperature of concrete
Minimum Maximum
≥ 5°C 10°C 32°C
< 5°C 18°C 32°C
2.8 PLACING IN HOT WEATHER

Handling
General: Prevent premature stiffening of the fresh mix and reduce water absorption and evaporation
losses. Mix, transport, place and compact the concrete in conformance with the Elapsed delivery
time schedule.
Placing
Concrete: Maintain the temperature of the freshly mixed concrete in conformance with the Hot
Formwork and reinforcement: Before and during placing maintain temperature at ≤ 35°C.
Severe weather
General: If surrounding outdoor shade temperature > 38°C, do not mix concrete.
Temperature control
General: Select one or more of the following methods of maintaining the specified temperature of the
placed concrete:
- Cool the concrete using liquid nitrogen injection before placing.
- Cover the container in which the concrete is transported to the forms.
- Spray the coarse aggregate using cold water prior to mixing.
- Use chilled mixing water.
Hot weather placing table
Concrete element Temperature limit
Normal concrete in footings, beams, columns, walls and slabs 32°C
Concrete in sections ≥ 1 m in all dimensions except for concrete of 27°C
strength 40 MPa or greater, in sections exceeding 600 mm in thickness
2.9 PLACING UNDER WATER

General
Condition: If placing in the dry is practicable by pumping or other means of dewatering, do not place
under water.
Minimum cement content for the mix: Increase by 25%.
Method
General: If required, submit proposals.
2.10 CURING
General
Concrete strength: If the strength of concrete required by AS 3600 clauses 4.4 or 4.5 has not been
achieved, extend the curing period until strength is achieved.
Curing: Cure continuously from initial set until the total cumulative number of days or fractions of days,
during which the air temperature in contact with the concrete is above 10°C, is at least the following,
unless accelerated curing is adopted:
- Fully enclosed internal surfaces/Early age concrete: 3 days.
- Other surfaces concrete: 7 days.
End of curing period: Prevent rapid drying out at the end of the curing period.

Protection: Maintain at a reasonably constant temperature with minimum moisture loss, during the
curing period.
Cold weather curing
General: Maintain concrete temperature between 10 – 20°C for curing period.
Curing compounds
Application: Provide a uniform continuous flexible coating without visible breaks or pinholes, which
remains unbroken at least for the required curing period after application.
Substrates: Do not use wax-based or chlorinated rubber-based curing compounds on surfaces
forming substrates to applied finishes, concrete toppings and cement-based render.
Visually important surfaces: Apply curing compounds to produce uniform colour on adjacent surfaces.
Hot weather curing
Curing compounds: Do not use curing compounds.
Protection: Select a protection method as applicable.
- If the concrete temperature exceeds 25°C or if not protected against drying winds, protect the
concrete using a fog spray application of aliphatic alcohol evaporation retardant.
- If temperature of surrounding air is > 35°C, protect from wind and sun until the concrete can be
covered.
- Immediately the concrete has set, cover exposed surfaces using an impervious membrane, or
hessian kept wet, until curing begins.
Water curing
General: If water is used, pond or continuously sprinkle for the required curing period.
2.11 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS

Location
General: Do not relocate or eliminate construction joints, or make construction joints not shown on the
drawings. If emergency construction joints are made necessary by unforeseen interruptions to the
concrete pour, submit a report on the action taken.
Finish at construction joints
General: Butt join the surfaces of adjoining pours. In visually important surfaces make the joint straight
and true, and free from blemishes impermissible for its surface finish class.
Joint preparation
General: Roughen and clean the hardened concrete joint surface. Remove loose or soft material, free
water, foreign matter and laitance. Dampen the surface just before placing the fresh concrete and coat
with a neat cement slurry.
2.12 EXPANSION JOINTS

Joint filling
Joint filling: Fill with jointing materials. Finish visible jointing material neatly flush with adjoining
surfaces.
Preparation: Before filling, dry and clean the joint surfaces, and prime.
Watertightness: Apply the jointing material so that joints subject to ingress of water are made
watertight.
Jointing materials
Type: Provide jointing materials compatible when used together, and non-staining to concrete in
visible locations.
Bond breaking: Provide back-up materials for sealants, including backing rods, which do not adhere to
the sealant. They may be faced with a non-adhering material.
Foamed materials (in compressible fillers): Closed-cell or impregnated types which do not absorb
water.
2.13 COMPLETION
Loading
Loading: Give notice before loading the concrete structure.

Protection: Protect the concrete from damage due to construction load overstresses, physical and
thermal shocks, and excessive vibrations, particularly during the curing period.
Surface protection: Protect finished concrete surfaces and applied finishes from damage.
3 SELECTIONS
Duplicate and customise the Schedules, adding and deleting rows and columns, as required.
3.1 SCHEDULES
Properties table – performance
Type
A B C
Normal and special class
Air entrainment – air volume (%)
Maximum aggregate size (mm)
Assessment process
Slump (mm)
Strength grade/characteristic compressive strength
f (MPa)
Special class
Bleeding (mL/mm2)
Cement type
Density of hardened concrete (kg/m3)
Density of plastic concrete (kg/m3)
Drying shrinkage
Duration of air drying
Early age strength (MPa)
Flexural strength (MPa)
Indirect tensile strength (MPa)
Mineral oxide content
Mix type
Water:cement ratio maximum
If the concrete is special class only because of the specification of a drying shrinkage less than 1000 µm, delete the special
class section of the table and specify the shrinkage value in 1.7 Shrinkage sensitive structures.
Properties table – prescriptive
Type
A B C
Aggregate water absorption, maximum (%)
Admixtures:
- Proportions
- Types

Type
A B C
Coarse aggregate:
- Proportions
- Size (mm)
- Types
Colour
Fine aggregate:
- Proportions
- Types
Minimum cement content (kg/m3)
Mix type
Water:cement ratio, maximum
See the Commentary for Tests table.

Control tests schedule
Concrete 28 day Transfer Days after Early strength Days after
element strength strength (MPa) pouring (MPa) pouring
See the Commentary for more items for consideration for the Control tests schedule.
Minimum time delay table
Between (pour locations) Minimum period between adjacent pours
(days)
Adjacent pours abutting horizontal construction
joints in walls or columns
Adjacent pours abutting vertical construction joints
in walls
Columns and slabs
Floor slab construction joints
“Pour strips” and adjacent concrete
Retaining wall construction joints

CONCRETE FINISHES STRUCTURE
CONCRETE FINISHES
This worksection is applicable to the production of formed and unformed finishes to concrete surfaces in building and associated
structures. It needs to be used in conjunction with the Concrete in situ worksection, particularly the curing and the completion
(surface protection) sections, and the Concrete formwork worksection. The surface finishes dealt with are the more common
ones. Project specific finishes not included need to be added.
• Shotcrete for shotcrete finishes.
• None.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
General: Provide finishes to formed and unformed concrete surfaces which are as follows:
- Appropriate to the importance (visual or physical) of the concrete elements.
- Compatible with following trades and finishes.

General
have no overlaps.
- Concrete in situ.
- Shotcrete.

1.3 STANDARDS
General
Formed surfaces: To AS 3610.
Unformed surfaces: To AS 3600.
1.4 TOLERANCES
General
Formed surfaces: Confirm conformance with the surface finish requirements of AS 3610 for the
surface class nominated in the Formed surface finishes schedule.
Unformed surfaces: Confirm conformance with the Tolerance classes table for the class of finish
nominated using a straight edge placed anywhere on the surface in any direction.
Tolerances class table
Class Measurement Maximum deviation (mm)
A 3 m straight edge 3
B 3 m straight edge 6
C 600 mm straight edge 6
1.5 SAMPLE PANELS

General
Conformance: Supply sample panels to AS 3610 and in conformance with the Sample panels
schedule for the application specified.
Manufacture
General: Cast the panels using the formwork, concrete, compaction equipment, form release agents,
curing and formwork removal methods which are to be used in the final work.
Storage
General: Once accepted, maintain the panels on site undamaged and protected from the weather, as
reference prototypes for future evaluation of completed work.
1.6 SURFACE TREATMENT

General
Range: Do not proceed with the related work until the acceptable range of surface treatments has
been determined.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
Surface hardeners, sealers and protectors
Supply: If required by the project documentation, provide proprietary products in accordance with the
manufacturer’s written requirements.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 SURFACE MODIFIERS

General
Application: Apply to clean surfaces in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements.
3.2 UNFORMED SURFACES

General
General: Strike off, screed and level slab surfaces to finished levels, to tolerance class C.

Finishing methods
Broom finish: After floating draw a broom or hessian belt across the surface to produce a coarse even-
textured slip-resistant transverse-scored surface.
Machine floated finish: After screeding and when the concrete has stiffened sufficiently, work the slab
surface using a machine float. Hand float in locations inaccessible to the machine float. Cut and fill to
tolerance class B and refloat immediately to a uniform, smooth texture.
Pattern paving: After machine floating, apply a proprietary treatment producing integral coloured and
patterned surface.
Scored or scratch finish: After screeding, give the surface a coarse scored texture using a stiff brush or
rake drawn across the surface before final set.
Sponge finish: After machine floating, obtain an even textured sand finish by wiping the surface using
a damp sponge.
Steel trowelled finish: After machine floating, use power trowels to produce a smooth surface relatively
free from defects. Then, when the surface has hardened sufficiently, use steel hand trowels to
produce the final finish free of trowel marks and defects, and uniform in texture and appearance, to
tolerance class A.
Wood float finish: After screeding, machine produce the final finish using a wood float, to tolerance
class B.
Polished finishes
Abrasive blast: After steel trowelling, abrasive blast the cured surface to provide texture or to form
patterns without exposing the coarse aggregate using hard, sharp graded abrasive fine aggregate
particles.
Applied finish: To a steel trowel finished surface, apply a proprietary liquid or dry shake material in
accordance with the manufacturer’s written requirements.
Burnished finish: Continue steel trowelling until the concrete surface attains a polished or glossy
appearance.
Exposed aggregate: After steel trowelling, grind the cured surface of the concrete to expose the
coarse aggregate.
The range of treatments to achieve and to embellish polished concrete surfaces is large, and includes colouring, texturing,
patterning by saw cutting or inlaying of metal or timber strips or of tiles or pavers. The effect required should be
comprehensively documented by the architect. Add to the list of polished finishes as necessary.
Surface finishes
General: Provide surface finishes in conformance with the Integral finish schedule.
3.3 FORMED SURFACES

General
General: Provide formed concrete finishes in conformance with the Formed surface finishes
schedule.
Damage: Do not damage concrete works through premature removal of formwork.
Curing
General: If forms are stripped when concrete is at an age less than the minimum curing period,
commence curing exposed faces as soon as the stripping is completed.
Ensure that concrete has adequate strength or is back propped.
Evaluation of formed surfaces

General: If evaluation of formed surface tolerance or colour is required, complete the evaluation before
surface treatment.
Finishing methods
General: If soffits of concrete elements are to have a finish other than off the form, provide details of
proposed procedures.
Blasted finishes:
- Abrasive: Blast the cured surface using hard, sharp graded abrasive fine aggregate particles until
the coarse aggregate is in uniform relief.
- Light abrasive: Blast the cured surface using hard, sharp graded abrasive fine aggregate particles to
provide a uniform matt finish without exposing the coarse aggregate.

Bush hammered finish: Remove the minimum matrix using bush hammering to expose the coarse
aggregate, recessing the matrix no deeper than half the aggregate size, to give a uniform texture.
Exposed aggregate finish: Remove the vertical face forms while the concrete is green but set. Wet the
surface and scrub using stiff fibre or wire brushes, using clean water freely, until the surface film of
mortar is mechanically removed, and the aggregate uniformly exposed. Do not use acid etching. Rinse
the surface with clean water.
Floated finishes:
- Sand floated finish: Remove the forms while the concrete is green. Wet the surface and rub using a
wood float. Rub fine sand into the surface until a uniform colour and texture are produced.
- Grout floated finish: Remove the forms while the concrete is green. Dampen the surface and spread
a slurry, using hessian pads or sponge rubber floats. Remove surplus slurry and work until a
uniform colour and texture are produced.
Smooth rubbed finish: Remove the vertical face forms while the concrete is green but set, patch
immediately using concrete from the pour, and complete the rubbing not later than the following day.
Wet the surface and rub using a carborundum or similar abrasive brick until a uniform colour and
texture are produced.
Only the more common finishing methods are listed. Add other project specific requirements (e.g. polished, coloured).
Surface repairs
General: Surface repair method: Before commencing repairs, submit proposals.
4 SELECTIONS
Schedules refer to selection of proprietary products or to generic products by their properties. Provide their locations either here
or on the drawings.
Duplicate and customise this Schedule, adding and deleting rows and columns, as required.
4.1 SCHEDULES
Finishes schedule
Property Type
A B C
Location
Tolerance class
Integral finish
Final finish
Non-slip finish
Surface modifier
Formed surface finishes schedule

Property Type
A B C
Location
Surface class
Colour control
Surface finish type

Sample panels schedule

Application Incorporated features Panel size
This table lists typical properties of products and/or processes which you may need to specify by defining values for the
properties. Values can be words or numbers with units. You can have a single column of values or you can have multiple
columns to define different 'types' which can then be referenced on schedules and drawings. Use the specification to define one
or more types and not to locate or enumerate them – use drawings and schedules to do that.
This single table may be divided into multiple tables if you prefer. It may be used merely as a checklist in which case ensure that
essential properties are adequately defined in other documents. You can add or delete rows and columns and edit their names
as required.

PRECAST CONCRETE STRUCTURE
PRECAST CONCRETE
This worksection is applicable to precast concrete members such as floor and wall panels, beams and columns. The
worksection permits contractor design.
The worksection does not apply to precast concrete elements that are cast horizontally off or on site, and which are initially lifted
by rotation about an edge and temporarily braced (designated tilt-up).
• Tilt-up concrete.
• Concrete post-tensioned.
• It is important that the structural drawings either define performance criteria (loading, deflection, exposure) or detail the
member sizes and the connection details. If the former is adopted, independent certification by a professional engineer of
the design and documentation, and of the erected elements, are appropriate.
• If precast is not by contractor design:
. - Precast concrete members should be detailed on the drawings.
. - Handling requirements, including lifting and transportation should be set out on the drawings.
The core reference for precast concrete is CIA Z48. For tilt-up precast concrete it is AS 3850.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
Provide precast concrete elements that are:
- Undamaged by handling and installation.
- Independently certified by a professional engineer for the design and the erected components.
Delete the last two points if the work is fully documented in the contract documents.

General

have no overlaps.
- Concrete post-tensioned.
1.3 STANDARDS
Methods and equipment
Precast members: Comply with the recommendations of CIA Z48.
CIA Z48 is a joint handbook by the National Precast Concrete Association Australia and the Concrete Institute of Australia
entitled Precast Concrete and is available from Standards Australia.
1.4 INTERPRETATION
Definitions
General: For the purposes of this worksection the definitions given in AS 3850 clause 1.3 and the
following apply.
- Precast units: Concrete elements manufactured in other than their final position including elements
manufactured on site but excluding tilt-up panels.
1.5 INSPECTION
Notice
- Formwork dimensions and stability.
- Panel edge details and penetrations.
- Connection materials and inserts in place.
- Reinforcement and/or prestressing tendons in place.
Delete as appropriate, if contractor is responsible for design and is to be permitted to proceed without review.
1.6 SUBMISSIONS
Subcontractors
Details: Submit name and contact details of proposed manufacturer of precast concrete units.
Design
Veneered fabrication: If veneered fabrication is proposed submit proposals.
Veneered construction should only be approved after due consideration has been given to all aspects, including the porosity of
the veneer facing, the location of the reinforcement, the method of casting, the experience of the manufacturer, and the question
of a warranty.
Contractor design: Provide independent verification by a professional engineer of compliance of the
design with project criteria.
Delete if the works are fully documented.
Shop drawings
See also CIA Z48 clause 12.6.2.
General: Submit shop drawings of precast units showing the proposed details for their design,
manufacture, assembly, transport and installation, including the following:

- Project title and manufacturer's name.

- Shape or profile drawings (submit these before fabrication of moulds and tooling).
- Calculations showing method of complying with nominated performance requirements.
- Concrete mix and type of cement if special-class concrete.
- Veneer details, if applicable.
- Formwork type.
- Locations, sizes, details, materials and stress grades of tendons and reinforcement.
- Jack clearances, procedures, stressing sequence, initial tensioning forces gauge pressure, and
tendon elongation.
- Surface finish class and surface treatment, if applicable.
- Marking plan.
- Equipment and methods for handling, transport and installation, including lifting inserts and pick-up
points.
- Calculated maximum loadings on lifting and bracing inserts and attachments.
- Evidence of load capacity of lifting and bracing inserts and attachments in the form of test reports or
calculations.
- Specification of plugs for sealing recesses for cast-in fixings.
With contractor design, shop details are provided for review, rather than approval.
Lifting
Specify here the testing requirements, if any, for lifting inserts and attachments for precast units.
Early lifting: If it is proposed to lift the units by their designated lifting points before 28 day strength has
been achieved, submit evidence to demonstrate that the unit has adequate strength to carry its own
weight without damage or residual cracking or deflection on removal of the lifting device.
Attachments for handling purposes: If it is proposed to locate lifting attachments, holes and other
temporary fixings for handling purposes on visible faces of units, submit proposals.
Lifting units: If it is proposed to lift or support units at other than specified points, submit proposals.
Delete these paragraphs for contractor design.
1.7 PROTOTYPES
General
Provision: Provide prototypes in accordance with the Prototypes schedule.
Storage: Maintain prototypes on site, undamaged and protected from discolouration for comparison
with manufactured precast units.
Structural testing
Static load tests: If structural performance requirements are nominated for the precast unit, perform
static load tests on the prototype.
If separate test panels are required specify the requirements in the Prototypes schedule.
If structural testing is required, show on the drawings the testing arrangements and performance requirements.
See AS 3600 Appendix B. AS 3600 is cited in the BCA for structural sufficiency and fire resistance.
You may waive the requirement for structural testing if satisfied with the calculations for performance requirements submitted
with the precasting shop drawings.
Test panels
Make separate test panels for surface finish, colour, or both, in conformance with the Prototypes
schedule.
Specify the test panels required, or preferably show them on the drawings. Incorporated features may include tie bolts,
construction joints and surface patterns.

Prototypes schedule
Unit type Number of prototypes
AS 3600 clause B4.2 requires a minimum of 2 prototypes.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PRECAST UNITS

Marking
Identification: Identify units by marks which are as follows:
- Remain legible until after the unit has been fixed in place.
- Are not visible in the completed structure.
- Show the date of casting.
- Show the correct orientation of the unit.
- On other than units manufactured as a standard product, indicate the locations within the structure
in accordance with the marking plan.
Structural performance requirements
Additional: Comply with the following requirements:
>
Delete if all the requirements are shown on the drawings.
Tolerances
Fixings and embedded items in precast units: To AS 3610.
Tolerances necessary for structural integrity are specified in AS 3600 clause 19.5, but are generally less stringent than those
required for serviceability, fit of components, or aesthetics. AS 3610 clause 3.4 covers both in situ and precast construction.
Show on the drawings the required tolerance on dimensions of joints between precast units.
Lifting devices
Capacity: Design each lifting device for a working load at least 1.65 times the maximum calculated
static load at that point and an ultimate load ≥ 4 times the maximum static load.
Include this clause only for contractor design. On these and other embedded items, see AS 3850 clause 2.4.2. On their
placement tolerances, see AS 3610 Table 3.4.3.
Attachments
Sealing: Recess lifting attachments such as ferrules, or other types of cast-in fixings, and provide
plugs for sealing.
Welding of connections
See WTIA TN11 for a commentary on the AS/NZS 1554 series.
2.2 VENEERED CONSTRUCTION

General
Method: Use a method which ensures that delamination of the veneer will not occur.
See Durability of Precast Veneer Panels, a paper presented at the 20th Biennial Conference of the Concrete Institute of
Australia in September 2001 and Data Sheet 4 Veneer Construction, both available from the National Precast Concrete
Association Australia.
Cover to reinforcement: Excludes applied finish or finishing layer that has thermal or chemical
properties different from, and/or lesser water penetration resistance than, the main body of concrete in
the unit.

3 EXECUTION
3.1 HANDLING
Precautions
Lifting: Lift or support units only at designated or other approved points. Use handling methods which
do not overstress, warp or damage the units.
Attachments
Remove temporary attachments after erection. Seal or otherwise make good residual recesses.
3.2 INSTALLATION
General
Fixing: Fix the units securely and accurately in their final positions.
Ancillaries: Provide components and materials, including fasteners, braces, shims, jointing strips,
sealant, flashings, grout and mortar, necessary for the installation of the units.
Show on the drawings the method of connection of the units to the frame, or call for the connections to be shown on the
precasting shop drawings. Detail the method of jointing panels on the drawings.
3.3 PROTECTION
General
General: Protect the units against staining, discolouration and other damage until they are installed in
their final location.

TILT-UP CONCRETE STRUCTURE
TILT-UP CONCRETE
This worksection is applicable only to precast concrete elements that are cast horizontally off or on site, and which are initially
lifted by rotation about an edge and temporarily braced (designated tilt-up).
This worksection does not apply to other precast concrete members such as beams and columns.
The worksection permits contractor design.
• It is important that the structural drawings either define performance criteria (loading, deflection, exposure) or detail the
member sizes and the connection details. If the former is adopted, independent certification by a professional engineer of
the design and documentation, and of the erected elements, are appropriate.
• If precast is not by contractor design:
. - Tilt-up members such as façade panels should be detailed on the drawings.
. - Handling requirements, including lifting and transportation should be set out on the drawings.
The core reference for tilt-up precast concrete is AS 3850. For other precast concrete it is CIA Z48.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
Provide tilt-up concrete elements that are:
- Undamaged by handling and installation.
- Independently certified by a professional engineer for the design and the erected components.
Delete the last two points if the work is fully documented in the contract documents.

General
have no overlaps.

1.3 STANDARDS
Methods and equipment
Precast concrete (tilt-up) elements: To AS 3850.
For design and construction, see CCA T50 and CIA Z10.
1.4 INTERPRETATION
Definitions
General: For the purposes of this worksection the definitions given in AS 3850 clause 1.3 apply.
1.5 INSPECTION
Notice
- Formwork dimensions and stability.
- Panel edge details and penetrations.
- Connection materials and inserts in place.
- Reinforcement in place.
Delete as appropriate, if contractor is responsible for design and is to be permitted to proceed without review.
1.6 SUBMISSIONS
Subcontractors
Details: Submit name and contact details of proposed manufacturer of the tilt-up units.
Design
Veneered fabrication: If veneered fabrication is proposed submit proposals.
Veneered construction should only be approved after due consideration has been given to all aspects, including the porosity of
the veneer facing, the location of the reinforcement, the method of casting, the experience of the manufacturer, and the question
of a warranty.
Contractor design: Provide independent verification by a professional engineer of compliance of the
design with project criteria.
Delete if the works are fully documented.
Shop drawings
See also AS 3850 clause 3.10.3.
General: Submit shop drawings of tilt-up units showing the proposed details for their design,
manufacture, assembly, transport and installation, including the following:
- Project title and manufacturer's name.
- Shape or profile drawings (submit these before fabrication of any moulds and tooling).
- Calculations showing method of complying with nominated performance requirements.
- Concrete mix and type of cement if special-class concrete.
- Veneer details, if applicable.
- Formwork type.
- Locations, sizes, details, materials and stress grades of reinforcement.
- Surface finish class and surface treatment, if applicable.

- Marking plan.
- Equipment and methods for handling, transport and installation, including lifting inserts and pick-up
points.
- Calculated maximum loadings on lifting and bracing inserts and attachments.
- Evidence of load capacity of lifting and bracing inserts and attachments in the form of test reports or
calculations.
- Specification of plugs for sealing recesses for cast-in fixings.
With contractor design, shop details are provided for review, rather than approval.
Lifting
Specify here the testing requirements, if any, for lifting inserts and attachments for precast units.
Early lifting: If it is proposed to lift the units by their designated lifting points before design strength has
been achieved, submit evidence to demonstrate that the unit has adequate strength to carry its own
weight without damage or residual cracking or deflection on removal of the lifting device.
Attachments for handling purposes: If it is proposed to locate lifting attachments, holes and other
temporary fixings for handling purposes on visible faces of units, submit proposals.
Lifting units: If it is proposed to lift or support units at other than specified points, submit proposals.
Delete these paragraphs for contractor design.
1.7 PROTOTYPES
General
Provision: Provide prototypes in accordance with the Prototypes schedule.
Storage: Maintain prototypes on site, undamaged and protected from discolouration for comparison
with manufactured precast units.
Structural testing
Static load tests: If structural performance requirements are nominated for the tilt-up unit, perform
static load tests on the prototype.
If separate test panels are required specify the requirements in the Prototypes schedule.
If structural testing is required, show on the drawings the testing arrangements and performance requirements.
See AS 3600 Appendix B. AS 3600 is cited in the BCA for structural sufficiency and fire resistance.
You may waive the requirement for structural testing if satisfied with the calculations for performance requirements submitted
with the shop drawings.
Test panels
Make separate test panels for surface finish, colour, or both, in conformance with the Prototypes
schedule.
Specify the test panels required, or preferably show them on the drawings. Incorporated features may include tie bolts,
construction joints and surface patterns.
Prototypes schedule
Unit type Number of prototypes
AS 3600 clause B4.2 requires a minimum of 2 prototypes.

2 PRODUCTS
2.1 TILT-UP UNITS

Marking
Identification: Identify units by marks which are as follows:
- Remain legible until after the unit has been fixed in place.
- Are not visible in the completed structure.
- Show the date of casting.
- Show the correct orientation of the unit.
- On other than units manufactured as a standard product, indicate the locations within the structure
in accordance with the marking plan.
Structural performance requirements
Additional: Comply with the following requirements:
>
Delete if all the requirements are shown on the drawings.
Tolerances
Fixings and embedded items in precast units: To AS 3610 and AS 3850, as applicable.
Tolerances necessary for structural integrity are specified in AS 3600 clause 19.5, but are generally less stringent than those
required for serviceability, fit of components, or aesthetics. AS 3610 clause 3.4 covers both in situ and precast construction.
AS 3850 clause 3.11 includes recommended tolerances for the location of inserts in addition to tolerances for the panels as cast
and for location.
Show on the drawings the required tolerance on dimensions of joints between tilt-up units.
Lifting devices
Capacity: Design each lifting device for a working load at least 1.65 times the maximum calculated
static load at that point and an ultimate load ≥ 4 times the maximum static load.
Include this clause only for contractor design. On these and other embedded items, see AS 3850 clause 2.4.2. On their
placement tolerances, see AS 3610 Table 3.4.3 and AS 3850 clause 3.11.
Attachments
Sealing: Recess lifting attachments such as ferrules, or other types of cast-in fixings, and provide
plugs for sealing.
Welding of connections
See WTIA TN11 for a commentary on the AS/NZS 1554 series.
2.2 VENEERED CONSTRUCTION

General
Method: Use a method which ensures that delamination of the veneer will not occur.
See Durability of Precast Veneer Panels, a paper presented at the 20th Biennial Conference of the Concrete Institute of
Australia in September 2001 and Data Sheet 4 Veneer Construction, both available from the National Precast Concrete
Association Australia.
Cover to reinforcement: Excludes applied finish or finishing layer that has thermal or chemical
properties different from, and/or lesser water penetration resistance than, the main body of concrete in
the unit.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 HANDLING
Precautions
Lifting: Lift or support units only at designated or other approved points. Use handling methods which
do not overstress, warp or damage the units.

Attachments
Remove temporary attachments after erection. Seal or otherwise make good residual recesses.
3.2 INSTALLATION
General
Fixing: Fix the units securely and accurately in their final positions.
Ancillaries: Provide components and materials, including fasteners, braces, shims, jointing strips,
sealant, flashings, grout and mortar, necessary for the installation of the units.
Show on the drawings the method of connection of the units to the frame, or call for the connections to be shown on the shop
drawings. Detail the method of jointing panels on the drawings.
3.3 PROTECTION
General
General: Protect the units against staining, discolouration and other damage until they are installed in
their final location.

SHOTCRETE STRUCTURE
SHOTCRETE
This worksection is applicable to concrete which is applied pneumatically and compacted dynamically under high velocity, in
situations where formed in situ concrete is not an appropriate or preferred material delivery method.
• None.
• None.
• Show on the drawings structural information including anchoring, and built-in and drainage requirements.
• For the preparation of a sprayed concrete specification, see Appendix A of CIA Z5.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
General: Provide shotcrete that:
- Is readily sprayed into corners and around reinforcement and built-in items without segregation or
vertical slumping or sag.
- Is not porous, cracked or honeycombed.
- Has acceptable plastic shrinkage cracking.
- Can be readily worked to the required finish.

General
have no overlaps.
- Concrete in situ.

SHOTCRETE STRUCTURE
1.3 STANDARDS
General
Concrete: To AS 1379.
Concrete structures for retaining liquids: To AS 3735.
Curing compounds: To AS 3799.
1.4 INTERPRETATIONS
Definitions
General: For the purposes of this worksection the definition given below applies.
Shotcrete: Portland cement concrete, containing aggregate up to 20 mm in size, applied from a spray
nozzle by means of compressed air. Shotcrete shall contain only approved additives suitable to attain
quick set and high early strengths as specified.
Refer to the Concrete in situ worksection and add any relevant definitions here.
1.5 INSPECTION
Notice
- Excavated face before covering.
- Surfaces or elements to be concealed in the final work before covering.
- Membrane and drainage strips installed against the excavated face.
- Any formwork, and reinforcement, cores and embedments fixed in place.
1.6 TESTS
Concrete testing
Minimum characteristics: Provide test result to verify that specified minimum characteristics are met.
Concrete testing methods
Sampling and testing: To AS 1012.
Location: Sample the concrete on site.
Testing authority: Concrete supplier testing or NATA registered laboratory.
Test records
Records and reports: To AS 1012.
Control tests
Acceptance criteria:
- Average strength of all samples must exceed the required value.
- Strength of any one sample must be at least 0.85 of the required value.
Performance tests
General: Sample, test and assess the concrete for compliance.
Strength grade: Spread the site sampling evenly throughout the pour. For concrete in integral columns
and bearing walls, take at least one sample per batch.
Slump: Test at least one sample from each batch before placing concrete from that batch in the work.
Take the samples at the point of discharge on site.
Compliance: Complete sufficient testing to provide statistical proof that the concrete complies with the
specified requirements.

SHOTCRETE STRUCTURE
Embedded pressure pipes

Leak tests: Before embedment, leak test pipes which will contain liquid or vapour at a pressure
> 10 kPa. If leak tests are unsatisfactory, do not shotcrete.
1.7 SUBMISSIONS
Subcontractors
General: Submit names and contact details of proposed shotcrete concrete supplies, and alternative
source of supply in the event of breakdown.
Tests
Material tests: Before applying shotcrete submit test certificates based on samples from the most
recent production or from stockpiles for the project.
Dissemination of production information: Submit copies of the reports.
Embedded pressure pipes: Submit the results of leak tests.
Materials
General: Submit details of proposed sources of materials.
Mix proportions: The proportions of the materials for shotcrete shall be determined by the contractor
and submitted to the engineer for approval.
Curing compounds: If it is proposed to use a liquid, membrane-forming curing compound submit the
- Certified test results for water retention to AS 3799 Appendix B.
- Evidence that an acceptable final surface colour will be obtained.
- Evidence of compatibility with applied finishes, if any.
- Proposed methods of obtaining the required adhesion for toppings and render.
Admixtures: If it is proposed to use admixtures, submit the following:
- Brand name.
- Place of manufacture.
- Basic chemical composition.
Admixtures shall not be corrosive to steel and shall not encourage other detrimental effects such as cracking and spalling.
Accelerators based on calcium chloride are not acceptable.
Control of water
General: Submit proposals for controlling ground water flows and seepage temporarily and
permanently.
Execution details
General: Submit proposals for mixing, placing, finishing and curing concrete including the following:
- Site storage, mixing and transport methods and equipment.
- Addition of water at the site.
- Handling, placing, compaction and finishing methods and equipment.
- Temperature control methods.
- Target strength, slump and proposed mix for each type and grade of concrete.
- High early strength cement.
- Cutting or displacing reinforcement, or cutting hardened concrete.
- Sequence and times for shotcrete segments, and construction joint locations.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SHOTCRETE MATERIALS

Bagged cement
General: If bagged cement is to be used, ensure it is less than 6 months old.

SHOTCRETE STRUCTURE
2.2 ACCELERATING ADMIXTURE

General
General: An accelerating admixture shall be used where required to develop quick set and high early
strength, as follows:
Time for initial set: 5 minutes maximum.
Time for final set: 20 minutes maximum.
Admixture: >
Proportion (of the cement content by weight):
>
The proportion of the accelerating admixture for normal use is less than 6% of the cement content by weight except for special
application in wet areas. Only the minimum quantity of admixture required to meet the specified high early strength
requirements should be used.
Site conditions: If unusually wet conditions are encountered on site, submit a proposal varying the mix
proportions including increasing the admixture content.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 MIXING
General
Mixing: Mixing shall be carried out in an approved mixer suitable for the efficient mixing and discharge
of batched materials.
Time: Mixed materials must be used within 60 minutes after the addition of cement otherwise the
material shall be wasted without payment.
This time limit may be extended to 90 minutes if job conditions are such that satisfactory results can be attained.
Admixture: The accelerating admixture shall not be added until immediately prior to depositing the
materials in the placing equipment.
3.2 APPLICATION
Placing equipment
Contingency: Provide back-up equipment to allow continuous application of shotcrete to all surfaces in
the event of equipment breakdown.
Reliability: No shotcreting shall be applied to the work on site until the quality of workmanship and the
reliability of achieving the requirements of the shotcrete has been established.
Preparation: Surfaces, whether new or previously shotcreted, which are to receive shotcrete, shall be
cleaned of all loose material, much and other foreign matter.
Technique: The nozzle shall be held so that the stream of flowing material will impinge as nearly as
possible at right angles to the surface to be covered. Shotcrete of the approved mix design shall be
applied in a circular fashion to build up the required thickness in layers.
Layer thickness: >
Applicator: The nozzleman shall have had previous experience in the application of course aggregate
shotcrete, or shall work under the immediate supervision of a foreman or instructor with such
experience.
Acceptance
General: Acceptable shotcrete shall consist of dense uniform concrete without discernible weakness
of bond (between layers).
Consistency: Shotcrete shall have a uniform consistency in order to maximise binding, bonding,
cohesion and density, minimise rebound and prevent sagging of the applied shotcrete.
Soundness: Remove all laitance, loose material and rebound and sound the surface of each layer of
shotcrete with a hammer to locate any voids, rebound or aggregate pockets and unbonded areas.
Defective work: If drummy areas, voids, rebound, or aggregate pockets are found or if probing, drilling
or other observations indicate inadequate thickness or strength requirements, strengthen or break out
and replace such defective areas.

SHOTCRETE STRUCTURE
Rejection: Remove rejected concrete from site.
3.3 FIXINGS, CORES AND EMBEDDED ITEMS

Adjoining elements
Support: For adjoining elements to be fixed or supported on the shotcrete, provide for the required
fixings. If applicable, provide temporary support of the adjoining elements during construction of the
shotcrete, to prevent movement.
General: In locating embedded items, do not cut reinforcement or hardened concrete.
Reinforcement:
- Fix welded mesh and other reinforcement securely in place.
- If it is proposed to displace reinforcement at embedded items, provide details.
Tolerances
Placement: Maximum deviation from correct positions:
- Embedded items generally: ± 10 mm.
- Fasteners, including anchor bolts: ± 3 mm.
- Anchor bolt groups for structural steel: To AS 4100.
Inserted fixings
Methods: Do not insert fixings using drilling (including masonry anchors), or using explosive tools.
Control of water
General: If water flows and seepage occur, control these in such a manner that detrimental effects are
completely and permanently eliminated.
3.4 SHOTCRETING IN COLD WEATHER

Cement
General: Do not use high alumina cement.
Placing
Concrete: Maintain the temperature of the freshly mixed concrete in conformance with the Cold
Formwork, embedments and reinforcement: Before and during placing maintain temperature at ≥ 5°C.
Severe weather
General: If severe weather conditions are predicted, use high early strength cement.
Temperature control
General: Heat the concrete materials, other than cement, to the minimum temperature necessary to
ensure that the temperature of the placed shotcrete is within the limits specified.
Admixtures: Do not use calcium chloride, salts, chemicals or other material in the mix to lower the
Frozen materials: Do not allow frozen materials or materials containing ice to enter the mixer, and
keep free of frost and ice any forms, materials, and equipment coming in contact with the concrete.
Maximum temperature of water: 60°C when it is placed in the mixer.
Plastic shotcrete: Prevent plastic shotcrete from freezing, without using salts or chemicals.
Cold weather placing table
Outdoor air temperature Temperature of shotcrete
Minimum Maximum
≥ 5°C 10°C 32°C
< 5°C 18°C 32°C
If the Concrete in situ worksection is being included in the specification, delete the text here and replace with General: In
conformance with Concrete in situ.

SHOTCRETE STRUCTURE
3.5 SHOTCRETING IN HOT WEATHER

Handling
General: Prevent premature stiffening of the fresh mix and reduce water absorption and evaporation
losses.
Placing
Concrete: Maintain the temperature of the freshly mixed concrete at ≤ 32ºC.
Formwork, embedments and reinforcement: Before and during placing maintain temperature at
≤ 32°C.
Severe weather
General: If surrounding outdoor shade temperature > 38°C, do not mix concrete.
Temperature control
General: Select one or more of the following methods of maintaining the specified temperature of the
placed shotcrete:
- Cool the shotcrete using liquid nitrogen injection before placing.
- Cover the container in which the concrete is transported to the forms.
- Spray the coarse aggregate using cold water prior to mixing.
- Use chilled mixing water.
If the Concrete in situ worksection is being included in the specification, delete the text here and replace with General: In
conformance with Concrete in situ.
3.6 CURING
General
Protection: Protect fresh shotcrete during the curing period, from premature drying and from
excessively hot or cold temperatures.
Curing period: Cure continuously until the total cumulative number of days or fractions of days, during
which the air temperature in contact with the shotcrete is above 10ºC, is at least 7 days.
Substrates: If surfaces are to be cement-based rendered, do not use wax-based or chlorinated rubber-
based curing compounds.
Application: Provide a continuous flexible coating without visible breaks or pinholes, which remains
unbroken at least seven days after application.
Concrete strength: If the strength of concrete required by AS 3000 clauses 4.4 or 4.5 has not been
achieved, extend the curing period until strength is achieved.
End of curing period: Prevent rapid drying out at the end of the curing period.
Cold weather curing
General: Maintain shotcrete temperature between 10 – 20°C for curing period.
Hot weather curing
Curing compounds: Do not use curing compounds.
Protection: Select a protection method as applicable.
- If the shotcrete temperature exceeds 25°C or if not protected against drying winds, protect the
shotcrete using a fog spray application of aliphatic alcohol evaporation retardant.
- If temperature of surrounding air is > 35°C, protect from wind and sun until the shotcrete can be
covered.
- Immediately the shotcrete has set, cover exposed surfaces using an impervious membrane, or
hessian kept wet, until curing begins.
Water curing
General: If water is used, continuously sprinkle for the required curing period.

MONOLITHIC STABILISED EARTH WALLING STRUCTURE
MONOLITHIC STABILISED EARTH WALLING
This worksection is applicable to earth walling that uses a blend of cement with selected low clay soils containing well graded
sand and aggregate. Refer to the Commentary for a detailed presentation of relevant factors.
This worksection does not include traditional rammed earth walling for which you may need to create new text in an allied
worksection.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
General: Provide monolithic stabilised earth walling that continues to perform satisfactorily for its
design life of 50 years.
Nominate a different design life if appropriate.

General
have no overlaps.
>
1.3 INSPECTION
Notice
- Sampling for field testing.
- Field testing.
- Damp-proof courses, in place.
- Termite protection measures in place.
- Forms in place.
- Commencement of rammed stabilised earth placing.

- Embedded pipes and conduits in position.

- Built-in items in place.
- Control joints, ready for joint filler.
1.4 TESTS
An accelerated erosion test may be required, but only for walls having inadequate protection from erosion or abrasion, and for
cyclone-prone areas. See SAA HB195 Appendix A (4.5).
To achieve erosion resistance for exposed walls, stabilising is needed. Indeed, with stabilising, zero erosion may be expected,
so the test is probably redundant.
For monolithic stabilised earth, compressive strength tests based on concrete tests may be more appropriate than the masonry
unit type tests described in SAA HB195 Appendix A or CSIRO Bulletin 5, Appendix E.
General
Testing: Except as nominated otherwise, testing is to be to SAA HB195 Appendix A.
Soil tests
Liquid limit: To AS 1289.3.1.1.
Plastic limit: To AS 1289.3.2.1.
Plasticity index: To AS 1289.3.3.1.
Linear shrinkage: To AS 1289.3.4.1.
Particle size distribution: To AS 1289.3.6.1.
Mix design and strength evaluation tests
Dry density/moisture content relation:
- Test report: Include the following additional material:
. Cement content by weight.
. Elapsed time between addition of cement and compaction.
. Date moulded.
Unconfined compressive strength: Retain samples in mould for 12 h and air cure in an open
environment for 7 days.
Alternatively, specify here AS 1012.9.
Evaluation criteria: To CSIRO Bulletin 5 Table 2.2.
Stabilised earth density test
Method: Wax buoyancy, using site samples.
To SAA HB195 Appendix A (3.1 or 4.1).
1.5 SAMPLES
General
Colour and texture: Supply sample blocks indicating the range of likely variation. Label, and store on
site under cover when accepted.
- Number: 4.
- Size (nominal): 300 x 150 mm diameter.
Facework: Provide a sample panel.
- Size (minimum): 900 mm long x 600 mm high.
- Location: >
According to the BCA Housing Provisions, a sample panel may be required by relevant approval authority. AS 3610 Table 3.4.1
advises that test panels are optional for untreated surfaces, but to be specified for colour control and for treated surfaces. See
also AS 3610 clause 3.6.
1.6 TOLERANCES
Tolerances
General: Conform to the Tolerances table.

Tolerances table
Horizontal position of any earth wall element ± 45 mm
specified or shown in plan at its base or at each
storey level
Deviation with a storey from a vertical line through ± 35 mm per 3 m of height
the base of the member
Deviation from vertical in total height of building ± 40 mm
(from base)
Relative displacement between loadbearing walls ± 40 mm
in adjacent storeys intended to be in vertical
alignment
Deviation (bow) from line in plan in any length up Single curvature: ± 45 mm
to 10 m
Deviation from design wall thickness - 20 mm, + 40 mm
The values given are taken from SAA HB195 Table 3.3. Vary as required.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
Soil particle sizes
Quarry wastes, fly ash and other wastes may be considered. Refer to CSIRO Bulletin 5.
Clay: < 0.002 mm.
Silt: < 0.06 mm.
Sand: 0.06 – 2.0 mm.
Coarse aggregate: Select from the following:
- Gravel: 2.0 – 75 mm, ≤ 5% retained on a 37.5 mm sieve.
- Limestone: 19 mm.
. Source: >
- Sandstone: 19 mm.
. Source: >
Gravel, limestone and sandstone are alternatives for coarse aggregate. Select one. Use of limestone or sandstone has a major
impact on wall design, particularly in relation to durability.
Soil particle size distribution
Organic content: < 2%.
Clay and silt content: < 20%.
Low clay content is best, but must therefore be stabilised if not rendered, to minimise erosion.
Sand content: ≥ 50%.

Coarse aggregate content: > 30%.
Water
Clean, fresh, free from impurities.
Stabilising agent
Type: Cement.
See CSIRO Bulletin 5 clause 2.3.3. Alternatives include clay (clause 2.3.2), bituminous emulsion (clause 2.3.4 and Appendix C),
lime (clause 2.3.5) and chemicals (clause 2.3.6). Stabiliser is needed to provide cohesion in a low cohesion soil e.g. sand silts,
to reduce effective clay content in soils with high clay content, and to resist erosion.
Grade: GP.

Stabilised earth mix

Cement content (range): 6 – 10% by weight.
- Value: Determine using the Mix design and strength evaluation test.
Water repellent additive:
- Product: Tech Dry KR2.
- Application: 450 ml – 600 ml per 1000 kg dry mix.
The use of water repellent additive such as KR2 makes unnecessary the application of a water repellent to the finished walling
and gives better overall performance.
Properties at placement:
- Characteristic adjusted compressive strength (minimum): 2.5 MPa.
- Moisture content (range): 8 – 16%.
- Air dry density (t/m3): >
3
- Dry density (t/m ): >
- Liquid limit (maximum): 35%.
- Plastic limit (maximum): 20%.
- Plasticity index (maximum): 12%.
- Linear shrinkage (maximum): 5%.
- Plasticity index:linear shrinkage (nominal): 2.5:1.
2.2 COMPONENTS
Damp-proof courses
Material: Polythene sheeting.
Vary the default if required. DPC needs to be flexible e.g. lead, copper, alcor. Or, ASEG suggests forming a DPC using a
cement slurry with a waterproofing admixture such as Silasec™, painted onto the slab before erection of the wall. This is not a
deemed-to-satisfy provision in the BCA at clause F1.9.
Structural fixings
Type: Chemical anchors.
Control joint infill
Material: 25 x 25 mm UV stable acrylic adhesive impregnated poly foam strip.
Steel components, including reinforcement
Durability classification to AS 3700 (minimum): R2.
AS 3700 clause 5.5, Table 5.1 define ratings R0, R1, R2, R3 and R4. Vary to suit.
Reinforcement
Bar: To AS/NZS 4671.
Machine-welded mesh: To AS/NZS 4671.
Show any required reinforcement on the drawings.
Steel lintels, columns, cleats and brackets
As an alternative to individual lintels, use a continuous reinforced concrete lintel all around the building e.g. in cyclonic or
earthquake-prone areas. Show on the drawings.
Steel grade:
- Universal beams and columns, parallel flange channels, large angles: 300.
- Taper flange beams and columns, flats, small angles: 250.
Finish: Hot dip galvanize.
Lintels: Use earth, reinforced earth, concrete, timber lintels or proprietary lintels in accordance with the
manufacturers’ technical literature or conform to the Steel angle and T-lintels table.
Preferably show on the drawings and delete this subclause.
- Dimensions: To Steel angle or T-lintels table.

Steel and or T-lintels table

Maximum Wall height above ≤ 600 mm Wall height above > 600 mm, ≤ 1800 mm
span (mm)
Angle lintel T-Lintel Bearing Angle lintel size T-Lintel Bearing
size dimensions: min. dimensions: min.
HxWxT (mm) HxWxT (mm)
(mm) (mm)
1000 2.75 x 50 x 81 x 150 x 6 100 2.125 x 75 x 8UA 136 x 150 x 6 200
5UA
2000 2.100 x 75 x 136 x 150 x 6 150 2.150 x 90 x 8UA 156 x 150 x 6 200
6UA
2400 2.125 x 75 x 156 x 150 x 6 150 2.150 x 90 x 10UA 160 x 150 x 10 250
8UA
2800 2.150 x 90 x 158 x 150 x 8 200 2.150 x 100 x 210 x 200 x 10 300
8UA 10UA
3000 2.150 x 90 x 160 x 150 x 10 200 2.150 x 100 x 210 x 200 x 10 300
10UA 12UA
The table assumes that the lintels are in walls as follows:

• 400 mm maximum thick.
• Upper storey or single storey openings.
• In non-cyclone areas.
• Supporting ceiling/roof framing of span less than 8 m with combined dead and live load not exceeding 1.15 kPa.
Timber lintels
Size: Width of the wall and in conformance with the Timber lintels height table.
Grade: F5 minimum.
Bearing: 300 mm (minimum).
Timber lintels height table
Maximum span (mm) Lintel height (mm)
1200 100
1800 150
2400 200
3000 250
Assumed conditions for timber lintels are:

• Upper or single storey construction in non-cyclonic wind speed area.
• Light timber roof of maximum span no greater than 8 m.
• Extent of earth wall above lintel no greater than 600 mm.
• No openings in earth wall directly above lintel.
• Lintel subject to uniformly distributed loads only.
Holding-down bolts
Type: 10 mm diameter threaded rod, minimum 600 mm long.
Material: >
See CSIRO Bulletin 5 Figure 1.4 for alternatives to resist uplift generally for cyclonic conditions and earthquakes.
The BCA Housing Provisions limit earthwalls to design wind speed W41, and to earthquake design category H1 or H2.
If rolling formwork is used, bolts must be segmented.
Services
Electrical and telecommunication conduits: Seal against penetration by soil during compaction.
Water: Pre-lag piping.

2.3 TEMPORARY FORMWORK

General
Type: >
The proprietary system used by the ASEG is the Stabilform system. Specify this or another if preferred e.g. Ramtec™ system,
mentioned in CSIRO Bulletin 5. Old style formwork was very heavy and cumbersome to use. The types shown in CSIRO
Bulletin 5 Figure 4.4 - Type 1, Type 2, Roller – should not be referred to. Ideally, leave the selection of the formwork to the
contractor.
Performance: Sufficiently robust to withstand the pressure of the compacted soil.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 TEMPORARY FORMWORK

Wall thickness
Preferably show on drawings and delete here.
External walls (minimum): 300 mm.
The BCA Housing Provisions stipulate 250 mm for external walls. Beyond that, recommended minimum is 450 mm thick for
lower storey of 2 storey construction.
Internal non-loadbearing walls (minimum): 200 mm.
The BCA Housing Provisions stipulate 200 mm for internal walls.
Additional: 100 mm increments.
Or 50 mm.
Vertical increments
Module: 300 mm.
Working to a module simplifies construction and repetitive use of the formwork.
Changes in wall thickness: At modules.
Heads and sills: At modules.
Plate height: At modules.
Chamfers
General: 19 mm, at ends and tops of wall panels.
ASEG drawing shows 18 mm, or 25 mm face. Amend to suit.
Tolerances
Class: 3.
General: True and free from bulging in the wall surface.
Thickness: ± 5 mm.
Height: ± 20 mm.
From horizontal: ± 10 mm in 4000 mm.
From vertical: ± 10 mm in 3000 mm.
ASEG suggests ± 3 mm in 600 mm.
Plumb of elements > 8 m high: >
From AS 3610 Table 3.4.1, to be specified if applicable.
Other formwork characteristics
Refer to AS 3610 Table 3.4.1, and referenced clauses. These prompts are for Class 3 formwork. Some of the following are
optional, some are to be specified if applicable.
Tie rod pattern: >
Optional in AS 3610.
Liner details, pattern and accuracy: >
To be specified if applicable, in AS 3610.


Surface treatment of whole: >
e.g. unrendered faces. To be specified if applicable, in AS 3610. See clause 3.4.3.3.
Colour control: >
To be specified if applicable, in AS 3610. See clause 3.5.
Temporary through bolts
General: Leave in place until full height of section is self-supporting.
3.2 PLACING AND CURING

Blending
General: Accurately blend soil, stabilising agent and water, until an even colour is achieved and no
lumps of stabiliser or clay remain.
Placement
Hot weather: If placement of walling is to proceed when surrounding outdoor shade temperature
exceeds 32ºC, submit proposal.
Timing: Place and compact within 2 hours of blending, maintaining constant moisture content.
Placing: Avoid segregation of aggregate. Place loose blended material in the formwork in courses of
an even, controlled depth.
- Loose course depth (maximum): 200 mm.
Surplus blended material: Include in lieu of fresh soil in a proportion of 1 part surplus to 4 parts fresh.
Delete if substitution is not permitted.
Compaction
Method: Mechanical compaction using pneumatic rammers. Use hand ramming only where
mechanical compaction is not possible.
Density: 98% of standard compaction determined in accordance with AS 1289.5.1.1.
Curing
General: For walling constructed when the surrounding outdoor shade temperature exceeds 32ºC
submit proposals for curing after stripping, including keeping walls moist using mist sprays or by
wrapping in plastic.
The latter helps protect facework against damage by following trades. ASEG suggests that curing takes place in 1 – 2 days, with
near full strength at 7 days. The initial 12 hours are the critical curing period.
Protection: Protect fresh earth walling, during the curing period, from premature drying and from
excessively hot or cold temperatures.
Duration before stripping formwork (minimum): 12 hours.
3.3 DAMP-PROOF COURSES

Location
General: At the base of earth walls above footings or slabs (plinth).
Detail a plinth on the drawings if there is insufficient clearance to adjoining ground and to provide protection from slab flooding
during construction or from accidental flooding of wet areas. See also SAA HB195 clause 5.2.3.
Walls on slabs: Finish flush with outer face of slab and inner face of walls. Upturn on inside behind
skirting, and downturn at outer face of slab at least 25 mm.
Installation
General: Lay in long lengths, in a single width. Lay full width at angles and intersections and lap at
least 150 mm at joints. Step as necessary.

Junctions: Preserve continuity of damp-proofing at junctions of damp-proof course and waterproof

membranes.
Lap sealing: >
3.4 BOND BEAMS

Also known as top plates, tie beams, or belt courses.
Positions
General: Provide a continuous bond beam to bearing walls, at framed floor and at roof bearing levels.
Build-in as work progresses. Anchor the floor and roof structures to the bond beams.
Preferably, show positions in the drawings.
Concrete
Position: Centre on the wall.
Bedding: Felt or mortar.
Also for coping blocks.
Timber
Bedding: Mortar levelling course.
CSIRO Bulletin 5 clause 1.7. Or, alternatively, double timber top plate, one on each side of the wall, held down by steel bar or
angle over them at the tie down location.
Steel
Postern: Centre on the wall.
Usually PFC or cold rolled C section.
3.5 CONTROL JOINTS

ASEG has produced a series of details for heads of openings at construction joints. Preferably show on the drawings.
Form
Spacing: >
Vee-joint: Minimum 25 mm faces, centred in preceding wall face only.
Installation
Infill: Run acrylic adhesive impregnated polyfoam strip full height of wall, in the vee-joint. Extend
100 mm along floor slab.
Cleaning: Clean joints thoroughly before sealing.
3.6 FIXINGS AND EMBEDDED ITEMS

Preferably document on the drawings.
Cast-in elements
Electrical components: Ensure electrical boxes will be covered by their face plates.
Or use surface mounted.
General: Fix embedded items to prevent movement during earth placing and compaction. In locating
embedded items, do not cut or displace reinforcement.
Tolerances on placement
General: Maximum deviation from correct positions:
- Embedded items generally: ± 10 mm.
- Fasteners: ± 3 mm.
Temporary fixings
Not permitted, except to surfaces that will be concealed in the finished work.
Structural fixings
e.g. Hilti HIT C 100; Ramset Chemset or chemical grout anchor; Reid Epoxy Injection System.

Location: ≥ 150 mm from edge of wall.

Installation: Drill holes at least 3 mm larger than anchor diameter. Blow out holes before injecting
resin. Remove overspill immediately.
Wall, window and door frames fixings
Type: >
e.g. T-nailing block, wedged nailing block, galvanized wall tie, fixing brackets for steel frames, at 300 mm centres, and (optional)
continuous fixing strip. See CSIRO Bulletin 5 Figures 1.6, 1.7.
Light-load fixings
Type: >
e.g. nails > 50 mm long galvanized, for fixing aluminium windows, pipes, cables, battens, electrical components and plumbing
components.
3.7 REINFORCEMENT
Horizontal bedded reinforcement
Mesh:
- Finish: Galvanized.
- Width equal to the width of the wall, less cover from each surface. Do not cut, weld or grind on site.
Installation
General: Lap 450 mm at splices. Fold and bend at corners so that the longitudinal wires are
continuous. Stop 200 mm short of control joints. Locate N-bars and fabric in centre of course.
Cover (minimum):
- 75 mm for exposed surface.
- 20 mm for protected surface.
Maximum vertical intervals: 500 mm.
3.8 STEEL LINTELS

Alternatively, galvanized N-bar reinforced lintels, or rib-mesh reinforced lintels in a T-configuration can be used. Show on the
drawings.
Installation
General: Do not cut, weld or grind on site. Keep lintels 10 mm minimum clear of heads and frames.
Install T-lintels with horizontal component at the bottom, centred in the width of the wall.
Propping: Temporarily prop lintels during compaction and until the wall reaches its required strength.
- Minimum propping period: 48 hours.
3.9 PIPES AND CONDUITS

Installation
Cover (minimum): 100 mm if cast in.
Chases: Maximum depth 50 mm. Run vertically, not horizontally. Do not chase in exposed off-form
face walls.
If permitted or delete text and insert: “Not permitted”.
3.10 HOLDING-DOWN BOLTS

See CSIRO Bulletin 5 Appendix A, to determine depth of embedment, or preferably document on the drawings. Cyclone bolts
are required in cyclone-prone areas. Bolts may also be required in areas of seismic activity.
General
Installation: Cast into the wall to give required embedment. Do not displace during compaction. Do not
locate within 150 mm of end of wall.
Cover (minimum): 75 mm.
Centres (mm): >
Depth (mm): >
Nuts
General: Accessible for tightening.

At the end of the first and second summers, for example.
3.11 FINISHES
External walls can be left unfinished.
Stabilised rammed earth walls below ground are not recommended. If unavoidable, they must be protected. Apply a cement
slurry containing a waterproofing admixture such as Silasec™. Grade the ground surface away from the walls. CSIRO Bulletin 5
recommends that earth walls be located on a brick block or concrete plinth above ground – see Figure 1.3. In any case, refer to
SAA HB195 Section 5.3.
For render refer to the Plastering worksection.
Mud render
General: Render the exteriors of walls.
Should be renewed annually. Allows the wall to breathe.
Preparation: Brush the substrate, score and moisten.
Mix: 3 clay:1 clean sand by weight and enough water to make a paste.
Render: Two coats, each 5 – 7 mm thick.
Finish: Polish the final surface using sheepskin or small rounded stones.
Or burlap rubbing, also for uncoated surfaces.
Appearance
Boniness due to segregation:
- Maximum permissible extent: ≤ 5% wall area.
Through bolt holes: Fill with the stabilised earth mixture.
Repairs: Permitted.
See AS 3610 clause 5.6.5 and Table 3.4.1.
Marks and stains: Remove at completion.
Efflorescence: Remove before sealing.
3.12 TEMPORARY WORK

Facework sample panel
General: If not incorporated, demolish.

Maintenance manual
General: Submit a manual describing care and maintenance of the walling.
A prototype manual has been developed by ASEG, and can be found on their website www.aseg.net.
3.14 MAINTENANCE
Protection
General: Provide temporary protection during plastering and other wet trades.
Spare material
General: Supply 100 kg of soil mix.

EARTH BLOCK WALLING STRUCTURE
EARTH BLOCK WALLING
This worksection deals with walling of straw-reinforced, sun-dried earth blocks (adobe), both stabilised and unstabilised. It does
not address monolithic stabilised earth walling, compressed blocks (e.g. Cinva ram) and lightly-burnt blocks.
• Monolithic stabilised earth walling.
• Compressed block.
• Lightly burnt blocks.
• None.
• Show reinforcement, if required, on the drawings.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
Provide earth block walling that is:
- Properly constructed.
- Finished to be aesthetically pleasing.
- Continues to perform satisfactorily for its design life of 50 years.
You may wish to nominate a different design life.

General
have no overlaps.
>

1.3 INSPECTION
Notice
- Sampling for field testing.
- Field testing.
- Forms for blocks prior to casting blocks.
- Commencement of casting blocks.
- Completed blocks prior to use.
- Damp-proof courses, in position.
- Termite protection measures in place.
- Embedded pipes and conduits, in position.
- Built-in items, in position.
- Control joints ready for joint filler.
1.4 TESTS
General
Except as nominated otherwise testing is to be to SAA HB195 Appendix A.
Soil tests
Liquid limit: To AS 1289.3.1.1.
Plastic limit: To AS 1289.3.2.1.
Plasticity index: To AS 1289.3.3.1.
Linear shrinkage: To AS 1289.3.4.1.
Particle size distribution: To AS 1289.3.6.1.
Unit sampling
Rate: For each test, sample units at the rate of 1 per 1000, randomly selected.
3
Vary to suit. Alternatively use sampling on the basis of wall volume e.g. 1 unit per 25 – 100 m of wall.
Marks: Uniquely mark each test sample, occupying 5% (maximum) of sample area.
Unit tests
Satisfactory units do not warp, curl or crack as they dry/cure. They do not chip or break off at corners when moved, will
withstand 10 – 15 min of light to moderate rain with little or no erosion or washing, and are of uniform colour when broken in
half.
Dry density: Field or laboratory test.
Refer to SAA HB195 Appendix A (3.1 or 4.1).
Unconfined characteristic compressive strength: Calculate compressive strength (MPa) using Ka =
aspect ratio correction factor.
Advise if not feasible to carry out this laboratory test.
An alternative capping is felt, or calcinated gypsum mortar - the test must be carried out after the capping has set. Another
alternative is to plane or rub smooth the bearing surface of the specimen. The test given in CSIRO Bulletin 5 Appendix E is not
applicable - it is intended for rammed earth and pressed-soil blocks only.
Characteristic adjusted compressive strength test: According to the BCA Housing Provisions, this may be required by relevant
approval authority.
Bending strength: Perform this field test if laboratory testing for compressive strength is not feasible.
In Boulder and New Mexico, this is called modulus of rupture. SAA HB195 also calls it flexural strength.
Accelerated erosion:
- Application: All test units.
- Type: Swinburne Accelerated Erosion Test.
The test given in CSIRO Bulletin 5 Appendix D is regarded as too severe.
Absorption:

- Application: Stabilised units.

- Sample size: 100 mm cube, cut from a sample unit.
Robustness:
- Application: Standardised units.
1.5 SAMPLES
General
Colour and texture: Supply sample units indicating the range of likely variation. Label, and store on
site under cover when accepted.
- Number: 4.
- Size: Full size.
Facework: Provide a sample panel.
- Size (minimum): 900 mm long x 600 mm high.
- Location: >
A sample panel may be required by relevant approval authority. AS 3610 Table 3.4.1 advises that test panels are optional for
untreated surfaces, but to be specified for colour control and for treated surfaces. See also AS 3610 clause 3.6 on test panels.
1.6 TOLERANCES
Tolerances
Conform to the Tolerances table.
Tolerances table
Horizontal position of any earth wall element 45 mm
specified or shown in plan at its base or at each
storey level
Deviation with a storey from a vertical line through 35 mm per 3 m of height
the base of the member
Deviation from vertical in total height of building 40 mm
(from base)
Relative displacement between loadbearing walls 40 mm
in adjacent storeys intended to be in vertical
alignment
Deviation (bow) from line in plan in any length up Single curvature: 45 mm
to 10 m
Deviation from design wall thickness - 20 mm, + 40 mm
The values given are taken from SAA HB195 Table 3.3. Vary as required.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
Soil criteria
Liquid limit: 30 – 50%.
Reduce to 25 – 40% when using cement stabilisation.
Plastic limit: 10 – 25%.
Plasticity index: 15 – 35%.
Reduce to 2 – 22% when using cement stabilisation.
Some argue that the Atterburg limits are not relevant, but they are given in SAA HB195 (which quotes the French earth building
authority, CRATerre, based at the School of Architecture in Grenoble University (www.craterre.archi.fr). CSI gives different
figures. One reason they differ may be that they depend on the stabiliser used, if any.

Linear shrinkage: 10 – 60 mm.

When tested on a 600 mm long mould.
Soil particle sizes
Clay: < 0.002 mm.
Silt: < 0.06 mm.
Sand: 0.06 – 2.0 mm.
Coarse aggregate: 2.0 – 25 mm.
The range is 2 – 20 mm in AS 1289.3.6.1 for medium and fine gravel.
Soil particle size distribution
Mixes are not traditionally specified – instead tests are specified for the finished units, as a way of trialling the various mixes
before production starts. Choose one or the other method.
Water soluble salts content: < 0.2%.
From Boulder, but 2% in New Mexico. Includes sulphates.
Organic content: < 2%.
Clay and silt content: 10 – 30%.
For soils used in straw-reinforced earth blocks. Vary for cement stabilised blocks e.g. clay content: up to 25%; silt content: 15 –
20%. Basically, it must be sufficient to bind the particles together.
Sand and coarse aggregate content: 30 – 80%.
For soils used in straw-reinforced earth blocks. Vary for cement stabilised blocks e.g. 45 – 80%.
Water
Clean, fresh, free from impurities.
Brackish water will crystallise on the surface of the units.
Crack-control agent
Straw:
- Length: 40 – 60 mm.
- Ratio: 5 kg to 30 kg of straw/m3 of soil.
From CSIRO Bulletin 5 clause 5.1 and SAA HB195. Traditional shrinkage crack-control agents include straw, horse hair, or pine
needles. Not required for cement stabilised soil.
Stabilising agent
Delete if the blocks are not to be stabilised.
Type: Cement.
Grade: GP.
Cement is a common stabiliser in Australia and is used with soils that lack sufficient cohesion.
Portland cement hardens the mix, but doesn’t waterproof it.
Other stabilising agents used include bituminous emulsion which makes the mix more water resistant by coating the clay
particles, clay and lime (not recommended as colloidal strength is reduced, as it is if too much cement is added).
Mortar
Earthen mortar: Same mix as for the units, but with added sand, and no straw or particles over 6 mm.
Thoroughly soak and mix to prevent clay-balling.
This is the recommended mortar type, according to CSI. The mortar should be weaker than the earth blocks, so that cracking
runs through the joints, which are easier to repair. See also Boulder, and CSIRO Bulletin 5 clause 5.3. Cement-based mortar is
not recommended, according to CSI. Boulder and New Mexico permit both earthen and cement-lime-sand mortars.
Cement-based mortar is often used by commercial block layers, according to the Earth Building Association of Australia.
Water repellent additive:
- Product: Tech Dry KR2.
- Application: 450 ml – 600 ml per 1000 kg dry mix.
The use of water repellent additive such as KR2 makes unnecessary the application of a water repellent to the finished walling
and gives better overall performance.

2.2 COMPONENTS
Control joint infill
Material: 25 x 25 mm UV stable acrylic adhesive impregnated poly foam strip.
Structural fixings
Type: Chemical anchors.
Damp-proof courses
Material: Polythene sheeting.
Alternatively, bitumen coated aluminium, copper or copper alloys, lead or zinc sheeting.
Masonry units
Off-the-shelf adobe units are available in some parts of Australia, even so, because of their weight and relative fragility they are
usually made locally.
Formed size (h x w x l): 100 x 250 x 350 mm.
This is a common size - they weigh 14 – 16 kg each. CSIRO Bulletin 5 clause 5.2 recommends length 1.5 x width. The
recommended upper limit for safe manual handling is 16-20 kg (See NOHSC 2005 National Code of Practice for Manual
Handling). Size chosen should suit wall thickness, bearing in mind that thick walls can be made using thin blocks.
Test criteria:
- Dry density: 1200 – 2000 kg/m3.
- Unconfined characteristic compressive strength (minimum): 1.0 MPa.
From SAA HB195. Boulder and New Mexico require an average strength of 2.1 MPa, with a minimum of 1.8 MPa.
- Bending strength (average): 0.2 MPa.
From SAA HB195, which allows a range from 0 to 0.5 MPa. Boulder and New Mexico require 0.35 MPa.
- Accelerated erosion test pitting depth:
. Unsheltered external walls: 0 – 10 mm.
. Sheltered external walls: 10 – 20 mm.
. Internal walls: 20 – 30 mm.
From SAA HB195.
- Absorption (maximum): 2.5% by weight.
- Robustness: Unit must remain intact, but corner chipping is permitted, consistent with the unit
remaining suitable for wall construction.
Defects:
Would be expected to vary for units with or without straw.
- Breakages (maximum): 50 x 50 x 50 mm broken off per unit.
- Cracks (maximum): 75 mm long, 3 mm wide, 5 mm deep.
CSIRO Bulletin 5, Boulder, AEBH, CSI and New Mexico concur. Except that New Mexico sets a maximum length of 50 mm.
CSIRO Bulletin 5 clause 2.4.2 stipulates a maximum depth of 5 mm in one place, and 10 mm in another. The text defaults to the
more stringent.
Nailing blocks
Solid timber, or hollow timber box filled with earthen mortar. Timber unseasoned or thoroughly pre-
wetted.
For partitions, and for door and window jambs, cabinets etc. See CSIRO Bulletin 5 figure 1.6 for alternatives. Use of moist
timber overcomes problems with timber expanding in situ.
Timber nailers
25 x 100 x 450 mm, set into mortar joints.
Steel components, including reinforcement
Durability classification to AS 3700 (minimum): R2.
AS 3700 clause 5.5, Table 1 defines ratings R0 – R4. Vary to suit.
Reinforcement
Bar: To AS/NZS 4671.

Machine-welded mesh: To AS/NZS 4671.

Horizontal bedded reinforcement: 3 mm truss type.
Or ladder type, according to CSI. Only required in non-earthquake areas. Delete accordingly.
Preferably show any required reinforcement on the drawings.
Steel lintels, columns, cleats and brackets
Steel grade:
- Universal beams and columns, parallel flange channels, large angles: 300.
- Taper flange beams and columns, flats, small angles: 250.
Finish: Hot-dip galvanize after fabrication (to AS/NZS 4680).
Lintels: Use earth, reinforced earth or concrete or timber lintels, proprietary lintels in accordance with
the manufacturers’ technical literature or conform to the Steel angle and T-lintels table.
Preferably show on the drawings and delete this subclause.
Lintels may also be reinforced concrete, reinforced masonry, epoxy-coated steel, or treated/durable timber.
As an alternative to individual lintels, use a continuous reinforced concrete lintel all around the building e.g. in cyclonic or
earthquake-prone areas. Show on the drawings.
Steel and or T-lintels table
Maximum Wall height above ≤ 600 mm Wall height above > 600 mm, ≤ 1800 mm
span
(mm) Angle lintel size T-Lintel Bearing Angle lintel size T-Lintel Bearing
dimensions: min. dimensions: min.
HxWxT (mm) HxWxT (mm)
(mm) (mm)
1000 2.75 x 50 x 5UA 81 x 150 x 6 100 2.125 x 75 x 8UA 136 x 150 x 6 200
2000 2.100 x 75 x 6UA 136 x 150 x 6 150 2.150 x 90 x 8UA 156 x 150 x 6 200
2400 2.125 x 75 x 8UA 156 x 150 x 6 150 2.150 x 90 x 10UA 160 x 150 x 10 250
2800 2.150 x 90 x 8UA 158 x 150 x 8 200 2.150 x 100 x 210 x 200 x 10 300
10UA
3000 2.150 x 90 x 160 x 150 x 10 200 2.150 x 100 x 210 x 200 x 10 300
10UA 12UA
The table assumes that the lintels are in walls as follows:

• 400 mm maximum thick.
• Upper storey or single storey openings.
• In non-cyclone areas.
• Supporting ceiling/roof framing of span less than 8 m with combined dead and live load not exceeding 1.15 kPa.
Timber lintels
Size: Width of the wall and in conformance with the Timber lintels height table.
Grade: F5 minimum.
Bearing: 300 mm (minimum).
Timber lintels height table
Maximum span (mm) Lintel height (mm)
1200 100
1800 150
2400 200
3000 250
Assumed conditions for timber lintels are:

• Upper or single storey construction in non-cyclonic wind speed area.

• Light timber roof of maximum span no greater than 8 m.
• Extent of earth wall above lintel no greater than 600 mm.
• No openings in earth wall directly above lintel.
• Lintel subject to uniformly distributed loads only.
Timber fixing plates

Size: 200 x 50 mm (minimum).
Holding-down bolts
Type: 10 mm diameter threaded rod.
See CSIRO Bulletin 5 Figure 1.4 for alternatives. Design required for earthquake and cyclonic conditions.
The BCA Housing Provisions limit earthwalls to design wind speed W41, and to earthquake design category H1 and H2.
Termination: Horizontal 5 x 100 x 200 mm steel plate, weld-fixed, or with nuts.
Vary to suit.
Depth of embedment:
- Length (minimum): 450 mm.
Depends on lateral loads and uplift from roof. Check adequacy of this length and vary to suit.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 FABRICATION
Mixing
General: Moisten soil to liquid limit. Leave pit-mixed mud wet overnight.
Pot-mixed mud can be left for up to a week.
Stabilising: Add cement at 2.5 – 15% by mass.
From SAA HB195, which also gives figures for bitumen and other stabilisers. Vary as required.
Crack control: Add straw at 5 – 30 kg/m3.
Hot weather: If placement of walling is to proceed when surrounding outdoor shade temperature
exceeds 32ºC, submit proposal.
Forming
Press mix into forms on a bed of sand on the ground or on concrete. Lift forms vertically and wash. Do
not move units until cured.
Forms may be soaked or oiled timber, or oiled steel or steel-lined timber.
Curing
General: Sun-dry the units for more than 7 days in situ (under shelter in hot, dry weather) after
forming. Then tip the units on one side and sun-dry in situ for another 7 days.
Cement stabilised: Cover blocks with plastic sheet for at least 24 hours after casting.
Storage
Stack cured units close to point of use on boards off the ground. Stack on edge, 2 – 3 rows high.
Orient stacks for equal exposure to sun and wind on both faces. Protect the tops of stacks against the
weather.
3.2 LAYING UNITS

General
Drying: Do not lay units until they are dry and at least 28 days after forming.
Unstabilised units: Sprinkle with water before laying. Relay disturbed units in fresh mortar.
Temperature: Do not lay when ambient temperature is or is expected to be < 5°C within 48 hours of
placement. Do not lay on frozen materials.
Daily progress: Establish leads at corners. Step back incomplete walls, do not tooth. Cover incomplete
work at the top. Lay a maximum of 500 – 700 mm height per day.

To prevent compression of the joints.

Voids at dissimilar materials: Fill with earthen mortar.
Protection: Protect tops of walls from rain until the roof is in place.
Joints
Bedding: Full flush type, with no open head joints.
Or, with partially open head joints, if the surface is to be rendered, from New Mexico. Amend to suit.
Bond: Running bond. Overlap units 100 mm.
Type: Flush, 13 – 19 mm thick. Tool concave at exposed surfaces. Remove excess mortar.
Control joints:
- Spacing: >
To SAA HB195 Figure 3.3. Best shown on a drawing.
Protection
Unstabilised units: Do not locate unstabilised units within 100 mm of adjacent floor levels, within
225 mm of adjacent ground levels, within 100 mm of the top of unenclosed walls and parapets, around
roof drains, and in other areas where there is risk of moisture.
Walls on concrete floors are prone to damage from moisture either during construction, or later. They should be on a plinth of
concrete or brick.

Location
General: At the base of the earth walls above footings or slab (plinth).
Walls on slabs
Finish flush with outer face of slab and inner face of wall. Upturn on inside behind skirting and
downturn at outer face of slab, at least 25 mm.
Installation
General: Lay in long lengths, in a single width. Lay full width at angles and intersections and lap at
least 150 mm at joints. Step as necessary.
Junctions: Preserve continuity of damp-proofing at junctions of damp-proof course and waterproof
membranes.
3.4 FIXINGS AND EMBEDDED ITEMS

Preferably document on the drawings.
Temporary fixings
Not permitted, except to surfaces that will be concealed in the finished work.
Nailing blocks and nailers
Installation: Build-in as the work progresses.
Partitions: Nail timber framed partitions to nailing blocks.
Structural fixings
e.g. Hilti HIT C 100; Ramset Chemset or chemical grout anchor; Reid Epoxy Injection System.
Location: ≥ 150 mm from edge of wall.

Installation: Drill holes at least 3 mm larger than anchor diameter. Blow out holes before injecting
resin. Remove overspill immediately.
Wall, window and door frames fixings
Type: >
e.g. T-nailing block, wedged nailing block, galvanized wall tie, fixing brackets for steel frames, at 300 mm centres, and (optional)
continuous fixing strip. See CSIRO Bulletin 5 Figures 1.6, 1.7.
Light-load fixings
Type: >
e.g. nails > 50 mm long galvanized, for fixing aluminium windows, pipes, cables, battens, electrical components and plumbing
components.

3.5 REINFORCEMENT
Drill or split the units at vertical reinforcing.
Installation
General: Do not cut, weld or grind on site. Build-in as work progresses. Lap 450 mm at splices. Fold
and bend at corners so that the longitudinal wires are continuous. Stop 200 mm short of control joints.
Place in centre of the width of the wall, and in the bedding joint.
Cover (minimum):
- 75 mm for exposed surfaces.
- 25 mm for protected surfaces.
Vertical intervals (maximum): 500 mm, for full height of the wall.
Also provide in the first course above lintels, extended 600 mm each side of opening.
3.6 STEEL LINTELS

Installation
General: Do not cut, weld or grind on site. Build-in as work progresses. Keep lintels 10 mm clear of
heads and frames. Install T-lintels with horizontal component at the bottom, centred in the width of the
wall.
Propping: Temporarily prop lintels during construction and until the wall reaches its required strength.
3.7 TIMBER LINTELS

Installation
General: Build-in as work progresses. Keep lintels 10 mm clear of heads and frames.
3.8 PIPES AND CONDUITS

Installation
Installation: Lay conduits and water pipes in mortar joints as far as possible. Otherwise lay in chases.
Cover (minimum): 100 mm, if built-in.
Chases: Maximum depth 50 mm. Run vertically, not horizontally. Do not chase in exposed facework.
Thicken the walls for larger piping.
If permitted, or delete and insert “Not permitted”.
Water pipes: Pre-lag piping.
3.9 BOND BEAMS

Also known as top plates, tie beams, or belt courses.
Positions
Provide a continuous bond beam to bearing walls, at framed floor and at roof bearing levels. Build-in
as work progresses. Anchor the floor and roof structures to the bond beams.
Preferably, show positions in the drawings.
Concrete
Bedding: Felt or mortar.
Also for coping blocks.
Timber
CSIRO Bulletin 5 clause 1.7. Or, alternatively, double timber top plate, one on each side of the wall, held down by steel bar or
angle over them at the tie down location.
Steel
Postern: Centre on the wall.
Usually PFC or cold rolled C section.

3.10 HOLDING-DOWN BOLTS

See CSIRO Bulletin 5 Appendix A to determine depth of embedment, or preferably document on the drawings. Cyclone bolts
are required in cyclone-prone areas. Bolts may also required in areas of seismic activity.
General
Cover (minimum): 75 mm.
Centres (mm): >
Depth (mm): >
Nuts
Accessible for tightening.
Installation
Set in perpends and units split lengthwise, in alternating courses. Do not locate within 150 mm of end
of wall. Locate in the centre of wall.
See CSIRO Bulletin 5 clause 5.4 for other alternatives, including drilling or forming holes in the units.
3.11 FINISHES
See CSIRO Bulletin 5 figure 1.12 regarding protection of walls by overhang. Protected walls, and stabilised walls, do not need to
be rendered or sealed. Unfinished external walls are not permitted in US codes, according to CSI. New Mexico exempts exterior
patio and yard walls etc. Use of silicone sealers or latex paints is usually unsuccessful - they form a crust in the top 6 – 10 mm,
which cracks and separates, according to CSI. There seems to be a consensus that cement render is also usually unsuccessful.
Proposed finishes should be trialed, if only because earth blocks will vary from site to site.
Appearance
Marks and stains: Remove at completion.
Efflorescence: Remove before sealing or rendering.
Mud render
General: Render the exteriors of walls made of unstabilised units.
Preparation: Brush the substrate, score and moisten.
Mix: 3:1 clay:clean sand, with straw reinforcing, and enough water to make a paste.
Render: Two coats, each 5 – 7 mm thick.
Finish: Polish the coating using sheepskin or small rounded stones.
3.12 TEMPORARY WORK

Facework sample panel
If not incorporated, demolish.

Maintenance manual
Submit a manual describing care and maintenance of the walling.
A prototype manual has been developed by ASEG, and can be found on their website www.aseg.net.
3.14 MAINTENANCE
Protection
Provide temporary protection during plastering and other wet trades.
Spare material
Supply 100 kg of soil mix.

BRICK AND BLOCK CONSTRUCTION STRUCTURE
BRICK AND BLOCK CONSTRUCTION
This worksection is applicable to unreinforced, reinforced and prestressed masonry for manufactured units of clay, calcium
silicate and concrete laid in mortar and for autoclaved, aerated concrete (AAC) units laid in thinbed mortar, and used in building
and related construction. It includes built-in items such as ties and lintels.
• Earth block walling.
• Stone masonry.
• Roofing.
• Partitions – brick and block, for interior fitout masonry walls.
• Plastering.
• Partitions – brick and block.
• If durability, (lateral) stability or fire resistance are issues, ensure that they are properly dealt with in the drawings.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
General: Provide brick and block construction that is integrated into the building construction.
Selection: Conform to the Selections.

General
have no overlaps.
- Plastering.

Specify tie-down bolts, steel straps and other built-in roof restraints in this worksection or in the appropriate structural
worksection (e.g. Light timber framing, Light steel framing).
1.3 STANDARD
General
Familiarity with this standard is essential.
Design to AS 3700 is assumed not to be the contractor’s responsibility. Therefore it is essential that the drawings indicate the
design requirements for the masonry elements, including dimensions, strength and fire resistance rating.
Only particular requirements for the project should be added to this specification.
1.4 INTERPRETATION
Definitions
General: For the purposes of this worksection the definitions in AS 3700 clause 1.5.2 and those given
below apply:
- Brickwork and blockwork types:
. Ordinary: Brickwork and blockwork which is not tested for specified strength values.
- Face units: Bricks or blocks used in facework, including purpose-made units such as squints, sills
and thresholds.
- Facework: Brickwork or blockwork in which the form, or form and colour, of the face units and joints
is visible in the completed works.
- Joint:
. Flush joint: Joint that is finished flush with the surface of the bricks or blocks.
. Raked joint: Joint that is raked out to a specified depth behind the face of the bricks or blocks.
. Tooled joint: A joint, including flush joint and raked joint, in which the surface is trowelled or ironed
to a smooth, dense finish.
1.5 INSPECTION
Notice
- Unit type, colour and texture.
- Bottoms of cavities, after cleaning out.
- Bottoms of core holes, before grouting.
- Reinforcement type and diameter.
- Positioning of reinforcing before grouting.
- Control joints, ready for insertion of joint filler.
- Damp-proof courses, in position.
- Flashings, in position.
- Lintels, in position.
- Structural steelwork, including bolts and shelf angles, in position.
1.6 TESTS
Durability
Preferably specify on the drawings or in the Brick and block construction schedule mortars conforming with AS 3700 Tables
10.1 or 12.2 and delete this clause. For other mortars, retain this clause.
Mortar: Mortar durability tests are required.

Conformance: Test to verify conformance as follows:

- Standard: To AS 3700 Appendix FA.
- Acceptance criteria:
. Class M2: 0.5 mm.
. Class M3: 0.3 mm.
. Class M4: 0.1 mm.
The AS 3700 Appendix FA test is designed to be easily applied onsite to finished work. Delete this clause if testing is not
required.
Special brickwork or blockwork

“Special masonry” is defined in AS 3700 clause 1.5.2.21(f), as structural masonry with design strengths higher than those
specified in the standard. Retain this clause only if special brickwork or blockwork is required.
Conformance: Test to verify conformance with the Brick and block performance schedule and as
follows:
- Compressive strength: To AS 3700 Appendix C.
- Flexural strength: To AS 3700 Appendix D.
1.7 SAMPLES
Particular samples required may include accessories such as ties, ant caps, damp-proof course, flashing, sill bricks, squints and
vents. AS 3700 clause 11.7.2 covers rate of sampling for special masonry sampling. Add requirements here.
Brick or block unit samples
Face units: Submit face units of each type illustrating the range of variation available, including colour,
texture, surface irregularities, defective arrises, and shape.
- Number of each type: 6.
Facework sample panels
General: Provide, in a suitable position, a sample panel of each type of facework including face or
pointing mortar.
- Minimum size (face of panel) (mm): 1200 mm high x 1190 mm long.
If final design decisions have not been made about mortar colour and joint finish, it may be necessary to specify several trial
sample panels illustrating different combinations. However, to reduce cost, consider locating sample panels so that they may be
retained if approved, and incorporated into the works. Rely on these panels for definition of quality e.g. accuracy, neatness.
Set out: Demonstrate a trial set-out of 2 courses for each panel of facework.
Sand samples
Type: Submit a 2 kg sample of each type of sand required to be of a particular colour, grade or source.
Samples of sand may be required where a particular source or colour is required, and for major works, where testing for grading
is necessary.
1.8 TOLERANCES
Facework
Conformance: Conform to AS 3700 Table 11.1.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
Only particular requirements for the project should be added in the project specification. See AS 3700 clause 1.4. The standard
contains defaults which should be adequate for most small-works masonry.
Bricks and blocks
Minimum age of clay bricks: 7 days.
Brick growth is a particular problem with polychromatic brickwork – detail accordingly. See also RAIA Advisory Note
AN14.01.602.

Mortar materials
Admixtures:
- Admixtures: To AS 3700 clause 10.4.2.4.
Lime: To AS 1672.1.
Masonry cement: To AS 1316.
- Type: GP.
Normally “Type GP”. Where sulphate attack is possible, specify “Type SR” (see AS 3700 clause 5.4). If fly ash is permitted, the
cement will be to Type GB or Type LH.
Proportions: Conform to the Mortar mix table.
Sand: To be fine aggregate with a low clay content and free from efflorescing salts, selected for colour
and grading.
Water: To be clean and free from any deleterious matter.
White cement: To have iron salts content ≤ 1%.
Mortar mix table
Mortar class Cement, lime, sand ratios Water thickener
to AS 3700
Clay Concrete Calcium silicate
Masonry cement
M3 1:0:4 1:0:4 n/a No
M4 1:0:3 n/a n/a No
Portland cement
M2 1:2:9 n/a n/a No
M3 1:1:6 1:1:6 n/a Optional
1:0:5 1:0:5 1:0:5 Yes
M4 1:0.5:4.5 1:0.5:4.5 n/a Optional
1:0:4 1:0:4 1:0:4 Yes
Edit to the mortar mixes required for the project, and schedule the location where each is to be used.
Thin bed mortars for AAC are proprietary materials purpose-made, and so not covered by this table.
Steel lintels
Angles and flats: To AS/NZS 3679.1.
Cold formed proprietary lintels: To be designed to AS/NZS 4600.
Corrosion protection: To AS/NZS 2699.3.
Galvanizing: Do not cut after galvanizing.
Wall ties
- Type: >
Nominate Type B where specific seismic design characteristics are required. Otherwise Type A.
Strength classification:
- Corrosive resistance and durability.
- Cavities > 60 and < 200 mm wide: Heavy duty.
- Cavities > 200 mm wide: >
Specify here or detail on the drawings.
- Masonry veneer: Light duty.
- Normal cavity construction and at abutments: Medium duty.

2.2 COMPONENTS
Corrosion resistance and durability
Compliance: To be as follows and to the Corrosion resistance and durability table, or provide
proprietary products with metallic and/or organic coatings of equivalent corrosion resistance:
- Built-in products: Below damp proof course to be stainless steel 316 or engineered polymer.
- Bricks and blocks: Below damp-proof course, and in external leaves in the High corrosivity category,
use ‘Exposure’ category to AS/NZS 4456.10: 1997 Appendix A (Salt attack resistance categories).
- Mortar: Below damp-proof course use mortar grade M4 to the Mortar mixes table.
Some of these defaults are marginally more severe than some allowances in AS 3700 in part in response to increasing
problems of ground salinity and in part in the interests of simplicity.
Designate the corrosivity category of the project in General requirements. Delete from the following the tables for corrosivity
categories that do not apply.
Corrosion resistance and durability table – Low corrosivity category
Situation1 Steel lintels Wall ties, connectors and Minimum cement
other structural steel content (mortar
accessories above damp grade) above damp
proof course. proof course
Internal Galvanize after - Galvanize after fabrication M2
fabrication 300 g/m2 300 g/m2
- Metallic-coated sheet
Z275/AZ150
- Galvanized wire 300 g/m2
- In line galvanized sections
with after fabrication
coating repair ILG/150
External Galvanize after - Galvanize after fabrication M2
- Metallic-coated sheet Z600
Situation1
Corrosion resistance and durability table – Medium corrosivity category

- Metallic-coated sheet
Z275/AZ150
External Galvanize after - Galvanize after fabrication M3
Situation1

Corrosion resistance and durability table – High corrosivity category

External - Stainless 316 - Stainless 316 M4
- Galvanize after - Engineered polymer
fabrication 600 g/m2
plus organic coating
1
Situation
Connectors and accessories

Flashings and damp-proof courses
3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
Mortar mixing
General: Measure volumes accurately to achieve the specified proportions. Machine mix for at least
six minutes.
Protection from contamination
General: Protect masonry materials and components from ground moisture and contamination.
Bond
Type: Stretcher bond.
Other options include English, Flemish, stack, or running 100 mm stagger for AAC units.
Existing work: e.g. “Rod and bond to match existing”.
Building in
Embedded items: Build in wall ties and accessories as the construction proceeds. If it is not
practicable to obtain the required embedment wholly in the mortar joint in hollow unit brickwork or
blockwork, fill appropriate cores with grout or mortar.
Steel door frames: Fill the backs of jambs and heads solid with mortar as the work proceeds.
Heads of some steel door frames may be used as lintels. Consult manufacturer.
Clearance for timber frame shrinkage
General: In timber frame brick veneer construction, leave clearances between window frames and
brick sill and between roof frames and the brick veneer as follows:
- Additional clearance: Accommodate additional shrinkage of unseasoned floor timbers.
- Single storey frames and ground floor windows (not for slab on ground): 10 mm.
- Two storey frames and upper floor windows: 20 mm.
Construction at different rates or times
Monolithic structural action: If two or more adjoining sections of masonry, including intersecting walls,
are constructed at different rates or times, rake back or tie the intersections between those sections so
that monolithic structural action is obtained in the completed work.
Holes and chases
General: If holes and chases are required in masonry walls, provide proposals.

Joining to existing
General: If jointing to existing work is required, provide a straight joint. Do not tooth new masonry into
existing work.
Chasing
Requirements: Unless otherwise permitted, chasing of blockwork shall be to the Concrete blockwork
chasing table and subject to the following limitations:
- Chasing may only be carried out in core-filled hollow blocks or solid blocks which are not designated
as structural.
- Parallel chases on opposite faces of a wall shall not be closer than 600 mm to each other.
Concrete blockwork chasing table
• Block thickness (mm) • Depth of chase (maximum mm)
• 190 • 35
• 140 • 25
• 90 • 20
Joints
General: Lay solid and cored units on a full bed of mortar.
Face-shell bed hollow units: Fill perpends solid. Cut mortar flush.
Finish:
- Externally: Tool to give a dense water-shedding finish.
- Internally: If wall is to be plastered, rake not more than 10 mm to give a key.
- Thickness: 10 mm.
Cutting: Set out bricks or blocks with joints of uniform width and minimise cutting of masonry units.
Monolithic structural action
General: Provide brick or block header units, except in stretcher bond facework, to AS 3700 clause
4.11.2.
Spacing: 600 mm maximum.
Adjust to suit.
Location:
- At engagement of engaged piers.
- At engagement of diaphragms with the leaves in diaphragm walls.
- At intersections of flanges with shear walls.
- At intersections with supporting walls and buttresses.
- Between leaves in solid masonry construction.
Rate of construction
Regulate the rate of construction to eliminate joint deformation, slumping or instability.
Rods
Set out: Construct masonry to the following rods:
- 75 mm high units: 7 courses to 600 mm.
Aerated autoclaved concrete blocks and perforated clay blocks will be to rods other than those listed in the worksection. Refer
to manufactured details.
Weather protection
General: Keep the top surface of brickwork and blockwork covered to prevent the entry of rainwater.
Temporary support
General: If the final stability of the brickwork or blockwork is dependent on (structural) elements to be
constructed after the brickwork or blockwork, provide proposals for temporary support or bracing.

3.2 FACEWORK
Cleaning
General: Clean progressively as the work proceeds to remove mortar smears, stains and
discolouration. Do not use acid. Do not erode brickwork or blockwork.
AS 3700 clause 11.10 applies. Choice of correct cleaning method is the contractor’s responsibility.
Colour mixing
Distribution: If the colour of the face units is visible, evenly distribute the colour range of units and
prevent colour concentrations and “banding”.
Commencement
General: Commence at least 1 full course for blockwork, or 2 full courses for brickwork, below adjacent
finished level.
Delete or amend if facework commences at a higher level.
Double face walls
Selection: Select face units for uniform width and double-face qualities in single-leaf masonry with
facework both sides.
Preferred face: Before starting, obtain a ruling as to which is the preferred wall face, and favour that
face should a compromise be unavoidable.
Delete if shown on the drawings.
Perpends
General: If it is proposed to use other than vertically aligned perpends in alternate courses, provide
details.
Delete if already covered on the drawings.
Sills and thresholds
General: Solidly bed sills and thresholds and lay them so that the top surfaces drain away from the
building.
Set out: Set out so that no unit is cut smaller than ¾ full width.
Add here clauses specifying other trim items, if required; e.g. copings, string courses, corbel courses, parapets, if not shown on
the drawings.
Sill units: Detail or schedule on the drawings (e.g. squint bricks, brick on edge, purpose-made blocks, tiles).
Threshold units: Detail or schedule on the drawings. Schedule type of unit (e.g. brick on edge, purpose-made blocks, tiles).
3.3 SUBFLOOR WORK

Delete if the building does not have a suspended floor. Otherwise, show support layout on the drawings and coordinate with the
Timber flooring and decking worksection.
Access openings
General: In internal walls, leave door width openings beneath doorways to give access to underfloor
areas.
Air vent locations
For subfloor ventilation, BCA clause F1.12 and Table F1.12 provides minimum requirements for various climates. Defaults
exceed the minimum requirements of Table F1.12.
Cavity walls: Provide matching vents in the internal leaves located as near as practicable to the vents
in the external leaves.
Location: Below damp-proof course to internal and external walls.
Show on the drawings. Location of air vents is often a critical design issue.
Air vent types
Blockwork:
- Concrete framed: Bronze wire mesh in concrete frame 390 x 190 mm.
- Vent blocks: Purpose-made vent blocks.
Brickwork:
- Concrete framed: Bronze wire mesh in concrete frames, 470 x 160 mm.

- Cut brick: 2 cut bricks laid vertically and evenly spaced in a 230 mm wide x 2 course high opening,
backed with bronze wire mesh built in.
- Terra cotta: Perforated, 230 x 160 mm.
Underpinning
Grouting: Pack dry mix grout between underpinning and existing structure with 1:0.25:3 mortar within
24 and 48 hours of completion of each panel of underpinning.
Amend if appropriate.
3.4 CAVITY WORK

Cavity clearance
General: Keep cavities clear at all times.
Cavity fill
General: Fill the cavity to 1 course above adjacent finished (ground) level with mortar. Face the top
surface towards the outer leaf.
Cavity width
General: Provide minimum cavity widths in conformance with the following:
- Brick or block walls: 50 mm.
- Brick veneer walls: 40 mm between the masonry leaf and the loadbearing frame and 25 mm
minimum between the masonry leaf and sheet bracing.
Delete if shown on the drawings or amend to suit.
Openings
Care: Do not close the cavity at the jambs of external openings.
Delete if drawings indicate closed cavities.
Wall ties connectors and accessories
Protection: Install to prevent water passing across the cavity.

See AS 3700 clauses 4.7.3 and 10.6. BCA at clause F1.9(b) permits two options for damp-proof courses – to AS/NZS 2904 or
impervious termite shields. This is varied in SA to address the effects of salt damp.
Location
The defaults are not comprehensive. Typical damp-proof course and flashing applications should be shown on the drawings. If
they are, delete the following as appropriate. Coordinate damp-proof courses with slip joints and with termite shields.
General: Provide damp-proof courses as follows:
- At timber floors: In the first course below the level of the underside of ground floor timbers in internal
walls and inner leaves of cavity walls.
- Cavity walls built off slabs on ground: In the bottom course of the outer leaf, continuous horizontally
across the cavity and up the inner face bedded in mortar, turned 30 mm into the inner leaf 1 course
above.
- Masonry veneer construction: In the bottom course of the outer leaf, continuous horizontally across
the cavity. Fasten to the inner frame 75 mm above floor level.
- Walls adjoining infill floor slabs on membranes: In the course above the underside of the slab in
internal walls and inner leaves of cavity walls. Project 40 mm and dress down over the membrane
turned up against the wall.
Height: Not less than:
- 150 mm above the adjacent finished ground level.
- 75 mm above the finished paved or concrete area.
- 50 mm above the finished paved or concreted area and protected from the direct effect of the
weather.
Installation
General: Lay in long lengths. Lap full width at angles and intersections and at least 150 mm at joints.
Step as necessary, but not exceeding 2 courses per step. Sandwich damp-proof courses between
mortar.

- Junctions: Preserve continuity of damp-proofing at junctions of damp-proof courses and waterproof

membranes.
Lap sealing: Specify special treatment for severe conditions, e.g. mastic sealing, or pop riveting laps in metal materials.
3.6 FLASHINGS
Location
The locations, profiles and fixings of flashings are best shown on the drawings. If they are shown there, delete the following as
appropriate.
These defaults are not comprehensive. See the Roofing worksection for roof flashings.
General: Provide flashings and weatherings as follows:
- Floors: Full width of outer leaf immediately above slab or shelf angle, continuous across cavity and
up the inner face bedded in mortar, turned 30 mm into the inner leaf 2 courses above. Where the
slab supports the outer skin and is not rebated, bed the flashing in a suitable sealant.
Position depends upon masonry support detail - shelf angle, slab or rebated slab.
- Under sills: 30 mm into the outer leaf bed joint 1 course below the sill, extending up across the
cavity and under the sill.
- Over lintels to openings in cavity walls: Full width of outer leaf immediately above the lintel,
continuous across cavity, turned 30 mm into the inner leaf 2 courses above. Extend at least 50 mm
beyond the lintels.
- Over lintels to openings in masonry veneer construction: Full width of outer leaf immediately above
the lintel, continuous across cavity. Turn up against the inner frame and fasten to it. Extend at least
50 mm beyond the lintels.
- At abutments with structural frames or supports: Vertical flashing in the cavity using 150 mm wide
material, wedged and grouted into a groove in the frame opposite the cavity.
- At jambs where cavities are closed: Full height flashing extending 75 mm beyond the closure into
the cavity, interleaved with the sill and head flashing at each end. Fix to jambs.
Installation
Any significant interruption of the cavity, including at conduits, should be flashed. Head and sill flashings should not be taut
across the cavity and threshold flashings should be bedded in mortar to run vertically and horizontally, not diagonally.
General: Sandwich flashings between mortar except on lintels or shelf angles. Bed flashings, sills and
copings in one operation to maximise adhesion.
Pointing: Point up joints around flashings, filling voids.
Weepholes
See AS 3700 clauses 4.7.2 and 11.4.14. Preferably indicate location and detail on the drawings, and delete this subclause.
Location: Provide weepholes to external leaves of cavity walls in the course immediately above
flashings, and cavity fill, and at the bottoms of unfilled cavities.
Form: Open perpends.
Maximum spacing: 720 mm.
3.7 WALL TIES

AS 3700 clause 4.10 gives spacings for wall ties in general work, adjacent to lateral supports and control joints and around
openings in masonry. For cavities exceeding 80 mm width, closer horizontal spacing may be necessary. If spacings other than
those given in the standard are required, specify them here.
Note that resilient ties may be needed for BCA sound insulation conformance.
Location
Provide wall ties in conformance with the Wall tie spacing table and as follows:
- Adjacent to vertical lateral supports.
Installation
Detail or specify fixing of masonry veneer ties to steel frames: e.g. “Welded”, or “Drilled and bolted”, on the drawings. Refer to
AS 3700 clause 4.10 for general design principles.
Embedment: At least 50 mm into mortar ensuring that mortar cover is 15 mm minimum to the outside
face of the mortar.

Flexible types: If ties or anchors extend across control joints, use ties or anchors which do not impair
the effectiveness of the joint.
Wall tie spacing table
Location requirements Maximum interval
Generally Around openings and joints
76 mm high bricks
- vertically 7 courses Alternate 3 and 4 courses
- horizontally 2½ bricks Alternate 1 and 1½ bricks
90 mm high bricks
- vertically 6 courses 3 courses
- horizontally 2 bricks 1 brick
190 mm high blocks
- vertically 3 courses Alternate 1 and 2 courses
- horizontally 1 block ½ block
Masonry veneer walls
- Top row of ties Half the horizontal spacing and
locate within 300 mm of top of
wall
- First row of ties above a Half the horizontal spacing and
horizontal floor support where locate within 300 mm of support
veneer continues past support
Wall ties for cavity walls and masonry veneer require design to transfer the appropriate loads, see AS 3700 clauses 4.10 and
7.7.
This table simplifies the requirements of AS 3700.
3.8 CONTROL OF MOVEMENT

Location and details are best shown on the drawings. If they are shown there, delete the following as appropriate.
Joints
General: Provide joints as follows:
- Contraction joints for concrete and calcium silicate masonry:
. Maximum length of continuous wall: 8 m.
. Minimum width of control joint: 10 mm.
- Expansion joints for clay brickwork:
. Maximum length of continuous wall: 8 m.
. Maximum vertical spacing: 8 m.
. Width of control joint: ≥ 10 mm ≤ 20 mm.
. Width of horizontal joint: ≥15 mm ≤ 20 mm.
Filler material: Provide compatible sealant and bond breaking backing materials which are non-
staining to masonry. Do not use bituminous materials with absorbent masonry units.
- Bond breaking materials: To be non-adhesive to sealant, or faced with a non-adhering material.
- Foamed materials: To be closed-cell or impregnated, not water-absorbing.
Joint filling:
- Installation: Clean the joints thoroughly and insert an easily compressible backing material before
sealing.
- Sealant depth: Fill the joints with a gun-applied flexible sealant for a depth of at least two-thirds the
joint width.


Fire rated control joints
For service penetrations, coordinate with services worksections.
General: If a control joint occurs in an element of construction required to have a fire resistance rating,
construct the control joint using fire stopping materials so that the fire resistance rating of the element
is not reduced.
- Fire stopping: To AS 4072.1.
AS 4072.1 is cited in BCA at clause C3.15(a), on openings in fire-resistant elements for service installations.
3.9 CHIMNEY TRAYS

For advice on chimney and fireplace design and construction see CBPI Technique Sheet 05, and SAA HB33.
Location
General: Build a one-piece corrosion resistant metal tray to the chimney at roof level.
Material: >
2
Material: e.g. “0.6 mm metallic coated steel sheet”, “20 kg/m sheet lead”, “0.6 mm copper sheet”.
Installation
General: Cut an opening for the flue. Turn tray edges up 25 mm around the flue opening 13 mm clear
of the flue walls. Externally turn the tray up 100 mm under the stepped flashing and down 100 mm
over the apron flashing. Lap and solder joints.
Weepholes
General: Provide 2 weepholes through the flue walls on opposite sides immediately above the tray.
3.10 BED JOINT REINFORCEMENT

Refers to light-gauge mesh or fabric, not to structural reinforcement in the bed joint of reinforced masonry. Essentially for crack
control only and of doubtful value in any case although it may hold together fractured masonry. Delete if not required.
Location
General: Locate as follows:
- In 2 bed joints below and above head and sill flashings to openings.
- In 2 bed joints below and above openings.
- In third bed joint above bottom of wall.
- In second bed joint below top of wall.
Maximum vertical intervals: 500 mm.
Installation
General: Lap 450 mm at splices. Fold and bend at corners so that the longitudinal wires are
continuous. Stop 50 mm short of control joints.
- In brickwork: Extend 450 mm beyond each side of openings.
Reinforcement
Material: Galvanized welded wire mesh.
Width: Equal to the width of the leaf, less 15 mm cover from each exposed surface of the mortar joint.
3.11 REINFORCED AND GROUTED BLOCKWORK

Design of reinforced masonry including bond beams is in accordance with AS 3700 Section 8 “Structural design of reinforced
masonry” and, if applicable, Section 6 “Design for fire resistance”. The sizes and locations of reinforcement are shown on the
drawings.
Cleaning core holes
General: Provide purpose-made cleanout blocks or machine cut a cleaning hole at the base of each
grouted core.
Location: Locate on the side of the wall which is to be rendered or otherwise concealed.
Cleaning: Rod cores to dislodge mortar fins protruding from the blocks and mortar droppings from
reinforcement. Remove through the clean-out blocks.

Grouting
Commencement: Do not commence until grout spaces have been cleaned out and the mortar joints
have attained sufficient strength to resist blow-outs.
Height of lift: Limit the height of individual lifts in any pour to ensure that the grout can be thoroughly
compacted to fill all voids and ensure bond between grout and masonry.
Compaction: Compact by vibration or by rodding.
Topping up: On the completion of the last lift, top up the grout after 10 min to 30 min, and vibrate or
rod to mix with the previous pour.
3.12 LINTELS
Location
General: Provide 1 lintel to each wall leaf in conformance with the Lintel schedule.
Installation
General: Do not cut on site. Keep lintels 10 mm clear of heads of frames.
Steel lintels: Pack mortar between the vertical component and supported masonry units. For angles
install the long leg vertical.
Minimum bearing each end:
- Span ≤ 1000 mm: 100 mm.
- Span > 1000 mm: 150 mm.
- Span > 3000 mm: 200 mm.
Propping: To prevent deflection or excessive rotation, temporarily prop lintels until the masonry
reaches its required strength.
- Minimum propping period: 7 days.
Protection
Steel lintels: Steel lintels shall be hot dip galvanized (after fabrication).
3.13 ARCHES
Show radius, number of voussoirs, springing, and so on, on the drawings.
Arch voussoirs
General: Cut units using a masonry saw.
Shapes and dimensions
General: Form arches using solid or cored (not hollow) masonry units.
3.14 BAGGING
Select from Dry bagging or Textured bagging.
Dry bagging
Application: Apply laying mortar to the surface using a hessian bag or similar. Flush up irregularities,
but leave the minimum amount of mortar on the surface.
Preparation: Cut joints flush before bagging.
Textured bagging
Application: Apply laying mortar to the surface using a sponge float. Flush up irregularities, but leave
approximately 2 mm of mortar on the surface. When initial set is reached, texture using a hand bristle
brush.
Preparation: Cut joints flush before bagging.

4 SELECTIONS
4.1 SCHEDULES
Brick and block construction schedule
Type or location
A B C
Bricks and blocks
Air vent units
Characteristic unconfined compressive strength
Dimensional category
Name or type
Salt attack resistance category
Sill units
Threshold units
Work size
Built-in components
Damp-proof course type
Flashings material
Lintel type
Weephole insect barriers
Resilient wall ties
Control joints
Backing rod
Primer
Sealant
Width
Grout
Composition
Compressive strength
Mortar
Cement
Colour
Proportions or class
Sand
Unit joints
Bond
Depth
Shape or profile

Use the columns A, B and C to schedule type or location. Delete or add columns as required.
Give sufficient information to identify the required unit; or show this information on the drawings. Alternatively refer to approved
samples.
Location: e.g. “All masonry”, or “Facework”, “External leaves of cavity walls”, “Internal leaves of cavity walls”, “Internal partition
walls”, “Underpinning”, “Work below ground level”. If different types of units are required for different locations, it may be
preferable to show the various locations on the drawings.
Characteristic unconfined compressive strength: For engineered masonry, where standard defaults (e.g. AS/NZS 4455 clause
2.3) are inadequate; a certificate may be required.
Category: To AS 3700 clause 1.5.2.22(a).
Type: To AS 3700 clause 1.5.2.22(b).
Name or type: Verify that the nominated manufacturer can supply the selected bricks or blocks in the necessary quantities,
including purpose-made specials if required, in time to meet the construction program. Alternative sources may be given where
practicable.
Work size: Commonly 230 x 110 x 76 mm for bricks and 390 x 190 x 190 mm for blocks, but many other sizes are available (e.g.
for blocks: 90, 140 and 290 mm thick). For AAC blocks and perforated clay blocks, check with manufacturers. For AAC units the
wall blocks are all 200 mm high and 600 mm long - thickness ranges from 75 to 300 mm.
Unit joints: “Ironed with a 12 mm diameter rod”, “Cut and struck”, “Weatherstruck”, “Flush jointed”, “Raked out 5 mm deep and
ironed square (or half round)”, “Broomed”, “To match existing”, or “As shown on the drawings”, etc. Raked joints are generally
not recommended. The exposed mortar face should be compressed. Tuck pointing, if required, should be clearly specified.
Damp-proof course type: e.g. Bitumen coated and flashing material, metal, polyethylene, see AS/NZS 2904 clause 7.
Salt attack resistance category: e.g. Exposure, General purpose or Protected as described in AS/NZS 4456.10 Appendix A.
Brick and block performance schedule
Type or location
A B C
Durability test
Flexural strength
Lintels schedule
Opening Lintel type Dimensions (mm)
dimensions (mm)
D11 D22 Thickness3
1
D1 is depth of lintel.
2
D2 is width of lintel.
3
Thickness applies only to steel T or angle lintels.
BCA Housing Provisions Figure 3.3.3.5 has acceptable steel lintel sizes in domestic situations.
Lintel types include steel, precast reinforced concrete or prestressed concrete and reinforced terra cotta.
Precast proprietary concrete lintels are also available and may be specified as an alternative to steel.
Consult the structural engineer before using proprietary lintels with concrete or calcium silicate bricks, or clay bricks with more
than 25% perforation.
If proprietary lintels are required, specify. Heads of some steel door frames may be used as lintels. Consult manufacturer.
Lintel type: e.g. steel angle or product name.

STONE MASONRY STRUCTURE
STONE MASONRY
This worksection is applicable to new dimension stone masonry.
• Stone repair for repair and cleaning of existing stone masonry.
• Stone cladding for stone cladding panels that rely entirely on structural fixings for support.
• Stone and terrazzo tiling for internal stone tiling.
• Stone carving and monumental masonry.
• Designed features.
• Envelope elements on elevations such as banding patterns and changes in textures.
construction.
For information on thermal mass, refer to BDP EDG Note DES4.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
General: Provide stone masonry elements as follows and to the Selections.
- Of uniform quality within any grade.
- Selected for the optimum matching of visual properties such as colour and pattern.
- Sound and free from defects liable to affect its strength, appearance and durability under the
intended conditions of use.

General
have no overlaps.
>
• Stone repair.

• Stone cladding.
• Stone and terrazzo tiling.
1.3 STANDARD
General
Masonry: To AS 3700.
This worksection is aligned to AS 3700, which covers natural stone masonry as well as brickwork and blockwork. AS 3700 deals
comprehensively with design, materials, and workmanship, but is oriented towards loadbearing construction, rather than non-
loadbearing cladding.
AS 3700 is cited in the BCA for structural sufficiency, for fire-resistance level, and for wall ties in cavity walls for walls between
wet areas in adjoining residential units, and for sound transmission.
AS/NZS 4455 covers dimension stone units, up to a point.
1.4 INTERPRETATION
Definitions
For the purposes of this worksection the definitions given in the Commentary apply. Included in the list
of definitions are terms not used in the worksection but deemed to be of interest in the context of
Stone masonry.
1.5 INSPECTION
Notice
- Lintels in position.
- Proposed stone source (quarry, storage yard).
- Proposed mason’s yard.
- Materials stored at the yard or on site.
- The prepared stone sample range.
- Stone in worked condition at the mason’s yard.
- Stone laid out before fixing.
- Substrate prepared to receive the specified stonework.
- Items to be built-in located in their correct positions, including damp-proof course, flashings, bolts,
cramps, brackets, structural metalwork and rainwater goods.
- Control joints ready for insertion of joint filler.
1.6 TESTS
Stone
General: Obtain test samples, representative of each required type of stone, and have the tests
carried out at the following stages:
- Before awarding a stone supply contract.
- On dimension stone prepared for the works, at intervals during the course of the works.
Testing authority: >
Nominate a specific authority, if required.
Conformance: Conform to the Natural stone tests schedule and Cast stone tests schedule.
Edit as required.
Natural stone tests schedule
Property to be tested Test standard Test criterion Number and frequency
(if not in the test of tests
standard)
Unconfined compressive
strength (dry and saturated):
- Intact rock core specimens ASTM D2938


standard)
- Dimension stone ASTM C170
Surface absorption rate ASTM C97
Porosity ASTM C97
Wet and dry density ASTM C97
Modulus of rupture ASTM C99
Sodium sulphate soundness
Flexural strength ASTM C880
Other properties
The tests listed here are contractual tests to be performed at intervals during the course of the works for quality assurance
purposes.
Number and frequency of tests: Testing may be performed on samples selected at intervals during delivery, or at a rate of per
unit quantity of delivered material.
Test criterion (if not in the test Standard): For granite dimensional stone, for example, test requirements are specified in
ASTM C615.
In addition, many of the tests should also be performed before the contract in the design and tendering stages, for example:
• Selection tests to enable the initial selection to be made of stone type and source.
• Proof tests to confirm the suitability of the initial selections.
• Design and structural tests to determine the properties relevant to architectural and structural design requirements.
The tests should be carried out under the direction of the stonework consultant.
If any of the above tests are to be performed in the tendering stage the conditions of tendering should require tenderers to
submit the necessary samples for testing, or to submit results of suppliers’ tests. Laboratory tests on cementitious or polymer-
based mortar should be carried out before commencing stonework and at intervals during the work.
Some Australian consultants and testing authorities have indicated a preference for using certain draft Australian standards for
stone testing, arguing that they have a greater relevance to current construction practice. These drafts (listed below) have been
in existence for some years, and no firm publication dates for them are available:
• Sodium sulfate soundness.
• Flexural strength of stone products.
Tests referenced in AS/NZS 4455 may require modification for stone, and so are not cited here. Seek specialist advice.
Other properties to be tested may include petrography, thermal expansion coefficient, microcrack density and orientation,
resistance to decay.
Cast stone tests schedule
standard)
Compressive strength BS 1217
Drying shrinkage BS 1217
Initial surface absorption BS 1217
Other properties

Mortar tests schedule

Conformance: Conform to the Mortar tests schedule.
standard)
Compressive strength AS 3700
Bulk density
Soluble silica and AS 2701
calcium oxide content
The quality control tests listed are necessary during the progress of the works to monitor the suitability and uniformity of the
mortar. Chemical analyses are required to verify mix proportions.
Installed sealant tests
Sampling: For each sealant test take 3 samples of installed and cured sealant, each at least 50 mm
long, from completed joints.
Testing: Test to the standard applicable to the sealant type and conform to the Installed sealant tests
schedule.
Reinstatement: Make good the joints from which the samples were taken.
Installed sealant tests schedule
Structural fixings tests

Sampling: Sample structural fixings at the rate of one item per 100 fixings, or part thereof, of each
type.
Testing: Test to determine whether the fixing metals are of the material, grade or designation required
and conform to the Structural fixings tests schedule.
Tensile tests: To BS 5080-1.
Shear tests: To BS 5080-2.
Structural fixings tests schedule
Property to be tested: e.g. tensile strength, shear strength, pull out resistance, corrosion resistance.
Consider testing of structural fixings if there are stone masonry features dependent on fixings for support or stability. These
tests are specified in Stone cladding.
Slate tests schedule
Conformance: Conform to the Slate tests schedule.
standard)
Delamination BS 5642-1
Sulphuric acid BS 5642-1
immersion test


standard)
Flexure ASTM C120
Water absorption ASTM C121
Weather resistance ASTM C217
1.7 SAMPLES
Stone samples
Rely on approved samples (“acceptance samples”) to define stone type and quality. The accepted samples, marked for
identification, should be held in a secure location for reference.
Number: 3.
Stone units: For each type and grade of stone (including natural and cast stone), submit samples of
each stone unit (e.g. block, panel, tile):
- Either the full size of the unit, or 300 x 300 mm, whichever is the smaller.
- Showing the expected range of variation of colour, pattern, texture, and surface finish in stone to be
supplied.
Cast stone: Submit samples which consist of both facing and backing material, if different.
Associated materials and products
Sand: Submit a 2 kg sample of sand required to be from a particular source, and/or of a particular
colour.
Accessories: Submit 2 samples of each accessory proposed for fixing stonework.
Marking
General: Label samples for identification. Label natural stone samples to show the quarry source,
section, bed and lift.
Bird proofing
Fixing: Submit samples of proposed fixing methods and materials, including adhesives.
On birds and buildings, see BDP EDG Note DES56.
1.8 PROTOTYPES
General
Preferably show on the drawings the locations and extent of prototypes.
Self-supported stonework: Provide a sample wall section consisting of at least 2 courses of masonry,
each at least 1500 mm long, and including the following:
- Corner stones or quoins.
- Joint finishes (including mortar pointing and sealant).
1.9 SUBMISSIONS
Procedures for examination and acceptance of contractor’s documents such as shop drawings are specified in the general
conditions of contract.
Subcontractors
General: Submit name and contact details of proposed specialist stoneworker.
Design
Bird proofing: Submit details of the proposed method together with evidence of proven performance
including addresses of existing installations, date of installation, contact personnel at the installation
addresses, brief history of the installations, and current performance data.
Materials
Proposed mortar mix: Submit details of the proposed mix, at least 7 days before commencing
stonework.
Supplier’s data: Submit statements from the stone supplier, with the following information:

- The supplier’s experience in the required type of work.

- Particulars of established quality control procedures (if any), and the category of the procedures to
the relevant standard.
- The physical properties of the required material.
Shop drawings
General: Submit shop drawings showing the following where applicable:
- Projecting courses.
- Quoin stones.
- Cutting details for mouldings such as lintels, sills, steps and cornices.
- Stonework setting out.
- Position and identifying number of each stone.
- Dimensions of each stone and lay of natural bed.
- Lifting detail and fixing detail of each stone.
- Proposed dowel restraints for column and mullion joints.
Edit as required.
Execution
Supervision: Submit the names and qualifications of proposed bench masons.
1.10 TOLERANCES
Dimension stone units
Maximum deviation from required dimensions:
- Loadbearing stone: ± 2 mm.
- Other stone: ± 10 mm.
Facework
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 NATURAL STONE

General
General: Conform to the accepted samples and prototypes in the Stone masonry schedule.
Rely on approved samples to define stone type and quality.
Select the type (sandstone, granite, marble, etc.), and state the source of supply, and any further description needed to identify
the material. Note stone type and finish in the Stone masonry schedule.
Stone types
Sandstone defects: Minor shale laminae or interbeds and minor concentrations of carbonaceous
material (tea leaves) are acceptable in visible faces at ground level or in public areas. Neither defect is
acceptable in carved or moulded work.
Granite: Igneous stone (e.g. granite) obtained from quarry stone extracted in blocks sufficiently large
to suit the project requirements, and containing no more than a small degree of microcracking.
Stone selection
Grading: Select stone of the designated quality grade.
Matching: Within each grade, select stone for the optimum matching of visual properties such as
colour and pattern.
Source of stone supply
Nominated source: >
The supply source should be selected only after comprehensive pre-tender investigations, preferably by the stonework
consultant, of potential suppliers’ ability to provide stone of the required type and quality, in the required quantities, in time to

meet the construction program, and at an acceptable price. The investigations should include pre-contract testing of stone for
the properties required in the project, and examination of the supplier’s quality assurance program.
Alternative source: >
Delete if no alternative source will be considered.
2.2 MORTAR
Mortar materials
cement will be Type GB or Type LH.
White cement: Iron salts content ≤ 1%.

Pure white cement is imported, not made in Australia. If required specify as a proprietary item.
Lime: To AS 1672.1.
Sand: Fine aggregate with no clay content, free from efflorescing salts and selected for colour and
grading.
- Crushed stone: Fine aggregate consisting partly or wholly of crushed stone, made from material of
the same type as the stone facing.
Sand for facework:
- Colour: >
- Source: >
If a particular source or colour is specified, a sample is required. If possible, mortar colour should be achieved by the natural
colour of the sand (including blended sands), if necessary in combination with white or off-white cement, rather than by the
addition of colouring pigments.
Admixtures: Do not provide admixtures.
Or one or more of the materials listed in AS 3700 clause 10.4.2.4, may be permitted. Plasticisers are not recommended as a
substitute for lime. If fly ash is approved, specify limitations on the proportions if different from those given in AS 3972 clause
4.3.
Coloured mortar:
- Colour: >
State a colour, e.g. “White”, if other than normal grey.
- Location: >
State, e.g. “All facework”.
Premixed mortar: >
State “May” (or may not) “be used”. If premixed mortar is permitted, include “Provide set-retarding chemical agents”.
Mortar mix
High strength mortar may be appropriate for granites, weaker for sandstone and limestone. A permeability greater than that of
the stone is desirable where there is possibility of salt attack. Specify mortar with required strength and durability. See AS 3700
clause 5.4 for appropriate durability for various exposure conditions classified in Table 5.1.
The M4 group (see AS 3700 Table 10.1) are high strength types; use only for calculated and highly stressed masonry
underpinning, etc.
If lime putty is used, make appropriate adjustments for the water content in the putty (and for voids in stiff lime putty), otherwise
the lime content of the mortar will be insufficient.
M1 mixes should be used only in restoration work to match existing construction. See AS 3700, Appendix G.
Batching: Batch by weight and machine mix.
Mix compressive strength: ≤ compressive strength of the stone bedded on it.
Mix permeability: ≥ stone permeability.
Preparing lime putty:
- Using hydrated lime: Add lime to water in a clean container and stir to a thick creamy consistency.
Leave undisturbed for at least 16 hours. Remove excess water and protect from drying out.

- Using quicklime: Run to putty as soon as possible after receipt of quicklime. Partly fill clean
container with water, add lime to half the height of the water, then stir and hoe ensuring that no lime
remains exposed above the water. Continue stirring and hoeing for at least 5 minutes after all
reaction has ceased, then sieve into a maturing bin. Leave undisturbed for at least 14 days. Protect
from drying out.
Mortar proportions (cement:lime:sand): >
Grout
See also AS 3700 clauses 3.5 and 10.7.
Composition: >
State proportions of cement, aggregate, and admixtures.
Characteristic compressive strength (MPa): >
If more than 12 MPa (minimum in AS 3700 clause 10.7.3).
Sand stockpile
General: Before commencing stonework, stockpile sand sufficient for the whole of the works. Keep
stockpiled sand dry.
It may not always be possible to stockpile the sand for the whole of the works, as required by the Template. It is necessary to
keep the sand dry, because moist sand can cause “bulking” errors in volume batching.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 BENCH MASON

Supervision
General: Arrange to have on site a bench mason qualified to supervise stonework fixing and site
adjustments to joints and surface finishing.
3.2 WORKMANSHIP GENERALLY

Storing
General: Store stone so that it is protected from the weather and atmospheric pollution, clear of the
ground on its natural bed, on supports which do not locally overstress it, and in conditions suitable to
promote good seasoning without staining, marking or damage.
Cutting
General: Perform the necessary cutting and shaping of stone to designated profiles including
weathering, jointing, chasing, forming grooves and drilling for handling and fixing. Work the bed, face
and back joints of the stone square and true.
Carving and moulding
General: Achieve a clean sharp finish.
Visual variations
General: If the accepted samples and prototype panels have a range of variation in colour, pattern,
texture or surface finish, distribute the production panels throughout the work so that local
concentrations of similar variations do not occur.
3.3 LAYING UNITS

Bedding
General: Remove dust and foreign material from the bedding surfaces. If necessary adjust the
moisture content of the stone units so that adverse effects, such as reduced bond, are kept within
acceptable limits. Where possible, bed and joint the stone in one operation. Lay each stone on a full
bed of mortar. Solidly fill and grout vertical joints, joggles and cramps as the work proceeds. Point up
joints around flashings as necessary.
Natural bed
Obtain specialist advice on local stone characteristics, which may require departures from the Template requirements for natural
bed.
General: Lay loadbearing sedimentary stone or slate with its natural bed normal to the load (e.g.
horizontal in walling, perpendicular to the line of thrust in arch voussoirs), except for the following:

- Overhanging projecting stones (cornices and string courses): Where edge bedding is required, lay
each stone with its natural bed vertical and at right angles to the wall.
- Cladding panels: In non-loadbearing cladding panels, form each panel with its natural bed at right
angles to the face.
Edge bedding >
There are many situations where edge bedding is inappropriate. Obtain specialist advice. Specify which stones (if any) are to be
edge bedded, or show them as such on the drawings.
Temporary support
General: Provide support as necessary to the stone while the mortar is curing, using bracing, joint
spacers, or both.
Bracing and joint spacers: Non-damaging and non-staining softwood wedges or laths soaked in water.
Do not allow metal pinch bars to bear directly on the stone.
Raking and toothing
General: Raise advanced work no more than 1.5 m above the general level, and rake back. Do not
tooth stonework for subsequent additions except where toothing is shown on the drawings.
Bonding
General: Bond the masonry so as to provide stability and monolithic structural action to the stonework
assembly.
Wall type
Cavity width (mm): >
Stonework
Bond: >
Course height (mm): >
3.4 FIXINGS
Provision of fixings
General: If the necessary fixings for stonework are not otherwise provided as part of the structure
provide suitable fixings sufficient to support and restrain each stone and effectively resist the dead,
live, wind and earthquake loads to which it will be subject in service.
Metals for fixings
General: Provide metal fixings that are:
- Corrosion resistant e.g. non-ferrous metal or stainless steel.
- Stamped for identification.
- Compatible with the materials with which they will be in contact or effectively insulated from
electrochemical reaction with incompatible materials.
3.5 BIRD PROOFING

Preferably investigate proposals in the design stage, and assess them by means of a trial installation.
Performance
General: Provide a system which:
- Is defensive against current infestation and reinfestation.
- Does not rely on chemical attack, sterilisation, poisoning or predators.
- Is durable in the installed location.
- Does not present a safety hazard to persons working on the facade for purposes such as window
cleaning, maintenance and access to equipment.
Fixing to stonework
General: Comply with the requirements for structural fixings.
3.6 FOUNDATION STONE

General
Laying ceremony: Set the foundation stone. Clear the site and make safe for an assembly near the
foundation stone location and interrupt work and attend as necessary for the duration of the ceremony.

Foundation stone
Material: >
Dimensions: >
Finish: >
Inscription and markings
Text: >
Lettering style: >
Preferably show the test, style, and layout on the drawings.
Document box
General: Cut a cavity into the back of the stone and provide an air-tight corrosion proof copper alloy
document box. Take delivery of the documents, safely store and seal within the document box without
loss or damage.
Dimensions: 100 x 550 x 200 mm.
3.7 STONE FOUNDATIONS

A typical clause for domestic type construction in limestone or sandstone.
Residential footings
AS 2870 is cited in the BCA at clause F1.10 for damp-proofing under slabs on ground.
Concrete footings: To AS 2870.
Stone footings: Construct the footing course entirely of through stones, and if stepping is necessary,
overlap the stepped courses at least 300 mm.
Subfloor stone foundation walls
Note stone types in Stone masonry schedule.
Minimum foundation wall thicknesses:
- Supporting masonry walls < 110 mm thick: 300 mm.
- Supporting masonry walls 110 - 270 mm thick: 425 mm.
- For 750 mm each way from corners: Add 125 mm to the above dimensions.
Stone sizes:
- Maximum height: 350 mm.
- Minimum height: Generally 175 mm; through stones 300 mm.
Bond pattern: Provide through stones as follows:
- All stones in top and bottom courses.
- Elsewhere as header units.
Slab bearings: Provide continuous bearing at least 100 mm wide to the edge of suspended slabs.
Floor bearers: Provide support for timber floor bearers on level solid stone wall surfaces of at least
75 x 75 mm, and on free standing stone piers of minimum dimensions as follows:
- Up to 1500 mm high: 300 x 300 mm.
- 1500 to 2700 mm high: 400 x 400 mm.
Access openings: Leave door width openings beneath doorways, sufficient to give access to
underfloor areas.
Air vents: Provide adequate cross ventilation to the space under suspended ground floors by installing
air vents.
- Air vent type: >
Select from:
• Cast stone to match facings, with bronze wire mesh.
• Terra cotta 230 x 160 mm.
• Bronze wire mesh in a 470 x 160 mm concrete frame.
• 65 mm diameter vitreous clay pipe laid to fall to the outside.
• Galvanized cast iron.

• Other: Nominate.

Material
AS/NZS 2904 is cited in the BCA at clause F1.9(b)(i) for damp-proof courses. This clause is varied in SA for salt damp.
Type: >
Type: e.g. (building regulations may govern):
• Bitumen coated aluminium 0.45 mm (or 0.55 mm) thick, to AS/NZS 2904 (similarly bitumen coated copper, zinc, and lead).
Roll labelling is a requirement.
• 0.5 mm annealed aluminium faced both sides with embossed black polyethylene in bitumen (suitable for salt damp
conditions).
• Embossed black polyethylene to AS/NZS 2904.
• Aluminium alloy 3203 or 5050A to AS/NZS 1734, 0.6 mm thick.
2
• Lead to AS 1804, mass 12 kg/m , etc.
• Bitumen coated DPCs are not suitable where subject to salt attack. Aluminium in contact with wet cement may corrode.
Lead is attacked by free alkali present in portland cement concrete and mortars, the corrosion products being oxides of lead.
Location
General: Provide damp-proof courses in the following locations, if applicable:
- Walls adjoining infill floor slabs on membranes: In the course above the underside of the slab in
internal walls and inner leaves of cavity walls. Project 40 mm and dress down over the membrane
turned up against the wall.
- Cavity walls built off slabs on ground: In the bottom course of the outer leaf, continuous horizontally
across the cavity and up the inner face bedded in mortar, turned 30 mm into the inner leaf 1 course
above. Project 10 mm beyond the external slab edge and turn down at 45°.
- Masonry veneer construction: In the bottom course of the outer leaf, continuous horizontally across
the cavity. Fasten to the inner frame 75 mm above floor level. Project 10 mm beyond the external
slab edge and turn down at 45°.
- Internal walls built off slabs on ground: In the first course above floor level.
- At timber floors: In the first course below the level of the underside of ground floor timbers in internal
walls and inner leaves of cavity walls.
Installation
General: Lay in long lengths. Lap full width at angles and intersections and at least 150 mm at joints.
Step as necessary, but not exceeding 2 courses per step. Sandwich damp-proof courses between
mortar.
Junctions: Preserve continuity of damp-proofing at junctions of damp-proof courses and waterproof
membranes.
Location: At least 150 mm above adjacent finished ground level.
Lap sealing: >
Special treatment for severe conditions, e.g. mastic sealing, or pop riveting laps in metal materials.
3.9 FLASHINGS AND WEATHERINGS

See commentary to Damp-proof courses above.
See also CBPI Technical Note 10A for typical flashing applications.
The locations, profiles and fixings of flashings are best shown on the drawings.
Material
Type: >
Location
General: Provide flashings and weatherings in the following locations, if applicable:
- Under sills: 50 mm into the outer leaf bed joint 1 course below the sill, extending up across the
cavity and under the sill.

- Over lintels to openings in cavity walls: Full width of the outer leaf immediately above the lintel,
continuous across cavity, turned 50 mm into the inner leaf 2 courses above. Extend at least 50 mm
beyond the lintels.
- At abutments with structural frames or supports: Vertical flashing in the cavity using 150 mm wide
material, wedged and grouted into a groove in the frame opposite the cavity.
- At jambs where cavities are closed: Full height flashing extending 75 mm beyond the closure into
the cavity, interleaved with sill and head flashings at each end. Fix to jambs.
Lap sealing >
Weepholes
Form: Open perpends stone course high, at least 8 mm wide.
Maximum spacing: 1000 mm.
Location: Provide weepholes to external leaves of cavity walls in the course immediately above
flashings, damp-proof courses, lintels and supporting ledges.
3.10 WALL TIES

Wall ties
Durability classification to AS/NZS 2699.1: >
Durability classifications R0 to R5 are defined in AS/NZS 2669.1, at clause 2.4. Durability requirements for masonry structures
are defined in AS 3700 Table 5.1. For wall ties deemed to meet durability criteria, see AS/NZS 2699.1 Tables 3 and 4. This
standard is based on a wall tie life of not less than 50 years, see clause 2.2 (a). For wall tie types, including those for seismic
conditions, see AS/NZS 2699.1 clause 1.4.15.1.
Conformance; Provide ties in conformance with the Wall ties category table.
Wall ties category table
Classification to AS/NZS 2699.1 Service conditions
Medium duty Normal cavity construction
Medium duty Tie bonding at abutments
Heavy duty Cavities > 60 mm wide
See AS 3700 clauses 4.10 and 10.5 for design principles. The maximum spacings of clause 3.8 may need to be varied in
special cases requiring calculations or tests.
Wall ties installation
Spacing: >
AS 3700 clause 4.10 gives spacings for wall ties in general work, adjacent to lateral supports and control joints and around
openings in masonry. For cavities exceeding 80 mm width, closer horizontal spacing may be necessary. If spacings other than
those given in AS 3700 clause 4.10 are required, specify them here.
Embedment of wall ties
Cavities > 60 mm wide: 75 mm minimum.
Flexible wall ties
Type: If ties or anchors extend across control joints, provide ties or anchors which do not impair the
effectiveness of the joint.
3.11 JOINTING AND POINTING

General
General: Carry out jointing and pointing simultaneously to form a homogeneous bed.
Column and mullion joints
Method: Bed the joints in stone columns and mullions in mortar:
- Joggle the bed joints to prevent movement.
- Dowel the stones together with restraint fixings.
- Make column joints over a concealed lead pad with the centre cut out to allow for settlement.

Joints
Size (mm): >
Jointing material: >
Pointing material: >
3.12 SEALANT JOINTING

Preparation for jointing
General: Immediately before jointing remove loose particles from the joint, using oil-free compressed
air.
Taping
General: Protect the stonework surface on each side of the joint using 50 mm wide masking tape or
equivalent means. On completion of pointing remove the tape and remove any stains or marks from
the stonework surface.
Jointing materials
General: Use recommended jointing and pointing materials which are compatible with each other and
with the contact surfaces and non staining to finished surfaces. Do not use bituminous materials on
absorbent surfaces.
Priming: Apply the recommended primer to the surfaces in contact with sealant materials.
Sealant colour: >
Foamed materials (in compressible fillers and backing rods): Closed cell or impregnated types which
Bond breaking: Use backing rods, and other back-up materials for sealants, which do not adhere to
the sealant.
Sealant proportions
Sealant application
General: Apply the sealant to dry joint surfaces using a pneumatic applicator gun. Do not apply the
sealant in unsuitable weather conditions (e.g. when the ambient temperature is outside the range 5 –
50°C) or outside the recommended working time for the material or the primer.
Joint finish
General: Produce a smooth, slightly concave surface using a tool designed for the purpose.
Protection
General: Protect the joint from inclement weather during the setting or curing period of the material.
Edge to edge joints
Method of sealing: >
3.13 SURFACE TREATMENTS

The use of any sealer on a stone face should be subject to specialist advice. Other surface treatments include fungal growth
treatment, anti-graffiti treatment, waterproofing treatments and consolidants.
Independent tests have shown that the protection provided by some anti-graffiti coatings is of limited value. Before making a
decision on their use, background information on past performance should be obtained.
Chemical consolidants and waterproofers have been used widely overseas to prolong the serviceability of damaged stone with
mixed results. Because of the high clay contents of many Australian sandstones there is often difficulty in achieving sufficient
depth of penetration by surface application. Unsuitable use can exacerbate rather than reduce the rate of stone decay,
particularly where there is significant salt contamination. Specialist advice should be obtained on their usefulness.
Abutting surfaces
General: Seal concealed faces of stone walling or facing panels where they abut brickwork or
concrete.
Sealing material: >
Dissimilar stones
For sedimentary stone and cast stone to improve weathering and reduce weather stains. Seek specialist advice on application,
type of stone and substrate backing material. Do not include facing thickness in assessment of cover to reinforcement.
Isolation: Isolate contact surfaces of dissimilar types of stone with a membrane. Isolate sedimentary
stonework from brickwork and other masonry to prevent salts movement.

Isolating membrane material: >
3.14 LEAD SHEETING

Material
General: 5 DM machine cast copperised 20 kg/m2 lead sheeting, with copper content between 0.015%
and 0.20%.
Standards: To AS 1804 and AS 1566.
Laying
General: Lay lead sheets flat in 1500 mm maximum lengths, on a clean stone surface, free of sharp
objects or debris. Insert the sheet 25 mm into the first joint above the coping or cornice and fix with
lead wedges. Point the joint with an elastomeric sealant. Dress the lead from the first joint to the front
edge of the cornice or coping stone, and turn it down over the edge a maximum of 25 mm and a
minimum of 10 mm; or, where the stone edge is less, return the lead under the edge a maximum of
12 mm.
It is generally accepted practice to protect horizontal surfaces with an overflashing. Adequately ventilate the overflashing to
ensure that sweating and localised salt erosion does not accelerate the natural ageing of the stonework.
Jointing
Seams: Join the lead sheeting with flat folded welt seams with 25 mm and 50 mm legs folded and
dressed away from the prevailing rains and secured with 50 mm wide x 0.60 mm bitumen coated
copper clips, twice brass screwed to plastic or lead inserts set into the stone. Line the welts generally
with the stone joints.
Burned seams jointing: Provide joints which have a minimum 50 mm flat lap. Clean, scrape and lead
fill without excessive cutting in.
Fixing
General: Fix the sheet lead with 50 mm wide x 20 kg/m2 lead straps twice fixed with brass screws into
plastic or lead plugs at 1 m minimum centres, 125 mm back from the face edge. Cut away the 12 mm
under soffit lead to allow for clips. Fold clips up the nosing and dressed neatly over the leading edge.
Lead fixing plugs: Molten lead poured into prepared holes drilled through the lead sheet at least
25 mm into the stone. Complete the plug by forming a lead burned dot over the hole.
Intermediate fixings: Wiped soldered dot finished flush, or lead burned dot, made with brass screws
and washer screwed into the brass insert set into the stone. Set the head of the screw below the
surface of the lead and fill without excessive cutting in.
3.15 COMPLETION
Maintenance manual
General: On completion submit a maintenance manual setting out a program for regular maintenance
cycles at not more than five-year intervals. Include stonework cleaning, desalination, inspection and
repair of joints and flashings, checking rainwater goods for blockages and breakdown, and detection
of potential failures arising from movement or other causes. Include particulars of stone source, type
of stone, and jointing materials.
Cleaning
Cleaning: Leave the stonework clean on completion.

4 SELECTIONS
This schedule refers to the selection of the product/material by its properties, but does not locate it within the project. For this
you should prepare a separate document e.g. a Finishes schedule or a notated elevation to locate the various finishes by
reference to a designation code or abbreviation of the finish.
4.1 SCHEDULES
Stone masonry schedule
Property Type
A B C
Stone type
Surface finish

STONE REPAIR STRUCTURE
STONE REPAIR
This worksection is applicable to the repair and cleaning of existing stone masonry.
• Stone masonry for new dimensioned stone masonry.
• Stone cladding for stone cladding systems.
• Stone and terrazzo tiling for internal stone tiling.
• None.
• Particular problem areas.
• Areas requiring different cleaning regimes.
construction.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
Provide restoration works that will:
- Halt or alleviate salt attack.
- Return the whole surface to a consistent visual appearance.
- Remedy structural inadequacies.

General
Conform to the General requirements worksection.
They need not be specified here unless you want to relocate them, for example if this is to be the specification for a multiple-
prime contract package. In this case make sure that the interlocking contracts leave no loopholes, such as work by non-existent
‘others’, and have no overlaps.
Related worksections
Conform to associated worksections as follows:
>
You may wish to direct the contractor to other worksections where there may be work that is closely associated with this work.
Delete those not applicable and add others as required.
• Stone masonry.
• Stone cladding.

1.3 INTERPRETATION
Definitions
A comprehensive list of definitions is given in the Commentary to Stone masonry. Import here any that are considered useful or
delete this subclause.
1.4 INSPECTION
Notice
- Proposed restoration stone source (quarry, storage yard).
- The prepared restoration stone sample range.
- Restoration stone in worked condition at the mason’s yard.
- Restoration stone laid out before fixing.
cramps, brackets, structural metalwork and rainwater goods.
- Joints prepared and ready for repointing.
- Completion of stone repairs before overflashing.
1.5 TESTS
Neutrality tests
Cleaning: After the final washing and before removing the scaffold, test the surface for acid/alkali
neutrality. If the required pH is not achieved, repeat washing, and re-test.
Required pH: >
e.g. “7.2”.
Designated locations for test drilling: >
If not shown on the drawings.
Independent testing authority: >
1.6 SAMPLES
Cleaning
Detergent: Submit a sample of the proposed detergent, together with technical details.
1.7 PROTOTYPES
General
Preferably show on the drawings the locations and extent of prototypes.
Synthetic stone restoration: Provide at least 2 restoration patches, each at least 300 x 300 mm,
applied to selected existing material, showing typical mouldings to match existing.
Repointing: Repoint the joints of a designated sample repointing area on the site, to demonstrate the
suitability of the proposed pointing method.
- Designated area: >
Sample cleaning panels
Requirement: Before commencing cleaning operations test clean a designated area including final
washing and testing of the surface for neutrality.
If possible, test cleaning should be done before the cleaning contract is let, so that the required cleaning methods are known
and can be specified without variation.
Designated area to be test cleaned: >
Preferably show the area on the drawings.

1.8 SUBMISSIONS
Procedures for examination and acceptance of contractor’s documents such as shop drawings are specified in the general
Subcontractors
Submit name and contact details of proposed specialist stoneworker.
Shop drawings
General: Submit shop drawings showing the following where applicable:
- Details of proposed replacements to existing stonework, mouldings and other enrichment.
Materials
Reused stone: If it is proposed to reuse sound matching stone recovered from the works for stone
replacement, submit proposals on a stone-by-stone basis.
Cleaning agents: If it is proposed to use cleaning agents, submit proposals.
Execution
Repair of damaged stone: Submit proposals for repair.
Stone cleaning:
- Admixtures: If detergent cleaning or the addition of a neutralising agent is proposed, submit
proposals.
- Scrubbing: If bronze bristle brushes are proposed for scrubbing particularly obstinate areas of heavy
soiling, submit proposals.
Cleaning records
Record the sequence of test cleaning operations, durations of pre-wetting, cleaning and scrubbing,
water pressure, flow rate and temperature, result of neutrality test, and other relevant details, and
submit a copy of the record.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 NATURAL STONE

Stone selection
Existing: Select stone which is to match existing only after the existing stone has been satisfactorily
cleaned.
2.2 SYNTHETIC STONE

Rely on approved samples, or sample restoration patches as specified in Prototypes, to define the appearance and tangible
physical properties of synthetic stone.
Material
For restoration work: Use a synthetic resin base and a fine aggregate consisting of washed sand, or a
mixture of washed sand and crushed sieved and washed stone, selected and proportioned to match
the colour of the adjacent weathered stone without the addition of colouring pigments. Batch by weight
and machine mix.
2.3 MORTAR
Mortar mix
Replacement work: Match as closely as possible the colour, texture, strength and porosity of the
original.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 RESTORATION
Mason’s site visit
General: At the commencement of the restoration work, have the bench mason visit the building site,
inspect the existing stonework, and attend a meeting.
Meeting agenda to include:

- The history of the building.

- The techniques used by the original masons.
- The mortar mix used and the method of applying it.
- The working of the stone.
- How the tools were used to achieve the variety of finishes on the building.
Restoration workmanship
Protection: Protect existing building surfaces from damage resulting from the provision, use, and
removal of constructional plant. Isolate points of contact or potential contact. Do not tie back or
otherwise attach constructional plant direct to stonework. Make attachments through existing
openings, and seal the openings effectively against dust and weather.
In situ work: Carry out in situ work to existing stonework using methods which do not disturb the bed of
the original stone.
Refixing: Remove stone required to be refixed, mark for identification, and store.
Carving and moulding: Make the new forms and profiles to match those on the replaced stone. Take
templates from the existing work. Produce true continuous mouldings to the full original profile. Do not
feather the ends to meet the weathered or otherwise eroded profiles of adjoining existing mouldings.
- Marks: Remove flattened planes on curved areas, and unwanted machine or other tool marks, using
wet carborundum.
Sweetening: Sweeten replacement stonework as necessary to provide accurate mouldings and
surfaces to match existing. Sweeten designated existing stonework to remove surface imperfections
and protrusions at joint lines from rubbed stone surfaces.
Quoin indents: To avoid potential weaknesses in the corners of quoin indents, chamfer the internal
return angles at 45°.
Fixing: Provide the fixings (including keys, cramps and dowels) necessary to install the replacement
stone firmly and permanently into the existing stonework.
Repairing stonework
Obtain specialist advice on the repair of existing work. Pre-contract tests of sample areas may be necessary.
In some sandstones redressing can result in the removal of the case hardened skin and the exposure of less durable material
underneath, accelerating the decay.
Isolation barrier between existing and replacement stone: If the decayed stone was excavated to a stable conditions to remove
salt damage, no benefit would be gained by providing a barrier between the old and new stone (this may not apply in the case of
retaining walls).
Where new stone is placed in a wall, e.g. a rubble wall of unknown internal composition, and there are no practicable means to
prevent salts or other deleterious materials from attacking or decaying the new stone, provide a bituminous barrier to protect
and isolate the new stone. However in these cases the salt migration may be redirected to other areas.
General: Repair existing stonework to conform to the Repair schedule. Do not repair damaged
granite.
Damaged stone: Remove replaced damaged stone from the site.
Repair schedule
Repair method Location
The methods are “Redressing”, “Rubbing” or “Replacement with (natural, cast, or synthetic) stone”. Preferably show the
method(s) and locations on the drawings.
Redressing: Where the existing stone face can be satisfactorily repaired by redressing, provide a new
firm sound surface matching the original finish by redressing each affected stone over its entire
exposed face. Wash down the new surface on completion, removing stone dust and remove salts
brought to the surface by the washing.
Rubbing: Where the existing stone face can be satisfactorily repaired or cleaned by rubbing, wet rub
the surface using a suitable abrasive, to a depth sufficient to:

- Remove unwanted tool marks and other surface blemishes.

- Clean the stone.
Stone replacement: Where the existing stone has defects which cannot be repaired by redressing or
rubbing, cut out the defective stone and replace it with matching natural, cast, or synthetic stone, as
appropriate.
Cutting back: Cut back the face of decayed stone in preparation for inserting replacement stone.
Provide required chamfers, tongues and undercut edges. Protect the newly excavated surface from
weather and moisture until the replacement stone is inserted.
- Depth: As necessary to expose a firm sound surface, and at least 100 mm.
Rebonding: Rebond fractured stone which is otherwise sound, using a synthetic resin adhesive and
stainless steel or bronze dowels.
Synthetic facing: Where it is appropriate to restore the face and detail in synthetic stone, apply the
synthetic material to a total depth of at least 6 mm. Where thicker material is required, apply it in layers
not exceeding 10 mm thick, reinforced with stainless steel or bronze mesh, and pinned to the stone
with stainless steel or bronze dowels set in synthetic resin adhesive. Do not feather the edge of the
synthetic stone where it joins the existing stonework.
Projecting stones: Where overhanging mouldings such as cornices and string courses require
replacement, replace each stone with a single stone inserted into the existing stonework to a depth at
least equal to the overhang.
Isolation barrier between existing and replacement stone: Apply a suitable bituminous material to the
excavated surface of the existing stone, kept 25 mm back from the stone face to allow for subsequent
pointing.
Joint repair: Repair weathered or otherwise damaged existing joints, using materials compatible with
the original jointing and pointing.
Joint repair material: >
Replacement of original jointing material such as mason’s putty with a modern version of this material may result in a
serviceability problem in the short term.
Lead sheeting
Restoration work: Lay the flashings and weatherings after the completion of the stone repairs.
3.2 STONE CLEANING

Cleaning generally
The most important objective is to remove harmful deposits from the stone face. Aggressive cleaning agents such as certain
acids or alkalis may remove grime effectively, but are also likely to cause permanent damage to the stonework. Do not approve
their use.
Cleaning: Clean the stonework progressively as the work proceeds without using acid and without
damage to the work, as necessary to remove mortar smears, stains and discolouration, to conform to
the Cleaning program schedule.
Requirement: Clean the existing stonework to remove harmful or unsightly deposits of foreign material
and salts from the building fabric, without damage to the stonework, and leave the stonework surface
clean. Provide an even final appearance, without overlaps between bays which may cause streaks of
overcleaning. Do not attempt to produce a “new stone” appearance.
Extent of cleaning >
Preferably show the extent on the drawings, unless it is comprehensive, e.g. “All external stonework”.
Cleaning program schedule

Area to be cleaned Starting time Finishing time

Delete if programming is the contractor’s responsibility. Consider specifying cleaning to start as soon as access is available, to
determine the extent of remedial works, and reveal the colour and texture of the original material.
It may be necessary to restrict cleaning operations to out-of-hours work, to allow overnight soaking and spraying with less
disturbance to the public and other workers.
Precautions during cleaning
Generally: Take the necessary precautions to prevent damage to the building and its surroundings,
and nuisance to occupants and the public, resulting from cleaning operations. Prevent water and
cleaning wastes from entering the building or spraying over surrounding areas. Suspend work during
weather conditions which preclude compliance with the above.
Runoff: Prevent cleaning runoff from marking or tracking across stone facings and glazed areas.
Collect residual water and cleaning wastes and divert to means of disposal. Prevent water from
soaking into the ground next to the building.
Temporary caulking: Provide temporary caulking where necessary to prevent the entry of water and
cleaning wastes into gaps such as open or suspect joints, scaffold tie penetrations, and building-
pavement junctions. Remove on completion of cleaning.
Sheeting: Enclose the exterior of the scaffolding with continuous sheeting sealed to prevent nuisance
to the public from stonework cleaning operations.
Warning notices: Provide notices in conspicuous positions where necessary to warn occupants or the
public of dangers or risks associated with the work.
Fixtures and foreign matter
Show on the drawings the areas and types of vegetation (creepers, vines, etc.) to be removed as nominated in the Template.
Removal: Before cleaning commences, remove the following without damaging the stonework:
- Foreign matter including old finishes, graffiti, bird droppings, soot and facade vegetation in
conformance with the Schedule of old finishes to be removed.
- Existing fixtures required to be removed in conformance with the Schedule of fixtures to be
removed. Preserve the removed fixtures and refix on completion of the cleaning.
Bird droppings and soot: Where encrustations require scraping, use a wooden scraper on vulnerable
stone surfaces.
On birds and buildings, see BDP EDG Note DES56.
Facade vegetation: Poison designated vegetation, and remove it after it has died.
- Designated vegetation: >
Schedule of old finishes to be removed
Finish Location Removal method
Schedule of fixtures to be removed

Fixture Location Subsequent action
Fixture: e.g. bird deterrents, flagpoles, grilles, light brackets.

Subsequent action: “Refix” or “Remove from site”, or “Deliver to contract administrator”.
Cleaning water
Water supply: Supply clean, fresh water, non-staining to stonework, for stonework cleaning operations
including pre-wetting, soaking, washing down and final washing. Use cleaning water which contains
no solvents, chemicals or other admixtures.

Neutrality: Establish the pH of the water before commencing work. If it is below 6.8, include an alkaline
additive to increase the pH to 7.0.
Pressure boosting: Provide additional storage capacity and pressure boosting if the required pressure
and flow rate are not available on site from mains pressure.
- Maximum water pressure: >
- Maximum flow rate (L/m per nozzle): >
Water temperature: Provide safety devices to ensure that the water temperature does not exceed
55°C at the nozzle.
Filtration: If necessary, filter the cleaning water to remove existing minerals or other substances
injurious to stonework.
Cleaning operations
Sequence: Clean stonework in a progressive sequence of vertical bays. Start cleaning each bay from
the top and work downward to the bottom.
Pre-wetting and soaking: Immediately before cleaning, pre-wet the wall areas to be cleaned, and any
masonry areas underneath the areas to be cleaned, using cleaning water applied using spray mist
nozzles fixed at appropriate centres and at a uniform distance from the stone surface.
- Spray mist nozzles:
. Distance from stone surface (mm): >
e.g. “450 – 500 mm”. Establish the dimension by site testing.
- Soaking periods (minimum):
. Initial pre-wetting and soaking: >
. Subsequent soaking periods: >
Scrubbing: Immediately after the soaking period, clean the stonework by scrubbing, assisted by fine
water jets to remove the soiled water and cleaning wastes continuously from the stonework surface.
Repeat the soaking and scrubbing processes until the required final appearance is achieved. Ensure
that arrises and joints are not damaged by abrasion.
Scrubbing brushes: Nylon bristle brushes. Do not use severely worn brushes.
Washing down: At the completion of the scrubbing process wash the stonework down using water.
Repeat the process until cleaning wastes have been removed. Allow to dry.
Final washing: Immediately before the removal of the scaffold, wash down again with water to remove
debris or staining arising from the work.
Detergent cleaning
Even if provided at neutral pH, cleaning detergents are not the preferred method for sedimentary or metamorphic stone.
Detergents may have a harmful influence on stonework: they may contain aggressive additives; they may encourage algal
growth; residual detergents may cause excessive wetting of the stone after the restoration is complete. It is therefore desirable
to carry out preliminary laboratory tests on proposed cleaning agents to determine whether they are likely to have any
detrimental effect on the stonework. Trials would also be necessary to establish the effectiveness of detergent cleaning of
polished stone. Felt pad buffing may be more appropriate.
Detergent: General purpose neutral, non-ionic biodegradable surfactant used in the form of a solution
diluted with water.
Solution (detergent:water): >
Establish proportions by testing.
Soaking periods (minimum):
- Initial pre-wetting and soaking: >
- Subsequent soaking periods: >
Application: After pre-wetting and soaking, but before scrubbing, apply the detergent solution using a
paint brush.
Desalination
It is not possible to predetermine the salination regime. Expert advice should be sought.
Precontract testing will be necessary to determine the level of contamination, the type of salts, the principal cations and anions,
changes in the distribution of individual salts (chlorides, sulphates, nitrates), the solubility of the salts, the total soluble salts
content, and the method of desalination most likely to be effective. Therefore before specifying a desalination program:
• Make test drillings in representative locations of the suspect areas.

• Take from each drilling not less than three samples of powdered material at different depths, the first sample close to the
surface, to establish a salt profile.
• Have the samples analysed to determine the composition and quantity of salts present.
• If desalination is required, show on the contract drawings or specify the areas to be treated.
• Use the analyses as a reference in assessing the effectiveness of the salt removal.
Further tests to monitor the effectiveness of the method will be necessary during the course of the work.
Where possible site tests should be carried out during warm, dry weather to avoid costly artificial drying of the tested surface.
Desalination should generally be completed before repairs and restoration work.
Process: Where areas require desalination, bring the salts to the surface of the stone by washing or
poulticing, and remove the surface salts by brushing.
- Areas requiring desalination: >
- Method of desalination: >
Highly soluble chlorides and nitrates can be readily removed by washing whereas low solubility salts (e.g. calcium sulphate) are
more difficult.
Washing: Generally use the methods specified for stone cleaning. Repeatedly soak the affected area
with fine mist water sprays. After each spraying cycle brush or hose off the surface salts.
- Spray mist nozzles:
. Distance from stone surface (mm): >
. Nozzle diameter (mm): >
. Maximum surface area per nozzle (m2): >
. Maximum water pressure (°C): >
. Maximum water temperature: >
- Washing cycles:
. Spraying time per cycle: >
. Time interval between cycles: >
. Total number of cycles per area of surface:
>
Poulticing: Apply poulticing material to the affected areas. Repeat the application as necessary. Brush
the surface after each application.
Localised desalination may sometimes be done more effectively by poulticing.
- Poulticing material: >
e.g. “Paper pulp”, “Absorbent clay”.
Structural fixings
Existing fixings: Remove non-complying existing fixings encountered during stonework repairs, and
replace them with complying fixings.
3.3 JOINTS
Preparation for repointing
Sequence: Do not commence repointing until repair work in the vicinity has been completed.
Raking: Rake out the joints to a depth of at least 20 mm.
Cleaning: Clean the opposing surfaces of the raked joint to remove residual pointing, foreign material
and loose stone. Do not undercut or feather the stone arrises.
Opening out: Where the joint width is required to be increased, open out the joint to the required width
and depth.
- Method: >
- Joint width (mm): >
For mortar pointing, usually to between 4.5 and 5.5 mm. For sealant pointing, usually to 6 mm.
If the building is historically or otherwise significant, and has fine joints which are aesthetically important, consider opening out
the joints only if serious damage from pointing failure would otherwise result, and keep the extent to a minimum.

Mortar repointing
Cementitious mortars may be inappropriate for repointing stonework, such as parapets and copings, subject to large moisture or
thermal movements. Elastomeric sealant may be more suitable provided the modulus of elasticity and substrate bonding are
acceptable.
Dampening: Immediately before repointing use a fine water spray to dampen the joint surfaces without
over-wetting.
Vertical joints: Insert a backing rod in vertical joints only, to give a joint depth of 20 mm before
pointing.
Operations: Mix the mortar to a putty-like consistency. Fill the joint in several operations by inserting
the material and compacting it using a jointing key, applying pressure normal to the joint (i.e. not
drawn along). Half fill the joint in the first operation, then complete the filling and cut the joint off flush.
Joint finish: Strike the joint to a dense smooth flush surface. If the stone arrises have become rounded
or otherwise worn away, iron the joint to a slightly concave surface, such that no feather edge is
formed.

STRUCTURAL STEEL STRUCTURE
STRUCTURAL STEEL
This worksection is applicable to general structural steel framing in buildings, and includes cold formed purlins and girts used in
conjunction with structural steelwork. Steelwork employing specialised construction techniques is not covered.
• Light steel framing.
• Proprietary steel framing components or systems installed in accordance with the manufacturers’ published requirements.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
General: Provide structural steelwork that is integrated into the building construction.

General
have no overlaps.
- Steel – hot dip galvanized coatings.
- Steel – protective paint coatings.
1.3 STANDARDS
General
Materials, construction, fabrication and erection: To AS 4100.
Cold-formed steel: AS/NZS 4600.
AS 4100 is cited in the BCA for structural sufficiency and fire-resistance levels. For background information and guidance to this
standard, see AS 4100 Supp 1. For less complex steel structures, see SAA HB48.

1.4 ADJOINING ELEMENTS

General
Fixing: Provide for the fixing of adjoining building elements that are to be connected to or supported on
the structural steel.
Fixing requirements for adjoining elements may not be shown on the structural drawings. This clause makes it the contractor’s
responsibility to coordinate the requirements.
1.5 INSPECTION
Notice – off site
- Materials including welding consumables before fabrication.
- Testing of welding procedures and welder qualification tests.
- Commencement of shop fabrication.
- Commencement of welding.
- Before placement of root runs of complete penetration butt welds.
- Completion of fabrication before surface preparation.
- Surface preparation before shop painting.
- Completion of protective coating before delivery to site.
Notice – on site
- Steelwork on site before erection.
- Anchor bolts in position before casting in.
- Steelwork and column bases erected on site, before grouting, encasing, site painting or cladding.
- Tensioning of bolts in categories 8.8/TB and 8.8/TF.
- Reinforcement and formwork in place prior to any encasement.
- After any grouting, encasement, fire protection or site painting is completed.
1.6 TESTS
Testing
Conform with the Non-destructive testing of bars and section schedule.
Ultrasonic testing of plates
Quality level to AS 1710: >
Non-destructive testing of bars and sections schedule
Item to be tested Test method Other requirements
See AS/NZS 3679.1 Appendix A for requirements at time of ordering steel.

Non destructive weld examination
Other parts of AS/NZS 1554 may also need to be referenced e.g. AS 1554.2 (studs), AS/NZS 1554.5 (elements subjected to
fatigue loading) or AS/NZS 1554.6 (stainless steel).
Methods: Inspect welds in conformance with the Non-destructive weld examination (NDE) table.
Radiographic and ultrasonic inspection: Have the examination performed by an independent testing
authority.
Repairs: Repair welds revealed as faulty by non-destructive examination and repeat the examination.

Non-destructive weld examination (NDE) table

Type of weld and category Examination method Extent (% of total length of
weld type)
Fillet welds Visual means 100
Butt welds, GP Visual means 100
Butt welds, SP Visual means 100
Fillet and butt welds, SP Radiographic or ultrasonic 10
inspection
Use the table unless the methods and extent of non-destructive examination are shown on the drawings.
For structures subject to high levels of fatigue, see AS/NZS 1554.5. For stainless steel, see AS/NZS 1554.6.
Examination method: Depending on the application it may be necessary or desirable to show the test method designation
number from AS 2177.1 Table 3.1 for radiographic methods, or AS 2207 Section 3 for ultrasonic methods. In this case separate
schedule entries may be required for differing butt weld types, material thicknesses or locations.
Extent: AS/NZS 1554.1 Table 7.4 give guidance on the suggested extent of non-destructive examination which is consistent
with the principles on which the standard is based. Vary table if required.
1.7 SAMPLES
Special finishes
General: Submit samples of finished steel in conformance with the Special finishes schedule.
Minimum sample sizes: 0.1 m2.
Welding
Minimum sample size: 300 mm run of weld.
1.8 SUBMISSIONS
Subcontractors
Submit names and contact details of proposed fabricator and installer.
Refer to the Australian Institute of Steel Construction fabricator matrix for information on fabricators such as QA, size, etc.
Shop drawings
General: Submit 3 hard copies, 1 transparency or 1 email set of shop drawings showing the following
information:
Delete the forms of copies not required.
- Relevant details of each assembly, component and connection.
- Information relative to fabrication, surface treatment, transport and erection.
Particular: Include the following information:
- Identification.
- Steel type and grade.
- Dimensions of items.
- Required camber, where applicable.
- Fabrication methods including, where applicable, hot or cold forming and post weld heat treatment.
- Location, type and size of welds and/or bolts and bolt holes.
- Weld categories and bolting categories.
- Orientation of members.
- Surface preparation methods and coating system if shop applied.
- Best practice details in relation to application of protective coatings.
- Breather holes for hollow sections (with seal plates) being hot-dip galvanized.
- Procedures necessary for shop and site assembly, and erection.
- Location of and preparation for site welds.
- Temporary works such as lifting lugs, support points, temporary cleats and bracing which are
required for transport and erection of the structural steelwork.

- Required fixings for adjoining building elements.

See AS 4100 clause 14.3 regarding fabrication methods. Show on the drawings any restrictions on fabrication methods arising
from brittle fracture considerations set out in AS 4100 Section 10.
Requirements: Do not commence fabrication until final approved shop drawings are received. Allow 7
working days for review of shop drawings after submission.
Amend period to suit.
Tests
Steel: Submit evidence that the steel used in the work complies with the cited material standards.
Acceptable evidence: Certified mill test reports, or test certificates issued by the mill.
If other evidence is acceptable (e.g. certificates of independent tests to AS/NZS 3678 Appendix A) specify it here.
Alternative: Have the steel tested by an independent testing authority for compliance with the chemical
composition and mechanical test requirements of the cited material standard.
Concrete or masonry anchors: If masonry anchors other than as shown on the drawings are required
or proposed for the support or fixing of structural steel, submit evidence of the anchor capacity to carry
the load.
Execution
Survey certificates: >
If a certificate from a licensed surveyor is required, specify the particulars here.
Anchor bolts: If anchor bolts do not meet specified tolerances in relation to their location, submit
proposals that will allow steel erection to proceed.
Splicing: If splicing of structural members is intended, submit proposals.
Welding procedures: Submit details of proposed welding procedures, using the WPS form in Appendix
C of AS/NZS 1554.1.
Identification marks: If members and/or connections are to be exposed to view submit details of
proposed marking.
Distortions: If a member is distorted during the galvanizing process, submit proposals for straightening.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 STEEL TYPE AND GRADE

Material
Conformance: Steel members and sections shall conform to the Steel grade table and or the Steel
grade schedule.
See AS 4100 clause 2.2. If steel is not identified or tested for compliance it must be down graded as required by clause 2.2.3.
Steel grade (minimum) table

Type of steel Grade
Universal beams and columns, parallel flange channels, large angles to 300
AS/NZS 3679.1
Flat, small angles, taper flange beams and columns to 250
AS/NZS 3679.1
Welded sections to AS/NZS 3679.2 300
Hot rolled plates, floor plates and slabs to AS/NZS 3678 250
Hollow sections to AS 1163:
- Circular sections less than 165 mm nominal outside diameter C250/C350
- Sections other than the above C350/C450
Cold formed purlins and girts to AS 1397 G450 Z350

Steel grade (minimum) schedule

Type of steel Grade
Cast steels to AS 2074
Hot-rolled plate to AS/NZS 1594
Steel rails to AS 1085.1
Include only if the drawings do not show the required steel type and grade.
Refer to the relevant standard and to the manufacturer for the available steel grades. State here the required grades if the
minimum grades specified in the Template are not acceptable, or if no grade is specified there.
2.2 BOLTS
Bolts, nuts and washers
General: Hot-dipped galvanized, corrosion-free, coated in oil and in serviceable condition.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 FABRICATION
See AS 4100 Section 14 and 15 and AS/NZS 1554.1.
If areas are subject to plastic deformation show them on the drawings. Refer AS 4100 clause 13.3.4.5.
General
Care: Shop detail and fabricate members so that they can be properly erected.
Substitution: If substitution of members is proposed, provide details.
Minimum requirements: For connection bolts not shown on the drawings or specified, provide 10 mm
plates and 2 M20 bolts in 8.8/S category.
Beam camber
General: If beam members have a natural camber within the straightness tolerance, fabricate and
erect them with the camber up.
Taking advantage of “Natural camber up” is particularly important in cold-formed sections such as purlins for low pitched roofs.
Straightening
Care: If straightening or flattening members, do not damage.
Work exposed to view
Welds: Grind smooth but do not reduce the weld below its nominal size.
Shearing, flame cutting and chipping: Perform carefully and accurately.
Corners and edges: Grind fair those corners and edges which are sharp, marred, or roughened.
Site work
General: Other than work shown on the shop drawings as site work, do not fabricate, modify or weld
structural steel on site.
Identification marks
General: Provide marks or other means of identifying each member compatible with the finish, for the
setting out, location, erection and connection of the steelwork.
High strength bolting: If the work includes more than one bolting category, mark high-strength
structural bolted connections with a 75 mm wide flash of colour, clear of holes.
Cold formed members: Clearly mark material thickness.
Tolerances
Measurement: Tolerances are to be checked by measurement after fabrication when corrosion
protection has been applied.
Conformance: To AS 4100 clause 14.4.
Amend if departing from AS 4100 clause 14.4.

3.2 BOLTING
Connections
General: Bolting is to be in conformance with the Bolting category schedule.
Bolting category 8.8/TF:
- Contact surfaces: Clean, as-rolled and free from applied finishes.
Bolting category schedule
Joint location Bolt type Bolting category
It is preferable to show this information on the drawings. If it is, delete the schedule and the reference to it. Bolting categories
are defined in AS 4100 clause 9.3.1 which cites AS/NZS 1252 for bolting categories 8.8/S, 8.8/TB and 8.8/TF, and
AS/NZS 1111 for 4.6/S.
Foundation bolts
General: Provide each foundation bolt with 2 nuts and 2 oversize washers and provide sufficient
thread to permit the levelling nut and washer to be set below the base plate.
Supply of foundation (anchor) bolts is usually included with supply of structural steel. Installation of the bolts is specified in the
Concrete in situ worksection in clause 4.1.
Hexagonal bolts: To AS/NZS 1111.1.
Hexagonal nuts: Class 5.
Plain washers: To AS 1237.1.
Supply only of foundation bolts: >
State “Required” or “Not required” (e.g. as when masonry anchors are to be used).
Lock nuts
General: Provide lock nuts for bolts in moving parts or parts subject to vibration and for vertical bolts in
tension.
Tensioning of bolting categories 8.8/TB and 8.8/TF
Method: Use part-turn-of-nut or load indicating washers.
Refer to AS 4100 clause 15.2.5.
Permanent bolting
Completion: Bolt only when correct alignment and preset or camber have been achieved.
3.3 WELDING
General
Other parts of AS/NZS 1554 may also need to be referenced e.g. AS 1554.2 (studs), AS/NZS 1554.5 (elements subjected to
fatigue loading) or AS/NZS 1554.6 (stainless steel). See also WTIA TN11 for a commentary on the series. Some additional
requirements which may need to be stated in the contract are discussed in AS/NZS 1554.1 Appendix D, AS/NZS 1554.5
Appendix D and AS/NZS 1554.6 Appendix G.
Weld category
Weld categories not shown on the drawings: Category GP.
Weld type
Weld type not shown on the drawings: 6 mm continuous fillet weld made using E48XX electrodes or
equivalent.
It is preferable to show all the weld types and categories on the drawings. If they are, delete ‘category’ and ‘type’ clauses.
For elements subjected to fatigue loading, refer to AS 4100 Section 11. Welding details to AS/NZS 1554.5 should be shown on
the drawings.
Site welds
Completion: Weld only when correct alignment and preset or camber have been achieved.

Overhead welding: If overhead welding is required, submit proposals.

Stress relief treatment
Type: >
If required and not shown on the drawings, state here the extent and method (e.g. “Post weld heat treatment”).
3.4 ERECTION
General
Execution: Ensure that every part of the structure has sufficient design capacity and is stable under
construction loads produced by the construction procedure or as a result of construction loads which
are applied.
Calculations: If required to justify the adequacy of the structure to sustain any loads and/or procedures
which may be imposed, provide calculations.
Attention should be given to AS 3828. This deals with safe erection of steelwork, and places certain responsibilities on the
design engineer/specifier.
Temporary work
General: Supply all necessary temporary bracing or propping.
Temporary connections: If cleats not shown on shop drawings are required, submit details.
Temporary members: If temporary members are required, fix so as not to weaken or deface
permanent steelwork.
Hand flame cutting
General: If hand flame cutting of bolt holes appears to be necessary, submit a report and proposed
alternative options.
AS 4100 clause 14.3.5.1 permits hand flame cutting of bolt holes only as site rectification of base plates.
Movements
General: Allow for thermal movements during erection.
Clearances
End clearances at connections (mm): >
If not shown on the drawings. Otherwise delete.
Foundation bolts
General: For each group of foundation bolts provide a template with setting out lines clearly marked
for positioning the bolts when casting in.
Foundation bolts are frequently fitted with a sleeve when casting in to allow minor adjustment. If applicable show on the
drawings the required size of the sleeve.
Grouting at supports
Preparation: Before grouting steelwork to be supported by concrete, masonry and the like, set
steelwork on packing or wedges.
- Permanent packing or wedges: Form with solid steel or grout of similar strength to the permanent
grout.
- Temporary packing or wedges: Remove before completion of grouting.
Timing: Grout at supports before the construction of any supported floors, walls, roofing, wall cladding
or precast.
Temperature: Do not grout if the temperature of the base plate or the footing surface exceeds 35°C.
Method: >
State, e.g. “Pressure grouting”, “Dry pack with stiff cement mortar”.
Type: >
State, e.g. “1 cement:2 sand” or use a proprietary brand name.
Minimum compressive strength (MPa): >
Minimum thickness (mm): >
Maximum thickness (mm): >

Handling
Care: Handle members or components without overstressing or deforming them.
Drifting
Limitation: Use drifting only to bring members into position, without enlarging holes or distorting
components.
3.5 PROTECTION OF STEELWORK

General
General: For protection of steelwork from corrosion, refer to the Steel protective paint coatings and/or
Hot dip galvanized coatings worksections as appropriate.
There are situations where coating of steelwork for corrosion protection is neither necessary nor economically feasible, as would
be the case where anticipated corrosion rates are too low to compromise the structure or sacrificial corrosion of sections has
been allowed for in the selection of section thicknesses. AS/NZS 2312 Section 1.2 lists typical situations for which coating for
corrosions resistance is not required. For these cases delete the ‘General’ subclause above, and retain the following text. In all
other situations, retain the ‘General’ subclause above include the Steel protective paint coatings and/or the Hot dip galvanized
coatings worksections in the specification and delete all the following text.
General: Structural steelwork not encased in concrete shall be given a protective coating.
Standards: To AS 1627 and AS/NZS 2312 Section 1.
Steel surfaces: Remove loose millscale, loose rust, oil, grease, dirt, globules of weld metal, weld slag
and other foreign matter. Ensure surfaces are dry.
Surface preparation: Class 1 blast.
Amend to suit anticipated equipment availability e.g. ‘power wire brush’ or in lieu of blasting.
Coating: Coat prepared steelwork as follows:
- Primer: Zinc phosphate primer.
- Thickness: 70 µm.
Nominate others if preferred.
- Requirement: Verify and record thickness.
- Time delay: Prime the steel surface as soon as possible after surface preparation and before the
surface deteriorates. If the surface is contaminated or rust bloomed, repeat surface preparation
before priming.
- Conditions: Do not prime in adverse conditions.
- Concrete encasing: Where members are part concrete encased extend the priming 25 mm into the
surface to be encased.
- Clearances: Keep priming clear of members and components to be site welded, and surfaces
against which concrete is to be poured (including concrete encasing except as noted above). On
completion of site welding, of concrete pouring and of 8.8/TF bolting, prime to give complete
coverage of exposed surfaces.
- Inaccessible surfaces: Where surfaces will be in contact or near contact after fabrication or erection,
apply the finish and allow it to dry before assembly.
Marking: On the contact surfaces of friction type joints, confine the use of marking ink to the minimum
necessary for marking hole positions.
Shop work: Apply the primer coat or protective system to the structural steel before delivery to the site.
Transport and handling: Do not damage the paintwork.
Specifying the desired result or outcome, leaving the method (e.g. protection, waiting until the paint is dry) up to the contractor.
Site work: After erection, repair damage to the shop coating and apply coating omitted at site
connections.
Decorative finishes, and on-site touch up to the paint coatings specified here, are covered in the Painting worksection.
Refer also to the Metals and prefinishes worksection.

3.6 SPECIAL FINISHES

General
General: Apply special finishes in conformance with the Special finishes schedule.
Special finishes schedule
Defined special finish Shop or site application Steelwork location
This clause can be applied where surfaces of steel members or welds are to be dressed after fabrication for appearance or
other purposes. Such finishes are most readily assessed by comparison with a sample. They would typically be surfaces of
steel members or welds required to be dressed by abrasive blasting, grinding or the like, either for appearance or as part of a
connecting or contact surface; e.g. cut surfaces where the required maximum roughness differs from AS 4100 Table 14.3.3.
Define here any special finishes required, and their applicable steelwork locations; or preferably, show them on the drawings.
3.7 METAL SPRAYING

General
General: Apply sprayed metal finishes in conformance with the Metal spray schedule.
Refer to AS/NZS 2312 clause 5.2. Seek advice.
Metal spray schedule
Steel member or Abrasive blast Metal spray type Seal coat
surface cleaning to AS 1627.4
Abrasive blast cleaning to AS 1627.4: Grit blasting to Sa 2½ or Sa 3 to AS 1627.9, with a profile height of 50 µm or 75 µm, is
suggested in AS/NZS 2312 at clause 5.2.2.
Metal spray type: Zinc, aluminium, duplex, or composite metal spray/paint systems are available. The coating should be applied
as soon as possible after blasting.
Seal coat: Presumably not required where composite systems are used. See AS/NZS 2312 clause 8.9.3. Note the importance of
avoiding delays in sealer application.
3.8 FIRE PROTECTION COATINGS

General
General: Apply fire protection to structural steelwork in conformance with the Fire protection
coatings schedule.
Fire protection coatings schedule
Steel member Surface preparation Shop or site Fire protection system
application
Fire protection of structural steel is usually specified in the worksection appropriate to the protection method e.g. concrete
encasement in the Concrete in situ worksection, plastering in the Plastering worksection, sprayed coatings in the Sprayed
mineral fire protection worksection, masonry in the Brick and block construction worksection. If the fire protection is not shown
on the drawings and it is necessary to specify the fire protection in this worksection it may be specified here.
Steel member: e.g. “All beams” or “Beams B1, B2”, “Columns C1, C2”.

Surface preparation: Specify the surface preparation, if any, required before application of the fire protection system.
Fire protection system: Specify the type of fire protection, the minimum thickness and the reinforcement, if any. Alternatively
specify a proprietary system. BCA Specification A2.3 gives minimum thickness and other requirements for some commonly
used materials to achieve various fire resistance levels. It also refers to the AISC Guidelines for Assessment of Fire Resistance
of Structural Steel Members. AS 3784.1 gives guidance to selection and installation of sprayed mineral coatings.
Thin film intumescent fire retardant coatings are available, which may be suitable in some applications (e.g. exposed internal
steelwork). Check BCA provisions.
3.9 REPAIRS
General
Repair finishes to ensure the full integrity of each phase and each coating.
3.10 COMPLETION
Tolerances
Compliance: After erection is complete confirm compliance with AS 4100 clause 15.3.
Temporary connections
Remove temporary cleats on completion and restore the surface.
Record drawings
Supply ‘as-built’ structural and shop drawings.

LIGHT STEEL FRAMING STRUCTURE
LIGHT STEEL FRAMING
This worksection is applicable to framing for structures generally comprising cold formed metallic-coated or aluminium/zinc-
coated steel sections where particular project specific requirements need to be met.
• Proprietary components or systems installed in accordance with the manufacturers’ published requirements.
• Joinery.
• Where cold formed steel sections are being used for structural framing, it is important that the structural drawings either
define performance criteria (loading, deflection, exposure) or detail the member sizes and the connection details. If the
former is adopted, independent certification by a professional engineer of the design and documentation, and of the
erected framing, are appropriate.
• Cold-formed sections used in non-load bearing partitions which are specified in the Partitions – framed and lined
worksection.
• Cold-formed purlins and girts used in conjunction with structural steel framing which are specified in the Structural steel
worksection.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
General: Provide light steel floor, wall and roof framing that is:
Delete non applicable framing from the text. Delete the first, fourth and last points if the framing is fully documented in the
contract documents.

General

have no overlaps.
>
1.3 STANDARDS
Standards
Design, materials and protection: To AS/NZS 4600.
Design of domestic metal framing: To AS 3623.
AS 3623 is a performance-based design standard for the framing of domestic buildings of up to two storeys in height and roof
pitches of up to 35°. It is a deemed-to-satisfy standard in the BCA (Housing Provisions). Include if the contractor is responsible
for design.
1.4 INSPECTION
Notice
Inspection: Give sufficient notice so that inspection may be made of steel framing erected on site
before lining or cladding.
If independent certification is being required, delete this clause.
1.5 SUBMISSIONS
Design
General: Where the structural drawings define performance criteria, submit independent design,
documentation and certification from a professional engineer.
Reactions: Provide location and magnitude of reactions to be accommodated by the support structure.
Floor and wall frame member sizes: Submit a schedule of proposed member sizes, certified as
meeting stated project and AS/NZS 4600 requirements for span, spacings and loadings.
Shop drawings
General: Submit shop detail drawings certified by a professional engineer stating that the design has
been carried out in accordance with stated project and AS/NZS 4600 requirements for the
configurations and loadings.
Roof trusses: Prepare drawings to show:
- On a plan, the truss layout.
- On elevations, the arrangement of members allowing for the accommodation of in-roof services and
the size and section type of each member.
- The method of assembly, connection, holding down and bracing.
Wall frames: If wall framing is to be pre-fabricated, prepare drawings to show:
- On plan, the wall layout.
- On elevations, the arrangement of members, and the size and section type of each member.
- The method of assembly, connection, holding down and bracing.
AS/NZS 4600 is cited in the BCA for structural sufficiency.
Tolerances
Walls: Conform to the Walls tolerances table.

Walls tolerances table

Generally: Verticality in 2000 mm 4
1
Generally: Flatness in 2000 mm 3
2
Features : Verticality in 2000 mm 2
Features: Horizontality in 2000 mm 2
1. Flatness: Measured under a straightedge laid in any direction on a plane surface.
2. Features: Conspicuous horizontal or vertical lines including external corners, parapets, reveals,
heads, sills.
Note the distinction between features and plane surfaces such as walls and soffits.
Floors: Construct floors to a tolerance of 3 mm maximum deviation in 3 mm measured under a straight
edge placed anywhere on the surface in any direction.
2 EXECUTION

Fabrication
Length: Cut members accurately to length so that they fit firmly against abutting members.
Service holes: Form holes by drilling or punching.
- Bushes: Provide plastic bushes or grommets to site cut holes.
- Swarf: Remove swarf and other debris from cold-formed steel framing immediately.
Site work: Do not fabricate on site where welded connections are required.
Fastening
Type: Select from the following:
- Bolting.
- Self-drilling, self-tapping screws.
- Blind rivets.
- Proprietary clinching system.
- Structural adhesives.
Welding
Burning: Avoid procedures that result in greater than localised “burning” of the sheets or framing
members.
Prefabricated frames
General: Protect frames from damage or distortion during storage, transport and erection.
Metal separation
General: Install lagging to separate non-ferrous service pipes and accessories from the framing.
Timber noggings or supports can be used to isolate the service pipes and accessories from the steel framing.
Unseasoned or CCA treated timber
General: Do not fix in contact with framing without fully painting the timber and/or the steel.
Earthing
Permanent earthing: Required.
Temporary earthing: Provide temporary earthing during erection until the permanent earthing is
installed.
The local authority may have requirements for permanent earthing of the frame.
Refer to AS/NZS 3000 Section 5 for earthing arrangements and earthing conductors.

Protection
General: Coatings which have been damaged by welding or other causes shall be restored.
Thoroughly clean affected areas to base metal and coat with zinc rich organic primer to APAS-2916.
Certification
General: For components for which independent design certification has been required, provide
independent certification for the erected components confirming compliance with the design intent.
2.2 WALL FRAMING

Wall studs
General: Provide studs in single lengths without splices. Place a stud under, or within 40 mm from,
each structural load point from roof or ceiling (except for openings). Provide multiple studs at points of
concentrated load.
Maximum stud spacing: 600 mm.
Heads to openings
General: Provide lintels appropriate to load and span.
Additional support
General: Provide additional support in the form of noggings, trimmers and studs for support and fixing
of lining, cladding, hardware, accessories, fixtures and fittings.
2.3 TRUSSES
Fabrication
Assembly: Factory assemble trusses.
Supports for in roof services
General: If walkways, mechanical plant or other services are to be supported within the roof space,
provide support.
Marking
General: Permanently mark each truss to show:
- Project identification.
- Manufacturer.
- Tag or number.
- Location.
- Support points.
Installation
General: Fix to support structures, plumb to within H/200, where H is the height at the apex.
2.4 FLOOR FRAMING

General
General: Construct framing in conformance with the Floor framing member schedule.
Floor framing member schedule
Member type Section Design spacing (mm) Design span (mm)
Use only if the floor framing members are not shown on the drawings.
Member type: e.g. “Joist”, “Bearer”.
Section: The manufacturer’s catalogue code or overall dimensions (D x B).
Steel floor framing is suitable for sheet flooring (particleboard, plywood or fibre cement) fixed by gluing, by power driven nails or
by self drilling screws.
Protection: If floor framing is for ground floor construction, ensure that it is protected from moisture.

Construction loads: If construction loading exceeds design loading, provide additional support so as to
avoid overstressing of members.
2.5 COMPLETION
Cleaning
On completion of framing remove debris from any gaps between members.
3 SELECTIONS
3.1 FRAMING SYSTEM

Proprietary framing system: >

TENSIONED MEMBRANE STRUCTURES STRUCTURE
TENSIONED MEMBRANE STRUCTURES
This worksection is applicable to suspended tensioned membrane structures, including shade fabric cloth or waterproof
membrane structures and including the supporting structure, tension members, anchorages and foundations, whether attached
to other structures or stand-alone.
• This worksection does not include proprietary structures and systems covered by the manufacturers’ details, specification
and certification.
• Landscape – furniture and fixtures.
• None.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
General: Provide structures that conform to the Selections, and as follows:
- Pose no risk to the public during erection, and during their design life.

General
have no overlaps.
>
1.3 INTERPRETATIONS
Definitions
- Membrane: A thin and flexible sheet of fabric material.

- Shade cloth: A knitted fabric designed for external use with a weave designed to provide a specified
amount of shade.
- Shade structure: A tensioned membrane structure having the primary purpose of providing shade to
an area of ground.
- Tensioned membrane: A thin cloth or sheet that is held in a predetermined 2- or 3-dimensional
shape, under permanent tension. The shape and the tension are interrelated and designed to safely
carry the applied loads (such as wind) in a predictable manner.
- Tensioned membrane structure: The total structure comprising the tensioned membrane(s),
supporting structures, rigging, foundations and existing structures to which they are attached.
- Useful life: The earliest estimated age of the membrane at which it can no longer carry its design
ultimate loads.
- Weak link: A connection assembly having a reliably known strength and identified by permanent
marking. The computation of required strength shall take into consideration all applicable joint
eccentricities under all conditions and directions of loading, wear and tear, structural details and
weaknesses.
1.4 DESIGN
Certification
General: Submit certification from a professional engineer to confirm the following:
- Proposed structures will be stable and safe.
- The membrane or fabric can carry the full wind loads for
the stated design life, taking into consideration UV and other degradation.
Design life
Design life: >
Nominate the design life. Note that structures should be treated as temporary if they are to be demolished and disposed of in
less than 1 year.
Water shedding
General: Design the tensioned membrane structure so that water run off is properly considered,
including the elimination of the risk of ponding.
Weak links
General: Supply weak links that conform to the following:
- Lower limit for ultimate strength: >
- Higher limit for ultimate strength: >
Seams
General: Design the individual fabric or membrane segments with the minimum number of joins and
ensure that seams are shingle laid and that cut edges face down hill.
1.5 SUBMISSIONS
Shop drawings
General: Submit shop drawings including the following:
- Overall plans and elevations of the final design.
- Details of the support structure, footings and bracing where applicable.
- Details of the tension membranes including the fabric joints, seams and pockets.
- Details of the tension cables, plates and connectors.
- Details of the weak links, where applicable.
- Design tension figures for the fabric and the connectors.
Add to or delete from these as required.
Product data
General: Submit product data as follows:
- For proprietary systems, manufacturers’ details, specification and design certification.
- For fabric or membrane, manufacturer’s technical data sheets providing the following information:

. Test reports on material strength.

. Test reports on UV stability through accelerated tests.
. Manufacturer’s colour range.
. For shade cloth, the % shade and UV penetration in a tensioned state.
. Manufacturer’s warranty.
. Flammability test results.
Add to or delete from as required.
1.6 INSPECTION
Notice – off site
- Materials including fabric or membrane.
- Commencement of fabrication.
- Completion of fabrication.
Notice – on site
- Fabric or membrane on site before erection.
- Installation of fabric or membrane prior to final tensioning of the structure.
- Completion of installation.
1.7 TESTING
General
General: Conform with the Non-destructive testing schedule.
Seam tests
General: Load test seams in direct tension across the weld and also in peel to measure tensile
strength and adhesion.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 TENSION MEMBRANE STRUCTURES

Councils may have specific policies regarding the provision of tension membrane shade structures.
A structure may not need to be referred to Council where its proportions do not exceed nominated limits/criteria. Otherwise
lodgment of documentation to Council or other statutory certifying authority will be required. Check with the local Council for this
project.
Structural steel
Welding: To AS 1554.
AS 1554.6 deals with welding of stainless steel.
Finish: >
Generally paint finish or hot-dip galvanize to AS/NZS 4680.
Colour: Conform to the Finishes schedule.
Suspension cables
General: Preload suspension cables by cyclic loading to achieve a uniform modulus of elasticity and to
ensure a linear stress/strain relationship within the working range. Employ a swaging system to
achieve a breaking strength of terminals not lower than the minimum design strength of the cable
system.
Materials: Stainless steel Grade 316 or galvanized steel cables for cables greater than 12.7 mm
diameter.

Terminal connections
Material: Stainless steel, Grade 316.
Membrane anchor plates
General: Finish the anchor plates with smooth rounded arrises to the edges and penetrations to
prevent chaffing of the membrane or fabric.
Material: Aluminium alloy sheet to AS/NZS 1865 or Grade 316 stainless steel.
Concrete
Weak links
Identification and marking: Legibly and permanently imprint weak link components with their maximum
and minimum design ultimate strengths.
Spare parts: If included, provide a complete spare set of weak links with the structure.
Shade fabric
Material: Knitted all monofilament high-density polyethylene shade cloth with a minimum tensile
strength of 1000 newtons along the warp and weft and with a fire retardant coating.
Shade factor: Nominal 90% under tension.
UV Factor: >
Refer to manufacturer’s data. Different colours will give a different UV factor.
Proprietary Item: >
Specify a high quality fabric, which will give a service life of a minimum of 10 years.
Colour: >
Choose from the manufacturer’s colour range or ask for samples.
Seams: Provide seams with a minimum strength of 30 kN.
Stitching: Use UV stabilised polyester thread with a minimum tensile strength of 180 N. Incorporate
lock type stitching with a twin needle machine.
Perimeter reinforcing: Reinforce the perimeter of each membrane with UV stabilised polyester, coated
with PVC having a minimum tensile strength of 50 kN/m and incorporating pockets for the tension
cables.
Waterproof membranes
Material: Woven PES core with a PVC surface coated with PVDF for a dust and soil resistant surface.
Inspection: Check each roll of material for flatness, faults in the woven fabric and the coating by visual
inspection and by passing the membrane over a uniformly illuminated surface.
Weight: >
2 2
Generally, for membranes under 100 m 750 gsm and for membranes over 100 m as determined by the engineering design.
Proprietary item: >
Specify a high quality membrane, which will give a service life of a minimum of 10 years.
Colour: >
Choose from the manufacturer’s colour range or ask for samples.
Warranty
General: Provide a manufacturer’s warranty for the fabric or membrane material to guarantee that the
minimum strength will be retained for a period of 10 years.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXECUTION
Specialist subcontractor
General: Require subcontractors to use personnel having at least 5 years relevant experience in the
fabrication and erection of tensioned membrane structures including experience in areas exposed to
severe storms and cyclones where applicable.

There are alternative methods of ensuring that appropriately experienced subcontractors are engaged. Use this if there is no
nominated subcontractor, otherwise delete.
Nominated subcontractor: Engage the following subcontractor to carryout the design, fabrication,
erection and certification of lightweight tension membrane structures.
Company: >
Contact: >
Use only if there is a nominated subcontractor.
Membrane or fabric
General: Handle carefully during fabrication, transport and assembly to avoid damage. If assembling
on coarse surfaces, provide protective sheeting to avoid chaffing.
Tensioning: Tension the assembled membrane or fabric to the design tension figures for them and for
the connections.
Creases: Avoid creases. Where slight creasing is unavoidable they will be accepted if they are
isolated, minimal and generally not perceptible from a distance of 3 m.
Waterproof membranes
Joins: Use HF welding for all joins at seams and perimeter reinforcing.
Structural steel
Handling: Transport and store so as to avoid permanent deformation of the wire, rope or strand.
3.2 COMPLETION
Cleaning
General: Leave membrane in a clean state with all connections tightened and tensioning systems
properly secured and locking mechanisms in place. Touch up any damage to paintwork on supporting
posts and ensure that stainless steel fittings are free from handling marks.
Instruction manual: Provide written details on dismantling and reassembling the membrane or fabric
structures and if any special equipment is required for these operations.
As constructed drawings
General: Provide 2 hard copies and an electronic copy in the same format as the original drawings of
the as constructed structure where details have been changed from the approved shop drawings.
Maintenance manual
General: At practical completion provide 2 copies of the maintenance manual in A4 format bound in a
4-ring plastic binder and containing the following information:
- The name and contact numbers of the contractor.
- A copy of the as constructed drawings including the practical completion date.
- The manufacturer’s details of the fabric or membrane.
- The manufacturer’s warranty on the fabric or membrane.
- Instructions on dismantling and reassembling of the membranes including special tools or
equipment required, including advice on whether they should be dismantled prior to an impending
cyclone.
- Details on maintenance of the fabric membrane including cleaning, damage repairs and restitching
of the seams.
4 SELECTIONS
4.1 SCHEDULES
Finishes schedule
Location A B C

Non-destructive testing schedule

Items to be tested Test method Other requirements
Schedule here tests for fabric, membranes, seams, cables, swaging.

STEEL – HOT DIP GALVANIZED COATINGS STRUCTURE
STEEL – HOT DIP GALVANIZED COATINGS
This worksection is applicable to post-fabrication galvanizing of fabricated steel articles for which significant corrosion risk has
been identified either due to climatic or environmental conditions.
This worksection does not apply to coating of steelwork in situations where corrosion protection is neither necessary nor
economically feasible, as would be the case where anticipated corrosion rates are too low to compromise the structure, or
sacrificial corrosion of sections has been allowed for in the selection of section thicknesses. AS/NZS 2312 Section 1.2 lists
typical situations for which coating for corrosion resistance is not required. For these cases use the Structural steel worksection.
• Metals and prefinishes.
• Steel – protective paint coatings.
• Continuous (in-line) galvanizing of the sort applied to wire, tube or sheet galvanized in specialised or automatic plants.
• Steel – protective paint coatings.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
General: Provide hot dip galvanized coatings that control corrosion in the time to first maintenance.

General
have no overlaps.
>
The specification for the fabrication of the articles to be galvanized should include for removal of welding slag and burrs and
surface contaminants of coatings which cannot be removed using chemical cleaning, before delivery to the galvanizer.
Coordinate with the Structural steel worksection. Architectural finishes will be specified elsewhere e.g. Painting – coordinate.

1.3 STANDARDS
General
Coating: Comply with the requirements of AS/NZS 4680.
Metal finishing
Methods: To AS 1627.
Coating mass/thickness minima: To AS/NZS 4680.
AS/NZS 4680 covers hot dip galvanizing of fabricated ferrous articles, structural steel, steel reinforcement, steel sheet
fabrications, tubular fabrications, fabricated wire work, steel stampings, ferrous coatings, nails and other small components.
1.4 INSPECTION
Notice
- Coating integrity, at the galvanizing plant.
Visual inspection is necessary to check coating integrity. See AS/NZS 4680 clause A2(j). See also ‘After-Fabrication Hot Dip
Galvanizing’ Chapter 3.
1.5 TESTS
Galvanizing tests
For samples see AS/NZS 4680 clause 7 Note 2, which suggests that use of type samples may be an appropriate way of dealing
with the presence, size or frequency of allowed defects, where this is of concern particularly in terms of the finish required.
Coating mass tests: Required.
Magnetic method: To AS 2331.1.3.
AS/NZS 4680 clause 8.1 states that the mass must be tested on significant surfaces. Appendix G allows a choice of 6 methods
- gravimetric, volumetric, mass-on-mass, magnetic or magnetic induction or eddy current. AS 1214 Appendix A allows a choice
of 3 methods - gravimetric, mass-on-mass or magnetic. Amend default if project requires it.
AS 1214 (clause 6.1) defaults to the gravimetric method for testing coating mass in the event of dispute - so nothing needs to be
said on the matter here, unless you want to override this default.
Coating thickness tests: Required.
Type: >
AS/NZS 4680 clause 8.2 doesn’t state that the coating thickness must be tested. Appendix G5 offers 3 methods - magnetic,
magnetic induction or eddy current.
Generally tested by the principal/proprietor, according to the GAA (but not as implied by the standards).
Coating uniformity tests: >
Type: >
Suggested in AS/NZS 4680 clause A2(g). AS 1214 also advises that required tests should be agreed at the time of ordering
(Appendix D). Methods include sectioning or magnetic methods.
Frequency of tests: >
Suggested in AS/NZS 4680 clause A2(k).
Sampling plan: Required.
Nominate this to be in accordance with the recommendations of Appendix B to AS 1214 or Appendix B to AS/NZS 4680, as
appropriate. Note that neither is mandated in the standard. Both are informative Appendices.
Method: >
Testing authority
NATA registered.
If independent tests are required e.g. in the event of a dispute - see AS/NZS 4680 Appendix A clause A2(i). It is best to identify
this authority here rather than waiting for a dispute to arise.
Testing venue
General: Galvanizing plant.
See AS/NZS 4680 clause A2(j).

1.6 SUBMISSIONS
Holes and lifting lugs
General: If holes and lifting lugs are required to facilitate handling, filling, venting and draining during
galvanizing, submit details on size and location.
Problematic features
General: If design and fabrication features of the articles to be galvanized may lead to difficulties
during galvanizing, identify these and submit details for improvement.
Removal of deleterious materials
General: If marking paints are to be used, and if removal of materials deleterious to galvanizing such
as grease, oil and paint is required, submit details on suitability and proposed methods.
The designer, fabricator and galvanizer should liaise on these points. Designs should be presented to the galvanizer, who may
offer a detailing service on these matters. On venting and draining, see AS/NZS 4680 clause C6. Also, IGC’s ‘Design for
Galvanizing Manual’ defines hole sizes and locations for typical fabricated items. As for any proposed substitution, the
contractor may submit proposals for removal of surface contaminants and coatings, and for coating reinstatement, if different to
those specified.
2 EXECUTION
2.1 GENERAL
See the Commentary for more information regarding distortion and embrittlement.
Care
Dimensional change: If design and fabrication features of articles to be galvanized are likely to lead to
dimensional change, identify these and submit proposals for its minimisation.
For some designs distortion will be unacceptable or, if thin sections and thick sections are used together may be inevitable.
Refer to AS/NZS 4680 clause C3.
Embrittlement: If steel is susceptible to embrittlement, take due care in processing in order to avoid
this.
Refer to AS/NZS 4680 clause D1.4.
Mechanical properties: Avoid mechanical damage. Ensure that mechanical properties of the base
metal do not change.
Refer to AS/NZS 4680 clause 5.
Surface preparation
Generally, refer to AS 1627.0 for guidance.
Surface contaminants and coatings generally: Chemical clean, then acid pickle.
Chemical cleaning is the normal method to remove oil, grease and light paint coatings. Acid pickling only removes rust and mill
scale.
Chemical cleaning: To AS 1627.1.
Acid pickling: To AS 1627.5.
- Acid: Hydrochloric.
- Inhibitor: Required.
See AS 1627.5 clause 2.3.2 – where use of inhibitor is recommended. Type depends on the galvanizer’s operating
requirements.
Abrasive blast cleaning: To AS 1627.4.
- Abrasive: >
- Grade: Sa 2 to AS 1627.9.
- Type: >
AS 1627.4 provides guidance on the preparation methods that are available for cleaning steel substrates indicating the
capabilities of each in attaining specified levels of cleanliness. AS 1627.9 specifies a series of rust grades of steel surfaces by
reference to ISO 8501-1:1998.
• Abrasive: See AS 1627.4, Table 1 for commonly used blast-cleaning abrasives for steel substrate preparation and clause
4.3 for selection considerations. Or leave it to the galvanizer and delete here.

• Grade: Preparation grades are defined in ISO 8501-1, which AS 1627.9 relies upon.
• Type: Dry or wet. Or leave it to the galvanizer and delete here.
Components in contact with concrete

General: Chromate passivate.
Chromate passivation process: Dip in 0.15 – 0.2% sodium dichromate solution.
Drilling
Repair: Prime drill hole surfaces to APAS-0014/1 or APAS-2916 before the surface begins to corrode.
Coating
Threaded fasteners: To AS 1214.
For steel bolts, screws, nuts and other fasteners with ISO metric coarse threads in the size range M8 to M36. The standard
advises (clause 1, Note 2) that ISO metric coarse threads below M8, and all ISO metric fine pitch threads, generally cannot be
successfully hot dip galvanized with regard to the assembly of the bolt and nut.
Structural sections
Cold worked items: Except for hollow sections, anneal to 650°C before galvanizing.
Hollow sections: Provide seal plates with breather holes.
Surface finish
Coating quality: Coatings shall be continuous, adherent, smooth or evenly textured and uniform, free
from defects detrimental to the end use of the finished article, such as lumps, blisters, gritty areas,
uncoated spots, acids and black spots, dross and flux.
- Silicon killed steels: Dull grey is acceptable.
Delete if there are none. High strength low alloy steels, particularly those containing silicon can lead to brittle galvanized
coatings which are thicker and different in colour to normal coatings. Likewise the high silicon content of automatic welds may
result in thicker coatings. These coating characteristics are usually beyond the control of the galvanizer.
Friction-type bolted connections: Treat contact surfaces to achieve the required slip factor.
Contact surface preparation: >
Slip factor test: To AS 4100 Appendix J.
AS 4100 clause 14.3.6.3 (b) permits an applied finish in contact surfaces of friction type joints if the applied finish has been
tested to establish friction coefficient. If an applied finish such as galvanizing or metal spray is required on these surfaces
specify the finish here and specify whether the contractor is required to carry out slip factor tests to AS 4100 Appendix J. Fully
alloyed (grey) galvanized coatings have been shown to develop higher slip factors.
Surplus zinc on fastener threads: Remove.
Coating reinstatement
Generally performed at galvanizing plant as part of galvanizer’s QA.
See GAA Technical data sheet GEN/7/1.
Extent: Repair areas of uncoated surface, and areas damaged by handling at the galvanizing plant, so
that total uncoated or damaged areas do not exceed 0.5% of total surface area or 25,000 mm2
whichever is the lesser.
- Size of area to be repaired: Any > 4000 mm2.
See AS/NZS 4680 Appendix E.
Method: Wire brush or mechanically buff the surface and apply organic zinc-rich primer in two coats
each of 75 µm dry film thickness in accordance with the manufacturers’ requirements. Stipple edges of
the primed area.
Follows recommendations of GAA and IGC and conforms with AS/NZS 4680 Appendix E (zinc metal spray). Other methods
may be acceptable.
- Primer: To APAS-0014/1 or APAS-2916.
Croda, Solver and Wattyl products have APAS approval to APAS-0014/1. Dulux, International, Vessey and Wattyl products
have APAS approval to APAS-2916.
- Surface preparation: To AS 1627.2 and Grade St 3 to AS 1627.9.
AS 1627.9 now relies on ISO 8501-1. Photographs are the suggestion for assessing the level of cleaning.

Preparation for architectural finishes

Schedule these finishes in the Architectural finishes schedule, and/or in the Painting worksection. Delete if no architectural
finishes are required. See GAA Advisory Note GEN/8/1 Galvanising as an architectural finish- Procedure for Design Detailers.
Coarse preparation: Remove spikes, and ensure edges are free from lumps and runs.
Light sweep blasting prior to painting: >
From AS/NZS 4680 Appendix I and GAA Technical data sheet GEN/1/1 (also published by IGC as Data Sheet No. 8). Etch
primers rarely produce a satisfactory result. For powder coating, see IGC Data Sheet No. 14, and amend the heading and
content to suit.
- Maximum zinc removal: 0.01 mm.
- Abrasive grade (range): 0.15 – 0.18 mm clean ilmenite or garnet.
- Angle of blasting to surface: 45°.
- Blast pressure (maximum): 280 kPa.
- Distance of nozzle from surface (range): 300 – 400 mm.
- Nozzle type: Venturi, diameter 10 – 13 mm.
Storage of galvanized articles
General: Store in dry, well ventilated conditions.
2.2 DELIVERY
General
Transport: Transport in dry, well ventilated conditions.
Site welding
Avoid post-galvanizing welds. Design for bolt fixing instead.
Grinding of edges: Permitted.
To reduce zinc oxide fumes formed during welding, and to eliminate weld porosity, which can sometimes occur.
Weld areas: Reinstate coating.
2.3 SITE WORK

Site coating reinstatement
Extent: Areas damaged by transport, site welding, site flame cutting, site handling, or erection.
- Size of areas to be repaired: Repair all affected areas greater than 4000 mm2, and other affected
areas so that the total uncoated or damaged areas do not exceed 0.5% of the total surface area or
250,000 mm2, whichever is the lesser.
Method: Wire brush or mechanically buff the surface and apply organic zinc-rich primer in two coats
each of 75 µm dry film thickness. Stipple edges of the primed area.
- Paint standard: To APAS-0014/1 or APAS-2916.
- Surface preparation: To AS 1627.2 and Grade St 3 to AS 1627.9.

STEEL – PROTECTIVE PAINT COATINGS STRUCTURE
STEEL – PROTECTIVE PAINT COATINGS
This worksections is applicable to the surface preparation of and coating application to structural steelwork or steel products
using paint coating systems where corrosion protection is appropriate due to climatic or environmental conditions. It can be
used for new work and for maintenance painting.
This worksection does not apply to coating of steelwork in situations where corrosion protection is necessary nor economically
feasible, as would be the case where anticipated corrosion rates are too low to compromise the structure or sacrificial corrosion
of sections has been allowed for in the selection of section thicknesses. AS/NZS 2312 Section 1.2 lists typical situations for
which coating for corrosions resistance is not required. For these cases use the Structural steel worksection.
For applications where hot dip galvanizing is appropriate refer to and include in the specification the Steel – hot dip galvanized
coatings worksection.
Worksections on which this worksection relies
• Metals and prefinishes for prefinished steel, stainless steel and other metals.
• None.
• Painting.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
General: Provide protective paint coatings to structural steel work and steel products that control
corrosion in the time to first maintenance and, to the Selections.

General
have no overlaps.
>
1.3 STANDARDS
General
Coating: Comply with the recommendations of AS/NZS 2312.
Metal finishing – preparation and pretreatment of surfaces
Site testing of protective coatings

1.4 INTERPRETATIONS
Abbreviations
- DFT: Dry film thickness.
- ITP: A series of formal Inspection and Test Plans, prepared by the coating contractor to reflect the
specific inspection and testing that will be carried out on the surface preparation, coating application
and record keeping tasks being undertaken.
- MSDS: The formal Material Safety Data Sheet, prepared in accordance with Worksafe Australia’s
requirements and distributed by the coating manufacturer to provide information on the safe
handling, storage, personal protective equipment requirements, use and disposal of any aspect of a
coating product.
- RL: Reduced level relative to Australian Height Datum (AHD).
The abbreviations subclause can be edited to suit the project or deleted if not required.
Definitions
- Standard: To AS/NZS 2310.
AS/NZS 2310 provides a comprehensive set of definitions for painting terms.
- Coating contractor: The protective coatings application contractor conducting the on or off site
coating application works.
- Coating manufacturer: The supplier and/or manufacturer of the protective coating materials used.
- Poor performance: Evidence of inadequate or incomplete surface preparation, the presence of
soluble contamination of any form, inadequate proportioning or mixing, inadequate coverage,
inadequate or excessive film thickness, poor adhesion, dirt or grease contamination, underfilm
residue, inclusions or any evidence of breakdown attributable to the surface preparation, coating
mixing or application, curing, stacking and/or handling.
- Product Data Sheet: The product-specific technical data sheet prepared and distributed by the
coating manufacturer to provide detailed information on a coating material.
The definitions subclause can be edited to suit the project or deleted if not required.
1.5 INSPECTION
Notice
- Items after fabrication prior to commencing surface cleaning and preparation.
- Surfaces after preparation prior to application of first coating.
- Coating stages:
. After application of primer or seal coats.
. After application of each subsequent coat.
Quality assurance system
Implement appropriate quality assurance and quality control systems for surface preparation,
application of coatings, curing, handling, storage, and protection of coated components.
Refer to the Commentary for more detail on requirements.
The owner’s specialist inspector
Inspection: Independent of the inspection carried out by the coating contractor, the owner may carry
out, or may arrange to have carried out by others at his cost, any inspections and tests on the coating
or substrate using testing equipment supplied by the owner.
These inspections, if undertaken, in no way reduce the responsibility of the coating contractor to carry
out their own full inspection and uphold their quality plan. The absence of the inspector does not
absolve the coating contractor from carrying out the task in other than a workmanlike manner. The
coating contractor’s inspector or nominated person is to make reports to the owner.

Access: Provide full access to the works and all reasonable requirements that the owner or the
nominated inspector may need in the performance of their duties.
Preliminary inspection
General: Inspect the substrate and ensure it is fit to receive the nominated coatings, produce the
specified finish and comply with the relevant documents and standards which specify minimum
qualities of substrate preparation and coating application tolerances.
Commencement of application shall be deemed to mean that the coating contractor has certified and
accepted that the surface is fit to receive the specified coatings.
1.6 SUBMISSIONS
Detailing of structural steelwork
General: If design and fabrication features of the items to be protective coated may lead to difficulties
advise prior to commencing surface preparation.
AS/NZS 2312 Figure 3.1 details typical design problems and how they can be addressed. Ensure that details do not incorporate
the problems itemised.
Removal of deleterious materials

General: Submit advice on suitability of marking paints, and removal of materials deleterious to
protective coating processes such as grease, oil and paint.
Repair of coating damage
General: If damage occurs repair so as to ensure that the full corrosion protection ability of the system
is reinstated.
Procedure: If required, provide a repair coating proposal.
Refer to Commentary.
Aesthetic reinstatement: Submit proposals for reinstatement of the full aesthetics of the original
coating system for repaired coated surfaces that will be visible in the completed project.
Refer to Commentary.
Records
General: Prepare and neatly maintain proper records of all surface preparation and coating application
works. Clearly identify major coatings work hold points such as abrasive blasted substrate cleanliness,
primer coat and finish coat DFTs. within the ITP records. Conform to the relevant parts of the steel
fabricator’s ITPs, and record conformance. Make these records available for inspection or copying (as
appropriate) by the inspector, the owner or the coating manufacturer’s representative.
These records should include, but not be limited to, the following:
- >
- >
Insert here any that are particularly important to this project.
Conformance: Maintain records of the following:
- The ambient temperature.
- Steel surface temperature.
- Relative humidity.
- Dew point and ∆T (the difference between the surface temp and the dewpoint).
- Any other weather or site conditions such as dust, dirt, debris, etc. which may affect the specified
finish.
Record taking: Recommended times for the collection of these records are as follows:
- 7.00 a.m. or the commencement of work.
- 10.00 a.m.
- 12.00 noon.
- 2.00 p.m.
- 4.00 p.m. or at the finish of work.
- With each weather change.

Night temperature: If requested by the coating manufacturer, record the maximum and minimum night
temperature during each 24 hour cycle, using a maximum/minimum thermometer placed adjacent to
the work.
Identification: Record the following:
- The batch numbers of all coatings.
- The items and areas coated with each batch.
- The date and time each item or area was coated.
Forms: Use forms such as those provided in AS 3894.10, AS 3894.11 and AS 3894.12 or equivalent.
Maintenance painting systems
General: Provide warranties by the manufacturer for the life till next scheduled maintenance for all
maintenance painting systems.
Existing systems: Refer to the report on existing elements and structure itemising areas of corrosion,
damage, and other degradation.
Systems: Supply cooling systems for maintenance painting of previously coating items and structural
elements, including surface preparation, in conformance with the Protective paint coating schedule.
1.7 SAMPLES
Painting and coating colour
General: Submit a sample of the finished product for each different coating system.
Size of each sample: 200 x 200 mm.
Customise to suit.
1.8 TESTING
Abrasive blast cleaning
General: Perform abrasive blasting in conformance with AS 1627.4. Assessments of the level of
surface cleanliness achieved after surface preparation, are to be in conformance with the written
descriptions in AS 1627.4 and by reference to the appropriate photographs provided in AS 1627.9. All
areas of the item must meet the required cleanliness standard, not an average of all surfaces.
Power tool cleaning
General: Use the surface preparation descriptions in AS 1627.2, augmented by the appropriate
photographs in AS 1627.9, as a guide for assessing the respective degree of surface cleanliness that
has been achieved. All areas of the item must meet the required cleanliness standard, not an average
of all surfaces.
Hand tool cleaning
General: Use the surface preparation descriptions in AS 1627.7 augmented by the appropriate
coloured photographs in AS 1627.9, as a guide for assessing the respective degree of surface
cleanliness that has been achieved by hand tool cleaning. All areas of the item must meet the required
cleanliness standard, not an average of all surfaces.
Surface profile
General: Estimate the surface profile of any abrasive blasted substrate in conformance with AS 3894.5
using the Testex Profile Tape or a Keane-Tator Surface Profile Comparator methods only. Unless
otherwise nominated for the primer, the profile amplitude shall conform to a “Medium Grade” in
accordance with AS 3894.5 Table 1, nominally 40 – 70 µm.
Soluble salt level testing
General: If specified in the Protective paint coating schedule, test the blasted surface in at least five
locations per 100 m2 of steel surface area, for the presence of soluble salts, i.e. chlorides and
sulphates, using a SCAT (Soluble Contaminant Analysis Test) kit, or similar in conformance with
AS 3894.6 Method A. Unless otherwise nominated in the Coating System Schedule, the maximum
level of allowable chloride shall be 50 mg/m2, and the maximum allowable sulphate level shall be
150 mg/m2.
Conformance: If either of these levels are exceeded, rewash the affected surface area using potable
water, either via a jetwash unit or a steamcleaner, and then reprepared.
Delete procedure/testing not required.

Wet film thickness

General: Use a fixed comb type wet film thickness gauge continuously during application to minimise
the possibility of low dry film thickness. Test surfaces to ensure consistency of film builds. Measure
wet film thicknesses in conformance with AS 3894.3, Appendix C.
Dry film thickness
General: Test all surfaces to determine the dry film thickness at the completion of each of the prime,
intermediate and finish coats, as applicable. Perform this testing in conformance with AS 3894.3 with
instruments calibrated to the relative method as dictated in the standard.
Equipment: Take the DFT readings in conformance with an inspection plan as detailed in AS 3894.3.
Use an electronic electromagnetic DFT gauge with statistical capacity such as an Elcometer Models
345, 456 or 355, PosiTector 6000 or similar thickness gauge with a permanent hard copy record being
produced for each definable area.
Overthickness: Overthickness may also be cause for rejection. Overthickness shall be defined as any
coating layer or system that has an average DFT that exceeds 150% of the stated nominal DFT in a
definable zone.
Defects: Mark defects with school grade chalk, adhesive inspection labels or masking tape. Do not
use crayon, paint or spirit based ink pens.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
General
General: All protective coatings must be handled, stored, mixed and applied strictly in accordance with
the manufacturer’s instructions and Product Data Sheets.
Coating systems
General: Coating systems need to be selected based on the local geographic, climatic and
environmental conditions that exist on the specific site.
Substitution
General: Unless otherwise specified or approved by the coating manufacturer, all coating materials,
thinners, etc., used in the project shall be as nominated in the applicable Protective paint coating
schedule and shall be supplied by the one manufacturer. Unauthorised substitution of coating
materials, curing agents, accelerators or thinners, is not permitted and may be cited to invalidate the
warranty.
Original containers
General: Accept delivery of all coating products to the job in unopened containers bearing the brand
name and name of the manufacturer. All containers shall have a clearly legible batch number. If this
proves not to be the case, bring this fact to the attention of the coating manufacturer’s representative
without delay.
Storage of materials
General: Store all coating products to be used in the project under cover and protected from the
weather and any extremes of temperature and in a manner outlined in the relevant Product Data
Sheet. Containers of coating materials shall not be stored on unprotected ground.
Ambient temperature: Range for storage of protective coatings: 15°C to 25°C.
Use-by-date: Use products with limited shelf life before their use-by-date unless written authorisation
from the coating manufacturer’s technical services section is provided.
Retention: Keep copies of the current MSDS for all products at the site in a location accessible to all
staff.
Material safety data sheets
General: Obtain from the coating manufacturer all relevant Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs)
showing the health and safety precautions to be taken during application of the coating products. The
coating contractor is responsible for implementing those precautions. Obtain copies of all relevant
MSDSs.

3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
General
Product warnings: Comply with all statutory health and safety regulations and environmental
requirements with respect to surface preparation and coating application. Also comply with all warning
labels attached to coating and related product cans and the relevant technical data literature.
Implement procedures via ITPs to comply with these directions.
Workmanship: If there is any evidence of “poor performance” repeat the work at the coating
contractor’s expense.
3.2 PROTECTION
Surroundings
General: Provide protection of the surroundings to the coating works and ensure that no abrasive,
overspray or paint waste debris is released either to air, ground or to any watercourse unless written
approval has been received. Repair or clean damage as appropriate.
Contamination
General: Ensure protection of sensitive items during abrasive blasting, surface preparation and
coating works. Do not permit blasting dust, abrasive or surface preparation debris to cause
contamination of coated surfaces which are not yet dry, nor cause damage to any other assets,
services or equipment.
Overbleed/overspray
General: Prevent abrasive blasting overblast and coating overspray from damaging non-target
surfaces.
Post application care
General: Provide protection to the coating against damage until all components are fully cured.
Properly cover and/or protect all portions of the work liable to be damaged.
Stacking and handling
General: Do not stack, handle or transport coated items until the coating has sufficiently cured so as to
resist handling actions.
Steelwork: Stack and handle all steelwork using fabric slings or padded chains, used in a manner that
ensures that no damage is caused to the coating system. Adopt soft packaging, carpet strips or other
deformable materials between all steel items. Do not permit steel to steel contact in any situation,
even for robust coatings like inorganic zinc silicate.
Water ponding: Stack coated items so that water ponding does not or cannot occur whilst the items
are in storage, transport or “laydown”.
3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION

General
General: Coatings shall be applied only to properly prepared and cleaned surfaces.
Pre-treatment
General: Degrease any contaminated surfaces in conformance with AS 1627.1 and rinsed clean using
potable water. If detailed in the Protective paint coating schedule make soluble salt determinations
in conformance with AS 3894.6. and demonstrate acceptance criteria in conformance with the
Protective paint coating system schedule or the coating manufacturer’s advice.
Surface preparation
General: Ensure all surfaces are free from oil, grease, dirt, bird droppings or any other contaminants,
particularly soluble contaminants. Conform with all surface preparation details specified in Protective
paint coating schedule. Perform all surface preparation in conformance with the relevant parts of
AS 1627 and AS/NZS 2312.
Priming
General: Prime coat all surfaces on the same day as the completion of surface preparation works. In
every case, the specified surface preparation standard, in both cleanliness and profile, shall be evident
at the time that the primer coating is applied. If there is any deterioration in the cleanliness standard by
the time that the primer is scheduled to be applied, repeat the surface preparation until the correct
standard is achieved.

Edge preparation
General: Prior to the performance of the surface preparation grind all sharp weld metal, pits, edges
and flame-cut or guillotined edges to a minimum 2 mm radius and countersink or de-burr all bolt holes.
Leave no sharp edges. Open out any mushroom-shaped pits using countersinking bit or engineer’s
drill bit operated at slow speed to enlarge the pit opening without wasting metal. Remove all weld
spatter by grinding or chipping.
Surface defects: Remove or correct other surface defects, including cracks, laminations, deep pitting,
undercutting, weld spatter, slag, burrs, fins and sharp edges to meet a Class B or better finish for
internal surfaces in accordance with NACE Standard RP0178.
Repair: If post-surface preparation grinding or edge preparation is required, re-prepare the affected
surfaces to the nominated standard of cleanliness and profile.
3.4 MIXING
General
General: Mechanically mix all kit sizes over 5 litres in volume. For multi-package coatings, thoroughly
and separately mix both components before blending together. If heavy bodied materials are
incorporated, e.g. zinc metal filled coatings, strain using an appropriate mesh size to collect any
agglomerations, and maintain mechanical agitation of mixed components during application to prevent
settling.
Hand mixing is permitted for coatings or packs of coatings that do not exceed 5 litres in total.
Refer to the Product Data Sheets for further product related information, and incorporate as required.
Special requirements
General: Carry out any special mixing requirements – including thinner type and quantity, and any
induction times – as noted on the Product Data Sheet or as advised by the coating manufacturer.
Multi-purpose coating
General: Mix the total contents of each of the two components in a multi-package coating from their
respective containers and do not split the contents of either of the two components unless an accurate
means of proportioning the components is provided.
Colour consistency
General: If absolute colour consistency is required, pre-mix or box the components of coating products
that have been tinted to the required colour prior to the addition of the curing agent or converter and
before coating application to ensure colour uniformity. Retain sprayout samples of the coating colour
for future verification.
3.5 COATING APPLICATION

General
General: Apply the coatings in accordance with the preparation, application, testing and other
requirements set out in this specification, the Protective paint coating schedule or as otherwise
notified in writing by the coating manufacturer from time to time. Use application equipment or
methods that generally conform to the instructions on the Product Data Sheets.
Painting and coating colour: Confirm conformance of all project finish colours with these samples.
Check all coatings delivered prior to mixing and/or application to ensure compliance with the sample.
Final surface preparation or coating application
Limits: If the following climatic/substrate conditions are present do not apply coating:
- The relative humidity is above 85%.
- The substrate temperature is less than 3°C above the dewpoint.
- The ambient air temperature is below 5°C or above 40°C.
- The substrate temperature is below 10°C or above 35°C.
- The surface to be coated is wet or damp.
- Where the full prime coat application cannot be carried out before the specified cleanliness of the
surface deteriorates.
Preliminary surface preparation: Preliminary blast or other surface preparations may be performed in
conditions that are outside the limits providing the final surface preparation and all coating applications
are undertaken under conditions under the limits.

Procedures: Apply the coating systems in conformance with the Protective paint coating schedule.
Conform to the order shown and observe at all times the minimum and maximum recoat intervals,
curing times, temperatures and conditions, ventilation requirements and application instructions on the
Product Data Sheets.
Defects: Apply materials so as to produce an even coating free from film defects.
e.g. missed areas, voids, overspray, overbuild, lumps, runs, sags and/or inclusions.
Detail: Stripe coat all welds, bolt holes, sharp edges and difficult to spray areas by brushing in with the
prime coat and intermediate coat material prior to the full coating application.
To assist in achieving an adequate coating DFT in these vulnerable areas.
Subsequent coats
General: Ensure that before any subsequent coating layer is applied, the surface condition of the
preceding coat is complete and correct in all respects, including its DFT achievement, cleanliness,
freedom from defects. Correct any shortfall in this regard before the subsequent coating layer is
applied.
Faulty workmanship
General: Correct work not conforming to this specification or subsequently approved variations.
Emphasise in the contract documents that the coating manufacturer or the owner will not incur any expenses related to any
rework due to a failure by the coating contractor to meet the designated acceptance criteria on any surface preparation or
coating application deliverable.
Restrictions
General: Perform all painting under cover and/or protected from rain, condensation, dew, excessive
wind, overspray or wind-blown dust. Continue protection where any of these conditions will exist
before the coating has cured to a sufficient degree so as to be unaffected.
The foregoing principally relates to conditions during the night-time after coating application.
4 SELECTIONS
4.1 SCHEDULES
Protective paint coating schedule
Item 1 2 3
Description
RLs/grids/reference
Notes
Coating designation
Surface preparation
Primer
Intermediate
Finish
DFTs
Colour (AS 2700)
Delete either structure or element as appropriate. Copy the schedule blank as required and complete to cover all structures and
elements. The surface preparation column is the place to nominate requirements such as soluble salt determination.
Refer to the Commentary for a sample schedule.

STRUCTURAL TIMBER STRUCTURE
STRUCTURAL TIMBER
This worksection is applicable to timber building and civil engineering structures or elements for generally commercial, industrial,
marine and similar purposes including the following:
• Major beams and columns in residential buildings.
• Timber portal frames.
• Timber decks, walkways and jetties.
• Pole structures.
• Timber bridges.
• Timber masts, pylons, towers, and similar structures.
• Residential or similar construction which can comply with AS 1684, or to Light timber framing.
• Normally structural timber will be fully detailed in the structural drawings. If it is intended that the contractor be responsible
for any components or structure, the structural drawings must define performance criteria (loading, deflection, exposure)
and independent certification by a professional engineer of the design and documentation, and of the erected work, are
therefore required.
1 GENERAL

General
have no overlaps.
- Light timber framing.
NATSPEC 290 [Inset date]

1.2 STANDARD
General
Design: To AS 1720.1.
AS 1720.1 is cited in the BCA for structural sufficiency.
See SAA HB108 for guidance to AS 1720.1.
1.3 INTERPRETATION
Definitions
General: For the purposes of this worksection the definitions given in AS 1720.1 apply.
1.4 INSPECTION
Notice
- Prefabricated items before priming or water-repellent treatment.
- Structural timberwork after erection but before it is covered.
- Unbranded timber in order to determine stress grade.
- On site preservative treated members before being concealed.
- Post holes/foundations before placing concrete.
- Bolts after final tightening.
Hold points, if required, should be inserted here. If independent certification is being required, delete this clause.
1.5 SUBMISSIONS
Subcontractors
Timber portal frames: Submit name and contact details of proposed prefabricator.
Certification
Design: If design by the contractor is required, submit independent certification by a professional
engineer of the design and documentation, and of the erected work for compliance with AS 1720.1
and project performance criteria.
Shop drawings
Items to be designed by the contractor will normally include only specialist prefabricated items such as trusses, portal frames,
glued laminated timber, laminated veneer lumber and nail plated joined beams.
General: Submit shop drawings showing the following:
- Arrangement of members.
- Location of the members in the building.
- Loading parameters and bracing lengths assumed in the design.
- Species, stress grade, strength group and joint group of timber.
- Size of each member.
- Tolerances on member sizes.
- Joint details including connector plates.
- Lifting points.
- Method of fixing and bracing.
- Preservative treatment, if any.
- Long term deflection.
- Moisture content at time of manufacture.
- Method of fabrication.
- Precamber.
- For pole construction: Pole footing hole diameter and pole embedment length.
Timber portal frames: Show the following additional information:
- Size and specification of gussets.

- Gusset fastenings (nail size and arrangement).

- Base plate details.
- Fixings for purlins, girts and bracing.
- Method of handling and erection, including temporary bracing required, if any.
Glued-laminated timber: Show the following additional information:
- Design stresses.
- Appearance grade.
- Service class.
- Strength grade.
- Precamber.
Contractor design: For items designed by the contractor, submit independent certification of shop
details by a professional engineer for compliance with AS 1720.1 and the project performance criteria.
Materials
Identification:
- Certification: Submit a supplier's certificate (which may be included on an invoice or delivery docket)
verifying that the timber complies with the specification.
- Inspection: Submit the inspection authority’s certificate verifying that the timber complies with the
specification.
Moisture content: Submit evidence of moisture content.
Confirmation of preservative retention: Submit a test certificate from an independent testing authority
confirming that the required retention has been achieved for every member.
Treatment record: Submit a certified copy of the charge sheet.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 TIMBER
Structural timber
Natural durability classification to AS 1604.1 Table F2 (minimum): Durability class 2, or preservative
treated timber of equivalent durability.
Preservative treatment: >
Timber grades
Structural timbers: Appearance grade if exposed to view in the finished work. Otherwise stud grade or
lintel grade, as appropriate.
Structural timber grading standards
Mechanical stress grading: To AS/NZS 1748.
Machine proof-grading: To AS 3519.
Identification
Identification may be required for species, grade, stress grade, preservative treatment level to AS 1604.1 seasoning, etc.
Method: Identify timber using branding, certification or both.
Branding: Brand structural timber, under the authority of a recognised product certification program
applicable to the product. Locate the brand mark on faces or edges which will be concealed in the
works. Include the following data:
List the timbers, not covered by branding provisions of Australian standards or regulations or the Template, for which branding
is required.
- Stress grade.
- Method of grading.

- “Seasoned” or “s”.
- The certification mark of the product certification program.
- The applicable standard.
Recognised product certification programs:
- Pine framing: Plantation Timber Certification.
- Hardwoods: Australian Timber Industry Certification (ATIC) Quality Scheme.
- Glued-laminated timber: Glued Laminated Timber Association of Australia (GLTAA) Product
Certification System.
- Laminated veneer lumber: Plywood Association of Australia (PAA) Quality Control and Product
Certification Scheme.
- Finger jointed structural timber: Plantation Timber Certification.
Certification:
- Timber to be certified in lieu of branding: >
As branding will show through on clear finished decorative exposed timber, certification of grade may be preferred. List here the
structural members for which certification is required.
Inspection: If neither branding nor certification is adopted, have an independent inspecting authority
inspect the timber.
- Inspection authority: >
If a particular authority is to be used, name it here. Forestry departments in each state usually offer timber inspection services.
Delete Inspection if not required.
Marine structural timber
Specify the timber either by species or by strength group and durability class. Edit alternatives as required. Timber in contact
with salt or brackish water may be subject to attack by marine borer. In such cases specify a timber with natural resistance to
marine borer (e.g. turpentine) or a timber with suitable preservative treatment.
Sawn timber: Minimum requirements:
- Species: >
- Hardwood: Species of durability class 2 and strength group S3.
- Softwood: Preservative treated radiata pine, slash pine, hoop pine or Caribbean pine.
- Grading: Structural Grade No.2 to AS 2082 or AS 2858, as appropriate.
Variations to grading standard:
- No loose gum and resin veins, unsound knots, shakes, or splits.
- Sapwood only if preservative treated.
- No gum or resin pockets on the upper surfaces of decking, kerbs or other horizontal members fully
exposed to the weather.
- Hardwood may have sound heart in the central one third cross-section of members with a least
dimension greater than 175 mm.
- Heartwood in softwoods limited to 20% of the cross section and 50% of the surface width.
Round timber: To AS 2209.
2.2 GLUED-LAMINATED TIMBER

Standard
Glued-laminated structural timber: To AS/NZS 1328.1.
AS/NZS 1328.2 is a guide to AS/NZS 1328.1.
Joints
End joints: Scarf or finger joints generally.
- Timbers permitted to be stress grade reduced: Butt joints are permitted.
Camber
Orientation: Install cambered members with the camber up.
Protection from weather
Duration: Provide temporary protection for glued-laminated timber members until permanent covering
is in place.

Product
Consult manufacturers regarding available timber species, stress grades and section sizes.
If more than one type is required it may be preferable to set out this information in a table.
Location: >
Timber species: >
e.g. “Radiata”, “Jarrah”, “Brush box”.
Appearance grade: >
“A” (dressed for clear finishing or painting), “B” (machine planed finish for painted application), or “C” (appearance not
important). See AS/NZS 1328.1 Clause 2.7.
Service class: >
“Interior” or “Exterior”. These grades are based on adhesive and timber used. See AS/NZS 1328.1 Appendix A.
Stress grade: >
“F8” (Radiata), “F14” (Jarrah), “F22” or “F27” (Brush box). Where the design allows a combination of grades show on the
drawings the lightly stressed zone and the allowable stress grade for that zone.
Shape and size (mm): >
e.g. “As shown on the drawings”, or specify here.
Direction of laminations: >
“Horizontal” (see AS 1720.1 Table 7.1) or “Vertical”.
Preservative treatment: >
If preservative treatment is required state the hazard level to AS 1604.1, or state the required treatment.
2.3 TIMBER PORTAL FRAMES

Show on the drawings the layout and spacing of the portal frames.
If the contractor is required to design the portal frames the subclauses Certification and Shop drawings will apply. If the
contractor is not required to design the portal frames, provide the necessary detail drawings including bracing and fixing details.
Specify other requirements such as timber species, stress grade, tolerances, finish, preservative treatment. For glued laminated
timber or laminated veneer lumber either specify the requirements in detail here or refer to the relevant clause.
Product
Material type: >
e.g. “Glued laminated timber”, “Laminated veneer lumber”.
Gusset plate replacement
Cause: If more than 10% of nail heads penetrate the outer veneer of the gusset plate, replace the
gusset plate.
Damp proofing
Protection: Where timber columns are placed in contact with concrete footings, provide a damp-proof
membrane between the timber and the concrete.
Lifting
Care: Provide spreaders, strongbacks and bracing to ensure fabricated sections are lifted without
racking or distress.
Purlins and girts
Shrinkage: When fitting unseasoned purlins and girts, make provision for transverse shrinkage.
2.4 LAMINATED VENEER LUMBER

General
Laminated veneer lumber is manufactured to Plywood Association of Australia guidelines using phenolic adhesive to give a type
“A” exterior glue bond.
Consult manufacturers for information about available species, design stress, section and lengths.
Location: >
Design stress (MPa): >

Product type: >

e.g. “Continuous LVL” (lengths up to 12 m long with spliced veneers), or “Nailplated LVL” (made up by nailplating 2.4 m
lengths).
Finish quality: >
Standard finish is unsanded with some surfaces sawn. Specify “Sanded finish” if required.
Treated: >
e.g. All members or nominate a particular member.
2.5 FINGER JOINTED STRUCTURAL TIMBER

General
Service class: >
Adhesive type: >
Location: >
Sizes (mm): >
Product type: >
Finish quality: >
2.6 FASTENERS
Materials
Type: >
e.g. plain, stainless or galvanized steel.
Washers
Dimensions:
- Thickness: >
- Width: >
- Breadth: >
- Diameter: >
If standard washers are satisfactory, delete this subclause.
Bolts
Thread: Provide thread length at least four times the bolt diameter.
Holes: Drill bolt holes 2 mm larger than the bolt diameter.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 STRUCTURAL TIMBER

General
Preservative treatment: If holes are drilled in treated timber, apply a saturation coating of preservative
to the sides of the holes prior to inserting fixings.
Outdoor structures
Sealing: Seal the ends of members with wax emulsion or petroleum jelly immediately after sawing.
Anti splitting plates: Plate the ends of members 250 x 75 mm or larger with pressed or hammer-on
galvanized nail plates equal to 50% of the cross-sectional area.
Bolt holes: Treat bolt holes with creosote or copper naphthenate emulsion before inserting the bolt.
Coating: After completion of fabrication, notching and machining, coat joints, holes and notches with a
6 mm layer of copper naphthenate emulsion.
Heart: Place the heart side of bracing members on the inside of joints. Place the heart side of other
members on the downside wherever possible.
Bolts: Minimum size M20.

Washers: Minimum size 4 mm thick and 65 mm square or equivalent round area.

Bolt protection: Coat bolts with a bituminous coating before insertion in the bolt hole.
Recessed fixing: For fixings punched or sunk below the surface, fill the recess with a suitable wood
filler or mastic.
Finishing: If a protective or decorative finish is required apply one coat of primer and one finishing coat
all around before fixing.
3.2 POLE STRUCTURES

AS 2209 is the standard for power transmission line poles, but is suitable for specifying poles for other purposes. However local
or state regulations may override the provisions for pressure treatment.
Round timber posts and stumps are covered by Sections 3 of AS 1684 Parts 2, 3 and 4. AS 1684 Parts 2, 3 and 4 are cited in
the BCA for structural sufficiency of timber structures not subject to snow loads. Ensure that pole footings, including encasing (if
any) are shown on the drawings and specified in the Concrete in situ worksection.
Poles
Barrel checks and end splits:
- Rating for pole as delivered to site: Not exceeding Rating 1 for softwood and Rating 2 for hardwood,
width not exceeding 3 mm.
Pole taper: Maximum 1 in 120.
Mechanical damage: Indentations up to 12 mm deep may be dressed out before or after preservative
treatment provided that such dressing does not adversely affect the treatment.
Species: >
AS 2209 provides for various softwood and hardwood species. If a particular species (e.g. Radiata pine) is required, state it
here.
Stress grade: >
Docking
General: Notwithstanding the specified end split restrictions, allow for docking a minimum of 200 mm
from the tops of poles before fabricating pole tops to detail.
Protection
Metal caps and bands: Protect pole tops exposed to weather with metal caps or bands.
Site preservative treatment
Application: If untreated timber is exposed by docking, checking or dressing, apply a saturation
coating of preservative before erection or concealment.
Erecting poles
Tolerance: Erect poles plumb and true within the limits of deviation from verticality set by the allowed
sweep in the poles.
Setting out
General: Centre the poles on the framing grids at ground level and roof level. Align the allowable
sweep parallel to the roof beams. Compensate for sweep at floor beam level by appropriate offsets
from the framing grid.
Tolerance: ± 10 mm from grid location at ground level.
Temporary bracing
Provision: Provide temporary bracing to maintain poles in correct position until structural framing is
complete.
Pole footings
Preparation: Ensure holes are dry and clear of loose material before placing concrete footings.
Curing
Period: Allow 10 days after placing concrete encasing before loading or carrying out fabrication work.
Beam connection
Bearing surface: Form flat bearing surfaces by checking or notching into the pole to a depth just
sufficient to achieve the required width of bearing.

3.3 COMPLETION
Tightening
Initial: Tighten bolts, screws and other fixings so that joints and anchorages are secure at practical
completion.
Subsequent: If unseasoned timber is used, retighten after 6 months all bolts, screws and other fixings.

LIGHT TIMBER FRAMING STRUCTURE
LIGHT TIMBER FRAMING
This worksection is applicable to light timber framing where particular project specific requirements (generally outside the scope
of AS 1684) need to be met.
• Proprietary components or systems installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s published requirements.
• Members and systems covered by industry accepted published tables.
• Where light timber members outside the scope of AS 1684 are being used for structural framing, it is important that the
structural drawings either define performance criteria (loading, deflection, exposure) or detail the member sizes and the
connection details. If the former is adopted, independent certification by a professional engineer of the design and
documentation, and of the erected framing, are appropriate.
• Specify light timber members used in non-load bearing partitions as in the Partitions – framed and lined worksection.
• Show on the drawings any further special requirements.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
General: Provide light timber floor, wall and roof framing as follows:
Delete non applicable wording from the text. Delete the first, fourth and last points if the framing is fully documented in the
contract documents.

General
have no overlaps.

>
1.3 STANDARDS
General
Framing: To AS 1684 Parts 2, 3 or 4, as appropriate.
AS 1684 Parts 2, 3 and 4 are cited in the BCA for timber structures not subject to snow loads. Refer also to the TDA Timber
Manual (for NSW), intended principally for residential work.
Minimum sizes for members must be shown on the drawings. Regulations may govern.
Design: To AS 1720.1.
See SAA HB108 and SAA SEM148 for guidance and commentary on AS 1720.1.
1.4 INSPECTION
Notice
- Timber work after erection but before it is covered.
- Prefabricated items before priming or water-repellent treatment.
- Bolts after final tightening.
- Prefabricated fixtures before installation.
If independent certification is being required, delete this clause.
1.5 SUBMISSIONS
Design
General: Where the structural drawings define performance criteria, submit independent design,
documentation and certification from a professional engineer, including for the erected work.
Reactions: Provide location and magnitude of reactions to be accommodated by the support structure.
Floor and wall frame member sizes: Submit a schedule of proposed member sizes, certified as
meeting stated project and AS 1720.1 requirements for span, spacings and loadings.
Shop drawings
Items to be designed by the contractor will normally include specialist prefabricated items such as trusses, portal frames and
nail plated joined beams.
General: Submit shop detail drawings certified by a professional engineer stating that the design has
been carried out in accordance with stated project and AS 1720.1 requirements for the configurations
and loadings. Also submit the following:
- Species and stress grade.
- Preservative treatment, if any.
Roof trusses: Prepare drawings to show:
- On a plan, the truss layout.
- On elevations, the arrangement of members allowing for the accommodation of in-roof services and
the size and section type of each member.
- Camber of bottom chord.
- The method of assembly, connection, lifting, holding down and bracing.
Wall frames: If wall framing is to be pre-fabricated, prepare drawings to show:
- On plan, the wall layout.
- On elevations, the arrangement of members, and the size and section type of each member.
- The method of assembly, connection, lifting, holding down and bracing.

Where members are fully documented, delete these two clauses.

Materials
Identification:
- Certification: Submit a supplier’s certificate (which may be included on an invoice or delivery docket)
verifying that the timber complies with the specification.
- Inspection: Submit the inspection authority’s certificate verifying that the timber complies with the
specification.
Delete if no inspections are required.
Moisture content: Submit records of moisture content.
1.6 TOLERANCES
General
Walls: Conform to the Walls tolerances table.
Walls tolerances table
Generally: Verticality in 2000 mm 4
1
Generally: Flatness in 2000 mm 3
Features2: Verticality in 2000 mm 2
1. Flatness: Measured under a straightedge laid in any direction on a plane surface.
2. Features: Conspicuous horizontal or vertical lines including external corners, parapets, reveals,
heads, sills.
Floors: Construct floors to a tolerance of 3 mm maximum deviation in 3 mm measured under a straight
edge placed anywhere on the surface in any direction.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 TIMBER
Timber grades
Structural timbers:
- Appearance grade if exposed to view in the finished work:
>
- Stud grade or lintel grade, as appropriate: >
Structural timber grading standards
Mechanical stress grading: To AS/NZS 1748.
Machine proof-grading: To AS 3519.
Identification
Identification may be required for species, grade, stress grade, preservative treatment level to AS 1604, seasoning, etc.
Method: Identify timber using branding, certification or both.
Branding: Brand structural timber, under the authority of a recognised product certification program
applicable to the product. Locate the brand mark on faces or edges which will be concealed in the
works. Include the following data for timbers, not covered by branding provisions of Australian
standards or regulations for which branding is required.

- Stress grade.
- Method of grading.
- “Seasoned” or “s”.
- The certification mark of the product certification program.
- The applicable standard.
Recognised product certification programs:
The Plantation Timber Association of Australia (PTAA) certification scheme covers sawn pine products from 14 mills around
Australia, mainly flooring, shelving, lining and visually graded framing. The main species covered are radiata, Caribbean and
slash pines. The product certification scheme, which uses the Plantation Timber Logo, has been in operation for many years,
and has JAS-ANZ accreditation.
- Pine framing: Plantation Timber Certification.
- Finger jointed structural timber: Plantation Timber Certification.
Certification:
- Timber to be certified: >
timbers for which certification is required. PAA, for example, operates a quality assurance program.
Inspection: If neither branding nor certification is adopted, have an independent inspecting authority
inspect the timber.
- Inspection authority: >
2.2 SHEET PRODUCTS

Structural plywood
Plywoods sourced in Queensland are generally made from hoop and slash pine. Radiata pine is the main timber used
elsewhere in Australia. Imported plywoods may well contain rainforest timbers. For bracing see Sections 8 of AS 1684 Parts 2, 3
and 4.
Bond: Type A.
Flooring: Tongued and grooved.
Veneer quality to visible surfaces: C (minimum).
Application: >
- Bracing unit type: >
- Bracing thickness (mm): >
Face veneer: >
If the general requirements of the clause Veneers, in the Timber finishes and treatment worksection, do not apply, specify the
grade of the outer plies. Use the designation from the Australian standard, e.g. (for structural plywood) “CC”, “CD”, or “DD”. A, S
and B may be specified for face veneer in some circumstances. Note that the first letter defines the face veneer, the second
defines the back veneer. Decorative grade plywood is available but should be considered a non-standard product. If decorative
(S) grade veneers are required, specify them.
- Quality: >
- Species: >
Back veneer quality: >
Stress grade: >
“F7”, “F8”, “F11”, “F14”, “F17”, “F22”, “F27”, “F34”.
Identification:
- Method: Identify plywood using branding, certification or both.
- Branding: Brand structural plywood, under the authority of a recognised product certification
program applicable to the product. Locate the brand mark on faces or edges which will be
concealed in the works. Include the following data:
. Stress grade.
. Method of grading.

. The certification mark of the product certification program.

. The applicable standard.
- Recognised product certification programs:
. Plywood: Plywood Association of Australia (PAA) Quality Control and Product Certification
Scheme.
. Blockboard: Plywood Association of Australia (PAA) Quality Control and Product Certification
Scheme.
- Certification:
. Plywood to be certified: >
- Inspection: If neither branding nor certification is adopted, have an independent inspecting authority
inspect the plywood.
. Inspection authority: >
Wet-processed fibreboard
Hardboard: To AS/NZS 1859.4
- Classification: >
e.g. general purpose, tempered (MR) or exterior.
- Bending strength: >
L, M or H, low, medium or high bending strength.
Hardboard bracing
Classification: Standard hardboard type GP.
Other options are standard hardboard type RD (reduced density), tempered hardboard (better resistance to water absorption,
higher modulus of rupture), and exterior hardboard (for cladding).
Bracing unit type: >
Surface finish: >
Thickness (mm): >
Type: >
2.3 COMPONENTS
Nail plated joined beams
Consult manufacturers regarding availability and refer to manufacturers’ specifications and design tables.
Type: Proprietary composite member made up by butt and horizontally joining timber with pressed in
nail plates.
Location: >
Product type: >
“Horizontally joined”, “Butt joined”, “Composite”.
Timber species: >
e.g. “Radiata”, “Jarrah”, “Brush box”.
Stress grade: >
e.g. “F5” or “F8” (Radiata), “F8” (Jarrah), “F17” or “F22” (Brush box).
Section: >
Mild steel post bases
Alternative engineered designs are of course acceptable. Amend as required.
Minimum dimensions:
- Stirrup: 75 mm wide x 6 mm thick.
- Dowel: 20 mm diameter heavy tube.
Location: To timber posts supported off concrete slabs or footings.
Finish: Galvanize after fabrication.

Fasteners
Material: >
Do not use steel or copper nails in western red cedar exposed to weather or dampness. Specify aluminium, galvanized, or
silicon bronze nails. Silicon bronze fasteners, not galvanized steel, are recommended for CCA treated timbers. Many other
timbers, if moist, will corrode steel fasteners.
Installation: Do not split or otherwise damage the timber.
Coating: Before placing bolts in contact with CCA treated timber, coat the shank of the bolt in a grease
or bituminous coating.
Damp-proof course
Material: To AS/NZS 2904.
AS/NZS 2904 is cited in the BCA at clause F1.9, for damp-proof coursing.
- Type: >
e.g. “0.45 mm (or 0.55 mm) thick bitumen coated aluminium”.
Flashings
Material: To AS/NZS 2904.
- Type: >
Refer to AS/NZS 2904, e.g. “Bitumen coated aluminium 0.5 mm thick” (or similarly coated copper or lead), “Aluminium 0.6 mm
2
thick”, “Copper 0.5 mm thick”, “Zinc 0.7 mm thick”, “Lead 20 kg/m ”.
2.4 FINGER JOINTED STRUCTURAL TIMBER

General
Service class: >
Adhesive type: >
Location: >
Sizes (mm): >
Product type: >
Finish quality: >
2.5 RECONSTITUTED STRUCTURAL TIMBER

General
Consult manufacturers for information on design stresses, available sections, lengths, etc.
Type: Proprietary reconstituted structural timber sawn from slabs manufactured from pinus radiata
thinnings.
Location: >
Sizes (mm): >
Finish quality: >
Standard finish is fine sawn. Specify “Sanded finish” if required.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
Protection from weather
General: Provide temporary protection for members until permanent covering is in place.
3.2 FLOOR FRAMING

Bearers and joists
For timber floors supporting tiled finishes it is recommended joists be 20% over sized. (BRANZ Good Tiling Practice)

Levelling: Level bearers and joists by checking or by packing for the full width of the member with
dense corrosion resistant material which is secured in place:
- Maximum thickness of packing: 3 mm.
Spring: Lay bearers and joists to allow for straightening under loading.
Joints: Locate joints only over supports:
- Minimum bearing of bearers: 50 mm.
- Minimum bearing of joists: 30 mm.
Fixing: Secure bearers and joists to supports to provide restraint against lateral movement.
Joist restraint:
- Unseasoned timber: If joist timber is unseasoned, the span ≥ 3000 mm, and there is no ceiling
lining, provide solid blocking between each joist in rows at 1800 mm centres.
- Deep joists: If the joist depth:width ratio is ≥ 4, restrain joists at the ends of the joists over supports
and at ≤ 1800 mm centres using either of following as appropriate:
. Continuous trimming joists.
. Solid blocking or herringbone strutting.
Herringbone strutting is preferred where supporting a tiled floor. (BRANZ Good Tiling Practice)
- Trimmers or blocking dimensions:
. Depth: Joist depth less 25 mm.
. Width: ≥ 25 mm.
- Herringbone strutting dimensions: ≥ 38 x 38 mm.
Members: Provide members in conformance with the following:
- Timber species or group: >
- Grade: >
- Seasoning: >
“Seasoned” or “unseasoned”.
- Preservative treatment (if applicable): >
3.3 WALL FRAMING

Wall framing
Show on the drawings the extent of timber wall framing and the locations of the bracing units.
Bracing material: >
“Timber”, “Metal”, “Structural plywood” or “Hardwood”, or leave optional.
Additional support
General: Provide additional support in the form of noggings, trimmers and studs for fixing lining,
cladding, hardware, accessories, fixtures and fittings as required.
Maximum spacing of noggings: 1350 mm centres.
Vermin barriers
General: Provide vermin barriers as follows:
- Brick veneer barrier: Close nail 10 mm steel wire mesh to the underside of the bottom plate of
external stud walls, extending across the cavity for building into brickwork.
- Stud wall barrier: Metallic coated steel sheet, 600 mm wide x 0.6 mm thick, fixed to each side of the
external stud wall frame at the base. Lap joints 25 mm.
Required by some authorities. Delete if not required.
Damp-proof course
General: Provide damp-proof courses under the bottom plate of stud walls built off slabs or masonry
dwarf walls, as follows:
- External walls (not brick veneer): Turn up at least 75 mm on the inside and tack. Project 10 mm
beyond the external slab edge or dwarf wall and turn down at 45°.
- Walls of bathrooms, shower rooms and laundries: Turn up at least 150 mm on the “wet” side and
tack to studs.

Installation: Lay in long lengths. Lap full width at angles and intersections and at least 150 mm at
joints.
Junctions: Preserve continuity of damp-proofing at junctions of damp-proof courses, sarkings and
waterproof membranes.
Flashings
Location: Provide flashings to external openings sufficient to prevent the entry of moisture. Form trays
at the ends of sill flashings.
Brick veneer construction: Extend across cavities and build into brickwork.
3.4 SHEARWALLS AND DIAPHRAGMS

Non-structural sheathing, including plasterboard and fibre cement, is specified in the Lining and Cladding worksections.
General
Location: >
Preferably show on the drawings the location and arrangement of shearwalls including any tie down or anchoring requirements.
Description: Structural systems comprising sheeting fixed to structural timber framing to transmit
lateral loads in shear.
Sheeting: Provide sheeting as follows:
Preferably use sheeting names and types specified in the Panel and sheet products subsection. Suitable materials include
structural grade plywood, particleboard and hardboard.
- Sheeting material: >
- Fixing nails: >
Specify the nail size and spacing for fixing the sheeting to the frame.
Framing: Provide framing as follows:
Specify also other requirements such as sizing and gauging, and preservative treatment, if applicable.
Support: Provide framing support for sheet edges.
Minimum timber thickness: 45 mm.
Timber species or group: >
Refer to the species groups if it is not intended to limit the choice to a single species.
Seasoning: >
“Seasoned” or “Unseasoned”.
Stress grade: >
“F8” to F14” (unseasoned hardwood), “F5” or “F7” (oregon).
Fixing: Fix sheeting to framing with galvanized flat head nails at maximum 150 mm centres. Drive the
nails flush with the surface of the sheeting. Do not over-drive or counter punch the nails.
3.5 ROOF AND CEILING FRAMING

Wall plates
Fixing: Fix timber wall plates to masonry, with either straps or bolts.
Check with the local authority for additional requirements.
Nailing plates
General: Where timber joists, rafters or purlins bear on or into steel members, provide 50 mm thick
nailing plates bolted to the steel member at 500 mm maximum centres.
Beam framing
Ridge straps: Butt ends of rafters together at ridge, and strap each pair together with 900 mm long
steel strap passing over the ridge, triple nailed to each rafter.
- Ridge strap material: >
Supports for water containers
General: Where a water container or heater is located in the roof space provide a support platform to
AS/NZS 3500.4 clause 5.5.

Additional support
General: Provide a frame member behind every joint in fibre cement sheeting or lining.
Anti-ponding boards
AS/NZS 4200 Parts 1 and 2 are cited in the BCA at clause F1.6, for sarking-type materials.
Material: >
3.6 TRUSSES
If the contractor is not required to design the trusses, provide the necessary detail drawings including bracing and fixing details.
Supports for water containers
General: Where a water container or heater is located in the roof space provide a support platform to
AS/NZS 3500.4 clause 5.5.
Installation
Where trusses are exposed, consider whether stricter tolerances on straightness and plumb are necessary.
General limitations of AS 4440 include:
• Residential (BCA clause 1,3,4 and 10) and light commercial structures.
• Rectangular plans or combinations of rectangular with:
. - Maximum roof pitch of 45°.
. - Maximum truss span 16 m.
. - Maximum truss spacing of 900 mm, or 1200 mm for light weight roofs in area of design wind classification N3 or
lower.
. - Maximum design gust wind speed of 74 m/s (wind classification C3) for ultimate limit state method.
General: To AS 4440
Support: Support trusses on bottom chord at two points only, unless designed for additional support.
Plumb: Within H/200, where H is the height.
Vertical movement: Over internal walls provide at least 10 mm vertical clearance and use bracing
methods which allow for vertical movements.
3.7 COMPLETION
Tightening
Tighten bolts, screws and other fixings so that joints and anchorages are secure at practical
completion.

FLOORING AND DECKING STRUCTURE
FLOORING AND DECKING
This worksection is applicable to fitted strip timber flooring to suspended framed floors and to battens over concrete slabs,
external decking and sheet underlays and platform floors.
• Floating panel floors for floating floors.
• Applied timber flooring for timber strip flooring adhesive fixed to a continuous background and block and mosaic parquet
flooring.
• Floor sanding and finishing for sanding and finishing.
• None.
• The set out of floor patterns and location of movement joints to your office documentation policy.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
General: Provide flooring and decking systems as follows and/or to the Selections:
- Appropriately secured.
- Appropriately smooth and flat for the intended uses.
- Suitable for the applied finishes.
- At its equilibrium moisture content.

General
have no overlaps.

>
Delete those not applicable and add others as required.
1.3 STANDARD
General
Flooring: To AS 1684 Parts 2, 3 or 4, as appropriate.
1.4 INTERPRETATION
Definitions
- Substrate: The structure that supports the flooring (e.g. concrete slabs, timber bearers and joists, or
structural steel floor framing).
- Underlay: A material laid between the substrate and the flooring material to provide a smooth level
surface on which flooring may be continuously supported.
- Moisture content: The percentage by mass of water present in the timber.
- Equilibrium moisture content (EMC): For given conditions of humidity and temperature, the moisture
content which timber approaches at which it neither gains nor loses moisture while the conditions of
its environment are maintained.
- Feature: Any figure, grain, natural variation or similar which affects timber appearance.
- Flooring:
. Fitted: Flooring fitted between the walls of each room. i.e. not platform floors.
. Intermittently-supported: Flooring which is supported by, and spans across, beams, joists or
battens.
. Continuously-supported: Flooring which is supported by, and directly fixed to, a continuous
supporting surface.
. Platform: Flooring laid over the whole of the joisted floor structure prior to the erection of external
and internal wall frames.
. Strip flooring: Flooring made from machined timber with tongues and grooves along the length of
the strips.
- Decking: Intermittently-supported external flooring with drainage gaps between boards.
- Joints:
. Butt: Floor boards cross cut square with plain ends for joining over supports.
. End-matched: Floor boards tongue and grooved at the ends to allow joining between supports.
1.5 INSPECTION
Notice
- Substrate before laying flooring, decking or underlay.
- Control joints: Before fitting skirting.
- Completed installation before the application of coated finishes.

1.6 TESTS
Product moisture content
General: Confirm that the moisture content of the strip flooring as delivered matches the moisture
content of the substrate as measured on site. If there is a mismatch allow for acclimatisation.
Test method for timber products: To AS/NZS 1080.1.
Test method for concrete substrate: To AS/NZS 2455 Appendix B.
1.7 SUBMISSIONS
Product samples
General: Submit samples of each timber flooring type illustrating the range of variation in colour and
figure in conformance with the Samples table.
Samples table
Item Sample size Number
For natural materials call for a number of samples to illustrate the expected range in surface appearance.
Verification
Certification: Submit a supplier’s certificate (which may be included on an invoice or delivery docket)
verifying conformance to grading and noting moisture content, to the following timber products:
>
timber products for which certification is required e.g. strip flooring.
Inspection: If neither branding nor certification is adopted, submit a report by an independent
inspecting authority verifying conformance.
Inspecting authority: >
Advice can also be sought from timber advisory services.
1.8 TOLERANCES
Tolerances
General: Maximum deviation of the finished floor surface under a 3 m straight edge laid in any
direction: 3 mm.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
Storage
General: Deliver timber flooring to site and store so that its moisture content is not adversely affected.
Do not store on the sub-floor until the moisture content of the sub-floor is suitable for the installation of
the floor.
2.2 TIMBER
Decking
General: Provide decking with no features larger than defined for Standard grade in the Australian
standard for the decking.
2.3 GRADING
General
General: Conform to the Grading table.

Grading table
Product Standard Grade
Hardwood AS 2796.1 High Feature Grade if available
for the species selected,
otherwise Select Grade.
Seasoned cypress pine AS 1810 1
Softwood – pinus ssp AS 4785.2 Appearance
Softwood – other AS 4785.2 Select
Compressed fibre cement sheets AS/NZS 2908.2 Type A, Category 5
Particleboard flooring AS/NZS 1860.1 Class 1 flooring
Plywood flooring AS/NZS 2269 Type: Bond type A
Identification
General: Identify timber using branding or certification.
- Branding: Brand timber under the authority of a recognised product certification or accreditation
program applicable to the product. Locate the brand mark on faces or edges which will be
concealed in the works.
- Provide certification from the recognised product certification or accreditation programs as
appropriate:
. Flooring: TRADAC Accredited Timber Flooring Manufacturers Program.
. Hardwoods: Australian Timber Industry Certification Quality Scheme.
. Milled radiata pine products: Plantation Timber Certification.
. Plywood: Plywood Association of Australia Quality Control and Product Certification Scheme.
. Sawn radiata pine boards: Plantation Timber Certification.
- Brand preservative treated decking timber to AS 1604.1.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
General
Conformance: Conform with the Flooring and decking schedule.
Storage
General: Deliver timber flooring to site in unbroken wrapping or containers and store so that its
moisture content is not adversely affected. Do not store on the substrate until the moisture content of
the background is suitable for the installation of the floor. Do not store in areas of wet plaster.
Acclimatisation
General: After the following construction operations are complete, acclimatise the flooring by stacking
it in the in-service conditions for a minimum period of 2 weeks with air circulation to all surfaces as
follows:
- Airconditioning operational.
- Lighting operational.
- Site drainage and stormwater works are complete.
- Space fully enclosed and secure.
- Wet work complete and dry.
Substrates
General: Ensure support members are in full lengths without splicing.
Flatness: < 3 mm deviation of the substrate under a 3 m straight edge laid in any direction with no
abrupt variations greater than 1 mm over 250 mm.

Battens or underlay on concrete slabs

Framing fixed direct: Fix seasoned battens or plywood underlay to the concrete slab in conformance
with the Battens table so that their top surfaces are aligned.
- Spacing of fasteners: < 600 mm.
Framing fixed on resilient pads: Fix seasoned battens on resilient pads to the concrete slab in
conformance with the Battens table so that their top surfaces are aligned.
- Pad spacing: 400 mm centres.
Nominate resilient pads if required for particular outcomes. Pad spacing default is for a 1.5 KPa floor load. Vary as required.
Ensure the fixing method does not compromise the effect of the resilient mount.
Check pad spacing in relation to the batten size to prevent excessive deflection.
Ventilation: Consider detailing discontinuous battens with end gaps and ventilated skirtings.
Moisture content
General: Do not commence installation of flooring unless:
- Concrete substrate: The moisture content of the concrete has been tested to AS/NZS 2455.1
Appendix C and values obtained as follows:
. ≤ 5.5% when tested by the electrical resistance test.
. ≤ 70% when tested by the hygrometer test.
- Plywood underlays or timber flooring products: The moisture content has been tested to AS 1080.1
and values obtained as follows:
. Airconditioned buildings: 8 to 10%.
. Intermittently heated buildings: 10 to 12.5%.
. Unheated buildings: 12 to 15%.
If the timber moisture content values are not achieved acclimatise the timber flooring products.
Vapour barrier
General: Provide a vapour barrier as follows: To concrete substrate under battens: 200 µm high-
impact resistant polyethylene. Lap 300 mm, seal the laps with pressure-sensitive tape and return up
the vertical surfaces and trim at the level of the flooring.
Floors on steel joists
General: Screw fix seasoned battens to the steel joists in conformance with the Battens table so that
their top surfaces are aligned.
Battens table
Flooring timber Standard Flooring Batten spacing for flooring type
(average species density) thickness
Butt jointed End matched
Cypress AS 1810 20 450 450
3
Hardwood density 560 kg/m or AS 2796.1 19 600 450
more
25 600 450
30 600 600
Hardwood density less than AS 2796.1 19 450 390
560 kg/m3
25 600 450
30 600 600
3
Softwood density 560 kg/m or AS 4785.1 19 450 450
more
35 600 450
Softwood density less than AS 4785.1 19 450 390
560 kg/m3
35 600 450

3.2 FIXING
Adhesive
General: Use a urethane elastomer adhesive in addition to nails as follows:
- Continuously supported flooring: 4 mm beads at 300 mm spacing at right angles to run of flooring.
- Intermittently supported flooring: 6 mm bead along each joist or batten.
Movement control joints
Perimeters: Provide 12 mm wide joints against vertical building elements.
Between underlay sheets: 6 mm.
Floors under 6 x 6 m: Partially cramp strip flooring to allow a 1mm gap every 600 mm or 1.5 mm every
metre.
Floors over 6 x 6 m: Additionally, divide floors into maximum dimensions of 6 m with joints 4 mm wide
filled with a flexible sealant compatible with the applied finish.
Nailing
General: Ensure the boards are in contact with the joists at the time of nailing, particularly where
boards are machined nailed.
Skew nail in a uniform pattern. If nails are to be less than 10 mm from ends of sheets or boards, pre-
drill nail holes 0 – 1 mm undersize:
- Secret nailing: Do not use boards of more than 85 mm cover width, and use one nail or staple
skewed at 45°. Do not cramp more than one board at a time.
- Sinking: Punch nails 3 mm below finished surfaces and fill the sinking flush with a material tinted to
match the flooring which is compatible with the floor finish.
- Top nailing: For boards more than 65 mm cover width, use two nails skewed 10° in opposite
directions. Do not cramp more than 800 mm width of boards at one time.
Sheet flooring
Installation: Lay the length of the sheets at right angles to the supports. Stagger the end joints and
locate them centrally over joists. If panels are not tongue and grooved provide noggings or trimmer
joists to support the edges.
Sheet flooring fixing centres: Maximum 300 mm on each support.
- Fibre-cement flooring: Fix sheeting to the supports with adhesive and non-corrosive countersunk
screws. Fill the screw holes with sealant before fixing. After fixing, stop the screw heads with the
same sealant, finished slightly below the sheet surface.
- Particleboard and plywood flooring: Fix sheeting to the supports with adhesive and nail.
- Plywood underlay: Fix at 45° to the direction of strip flooring.
Strip flooring
Installation: Lay in straight and parallel lines with each board firmly butted to the next and firmly
bedded on the subfloor. Cramp sufficient only to bring the boards together and no more than 800 mm
of flooring at any one time. Conform to the Strip flooring fixing table.
Fixings: Apply adhesive in addition to nailing as follows:
- Secret nailed strip flooring:
. Hand driven nail diameter: 2.5 mm.
. Machine driven nail diameter: 1.8 mm.
. Staple gauge: 15.
- Top nailed strip flooring:
. Hand driven nail diameter: 2.5 mm.
. Machine driven nail diameter 2.2 mm.
- Apply adhesive: 6 mm bead along each joist or batten.
Set-out: Locate joints in boards so that they are evenly and symmetrically distributed and as follows:
- Butt joints: Centrally on supports.
- End-matched joints: Not in adjacent boards.
- Minimum number of spans across supports: 2.

Strip flooring fixing table

Flooring Minimum support Nail length Nailing centres
thickness
19 or 20 mm tongue and
groove board –
intermittent support
- Hardwood 25 mm 40 mm Each support
- Softwood 35 mm 50 mm Each support
19 or 20 mm tongue and
groove board –
continuous support by
plywood
- With adhesive 15 30 300 mm
- Without adhesive 25 40 300 mm
The values used here are a combination of minimum penetration requirements and available nail sizes. Vary as required for
board thicknesses other than 19 mm for hardwood and 20 mm for cypress pine ensuring that similar penetrations are achieved.
Timber decking
Installation: Lay in long lengths (minimum 3 spans) double nailed at each bearing with galvanized nails
driven flush. Stagger joints and make them over joists. Leave 4 mm between edges of boards.
Arrises: Chamfered or rounded.
Finishing: Apply the first 2 coats all round before fixing.
3.3 COMPLETION
Protection
General: Protect surfaces as follows:
- Floors: With hardboard or used carpet taped at all butt joints. Do not cover with sheet plastic.
- Stair treads: Full timber or plywood casing.
4 SELECTIONS
Flooring and decking schedule

Type or location
A B C
Decking
Size (width x thickness, mm)
Spacing (mm)
Species or group
Surface finish
Flooring
Fixing:
- Surface nailed
- Secret nailed
Profile

Type or location
A B C
Species or group
Ends:
- Butt
- End joined T&G
Resilient mounts
- Product
- Manufacturer
Moisture content
Substrate
Sheet flooring underlay
- Material
- Thickness
Battens
- Size (width x thickness mm)
- Fixing
- Species or group
Vapour barrier
Environmental factors
Decking:
• Preservative treatment: If any. Specify the hazard level to AS 1604.1.
• Size: For cypress pine, standard size is 68 x 21 mm, to AS 1810. See Appendix C for installation recommendations.
• Surface finish: e.g. “Dressed all round, top edges pencil round” (or arrised), “Dressed all round, reed finish top surface”.
Flooring:
Strips flooring may need to be selected for colour and grain, if clear finished. See also the guide publication Timber Strip Floors
– Fixing and Finishing produced by the National Timber Development Council in association with the Forest and Wood Products
Research and Development Corporation and freely available from the Timber Promotion Council (TPC), website
www.tpcvic.org.au.
• Profile: e.g. “Tongued and grooved”. Add “Secret nailed” and “End matched” if required. End matching is suitable only for
domestic applications.
• Size: Minimum thickness is 19 mm for most timbers, 20 mm for cypress. Available sizes vary from state to state and from
species to species. Some merchant associations specify nominal thickness. Additional precautions may be necessary if
wide flooring (greater than 100 mm) is specified. For further information consult merchant and forest products associations.
For plywood see Sections 5 of AS 1684 Parts 2, 3 and 4 for thickness related to joist spacing and stress grade. For
particleboard normally 19 mm or 22 mm for joist spacing 450 mm or 600 mm respectively. See AS 1860 which is a
deemed-to-satisfy standard in the BCA. Select sheet sizes to suit joist spacing.
Moisture content: Normally supplied at 10% to 12.5%, check availability if timber is required outside this range for particular
environmental conditions. See Commentary Table F1 – moisture content of flooring for the expected equilibrium moisture
content likely to be encountered.
Environmental factors: State a range of temperature and relative humidity combinations that can be expected. It may be
misleading to note figures for an airconditioned space as the airconditioning could be turned off over a long weekend. Typical
figures for an un-airconditioned space in Sydney are:
• 10°C at 90% relative humidity to 30°C at 55% relative humidity.
Under these circumstances it is essential to make a generous allowance for movement joints.

WATERPROOFING – EXTERNAL ENCLOSURE
WATERPROOFING – EXTERNAL
This worksection is applicable to tanking and membrane applications to roofing, balconies, concrete slabs over below ground
spaces and planter boxes.
• Cementitious topping.
• Terrazzo in situ.
• Waterproofing – wet areas.
• Swimming pools.
• None.
• Location, extent and type of membrane including details of junctions with flashings and damp-proof courses on the
drawings.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
Provide roof and deck waterproofing systems which are:
- Waterproof under five minutes duration rainfall of an intensity which has an average recurrence
interval of 100 years.
See AS/NZS 3500.3 clause 3.3.4 and Table 3.1.on average recurrence interval (ARI).
- Graded to falls to dispose of stormwater without ponding.
- Able to accommodate anticipated building movements.
Consider adding the required service-life of the membrane system, 10 to 15 years appears normal.
The following are characteristics of the product and should be considered when making selections:
• Able to accommodate anticipated environmental conditions.
• Able to remain serviceable after material shrinkage and loss of elastic properties.
• Resistant to traffic and falling objects.
• Chemically compatible with the surrounding building materials.
Conform to the Selections.


General
Conform to the General requirements worksection.
have no overlaps.
>
1.3 INTERPRETATIONS
Definitions
- Substrates: The surfaces on which membrane systems are laid.
- Bitumen: A viscous material comprising complex hydrocarbons which is soluble in carbon
disulphide, softens when it is heated, is waterproof and has good powers of adhesion It is produced
as a refined by-product of oil.
- Bond breakers: Layers which prevent membranes from bonding to the backgrounds.
- Membranes: Impervious barriers to liquid water which may be:
. Liquid applied: Membranes applied in liquid or gel form and air cured to form a seamless film.
. Sheet applied: Membranes applied in sheet form with joints lapped and bonded.
- Membrane systems: Combinations of membranes, flashings, drainage and accessories which form
waterproof barriers and which may be:
. Loose-laid.
. Bonded to backgrounds fully or partially.
. Fixed mechanically to backgrounds.
. Protected either by ballast or an external insulation, also known as inverted membrane roof
assembly (IRMA), or by both.
. Trafficable which may be for maintenance, pedestrians or vehicles.
Define the project specific ”traffic” in the Selections clause.
- Seamless membranes: Membranes applied in liquid or gel form and air cured to form a seamless
film.
- Slip sheets: Isolate membrane system from the supporting background or from the topping or mortar
bedding above. They are commonly asphalt-impregnated papers, roofing felt and polyethylene
sheeting and are sometimes referred to as cleavage membranes and are similar to bond breakers.
1.4 STANDARDS
Stormwater drainage
Bituminous fabric roofing
Standard: To AS CA55.

1.5 INSPECTION
Witness points
Give sufficient notice so that inspection may be made as follows:
- Background preparation completed.
- Secondary layers preparation completed.
- Before membranes are covered up or concealed.
Consider adding text to describe inspections by representatives of the product manufacturer.
1.6 SUBMISSIONS
Shop drawings
Submit shop drawings showing:
- Junctions with vertical surfaces.
- Drainage details.
- Movement control joints.
- Flashings.
- Penetrations.
- Corners.
- Terminations and connections.
- Membrane layers.
- Insulation and protection.
Execution records
Placing records: Photographically record the application of membranes and information as follows:
- Date.
- Portion of work.
- Background preparation.
- Weather during application and curing.
- Protection provided from traffic and weather.
For large or complex projects consider adding the following requirements:
“Daily reports: Provide daily reports of membrane placed including:
• The location and element where each membrane was placed.
• The method of placing and climatic conditions.
Personnel: Employ a suitably qualified person to monitor the placing and protection of the membrane and prepare the daily
report”.
Samples
Submit 300 x 300 mm samples of each type of membrane including the finish of the visible surface.
Prototypes
General: Apply waterproofing to 10 m2 of deck to demonstrate surface preparation, crack and joint
treatment, corner treatment, and execution quality. Install final surface finish to demonstrate aesthetic
affects and quality of materials and execution.
Nominate an approval process and indicate if the prototype is to be retained, Indicate location, size, and other details of
prototypes on drawings. Delete if not required.
Products documentation
General: Submit copies of product manufacturers:
- Installation instructions.
- Material safety data sheets (MSDS).
- Preventative maintenance procedures.

2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MEMBRANES
Membrane systems
To be proprietary membrane systems having one of the following certifying that the system is suitable
for the intended external waterproofing, as follows:
- A current Australian Building Product and Systems Certification Scheme certificate issued by ABCB
(Australian Building Codes Board).
- A current appraisal report issued by either CSIRO Building Products and Systems Appraisals.
- A current BRANZ Appraisal Certificate.
Delete if a proprietary membrane is specified but check for compliance with the standard.
Membrane protection
Multi-layer modified bitumen system: Rigid closed cell extruded polystyrene foam boarding with
shiplapped edges, adhered to the membrane with a solvent-free or low melt bitumen adhesive.
Provide a maximum 6 mm gap at joints between boards.
Internal roof outlets for membrane roof
General: Proprietary funnel shaped sump cast into the roof slab, set flush with membrane, with a flat
removable grating and provision (e.g. clamp ring) for sealing the membrane into the base of the outlet.
Standard: To AS CA55.
Material: >
e.g. “Cast iron” or “Bronze”.
Grating: >
e.g. “Flat” or “Domed”.
Accessories
Reglets: >
Proprietary item or noted as extruded from the membrane material for cast in fixing..
Fixing: >
Surface fixed and sealed or cast in.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
General
Prepare backgrounds as follows:
- Fill all cracks in backgrounds wider than 1.5 mm with a filler compatible with the membrane system.
- Fill voids and hollows in concrete backgrounds with a concrete mix not stronger than the
background.
- Remove excessive projections.
- Remove deleterious and loose material.
- Leave the surface free of contaminates, clean and dust free.
Moisture content
Concrete backgrounds: Cure for > 21 days.
Moisture content: Verify that the moisture content of the background is compatible with the water
vapour transmission rate of the membrane system by testing to AS/NZS 2455 Appendix B.
Falls
Verify that falls in backgrounds are > 1.5°.
Joints and fillets
Internal corners: Provide 45° fillets.
External corners: Round or arris edges.

Movement control joints: Prepare all background joints to suit the membrane system.
Priming
If required, prime the backgrounds with compatible primers to ensure adhesion of membrane systems.
3.2 APPLICATION
Protection
General: Protect membrane from damage during installation and for the period after installation until
the membrane achieves its service characteristics that resist damage.
Drains
General: Prevent moisture from tracking under the membranes at drainage locations.
Drains and cages: Provide grates or cages, to prevent blockage from debris. If the finished surface is
above the level of the membrane provide a slotted extension piece to bring the grate up to the level of
the finished surface.
Overflows: Turn the membranes into the overflow to prevent moisture from tracking behind the
membrane.
Sheet joints
Bituminous sheet membranes:
- Side laps > 50 mm.
- End laps > 100 mm.
Synthetic rubber membranes:
- Factory–vulcanized laps > 40 mm.
- Field side laps > 50 mm for side laps.
- Field end-laps > 100 mm for end laps.
PVC (Polyvinyl chloride) membranes:
- Factory welded laps > 30 mm.
- Field-welded laps:
. If used over insulation boards > 100 mm.
. Other instances > 75 mm overlaps.
Curing of liquid applied systems
General: To the manufacturers’ instructions.
See AS CA55 clause 3.6.4 on major movement joints.
General: Locate over movement control joints in the substructure.
Fillets and bond breakers: Provide of sufficient dimension to allow the membrane to accommodate the
movement.
Bonded membranes: Carry movement joints in the substrate through to and into the surface finish.
Membrane terminations
Edge protection: Provide upturns above the maximum water level expected from the exposure
conditions of rainfall intensity and wind.
- Height: > 150 mm.
- Anchoring: Secure sheet membranes along the top edge.
- Edge protection: Protect edges of the membrane.
- Waterproofing above terminations: Waterproof the structure above the termination to prevent
moisture entry behind the membrane using cavity flashings, capping, waterproof membranes or
waterproof coatings.
Horizontal terminations: Do not provide.
Membrane vertical penetrations
Pipes, ducts, and vents: Provide separate sleeves for all pipes, ducts, and vents and have them fixed
to the substrate.
Membrane horizontal penetrations
Sleeves: Provide a flexible flange for all penetrations, bonded to the penetration and to the membrane.

Membrane about doors and windows

Install membrane prior to the fixing of door or window frames.
Membrane upturn:
- Sheltered areas: 40 mm above the finished external floor surface or overflow level, whichever is the
higher.
- Exposed areas: 150 mm upturn from the finished external floor level or overflow level, whichever is
the higher.
Membrane about skylights
Install membranes prior to the installation of the skylight.
Overlaying finishes on membranes
Compatibility: If a membrane is to be overlayed with another system such as tiles, pavers, ballast,
insulation, soil, and the like, provide an overlaying system that is compatible with and not cause
damage to the membrane.
Bonded or partially bonded systems: If the topping or bedding mortar requires to be bonded to the
membrane, provide sufficient movement joints in the topping or bedding mortar to reduce the
movement over the membrane.
Double slip sheet: If the topping or bedding mortar is structurally sufficient not to require bonding to the
substrate, lay a double slip sheet over the membrane to separate it from the topping or bedding
mortar.
3.3 DRAINAGE CELL PANELS

Walls
Material: >
Product and thickness.
Protection: Continuous fibre cement sheeting.
Filter: >
Geotextile product of the recommended grade.
Location: >
Cross refer to SUBSOIL DRAINS, Stormwater – buildings for groundwater disposal.
Planters
Material: >
Product and thickness.
Filter: >
Geotextile product of the recommended grade.
4 SELECTIONS
General
Requirements Type and/or location
A B C
Traffic
Nature of traffic
Traffic: Indicate if membrane is to be trafficable.

Nature of traffic: e.g. pedestrian, wheeled, load.

Single layer sheet system

Single layer system Type and/or location
A B C
Proprietary system
Sheet type
Sheet thickness (mm)
Base weight (kg/m2)
Tensile strength (minimum) (MPa)
Breaking strength (N)
Tensile strain (elongation at break) (%)
Modulus at 300% elongation (MPa)
Permeability (g.m2/d)
Method of fixing to background
Thermal insulation type
Surface finish
Proprietary system: If the system is specified by proprietary name, some of the other schedule items may be unnecessary and
can be deleted.
Sheet type: e.g. “Polymeric” (EPDM, butyl, etc.), “Polymer modified bitumen”.
Method of fixing to background: e.g. “Proprietary adhesive”, “Heat weld”.
Thermal insulation type: e.g. one of the types specified in the Insulation and barriers worksection. Some proprietary extruded
polystyrene boards are recommended by the manufacturer for applying above the membrane (with suitable protection) to form
an “inverted” roof insulation system.
Surface finish: e.g. “Self finished”, or “Proprietary protective cap sheet”.
Multi-layer modified bitumen sheet system
Multi-layer modified bitumen system Type and/or location
A B C
Proprietary system
Number of layers
Material type
Vent sheet
Base layer
Intermediate layer
Top layer
Bonding agent
Method of laying
Surface protection/finish

Bituminous multilayer roofing system

can be deleted.
Material type: Generic types are listed in AS CA55 clause 2.1, and advice on selection is given in clause 3.5.2. However it is
advisable to consult manufacturers on currently available products.
Top layer: Specify the grade and type of fabric for each layer.
Bonding agent: e.g. “Hot bitumen”, “Hot coal tar”, “Cold bitumen adhesive”.
Method of laying: e.g. “Separate layer”, “Shingle”. See AS CA55.
Thermal insulation type: e.g. one of the types specified in the Insulation and barriers worksection. Notwithstanding AS CA55
clause 3.9, some proprietary extruded polystyrene boards are recommended by the manufacturer for applying above the
membrane (with suitable protection) to form an “inverted” roof insulation system.
Surface protection/finish: e.g. bituminous paint, mineral aggregate, fibre cement sheets, no fines topping, concrete pavers.
Consult roof system manufacturers. See also AS CA55 clause 3.8 and Appendix C.
Liquid membrane systems
Liquid roofing membranes Type and/or location
A B C
Proprietary system
Material type
Elasticity (%):
- At maximum stress
- At break
Maximum stress (kPa)
Permeability (g. m2/d)
Reflexivity
Method of application
Priming
Reinforcement
Number of coats
Application rate/coat (L/m2)
Dry film thickness (total) (mm)
Underlay:
- For protection
- For bond breaking

can be deleted.
Material type: e.g. “Butyl”, “Acrylic polymer”, “Coal tar modified polyurethane”. May be fabric reinforced.
Method of application: e.g. “Spray”, “Roller”.
Thermal insulation type: e.g. one of the types specified in the Insulation and barriers worksection. Notwithstanding AS CA55
clause 3.9, some proprietary extruded polystyrene boards are recommended by the manufacturer for applying above the
membrane (with suitable protection) to form an “inverted” roof insulation system.

Surface protection/finish: e.g. bituminous paint, mineral aggregate, fibre cement sheets, no fines topping, concrete pavers.
Consult roof system manufacturers. See also AS CA55 clause 3.8 and Appendix C.
Ancillaries
Ancillaries Type and/or location
A B C
Top edge sealing of membrane
Flashing
Pressure seals
Sealant

ROOFING ENCLOSURE
ROOFING
This worksection is applicable to the provision of roof coverings of metal and plastic sheet; concrete, clay and metal tiles; slate
roofing and timber shingles and shakes; and associated elements such as roof plumbing, rainwater tanks, roof lights, ventilators
and metal wall cladding.
• Tensioned membrane structures for suspended fabric roofing.
• Waterproofing – external for membrane roofs.
• Cladding for wall cladding other than metal sheet.
• In situ installed pure zinc folded seam and pan roofing.
• Hydraulic – design and install.
• Wastewater.
• Locate the extent of roofing types, accessories, and finishes on drawings to your office documentation policy.
• Roof plumbing: Show on the drawings the arrangement of the rainwater system including the type and size of the main
components (gutters, downpipes, sumps, rainheads, etc.) and the size and spacing of supports and fixings.
• For smoke and heat venting, see AS 2665 which is cited in the BCA as a primary reference Standard.
• Specify stormwater disposal in Hydraulic – design and install or Wastewater.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
Provide a roofing system and associated work which:
- Remains intact and waterproof under the local or regional ambient climatic conditions.
- Protects people, property and the environment from the adverse effects of stormwater.
- Provides adequate means of dealing with vapour pressure, condensation, corrosion and thermal
movement.
- Satisfies other specified performance requirements.
The aim of the designer is to ensure the roofing system:
• In the case of dwellings within the scope of AS 2627.1, provides the minimum added thermal resistance (R) of that
standard.
• Supports the specified imposed loads and types of roof access without impairment of performance.

General

ROOFING ENCLOSURE
have no overlaps.
>
• Hydraulic – design and install or Wastewater.
1.3 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA

Ambient climatic conditions
AS/NZS 3500.3 provides the basis for designing storm water installations.
Design rainfall intensity (mm/h) to AS/NZS 3500.3:
>
See AS/NZS 3500.3 Table E1 or refer to the Hydrometeorological Advisory Services of the Bureau of Meteorology (HASBM).
SAA/SNZ HB114 provides worked examples of roof drainage calculations.
Roof access
Type: >
e.g. “Normal roof maintenance”, “Passive recreation”, “Active recreation” (i.e. games - state type and any special conditions),
“Access to plant rooms” (if by restricted paths show on the drawings).
1.4 INSPECTION
Notice
Inspection: Give sufficient notice so that inspection may be made of:
- Roof supports.
- Those parts of the roofing, sarking, vapour barrier, insulation and roof plumbing installation which
will be covered up or concealed.
1.5 SUBMISSIONS
Tests
Metal roofing general tests: Type-test the roof sheeting and fastenings to AS 1562.1 for resistance to
concentrated load and to wind pressure.
Metal roofing cyclonic area tests: For installations in cyclonic regions AS/NZS 1170.2, type-test the
roof sheeting and fastenings to AS 1562.1 clause 5.6.
Fibre cement roofing: Type test the roof sheeting and fixings to AS/NZS 1562.2 for resistance to wind
forces.
Internal downpipes: Site test each stack hydrostatically in stages 2 storeys high for two hours.
Remedy defects and retest if necessary.
Samples
List here any samples required other than those specified in the Template. Approved samples are retained on site and define
the acceptable limits of colour and texture variation. If particular or additional samples are required, e.g. samples for testing, list
them here. See AS 4046 Parts 0 to 9 for testing of roof tiles.
Submit samples of the following showing the range of variation available:
- Tiles, slates and shingles.
- Bedding and pointing mortar.

ROOFING ENCLOSURE
Shop drawings
Shop drawings are necessary if some or all of the system is to be designed by the contractor or a specialist subcontractor to
meet performance criteria specified. If this is not the case, delete Shop drawings.
General: Submit shop drawings showing the following information:
>
e.g. methods of fixing, required end and side laps, sound insulation, suppression of impact noise, provisions for thermal
movement, birdproofing, flashing, ridge cappings, roof water disposal, thermal insulation, vapour barrier, control joint treatment,
isolation of incompatible metals, access for maintenance, provision for traffic.
2 PRODUCTS

Fasteners
Self-drilling screws: Corrosion resistance Class 3.
Finish: Prefinish exposed fasteners with an oven baked polymer coating to match the roofing material,
or provide matching purpose-made plastic caps.
Fastenings to timber battens: Provide fastenings just long enough to penetrate the thickness of the
batten without piercing the underside.
Profiled fillers: Purpose-made closed cell polyethylene foam profiled to match the roofing profile.
Locate profiled fillers under flashings to:
- Ridges.
- Eaves.
- Lapped joints in roof sheeting.
Add locations as required.
2.2 SHEET METAL ROOFING AND CLADDING

General
Consult manufacturer’s literature for the correct description of the roofing system and available finishes. Vary as required.
Type: Provide a proprietary system of preformed sheet and purpose-made accessories.
Prepainted and organic film/metal laminate products: To AS/NZS 2728.
Product type: >
Product finish: >
Design and installation: To AS 1562.1.
Material: >
e.g. “Steel”, “Aluminium”, “Copper”.
Profile: >
e.g. “Corrugated” (give pitch and height of corrugations) or use proprietary name.
Thickness (base metal) (mm): >
Grade: >
Thickness: and Grade: Consult manufacturers.
Finish: >
Colour: >
2.3 TILING
Materials
Accessories: Provide the accessories, compatible with the tiles, necessary to complete the tiling.
- Type: >

ROOFING ENCLOSURE
Tile schedule
Type: >
“Terra cotta” or “Concrete”.
Pattern: >
“Plain”, “Marseilles”, “Swiss”, “Spanish”, “Shingle”, “Side locking”, “Side and head locking”, etc. (see AS 2049), or specify by
proprietary brand name.
Finish: >
“Glazed” or “Unglazed” (Terra cotta tiles), or use manufacturer’s description.
Colour: >
Use manufacturer’s description.
2.4 SHEET METAL TILING

General
Type: A proprietary roofing system of interlocking prefinished steel sheets profiled to resemble tiles.
Material
Finish: >
Colour: >
2.5 FIBRE CEMENT ROOFING

Material
Type: 6 mm thick autoclaved fibre cement sheet, corrugated to 150 mm pitch.
Accessories
General: Provide purpose-made accessories.
2.6 GLAZED ROOFING

Description
General: Provide sloped overhead glazing fixed to glazing bars or directly to the roof framing. Provide
the necessary trim, flashings and sealants.
Glass selection and installation: To AS 1288.
Material: >
Type: >
e.g. toughened and laminated.
Thickness (mm): >
Nominate thickness for each lamination.
StandardsMark: Required.
Surface film: >
Supports: >
Proprietary framing or patch fitting system.
Solar heat gain coefficient (SHGC): >
U-value: >
Add SHGC and U-value where called for in the BCA.
2.7 PLASTIC SHEET ROOFING

Materials
Unplasticised polyvinyl chloride (UPVC) sheet: To AS/NZS 4256.2.
Glass fibre reinforced polyester (GRP) sheet: To AS/NZS 4256.3.
Polycarbonate: To AS/NZS 4256.5.
Select either extruded PVC, GRP or specify the material required.

ROOFING ENCLOSURE
Class or grade: >

e.g. For uPVC, D (domestic), I (industrial); or for GRP, GP (general purpose), FR (fire retardant) or CR (chemical resistant); or
for polycarbonate, Grade S (sold flat sheet), P (profiled sheet) or M (multi-layered) as noted in AS/NZS 4256.
Type: >
e.g. For uPVC, ST (surface treated), GP (general purpose); or for GRP, CT (surface tissue present), ST/SX (surface treated); or
for po0lycarbonate, ST (surface treated), GP (general purpose); as noted in AS/NZS 4256.
Profile: >
Describe the profile or, if required to match adjacent roofing, use the proprietary name.
Colour: >
If applicable use the manufacturer’s name.
Fire performance: >
e.g. BCA Fire hazard properties – general if GRP (FR) is nominated.
2.8 FIBRE CEMENT SHINGLE ROOFING

System
Proprietary system of autoclaved fibre cement, single faced, smooth matt surfaced shingles with
square cut edges and pre-drilled fixing holes, and a combination integral colour and thermosetting
acrylic finish.
Soakers
Provide 15 kg/m2 lead soakers under ridges and hips and where shingles abut walls.
2.9 SLATE ROOFING

Material
Type of slate: >
Length: >
Width: >
2.10 TIMBER SHINGLE AND SHAKES ROOFING

Material
General: Canadian western red cedar No.1 Grade, taper sawn or split to form shingles or shakes of
set length and random widths.
Specify other required or acceptable material.
Length (mm): >
Thickness at butt end (mm): >
Sheathing >
Finish
Shingles: Sawn both sides.
Shakes: Split and resawn.
Fixing
General: To battens or plywood sheathing with either galvanized steel or silicon bronze nails.
2.11 FULLY SUPPORTED COPPER ROOFING

Type
Copper roofing laid on flush finished continuous timber decking over an underlayer and separation
layer.
Underlayer
Bituminous felt. Lay loose over deck.
Separation layer
Fire resistant building paper.

ROOFING ENCLOSURE
Roof sheeting
Material: Soft temper copper to AS 1566.
Minimum thickness: 0.5 mm.
Profile: Roll form sheeting into pan profiles for forming into standing lock seam joints at 375 mm
maximum centres.
Describe the profile or use proprietary name.
2.12 SKYLIGHTS
Standard
Skylights (rooflights) in bushfire prone areas: To AS 3959 clause 3.9.1.4.
Check the product for compliance particularly spark arrestor mesh.
Description
General: A proprietary skylight system including framing, fixing, trim, accessories and flashings.
Size (mm): >
Light shaft: >
Ceiling diffuser: >
Specify manufacturer, brand name, catalogue number, size, etc., as needed to identify the light.
Specify any additional particular requirements, material, shape (domed, barrel, flat, etc.), size, hatch opening or fixed, etc. if not
shown on the drawings.
U-value: >
2.13 ROOF WINDOWS

Type
General: A proprietary window system designed for non-vertical installation in roofs pitched between
15° and 85°, consisting of the following:
- Timber frame and sash, shop clear primed.
- External anodised aluminium protective profiles.
- Sealed double glazing.
- Horizontally pivoted sash, 180° reversible, on patent friction hinges.
- Opening and locking by patent control bar.
- Ventilation flap.
Options: >
Options may include internal roller blind or venetian blind, internal removable insect screen, external awning blind, remote
control of opening and locking, and remote control of internal blinds.
U-value: >
2.14 ROOF VENTILATORS

For electric fan powered ventilators specify the necessary electrical connection in the electrical services worksection. Specify
any particular requirements, material, type (e.g. static, wind driven, electric fan powered), size, etc. if not shown on the
drawings. For roof mounted heat exhaust vents, see AS 2427.
Description
Type: >
e.g. Proprietary roof mounted ventilators or Smoke/heat ventilating systems to AS 2665. Including fixings, controls, trim and
flashings.
Finish: Match adjacent roofing.

ROOFING ENCLOSURE
2.15 RAINWATER TANKS

Consult manufacturers about available sizes of tanks and recommendations for installation.
Reinforced concrete tanks may be precast or cast in situ.
Type
Provide proprietary cylindrical coated steel or reinforced concrete tanks with flat base and conical roof.
Location: >
Capacity: >
Accessories: Provide the accessories needed to complete the installation, including inlet and outlet
connections, screen, overflow and access hole.
Coated steel tanks
This text and the table are derived from the superseded standard, AS 2179.
Support: Fully support the tank above ground level.
Material: Metallic-coated steel.
Outlets: Double fitted so that fitting is rigid.
- Tanks ≤ 6600 L: 20 mm minimum.
- Tanks > 6600 L: 25 mm minimum.
Access hole: Cut access hole above the highwater level, and cover with either a strainer or a top fixed
securely to the tank. Provide soluble chemical protector units.
Rivetted and capped joints:
- Base: Either 6 mm grooved seams for tanks ≤ 2.1 m diameter, or riveted seams for tanks of any
size. Space rivets at 50 mm maximum centres, and overlap sheets 25 ± 3 mm.
- Walls: For corrugated sheet, rivet at every corrugation and end-lap 100 mm minimum.
- Girth seams: Space rivets at 300 mm maximum centres. Provide either 4.8 mm (minimum) blind
rivets or No. 8 (minimum) solid rivets.
Overflow: Area at least the total tank inlet area.
Coated steel tanks material table
Component Minimum base metal thickness Grade to Coating class Profile/Pitch x
(mm) AS 1445 to AS 1397 no. of
≤ 3 m diameter > 3 m diameter corrugations
or ≤ 17 000 L or > 17 000 L
Base 0.6 0.8 G 300 Z 275 or Flat
AZ 150
Walls 0.6 0.8 G 250 Z 600 76 x 8
AZ 200 76 x 10.5
Top 0.6 0.6 G 300 Z 275 Flat
AZ 150 Conical
Reinforced concrete tanks

Trim and compact the ground and place a level bed of sand at least 50 mm thick to support the tank.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Protection
General: Keep the roofing and rainwater system free of debris and loose material during construction,
and leave them clean and unobstructed on completion. Repair damage to the roofing and rainwater
system.
Touch up: If it is necessary to touch up minor damage to prepainted metal roofing, do not overspray
onto undamaged surfaces.

ROOFING ENCLOSURE
Thermal movement
Provide for thermal movement in the roof installation and the structure, including movement in joints
and fastenings.
Tolerances
Tolerances table
Spacing of supporting members ± 5 mm on the nominated support member
spacing
Vertical or horizontal misalignment at the abutting ≤ 2 mm
ends of sheets
Tops of supporting members in a plane parallel to ≤ 7 mm smooth deviation per metre length of
the nominated roof slope supporting member
These tolerances are from AS 1562.1.
3.2 SAFETY MESH

Standard
General: To AS/NZS 4389.
Coordinate with the Insulation and vapour barriers worksection. Do not call up welded safety mesh in more than one spot.
3.3 SHEET METAL ROOFING AND CLADDING

Roof sheet installation
Fixings: >
- Type: >
- Size: >
- Spacing (mm): >
For work in cyclone areas of the Northern Territory compliance with NT “Deemed to Comply Standard” will be required. Cyclone
washers must be used unless evidence is produced to prove they are not required.
Accessories: Provide material with the same finish as roofing sheets.
Expansion joints: >
Expansion joints should be provided every 35 m in sheet length for roofs with concealed fixings and 24 m in sheet length for
roofs with exposed fixings.
Ridges and eaves
On birds and buildings, see BDP EDG Note DES 56.
Treat ends of sheets as follows:
- Project sheets 50 mm into gutters.
- Close off ribs at bottom of sheets using mechanical means or with purpose-made fillers or end caps.
- Turn pans of sheets up at tops and down into gutters by mechanical means.
- Provide pre-cut notched eaves flashing and birdproofing where necessary.
- Close off ridges with purpose-made ridge fillers of closed cell polyethylene.
Ridge and barge capping
Finish off along ridge and verge lines with purpose-made ridge capping or barge rolls.
Sprung curved ridge
Lay the roof in single lengths from eaves to eaves by naturally curving the sheets over the ridge.
This is possible only with certain sheeting profiles and roof slopes. Consult the manufacturer about recommended purlin
spacings at the ridge to achieve the required curvature. Show the purlin locations on the drawings.
End laps
General: Where end laps are unavoidable, and the sheet profile is not suitable for interlocking or
contact end laps, construct a stepped type lap.

ROOFING ENCLOSURE
Length of lap (mm): >

Specify the laps required, if applicable.
Pan type sheets
Removal: Capable of being de-indexed and removed without damage.
Curved corrugated sheet
General: Form by rolling from material recommended for curving or bullnosing. Minimise crimping or
creasing across the face of the sheet. Trim off crimped or creased edges and ends.
Metal separation
The design process should ensure compatibility or detail separation.
Prevent direct contact between incompatible metals, and between green hardwood or chemically
treated timber and aluminium or coated steel, by either:
- Applying an anti-corrosion, low moisture transmission coating to contact surfaces.
- Inserting a separation layer.
3.4 TILING
Installation
Local regulatory codes (e.g. Northern Territory Building Manual) may prevail. Specify here any particular requirements if not
AS 2050 applies only to roofs with a pitch of 15° or greater and for wind classifications N 1-N 4 and C 1-C 3 inclusive.
Setting out: Set out the roof to give an even tile gauge in each course, with full or saw cut tiles at
verges.
Bedding and pointing: Bed and point accessories, including ridges, hips and verges, in coloured
mortar.
- Colour: To match the tiles and accessories.
Tile verge: Finish the verge with cover tiles pointed to the roof tiles. Screw fix to the barge board with
round head galvanized screws.
Pointed verge: Bed and point tiles on 100 x 5 mm fibre cement pointing strip.
Tile verge or Pointed verge: Select alternatives. Use tile verge in high wind areas.
3.5 FIBRE CEMENT ROOFING

Installation
Excluding safety mesh, to AS/NZS 4389. AS/NZS 1562.2 is cited in the BCA for weatherproofing.
3.6 GLAZED ROOFING

Installation
Fixing: >
Specify and detail to the recommendations of the glazing bar manufacturer.
3.7 PLASTIC SHEET ROOFING

Installation
AS/NZS 1562.3 covers the installation of plastic cladding materials. See also SAA HB39 Section 9.
Fixing: >
e.g. Roofing screws with neoprene washers in oversized holes. Consult manufacturer.
3.8 FIBRE CEMENT SHINGLE ROOFING

Installation
Bottom course: Overhang 50 mm into eaves gutter.

ROOFING ENCLOSURE
Verges: Overlap barge boards minimum 35 mm.
3.9 SLATE ROOFING

Installation
3.10 TIMBER SHINGLE AND SHAKES ROOFING

Fixing >
e.g. To battens or plywood sheathing with either galvanized steel or silicon bronze nails, as advised by the supplier.
Installation
Timber shingles: To AS 4597.
3.11 FULLY SUPPORTED COPPER ROOFING

Fixing
Fix pans to the deck with concealed copper clips at 750 mm maximum centres.
Lock seams
Mechanically form and welt seal in situ using a self propelled seaming machine, to stand 25 mm high
on completion. Dress seams flat at gutters, ridges and hips, and fold both pan and seam down into
gutters and up to form stop ends at ridges and hips.
Ridge and hip capping
Lock welt to the upturn of the roofing.
3.12 SKYLIGHTS
Installation
Fixing: >
Specify and detail to the recommendations of the skylight manufacturer.
3.13 ROOF WINDOWS

Installation
Fixing: >
Specify and detail to the recommendations of the roof window manufacturer.
3.14 ROOF VENTILATORS

Installation
Fixing: >
Specify and detail to the recommendations of the roof window manufacturer.
3.15 ROOF PLUMBING

General
General: Provide the flashings, cappings, gutters, rainwater heads, outlets and downpipes necessary
to complete the roof system.
Materials
Metal rainwater goods: To AS/NZS 2179.1.
PVC rainwater goods and accessories: To AS/NZS 2179.2 (Int).
Jointing sheet metal rainwater goods
Butt joints: Make joints over a backing strip of the same material.
Soldered joints: Do not solder aluminium or aluminium/zinc-coated steel.
Sealing: Seal fasteners and mechanically fastened joints. Fill the holes of blind rivets with silicone
sealant.
Jointing system: >
e.g. Blind rivet and seal or a proprietary system.

ROOFING ENCLOSURE
Flashings and cappings

Flashing material: To AS/NZS 2904.
Type: >
Installation: Flash roof junctions, upstands, abutments and projections through the roof. Preform to
required shapes where possible. Notch, scribe, flute or dress down as necessary to follow the profile
of adjacent surfaces. Mitre angles and lap joints 150 mm in running lengths. Provide matching
expansion joints at 6 m maximum intervals.
6 m corresponds to the manufacturing length, but movement at these joints would be less than 1 mm so they perhaps do not all
need to be fully-fledged expansion joints.
Upstands: Flash projections above or through the roof with two part flashings, consisting of a base
flashing and a cover flashing, with at least 100 mm vertical overlap. Provide for independent
movement between the roof and the projection.
Wall abutments: Provide overflashings where roofs abut walls, stepped to the roof slope in masonry
and planked cladding, otherwise raking.
- In masonry: Build into the full width of the outer leaf. Turn up within cavity, sloping inward across the
cavity and fixed to or built in to the inner leaf at least 75 mm above.
- In concrete: Turn 25 mm into joints or grooves, wedge at 200 mm centres with compatible material
and point up.
Fixing to masonry or concrete: Step in courses to the roof slope. Interleave with damp proof course, if
any.
Fixing to pipes: Solder, or seal with neutral cured silicone rubber and either of the following:
- Secure with a clamping ring.
- Provide a proprietary flexible clamping shoe with attached metal surround flashing.
Flashings and cappings schedule
Component Material and Thickness and Profile and size Jointing method
finish grade
Flashings
Cappings
Gutters
General: Prefabricate gutters to the required shape where possible. Form stop ends, downpipe
nozzles, bends and returns. Dress downpipe nozzles into outlets. Provide overflows to prevent back-
flooding.
Matching gutter and fascia: Provide a proprietary metal eaves gutter and accessories formed and
precoated to match the fascia system.
Gutter and sump support: Provide framing and lining to support valley gutters, box gutters and sumps.
Line the whole area under the gutters and sumps.
Support: >
e.g. Proprietary metallic-coated adjustable strap and channel system.
Lining: >
e.g. Spandeck
Valley gutters: Profile to suit the valley boarding. Turn back both edges 180° x 6 mm radius. Nail or
screw to the valley boarding at the top end to prevent the gutter creeping downwards.
Gratings and guards: Provide removable gratings over rainwater heads and sumps and leaf guards to
gutters and gutter units:
- Type: >
e.g. Plastic mesh or proprietary metal guards to match the gutter profile.
Expansion joints: Provide expansion joints in guttering longer than 30 m:
- Type: >
e.g. As detailed or proprietary elastic expanding adhesive fixed type.
Leaf guards to gutter outlets: >
ROOFING ENCLOSURE
If leaf guards are required specify type and make, or show on the drawings. Plastic leaf guards are not recommended for
bushfire-prone areas. “Wire netting ball” or “Hemispherical wire mesh dome”. Specify the metal and coating.
Ball guards to gutter outlets: >
Matching fascia/barge: Where the selected eaves gutter is a proprietary high front pattern forming part
of a combined system of gutter, fascia and barge, provide the matching proprietary fascias and barge
cappings to roof verges and edges.
Downpipes
Specify the material, profile and size in the Gutter and downpipe schedule if not shown on the drawings. Refer to commentary
for Flashings and cappings schedule.
In high wind areas consider the degree of exposure of gutters and downpipes to wind loading and the need to provide additional
fixings.
General: Prefabricate downpipes to the required section and shape where possible. Connect heads to
gutter outlets and, if applicable, connect feet to rainwater drains.
Access cover: Provide a removable watertight access cover at the foot of each downpipe stack.
Downpipe support: Provide supports and fixings for downpipes.
Internal downpipes
Mainly multi-storey applications. Sound insulation will not be required where downpipes are built into sound rated ducts.
Material: >
e.g. “Cast iron to AS 1631” (may be bitumen-, epoxy-, or cement-coated if required), “Copper to AS 1432, Type D”, “Stainless
steel to AS 1528”, “PVC to AS/NZS 1260”. PVC may not be acceptable for fire rating.
Size (mm): >
Specify the nominal size if not shown on the drawings.
Jointing method: >
e.g. “Caulked joint (or bolted gland joint) to AS 1631”, “Screwed fittings to AS 1589” (copper), “Solvent cement jointing” (PVC),
etc.
Access: Provide access openings as follows:
- At each junction and bend.
- At the foot of each stack.
- At every second floor level.
Modify locations to suit the project.
Type of access opening: >
e.g. “Cast iron inspection openings to AS 1631” (or AS/NZS 1260 for PVC, AS 1589 for copper).
Sound insulation: Mineral fibre pipe insulation 50 mm thick, spirally bound on with 1.5 mm wire at
150 mm pitch.
Building in: Where pipes are built into masonry or concrete, spiral wrap the pipe (and insulation, if any)
with building paper.

ROOFING ENCLOSURE
Gutter and downpipe schedule

Item Material and Shape and size Thickness and Jointing Colour
finish grade method
Valley gutter
Eaves gutter
Box gutter
Rainwater
heads and
sumps
Downpipe
Overflows
Overflow spouts
Specify here requirements not shown on the drawings. If there is more than one size of gutter or downpipe list them separately
against the designation used on the drawing.
Rainwater disposal
System: >
If not shown on the drawings specify method of disposal. Alternatives include connection to stormwater drains, discharge to
rainwater tanks or discharge to soakage pits.
3.16 ROOF PLANT ACCESS

Walkway
Product: >
Installation: >
Cross refer ladders, platforms and balustrades to the appropriate worksection i.e. Metalwork, Structural steel.
3.17 ROOF ACCESS SAFETY SYSTEM

Shop drawings
Submit shop drawings noting the following:
- Evidence of compliance with the relevant WorkCover authority.
For projects in NT, change to WorkSafe.
- Certification from a professional engineer to confirm the proposed structural assembly will be stable
and safe.
- Roof plan and layout of all elements of the system.
Assembly
Type: >
Product or description e.g. cable based fall arrest system.
Fixing: >
e.g. Multiple side fixings to roofing ribs, or direct fixing to roof structure with flashings at penetrations.
3.18 COMPLETION
Warranties
Submit the roofing materials manufacturer’s published product warranties.
Use only where warranties extending beyond the defects liability period are available for the particular system. Insert the
required warranty period and terms, which should be negotiated beforehand. If the warranty is in the form of separate material
and installation warranties, require the signatures of both manufacturer and installer. Delete if not applicable, or if the provisions
of General requirements are adequate.

ROOFING ENCLOSURE
Maintenance manual
On completion submit a manual of recommendations from the roof manufacturer or supplier for the
maintenance of the roofing system including, frequency of inspection and recommended methods of
access, inspection, cleaning, repair and replacement.
Spare tiles
Number: Provide one spare matching tile for every hundred tiles on the roof. Provide spare
accessories in the same ratio.
Location: Stack spares within the roof space.
Designated locations: On or next to lines of supporting walls.

CLADDING ENCLOSURE
CLADDING
This worksection is applicable to lightweight external wall cladding of hardboard, timber board, fibre cement, compressed fibre
cement, metal, and plastic products.
• Brick and block construction for brick veneer.
• Roofing for profiled metal cladding that matches roofing.
• Curtain walls for curtain walls.
• Stone cladding for stone cladding.
• Lining for internal lightweight lining.
• Light steel framing, or Light timber framing.
• None.
• Create or import information from suppliers for proprietary cladding systems.
• Import profiled metal cladding from Roofing if used as wall cladding.
• For flush jointed fibre cement eaves lining import the relevant material from Lining.
• Structural sheet bracing and flashings are dealt with in the Light timber framing worksection.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
General: Provide lightweight external wall cladding and associated work which is as follows:
- Remains intact and waterproof under the local or regional ambient climatic conditions.
The design aims are to provide a cladding system and associated work which is as follows:
• Provides adequate means of dealing with vapour pressure, condensation, corrosion and thermal movement.
• In the case of dwellings within the scope of AS 2627.1, provides the minimum added thermal resistance (R) of that
standard.
2
If required state the minimum added thermal resistance (R) (m K/W).

General

CLADDING ENCLOSURE
have no overlaps.
>
1.3 INSPECTION
Notice
Inspection: Give sufficient notice so that the framing, sarking, vapour barrier and insulation may be
inspected before they are covered up or concealed.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 HARDBOARD CLADDING

Wet-processed fibreboard
Hardboard: To AS/NZS 1859.4.
Classification: >
e.g. general purpose, tempered (for sheltered exterior) or exterior (for exterior cladding).
Bending strength: >
e.g. L, M or H, (low, medium or high).
Plank cladding
Type: A proprietary system of hardboard planks.
Texture: >
Width x length (mm): >
Plank thickness: 9.5 mm.
Joints and edges: PVC extrusion.
External corners: Preformed metal joining pieces.
Internal corners: Scribe.
2.2 TIMBER BOARD CLADDING

Timber
Hardwood: To AS 2796.1.
- Grade to AS 2796.2: >
AS 2796.2 describes four grades, select (SEL), medium feature (MF) and high feature (HF).
When selecting hardwood, give preference to the naturally durable species.
Seasoned cypress pine: To AS 1810.
- Grade: >
Grade 1 or Grade 2 the grades describe differing levels of non-permissible defects and permissible imperfections, Grade 1
being the higher.
Softwood: To AS 4785.1.
- Grade: To AS 4785.2: >
Five grades are described in AS 4785.2, clear (CL), appearance (AP), select (SEL), standard (STD) and utility (UTL).
Boards
Timber species: >
Grade: >

CLADDING ENCLOSURE
Profile: >
e.g. “Weatherboard”, “Shiplap”, “Chamferboard”.
Thickness (mm): >
Width (mm): >
Milled or sawn: >
2.3 FIBRE CEMENT CLADDING

Fibre cement
Cladding, eaves and soffit linings: Type A Category 3 (modulus of rupture ≥ 7 MPa).
Compressed cladding: Type A Category 5 (modulus of rupture ≤ 18 MPa).
- Edges: Square.
Plank cladding
General: Provide a proprietary system of single faced fibre cement building planks.
Texture: >
Plank thickness: 7.5 mm.
Joints and edges: UPVC extrusion.
Corners: Preformed metal joining pieces.
Sheet cladding
General: Provide a proprietary system of single faced fibre cement sheets.
Arrangement: Set out in even panels with joints coinciding with framing.
Texture: >
Sheet thickness: 6 mm.
Joints, corners and edges: UPVC extrusion.
Eaves and soffit lining
Sheets: Single faced fibre cement.
Sheet thickness: 4.5 mm.
Joints: UPVC extrusion.
Perforations: >
2.4 COMPRESSED FIBRE CEMENT CLADDING

Sheets
Sheet thickness: >
9 mm or 12 mm thick sheet are commonly nominated depending on structural considerations.
Flat panels
General: Smooth even edges free of imperfections such as chips, cut to suit the layout, allowing for a
joint gap 10 mm wide between panels.
2.5 PLYWOOD CLADDING

Plywood and blockboard
Exterior use: To AS/NZS 2271.
Marine plywood: To AS/NZS 2272.
Presealed plywood: Plywood presealed both sides and edges with a machine applied sealer.
Visible surfaces with a clear finish: Veneer quality A.
Other visible surfaces: Veneer quality B.
Grade: >
Back/face veneer: >
Thickness: >

CLADDING ENCLOSURE
Finish: >
e.g. Sawn and grooved.
Bond to AS 2754.1: A.
Installation
Layout: Starting at a corner lay sheets to place laps facing away from prevailing weather.
Movement:
- Allow minimum 2 mm gaps between sheets. If square edges apply elastomeric sealant.
- Allow 5 mm gap between the bottom of sheets and flashings and profile flashings to avoid moisture
traps.
Fixings for 12 mm thick plywood:
- Nails in timber frames: 40 x 2.5 mm.
- Screws in timber frames: No. 8 x 40 mm.
- Screws in 1.5 mm steel frames: 10 gauge – 16 thread pitch x 45 mm.
- Screws in 2.8 mm steel: 10 gauge – 16 thread pitch x 45 mm.
Fixings materials:
- LOSP treated cladding: Hot dipped galvanized steel.
- CCA treated cladding: Stainless steel grade 316 or silicon bronze.
2.6 METAL PANEL CLADDING

For profiled metal cladding that matches roofing, see the Roofing worksection.
Type
General: A proprietary cladding system comprising the following:
- Prefinished metal panels, interlocking so as to be weathertight under the applicable ambient
conditions.
- A substructure of stringers, carrier rails and furring, to which the panels are fixed with proprietary
concealed fixings, or with flush face fixings with heads finished to match the panels.
- Matching trim where required to form parapet cappings, reveals and sills to openings.
- Accessories and fixings necessary to complete the installation.
- Provision for thermal movement.
Cladding system designation: >
If a product is nominated edit the material descriptions below.
Metal panels
Facing material:
- Metal type and thickness: >
- Prefinish: >
- Colour: >
Fixing type: >
Trim: >
Sandwich panels
Required where a thermal resistance or transmittance value is specified for the cladding.
Type: Prefinished metal facings surrounding a core of inert insulating material.
Core material: >
Backing material:
- Material type and thickness: >
- Prefinish: >
- Colour: >
Thermal resistance (R) (or transmittance (U)):
>
Maximum wind pressure (Pa): >

CLADDING ENCLOSURE
2.7 PLASTIC CLADDING

AS/NZS 4256.3 and AS/NZS 4256.5 are cited in the BCA for structural sufficiency of roof construction and weatherproofing of
roofing.
Materials
If a product is nominated edit the material descriptions below.
Unplasticised polyvinyl chloride (uPVC) sheet: To AS/NZS 4256.4.
Glass fibre reinforced polyester (GRP) sheet: To AS/NZS 4256.3.
Polycarbonate: To AS/NZS 4256.5.
Select either extruded PVC, GRP or specify the material required.
Class or grade: >
e.g. For uPVC, D (domestic), I (industrial); or for GRP, GP (general purpose), FR (fire retardant) or CR (chemical resistant); or
for polycarbonate, Grade S (sold flat sheet), P (profiled sheet) or M (multi-layered) as noted in AS/NZS 4256.
Type: >
e.g. For uPVC, ST (surface treated), GP (general purpose); or for GRP, CT (surface tissue present), ST/SX (surface treated); or
for polycarbonate, ST (surface treated), GP (general purpose); as noted in AS/NZS 4256.
Profile: >
Describe the profile or, if required to match adjacent roofing, use the proprietary name.
Colour: >
If applicable use the manufacturer’s name.
Fire performance: >
e.g. BCA Fire hazard properties – general if GRP (FR) is nominated.
Installation
Fixing: >
e.g. Roofing screws with neoprene washers in oversized holes. Consult manufacturer.
2.8 LOUVRED SUNSCREENS

Type
General: A proprietary fixed louvre system comprising the following:
- Prefinished profiled metal louvres attached with proprietary concealed fixings to a supporting
substructure.
- A substructure of brackets, frames and carrier members, mechanically fastened to the building
structure.
- Accessories and fixings necessary to complete the installation.
Type, class or product designation: >
Louvres
Material: >
Section size and profile: >
Prefinish: >
Colour: >
Fixing type: >
Support structure
Material: >
Finish: >
Fixing to building structure: >
2.9 AAC CLADDING

Panel cladding
AAC panel cladding is for use with light steel frame construction.

CLADDING ENCLOSURE
Type: A proprietary system of aerated autoclaved cement (AAC) panels.

Class or product designation: >
Panel thickness: >
75 mm or 100 mm.
Joints: Thin bed adhesive.
Control joints: At all external and internal corners, adjacent to all openings and at maximum 6 m
centres.
2.10 COMPONENTS
Flashings
Material: >
Coordinate with Roofing.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 TOLERANCES
Tolerances
Conform to the following to the Tolerances table:
Tolerances table
Spacing of supporting members ± 5 mm on the nominated support member
spacing
Vertical or horizontal misalignment at the abutting ≤ 2 mm
ends of cladding
Tolerances from AS 1562.1.

Substrates or framing
Before fixing cladding check and, if necessary, adjust the alignment of substrates or framing.
Fixing
Nail to timber framing, screw to steel framing.
Accessories and trim
Provide accessories and trim necessary to complete the installation.
Fixing eaves and soffit lining
Nailing: 150 mm centres to bearers at maximum 450 mm centres.
3.3 PROPRIETARY SYSTEMS

Fixing
Fix the following proprietary systems in accordance with the current written recommendations and
instructions of the manufacturer or supplier:
- Hardboard cladding
- Fibre cement cladding.
- Compressed fibre cement cladding.
- Plastic cladding.
- Louvre sunscreens.
- AAC cladding

CLADDING ENCLOSURE
3.4 TIMBER BOARD CLADDING

Preparation
Preservative treatment: For cladding with a natural or stained finish, prefinish the boards by dipping or
brushing with water repellent preservative. Do not apply preservative if this is incompatible with a
specified pigmented stain finish.
Preservative: >
Cut surfaces: Treat freshly cut surfaces with water repellent before fixing.
Installation
It is assumed that fixings and treatment of joints and junctions with other elements e.g. windows will be covered on the
drawings. Add to, or amend as necessary.
Single lengths: Provide single lengths when installed vertically. Whenever possible provide single
lengths of boards when installed horizontally.
Crossings: Fix twice to each crossing, except fix once to each crossing for sawn weatherboard,
unseasoned hardwood and secret nailed profiles.
Nails:
- Hot dip galvanized to non-corrosive timbers.
- Silica bronze or stainless steel to corrosive timbers (including western red cedar or redwood).
Nailheads: Treat visible nailheads as follows:
- In stained or clear finishes: Drive flush.
- In opaque finishes: Punch below the surface and fill flush with putty after the surface has been
primed.
Joints
Overlapping joints: Lap boards at least 30 mm.
End grain joints: Install boards so that butt joints are in compression.
Internal and external corners: Butt against a stop bead of thickness at least that of the cladding.
Alternatively, mitre external and scribe internal corners.
3.5 COMPRESSED FIBRE CEMENT CLADDING

Joints
Horizontal joints: Epoxy bond a backing strip of compressed fibre cement, 4.5 mm thick, to the rear
face of the panel. Seal the joint with a 3 mm epoxy fillet.
Vertical joints: Backing strip as for horizontal joints. Seal the joint gap with two continuous beads of
sealant, or with a twin-bulb neoprene gasket.
- Strip width (mm): >
110 mm or 145 mm.
Screws
General: 10 gauge countersunk zinc plated, chromate passivated.
Metal framing: Self drilling self tapping.
Fixing
Drilling: Pre-drill the panels 1 mm oversize for screw fixings and countersink so that the top of the
screw is 2 – 3 mm below the surface.
Finish: Stop screw heads with epoxy filler smoothed and levelled upon application and sanded flush
after curing.
Intermediate supports
At intermediate supports fix through a packing strip of high density fibre cement 4.5 mm thick, epoxy
bonded to the rear face of the panels.
Delete the above assembly if it conflicts with a selected proprietary compressed fibre cement cladding system.
3.6 PLYWOOD CLADDING

Fixing
Edges: Seal edges before fixing.

CLADDING ENCLOSURE
Vertical joints: >

Horizontal joints: Provide rebated edge to give 40 mm overlap, or provide cover battens and flashing.
Nails:
- Hot dip galvanized to non-corrosive timbers.
- Silica bronze or stainless steel to corrosive timbers (including western red cedar or redwood).

CURTAIN WALLS ENCLOSURE
CURTAIN WALLS
This worksection is applicable to windows and window-and-spandrel assemblies custom-designed to form part, or the whole, of
the facades of major buildings, especially high-rise. It contains detailed performance and testing requirements and has
extensive quality control provisions. Contractor design is expected. There are no central standards, other than AS/NZS 4284.
For smoke and heat venting, see AS 2665.
• Fire-stopping.
• Metals and pre-finishes for finishes.
• Glazing for glass.
• Glazing.
• None.
• You may show the locations of fire-stops and smoke flashings on drawings to your office documentation policy.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
General: Install the curtain wall so that the frames are as follows:
- Are plumb, level, straight and true within acceptable building tolerances.
- Are adequately fixed or anchored to the building structures.
- Will not carry any building loads, including loads caused by short or long term structural deflection or
shortening.
Design
General: Provide a curtain wall system that is:
- Independently certified by a professional engineer for the design and the erected assembly.

General
have no overlaps.

- Fire-stopping.
- Metals and prefinishes.
- Glazing.
1.3 STANDARDS
General
Aluminium framed curtain walls:
- Selection and installation: To AS 2047.
- Stress analysis of members: To AS/NZS 1664.1 or AS/NZS 1664.2.
Curtain walls framed with other materials: To the above standards where applicable.
Insulating glass units (IGUs):
- Selection and installation: To AS/NZS 4666.
1.4 DESIGN
Drawings
Contract drawings show:
- Mandatory design principles.
- Design intent.
Ensure that the drawings note as mandatory design principles the general arrangement, appearance, external member profiles,
and other details which are mandatory requirements. Details which are merely illustrative of general design principles should be
designated as design intent.
Permissible-stress-design pressures
Positive (Pa): >
Negative (Pa): >
For small buildings and structures within the limits of Appendix D of AS 1288 Simplified method of determining design wind
pressures, it may be sufficient to derive the pressures from Table D2. In all other cases it will be necessary for the designer to
calculate the pressures in accordance with AS/NZS 1170.2. Alternatively the pressures may be derived or refined from the
results of wind tunnel testing of a scale model. If different design pressures are to be stated for different parts of the building,
rather than taking the worst case, expand the schedule accordingly.
Nominal service life of the curtain wall system
>
State a period of years. Applies to Containment devices and Fire-stopping worksection for example.
1.5 MOVEMENT
General
General: Provide for deflections, displacements and other movements within the curtain wall, or
between the curtain wall and the building (including fire stop and smoke flashing connections),
including movements caused by ambient temperature changes, structural design actions and
shrinkage.
Accommodation: Provide curtain walls which accommodate these movements silently and without
permanent deformation, reduction of performance, or other detrimental effects such as the following:
- Damage to or undue stress on structural elements, fixings, glass and spandrel panels.
- Failure of joint seals.
- Loss of normal function in operable elements such as doors and windows.
Ambient temperature range (°C): >
Sol-air index temperature (°C): >

Sol-air index temperature is more relevant than ambient temperature for elements such as body-tinted glass, shadow box
spandrel interiors, and so on.
Building movements
General: Provide for differential movement between the curtain wall and the building caused by
building movements, including column or frame shortening (elastic, creep, shrinkage etc.).
Expected building movements (maximum):
The structural engineer should supply the following design movement quantities.
- Edge beam or slab deflections (mm): >
- Total column or frame shortening (mm/m): >
- Lateral deflection under wind load (mm/floor):
>
- Lateral deflection under earthquake load and other applicable forces (mm/floor):
>
- Differential settlement between any two columns (mm):
>
Curtain wall movements
Dead load: The vertical deflection of a structural member under dead load must not:
- Reduce the glass bite below 75% of the design dimension.
- Reduce below 3 mm the clearance between the member and a non structural member (such as
glass or spandrel panel) immediately below.
- Reduce below 3 mm the clearance between the member and operable elements such as windows
and doors.
1.6 LOADS
Equipment loads
General: If a curtain wall framing member is required to take loads from mechanically operated
window cleaning equipment or a building maintenance unit (BMU) (e.g. via a guide rail), the member
must carry the equipment design loads plus one-third the positive permissible-stress-design load
without exceeding the maximum deflection/span ratios for framing members.
Equipment design loads (maximum):
Obtain these design loads from the designer or supplier of the building maintenance unit (BMU) or other equipment.
- Type of BMU equipment: >
- Equipment design loads on framing members (kg):
. Normal to the wall plane: >
. Horizontally parallel to the wall plane: >
Displacement limits
Restrict the member displacements and maximum deflection/span ratios of structural members subject
to the above loads to the performance requirements of AS/NZS 4284, except for the following:
- Where the deflection of a structural member may cause bending in a masonry, cement rendered or
similar panel, restrict the deflection/span ratio of the member to a maximum of 1:360.
- Restrict the deflection of the cantilevered end of a cantilevered structural member of cantilever
length L to a maximum of 2L/240. Restrict the compression or extension of sealant joints affected by
the cantilever deflection to a maximum of half of the sealant depth.
Maintenance live loads
Horizontal surfaces: Horizontal or near horizontal surfaces, which form part of the curtain wall (e.g.
copings, beam encasements, ledges) and which may carry human live loads (e.g. from maintenance
personnel), must be capable of supporting such loads without permanent distortion, failure of seals or
fastenings, or other damage.
1.7 INSPECTION
Notice

- Prototypes constructed and ready for inspection or testing.

- Fabricated curtain wall assemblies at the factory ready for delivery to the site.
- Prepared site storage areas for curtain wall assemblies before the assemblies are delivered.
- Commencement of delivery of fabricated assemblies to the site.
- Building substrates prepared and ready for the installation of the curtain wall assemblies, with
anchor brackets and other attachments fixed in place.
- Commencement of installation of curtain wall assemblies.
- Preparation for, and commencement of, site glazing or reglazing.
1.8 IN SITU TESTS

Units erected on site which contain unauthorised site modifications, including enlarged or additional lifting holes, drainage slots
or other penetrations in aluminium extrusions, or which are otherwise not in accordance with the contract, may be required to be
retested, at the contractor’s expense. It may be worth stating this in the project specification.
General
In situ tests: Prevent consequential damage to the permanent building structure and finishes.
1.9 STRUCTURAL AND WEATHER RESISTANCE TESTS

Standard
Structural performance, air infiltration, and water penetration: To AS/NZS 4284.
Additional test criteria:
- Water penetration under the test conditions:
- No leaks from a containment device (e.g. internal gutters, troughs, pressure equalised drained
joints).
- Contained water drains away to the exterior within one minute of the cessation of the positive
pressure differential.
- Structural performance: No permanent deflection of any member.
Previous type test
General: An independent testing authority’s report on a previous type test, showing compliance with
the test criteria at the permissible-stress-design pressures, is acceptable provided the manufacturer
certifies in writing that the tested prototype is as follows:
- Is a standard proprietary curtain wall design.
- Accurately represents in all respects the proposed curtain wall.
Method: To AS/NZS 4284 or, for buildings not exceeding 15 m high, AS 2047.
Sealed metal joints
General: If the sealing of overlapping metal sections for weather resistance is such that dynamic
differential movement between the sections may reasonably be anticipated, test a prototype sealed
joint over 100 slow cycles equivalent to the maximum predicted movement, and demonstrate that the
sealant does not fail in adhesion or cohesion and that the joint remains waterproof.
Joints to be tested: >
Test parameters
General: To AS/NZS 4284 Section 8 Performance requirements and as follows.
If you wish to vary the values called for in AS/NZS 4284 Section 8 do so here.
See AS/NZS 4284 Appendix F, on information to be supplied by purchaser to the testing authority.
Test chamber type: >
Structural test pressures (Pa): >
Location of displacement transducers: >
Maximum slippage at supports and fixings (mm):
>
e.g. 1 mm.

Leaks defined as unacceptable: >

Other than those specified in AS/NZS 4284 clause 8.4.
Proof test pressures (Pa): >
Other test criteria: >
Any requirements additional to the above and those in the Template. Curtain walls in cyclone areas may also have to resist the
impact of airborne debris.
Deflection/span schedule
Panel type Maximum deflection/span ratio
Maximum deflection/span ratio: When other than 1:290.

Water penetration schedule
Test type Pressure (Pa) Duration (min) Spray intensity
(L/m².s)
Static
Cyclic 1
Cyclic 2
Cyclic 3
1.10 ACOUSTIC TESTS

Weighted sound reduction index (Rw) tests
Weighted sound reduction index (Rw) tests: Test a representative specimen of each part of the curtain
wall assembly required to have a weighted sound reduction index (Rw) rating.
Standard: To AS/NZS 1276.1 or ISO 717-1.
Cited in the BCA for testing of construction required to have a certain Rw. ISO 717-1 is now available as AS/NZS ISO 717.1
(superseding AS/NZS 1276.1).
Representative specimen: >
State, or show on a drawing, the components of the curtain wall which are to be included in the test, e.g. vision panel, spandrel
panel, back up, junctions with structure.
Weighted sound reduction index (Rw): >
State the required rating to AS/NZS 1276.1. Recommended design sound levels are given in AS 2107 for various occupancy
areas. However it is advisable to obtain the advice of an acoustic consultant on the selection of a Rw rating.
1.11 THERMAL TESTS

Assembly
General: Test a representative specimen of each part of the curtain wall assembly required to have a
particular condensation resistance factor (CRF) or thermal resistance (R).
Standard: To AAMA 1503.
panel, site installed thermal insulating materials, back up, junctions with structure.
Condensation resistance factor (CRF): >

A dimensionless number related to indoor temperature and humidity, and outdoor temperature.
Thermal resistance (R): >
2
US test data usually reports the thermal transmittance or U-value, which is the reciprocal of (R), and may be in BTU/ft .h.°F.
This may be converted as follows:
• R = 1/(U x 5.67826) m².K/W.
Thermal insulating materials
General: Test a representative specimen of homogeneous insulating materials in the curtain wall
required to have particular thermal transmission properties.
1.12 FIRE TESTS

See also BCA Specification C3.4 and AS 1530.4 Section 8.Glazing.
Fire resistance tests

General: Test a representative specimen of each part of the curtain wall system required to have a fire
resistance level (FRL), including any required fire stops.
Additional observations: During test loading and throughout the FRL test, make additional
observations of “separating elements” (e.g. spandrel panels, fire stops, smoke flashings) to
demonstrate compliance with these performance criteria:
- No cracking, fusing, falling of material, spalling, melting, flaming, charring.
- No displacement permitting the passage of smoke, flame or hot gases.
- No emission of appreciable volumes of smoke or noxious vapours from unexposed faces.
Other fire tests
General: Test site installed thermal insulating materials on the exposed face.
Criteria:
- Ignitability, spread of flame, heat evolved: 0.
- Smoke developed: Not greater than 3.
Tests
panel, back up, junctions with structure.
Fire resistance level (FRL): >
State the required level to AS 1530.4.
1.13 SUBMISSIONS
Procedures for examination and acceptance of contractor’s documents such as shop drawings are usually specified in the
Subcontractors
The conditions of tendering may require tenderers to state which firm or firms they intend to use.
Manufacturers: Submit names and contact details of proposed manufacturers of components such as
extrusion suites and associated items.
Subcontractors: Submit names and contact details of proposed curtain wall subcontractors, with
evidence of their experience in this type of work.
Shop drawings
See AS/NZS 4284 clause 6.1.2 Drawings.
Submit shop drawings, calculations and specifications conveying the following information:

- Layout of the curtain wall assembly (sectional plans, vertical sections, and elevations of each
building face).
- Scale drawings, descriptions and statements, as required by AS 2047 and AS/NZS 4284, of the
curtain wall prototype test window.
- Calculations used to determine the structural design of the curtain wall, including glass thickness, to
meet the performance criteria, quoting the types and magnitudes of the design loads on the fixing
anchors or attachments.
- Full size sections of typical members including mullions, transoms, subheads, sills, subsills, louvres,
beads, sealant beads, glazing gaskets, splice plates, trays and cover strips, with notes specifying
the proposed materials.
- Method of assembly including isometric or axonometric and exploded views of typical mullion,
transom and panel junctions, showing the following:
. Mullion sleeve detail (stick systems).
. Four way joint including sleeve (modular systems).
. Panel to panel joints (panel or unitised systems).
- Method of installation, including the following:
. Location and magnitude of reactions to be accommodated by the support structure.
. Type and location of anchors and other attachments to be cast or otherwise built in to the building
structure.
. Erection tolerances.
. Accurate locations and full size details of machined slots, keyholes and other penetrations in
frame extrusions for lifting and installing the units.
. Junctions and trim to adjoining surfaces.
. Caulking and flashing.
. Locations of visible heads of fastenings.
- Provision for differential vertical or horizontal movements, including the following:
. Thermal expansion and contraction.
. Column shortening.
. Frame deflections.
- Methods of assembly, jointing, sealing and fixing of spandrel panels and other facing panels,
particularly where joined edge to edge.
- Details of shadow box spandrels.
- Method of draining the assembly, including details showing the following:
. Pressure equalised drained joints.
. Location, number and size of weepholes.
. Method of mechanically baffling drainage outlets which are not pressure equalised.
- Methods of meeting performance requirements for thermal insulation, fire resistance and sound
transmission, including the following:
. Spandrel backing.
. Closing off and sealing the assembly against other building elements such as soffits and
parapets.
- Hardware, fittings and accessories including window cleaning restraints and visible heads of
fasteners.
Metal facing panel stiffening: Show the proposed type (edge flanges or other) on shop drawings.
Product data: Submit published product data of the curtain wall or extrusion suite manufacturer,
- Technical specifications of products.
- Type test or factory test data for products.
- Metallurgical analysis certificates for alloy and temper of metal components.
- Recommended procedures for fabrication, glazing and installation.

- Schedule of recommended glazing gaskets, sealants, glazing compounds, and the like, including
supplier and catalogue number.
Anodising data: Submit a statement by the anodiser certifying the following:
- The alloy receiving the coating is correct for the required colour.
- The surface preparation, coating thickness and colour comply with requirements.
- The work complies with AS 1231.
Organic film coating data: Submit test reports certifying the following:
- The paint coatings and thicknesses comply with the warranty conditions.
- If no warranty condition has been stated, the conversion coating mass is 325 – 1200 mg/m2.
Anchor manufacturer’s data: Submit the manufacturers’ statement certifying that the cast-in-place
channel anchors have been tested to ASTM E488 for the types of loading required, quoting the test
results to show that the anchors will resist the type and magnitude of the calculated design loads, and
in particular that there is:
- No permanent deformation of the anchor at 1.5 times the design load.
- No failure of the anchor at twice the design load.
- No failure of the structural concrete at three times the design load.
Samples
Submit samples of the following:
- Sections proposed for frame members, accessories, cover strips, trim and gaskets.
- Joints made using proposed techniques.
- Finishes to prepared surfaces.
- Colour samples of prefinished production material (e.g. anodised or organic coated extrusions or
sheet, integrally coloured glazing tapes, gaskets), showing the limits of the range of variation in the
selected colour.
- Panels and other materials to be used in spandrels and other non vision areas, including the
following where applicable:
. Face material.
. Insulating material.
. Backing material.
. Interlayers.
. Composite or sandwich panels.
- Patterned, textured or impressed relief metal facing panels the full size of the spandrel panel. In the
case of project-unique patterned castings, submit a preliminary plaster casting showing the relief
pattern.
- Accessory and hardware items specified descriptively or by performance (i.e. not specified as
proprietary items).
Label each sample, giving the brand name and product name, manufacturer’s code reference, date of
manufacture and intended building location.
Appearance prototype
General: Provide a “mock up” prototype at least 3 curtain wall bays wide and 2 storeys high,
constructed solely for the purpose of demonstrating the general external appearance.
Location: >
e.g. “In the subcontractor’s workshop”.
Test prototype
General: Provide a test facade for testing to AS/NZS 4284, including a suitable simulated building
frame if required by the testing authority, and incorporating at least one example of each component
and construction method in the system, including:
- Attachments to the structure.
- Each type and subtype of frame member.
- Penetrations in frame extrusions for lifting and installing production units in the works, with blanking
off plates where applicable.

- Mullion, transom and panel junctions.

- Horizontal and vertical movement joints.
- Each type of vision panel and spandrel panel.
- Structural and other sealants, gaskets, tapes and beads.
- Junctions and trim to adjoining surfaces.
- Caulking and flashing.
- Hardware, fittings and accessories.
Location: >
e.g. “Testing authority’s premises” or, if the test is to be performed in situ on the actual installation, “Where shown on the
drawings”.
Installed prototype
General: The first installed portion of the complete curtain wall assembly fixed in its final position in the
works, at least 2 bays wide and 2 storeys high, incorporating at least one example of each component
in the system, for general appearance assessment only (not structural testing).
Location: >
e.g. “Where shown on the drawings”.
Installation
Acceptance of substrate: In the Installer’s statement make specific reference to the type, number and
location of the cast-in anchors provided in the building structure for the installation, and to the
provision of reference lines and marks.
Metal prefinishes restoration: If the damaged surface can be satisfactorily restored to its original
condition, submit proposals. Surfaces exposed to weather, and surfaces to receive structural glazing
adhesives, are deemed to be incapable of satisfactory restoration.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 WEATHER SEALS

Flashings
The clause Submissions requires flashings to be shown on shop drawings.
General: Provide flashings and weatherings compatible with the other materials in the installation,
corrosion resistant, and warranted non-staining and non-bleeding.
Location: >
Material: >
- Thickness (mm): >
- Finish: >
2.2 PANELS AND FACINGS

Panel demounting and replacement >
“From inside” or “From outside”.
Metal facing panels

Stiffening: Provide stiffening where necessary to single layer metal facing panels.
Single layer metal panels
Panel location: >
Spandrels, column or beam casings.
Material: >
e.g. “Aluminium alloy”. Specify alloy and temper.
Form: >
e.g. “Sheet”, “Cast plate”, “Extruded sections”.
Thickness (mm): >

Depends on panel size, stiffening, and fabrication methods. Welding may cause face distortion in thin panels.
Face surface: >
e.g. “Plane” or “Patterned to approved sample”.
Finish: >
e.g. “Anodised” (clear or colour), “PVF2”, “Polyester powder coat”.
Finish colour: >
Multi-layer panels
General: Composite units consisting of one of a number of combinations of facings, core and
backings. If the core is an absorptive material, or contains an air space, treat the edges of the unit to
prevent moisture entry while providing a means of venting the core space to the outside air.
May include bonded panels where the facing is glass, including opaque reflective, ceramic coated, opacified, or other. If a
proprietary product is specified, some of the following particulars will be covered.
Panel location: >
Type: >
“Bonded” or “Mechanically assembled”.
Adhesive (for bonded type): >
R value: >
Thickness overall (mm): >
Facing:
- Material: >
- Thickness (mm): >
- Face surface: >
- Finish: >
- Opacifier: >
For glass facings, where needed.
Core:
- Material: >
- Thickness (mm): >
- Density: >
Other interlayers: >
Delete if none.
Backing:
- Material: >
- Thickness (mm): >
- Interior surface: >
- Finish: >
Bonded type: Securely bond the component layers together to form a stable and durable unit.
Mechanically assembled type: A proprietary sandwich panel of hollow box insulated construction,
mechanically assembled by joining the metal exterior and interior facings at their edges with corrosion
resistant fastenings or interlocking folds.
Non-metallic panels >
e.g. GRC, synthetic stone, plastics, single or multi-layer.
2.3 SPANDRELS
Shadow box spandrels
General: Construct the box so that:
- There is an air space of at least 50 mm between the back of the spandrel glass and the face of the
box.

- The air space is vented to the exterior.

- No part of the box is in contact with the spandrel glass or opacifier.
- The box forms a pan completely enclosing the spandrel area vertically and horizontally.
- There is a vapour barrier surrounding the box, on the building side of any insulation, effectively
sealing the air space within the box from the building interior.
Facing glass type: >
- Thickness (mm): >
Opacifier: >
If required.
Spandrel glass volatilisation: Within or around the shadow box, do not provide materials such as
adhesives which may give rise to condensation on the inside glass surface.
This can cause unacceptable colour change in curtain wall glazing. One example arises from evaporation, inside the very hot
shadow box, of triphenyl phosphate, used as a fire retardant in some duct tape adhesives.
Shadow box lining material: >
Spandrel insulation
General: If opacified glass spandrels are backed by insulation, provide an air space of at least 25 mm
between the back of the spandrel glass and the insulation, and secure the insulation so that it cannot
touch the glass or opacifier.
Insulation: >
- Material: >
- Thickness (mm): >
Backing: >
- Material: >
- Thickness (mm): >
- Interior surface: >
- Finish: >
2.4 CONTAINMENT DEVICES

General
Provide devices, including pressure equalised drained joints, gutters and troughs, which contain water
which enters the curtain wall system and divert it harmlessly to the exterior.
If there are either mandatory or in principle design requirements for particular containment devices, show them on the drawings.
For service life, see the Design clause.
Baffles
Containment devices not pressure equalised: Provide mechanical baffles to drainage outlets such as
weepholes and slots.
Inaccessible seals
Seals inaccessible in the system as installed must remain effective for the service life of the curtain
wall system.
2.5 FIRE-STOPPING
Requirement
General: Where fire-stops and smoke flashings are placed between inner faces of the curtain wall and
building elements (such as beam, slab or column faces), provide materials and fabricate, install and
seal to meet fire test requirements.
Corrosion: Provide materials which are as follows:
- Non-corroding.
- Protected against corrosion.
- Of such thickness that corrosion will not impair the required fire-stopping or smoke flashing function
during the service life of the curtain wall system.

Fire-stop material >

Note the material, or rely on the performance requirements.
Smoke flashing
Material: >
Thickness (mm): >
Sealing material: >
Note these particulars, or rely on the performance requirements.
2.6 MATERIALS GENERALLY

See AS 2047 for performance and prescriptive requirements for aluminium alloys, glazing compounds, anchor brackets and
attachments, fasteners and hardware. Specify further particulars here if required.
Frame
Material: >
For aluminium extrusions, specify alloy and temper.
Finish: >
e.g. “Anodised” (clear and colour), “Polyester powder coat”, “PVF2”.
Finish colour: >
Anchor brackets and attachments schedule
Item Material Finish
If there are either mandatory or in principle requirements for particular methods of attachment, show them on the drawings. See
also the certification required by the paragraph Anchor manufacturer’s data: under Submissions.
Fasteners schedule
Item Material Finish
3 EXECUTION
3.1 FABRICATION
Aluminium fabrication and construction
Standard: To AS/NZS 1664.1 or AS/NZS 1664.2.
Fasteners
General: Provide fasteners of sufficient strength and quality to perform their required function.
Joints
General: Make accurately fitted tight joints by methods such that neither fasteners nor fixing devices
such as pressure indentations are visible on exposed faces. Where heads of fasteners are
unavoidably visible, finish them to match the adjacent finished surface.
Operation
General: Provide moving parts which operate freely and smoothly, without binding or sticking, and at
correct tensions or operating forces. Lubricate where appropriate.

Protection
Corrosion protection: Provide adequate protection against corrosion which may be caused in metals
by products or processes normally employed on a building site or by normal atmospheric or other
ambient conditions and by-products including rainwater, potable and non potable water and airborne
salt.
Temporary measures: Do not use adhesive tape, film or paper, or applied coatings liable to bond to
the substrate when exposed to sunlight or weather, as temporary measures to protect curtain wall
components during the course of the works. Where temporary measures are used, remove all traces
from contact mating surfaces before joining up.
State a particular method here, or leave the choice of method to the contractor.
3.2 WELDING
General
Quality: Provide finished welds descaled and free of surface and internal cracks, slag inclusion and
porosity.
Restrictions: Do not weld as follows:
- On site.
- On finished surfaces.
- Next to a finished surface or glass, unless the adjacent surface is adequately protected from
damage.
3.3 EMBEDDED ANCHORS

Standard for embedment
See AS 3600 clause 19.3.9 Construction requirements for anchorages.
Fixing brackets
Anchors and other methods of attachment of the curtain wall to the structure: Provide the following
characteristics:
- Three-way adjustment to accommodate fabrication and construction tolerances.
- Fixing the curtain wall in its correct position while making provision for building and curtain wall
movements.
- Adequate to carry the structural design actions.
General
Cast anchors required for the attachment of the curtain wall into the concrete of the building structure.
Do not use other methods of fixing (e.g. drilling or cutting into hardened concrete, preformed pockets,
chemical fixings, expanding bolt sockets, or explosive tools). Do not displace reinforcement when
locating embedded items.
Anchor fixing schedule
Type of anchor Location Permissible method of Maximum design load
fixing (Pa)
Preferably show this information on the drawings.

Permissible method of fixing: Other than casting into structural concrete.
Protection
Prevent the entry of concrete slurry into bolt holes, channels, and other openings in the anchors. Fill
the openings using an easily removed water repellent material before casting in.
Tolerances on placement
Anchors generally:

- Maximum deviation from correct position: ± 13 mm.

Channel anchors embedded parallel or perpendicular to the edge of a concrete structural member:
- Minimum length of embedded anchor: 200 mm.
- Minimum distance from the concrete edge to the nearest part of the anchor: 100 mm.
3.4 INSTALLATION
Installation tolerance limits
Advise of tolerances, if any, additional to or different from those below.
Alignment:
- Maximum deviation of any member from its true alignment (plumb, level, or line of slope): 1 mm per
metre of member length, up to a maximum of 9 mm in a continuous run of members in one
direction.
- Maximum misalignment between adjoining members: 1 mm.
Position:
- Maximum deviation of any part from its true position: 9 mm (not applicable to the positions of
adjoining members relative to each other).
Marking
General: Before the separate parts of the curtain wall are delivered to the site, provide suitable and
sufficient marks or other means for identifying each part, and for showing its correct location and
orientation when installed.
Reference lines and marks
General: Provide on each floor, in agreed locations accurate perimeter offset reference lines, plumb
with corresponding lines on other floors, and height bench marks.
Cleaning
General: During erection promptly remove foreign matter from the curtain wall without damage to
finishes. Do not use abrasive cleaners or acid.
3.5 COMPLETION
Warranties
General: Before and as a condition for the issue of the final certificate, submit warranties as follows:
- In the appropriate form.
- Executed by the contractor and the warrantor (or warrantors in the case of joint warranties).
- For the required warranty period.
Warranty conditions
Guarantee of performance: Where the warrantor is a subsidiary of another organisation, submit that
organisation’s guarantee of the performance of the warranty.
Product warranties: Submit product warranties which are coextensive with or additional to the terms
and warranty period of any manufacturer’s published warranty, and do not derogate from any warranty
implied by law.
Unless the manufacturer acknowledges awareness of the specified application, or the application is recommended in its
published product data, it may escape the normal responsibility under consumer protection legislation for supplying a product
suitable for its purpose.
Adjustment of warranty period: Where any part of the work is required to be repaired or made good
under a warranty, the warranty period:
- Must not terminate until that part has been satisfactorily repaired or made good.
- In respect of that part, must recommence from the date of completion of the repair or making good.
Curtain wall warranty
General: Warrant the installed curtain wall against service defects in design, materials and
workmanship, including but not necessarily limited to the following:
- Failure to meet performance criteria, including the “acceptable performance criteria” of tests for
resistance to wind actions, water penetration, air infiltration and collapse.
- Structural adhesive failure in either adhesion or cohesion.

- Failure of caulking, flashing, or sealing to the building structure.

- Failure of seals which are inaccessible in the curtain wall system as installed in the building.
- Failure of glass or glazing units.
- Excessive deterioration of components and finishes caused by weathering.
- Spandrel glass volatilisation, caused by condensation of vapours trapped in shadow box spandrels.
- Defects consisting of unauthorised departures from the contract documents.
Warranty period: >
See RAIA Advisory Note AN14.02.100 for suggested warranty periods.
Organic film coating warranty: Submit the paint manufacturer’s warranty for the specified coating,
including warranty conditions, if any, applying to conversion coating mass, dry film thickness of paint
coatings, and number of coatings.
Joint product warranties
Submit the following product warranties with, and as part of, the curtain wall warranty:
- Glass manufacturer’s warranty.
- Toughened glass warranty.
- Aluminium finish applicator’s warranty: An undertaking by the applicator of the finish to refinish or
replace aluminium items where:
. The finish cracks, peels, or shows pitting or corrosion, discernible from 1500 mm distance,
resulting from atmospheric conditions normal for the environment of the installation.
. When tested to AS/NZS 1580.481.1.2 a coloured finish discolours in service to a degree greater
than 2 on the Rating Scale of Table 1 of that standard, compared to an unweathered reference
sample.
. A colour change in the coloured finish of either or both of any two adjacent sections results in a
colour difference between them which exceeds the Rating Scale measure of the range of colour
variation accepted in the contract approved colour sample range.
Joint warranty schedule
Required warranty Warranty period
Insulating glass units (IGUs)
Coated glass units
Toughened glass
Aluminium finish
Add other warranties as required.

Toughened glass: Not all glass manufacturers will give such a warranty. Some refuse to supply heat-soaked glass and the
industry world-wide has been divided about the effectiveness of heat soaking. Refer to RAIA Advisory Note AN14.01.613, now
regarded as out of date. International consensus is that certain heat-soaking processes are effective in reducing the prevalence
of in-service nickel sulphide failures in toughened glass. Companies which cannot provide heat soaking often claim, still, that it
is ineffective, unreliable or too costly.
Heat strengthened glass is also slightly susceptible to nickel sulphide-induced fracture.
Record drawings
General: On completion of the curtain wall installation, submit one set of the original shop drawings
and one set as microfiche, or in computer readable CAD format on magnetic media, marked up or
otherwise modified to show departures or additions incorporated in the work-as-executed. Identify site
glazed panels.
Maintenance manual
General: Submit a manual of maintenance procedures for the satisfactory long-term care and regular
maintenance of the curtain wall installation, including:
- An outline description of the installation and detailed description of specific items with product
names, types and serial numbers.
- Recommended maintenance periods and planned preventive maintenance procedures.

- Copies of manufacturers’ warranties or guarantees, service manuals, brochures and

recommendations.
- Copies of test and approval certificates.
- A copy of each shop drawing, work-as-executed drawing, and the like relevant to the installation.
- A list of replacement parts recommended to be held on site, with the names of suppliers.
- Realignment and adjustment instructions where relevant.
- Procedures for dismantling and reassembling.
Log book: Include in the manual log book pages set up for recording the times of performance of the
above procedures, sufficient in number to receive the entries for three years. Show examples of
typical entries by recording maintenance procedures (such as cleaning) performed during the contract
and defects liability periods.
Spares
At or before practical completion, deliver to the site in strong protective packages marked for
identification, and store where directed, the following additional units, components and materials for
future replacement or repairs:
- Components: The necessary components, including glass, panels, glazing materials, beads and
fasteners, to reinstate one glass panel of each type or size, for every hundred panels (or part
thereof) of that type or size installed in the building.
- Paint: Where the aluminium components are to be prepainted with high performance organic
coatings or thermosetting powder coatings, spray cans containing air drying paint to match the
colour of the prepainted coating, at the rate of 1 litre to each 2000 m2 of gross curtain wall surface
area.
Cleaning
Test prototype: Remove on completion.
Cleaning: Polish the glass and leave the work clean, free from defects and in good condition.
Temporary protection measures: Remove all traces from exposed surfaces before completion of the
works.

STONE CLADDING ENCLOSURE
STONE CLADDING
This worksection is applicable to mechanically fixed natural stone or cast stone cladding panels in external or internal
applications.
• There are no directly related NATSPEC worksections
• Stone tiles adhesive fixed.
• Stone cladding to curtain walls.
• None.
• The appointment of a specialist stonework consultant is advisable for all stages of most projects involving stonework
design and construction.
• The application and testing of sealants is specified in Adhesives, sealants and fasteners.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
General: Provide stone cladding systems to wall backgrounds as follows and/or to the Selections:
- Firmly secured to backgrounds for the expected life of the installation.
- Set out with joints accurately aligned in both directions, level and plum.

General
have no overlaps.
>

• Adhesives, sealants and fasteners.
• Curtain walls.
1.3 STANDARD
Standard
Design and installation: To BS 8298.
1.4 INTERPRETATION
Definitions
- Stone cladding: Non-loadbearing facing units of natural stone or cast stone, mechanically fixed with
structural fixings to the structural background or to precast concrete units.
- Cladding: Unless the context otherwise requires, the term cladding refers to both external cladding
and internal lining.
- Structural fixings:
. Loadbearing fixings: Supporting fixings that transfer the self weight of the cladding to the
structure. Supports may also include a restraint function.
. Restraint fixings: Fixings that tie back the cladding to the structure and resist variable lateral loads
such as wind loads, vibration, and live loads from cleaning equipment.
1.5 INSPECTION
Notice
- Proposed stone source (quarry, storage yard).
- The prepared stone sample range.
- Stone in worked condition at the mason’s yard.
- Stone laid out before fixing.
cramps, brackets, structural fixings and rainwater goods.
- Commencement of cast stone production.
- Completed stonework.
1.6 TESTS
Stone
General: Obtain test samples, representative of each required type of stone, and have the tests
carried out at the following stages:
- Before awarding a stone supply contract.
- On dimension stone prepared for the works, at intervals during the course of the works.
Conformance: Conform to the Natural stone tests schedule and Cast stone tests schedule.

Natural stone tests schedule

Property to be tested Test standard Test criterion Number and
(if not in the test frequency of tests
standard)
Unconfined compressive
strength (dry and saturated):
- Intact rock core specimens ASTM D2938
- Dimension stone ASTM C170
Surface absorption rate ASTM C97
Porosity ASTM C97
Wet and dry density ASTM C97
Modulus of rupture ASTM C99
Sodium sulphate soundness
Flexural strength ASTM C880
Efflorescent salt content
Other properties
The tests listed here are contractual tests to be performed at intervals during the course of the works for quality assurance
purposes.
Number and frequency of tests: Testing may be performed on samples selected at intervals during delivery, or at a rate of per
unit quantity of delivered material.
Test criterion (if not in the test Standard): For granite dimension stone, for example, test requirements are specified in
ASTM C615.
In addition, many of the tests should also be performed before the contract in the design and tendering stages, for example:
• Selection tests to enable the initial selection to be made of stone type and source.
• Proof tests to confirm the suitability of the initial selections.
• Design and structural tests to determine the properties relevant to architectural and structural design requirements.
The tests should be carried out under the direction of the stonework consultant.
If any of the above tests are to be performed in the tendering stage the conditions of tendering should require tenderers to
submit the necessary samples for testing, or to submit results of suppliers’ tests. Laboratory tests on cementitious or polymer-
based mortar should be carried out before commencing stonework and at intervals during the work.
Other properties to be tested may include petrography, thermal expansion coefficient, microcrack density and orientation,
resistance to decay.
Cast stone tests schedule
standard)
Compressive strength BS 1217
Drying shrinkage BS 1217
Initial surface absorption BS 1217
Other properties

Mortar
General: Conform to the Mortar tests schedule.
Mortar tests schedule
standard)
Compressive strength AS 3700
Bulk density
Soluble silica and calcium AS 2701
oxide content
The quality control tests listed are necessary during the progress of the works to monitor the suitability and uniformity of the
mortar. Chemical analyses are required to verify mix proportions. See AS 3700 Normative Appendix FA for mortar durability –
testing using the scratch index.
Structural fixings tests
Sampling: Sample structural fixings at the rate of one item per 100 fixings, or part thereof, of each
type.
Testing: Test to determine whether the fixings are of the material, grade or designation required, and
to conform to the Structural fixings tests schedule.
Tensile tests: To BS 5080-1.
Shear tests: To BS 5080-2.
Structural fixings tests schedule
e.g. tensile strength, shear strength, pull out resistance, corrosion resistance.
1.7 SAMPLES
Stone samples
Rely on approved samples (“acceptance samples”) to define stone type and quality. The accepted samples, marked for
identification, should be held in a secure location for reference.
Number: At least 3.
Stone units: For each type and grade of stone (including natural and cast stone), submit samples of
each stone unit (e.g. block, panel, tile) as follows:
- Either the full size of the unit, or 300 x 300 mm, whichever is the smaller.
- Showing the expected range of variation of colour, pattern, texture, and surface finish in stone to be
supplied.
Cast stone: Submit samples which consist of both facing and backing material, if different.
Associated materials and products
Sand: Submit a 2 kg sample of sand required to be from a particular source, and/or of a particular
colour.
Accessories: Submit 2 samples of each type of structure fixing.
Marking
General: Label samples for identification. Label natural stone samples to show the quarry source,
section, bed and lift.

1.8 PROTOTYPES
General
General: Provide at least 2 panels of stone cladding, of the full size of the unit, fixed in position, and
including joint finishes (such as sealant, backing rod).
Preferably show on the drawings the locations and extent of prototypes, and amend the clause accordingly.
1.9 SUBMISSIONS
Subcontractors
General: Submit name and contact details of proposed specialist stoneworker.
Shop drawings
General: Submit shop drawings and associated documents showing the following where applicable:
- Stonework setting out.
- Position and identifying number of each stone.
- Dimensions of each stone and lay of natural bed.
- Lifting detail and fixing detail of each stone.
- Panel dimensions: Including minimum thickness and slot fixing dimensions.
- Fixings: Location and design of loadbearing and restraint fixings and their method of attachment to
the cladding and structure, with calculations to verify the structural adequacy of the proposals.
- Joints: The size and shape of panel joints, including movement joints, showing:
. The method of dealing with differential movements such as building structure creep and elastic
shortening, drying shrinkage, thermal and moisture movements.
. Provision for three way adjustment of the panel position.
- Jointing: Methods of jointing and pointing panel joints, including movement joints, with particulars of
the materials to be used.
- Cavity: Cavity width and provision for the following:
. Cavity insulation.
. Cavity drainage.
. Cavity damp-proofing and condensation prevention.
- Independent certification by a professional engineer of the design and documentation of the
structural fixings.
Materials
Supplier’s data: Submit statements from the stone supplier, with the following information:
- The supplier’s experience in the required type of work.
- Particulars of established quality control procedures (if any), and the category of the procedures to
the relevant standard.
- The physical properties of the required material.
1.10 TOLERANCES
Tolerances
The tolerances in the Template are based on those in BS 8298. If you have agreed with the producer on tolerances which differ
from these, vary as necessary.
Face dimensions:
- Units ≤ 50 mm thick: ± 2 mm.
- Units > 50 mm thick: ± 3 mm in dimensions up to 900 mm, thereafter ± 1 mm in 300 mm or part
thereof.
- Curtain walling panels with sawn edges: ± 0.5 mm per metre.
- Curtain walling panels with handworked or moulded edges: ± 1 mm per metre.

Tolerances given in the Template can be reduced in some cases to allow for thinner joints e.g. linings of granite, marble, hard
limestone and slate. This may demand extra precision in production of the stones and therefore incur extra cost. The producer
should be contacted with regard to the refining of tolerances. The width of joints should be given in Panel joints.
Squareness (difference between diagonals): ≤ 1.5 times the tolerance on a long edge.
Thickness:
- Generally: ± 3 mm.
- Stone panels in stone faced concrete units: + 3 mm, - 0 mm.
- Curtain walling panels: + 4 mm, - 0 mm.
Flatness:
- Polished or honed faces: ± 0.5 mm per metre.
- Sawn or sandblasted faces: ± 1.5 mm per metre.
- Flame exfoliated faces: ± 3 mm per metre.
- Fine tooled or hammered faces: ± 2 mm per metre.
Edge straightness: ± 0.5 mm per metre.
Anchor hole location: ± 1 mm.
Bow or twist
General: Maximum deviation of stone face from plane:
- Finishes: ± 1.5 mm in 1200 mm.
- Natural riven faces: ± 10 mm in 1200 mm.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 NATURAL STONE

Rely on approved samples to define stone type and quality. See also the commentary to Samples. Select the type (sandstone,
granite, marble, etc.), and state the source of supply, and any further description needed to identify the material.
General
General: Provide natural stone, which is as follows:
- Of the appropriate quality grade.
- Of uniform quality within that grade.
- Selected for the optimum matching of visual properties such as colour and pattern.
- Sound and free from defects liable to affect its strength, appearance, durability or proper functioning
under the intended conditions of use.
Stone types
Sandstone defects: Minor shale laminae or interbeds and minor concentrations of carbonaceous
material (tea leaves) are acceptable in visible faces at ground level or in public areas. Neither defect is
acceptable in carved or moulded work.
Marble: Marble, and dense limestone (including travertine and serpentinites) commercially classified
as marble, and as follows:
- Capable of being sawn routinely into thin slabs which remain intact.
- Capable of taking the nominated surface finish.
- With porosity < 5% (excluding vents and similar features characteristic of travertine, which are
acceptable in that material).
Granite: Igneous stone (e.g. granite) obtained from quarry stone extracted in blocks suitable for project
requirements, and containing microcracking below the threshold that would affect the nominated
properties.
Source of stone supply
Nominated source: >
The supply source should be selected only after comprehensive pre-tender investigations, preferably by the stonework
consultant, of potential suppliers’ ability to provide stone of the required type and quality, in the required quantities, in time to

meet the construction program, and at an acceptable price. The investigations should include pre-contract testing of stone for
the properties required in the project, and examination of the supplier’s quality assurance program.
Alternative source: >
Delete if no alternative source will be considered.
2.2 MORTAR
Mortar materials
cement will be Type GB or Type LH.
White cement: Iron salts content ≤ 1%.

Pure white cement is imported, not made in Australia. If required specify as a proprietary item.
Lime: To AS 1672.1.
Sand: Fine aggregate with no clay content and free from efflorescing salts and selected for colour.
Crushed stone: Fine aggregate consisting partly or wholly of crushed stone, made from material of the
same type as the stone facing.
Sand for facework:
- Colour: >
- Source: >
If a particular source or colour is specified, a sample is required. If possible, mortar colour should be achieved by the natural
colour of the sand (including blended sands), if necessary in combination with white or off-white cement, rather than by the
addition of colouring pigments.
Admixture: Do not provide admixtures.
Or one or more of the materials listed in AS 3700 clause 10.4.2.4, may be permitted. Plasticisers are not recommended as a
substitute for lime. If fly ash is approved, specify limitations on the proportions if different from those given in AS 3972 clause
4.3.
Colour mortar:
- Colour: >
State a colour, e.g. “White”, if other than normal grey.
- Location: >
State, e.g. “All facework”.
Premixed mortar: >
State “May” (or may not) “be used”. If premixed mortar is permitted, include “Provide set-retarding chemical agents”.
Mortar mix
High strength mortar may be appropriate for granites, weaker for sandstone and limestone. A permeability greater than that of
the stone is desirable where there is possibility of salt attack. Specify mortar with required strength and durability. See AS 3700
clause 5.4 for appropriate durability for various exposure conditions classified in Table 5.1.
The M4 group (see AS 3700 Table 10.1) are high strength types; use only for calculated and highly stressed masonry
underpinning, etc.
If lime putty is used, make appropriate adjustments for the water content in the putty (and for voids in stiff lime putty), otherwise
the lime content of the mortar will be insufficient.
Batching: Batch by weight and machine mix.
Mix compressive strength: ≤ compressive strength of the stone bedded on it.
Mix permeability: ≥ stone permeability.
Preparing lime putty:
- Using hydrated lime: Add lime to water in a clean container and stir to a thick creamy consistency.
Leave undisturbed for at least 16 hours. Remove excess water and protect from drying out.
- Using quicklime: Run to putty as soon as possible after receipt of quicklime. Partly fill clean
container with water, add lime to half the height of the water, then stir and hoe ensuring that no lime
remains exposed above the water. Continue stirring and hoeing for at least 5 minutes after all

reaction has ceased, then sieve into a maturing bin. Leave undisturbed for at least 14 days. Protect
from drying out.
Mortar proportions (cement:lime:sand): >
Grout
See also AS 3700 clauses 3.5 and 10.7.
Composition: >
State proportions of cement, aggregate, and admixtures.
Characteristic compressive strength (MPa): >
If more than 12 MPa (minimum in AS 3700 clause 10.7.3).
3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERALLY
Storing
General: Store stone so that it is protected from the weather and atmospheric pollution, clear of the
ground on its natural bed, on supports which do not locally overstress it, and in conditions suitable to
promote good seasoning without staining, marking or damage.
Visual variations
General: If the quality control sample panels have a range of variation in colour, pattern, texture or
surface finish, distribute the production panels throughout the work so that local concentrations of
similar variations do not occur.
3.2 FIXINGS
Provision of fixings
General: If the necessary fixings for stonework are not otherwise provided as part of the structure
provide structural fixings sufficient to support and restrain each stone and effectively resist the
structural design actions to which it will be subject in service.
Metals for fixings
General: Provide metal fixings to be:
- Corrosion resistant.
- Non-ferrous metal or stainless steel.
- Stamped for identification.
- Compatible with the materials with which they will be in contact.
- Effectively insulated from electrochemical reaction with incompatible materials and shall conform to
the Structural fixings schedule.
Structural fixings schedule
Type of fixing Material, grade and designation
Material, grade and designation: See also AS/NZS 2699.2 and BS 8298 clauses 6 and 20 and Table 5. Stainless steel fixings
are generally preferred. Copper alloy fixings are liable to cause staining of the stone face. Delete if fixings are included in the
shop drawings as designed by the product manufacturer.
Fixings
General: Do not provide block liners or resin bonded fixings.

3.3 JOINTS AND CAVITY

Panel joints
The use of butt joints is discouraged because any movement of the units or structure cannot be absorbed and is therefore
transmitted to the unit, which may be damaged as a result. In addition, any slight “out-of-squareness” of the units or irregular
abutting will cause point loading which, in turn, will lead to damage at those points.
The normal range of joint widths according to BS 8298 is given below, which allows for cutting tolerances. The minimum width
can in some cases be reduced – see Tolerances.
Generally:
- Width (mm): >
- Jointing and pointing material: >
Movement joints:
- Width (mm): >
- Sealant material: >
- Back-up material: >
Conformance: Conform to the Joint widths (mm) table.
Joint widths (mm) table
Stone Joint material
Mortar Sealant
Granite, marble, hard limestone and slate 3 – 13 5** – 30*
Slate with riven finish 7 – 13 5 – 30*
Soft limestone and sandstone 5 – 13 5 – 30*
*
This dimension is subject to the manufacturer’s advice.
**
Below first floor level, sealant can be used at a minimum of 3 mm.
Cavity
Minimum width: 20 mm, clear of insulation if any.
Width (mm): >
Insulation: >
Method of draining: >
Method of damp-proofing: >
Method of condensation prevention: >
Insulation: State type and thickness, or state “Not required”.
3.4 SURFACE TREATMENTS

The use of any sealer on a stone face should be subject to specialist advice. Other surface treatments include fungal growth
treatment, anti-graffiti treatment, waterproofing treatments and consolidants.
Abutting surfaces
General: Seal concealed faces of stone walling or facing panels where they abut brickwork or
concrete.
Sealing material: >
Dissimilar stones
For sedimentary stone and cast stone to improve weathering and reduce weather stains. Seek specialist advice on application,
type of stone and substrate backing material. Do not include facing thickness in assessment of cover to reinforcement.
Isolation: Isolate contact surfaces of dissimilar types of stone with a membrane. Isolate sedimentary
stonework from brickwork and other masonry to prevent salts movement.
Isolating membrane material: >
Travertine
Filling: Fill fissures, then grind and polish the surface.

Specify filling of fissures only when required. Delete if not required. Seek specialist advice to ensure long-term compatibility,
adhesion and colour fastness.
- Filling material: >
e.g. “Matching cement and water grout” or “Clear epoxy”.
Sealing: Seal surfaces with a marble sealant.
“Required” or “Not required”.
3.5 COMPLETION
Maintenance manual
General: On completion submit a maintenance manual setting out a program for regular maintenance
cycles at not more than five-year intervals. Include stonework cleaning, desalination, inspection and
repair of joints and flashings, checking rainwater goods for blockages and breakdown, and detection
of potential failures arising from movement or other causes. Include particulars of stone source, type
of stone, and jointing materials.
Cleaning
Cleaning: Leave the stonework clean on completion.
4 SELECTIONS
4.1 CLADDING UNITS

The Template calls for design proposals from the (sub) contractor in the form of shop drawings and calculations to meet these
specified performance data requirements.
At least the main elements of the design should preferably be settled pre-contract by the stonework and structural consultants,
usually with some contribution from a potential contractor specialising in this work; in which case the prescriptive design data
(drawings and specifications showing sizes, fixings, joints, drainage, materials, grades, etc.) should be incorporated in the
contract documents.
Proprietary cladding systems may be suitable.
Building structure
Expected amounts of differential movements:
- Elastic shortening: >
- Creep shortening: >
- Drying shrinkage of concrete: >
- Reversible thermal movement: >
- Reversible moisture movement: >
- Permanent expansion of clay products: >
Environment
Thermal resistance (R): >
Fire resistance level (FRL): >
Stone selection schedule
Location A B C
Stone type
Finish
Microcracking
Resistance to staining
Susceptibility to frost heave

Panel dimension schedule

Location A B C
Height (mm)
Width (mm)
Thickness (mm)
Appropriate panel thickness depends on the type of stone and its use. When used in panels as cladding less than 3.7 m above
ground level and continuously supported, hard stones (e.g. granite, marble, travertine) should be at least 20 mm thick and soft
stones (e.g. limestone, sandstone) 50 mm thick. For heights of panels greater than 3.7 m above ground, all hard stones should
be at least 40 mm thick and all soft stones 75 mm thick. No stone should have a finished thickness less than 19 mm. See
BS 8298 for further information.

WINDOWS ENCLOSURE
WINDOWS
This worksection is applicable to windows and/or sliding glazed doors consisting of proprietary lines (or “suites”) of
manufactured products, supplied as complete systems fabricated and assembled by specialist firms to their standard designs, in
specified materials such as metal, timber and plastics, and including the following:
• Glazing, hardware and associated screens, shutters, integral blinds, louvres, grilles.
• Installation accessories, such as fixings, flashings, sealants, caulking and weather-stripping, necessary for the satisfactory
functioning of the whole.
• Window hardware.
• Glazing.
• None.
You should document related work as follows:
• Schedule windows on drawings to your office documentation policy.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
Conform to the Selections.
Maintenance
Design and document the window openings so that external faces of glazing can be cleaned from within the building and that
the location, size, and types of openings are such that the cleaning requirement can be satisfied and conform to appropriate
OH&S requirements.
Product design: Provide windows with sashes capable of being opened to satisfy the documented
maintenance requirements.

General
have no overlaps.

WINDOWS ENCLOSURE
- Window hardware.
- Glazing.
1.3 STANDARDS
General
Selection and installation: To AS 2047.
- Building classification: >
To use AS 2047 the building class needs to be nominated as follows:
• Housing: BCA Class 1 and 10.
• Residential: BCA Class 2, 3 and 4.
• Commercial: BCA Class 5, 6, 7, 8 and 9.
See Commentary for a discussion on the Australian Window Association (AWA), AS 2047 and the BCA requirements.
1.4 INTERPRETATION
Definitions
- Louvres:
. Horizontal: Louvres span between frame stiles or mullions.
. Continuous horizontal: Louvres run continuously past, and are supported by, concealed mullions.
. Vertical: Louvres span between frame heads and sills.
- Window: The term “window” used in this worksection also means “louvre grille” and “sliding glass
door”, where applicable.
1.5 INSPECTION
Notice
- Openings prepared to receive windows (where windows are to be installed in prepared openings).
- Fabricated window assemblies at the factory ready for delivery to the site.
- Fabricated window assemblies delivered to the site, before installation.
- Commencement of window installation.
1.6 TESTS
Weighted sound reduction index (Rw) type-tests
Double glazed systems: Interpolation between test results for similar systems is acceptable provided
as follows:
- Dimensional (thickness or width) differences do not exceed a ratio of 1:1.5.
- Each tested system differs from the proposed system by not more than one variable of one of the
following elements:
. Cavity: Width dimension.
. Cavity reveal: Acoustic absorption treatment.
. First panel: Glass type, glass thickness.
. Mounting: Type, seal type.
. Second panel: Glass type, glass thickness.

WINDOWS ENCLOSURE
1.7 SUBMISSIONS
Samples
Submit samples as follows:
- Accessory and hardware items specified descriptively or by performance (i.e. not specified as
proprietary items) including locks, latches, handles, catches, sash operators, anchor brackets and
attachments, masonry anchors and weather seals (pile or extruded).
- Colour samples of prefinished production material (e.g. anodised or organic coated extrusions and
sheet) showing the limits of the range of variation in the selected colour.
- Joints made by proposed techniques.
- Sections proposed to be used for frames, sashes, louvres and slats.
- Tinted, coloured or patterned glass or glazing plastics showing the nominal colour or pattern.
Labelling: Label each sample, giving the brand name and product name, manufacturer’s code
reference and date of manufacture.
Prototypes
Use only for large projects where appropriate. Several prototypes may be required where there are different window systems.
Show the prototype location and extent on the drawings.
Sample installations: Install the designated typical window assemblies in their final position
incorporating at least one example of each component in the system, including attachments to the
structure, flashing, caulking, sealing, glazing, operating hardware, locks and keys.
Required prototypes: >
- Designated window assemblies: >
Samples in prototypes: Required samples may form part of prototypes.
Shop drawings
Submit shop drawings showing the following information:
- Full size sections of members.
- Glazing details.
- Hardware, fittings and accessories.
- Layout (sectional plan and elevation) of the window assembly.
- Lubrication requirements.
- Methods of assembly.
- Methods of installation, including fixing, caulking and flashing.
- Provision for vertical and horizontal expansion.
Subcontractors
General: Submit names and contact details of proposed manufacturers and installers.
Type-test reports
General: Submit type-test reports verifying conformance to AS 2047 and the Window performance
schedule as follows:
- Condensation resistance factor: To AAMA 1503.
- Fire resistance level: To AS 1530.4.
- Thermal resistance: To AAMA 1503.
- Weighted sound reduction index: To AS/NZS 1276.1 or ISO 717-1.
Cited in the BCA for testing of construction required to have a certain Rw. ISO 717-1 is now available as AS/NZS ISO 717.1
(superseding AS/NZS 1276.1).

WINDOWS ENCLOSURE
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
Standards
Flashings: To AS/NZS 2904.
Glass: To AS 1288.
2.2 LOUVRE ASSEMBLIES

Coordinate with the Ductwork worksection, if applicable.
General
Description: Provide metal louvre blades mounted in a metal surround frame or subframe and able to
withstand the permissible-stress-design wind pressure for that location without failure or permanent
distortion of members, and without blade flutter.
Expansion joints
Provide for expansion and contraction in continuous sections (e.g. continuous louvres, interlocking
mullions) at spacings not exceeding those recommended by the manufacturer, or 6 m, whichever is
the lesser.
Adjustable louvres
Description: Provide louvre blades clipped into blade holders pivoted to stiles or coupling mullions,
linked together in banks, each bank operated by an operating handle incorporating a latching device,
or by a locking bar.
Framed adjustable louvres
Description: Provide louvre blades beaded into steel blade surround frames (sash) pivoted to pressed
steel main frames, linked together in banks, each bank controlled by a proprietary sash operator.
Fixed metal louvres
Provide metal louvre blades mounted in a metal surround frame or subframe, installed as for metal
window installations.
Screens
Provide metallic coated steel wire or UPVC mesh screens behind louvres to prevent the entry of
vermin, birds, rodents and wind blown leaves and papers.
AS/NZS 3666.1 clause 2.2.1 makes the provision of screens behind air intake louvres.
2.3 INSECT SCREENS

Aluminium framed screens
Provide aluminium extruded or folded box frame sections with mesh fixing channel, mitred, staked and
screwed at corners. Provide an extended frame section where necessary to adapt to window opening
gear.
- Mesh: Bead the mesh into the frame channel with a continuous resilient gasket, so that the mesh is
taut and without distortion.
Fixed screens
Provide fixed screens to the window frames with a clipping device which permits removal for cleaning.
Hinged screens
Hinge at the top to give access to opening sash.
Roll up screens
Provide a proprietary retractable insect screen comprising aluminium frame with baked enamel finish,
fibreglass mesh beaded into the frame, and a retraction system including tension spring, nylon
bearings, positive self-locking device, and plastic sealing strip at sill.
Sliding screens
Provide a matching aluminium head guide, sill runner, and frame stile sections for screens not part of
the window frame.
- Hardware: Nylon slide runners and finger pull handle. Provide pile strip closers against sash where
necessary to close gaps.

WINDOWS ENCLOSURE
2.4 SECURITY WINDOW GRILLES

General
Description: Provide proprietary metal security grille screens, or operable screen and frame, fixed to
the building structure with tamper resistant fastenings.
Security window grilles: To AS 5040.
Installation: To AS 5039.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
General
General: Install windows so that the frames:
- Are plumb, level, straight and true within acceptable building tolerances.
- Are fixed or anchored to the building structure in conformance with the wind loading requirements.
- Will not carry any building loads, including loads caused by structural deflection or shortening.
- Allow for thermal movement.
Flashing and weatherings
General: Install flashings, weather bars, drips, storm moulds, caulking and pointing so that water is
prevented from penetrating the building between the window frame and the building structure under
the prevailing service conditions, including normal structural movement of the building.
Fixing
Fastener spacing (nominal): 600 mm.
Fasteners: Conceal fasteners.
Packing: Pack behind fixing points with durable full width packing.
Prepared masonry openings: If fixing of timber windows to prepared anchorages needs fastening from
the frame face, sink the fastener heads below the surface and fill the sinking flush with a material
compatible with the surface finish.
Joints
General: Make accurately fitted tight joints so that neither fasteners nor fixing devices such as pins,
screws, adhesives and pressure indentations are visible on exposed surfaces.
Sealants: If priming is recommended, prime surfaces in contact with jointing materials.
Installers
General: Have windows installed by their manufacturer or by a subcontractor recommended by the
manufacturer.
Operation
General: Ensure moving parts operate freely and smoothly, without binding or sticking, at correct
tensions or operating forces and are lubricated.
Protection
Removal: Remove temporary protection measures from the following:
- Contact mating surfaces before joining up.
- Exposed surfaces.
Temporary measures: >
State a particular method here, or delete to leave the choice of method to the contractor.
Trim
General: Provide mouldings, architraves, reveal linings, and other internal trim using materials and
finishes matching the window frames. Install to make neat and clean junctions between frames and
the adjoining building surfaces.
3.2 LOUVRE ASSEMBLIES

Installation
General: Screw fix stiles and mullions to the building structure. Provide weather strips to heads and
sills.
WINDOWS ENCLOSURE
Framed adjustable louvres

Installation: Screw fix the main frame to the building structure with monel or stainless steel screws or
masonry anchors of the type recommended by the louvre manufacturer.
Metal louvres
General: Provide metal louvre blades mounted in a metal surround frame or subframe, installed as for
metal window installations.
Coordinate with the Air grilles worksection, if applicable.
3.3 COMPLETION
Maintenance manual
General: Submit the window manufacturer’s published instructions for operation, care and
maintenance.
4 SELECTIONS
These schedules refer to the selections of product and materials by its properties, including proprietary products, but does not
locate them within the project. For this you should use the designation/type codes or abbreviations to annotate drawings and
schedules.
4.1 WINDOWS
Window construction schedule
Element or part Type or location
A B C
Proprietary suite
Material
Frame type (BCA V1 J2.3b)
Finish
- Anodising
Colour
Thickness grade
- Powder coating
Colour
Type
Glass
- Glazing method
- Glass type, thickness and processing refer to
Glazing selections
Insect screens
- Material and finish
- Mesh type
Specification by proprietary item (manufacturer’s standard door suite), will automatically cover most of the prescriptive items in
this schedule.
Frame Type: e.g. Standard aluminium frame, thermally improved aluminium frame, timber, UPVC, or thermally broken
aluminium frame. The frame type determines the frame factor (BCA Table J2.3b) and is required for the calculation of deemed
to satisfy provisions under J2.3.
Anodising:

WINDOWS ENCLOSURE
• Refer to the Metals and prefinishes worksection.

• Surface texture and finish: The surface texture to be produced on the aluminium before anodising is preferably by agreed
samples. Guidance on surface texture is given in AS 1231 Appendix E. Seven anodised aluminium surfaces are defined,
bright, clear, coloured, dyed, electrolytically coloured, integral colour and matt.
• Thickness grade: Five classes - AA25, AA20, AA15, AA10, AA5 - for environments from the most to the least severe. AA5
should not be used externally.
Powder coating:
• Refer to the Metals and prefinishes worksection.
• AS 3715 sets minimum standards for various performance criteria. Consult with manufacturers if variations are proposed.
Window performance schedule
Quantity Type or location
A B C
Condensation resistance factor, CRF
Fire resistance level, FRL
U-value (thermal transmittance, W/m2.°C)
Solar heat gain coefficient (SHGC)
Weighted sound reduction index, Rw
Weighted sound reduction index: State the required rating to AS/NZS 1276.1. It is advisable to obtain the advice of an acoustic
consultant on the selection of a Rw rating for sound transmission reduction. AS/NZS 1276.1 is cited in the BCA for Rw of forms of
construction.
Condensation resistance factor, CRF: A dimensionless number related to indoor temperature and humidity, and outdoor
temperature.
2
U-value (thermal transmittance, W/m .°C) and solar heat gain coefficient:
Optimised U-value and solar heat gain coefficient (SHGC) can be established using energy modelling software like ACADS-
BSG Beaver/ESP II or Trane Trace. If this modelling is not carried out the specified U-value and SHGC should align with the
values used to calculate building heating and cooling loads.
Manufacturers commonly provide data on Shading Coefficient, which is the ratio of SHGC for a particular glass to the SHGC for
reference glass (3 mm clear). If SHGC is not provided it can be approximated by multiplying Shading Coefficient by 0.88.
Fire resistance level, FRL: State the required level to AS 1530.4, delete or state “not applicable”.
4.2 LOUVRES
Louvre construction schedule
A B C
Proprietary suite
Type
Operation
Material
Blades
- “Z”
- Throated
- 1-Stage
- 2-Stage
Finish
- Anodising
Colour

WINDOWS ENCLOSURE

A B C
Thickness grade
- Powder coating
Colour
Type
Bird screens
- Material and finish
- Mesh type
If the louvres are connected to the air conditioning or ventilation system obtain the value required for the maximum pressure
drop at 2.0 m/s face velocity from the Consultant, and include as a performance requirement.
Type: e.g.Horizontal, continuous horizontal.
Operation: Fixed,
4.3 SECURITY WINDOW GRILLES

Security window grille schedule
Security screen code SS1 SS2 SS3
Type
Material
Finish
Hinges:
- Material
- Fixing
Lock
Security screen code: If there are several different types of security screen grille in the project, give each an SS code
designation (mark) by which it can be referred to in the Security window grille schedule.
Type: Hinged to Type I or II or III. Sliding to Type I, II or III. AS 5039 describes the three types at clause 5.2.
• Type I prevents an arm from passing through.
• Type II allows an arm but prevents bodily entry.
• Type III prevents insects passing through.
Material: Steel or aluminium.
Finish: See AS 5039 clause 6.2 for corrosion protection finishes.
Hinges:
• Material: e.g. Aluminium or steel.
• Fixing: Rivets or fastening devices. See AS 5039 clauses 6.7, and 6.8.
Lock: See AS 5039 clause 6.5. If the manufacturer’s standard lock and hardware are not acceptable, specify non-standard
hardware using the titles of items specified in detail in the Window hardware worksection, or by the designations (trade names,
etc.) of proprietary products.

WINDOW HARDWARE ENCLOSURE
WINDOW HARDWARE
This worksection is applicable to hardware items such as hinges, keys, locks, latches, furniture and window controllers.
• Windows for window manufacturers standard hardware.
• Windows for non-standard window manufacturers hardware.
• Door hardware for any keying requirements.
• None.
• Windows for non-standard window manufacturers hardware.
• Non-standard window manufacturers hardware specified here should be listed in the Windows Selections.
• These schedules refer to the selections of product and materials by its properties, including proprietary products, but does
not locate them within the project. For this you should use the designation/type codes or abbreviations to annotate
drawings and schedules.
• Coordinate with electrical worksections for card key systems, electronic window or lock activating systems including sash
contacts, electric sash strikes, and security hardware generally.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
Provide window hardware in conformance with the Selections.

General
have no overlaps.
- Windows.
- Door hardware.

1.3 INTERPRETATIONS
Abbreviations and definitions
Abbreviation Term Definition
KD Keyed to differ Each lock has a unique key which will operate that lock only.
KA Keyed alike All locks in the group will pass the same key, but that key will
not operate any locks outside the group.
1.4 SUBMISSIONS
Maintenance manual
Submit the manufacturer’s published recommendations for use, care and maintenance of the
hardware provided.
Product warranties
Submit the warranties offered by the manufacturer for the hardware items provided in the works.
Samples
Generic items: Submit samples of hardware items offered as meeting the description of items not
specified as proprietary items.
Particular samples required: >
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 HARDWARE
Hardware specified generically
Provide hardware of sufficient strength and quality to perform its function, appropriate to the intended
conditions of use, suitable for use with associated hardware, and fabricated with fixed parts firmly
joined.
Locks and latches
Performance:
- Durability: >
- Keying security: >
- Physical security: >
Window catches: Provide 2 catches per sash to manually latched awning or hopper sashes over
1000 mm wide.
Provide designations for durability (DW1 or DW2), physical security (SW1 or SW2) and keying security K1 or K2), from
AS 4145.3 clause 1.5. for example DW2SW1K1 for residential use.
Sash operators
Provide sash operators in conformance with the Sash operators schedule.
2.2 KEYING
Contractor’s keys
Master key systems: Do not use any key under a master key system.
Delivery of keys
Conform to the Number of keys table.
Identification
Supply each key with a purpose-made plastic or stamped metal label legibly marked to identify the
key, attached to the key by a metal ring.
Key material
Pin tumbler locks: Nickel alloy, not brass.
Lever locks: Malleable cast iron or mild steel.

Keying system
Provide a keying system in conformance with the Key codes schedule.
Number of keys table
Code Key type Minimum number of keys
KD Locks keyed to differ 2 per lock
KA# Locks keyed alike:
- 2 locks in code group 4
- 3-10 locks in code group 6
- 41 and over locks in code group 1 per 4 locks or part thereof
KA# : Refer to the code groups e.g. KA1, KA2 in the Key code schedule.
Windows
If window locks are included in building key code groups, provide cylinder or pin tumbler locks coded
accordingly.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Fasteners
Materials: Use materials compatible with the item being fixed and of sufficient strength, size and
quality to perform their function.
- Concealed fixings: Provide a corrosion resistant finish.
- Exposed fixings: Match exposed fixings to the material being fixed.
Support: Provide appropriate back support (for example lock stiles, blocking, wall noggings and
backing plates) for hardware fixings.
- Hollow metal sections: Provide backing plates drilled and tapped for screw fixing, or provide rivet
nuts with machine thread screws. Do not use self tapping screws or pop rivets.
Window hardware
Proprietary window systems: Provide the standard hardware and internal fixing points for personnel
safety harness attachment, where required by and complying with the governing regulations.
Operation
Ensure working parts are accurately fitted to smooth close bearings, without binding or sticking, free
from rattle or excessive play, lubricated where appropriate.
Supply
Delivery: Deliver window hardware items, ready for installation, in individual complete sets for each
window set.
- Clearly labelled to show its intended location.
- In a separate dust and moisture proof package.
- Including the necessary templates, fixings and fixing instructions.
3.2 COMPLETION
Adjustment
Leave the hardware properly adjusted with working parts in working order, and clean, undamaged,
properly adjusted, and lubricated where appropriate.
Keys
Contractor’s keys: Immediately before practical completion, replace cylinders to which the contractor
has had key access during construction with new cylinders which exclude the contractor’s keys.
Keys: For locks keyed to differ and locks keyed alike, verify quantities against key records, and deliver
to the contract administrator at practical completion.

Key codes: Submit the lock manufacturer’s record of the key coding system showing each lock type,
number and type of key supplied, key number for re-ordering, and name of supplier.
4 SELECTIONS
locate them within the project. For this you should use the Hardware codes to annotate drawings and schedules.
4.1 SASH HARDWARE

Hinges
Hardware item Window types Hardware code
Proprietary name or generic item:
- Material
- Finish
Sash balances
- Mechanism material/s
- Casing material
- Casing finish
Stays
- Type
- Material
- Finish
Sash lift and pulls

- Type
- Material
- Finish
Handles: e.g. lever handle (generally recommended instead of knobs, for children, the elderly and the disabled - clearance
between the lever handle and the sash face should be between 35 and 45 mm), D-handle.
AS 1428.2 clause 23.4 requires window handles in trafficable areas to comply with door handles in clause 23.3 which in turn
references AS 1428.1.
Sash operators
- Drive mechanism
- Drive material/s


- Casing material
- Casing finish
- Remote controller
Sash operators generally fall into two categories:

• Chain winder: a proprietary device capable of opening and closing a projecting sash by means of a chain retracting into a
winder box fixed to the sill, self locking in all positions, manually operable by a sill mounted winding handle without moving
the internal insect screen.
• Remote control operator: a proprietary device for opening or closing louvres or a projecting sash, in banks if required, by
means of a mechanical linkage manually or power operated from a convenient level, self locking in all positions.
The hardware item ‘Remote controller’ in the schedule is only applicable for remote control operators and may be deleted if not
applicable. The hardware code could reflect the type of sash operator by using SO1, SO2, … for chain winders and SR01,
SR02… for remote control operators.
4.2 LOCKS AND CATCHES

Locks, catches and bolts
- Locking mechanism
- Material
- Finish
Deadlocks are suggested for external windows within 3 m of the ground, for security.
4.3 KEYING
Key codes schedule
Window no. KD KA group code Location
Building code Floor level Space code
and name and name
For pricing purposes at the time of tendering the tenderers should at least be given a schedule showing which KA groups will
apply to the project, and the number of locks (preferably identified by their individual window numbers) in each group. However
it is preferable to provide the full Key codes schedule to tenderers unless this is precluded by security considerations.
Window no.: Give each window a unique number, either corresponding to the space in which the window is located: e.g. G 01/A
and G 01/B would both be windows accessing room G 01; or number windows sequentially (and independently from the
spaces) on each floor. Floor 1 windows: W101, W102, etc. For scheduling purposes it is advisable to provide the space number
and name with the window number, this facilitates the recognition of room usage and hardware type, and is informative when
the hardware schedule is provided (often) for tendering without accompanying plans.

DOORS AND HATCHES ENCLOSURE
DOORS AND HATCHES
This worksection is applicable to conventional door frames of metal and timber with door leaves of timber and various timber
and plastic products. Because of the range of products available, performance requirements and design choices, this
worksection only covers some key generic requirements.
• Windows for metal framed glazed doors forming part of window assemblies.
• Overhead doors for sectional and tilting overhead doors, roller shutters (including fire shutters), grilles and garage doors.
• Windows for door frames which form part of a window/door assembly.
• Door hardware.
• Door hardware.
• Doors and hatches need comprehensive detailing and scheduling beyond the scope of this worksection.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
General: Provide doors, frames, doorsets, security screen doors and fire doorsets as scheduled in
Selections.

General
have no overlaps.
- Windows for door frames which form part of a window/door assembly.

1.3 INTERPRETATION
Definitions
- Balanced construction: A construction of flush doors in which the facings on one side of the core are
essentially equal in thickness, grain direction, properties and arrangement to those on the other side
of the core. It is such that uniformly distributed changes in moisture content will not cause warpage.
- Door frame: Includes jamb linings.
- Doorset: An assembly comprising a door or doors and supporting frame, guides and tracks including
the hardware and accessories necessary for operation.
. Fire-doorset: A doorset which retains its integrity, provides insulation and limits, if required, the
transmittance of radiation in a fire.
. Smoke-doorset: A doorset which restricts the passage of smoke.
- Flush door: A door leaf having two plane faces which entirely cover and conceal its structure. It
includes doors with intermediate rail, cellular, blockboard and particleboard cores.
. Solid core door: A flush door with a solid core continuous between stiles and rails or edge strips
and fully bonded to the faces.
- Joinery door: A door leaf having either stiles and rails, or stiles, rails and muntins, framed together.
A joinery door may also incorporate glazing bars.
. Louvred door: A joinery door in which the panel spaces are filled in with louvre blades.
. Panelled door: A joinery door with spaces filled in with panels including glass.
1.4 INSPECTION
Notice
- Door frames in place before building in to masonry.
- Door frames installed before fixing trim.
1.5 TESTS
Type tests
General: Submit type-test certification complying with the following standards to verify conformance
with the Doorsets performance schedule:
- Fire and smoke doors: To AS/NZS 1905.1 and BCA Spec C3.4.
- Weighted sound reduction index (Rw): To AS/NZS 1276.1 or ISO 717.1.
Fire doorsets
Compliance: Submit a certificate and schedule of evidence of compliance.
Alternative – edit as required.
Compliance: Supply all doors tagged for compliance.
1.6 SUBMISSIONS
General
General: Submit 2 samples as follows:
- Colour range samples from prefinished production material (e.g. anodised or organic coated
extrusions and sheet). When the colour selection has been made, submit 5 sets of samples showing
the colour range.
- Door manufacturer’s standard hardware items.
- Sections proposed to be used for frames, louvres and slats.

Maintenance documentation
Recommendations: Submit manufacturer’s published recommendations for service use.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FRAMES
Aluminium frames
General: To be assembled from aluminium sections, including necessary accessories such as buffers,
pile strips, strike plates, fixing ties or brackets and cavity flashing, with suitable provision for fixing
specified hardware.
Timber frames
- Grade: Select.
- Grade: Select.
Joints: To be as follows:
- Morticed head and through tenons.
- Trenched head:
. Bare faced tenons on jambs.
. Full let-in jambs.
Steel frames
General: To be continuously welded from metallic-coated steel sheet sections, including necessary
accessories such as buffers, strike plates, spreaders, mortar guards, switch boxes, fixing ties or
brackets, and cavity flashing with suitable provision for fixing hardware and electronic security
assemblies, and prefinished with a protective coating.
Finish: Grind the welds smooth, cold galvanize the welded joints and shop prime.
Hardware and accessories: Provide for fixing hardware including hinges and closers, using 4 mm
backplates and lugs. Screw fix the hinges into tapped holes in the back plates.
Base metal thickness:
- General: ≥ 1.1 mm.
- Fire rated doorsets: ≥ 1.4 mm.
- Security doorsets: ≥ 1.6 mm.
Metallic-coated steel sheet: To AS 1397.
- Metallic-coating: Zinc-iron.
2.2 DOORS
Standards
General: To AS 2688 and as follows:
- Decorative laminated sheets: To AS/NZS 2924.1.
- Hardboard and medium density fibreboard: To AS/NZS 1859.4 (Int).
- Medium density fibreboard (MDF): To AS/NZS 1859.2 (Int).
- Particleboard: To AS/NZS 1859.1 (Int).
- Plywood and blockboard for interior use: To AS/NZS 2270.
- Plywood and blockboard for exterior use: To AS/NZS 2271.
- Seasoned cypress pine: To AS 1810.
- Timber – hardwood: To AS 2796.1.
- Timber – softwood: To AS 4785.1.
General
Doors: To be proprietary products manufactured for the exposure to the weather and for the finish
required.

Flush doors
General: To be of balanced construction.
Cellular core and intermediate rail core flush doors:
- Provide a subframe of 25 mm minimum width timber around openings for louvres and glazing.
- Provide additional material to take hardware, fastenings and grooves.
- Cut outs: If openings are required in flush doors (e.g. for louvres or glazing) make the cut outs not
closer than 120 mm to the edges of the doors.
Solid core: Solid flush doors as follows:
- Flush door with blockboard: Core plate of timber strips laid edge to edge, fully bonded to each other
and to facings each side of no less than two sheets of timber veneer.
- Single thickness of moisture resistant general purpose medium density fibreboard.
Smoke doors: To be solid core ≥ 35 mm thick.
Construction
Cut outs: If openings are required in flush doors (e.g. for louvres or glazing) make the cut outs not
closer than 120 mm to the edges of the doors.
Adhesives:
- Internal: To AS/NZS 2270.
- External: To AS/NZS 2271.
Door thickness:
- General: 35 mm.
- External doors and doors over 900 mm wide: 40 mm.
Omit thicknesses if noted in a door schedule.
Edge strips: Fix to stiles. Minimum thickness 10 mm. Increase overall thickness to > 15 mm to
accommodate the full depth of the rebate in rebated doors. Form rebates to suit standard rebated
hardware.
Louvre grilles: Construct by inserting the louvre blades into a louvre frame, and fix the frame into the
door.
Metal louvre door “leaves” are specified in the Windows worksection, which covers a wide range of louvre types including those
designed for inclusion in door frames. Transfer the relevant text to this worksection if required. Louvre grilles fitted to cutouts in
door leaves are often defined in the mechanical specification and enumerated on door schedules.
Double doors
Rebated meeting stiles: Provide rebated meeting stiles or fix equivalent metal “T” stop to one leaf
unless the doors are double acting. Chamfer square edged doors as necessary to prevent binding
between the leaves.
2.3 DOORSETS
Automatic sliding door assemblies
Arrangement: Conform to the Automatic door schedule.
Control systems: Refer to Door hardware.
Duct hatches
General: To be proprietary products comprising metal-faced doors side hung to steel door frames,
inclusive of the necessary hardware and accessories including hinges and lock and lugs or other
suitable means for installation.
Types other than metal are available. If fire resistance is required, specify as a fire-resistant doorset.
Fire-resistant doorsets
Standard: To AS/NZS 1905.1 and BCA Spec C3.4.
AS/NZS 1905.1 is cited in the BCA Spec C3.4. See also its requirements for radiation through glass.
Floor hatches
Frame: Weld from 50 x 50 x 6 mm angle, with two 40 mm cogged fixing lugs each side and shop
prime.

Covers: 6.5 mm chequer plate, with 40 x 40 x 6 mm angle frame welded on all round and 32 x 6 mm
diagonal stiffening flats. Cut, radius and grind off 100 x 25 mm lifting slots in each end of covers.
The member sizes and thickness are typical only. For large hatches the members may need to be heavier, and should be
Revolving doorsets
Arrangement: Conform to the Automatic door schedule.
Control systems: Refer to Door hardware.
Security screen doorsets
Arrangement: Conform to the Security screen doors construction schedule.
2.4 ANCILLARY MATERIALS

Trims
Timber: Solid timber at least 19 mm thick, mitred at corners.
Extruded gaskets and seals
General: To be non cellular (solid) elastopressive seals as follows:
- Flexible polyvinyl chloride (PVC): To BS 2571, 100% solids with high consistency, ultra-violet
stabilised.
- Rubber products (neoprene, ethylene propylene diene monomer (EPDM) or silicone rubber): To
BS 4255.1.
Flashings
General: To be corrosion resistant, compatible with the other materials in the installation, and coated
with a non-staining compound where necessary.
Jointing materials
General: To be compatible with each other and with the contact surfaces and non staining to finished
surfaces. Do not provide bituminous materials on absorbent surfaces.
Nylon brush seals
General: To be dense nylon bristles locked into galvanized steel strips and fixed in a groove in the
edge of the door or in purpose-made anodised aluminium holders fixed to the door with double sided
PVC foam tape.
Pile weather strips
General: To be polypropylene or equivalent pile and backing, low friction silicone treated, ultra-violet
stabilised.
Standard: To AAMA 701/702.
Weather bars
General: Provide a weather bar under hinged external doors, locate under the centres of closed doors.
Type: >
Specify or refer to a detail.
3 EXECUTION
For positioning of changes of floor finishes at doorways, refer to the relevant floor finish worksection in the FINISHES group.
Everything here should be detailed and scheduled. Do not rely on the specification for other than basic requirements. The
installation methods described here are only some of those that may be used (if any) and should be coordinated with what is
drawn.
3.1 FRAMES
General
Frames: Install so that the frames are as follows:
- Plumb, level, straight and true.
- Adequately fixed or anchored to the building structure.
- Will not carry any building loads, including loads caused by structural deflection or shortening.
Aluminium frames
Building in to masonry: Screw galvanized steel brackets twice to jambs and build in.
Fixing to masonry openings: Build-in seasoned timbers plugs to masonry joints or use proprietary
expansion anchors and screw twice through jambs at each fixing.
Fixing to stud frame openings: Screw once to studs at each fixing.
Frame fixing
Brackets: Metallic-coated steel:
- Width: ≥ 25 mm.
- Thickness: ≥ 1.5 mm.
Depth of fixing or building into masonry:
- Brackets: ≥ 200 mm.
- Expansion anchors: ≥ 50 mm.
- Plugs: ≥ 50 mm.
- Rods: ≥ 60 mm.
Heads of fasteners: Conceal where possible, otherwise sink the head below the surface and fill the
sinking flush with a material compatible with the surface finish.
Jamb fixing centres: ≤ 600 mm.
Joints
General: Make accurately fitted tight joints so that neither fasteners nor fixing devices such as pins,
screws, adhesives and pressure indentations are visible on exposed surfaces.
Steel frames
Building in to masonry: Attach galvanized steel rods to jambs, build in and grout up.
Fixing to masonry openings: Build in hairpin anchors and install locking bars, or use proprietary
Fixing to stud frame openings: Attach galvanized steel brackets to jambs and screw twice to studs at
each fixing.
Timber frames
Building in to masonry: Screw galvanized steel brackets twice to jambs and build in.
Fixing to masonry openings: Build-in seasoned timbers plugs to masonry joints or use proprietary
Fixing to stud frame openings: Back screw twice to jambs at each fixing.
Weatherproofing
Flashings and weatherings: Install flashings, weather bars, drips, storm moulds, caulking and pointing
to prevent water from penetrating the building between the door frame and the building structure under
the prevailing service conditions, including normal structural movement of the building.
Finishing
Trim: Provide mouldings, architraves, reveal linings, and other internal trim using materials and
finishes matching the door frames. Install to make neat and clean junctions between the frame and the
adjoining building surfaces.
3.2 DOORS
Priming
General: Prime timber door leaves on top and bottom edges before installation.
3.3 DOORSETS
Security screen doorsets
3.4 COMPLETION
Operation
General: Ensure moving parts operate freely and smoothly, without binding or sticking, at correct
tensions or operating forces and that they are lubricated where appropriate.

Protection
Temporary coating: On or before completion of the works, or before joining up to other surfaces,
remove all traces of temporary coatings used as a means of protection.
4 SELECTIONS
4.1 DOOR TYPES SCHEDULE

Flush doors construction schedule
Property Type or location
A B C
Door type
Thickness (mm)
Core material
Facing material
Face veneers:
- Timber species or group
- Veneer quality
- Matching arrangement
Edge strips:
- Thickness (mm)
Panel:
- Type
- Clear opening size (mm)
Finish
Floor clearance
Door type: e.g. “Solid blockboard core”, “MDF”, “Cellular core”, “Intermediate rail core”.
Thickness: Minimum thicknesses are specified in the Template. Other thicknesses may be specified here if applicable. Most
door lock furniture can not be fitted to doors less than 35 mm thick.
Core material: “Blockboard” or “MDF” (for solid core); “Cellular paper” or “Wood curls” (for cellular core). For intermediate rail
core “To AS 2688” or delete this heading.
Facing: “Hardboard”, “Laminate” or “Plywood”.
Face veneers:
• Veneer quality: e.g. “A” for clear finishes, “B” for opaque.
• Matching arrangement: (clear finishes only) e.g. “Book”, “Centre”, “Diamond”, “Random” or “Slip”.
Edge strips:
• Thickness (mm): State, if thicker than the minimum specified in Template.
Panel: Delete if there are no panels or openings in flush doors. Supply of the metal grilles may be included in the mechanical
services subcontract.
• Type: “Timber louvres”, “Glazed” or “Metal grille”.
• Clear opening size (h x w) (mm): Size and position on the door should preferably be shown on the drawings.
Finish: e.g. a paint or clear finish system, or “Melamine faced” (state colour or pattern).
Floor clearance: For fire-resistant doorsets, AS/NZS 1905.1 requires not less than 3 mm and not more than 10 mm at
clause 5.5.2.

Joinery doors construction schedule

A B C
Door type
Door thickness (mm)
Adhesive bond type
Timber species or group
Timber grade
Finished sizes (mm):
- Top rails and stiles
- Intermediate rails
- Bottom rails
- Muntins
Panels:
- Material
- Thickness (mm)
Finish
Floor clearance
Door type: e.g. “Framed and glazed”, “Framed and panelled”, “Framed, double sheeted”, “Louvred”, “Insect screen door”. Delete
any of the subsequent headings which do not apply to the joinery door types in the project, e.g. if no ledged and braced doors,
delete ledges and braces.
Adhesive bond type: See commentary to Flush doors construction schedule.
Timber grade: Delete if the grades specified in AS 2688 clause 2.1 are acceptable.
Finished sizes (mm): AS 2688 gives minimum sizes. If these are insufficient insert preferred sizes here, or show member
arrangement and sizes on the drawings.
• Door thickness: Minimum thicknesses are specified in the Template. Other thicknesses may be specified here if applicable.
Most door lock furniture can not be fitted to doors less than 35 mm thick. Large glazed doors should be 45 mm thick, or
more.
Panels:
• Material: “Plywood with veneer quality ...”, or “Hardboard” or “Particleboard”, or “Insect screen mesh” (for insect screen
doors) - state mesh type (bronze, aluminium or fibreglass) and fibreglass colour (black or grey).
• Thickness: Delete if the thicknesses specified in AS 2688 clause 9.2.2 are acceptable.
Finish: e.g. a paint or clear finish system.
Floor clearance: For fire-resistant doorsets, AS/NZS 1905.1 requires not less than 3 mm and not more than 10 mm at
clause 5.5.2.
4.2 DOORSETS SCHEDULE

Doorsets performance schedule
A B C
Fire-resistance level, FRL
Weighted sound reduction index, Rw

Security screen doors construction schedule

A B C
Type
Material
Finish
Hinges:
- Material
- Fixing
Lock
Specification by proprietary item (manufacturer’s standard door suite), will automatically cover most of the descriptive items in
this schedule.
Type: Hinged to Type I or II or III. Sliding to Type I, II or III. AS 5039 describes the three types at clause 5.2.
• Type I prevents an arm from passing through.
• Type II allows an arm but prevents bodily entry.
• Type III prevents insects passing through.
Material: Steel or aluminium.
Finish: See AS 5039 clause 6.2 for corrosion protection finishes.
Hinges:
• Material: e.g. Aluminium or steel.
• Fixing: Rivets or fastening devices. See AS 5039 clauses 6.7, and 6.8.
Lock: See AS 5039 clause 6.5. If the manufacturer’s standard lock and hardware are not acceptable, specify non-standard
hardware using the titles of items specified in detail in the Door hardware worksection, or by the designations (trade names,
etc.) of proprietary products.
Fire-resistant doorsets construction schedule
A B C
Automatic closure:
- Action
Edge strips:
- Thickness
Face veneers:
- Veneer quality
- Matching arrangement
Fire resistance level
Glazing
Hardware:
- Item
- Material
- Finish
Specification by proprietary item (manufacturer’s standard door suite), will automatically cover most of the prescriptive items in
this schedule.
Automatic closure: As defined in AS/NZS 1905.1. “Required”, or delete.

• Action: “Hinged”, “Double acting” or “Sliding” (may be shown on the drawings).

Face veneers:
• Veneer quality: e.g. “A” for clear finish, “B” for opaque.
• Matching arrangement: (clear finishes only) e.g. “Book”, “Centre”, “Diamond”, “Random” or “Slip”.
Fire resistance level: State required level to AS 1530.4 (in minutes structural adequacy/integrity/insulation.
Glazing: A non-insulated “Vision panel” up to 65,000 mm² clear opening area is permitted by AS/NZS 1905.1, clause 3.4, but
regulations may override.
Hardware: e.g. Locksets, latchsets, hinges, floor springs and pivots, closers, handles, flush pulls. The hardware is an integral
part of the certified installation (see AS/NZS 1905.1 clause 5.6). Consult the manufacturers. The description may be cross-
referred to items specified in detail in the Door and window hardware worksection. List non-standard hardware here.
Automatic door schedule
Property Type
A B C
Product
Action
Glazing
Frame type
Action: E.g. single sliding panel, bi-parting sliding panels, revolving.

Glazing: Nominate here or refer to Glazing worksection.
Frame type: E.g. nominate an aluminium suite and finish, or frameless.
Refer to Door hardware for door control.

OVERHEAD DOORS ENCLOSURE
OVERHEAD DOORS
This worksection is applicable to sectional and tilting overhead doors, roller shutters (including fire shutters), grilles and garage
doors. Manual and motorised operation are covered.
• Door hardware for manufacturers’ non-standard hardware.
• Door hardware.
• Door hardware.
You should document related work as follows:
• Manufacturers’ standard and non-standard hardware (if specified in Door hardware) should be listed for each Overhead
door type and included in a door and hardware schedule.
1 GENERAL

General
have no overlaps.
- Door hardware for manufacturers’ non-standard hardware.
1.2 STANDARDS
General
Garage doors: To AS/NZS 4505.
1.3 INTERPRETATIONS
Definitions
For the purposes of this worksection the definitions given below apply.
- Cycle: One complete operation from the closed position to fully open and back to closed.

- Roller shutters: The general term referring to Roller doors, Fire resistant roller shutters (or Fire
shutters) and Roller grilles which operate by means of rolling the curtain material over an overhead
drum.
- Roller doors: Roller shutters with a continuous curtain material.
- Fire shutters: Roller doors which have a fire-resistance rating.
1.4 INSPECTION
Notice
- Tracks and guides installed before doors or shutters are hung.
1.5 SUBMISSIONS
Samples
General: Submit 2 samples of each of the following where applicable:
- Colour range samples from prefinished production material (e.g. anodised or organic coated
extrusions and sheet). When the colour selection has been made, submit 5 sets of samples showing
the colour range.
- Door manufacturer’s standard hardware items.
Subcontractors
General: Submit names and contact details for proposed suppliers and installers.
Shop drawings
General: Submit shop drawings showing details of each assembly, component and connection and
information relevant to fabrication, surface treatment and installation for the following:
- Fire shutters.
- Roller doors and grilles.
Type test certification
Fire resistant doorsets: Submit certification from an independent testing authority showing compliance
with the required fire rating.
- Testing authority: >
Acoustic doorsets: If a doorset has a weighted sound reduction index (Rw) rating, submit certification
from an independent testing authority showing compliance with the requirement.
For weighted sound reduction index (Rw) rating, see AS/NZS 1276.1.
- Testing authority: >
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS

Sectional overhead doors
Type: Proprietary system comprising a door of linked horizontal panels hinged together, weather
lapped at the horizontal joint, fitted with rollers running in side tracks fixed to the building structure
which guide the door when opened to a position above and behind the opening, and inclusive of the
manufacturer’s standard operating gear, hardware, and accessories necessary for satisfactory
performance.
Wind loading
General: Install so that the door, in its closed position, withstands pressure on the surface of at least
550 Pa without impairment of its ability to function under ambient temperature.

Panels
General: Form from sheet to standard profiles, or fix to a surround frame. Adapt the bottom panel
where necessary to follow the contour of a sloping floor or threshold. Fit a PVC seal strip.
Side tracks
General: Roll form from galvanized steel sheet. Where necessary to carry door loads without
distortion, reinforce horizontal track sections with a galvanized rolled steel channel.
Counterbalancing
General: Counterbalance the door by a torsion spring system connected to the door by cables of
galvanized steel multi-strand wire rope, or by an equivalent system.
Operation
General: Method of raising and lowering the door:
- Direct manual: By handle attached to the door panel.
- Motorised: Connect the motor to the door through a shock absorbing connecting arm.
Manual operation
General: Install so that the force required to operate the door manually does not exceed 220 N.
Motorised operation
General: Provide electric motor incorporating limit switches, manual safety stop and reversing
mechanism, and overload cutout, operated by a battery-powered radio remote controller (supplied as
part of the system), and also by a direct push-button or key switch. Provide a motorised system which
is capable of manual operation in the event of power failure. Locate operating switch 1500 mm above
floor level.
Automatic safety stop and reversing: >
Sectional overhead doors schedule
Door code SO1 SO2 SO3
Frequency of use (cycles per year)
Action
Panels:
- Panel size (mm)
- Panel material
- Colour
- Frame
- Thickness (mm)
- Perforation
- Windows
Side tracks:
- Thickness (mm)
Wheel hangers and hinges
Wheel rollers
Vertical guides:
- Material
- Size
- Finish
- Fixing method
Mullions:
- Type
- Method of removal
Operation method

Door code SO1 SO2 SO3

Motorised operation:
- Motor capacity
- Speed of curtain travel
- Total travel time:
. Opening
. Closing
Hardware:
- Item
- Material
- Finish
Accessories
Action: i.e. the position of the retracted door. The manufacturer's terms for sectional doors are “Vertical lift”, “High lift”, “Follow
the roof”, etc. The action may be shown on the drawings.
Panels:
• Panel material: e.g. “Steel panels to AS 1397 class AZ 200” (zincalume) with “silicon modified polyester prefinish”
(Colorbond). Timber (redwood), fibreglass, acrylic, mesh, also available. Consult manufacturer.
• Frame: e.g. “Extruded aluminium sections”. Some panels (e.g. fibreglass, acrylic, mesh), require a surround frame. Delete
if not required.
• Perforation: e.g. Louvred openings in steel panels available as an option. Delete if not required.
• Windows: Available as an option in “industrial” type doors.
Side tracks:
• Thickness: e.g. “1.6 mm”.
Wheel hangers and hinges: e.g. “Fabricated from 1.6 (or 2.0) mm galvanized steel”.
Wheel rollers: e.g. “Nylon” or “Ball bearing steel”.
Operation method: e.g. “Direct manual”, or “Motorised”.
2.2 TILTING OVERHEAD DOORS

Tilting overhead doors
Type: Proprietary system comprising a rigid framed door attached to a tilting mechanism which
enables the door to be opened by tilting and retracting into an approximately horizontal overhead
position, and inclusive of the manufacturer’s standard operating gear, hardware, and accessories
necessary for satisfactory performance.
Wind loading
General: Install so that the door, in its closed position, withstands pressure on the surface of at least
the appropriate design wind pressure and not less than 0.55 kPa without impairment of its ability to
function under ambient temperature.
Tilting mechanism
Select from the following
Pivot and spring: Door pivots around jamb-mounted lever arms.
The lower part of the door projects beyond the opening during the operation and remains projecting when open.
Pivot, spring and tracks: Door pivots around jamb-mounted lever arms. Rollers fixed to door head run
in horizontal head tracks.
The lower part of the door projects beyond the opening during operation but is retracted almost completely in the open position.
The regulatory authority may not permit the door to project into public space beyond the site boundary.
Door frame
Type: Rigid braced frame capable of resisting the structural design actions without distortion in both
vertical and horizontal positions.
Steel frame: Fabricate from metallic-coated steel sheet.

Timber frame: Ledged framed and braced timber sections.

Operation
General: Method of raising and lowering the door:
- Direct manual: By handle attached to the door panel.
- Motorised: Connect the motor to the door through a shock absorbing connecting arm.
Manual operation
Motorised operation
floor level.
Tilting overhead doors schedule
Door code TO1 TO2 TO3
Mechanism type
Jambs:
- Material
- Size (mm)
- Fixing
Steel door frame:
- Member sizes (mm)
Timber door frame:
- Grade
- Member sizes (mm):
. stiles
. rails
. muntins
. braces
Door cladding:
- Material
- Finish
- Thickness (mm)
Vertical guides:
- Material
- Size (mm)
- Finish
- Fixing method
Mullions:
- Type
- Method of removal
Operation method
- Motor capacity

Door code TO1 TO2 TO3

. Opening
. Closing
Hardware:
- Item
- Material
- Finish
Accessories
Mechanism type: e.g. “Pivot and spring”, “Pivot, spring and tracks”.
Jambs: The manufacturer may supply proprietary steel jambs for spring controlled mechanisms.
• Fixing: Slamming of heavy doors can loosen fixing in masonry joints. Grout block cores solid at jambs. Reinforce mortar
joints. Specify galvanized bolts built in, or masonry anchors.
Steel door frame: and Timber door frame: Delete one, or delete both and specify another type (e.g. aluminium).
Door cladding: Consult the manufacturers for the range of materials and constructions available, e.g. timber boarding, plywood,
galvabond steel sheet, aluminium, fibreglass, expanded mesh.
Operation method: e.g. “Direct manual”, or “Motorised”.
2.3 ROLLER SHUTTERS

Types
Roller door: Proprietary system comprising a flexible continuous curtain sliding between vertical
guides, raised or lowered by rolling or unrolling around a horizontal drum (barrel) mounted above the
opening, inclusive of the manufacturer’s standard operating gear, hardware, and accessories
necessary for satisfactory performance.
Fire shutters:
- Standard: To AS 1905.2.
Roller grille: A roller shutter in which the curtain consists of a grille of horizontal members spaced apart
and connected by vertical links.
Wind loading
General: Install so that the shutter, in its closed position, withstands pressure on the surface without
impairment of its ability to function under ambient temperature.
Pressure: >
Pressure: e.g. 600 Pa for external shutters (AS 1905.2 Appendix A). 550 Pa for steel shutters generally is suggested by
Australian Industrial Door Manufacturers and Traders Association. Higher loadings will apply to cyclonic areas.
Curtain
Continuous curtain: A single metal sheet pressed to a horizontal ribbed profile.
Slatted curtain: A curtain of horizontal interlocking slats, incorporating interlocking hinges extending
the full width of the curtain.
Bottom curtain rail: A stiffening member interlocking with the bottom edge or lowest slat of the curtain,
extending between the inner faces of the vertical guides, formed or adapted where necessary to follow
the contour of a sloping floor or threshold. The rail may also be adapted to house the locking device.
Wind locks
General: Wind lock end clips and guides to retain the curtain in wide openings or under extreme wind
conditions.
Drum
Drum deflection: 1/360th of the span (maximum).
Springs: Helical torsion springs housed in the drum and arranged to counterbalance the curtain weight
without exceeding the safe working stress of the spring material.
Operation
Method of raising and lowering the curtain:

- Direct manual: By handles attached to the bottom curtain rail.

- Hand stick manual (high openings): By a “boathook” type pole supplied with the installation.
- Chain manual: By pulling on a chain passing over a sprocket on the drum, with reduction gears
where necessary.
- Crank handle manual: By a removable crank handle inserted into a gearbox mounted above the
opening.
- Motorised: If a wicket is fitted to the shutter, provide a limit switch device to prevent motor operation
until the wicket and frame are clear of the curtain.
Manual operation
Motorised operation
If an automatic safety stop and reversing mechanism is required, vary accordingly.
floor level.
Wickets
General: Doors side-hung on the vertical guide, to interlock with the closed curtain, consisting of a
metal frame covered to match the curtain, and provided with the manufacturer’s standard lockset and
furniture.
Roller door types schedule
schedules.
Door code RS1 RS2 RS3

Curtain type
Curtain material
Curtain finish
Continuous curtain:
- Thickness (mm)
Curtain end material
Bottom curtain rail:
- Form
- Material
- Size
- Finish
Slats:
- Material
- Size
- Finish
Perforations:
- Size
- Pattern
Panes:

Door code RS1 RS2 RS3

- Material (mm)
- Thickness
- Colour
Slat end pieces:
- Material
- Frequency
Vertical guides:
- Material
- Size (mm)
- Finish
- Fixing method
Mullions:
- Type
- Method of removal
Drum:
- Material
- Size (mm)
- Finish
- Brackets:
. Material
. Finish
. Fixing
Operation method
- Motor capacity
. Opening
. Closing
Hardware:
- Item
- Material
- Finish
Accessories
Wicket:
- Size of opening
Specification by proprietary item (manufacturer's standard door suite), will automatically cover most of the prescriptive items in
this schedule.
Frequency of use: Shutters should be specially designed if intended for medium to high frequencies. Domestic installations are
normally low frequency (less than 1500 cycles per year).
Curtain type: “Continuous” or “Slatted”. Curtains can be perforated, and slatted curtains may contain translucent, clear or
coloured plastic sheet inserts fixed into the perforations. Show perforation patterns on the drawings, or refer to the
manufacturer's standard pattern.
Curtain material: e.g. “Steel sheet to AS 1397 clause Z 200 or AZ 200”.
Curtain finish: e.g. “Silicon modified polyester prefinish” (Colorbond), or “Vinyl prefinish” (Marviplate) “on outside only”.

Continuous curtain:
• Thickness: e.g. “0.50 mm”.
Curtain end material: Usually nylon low friction wear pad. Special “windlock” end pieces locking into vertical guides are available
with some types. Obtain manufacturer's recommendations.
• Form: e.g. “Box section”, “Tee section”, “Paired angles”. Specify special requirements, e.g. housing shoot bolts or locksets.
• Material: Usually extruded aluminium or rolled metallic-coated steel.
• Finish: Usually as for curtain.
Slats:
• Material: e.g. “Extruded (or roll-formed) aluminium” or “Roll-formed steel sheet” (usually metallic-coated to AS 1397).
Timber slats are available.
• Size: Slat width and material thickness.
• Finish: Aluminium usually colour anodised, metallic-coated steel may be prepainted or primed.
Perforations: If required state size and pattern, or refer to manufacturer's standard pattern, or “As shown on the drawings”.
Panes: If required, state material (e.g. PVC or acrylic sheet), thickness (e.g. 1.5 mm), and colour if any.
Slat end pieces: Usually nylon. Special “windlock” end pieces locking into the vertical guides are available with some types.
Obtain manufacturer's recommendations.
• Frequency: e.g. “Every fourth slat” or “Each alternate slat”.
Vertical guides:
• Material: Extruded aluminium or rolled steel. Some have PVC strip inserts. Special deep “high wind” guides available with
some types.
• Finish: Usually as for curtain or grille.
• Fixing method: Some types have concealed fixings.
Mullions: Delete if not required.
• Method of removal: e.g. “Lift out”, “Hinge up”, “Sliding”, “Winch operated”.
Drum:
• Material: Usually steel or aluminium. PVC available with some roller door types.
• Size: State diameter and thickness of tube.
• Finish: Steel may be galvanized and/or prime painted.
• Brackets:
Material: e.g. “Fabricated from mild steel sections or plate” or “.... from pressed steel sheet”, or “Cast iron”.
Finish: May be galvanized and/or prime painted.
Fixing: e.g. “Not less than two M 10 bolts galvanized to AS 1214, passing through (or embedded in) the wall” or (in timber
framing) “Three 10 mm diameter coach screws galvanized to AS 1214”.
Operation method: e.g. “Direct manual”, “Hand stick manual”, “Chain manual”, “Crank handle manual”, “Motorised”.
Motorised operation: e.g. “Direct push-button”, “Key switch”, “Radio remote controller”, etc.
• Motor capacity: If necessary state capacity in kW and whether single or three phase.
Hardware: e.g. handles, shoot bolts, locksets. List the manufacturer's standard hardware required. Specify special non-standard
hardware using the titles of items specified in detail in the Door hardware and Window hardware worksections, or by the
designations (trade names, etc.) of proprietary products.
Accessories: Manufacturer's standard or optional items, e.g. nylon running strips (for continuous curtain), sponge rubber or
multi-fin weather strips on bottom curtain rail, draught excluding strips in vertical guides, resilient strips on bottom curtain rail.
Wicket: For roller shutters. Not available on all types. Consult manufacturer. Full-size outward opening exit doors are available
with some types.
The location should be shown on the drawings. Avoid placing it on the same side as the chain and electrical operating gear,
where it may cause obstruction. Avoid using gates on windlocked shutters. Specify or show left hand or right hand opening as
viewed from the inside.
• Size of opening: e.g. “1200 x 600 mm” (roller doors and grilles), “1700 x 600 mm” (roller doors).

Fire shutters schedule

Fire shutter code FS1 FS2 FS3
Fire resistance level
Finish:
- Curtain slats
- Slate end pieces
- Vertical guides
- Bottom rail
- Barrel mechanism
- Hauling chains
Operating mechanism:
- Motor capacity
Hardware:
- Item
- Material
- Finish
Specification by proprietary item (manufacturer's standard door suite), will automatically cover most of the prescriptive items in
this schedule.
Fire resistance level: State required level in minutes to AS 1530.4, e.g. “120/120/10”. AS 1530.4 is widely cited in BCA 96.
Finish: e.g. “Metallic-coated to AS 1397 class Z 200 or AZ 200” for slats (or other components made from sheet), “Galvanized
after fabrication to AS/NZS 4680” for other articles, and/or “Shop primed for the painting system specified”.
Operating mechanism: Automatic operation in the event of fire is mandatory. Specify here the type of operation for normal
service, e.g. “Manual by lifting handles”, (for geared chain drive), or “3 phase electric motor with limit switches, emergency hand
chain and safety switch”.
Motor capacity: e.g. “0.75 kW”, “1.12 kW”.
Hardware: e.g. Handles, bolts, locks. The hardware is an integral part of the certified installation. Consult the manufacturers.
The description may be cross-referred to items specified in detail in the Door hardware and Window hardware worksections. List
non-standard hardware here.
Roller grilles schedule
Door code RG1 RG2 RG3
Horizontal grille members:
- Material
- Size (mm)
- Finish
Links:
- Material
- Finish
- Locating
- Spacing and pattern
Sleeves:
- Material
- Finish
Panes
End pieces

Door code RG1 RG2 RG3

- Form
- Material
- Size (mm)
- Finish
Vertical guides:
- Material
- Size (mm)
- Finish
- Fixing method
Mullions:
- Type
- Method of removal
Drum:
- Material
- Size
- Finish
- Brackets:
. Material
. Finish
. Fixing
Operation method
- Motor capacity
. Opening
. Closing
Hardware:
- Item
- Material
- Finish
Accessories
Wicket:
- Size of opening
Horizontal grille members:

• Material: Steel or aluminium rods or tubes.
• Size: Usually 12 or 10 mm diameter.
• Finish: e.g. “Colour (or clear) anodised” for aluminium. If the horizontal members are sleeved, the finish will be on the
sleeve.
Links:
• Material: e.g. “Nylon” (state colour) or “Die cast zinc”.
• Locating: By rivetting to the horizontal member, or by sleeve spacers. The sleeves and links may be integral.
• Spacing and pattern: e.g. 200 mm centres in “brick bond”, or “As shown on the drawings”.
Sleeves:

• Material: e.g. “Aluminium tube”, or “Nylon tube”.

Panes: (Some types only) e.g. “Continuous clear PVC sheet”.
End pieces: e.g. “Nylon, every tube end”.
• Form: e.g. “Box section”, “Tee section”.
• Finish: Usually as for grille members.

DOOR HARDWARE ENCLOSURE
DOOR HARDWARE
This worksection is applicable to hardware items such as hinges, keys, locks, latches, furniture and door controllers. General
provisions of this kind would apply mainly as default requirements for items specified only by generic terms without particular
prescriptive or performance requirements. Hardware specified as proprietary items (permitted by most public works authorities)
will have the quality or performance characteristics of the selected item.
• Room dividers for operable walls and folding doors.
• Doors and hatches.
• Overhead doors.
• Overhead doors often come supplied with their own standard proprietary hardware and is specified in Overhead doors. Any
non-standard hardware should be specified here and listed in the Overhead doors Selections.
• Door seals are specified in Doors and hatches.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
General: Provide door hardware in conformance with Selections.
Handing: Before supply, verify on site, the correct handing of hardware items.
Hardware specified generically: Provide hardware of sufficient strength and quality to perform its
function, appropriate to the intended conditions of use, suitable for use with associated hardware, and
fabricated with fixed parts firmly joined.
Operation: Ensure working parts are accurately fitted to smooth close bearings, without binding or
sticking, free from rattle or excessive play, lubricated where appropriate.
Supply
Delivery: Deliver door hardware items, ready for installation, in individual complete sets for each door,
as follows:
- Clearly labelled to show its intended location.
- In a separate dust and moisture proof package.
- Including the necessary templates, fixings and fixing instructions.

General

have no overlaps.
- Window hardware.
- Doors and hatches for door types.
- Overhead doors for door types.
- Room dividers for operable walls.
1.3 INTERPRETATIONS
Abbreviations and definitions
General: For the purposes of this worksection the abbreviations and definitions given below apply.
Abbreviation Term Definition
KD Keyed to differ Each lock has a unique key which will operate that lock
only.
KA Keyed alike All locks in the group will pass the same key, but that
key will not operate any locks outside the group.
MK Master keyed The master key will operate all the locks in the MK
group, in addition to their KD or KA keys.
GMK Grandmaster keyed The grandmaster key will operate all the locks in the
group, in addition to their KD, KA or MK keys.
GGMK Great Grandmaster keyed The great grandmaster key will operate all the locks, in
addition to their KD, KA, MK or GMK keys.
MAIS K Maison keyed The key to each occupancy unit or room will not
operate the lock of another occupancy unit, but will
operate the lock of a shared door. e.g. Main entry door,
service room or space.
The Abbreviations and definitions subclause can be edited to suit the project or deleted if not required.
1.4 SUBMISSIONS
Samples
Generic items: Submit samples of hardware items offered as meeting the description of items not
specified as proprietary items.
Particular samples required: >
Key control system: Submit details of the proprietary key control security system proposed by the lock
manufacturer for locks required to accept a group key (master, grandmaster, etc.).
Subcontractors
Automatic door operators: Submit names and contact details of proposed supplier and installer.
Pressure floor mat: Submit names and contact details of proposed supplier and installer.
Maintenance
Automatic door operators: Submit the installer’s proposal for continuing maintenance after completion
on an annual renewal basis.
Manual: Submit the manufacturer’s published recommendations for use, care and maintenance of the
hardware provided
Product warranties
Consult or negotiate with manufacturers for warranty terms, and specify only such terms as are actually available.

Automatic door operators: Submit a warranty (or interlocking warranties) from the supplier and installer
for the system and its installation, for a period of at least twelve months from the date of practical
completion.
Hardware: Submit the warranties offered by the manufacturer for the hardware items provided in the
works.
Record documents
Door hardware schedule: Submit an amended schedule, prepared by the door hardware supplier,
showing changes to the contract door hardware schedule caused as follows:
- By the approval of a hardware sample.
- By the acceptance of an equivalent to a specified proprietary item.
- By a contract variation to a door hardware requirement.
Keys
Key codes: Submit the lock manufacturer’s record of the key coding system showing each lock type,
number and type of key supplied, key number for re-ordering, and name of supplier.
Keys: For locks keyed to differ and locks keyed alike, verify quantities against key records, and deliver
to the contract administrator at practical completion.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 HINGES
Butt hinge sizes
General: Conform to Hinge table A and Hinge table B (not applicable to cupboard doors), in which
length (l) is the dimension along the knuckles, not including hinge tips, if any, and width (w) is the
dimension across both hinge leaves when opened flat.
- Steel, stainless steel, brass, bronze butt hinges for timber doors in timber or steel frames: To Hinge
table A.
- Aluminium hinges for aluminium doors, or for doors of other materials in aluminium frames: To
Hinge table B.
Hinge materials
Aluminium hinges: High tensile aluminium with fixed stainless steel pins in nylon bushes, and with
nylon washers to each knuckle joint.
Doors fitted with closers: Provide low friction bearing hinges.
Brass hinges: For brass hinges used for door leaves exceeding 30 kg or door leaves controlled by
door closers, provide bronze or stainless steel washers to each knuckle joint.
Hinge pins
Exterior or security doors opening out: Provide fixed pin hinges or security hinges.
Hinge table A
Nominal hinge size Door leaves not exceeding any of the following
l x w x t (mm)
Mass (kg) Width (mm) Thickness (mm)
70 x 50 x 1.6 16 620 30
85 x 60 x 1.6 20 820 35
100 x 75 x 1.6 30 920 40
100 x 75 x 2.5 50 920 50
100 x 75 x 3.2 70 1020 50
125 x 100 x 3.2* 80 1220 50
* Non standard to special order only.
Door mass is the criterion for hinge size. 16 kg covers light screen doors; 35 kg covers standard size (2040 x 820 mm) hollow or
cell core doors; 40 kg covers standard size solid core doors, and standard size aluminium frame glazed doors; 68 kg covers
2700 x 900 mm solid core doors up to 40 mm thick; and 100 kg covers solid core doors up to 2700 x 1200 x 45 mm. Power
transfer hinges for use with electric locks are non load bearing, and should only be used in addition to compatible hinges.

Hinge table B
Nominal hinge size Door leaf not Minimum construction
l x w x t (mm) exceeding mass (kg)
Knuckles Screws/hinge leaf
100 x 70 x 3 30 3 3
100 x 80 x 3.5 50 5 4
130 x 50* x 3.4 75 Interfold 3
* Interfold (Fast fix) surface mounted.
Number of hinges
Follows the principle that height and width are criteria as well as mass.
Fire doors: To AS/NZS 1905.1.
Other door leaves: Provide 3 hinges for leaves between 2040 mm and 2340 mm high, and 4 for door
leaves between 2340 mm and 3050 mm high. Provide at least 3 low friction bearing hinges for door
leaves controlled by door closers.
Small door leaves: Door leaves not exceeding any of the following may have 2 hinges each:
- 2040 mm high.
- 820 mm wide.
- 30 kg mass.
Wide throw
General: If necessary, provide wide throw hinges to achieve the required door swings in the presence
of obstacles such as nibs, deep reveals and architraves.
2.2 DOOR HANGING SYSTEMS

General
General: Provide sliding door tracks in conformance with the Sliding track schedule.
2.3 LOCKS AND LATCHES

Bolts
General: Provide bolts including barrel bolts, flush bolts and tower bolts with keepers, including lock
plates, staples, ferrules or floor sockets.
Furniture
General: Provide lock and latch furniture suitable for use with the lock or latch to which it is installed
with the corresponding level of performance.
Mechanical locksets
Performance:
- Durability: >
- Physical security: >
Provide designations for durability (D 1 to D 3), physical security (S 1 to S 3) and keying security (K 1 to K 6), from AS 4145.2
clause 1.5.
Mortar guards
General: For steel door frame installations, provide mortar guards designed to enable the full
extension of the lock tongue or similar devices and the correct operation of the locking mechanism.
Padlocks
Performance:
- Corrosion resistance: >
Five grades of corrosion resistance are available, C 1 to C 5 (see AS 4145.4 Table 1.1).
- Durability: >
Three grades of durability are available, D 1 to D 3 (see AS 4145.4 Table 3.1).


Six grades of keying security are available, K 1 to K 6 (see AS 4145.2).
- Security: >
Ten grades of security are available, SP 1 to SP 10 (see AS 4145.4 Table 3.1).
An example of padlock classification might be: SP 7-K 6-D 2-C 3.
The SP 7K 6D 2C 3 code denotes a padlock with highly physical and keying security, relatively high corrosion resistance but
maximum durability, perhaps used in an exterior application of a storage area where valuable goods must be protected and the
frequency of operation is small.
Rebated doors
General: For mortice locks or latches to rebated doors, provide purpose-made rebated pattern items.
Strike plates
General: Use strike plates provided with the locks or latches. Do not provide ‘universal’ strike plates.
2.4 DOOR CONTROLLERS

Automatic door operators
Description: Provide complete automatic door operators for opening and closing doors, including door
hanging (hinges, pivots or sliding gear) and electrical connection to distribution board.
Consult manufacturers to ascertain which options are available.
- Access key switch: >
‘Required’ or delete. Nominate arrangements for high security restricted keying.
- Automatic activation options: >
For example:
• Button: Push button.
• Mat: Pressure floor mat or underfloor induction mat.
• Microwave detector.
• Passive infra red beam.
• Radar: Radar or radio inflector.
• Safety light beam: Photo-electric cells, one at 200 mm maximum height above finished floor, and one between 600 and
1000 mm above finished floor.
• Switch: Proximity or touch switch on door.
• Ultrasonic detector.
- Electric locking: >
‘Required’ or delete.
- Manually adjustable function: >
For example:
• Angle: Opening angle of pivoted and hinged doors.
• Dampening: Dampening of opening and closing action.
• Speed: Opening and closing speeds.
• Time: Holding (stay open) time. With mats, holding time is normally limited to the duration of contact.
• Width: Opening width of sliding doors.
- Operation mode: >
For example:
• Automatic: Normal automatic operation.
• Exit only: Automatic opening from inside only. Doors held closed against entry from outside.
• Hold closed: Hold doors closed with power or braking device.
• Hold open: Open doors and hold open without damage to motor.
• Switch off: Doors return to closed position for locking.
- Power failure: >
For example:

• Auto backup: A system to provide a minimum of 100 normal operations during mains power failure and automatic reset
upon resumption of supply.
• Manual: Doors may be opened and closed manually with an operating force of not more than 110 N.
• Spring closed: Doors may be opened manually but spring closed.
• Stay open: Doors open automatically and stay open.
Installation: Provide necessary recesses and cores, grout in components where required, and make
good. Provide cover plates for access to units in door heads, frames or transoms.
Automatic adjustable function: If the door opening angle or width is manually set below the maximum
possible, under conditions of continuous traffic the doors must automatically creep to full opening,
returning to reduced opening on the next cycle.
Fire rated door closers
General: Provide closers tested and certified for use as components of fire door assemblies.
Performance
Door controllers specified generically: Provide door controllers, including door closers, floor or head
spring pivots and automatic door operators, which are suitable for the door type, size, weight and
swings required and the operating conditions, including wind pressure.
Pressure floor mats
Description: Automatic door activating system consisting of a mat which when deflected by foot
pressure operates a switch which activates the door or doors.
Mounting: >
For example:
• Flush: Set in recess to finish flush with finished floor, with fixing trim and sealant.
• Surface: Set on finished floor with fixing trim and sealant.
• Under carpet: Under carpet in place of underfelt.
• Under paving: Set in floor recess before laying finished paving.
Radio remote door controllers
Consult the manufacturers for available options, and vary as necessary. Offered as a standard option by many garage door or
shutter manufacturers. 12 month warranties are available.
Description: Provide a device, comprising a radio receiver and separate transmitter, for activating a
motorised door operator so as to open and close the door by remote radio signal.
Key switch: If there is no separate access to the enclosure, provide a key switch mounted externally
for opening and closing the door from outside the enclosure without the transmitter. Provide two keys.
Light: Provide an internal light which any signal to the receiver also switches on and which remains on
for not less than two minutes and switches off automatically.
Receiver: House within a wall unit incorporating a push-button switch permanently illuminated. Mount
within the enclosure and connect to power.
Transmitter: Portable battery-powered unit sending a coded signal effective up to not less than 12 m
from the receiver.
2.5 KEYING
Refer to Electronic security in ELECTRICAL for card keys.
Contractor’s keys
Master key systems: Do not use any key under a master key system.
Delivery of keys
Great grandmaster, grandmaster and master keys: Arrange for the manufacturer or supplier to deliver
direct to the principal.
Number of keys: Conform to the Number of keys table.
Group keying
Keying system: Provide a group keying system in conformance with the Key codes schedule.
Existing system: Obtain the details of existing group or master key systems to which a new system is
required to be an extension.

Future extensions: Provide master and grandmaster group keying systems which are capable of
accommodating future extensions.
- Extensions to existing system: >
‘Required’ or delete.
Keying control security system: If cylinder or pin-tumbler locks accept a group key (e.g. master key,
maison key) provide to those locks a proprietary keying control security system.
Stamping: Stamp keys and lock cylinders to show the key codes and/or door number as scheduled.
Identification
General: Supply each key with a purpose-made plastic or stamped metal label legibly marked to
identify the key, attached to the key by a metal ring.
Key material
Lever locks: Malleable cast iron or mild steel.
Pin tumbler locks: Nickel alloy, not brass.
Number of keys table
Code Key type Minimum number of keys
GGMK Great grandmaster keys 2
GMK Grandmaster keys 2
MK# Master keys 2 per code group
KD Locks keyed to differ 2 per lock
KA# Locks keyed alike:
- 2 locks in code group 4
- 41 and over locks in code group 1 per 4 locks or part thereof
Code groups e.g. MK 2, KA 4 and per lock.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Door hardware
Mounting heights: Mount locks and latches so that the centreline of the door knob or lever spindle is
1000 mm above finished floor.
Proprietary doorsets: Provide the standard hardware.
Door stops
Fixing: Fix on the floor, skirting or wall, as appropriate, to prevent the door or door furniture striking the
wall or other surface.
Floor fixing code: >
Skirting fixing code: >
Fasteners
Materials: Provide materials compatible with the item being fixed, and of sufficient strength, size and
quality to perform their function.
- Concealed fixings: Provide a corrosion resistant finish to concealed fixings.
- Exposed fixings: Match exposed fixings to the material being fixed.
Security: Locate exposed fixings to lock furniture on the inside faces of external doors and on the
inside faces of internal doors to lockable rooms.

Support: Provide appropriate back support (for example lock stiles, blocking, wall noggings and
backing plates) for hardware fixings.
- Hollow metal sections: Provide backing plates drilled and tapped for screw fixing, or provide rivet
nuts with machine thread screws. Do not use self tapping screws or pop rivets.
Floor springs
General: Form a recess in the floor slab for the floor spring box and grout the box in place so that the
cover plate is flush with the finished floor.
Hinges
Metal frames: Fix hinges using metal thread screws.
Timber doorsets: Install butt hinges in housings equal in depth to the thickness of the hinge leaf
(except for hinges designed for mounting without housing), and fix with countersunk screws.
3.2 COMPLETION
Adjustment
General: Leave the hardware properly adjusted with working parts in working order, and clean,
undamaged, properly adjusted, and lubricated where appropriate.
Automatic door operators: Maintain and adjust the system throughout the defects liability period.
Keys
Contractor’s keys: Immediately before practical completion, replace cylinders to which the contractor
has had key access during construction with new cylinders which exclude the contractor’s keys.
4 SELECTIONS
4.1 HINGES
Hinges schedule
Hardware item Door types Hardware code
Proprietary name or generic
term:
- Material
- Finish
Application: e.g. Timber doorsets.

Type: e.g. Stainless steel butt hinge with fixed pin.
4.2 DOOR HANGING SYSTEMS

Sliding track schedule
Proprietary name or generic term
- Type
- Finish
4.3 LOCKS AND LATCHES

Locks, latches and bolts schedule
- Locking mechanism:
- Material
- Finish

Type: e.g. Vestibule, Passage, Exit, Gate latch, Padlock. Deadlocks are suggested for external doors, for security.
Care should be taken to comply with the deemed to satisfy provisions of the BCA at Clause D 2.21 for the operation of latches
in or forming part of a required exit, and at D 2.22 for locking and re-entry from fire isolated exits.
Child-proof catches should be considered for medicine cabinets and the like.
Crashbars schedule
- Material
- Finish
4.4 DOOR CONTROLLERS

Door controllers schedule
Proprietary name or generic
term:
- Closers
- Pivots
- Automatic door operators
- Pressure floor mats
Nominate from the template list plus method of operation e.g. surface-mounted door closer, hold-open, radio remote controller.
Check options with manufacturers.
Electrical schedule
- Type
- Finish
Electrical: e.g. card key, status indicators.
4.5 ANCILLARY HARDWARE

Coat hooks schedule
- Material
- Finish
Handles and plates schedule

- Material
- Finish

Handles: e.g. lever handle (generally recommended instead of knobs, for children, the elderly and the disabled - clearance
between the lever handle and the door face should be between 35 and 45 mm), D-handle, crash-bar.
Plates: e.g. push, pull, kick (indicate size).
Stops and stays schedule
- Material
- Finish
4.6 KEYING SCHEDULE

Key codes schedule
Door no. KD KA MK GMK GGMK Maison
group group group group keyed, to
doors
numbered
For pricing purposes at the time of tendering the tenderers should at least be given a schedule showing which groups will apply
to the project, and the number of locks (preferably identified by their individual door numbers) in each group. However it is
preferable to provide the full Key code schedule to tenderers unless this is precluded by security considerations.
Door no.: Either give each door a unique number corresponding to the space to which the door gives access: e.g. G 01/A and
G 01/B would both be doors accessing room G 01; or number doors sequentially (and independently from the spaces) on each
floor. Floor 1 doors: D 101, D 102, etc. For scheduling purposes it is advisable to provide the space number and name with the
door number, this facilitates the recognition of room usage and hardware type, and is informative when the hardware schedule
is provided (often) for tendering without accompanying plans.
Maison keyed: Used for common areas such as laundries used by occupants of individual flats. It reduces cylinder security of
six pin cylinders due to the additional shear lines created. In the Maison keyed: column, the entries are the door numbers of the
doors whose keys will operate the lock of the door in the Door no.: column. Key stamping is not required as no individual keys
are supplied for Maison keyed doors.
GMK: There can be more than one GMK group, whether or not there is also a GGMK group.
Key codes schedule entries
In the KD and KA, MK, GMK and GGMK group columns:
- Any entry, including *, means that the lock is a member of that key code type.
- The entry * means the lock is a member of the key code type, but that code stamping is not
required.
- Any other entry is the code required to be stamped on key and cylinder.
Maison keyed: In the Maison keyed: column, the entries are the door numbers of the doors whose
keys will operate the lock of the door in the Door no.: column. Code stamping not required.

GLAZING ENCLOSURE
GLAZING
This worksection is applicable to glazing in framed openings to windows, doors and curtain walls based around AS 1288, and to
glass products such as shower screens and mirrors.
• Structural glazing for adhesive fixed glazing.
• Glass blockwork for glass blockwork.
• Partitions – glazed for glazed internal partitions.
• Applied wall finishes for glass lining to sheeted partitions.
• Windows.
• Glazed balustrades as proprietary items or complete assemblies.
• Curtain walls.
• Joinery.
• Metalwork.
• Show glass types as part of a window schedule to your office documentation policy.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
Selections: Conform to the Schedules.
CROSS REFERENCES
General
have no overlaps.
>

GLAZING ENCLOSURE
• Windows.
1.2 STANDARDS
Glass type and thickness: To AS 1288, where no glass type or thickness is given. For values to be
used for permissible stress design, multiply the ultimate limit state design wind pressure derived from
AS/NZS 1170.2 by 0.67.
Quality requirements for cut-to-size and processed glass: To AS/NZS 4667.
Terminology for work on glass: To AS/NZS 4668.
1.3 INSPECTION
Notice
Inspection: Give sufficient notice so that the glass products may be inspected before they are
installed.
Nominate items to be inspected .Hold points, if required, should be inserted here.
1.4 SUBMISSIONS
Samples
Submit samples, each at least 200 x 200 mm, showing specified visual properties and the range of
variation, if any, for each of the following types of glass or glazing plastics:
- Tinted or coloured glass or glazing plastics.
- Surface modified or surface coated glass.
- Patterned or obscured glass or glazing plastics.
- Ceramic coated glass.
- Wired glass.
- Mirror glass.
Edit as required.
Design
Certification: Submit an engineers’ certificate confirming compliance with AS 1288.
Shop drawings
Method of glazing, including the following:
- Rebate depth.
- Edge restraint.
- Clearances and tolerances.
- Glazing gaskets and sealant beads.
Insulating glass units (IGUs) to AS/NZS 4666: Submit a report from an independent testing authority
accredited by the Insulating Glass Certification Council (USA), showing that the unit type has attained
Class A as defined in ASTM E774 when tested to ASTM E773.
Ceramic-coated spandrel glass: Submit a report certifying that the glass meets the Fallout Resistance
Test requirements of ASTM C1048.
Noise reducing glazed assemblies: Submit a certificate from an independent testing authority showing
that the glazed assemblies comply with the specified weighted sound reduction index (Rw).
For weighted sound reduction index (Rw) rating, see AS/NZS 1276.1 or ISO 717.1 both cited in the BCA for testing of
construction required to have a certain Rw. ISO 717-1 is now available as AS/NZS ISO 717.1 (superseding AS/NZS 1276.1).

GLAZING ENCLOSURE
Installation
Glass manufacturer’s data: Submit statements from the manufacturers of the required glass types,
certifying that the method of glazing and the sealants, materials, and conditions next to the glass
comply with the following:
- Will not be detrimental to the long term structural performance, weathering capabilities and visual
qualities of the glass.
- Are compatible with the edge seal of insulating glass units (IGUs).
- Will not cause delamination or other impairment to laminated glass during the service life of the
curtain wall system.
Opacified glass: Submit a statement by the manufacturer certifying that the proposed method of
opacifying the glass will not be detrimental to the glass or detract in any way from the glass product
warranty.
Glazier’s data: Submit the glazing subcontractor’s statement certifying that the assembled frame
provides for the required glazing clearances and tolerances and maximum and minimum joint
configurations, having regard to the bow, warp and kink characteristics of the required glass types,
and is ready for glazing.
Site glazing: If site glazing is intended, submit proposals.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GLASS
Glass types
Classification and description: To BS 952-1.
Glass and glazing materials
Glass and glazing materials generally: Free from defects which detract from appearance or interfere
with performance under normal conditions of use.
Glazing plastics: Free from surface abrasions, and warranted by the manufacturer for 10 years against
yellowing or other colour change, loss of strength and impact resistance, and general deterioration.
Glass tolerances
Size, squareness and flatness: To AS/NZS 2208.
Plate and sheet (i.e. not patterned):
- Roller wave: Maximum 0.15 mm.
Float glass quality
Glazing Select Quality q3 to ASTM C1036.
Bullet-resistant glazing panels
Classification: >
These are defined in AS/NZS 2343 as follows:
• Class G0 – resistant to attack by a 9 mm military parabellum hand gun.
• Class G1 – resistant to attack by a 357 magnum hand gun.
• Class R1 – resistant to attack by a 5.56 mm rifle.
• Class S0 – refer to Appendix B Table B1.
• Special class – refer to Appendix B Table B1.
Panel materials: >
The standard allows any combination of glass or plastic. If particular materials are required, say so here.
Panel opacity: >
i.e. transparent or opaque.

GLAZING ENCLOSURE

Safety glasses
Type: Grade A when used in curtain walls.
Heat soaking: Required for toughened glass in curtain walls.
Ceramic coated glass
Heat strengthened or toughened glass with a coloured ceramic coating fused to and made an integral
part of the surface: To ASTM C1048, Condition B.
Opacified glass
Glass with an opacifier permanently bonded to the inner face.
Unacceptable blemishes in heat-treated flat glass (including tinted and coated glass)
Standard: To ASTM C1048.
Annealed glasses schedule
Generic term Integral properties Location(s)
Clear float, general quality Glazing generally
(i.e. if not otherwise shown or
specified)
Body tinted float Colour
Surface modified float Colour
Surface coated (reflective) float % reflectance
Base glass
Base glass colour
Plate, polished, clear
Plate, polished, body tinted Colour
Plate, polished, twin ground
Sheet, clear
Sheet, body tinted Colour
Patterned, clear Pattern
Patterned, body tinted Pattern
Colour
Wired cast (clear) Pattern
Wired cast (body tinted) Pattern
Colour
Wired polished (clear)
Wired polished (body tinted) Colour
The maker’s brand name is often the best way to identify tinted, reflective, and patterned glasses.
Location(s): e.g. window designation. Identify the glazed openings on the drawings by a code, e.g. W (1, 2, etc.) for windows, D
(1, 2, etc.) for doors, and use the code symbols to locate the glass types in this schedule; or use separate schedules provided in
the Windows and Doors and hatches worksections.
Clear float, general quality: “General” and “silvering” are two qualities of float.
Body tinted float:
• Colour: Consult manufacturer - grey, bronze, green, blue.
Surface modified float: Consult manufacturer.

GLAZING ENCLOSURE
Surface coated (reflective) float: The reflective film may be available on either clear or body tinted float. Consult manufacturer.
Plate, polished, clear: Now rare, superseded by float. Twin ground plate is used where uniform thickness and parallel surfaces
are important (e.g. large mirrors).
Sheet, clear: No longer made in Australia. Some imported sheet may be available.
Patterned: Also known as “cast” or “figured rolled”. Proprietary patterns best described by the manufacturer’s brand name.
Patterns include “diffuse reflection” (“picture glass”).
Wired cast (body tinted): Do not use body tinted wired (cast or polished) in locations exposed to the sun; fracture may result.
Processed glasses schedule
Generic term Glass type (base glass) and Location(s)
other properties
Mirrors Clear float, silvering quality
Mirrors, venetian silvered Clear float, silvering quality
Obscured glass Type
Process
Texture
Heat strengthened Base glass
Base glass colour
% reflectance
Toughened safety Base glass
Base glass colour
% reflectance
Safety organic coated
Glass type (base glass): The glass to which the process is applied. Any of the above annealed glasses may be processed; for
availability, consult manufacturer.
Mirrors: Float is the most common glass type, but the process can be applied to any flat glass, and to polycarbonate sheet.
Obscured glass:
• Process: e.g. “Sandblast obscuring”, “Acid etching”. For terminology and other processes, see AS/NZS 4668.
• Texture: The terms fine, medium, coarse may be used.
Heat strengthened:, Toughened safety: and Safety organic coated: In principle any annealed glass may be used as the base
glass.
Fabricated glass units schedule
Generic term Glass types (constituent Location(s)
glasses) and other properties
Laminated safety glass External sheet
Internal sheet
Intermediate sheet (if any)
Interlayer type
Interlayer thickness
Laminated security Ballistic attack resistance
Glass types (constituent glasses): In principle any of the above annealed and processed glasses may be used; consult
manufacturers for combinations actually available.
Laminated safety glass:
• Interlayer: May be coloured, reflective, etc. Consult manufacturer.

GLAZING ENCLOSURE
Laminated security: See AS/NZS 2343 for transparent, opaque and translucent panels (glass or plastics).
• Ballistic attack resistance: See AS/NZS 2343 clause 4 for classifications.
Special glasses schedule

Generic term Properties Location(s)
Flashed or pot glass Type
Colour
Structural glass (opaque Colour
coloured)
Ceramic coated glass Base glass
Ceramic coating colour
Opacified glass Base glass
Opacifier material
Flashed or pot glass:

• Type: Either “flashed” (a layer of colour on clear glass) or “pot” (the whole thickness is tinted) or both.
Glazing plastics schedule
Generic term Properties Location(s)
Polycarbonate sheet Type
Abrasion resistance
Combustion resistance
Acrylic sheet Type
Reinforced polyester sheet Type
Surface treatment
Mass/unit area
Polycarbonate sheet:
• Type: e.g. “transparent”, “translucent”, “opaque”.
• Abrasion resistance: and Combustion resistance: Consult manufacturer.
Acrylic sheet: and Reinforced polyester sheet: For types and properties consult manufacturer.
2.2 GLAZING MATERIALS

General
Glazing materials (including putty, glazing compounds, sealants, gaskets, glazing tapes, spacing
strips, spacing tapes, spacers, setting blocks and compression wedges): Appropriate for the
conditions of application and the required performance.
Jointing materials
Provide recommended jointing and pointing materials which are compatible with each other and with
the contact surfaces and non staining to finished surfaces. Do not provide bituminous materials on
absorbent surfaces.
Glazing tapes
Standards: To AAMA 800, Products coded 804.3, 806.3, 807.3, as applicable.
Elastomeric sealants
Sealing compound (polyurethane, polysulphide, acrylic):
- Single component: Type II, Class A.
- Multi component: To ASTM C920.
Sealing compound (silicone):

GLAZING ENCLOSURE
- Single component: Class A.

- Multi component: To ASTM C920.
Sealing compound (butyl): To ASTM C1311.
Glazing compounds: To AAMA 802.3 (Types I or II), or 805.2, as applicable.
Narrow joint seam sealer: To AAMA 800, Products coded 803.3.
Exterior perimeter sealing compound: To AAMA 800.
Non drying sealant: To AAMA 800.
Expanded cellular glazing tape: To AAMA 800.
Very high bond pressure sensitive tapes: To ASTM D897, ASTM D1002, ASTM D3330M,
ASTM D3652M, ASTM D3654M, and ASTM D3715M.
Elastomeric sealants schedule
Sealant type Material Location or function
Very high bond adhesive tape schedule

Tape type Material Location or function Dimensions
Pile weather strips

Standard: To AAMA 701/702.
Location: >
Materials: Polypropylene or equivalent pile and backing, low friction silicone treated, ultra violet
stabilised.
Finned type: A pile weather seal with a central polypropylene fin bonded into the centre of the backing
rod and raised above the pile level.
Type: Non cellular (solid) elastopressive seals.
Location or function: >
Material:
BS 4255-1.
- Flexible polyvinyl chloride (PVC): To BS 2571, E type compounds, colour fastness grade B.
Priming
Apply the recommended primer to the surfaces in contact with sealant materials.
Movement joints
Foamed materials (in compressible fillers and backing rods): Closed-cell or impregnated types which
Bond breaking: Provide backing rods, and other back-up materials for sealants, which do not adhere
to the sealant.
2.3 MIRRORS
Reflective surface
Type: Silver layer deposited on the glass or glazing plastic.

GLAZING ENCLOSURE
Protective coatings: Electrolytic copper coating at least 5 µm thick, and 2 coats of mirror backing and
edge sealing paint having a total dry film thickness of at least 50 µm.
Venetian silvered mirror (one way vision glass): 15 mm wide silvered strips alternating with 3 mm wide
clear strips.
Mirrors schedule
Designation M1 M2 M3
Location
Size (mm)
Mirror type
Processing
Fixing
Size: Check AS 1428.1 for disabled persons facilities.
2.4 INSULATING GLASS UNITS (IGUS)

Consult manufacturers for available combinations. If the units are intended for noise reduction, it may be necessary to specify a
weighted sound reduction index (Rw) rating for the assembly. See AS/NZS 1276.1.
Standard
Selection and installation: To AS/NZS 4666.
Location(s) >
Performance
Unit shading coefficient: >
Unit U-value: >
Visible light transmittance (%): >
Solar transmittance (%): >
Reflectivity:
- Inner: >
- Outer: >
Weighted sound reduction index (Rw): >
Components
Outer pane: >
Inner pane: >
State glass type, thickness colour.
Gas filling type: >
e.g. “Air”, “Argon”, “Krypton”, “Sulfur hexafluoride (SF6)”. The latter is a heavy gas used to enhance acoustic performance. It is
also a very potent greenhouse gas.
Coatings schedule
Type Location
Type: e.g. “Solar reflective” or “Low emissivity”. Delete if no coating required.

Location: State which surface of which pane is to be coated.

GLAZING ENCLOSURE
2.5 PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION

Safety glazing materials
Identify each piece or panel, to AS 1288.
Noise reducing glazed assemblies
Label each panel with a legible non-permanent mark, self-destroying when removed, stating and
certifying the Rw rating, and identifying the testing authority. Remove when directed.
Bullet-resistant panels
Marking: To AS/NZS 2343.
Curtain wall glazing
Permanently mark tempered or reflective coated glass, identifying strength grade, manufacturer and
orientation.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 GLASS PROCESSING

General
Processing: Perform required processes on glass, including cutting, obscuring, silvering and bending.
Form necessary holes, including for fixings, equipment, access holes and speaking holes. Process
exposed glass edges to a finish not inferior to ground arrised.
Glass processing schedule
Glass element Location Type of process Finish
Glass element: e.g. “Mirrors”, “Shelves and divisions”, “Sliding glass doors”.
Type of process: For example:
• Edge finishes: Arris, flat, round, bullnose, etc. Ground arrised edges are most common. Edges of louvre blades are usually
“rubbed” or “ground”.
• Bevelling: Plain, mitre, feather edge, double, etc. Specify a width for plain and feather. Finish is usually polished.
• Finger slots: Specify size, e.g. “65 x 20 x 3 mm”.
• Finish: Smooth ground or polished.
• Obscuring: Sandblast obscuring, emery obscuring, acid embossing.
• Various finishes: See BS 952-2, or consult glass merchant.
• Safety marking: As recommended in AS 1288 clause 5.1 note 6.
3.2 INSTALLATION
General
General: Install the glass so that:
- Each piece is held firmly in place by permanent means which enable it to withstand the normal
loadings and ambient conditions at its location without distortion or damage to glass and glazing
materials.
- Building movements are not transferred to the glass.
- External glazing is watertight and airtight.
Temporary marking: Use a method which does not harm the glass. Remove marking on completion.
Toughened glass: Do not cut, work, or permanently mark after toughening. Use installation methods
which prevent the glass making direct contact with metals or other non-resilient materials.
Heat absorbing glass: In locations exposed to direct sunlight, provide wheel cut edges free from
damage or blemishes, with minimum feather.

GLAZING ENCLOSURE
- Edge grinding or arrising: Wet process, using grit no coarser than 120 – 180. Do not work across
the edge from surface to surface.
- Temporary marking: Remove before installation.
Frameless installations: Join the vertical edges of adjacent glass panels with silicone jointing
compound.
Preglazing
Window assemblies and glazed doors: Supply inclusive of glazing, shop preglazed unless preglazing
is impracticable.
Curtain walls: Supply inclusive of glazing, shop preglazed.
Glazing method
Minimum dimensional requirements (mm):
- Edge clearance: >
- Edge cover: >
- Front clearance: >
- Back clearance: >
Vision panels: Install so that they are to be removable from:
>
External timber framed glazing: Glaze with putty.
3.3 FIXING MIRRORS

The worksection gives four examples of fixing methods. Select one, or vary to suit the design.
Screw fixing
Direct to wall plugs with dome-headed chromium-plated screws in each corner and at 900 mm
maximum centres around perimeter. Provide polyethylene sleeves and washers to prevent contact
between screw and glass. Do not over-tension the screws.
Frame fixing
In wet or moist areas the space behind the mirror should be either well ventilated or entirely sealed.
General: Proprietary aluminium frames to mirror perimeter, corners mitred. Bed glass edges in a
continuous resilient gasket. Attach the frame to the substrate with concealed screw fixings. Seal the
frame to the substrate with paintable sealant which will not react with the mirror coating. Do not allow
the sealant to contact the mirror back.
Finish: >
Colour of frame: >
Bead fixing
Rebated timber beads to mirror perimeter, corners mitred. Bed glass edges in a continuous resilient
gasket. Screw fix the beads to the substrate.
Clip fixing
Direct to wall plugs with chromium-plated fixed clip and spring clip fixings at 900 mm maximum centres
around perimeter. Provide polyethylene or cork washers to prevent contact between clips and mirror
back.
3.4 GLAZED SHOWER SCREENS

Type
Proprietary system comprising frames of extruded aluminium, stainless steel, or PVC, assembled
around safety glass to form fixed panels and sliding, hinged or pivoted doors.
Shower screen systems
Dimensions (mm): >
Frame type: >
“Extruded aluminium”, “PVC”, “Stainless steel”.
Door type: >
“Sliding”, “Hinged”, “Pivot”. State if more than one door leaf.
Glass type: >

GLAZING ENCLOSURE
“Laminated” or “Toughened”. See AS 1288 clause 5.12 Framing of doors and panels. Specify colour and pattern if required.
Processing: >
Hardware: Pull handles on both sides of sash, or of leading sash in multiple sash arrangements.
Specify if different from the Template.
Water shedding
Provide an assembly which sheds water to the inside without retaining it on the frame surfaces. Seal
the edge of the frame to adjoining surfaces with a resilient strip.
Sliding assemblies
Hanging: Hang the sliding sash on stainless steel or nylon sheaves on overhead channel track formed
in the frame head, and fit nylon or equivalent bottom guides.
Hardware: Pull handles on both sides of sash, or of leading sash in multiple sash arrangements.
3.5 COMPLETION
Warranties
Delete this subclause if glass and glazing materials are covered by a comprehensive window or curtain wall warranty, or if
material performance is, for the purposes of the project, sufficiently covered by consumer protection legislation.
General: Submit a warranty, signed by the glazing subcontractor, undertaking to repair or replace
glass and glazing materials which, within the warranty period, become defective or prove unsuitable
for the specified application; provided that the manufacturers’ recommendations for the maintenance
of the material have been followed during the warranty period.
Glass manufacturer’s warranty: An undertaking, conditional only on compliance with the
manufacturer’s recommendation for installation and maintenance, to supply replacement glass units to
the site for replacement of defective units defined as follows:
- IGU units: Units in which the hermetic seal has failed as evidenced by intrusion of foreign matter, or
internal condensation at temperature above 2°C.
- Coated glass units (including coated SIG units): Units in which the metallic coating shows evidence
of manufacturing defects, including but not necessarily limited to cracking or peeling, as determined
in accordance with ASTM C1048.
Toughened glass warranty: The manufacturer’s warranty certifying that toughened glass supplied for
use in curtain walls has been subjected to a heat soaking process which has converted at least 95%
of the nickel sulphide content to the stable beta-phase.
Maintenance manual
Submit manufacturers’ published recommendations for service use.
Cleaning
Replace damaged glass and leave the work clean, polished, free from defects, and in good condition.
4 SELECTIONS
schedules.
4.1 GLAZING
Glass types schedule
A B C
Glass type
Glass property
- Total U-value
- SHGC
Glass type: As nominated in Products

GLAZING ENCLOSURE
Glass properties:
• Total U-value of the transparent or translucent element in each glazing element.
• SHGC: Solar heat gain coefficient of the transparent or translucent element in each glazing element.
These properties together with the frame factor (BCA Table J2.3b) are required for the calculation of deemed to satisfy
provisions under J2.3.

STRUCTURAL GLAZING ENCLOSURE
STRUCTURAL GLAZING
This worksection is applicable to the installation of structural silicone glazing. It covers glazing systems using a glazing method
in which the glass is adhered to the framing system with a structural sealant. The central standard for this worksection is
AAMA CW-13 (Structural sealant glazing systems).
• Windows for window frames.
• Glazing for glass.
• Curtain walls or Windows.
• Glazing.
• None.
• None.
• Indicate the extent of work on drawings to your office documentation policy.
1 GENERAL

General
have no overlaps.
- Curtain walls.
Or Windows.
- Glazing.
1.2 STANDARD
Structural glazing
General: Comply with the recommendations of AAMA CW-13.

AAMA CW-13 gives guidance on glass, framing, sealants and adhesives.
1.3 INTERPRETATION
Definitions
AAMA CW-13 defines three structural glazing system types – the all-glass, the strip-window and the total-wall.
- Structural glazing: A glazing method in which the glass is adhered to the framing system with a
structural sealant.
- Structural sealant: Structural adhesive sealants or tapes.
1.4 SUBMISSIONS
Design
Structural design: Submit calculations showing that the structural glazing system has been designed
to the following:
AAMA CW-13 offers testing to ASTM E330 as an alternative to calculations. Vary if required.
- Provide a structural sealant bite adequate to restrain the glass at the ultimate limit states design
wind pressure.
- Provide for thermal movement between abutting glass edges by an adequate “working joint” design
with the necessary clearances and dimensions to the sealant manufacturer’s recommendations.
- Limit the working stress of sealants to 138 kPa, and the working stress of pressure sensitive tapes
to 230 kPa.
Sealant manufacturer: Submit sealant manufacturer’s statements of the following:
- Certifying that the adhesive bond of the structural sealant has been satisfactorily tested on a contact
surface of the actual framing system.
- Quoting the test values obtained.
- Stating the quality of the adhesive bond.
- Giving detailed recommendations for the application of the sealant, including maximum and
minimum joint configurations, clearances and dimensions.
- Giving recommended procedures for factory and site glazing and site reglazing.
- Stating requirements for primers (if any).
- Endorsing the structural design calculations submitted.
- Certifying that the sealant is not detrimental to the long term structural performance, weathering,
and visual quality of the materials and components with which it is associated in the structural
glazing system.
Laminated units: Submit joint statements from the sealant manufacturer and the units manufacturer
certifying that the sealant will not cause delamination, or visual impairment of the laminate.
Insulating glass units (IGUs) to AS/NZS 4666: Submit joint statements from the sealant manufacturer
and the units manufacturer certifying that the sealant is compatible with the edge seal of the units.
Installation
Subcontractor: Submit sealant manufacturer’s statement certifying that the subcontractor is qualified to
apply the structural sealant and is experienced in its use.
Site glazing: If site glazing is proposed, submit the sealant manufacturer’s certification that the
structural sealant applicator is sufficiently experienced and qualified to perform site application of the
sealant.
Deglazing: If site deglazing of structural glazing is required, submit proposals for site reglazing.

2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
Structural sealant
Type: A proprietary product of an established manufacturer, recommended for use as a structural
glazing sealant.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 TESTS
Site adhesion tests
Testing authority: The structural sealant manufacturer.
Tests: Perform hand-pull tests on sealant specimens on units glazed on the site selected at the rate of
the following:
- One unit in the first 10.
- One unit in the next 40.
- One unit in the next 75.
- One unit in each 100 thereafter.
Repair of sealant: After testing, replace the sealant in the test area.
Report: If the test criteria have not been met, state what remedial action is recommended.
Structural glazing tests
Shop glazed units: Submit details of a test deglazing procedure, or a panel bond strength test
procedure.
Sealant: Type test to ASTM C1087, to demonstrate compatibility with the other materials and
accessories of the structural glazing system which it may contact.
3.2 INSTALLATION
Structural glazing
General: Install in accordance with the sealant manufacturer’s recommendations.
Glass support: Provide setting blocks and edge blocks compatible with the sealant.
Setting blocks: Not required for four-sided support stopless systems, factory glazed in a horizontal
position, and fully cured before handling.
Mechanical fixing: >
If mechanical fixing is required in addition to the structural sealant, either show the requirement on the drawings or state here
“Required at ...” (e.g. “head and sill”).
Glass
Ensure that the surfaces of glass used in structural glazing do not deviate from a true plane to the
extent that the recommended maximum and minimum joint configurations are exceeded.
Advise of tolerances here, if any.
Records
Throughout the contract maintain a logbook recording the following:
- A code reference identifying each structural glazed unit and its location in the building.
- The production lot numbers of the structural sealant used on each unit.
- The units subjected to field adhesion tests, and the test results.
- Site glazed or reglazed units, if any.
3.3 SITE GLAZING

General
Site glazing: Do not site glaze unless the design provides for full independent support of the glass until
the structural sealant has fully cured.

Temporary support: Provide for independent support of the glass until the structural sealant has fully
cured.
3.4 SITE REGLAZING

In refurbishment work, these clauses may be used in amended form for required reglazing. Schedule here or show on the
drawings.
Deglazing
Procedure: Do either of the following:
- Remove the entire structural sealant and weatherseal without damaging the coated metal substrate.
- If consistent with the sealant manufacturer’s recommendations for reglazing, leave a continuous
sealant film 2 mm thick on the substrate. Completely remove other residues.
Reglazing
Cleaning and degreasing: Immediately before reglazing clean and degrease the substrate as
recommended in AAMA CW-13, except that original sealant substrates need not be degreased
provided reglazing immediately follows deglazing.
Locating: Mechanically locate the replacement panel in its final position using temporary fixings which
do not interfere with the application and curing of the new sealant beads. Leave the temporary fixings
in place until the end of the sealant cure period.
Sealing: Insert backing rods as necessary to separate structural sealant and weatherseal and where
applicable to protect the seal of insulating glass units (IGUs). Apply the structural sealant and
weatherseal.
Making good: On completion of the reglazing refix cover strips, attachments, trim, permanent
mechanical restraints and other items removed as part of the deglazing and reglazing processes, and
make good or replace damaged items.
3.5 COMPLETION
Maintenance manual
If the structural silicone glazing system is part of a curtain wall, delete this clause. This material is covered in Curtain walls.
General: Submit a manual of maintenance procedures for the satisfactory long-term care and regular
maintenance of the structural silicone glazed installation, including:
- An outline description of the installation and detailed description of specific items with product
names, types and serial numbers.
- Recommended maintenance periods and planned preventive maintenance procedures.
- Copies of manufacturers’ warranties or guarantees, service manuals, brochures and
recommendations.
- Copies of test and approval certificates.
- A copy of each shop drawing, work-as-executed drawing, and the like relevant to the installation.
- A list of replacement parts recommended to be held on site, with the names of suppliers.
- Periodic field adhesion tests, including deglazing of some panels, at 2 – 3 year intervals.
- Procedures for deglazing and reglazing.
Log book: Include in the manual log book pages set up for recording the times of performance of the
above procedures, sufficient in number to receive the entries for three years. Show examples of
typical entries by recording maintenance procedures (such as cleaning) performed during the contract
and defects liability periods.
Refer to the General requirements section Operation and Maintenance Manual. If the project is under the jurisdiction of The
Council of the City of Sydney refer to “Structural Silicone Glazing Monitoring Programme” (The Council of the City of Sydney,
1992).

GLASS BLOCKWORK ENCLOSURE
GLASS BLOCKWORK
This worksection is applicable to three types of fully framed glass block (or brick) installation:
• Mortar-jointed which can take high wind loads and is permanent, so is suited to exposed installations. Panels can be large,
and are rigid - resilience under loads derives from perimeter expansion joints.
• Fire-rated which has the same properties as the mortar-jointed system but offers a one-hour fire rating, with limited panel
size.
• Sealant-jointed which can be used for demountable interior partitioning, and for smaller external windows, is resilient under
load, has thinner joints (and consequently better light transmission) and avoids wet trades.
All three might be used in a single project, and so they are dealt with separately to avoid confusion. There is no central
standard.
• Concrete worksections for reinforced concrete frames.
• Brick and block construction and Light steel framing for openings in walls.
• Brick and block construction, Light steel framing and Light timber framing for lintels over.
• Structural steel for channel mullions and transoms.
• Light steel framing and Metalwork for steel frames.
• Doors and hatches for aluminium frames.
• None.
• Show on the drawings elevations, sections and details.
• This worksection assumes full design by the principal’s consultants, and no design by the contractor. Accordingly, wind
loads, acoustic ratings, thermal performance and the like are not provided. Nor are related completion tests such as for
sound transmission loss, heat gain and so on.
1 GENERAL

General
have no overlaps.
>

1.2 STANDARDS
General
Glass blocks: To DIN EN 1051-1, or JIS A5212.
There is no Australian, British or US standard for glass blocks. Many are imported from Germany and Japan and are made to
the standards cited here. Another draft German standard for glass block walling is DIN EN 12725.
1.3 INSPECTION
Notice
- Frame and expansion jointing installed, before reinforcing.
- Perimeter and vertical reinforcing installed, before placing mortar and blocks.
1.4 SUBMISSIONS
Samples
Glass blocks: For blocks not specified by reference to brand, submit 2 blocks of each type showing
size, colour, design and pattern of faces.
Accessories: Where not specified by reference to brand, submit samples of reinforcing, fasteners,
expansion materials and sealant.
Type tests
Standard: AS 1530.4.
Fire-rated panels: Submit type-test certificates.
Manufacturers’ instructions
General: For blocks not specified by reference to brand, submit manufacturer’s instructions.
Manufacturers’ warranties
Manufacturers’ warranties: Submit copies.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MORTAR-JOINTED PANELS

Consult manufacturers. Consider deflection of lintels over - panels cannot support building loads. Maximum deflection of
structural members supporting glass block panels must not exceed L/600. Curved walls can be built (requiring curved frames) -
radii depend on block size.
Prefabricated fully framed panels are available. See also the Commentary.
Perimeter
Frames:
Assumes 100 mm wide blocks. 75 x 40 x 6 mm for 80 mm wide blocks. Weck allows aluminium or steel channels. Some
systems use proprietary frames.
- Size: 100 x 50 x 6 mm.
- Material: Aluminium channel.
- Prefinish: >
e.g. galvanized after cutting, welding and drilling, for steel; anodising or powder coating for aluminium.
- Fixing: 10 mm masonry anchors with galvanized washers.
e.g. Dynabolts.
- Drainage: Drill holes in web of sill channel.
Consider size, spacing, location e.g. outer half.
Expansion jointing and sill channel lining: 10 mm (minimum) x width of the channel rebate.
If necessary, increase thickness to accommodate expansion or deflection of the structure – the panel must be isolated from
these sorts of loads.
- Type: Compressible non-ageing board of: >
e.g. Polystyrene foam, premoulded high density glass fibre, foamed synthetic rubber, or polyethylene foam.
Glass blocks
Type: Hollow.
Solid blocks are available from some manufacturers.
Size (mm): >
A wide range of sizes is available, including 115 x 115 x 80 mm, 145 x 145 x 95 mm, 190 x 190 x 95 mm, 115 x 240 x 80 mm,
145 x 300 x 95 mm, 300 x 300 x 95 mm, from NEG. 190 x 190 x 80 mm, 190 x 190 x 100 mm, 197 x 197 x 80 mm, 197 x 197 x
100 mm, 240 x 240 x 100 mm, 300 x 300 x 100 mm from Weck. Channel sizes and other details will depend on the block size –
100 mm width is assumed in the Template.
Design: >
Surface texture or pattern (some terms seem to be widely understood, others are manufacturer-specific), colour (e.g. clear,
tinted, opaque on one face), light transmission.
Edges: >
e.g. polyvinyl butyral coating, for better bonding and to provide expansion capability for each block, as provided by Pittsburgh
Corning. Or, white latex based paint, as provided by Weck, which advises that edge colour must match mortar and, if not white,
paint must be stripped and re-applied in the correct colour. Or, sand textured unpainted.
Colour: >
Specials: >
Specials are available for corners, ends of walls, and so on. Bullet-resistant blocks are available.
Mortar
Cement: Slow setting Portland cement with low shrinkage.
- Type to AS 3972: GP.
- Colour: >
White for white joints.
Hydrated lime: To AS 1672.1.
Delete if lime is not used.
- Type: High calcium, or pressure-hydrated dolomitic lime if > 92% of active ingredients are hydrated.
Sand: Clean sharp river mineral sand, salt free, no admixtures, no iron compounds.
- Grading: 100% passing 4 mm screen, minimum 80% passing 2 mm, 30% passing 1 mm, maximum
5% passing 0.25 mm.
- Colour: >
White for white joints.
Water: Clean, potable.
Mortar and pointing mix by volume (cement:lime:sand): 1:0.25:3. As dry as practicable.
- Compressive strength (minimum): 12 MPa at 28 days.
- Anti-freeze and accelerators: Not permitted.
- Integral water repellent: Stearate type.
Pigments: Powder oxides.
- Colour: >
Reinforcement: 4.5 – 6 mm diameter, in lengths to suit full width or height of panel, as appropriate.
Or, 2 parallel 4 mm diameter wires at 40/50 mm centres (depends on block thickness) with electrically welded cross-wires at
200 mm intervals, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. For large panels or panels subject to high wind loads, consult the
manufacturer and/or consulting engineer – larger rods (e.g. 8 mm) may be needed (affecting joint thickness, to maintain
clearance). Full length, to avoid laps.
- Corrosion resistance: Galvanize after fabrication.

Could be stainless steel in marine or other corrosive environments. Corrosion resistance of panel anchors, if used, should
match reinforcing.
Finish
Applied water repellent: Water based silane sealer type.
Delete if integral water repellent used in the mortar.
Sealant: Non-setting non-staining waterproof silicone.
Or urethane, or polysulphide.
- Colour: >
- Backing rod: Open cell PVC foam, 16 mm diameter.
Or, polyethylene foam, neoprene, glass fibre.
2.2 FIRE-RATED PANELS

For fire-rated panels, the maximum permitted overall steel frame size under the Pilkington type test is 2635 x 2635 mm. The
2
Blokup type test limit is 2410 x 2410 mm. In Ordinance 70 Specification No 2, the opening was limited to 5.2 m , 2415 mm
height and 2375 mm width. Consider deflection of lintel over – panels cannot support structural loads. See also the
Commentary.
Perimeter
Frames:
The Weck system uses a 100 x 50 x 3 mm frame, fully mitred and welded. Weck also offers a 100 x 50 mm rebate set into the
surrounding AAC masonry. The Blokup system specifies a 120 x 60 mm deep rebate to all four sides. Ordinance 70
Specification No 2 specified that jambs and lintel are to be recessed 57 mm deep and 22 mm wider than the blocks.
- Size: 150 x 75 x 9 mm.
- Material: Mild steel channel.
- Prefinish: Hot-dip galvanize after cutting, welding and drilling.
- Fixing: 10 mm masonry anchors with heavy galvanized washers.
e.g. Dynabolts.
- Drainage: Drill holes in web of sill channel.
Expansion jointing:
- Type: Ceramic fibre blanket, 38 mm (minimum) x width of channel rebate.
Sill channel lining: Ceramic fibre board, 12 mm (minimum) x width of channel rebate.
Glass blocks
Type: Hollow, fire rated.
Size: 190 x 190 x 100 mm.
Design: >
Weck offers four approved types – Wolke, Clearview, Cross ribbed and Broad cross ribbed.
Colour: >
Mortar
Cement: Slow setting Portland cement with low shrinkage.
- Type to AS 3972: GP.
- Density: > 1505 kg/m3.
According to Ordinance 70 Specification No 2.
- Colour: >
Hydrated lime: To AS 1672.1.
Delete if lime is not used.
- Type: High calcium, or pressure-hydrated dolomitic lime if > 92% of active ingredients are hydrated.
- Density: > 560 kg/m3.
According to Ordinance 70 Specification No 2.
Sand: Clean sharp river mineral sand, salt free, no admixtures, no iron compounds.
- Dry raw density: > 1500 kg/m3.

- Grading: 100% passing 4 mm screen, minimum 80% passing 2 mm, 30% passing 1 mm, maximum
5% passing 0.25 mm.
Weck specifies a maximum size of 2 mm.
- Colour: >
Water: Clean, potable.
Mortar and pointing mix by volume (cement:sand): 1:3. As dry as practicable.
- Compressive strength (minimum): 10 MPa at 2 days, 35 MPa at 28 days.
- Anti-freeze and accelerators: Not permitted.
- Integral water repellent: Stearate type.
Pigments: Powder oxides.
- Colour: >
Reinforcement: 6 mm diameter, in lengths to suit full width or height of panel, as appropriate.
- Corrosion resistance: Galvanize, coating mass (minimum) 290 g/m2.
Finish
Applied water repellent: Water based silane sealer type.
Sealant: Fire resistant non-setting non-staining waterproof elastomeric sealant, hardening only at the
surface.
e.g. Dow Corning 7900.
- Colour: >
- Backing rod: Open cell PVC foam, 16 mm diameter.
2.3 SEALANT-JOINTED PANELS

The default text is based on the Stek-Fix system. Refer also to the Commentary.
Perimeter
Frames: Proprietary extruded single-part aluminium frame, with external cover flange.
- Size: >
- Prefinish: >
Anodised or powder coated.
- Fixing: 12 gauge 40 mm long stainless steel pan head screws, with nylon masonry plugs where
appropriate.
Or 10 mm masonry anchors.
- Reveal boards: >
Required, or not required.
- Packers: Solid timber or metal.
- Drainage: Neatly drill 6 mm holes at 600 mm centres and close to ends of the sill frame, on the wet
face just above the web.
Sill frame can be supplied predrilled.
Glass blocks
See Instruction for Mortar-jointed panels (clause 3.1).
Type: Hollow.
Size (mm): >
Steck-Fix uses 80 mm thick glass blocks e.g. 190 x 190 x 80 mm. BlokUp uses Weck glass blocks, 190 x 190 x 80 mm, or 240 x
240 x 80 mm.
Design: >
Edges: >
Colour: >
Panels
Reinforcement: 50 x 3 mm flat bars.
The BlokUp system uses a proprietary extruded aluminium vertical separation strip, which fits into edge recess of blocks.
- Material: >
Hot dip galvanized steel, with galvanized ends (or two coats of zinc-rich metal primer), or high tensile aluminium. The steel can
span up to a metre more, allowing bigger panels.
Block-locating clips: Proprietary plastic clips designed to clip on the reinforcement and fit the glass
block edges.
Finish
Structural sealant: Silicone.
- Colour: >
Grouting sealant: Silicone.
- Colour: >
3 EXECUTION
Note on drawings or provide a schedule to your office documentation policy. Mortar-jointed panels
Ambient conditions
General: Do not install below 5°C. Maintain panels above 5°C for the first 48 hours after construction.
Perimeter
Frames: Erect 4-sided frame mitred at corners, spaced 5 mm clear of the structure on packing.
Fixing: 400 mm centres. Centre hole on each side circular, other holes slotted longitudinally 50 mm.
- Packing: 75 x 75 x 2 mm zinc-plated steel.
- Sill channel: Lay sill channel lining in rebate.
- Jamb and head channels: Adhesive-fix expansion jointing in rebates.
Panels
Laying blocks: By hand, may be knocked into position using a rubber or soft nylon hammer. Align
block patterns consistently. Prevent mortar extrusion under load while setting.
Bond: Stack bond.
Reinforcement:
- Frame: Two rods all round, hooked and connected with wire at the corners. Horizontal rods to be a
tie rod assembly, with 6 mm diameter tie rods at 200 mm centres, spacing the main rods 40 –
45 mm apart.
- Joint: Two rods in at least every second horizontal joint, and every tenth vertical joint. Overlap
230 mm (minimum) at corners. Do not tie vertical rods to horizontal rods. Do not impinge on
expansion joints. Tie joint reinforcement to frame reinforcement.
- Cover (minimum): 15 mm to outside face, 10 mm to inside face, 5 mm to blocks.
- Laps: Minimise number. 150 mm minimum laps.
Joints:
- Widths (clear): 10 – 15 mm. For curved walls, 5 – 20 mm for vertical joints.
- Width tolerance: ± 3 mm.
- Placing mortar: Do not retemper mortar. Do not furrow joints. Fill channel frame and panel joints.
- Pointing: Point before mortar has hardened. Neatly tool to a smooth, dense concave joint. Remove
excess mortar from glass surfaces using a damp cloth before mortar set occurs, without damaging
the glass. Protect against premature drying, but do not moisten.
Tolerances:
- From plane of unit to plane of adjacent unit: ± 0.8 mm.
- Panel from plane: ± 1.5 mm.
Loading: Protect from face loading for at least 48 hours after completion.
Finish
Applied water repellent: Apply to mortar joints where integral water repellent is not used. Immediately
remove excess from glass surfaces, without damaging the glass.

Sealing: Clean and dry substrates. Execute work neatly. Seal expansion joints in frame corners, seal
between the frame and the structure, and seal between the frame and the glass block panel, internally
and externally. Keep sealant 10 mm clear of glass block faces. Remove excess sealant from glass at
completion, without damaging the glass.
- Depth of sealant: 10 mm, over backing rod.
3.1 FIRE-RATED PANELS

Use of drawings is essential to convey information not contained in this material. Other manufacturers may well have different
type-tested installations, in which case, amend the material accordingly. Refer to manufacturer’s type-tested details.
These systems give a FRL of -/60/-. Testing to overseas standards gives ratings of 45 to 90 minutes, but only 60 minutes seems
to be recognised in Australia.
Ambient conditions
General: Do not install below 5°C. Maintain panels above 5°C for the first 48 hours after construction.
Perimeter
Frames: Erect 4-sided frame mitred with 28 mm expansion joints at corners, spaced 10 mm clear of
the structure on packing.
Fixing: 400 mm centres. Centre hole on each side circular, other holes slotted longitudinally 50 mm.
- Packers: 75 x 75 x 2 mm zinc-plated steel.
Weck requires Kaowool to the rebate, and 150 x 12 mm Kaowool to the perimeter. Blocks were laid on the structure, on a layer
of bituminous emulsion, in Ordinance 70 Specification No 2 (a 3-sided frame). The gaps at the jambs and tops were filled with
non-combustible material with a fusing temperature of at least 1000°C.
- Sill channel: Lay sill channel lining in rebate.
- Jamb and head channels: Build in expansion jointing in rebates.
Panels
Laying blocks: By hand, may be knocked into position using a rubber or soft nylon hammer. Align
block patterns consistently. Prevent mortar extrusion under load while setting.
Bond: Stack bond.
Reinforcement:
- Frame: Two rods all round, hooked and connected with wire at the corners. Horizontal rods to be a
tie rod assembly, with 6 mm diameter tie rods at 200 mm centres, spacing the rods 40 – 45 mm
apart.
- Joint: Two rods in every vertical and horizontal joint. Overlap 230 mm (minimum) at corners. Do not
tie vertical rods to horizontal rods. Do not impinge on expansion joints. Tie joint reinforcement to
frame reinforcement.
- Cover (minimum): 15 mm to faces, 5 mm to blocks.
- Laps: Not permitted.
Joints:
- Widths (clear): 15 mm.
- Width tolerance: ± 2 mm.
- Placing mortar: Do not retemper mortar. Do not furrow joints. Fill channel frame and panel joints.
- Pointing: Point before mortar has hardened. Neatly tool to a smooth, dense concave joint. Remove
excess mortar from glass surfaces using a damp cloth before mortar set occurs. Protect against
premature drying, but do not moisten.
Tolerance:
- From plane of unit to plane of adjacent unit: ± 0.8 mm.
- Panel from plane: ± 1.5 mm.
Loading: Protect from face loading for at least 48 hours after completion.
Finish
Applied water repellent: Apply to mortar joints where integral water repellent is not used. Immediately
remove excess from glass surfaces, without damaging the glass.
Sealing: Clean and dry substrates. Execute work neatly. Seal expansion joints in frame corners, seal
between the frame and the structure, and seal between the frame and the glass block panel, internally

and externally. Keep sealant 10 mm clear of glass block faces. Remove excess sealant from glass at
completion, without damaging the glass.
- Depth of sealant: 10 mm, over backing rod.
3.2 SEALANT-JOINTED PANELS

Perimeter
Frames:
- Assembly: Mitre frame at corners. Assemble with connection angles and cleats, drill, and fix frame
to angles with blind rivets.
Or self tapping screws.
- Fixing jamb frames: Position screws to clear the ends of the reinforcing bars. Fix screws with
neoprene washers and through the packing, at 400 mm (maximum) centres, and pairs 100 mm from
ends.
Assumes horizontal reinforcing. Do not fix head frame. Could use this specification for sill frame too.
- Fixing sill frame: Fix screws with neoprene washers and through the packing, at 800 mm
(maximum) centres, and 100 mm from ends.
- Reveal boards: Fit to frame before frame installation.
- Packing: Locate to square the frame, maximum 10 mm, to sill and jamb frames only.
Panels
Laying blocks: Select and orient glass blocks to ensure consistent coursing dimensions. Lightly clean
edges with steel wool.
Block-locating clips: Locate onto sill frame profile 20 mm from each corner and centred at every
perpend, ribbed side up. Insert in perpends, including at jamb frames, centred at course centre line.
Clip onto reinforcing bars 20 mm from the ends and centred at every perpend, ribbed side up. Insert
above top course 20 mm from each corner and centred at every perpend.
Assumes horizontal reinforcement.
Bond: Stack bond.
Joint reinforcement: Joint: Run reinforcement horizontally, and slot into the jamb frame channels on
top of the glass block courses, except the top course, finishing 3 mm short of the jamb frame rebate
faces.
Assumed the horizontal dimension is the short dimension of the panel. Reinforcement may be vertical or horizontal. Vertical
reinforcement should stand on 3 mm spacers.
Joints:
- Widths: 3 – 4 mm.
Tolerance:
- Frame from square: ± 1 mm.
Finish
Jointing: Clean and dry substrates. Execute work neatly, without gaps and holes. Inject structural
sealant into blockwork joints to a depth of 5 – 8 mm.
Grouting: Clean and dry substrates. Execute work neatly, without gaps and holes. Apply grouting
sealant to mitred frame corner joints, and apply to blockwork joints, including at the perimeter frame, to
both panel faces. Tool off flush before sealant skins over. At exterior sill, provide a fillet-shaped seal to
shed water. Remove excess sealant from glass at completion, without damaging the glass.
Loading: Protect from applied loads and potential damage for 48 hours until silicone is set.
3.3 MAINTENANCE
Mortar-jointed and fire-rated panels
Final clean: Wash using clean water. Remove dry powder using a clean soft dry cloth.
For hard to remove powder or stains, the use of an “extra fine” steel wool (grades 000 or 0000) is suggested by Pittsburgh
Corning.

INSULATION AND VAPOUR BARRIERS ENCLOSURE
INSULATION AND VAPOUR BARRIERS
This worksection is applicable to insulation, sarking and vapour barriers for roofs, ceilings, walls and floors. It is generally
specified around AS 3999, AS/NZS 4200.1, AS/NZS 4200.2 and AS/NZS 4859.1.
• Insulation forming part of a proprietary roofing, cladding or lining system.
• None.
• This worksection does not relate to insulation for Services (e.g. for ductwork, which is dealt with in Ductwork insulation).
• Insulation and vapour barriers may be integral to other worksections such as Concrete in situ, Waterproofing – external,
Roofing, Cladding, Curtain walls, Partitions – framed and lined, Suspended ceilings and Waterproofing – wet areas. Cross
reference from related worksections to this worksection or take relevant text from here.
• Show of the drawings the extent, type, location, arrangement, fixing and support details of all insulation, sarking and
vapour barriers. Particular requirements, if any, which are not covered by the worksection text and not shown on the
drawings may be specified in this worksection.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
General: Provide insulation and vapour barrier systems:
- Maintain their performance for the life of the building.
It is the responsibility of the designer to nominate and detail insulation conforming to the requirements of the BCA for sarking,
thermal and sound insulation.

General
have no overlaps.

>
• Concrete in situ for underslab insulation.
• Waterproofing – external.
• Roofing.
• Suspended ceilings.
• Partitions – framed and lined.
1.3 STANDARDS
Installation of mineral wool insulation
Installation: Comply with the AMWU/CFMEU/CEPU/ICANZ Industry Code of Practice for the Safe Use
of Glass Wool and Rock Wool Insulation.
The code is available from the respective unions, insulation manufacturers and ICANZ. Refer to the manufacturer’s Material
Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) and labelling information to ascertain compliance status. Imported glasswool materials that do not
comply with this bio solubility requirement remain under the NOHSC classification of Hazardous Substances. For safe handling
and disposal guidelines, refer to product labelling, Code of Practice and MSDS.
Marking: Deliver mineral wool products to site in packaging labelled FBS-1 BIO-SOLUBLE
INSULATION.
1.4 INTERPRETATION
Definitions
This definitions subclause can be edited to suit the project or deleted if not required.
- Terminology: To AS/NZS 4859.1.
AS/NZS 4859.1 relies on ASTM C168 for definitions with some qualifications and some additional definitions and in the NOTE to
clause 1.5.1 offers ISO 9229 for additional information.
- Fire hazard properties: Means the average specific extinction area, critical radiant flux, Flammability
index, Smoke-Developed Index, smoke growth rate index, smoke development rate or Spread-of-
Flame Index of a material or assembly that indicate how they behave under specific fire test
conditions.
This is the BCA’s interpretation of ‘Fire hazard properties’ at clause A 1.1.
- Sarking-type material: Flexible membrane material normally used for waterproofing, vapour proofing
or thermal reflectance.
Derived from the BCA clause A 1.1.
- Mineral wool (including glasswool and rockwool): Entangled mat of fibrous non-crystalline material
derived from inorganic oxides or minerals, rock, slag or glass, processed at high temperatures from
a molten state.
In Australia, two classes of mineral wool are produced, rockwool and glasswool.
- Vapour barrier: A material or system that adequately impedes the transmission of water vapour
under specified conditions’.
This definition is from ASTM C168 which uses the term ‘water vapor retarded (barrier)”. To qualify as a sarking membrane or
vapour barrier, the material or system has to be continuous i.e. any joints in the membrane must be sealed airtight.
1.5 INSPECTION
Notice
Inspection: Give sufficient notice so that inspection may be made of the sarking, vapour barrier and
insulation before they are covered up or concealed.

2 PRODUCTS

Fire hazard properties
General: To AS/NZS 1530.3:
- Spread of flame index: ≤ 0.
- Smoke developed index: ≤ 3.
- Flammability index to AS 1530.2: ≤ 5.
A BCA requirement for Class 2 to 9 buildings, here extended to all buildings, see BCA specification C 1.10 clause 2(a). A
flammability index for sarking greater than 5 is generally not permitted. Reflective foil to AS/NZS 4200.1 classification “low”
satisfies this requirement.
Note the BCA requirement for exposed sarking-type material in fire-isolated exits to have a flammability index of 0 – not covered
in AS/NZS 4200.1. See BCA Specification C 1.10 clause 3(b).
Bulk insulation
Cellulosic fibre (loose fill): To AS/NZS 4859.1 Section 5.
Mineral wool blankets and cut pieces: To AS/NZS 4859.1 Section 8.
Polyester: To AS/NZS 4859.1 Section 7.
Polyisocyanurate (rigid cellular sheets): To AS 1366.2.
Polystyrene (extruded rigid cellular sheets): To AS 1366.4.
Polystyrene (moulded rigid cellular sheets): To AS 1366.3.
Polyurethane (rigid cellular sheets): To AS 1366.1.
Polyurethane (sprayed): To ASTM D6694.
Reflective insulation: To AS/NZS 4859.1 Section 9.
- Type: >
Softboard (insulating board): To AS/NZS 1859.4.
Urea-formaldehyde in situ set foam: To AS 4073.
Wool: To AS/NZS 4859.1 Section 6.
Delete standards which are not applicable to the project.
Sarking-type material
Duty: Medium.
Five duty ratings are described in AS/NZS 4200.1 describes five duty ratings:
• Extra heavy.
• Heavy.
• Medium.
• Light.
• Extra light.
Modify the ‘Medium’ default, if required. The AS/NZS 4200 series cover only pliable sarking. Other specific materials such as
rigid sarking, kraft paper, or polyethylene may also be considered.
Vapour proofing: Permeance to AS 3999.
AS 3999 is specified because AS/NZS 4200.1 and AS 3999 give different figures. The upper limit in AS 3999 (.06 µg/N.s)
corresponds to the middle of the “medium” range in AS/NZS 4200.1 (see AS 3999 clause 1.6.3). Different permeances apply to
vapour and water barriers.
Floor insulation: Perforated, foil-faced both sides.
- Perforations: Clean holes at least 10 mm diameter, at pitch:diameter ratio not greater than 10:1.
To permit condensate to drain away, maintaining the performance of the membrane. An airspace is also essential.

Wall sarking: Vapour-permeable.

For reflective foil laminate in critical situations, such as external exposure under unlined eaves, consider specifying material
carrying the appropriate Australian StandardsMark.
Fasteners and supports
General: Metallic-coated steel.
Mesh support to roof insulation
Metallic-coated wire netting: To AS 2423 Section 4.
- Size: 45 mm mesh x 1 mm diameter.
AS 2423 covers wire netting and chainwire and requires that all products be protected against corrosion by application of a
metallic-coating during manufacture, optionally overlaid with an organic coating, see AS 2423 clause 1.3.13.
Welded safety mesh: To AS/NZS 4389.
Welded safety mesh may be required by OH&S authorities for commercial and industrial buildings, along with perimeter guard
rails. Coordinate with the Roofing worksection which also cites AS/NZS 4389.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
Bulk insulation
Standard: To AS 3999 or AS 4075.
AS 3999 deals in part with vapour barriers used in conjunction with bulk insulation.
Batts and rigid sheets: Fit tightly between framing members. If support is not otherwise provided,
staple nylon twine to the framing and stretch tight.
AS 3999 gives some directives on fixing of insulation often deferring to the manufacturer’s recommendations on the type and
spacing of fixing devices. Preferably show fixing details on the drawings.
- Under floors: Adhesive fix sheet materials.
Loose fill: Provide timber boxing or equivalent to retain loose fill on external edges, cavities and
penetrations, and to prevent spilling.
Polyurethane (foamed in situ): Prepare substrate and spray to form a seamless coating.
- Protection: Where exposed to ultra-violet light, provide an elastomeric membrane.
- Access holes: Do not obstruct.
Sarking-type material
AS/NZS 4200.2 requires wire support for extra heavy duty sarking over framing exceeding 900 mm centres for tiled roofs. For
other duty ratings and applications, see the standard. Mesh support for sound (rain noise) insulation for metal roofing must be
taut in order to keep the insulation in contact with the roof sheeting. Use a sarking membrane to dispose of water which leaks
through the roofing, or which condenses on the underside of the roofing (e.g. metal roof sheets) under cold conditions.
Reflective foil laminate
To timber: Metallic-coated clouts or staples at 300 mm maximum centres.
AS 2334 defines clouts as nails having a plain cylindrical shank with an integrally formed flat circular head. They are normally
supplied with a hot-dip galvanized coating or with an electro-deposited or mechanically deposited zinc coating giving equivalent
corrosion protection, and are mainly intended for the general fixing of thin sheet materials.
To steel or aluminium: Double sided pressure sensitive tape.
- Spacing: >
To plywood membrane support: Water based contact adhesive.
- Adhesive cover %: >
Normally 50%.
Overlap (minimum): 150 mm and adhesive fix.
Wall sarking
Location: Provide sarking under cladding which does not provide a permanent weatherproof seal
including, the following:

- Boards fixed vertically or diagonally.

- Boards or planks fixed in exposed locations where wind driven rain can penetrate the joints.
- Unpainted or unsealed cladding.
Installation: Fix to the frame members with metallic-coated broad-head clouts, staples, screws or pop
rivets spaced at 300 mm maximum centres. Apply to the outer face of external stud walls from the
bottom plate up, over the flashing. At the top, seal across the wall cavity.
Roof sarking locations
Location: Provide sarking under tile and shingle roofs.
3.2 FLOOR INSULATION

Reflective foil laminate is commonly used as sarking or vapour barrier – nominate duty, vapour barrier, emittance, water barrier
and absorbency classification, or identify as a proprietary item.
Reflective foil will act as a reflective thermal insulation if the foil surface faces an air space of at least 20 mm. Provide a vapour
barrier wherever condensation may result from moisture-laden air coming into contact with cold impermeable surfaces.
General
Location: >
e.g. under ground floor slab, undercroft. Generally, indicate location on drawings. Thermal insulation of suspended ground floors
is desirable as a means of energy saving.
Materials
Sarking membrane: >
Include the following:
• Type (reflective foil or reinforced polyethylene).
• Location.
• Sag (vital to specify).
Bulk insulation:
- Type: >
e.g.’ Mineral wool’, ‘Glasswool’ or a proprietary item.
- Thickness (mm): >
The thermal resistance of rigid polystyrene depends on thickness and class. AS 1366.3 and AS 1366.4 give test values. The
thickness is necessary for setting out the levels.
- R-value: >
For recommended thermal insulation values for dwellings see AS 2627.1.
- Rw rating: >
Where the insulation is required to contain or exclude noise. For weighted sound reduction index (Rw) rating, see
AS/NZS 1276.1 or AS/NZS ISO 717.1.
- Class: >
e.g. for rigid (moulded and extruded) cellular polystyrene AS 1366.3 Class SL (marked with a yellow colour stripe), or AS 1366.4
Class I (marked on each board).
Vapour barrier: >
Include the following:
• Type, location, proprietary item. Vapour barriers installed in tropical areas may require additional provisions not covered in
this clause in order to ensure satisfactory performance. These may include provisions covering location of the membrane,
permeability of the membrane, sealing of joints and sealing of penetrations.
Fire hazard properties: >
Specify where required using proprietary vermiculite board for example.
Installation
Sarking membrane: Over joists, with a sag of 100 mm.
Support and fixing: >
Welded safety mesh, wire netting, steel or nylon wires.

3.3 WALL INSULATION

General
Location: >
e.g. acoustic partitions, all external walls but excluding subfloor, cavities generally, indicate location on drawings.
Materials
Refer to Instruction text in Floor insulation.
Sarking membrane: >
Bulk insulation:
- Type: >
- Thickness (mm): >
- R-value: >
- Rw rating: >
- Class: >
Vapour barrier: >
Installation
For cavity wall insulation, usually held in place with purpose-made plastic clips over purpose-made wall ties. Sheet size should
suit wall tie row spacings, and maintain a clear cavity.
3.4 ROOF INSULATION

Refer to Instruction text in Floor insulation.
General
Location: The whole of the roof area, except the following:
State if insulation is not required in semi-enclosed spaces (balconies, verandahs) or ancillary buildings (garages, workshops,
carports etc.).
- Eaves, overhangs, rooflights, vents and openings.
- Roofs to outbuildings, garages, and semi-enclosed spaces such as verandahs, porches and
carports.
Materials
Sarking membrane: >
Bulk insulation:
- Type/product: >
- Thickness (mm): >
- R-value: >
- Rw rating: >
Where the insulation is required to contain or exclude noise. To be effective against rain noise on metal roofs the bulk insulation
must be in contact with the metal. For weighted sound reduction index (Rw) rating, see AS/NZS 1276.1 or AS/NZS ISO 717.1.
- Class: >
Vapour barrier: >
Combined bulk insulation and foil blanket:
- Type/product: >
- Thickness (mm): >
- R-value: >
Separate or combined bulk insulation and vapour barrier are alternatives. Edit as required.
Installation
Welded safety mesh, wire netting, steel or nylon wires.

Sound insulation: Install over the roof support frame, reflective thermal insulation (if any), and mesh
support, so that the blanket is in continuous contact with the underside of the metal roofing sheets.
Mesh support to roof insulation
Choose wire netting or welded safety mesh and edit accordingly. Welded safety mesh may be required by OH&S authorities for
commercial and industrial buildings, along with perimeter guard rails. AS/NZS 4389, on welded safety mesh, is called up in the
Roofing worksection. Coordinate.
Locations: Provide support to the following:
- Sarking, vapour barrier or reflective thermal insulation membranes laid over roof framing members
which are spaced at more than 900 mm centres.
- Blanket type thermal insulation laid over roof framing members as sound insulation to metal roofing.
Installing wire netting: Lay over the roof framing providing sufficient slack or sag between members to
suit the application.
Fixing wire netting: Staple to timber frame, wire to steel frame.
Installing welded safety mesh: To AS 4389.

ACOUSTIC INSULATION ENCLOSURE
ACOUSTIC INSULATION
This worksection is applicable to acoustic insulation to walls of individual rooms.
• Doors and hatches and Door hardware for acoustic rated doors.
• Insulation and vapour barriers for thermal and acoustic insulation to roofs and external walls.
• Partition systems for proprietary partitions.
• Partitions – framed and lined for plasterboard partitions.
• Suspended ceilings for acoustic ceiling tile suspended ceiling systems.
• Room dividers for operable wall assemblies.
• Waterproofing – wet areas for wet area membranes.
• Floating panel floors, Applied timber flooring, Ceramic tiling, or Stone and terrazzo tiling for acoustic floor underlays.
• Partitions – framed and lined or Light timber framing or Light steel framing.
• Partitions – brick and block .
• Acoustic isolation beyond the normal requirements of commercial and domestic uses, such as broadcasting studios or
heavy industrial applications.
• Acoustic lining applied as a surface treatment used to minimise sound transmission and/or reflection.
• None.
• The requirements for acoustic rated doors are best documented in a door schedule and in Door hardware.
• Ensure compatibility of underlays with other components of a flooring system, particularly wet area membranes and
adhesives.
• Detail surface fixed acoustic lining panels (e.g. for plant rooms/cupboards) and add specification text.
• Ceiling tiles with acoustic properties can be noted in Selections of the Suspended ceilings worksection.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
General: Provide insulation systems:
- Conforming to the requirements of the BCA for sound insulation.
- Maintain their performance for the life of the building.
NATSPEC 449 [insert date]

The aim of the designer is select and detail acoustic insulation systems that will enable the contractor to conform to the
requirements of the BCA for sound insulation.
If the design brief calls for outcomes beyond those of the BCA, consider stating those values here or on drawings.

General
have no overlaps.
>
Such as:
• Door hardware.
• Insulation vapour barriers.
• Partitions – framed and lined or Light timber framing or Light steel framing.
• Partitions – brick and block or Brick and block construction.
1.3 STANDARDS
Installation of mineral wool insulation
Installation: Comply with the AMWU/CFMEU/CEPU/FARIMA Industry Code of Practice for the Safe
Use of Glass Wool and Rock Wool Insulation.
The code is available from the respective unions, insulation manufacturers and ICANZ. Refer to the manufacturer’s Material
Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) and labelling information to ascertain compliance status. Imported glasswool materials that do not
comply with this bio solubility requirement remain under the NOHSC classification of Hazardous Substances. For safe handling
and disposal guidelines, refer to product labelling, Code of Practice and MSDS.
Marking: Deliver mineral wool products to site in packaging labelled FBS-1 BIO-SOLUBLE
INSULATION.
1.4 INTERPRETATIONS
Definitions
This definitions subclause can be edited to suit the project or deleted if not required.
General: For the purposes of this worksection the definitions given below apply:
- Terminology: To AS/NZS 4859.1.
AS/NZS 4859.1 relies on ASTM C168 for definitions with some qualifications and some additional definitions and in the NOTE to
clause 1.5.1 offers ISO 9229 for additional information.
- Acoustic insulation: (a) Reduction of sound energy passing through building elements. (b) Materials
or methods of construction to reduce the transmission of air-born and structure-born sound through
walls, floors or other enclosing elements in buildings.
- Acoustic material: Building material with specific acoustic properties to achieve:
. Sound transmission loss.
. Sound absorption.
. Damping of resonance.

. Resilience against impact noise.

Acoustic definitions are from SAA HB 50
- Fire hazard properties: Means the average specific extinction area, critical radiant flux, Flammability
index, Smoke-Developed Index, smoke growth rate index, smoke development rate or Spread-of-
Flame Index of a material or assembly that indicate how they behave under specific fire test
conditions.
This is the BCA’s interpretation of ‘Fire hazard properties’ at clause A 1.1.
- Mineral wool (including glasswool and rockwool): Entangled mat of fibrous non-crystalline material
derived from inorganic oxides or minerals, rock, slag or glass, processed at high temperatures from
a molten state.
In Australia, two classes of mineral wool are produced, rockwool and glasswool.
1.5 INSPECTION
Notice
- Insulation installed before it is covered up or concealed.
1.6 SUBMISSIONS
Samples
General: Submit one surface mounted wall panel complete with edge treatment.
Field tests
General: If verification is required for the airborn acoustic insulation level of completed building
elements is required conduct the field test of weighted standardised level difference - DnT,w (+ Ctr).
If the design brief calls for outcomes beyond those of the BCA, consider calling for field tests to verify those outcomes.
1.7 OPTIONS TO SATISFY THE BCA

Select from the following and edit as required. Refer to Guideline Sound Insulation 2004 published by ABCB for an explanation
of these options.
Option 1: Prescriptive approach – Laboratory tested systems
Inspections and documentation of compliance: Provide written and photographic evidence that the
building elements are in accordance with the tested systems.
Option 2: Performance approach – Verification Methods – Field Test
Inspections and documentation of compliance: Provide written and photographic evidence that the
building elements are in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommended construction methods and
as detailed.
Risk: Submit a risk assessment to establish how many building elements, and which building elements
are to be tested, and for which other building elements the test results are valid.
Wall systems to be tested: >
Typically 10%. If the design is complicated or unusual increase to 40%
Verification: Submit test results.
Option 3: Performance approach – Expert judgement
Opinion provider: >
e.g. A professional acoustic engineer, or identify the originator of the building element design.
Option 4: Performance approach – Comparison with Deemed- to-satisfy systems
Opinion provider: >
Option 5: Performance approach – Evidence of suitability
Opinion provider: >

2 PRODUCTS

Refer to BDP EDG Notes PRO5, PRO7 and PRO8 on insulation materials and toxicity of materials during the building life cycle.
General: To AS/NZS 1530.3:
- Spread of flame index: ≤ 0.
- Flammability index to AS 1530.2: ≤ 5.
A BCA requirement for Class 2 to 9 buildings, here extended to all buildings, see BCA specification C 1.10 clause 2(a). A
flammability index for sarking greater than 5 is generally not permitted. Reflective foil to AS/NZS 4200.1 classification “low”
satisfies this requirement.
Note the BCA requirement for exposed sarking-type material in fire-isolated exits to have a flammability index of 0 – not covered
in AS/NZS 4200.1. See BCA Specification C 1.10 clause 3(b).
Bulk insulation
Cellulosic fibre (loose fill): To AS/NZS 4859.1, Section 5.
Mineral wool blankets and cut pieces: To AS/NZS 4859.1, Section 8.
Polyester: To AS/NZS 4859.1, Section 7.
Polyisocyanurate (rigid cellular sheets): To AS 1366.2.
Polyurethane (sprayed): To ASTM D6694.
Softboard (insulating board): To AS/NZS 1859.4.
Urea-formaldehyde in situ set foam: To AS 4073.
Wool: To AS/NZS 4859.1, Section 6.
Jute: Natural jute fibre treated with di sodium octaborate fire retardant.
Delete standards which are not applicable to the project.
Board insulation
Polystyrene (extruded rigid cellular sheets): To AS 1366.4.
Polystyrene (moulded rigid cellular sheets): To AS 1366.3.
Polyurethane (rigid cellular sheets): To AS 1366.1.
Compressed glasswool rigid panels: Proprietary item.
Recycled rubber: Proprietary item.
Flexible sheet insulation
Loaded vinyl: Proprietary item.
Fasteners and supports
Cavity Walls with steel stud framing lined one side: Increase stud base metal thickness to 1.15 mm.
Furring channels to masonry walls: >
Resilient clip fixings: >
Proprietary items.
Fixing:
- Clips: 600 mm horizontally x 1200 mm vertically and a row 100 mm from the top and bottom at
1200 mm c/c.
- Vertical furring channels: 600 mm centres.
Vary fixing to suit the product.
Sealants
General: Non-hardening sealant compatible with the materials to be sealed and having a specific
gravity of not less than 1.5 gm/cubic centimetre and of 100% polyurethane mastic.
Fire rated: Non-hardening sealant compatible with the materials to be sealed and having a fire rating
equal to that of the partition it seals.
Sealant strips: Closed cell resilient foam.

3 EXECUTION
3.1 WALL SYSTEMS

Framed walls generally
Batts and rigid sheets: Fit tightly between framing members. If support is not otherwise provided, fix
nylon twine to the framing and stretch tight.
Cavity masonry
Bulk insulation support and fixing: >
Nominate a product or describe generically. Products include purpose-made plastic clips over purpose-made wall ties
Sheet size: Select or cut to suit wall tie spacings.
3.2 SUSPENDED CEILINGS

Bulk insulation
Installation: Lay batts over the ceiling system close butted to each other and to the suspension rods.
Bulk insulation over ceilings: To the Bulk insulation schedule.
3.3 PLENUM BAFFLES

Baffles
General: Install plenum baffles so that they fit closely up to the surfaces of the building structure,
service ducts, pipes and conduits and to the top of the partition or to the top of the suspended ceiling
structure directly above the line of the partition. Seal the joints, penetrations and intersections and
maintain the required acoustic performance.
Framed plenum baffles: >
e.g. As detailed or cross refer to Partitions – framed and lined. Incorporate support for the head track of room dividers as
required.
Bulk insulation to plenum baffles: To the Bulk insulation schedule.
Flexible sheet plenum baffles: Fix to the floor soffit through a continuous firring channel, hang and
extend horizontally 900 mm over the suspended ceiling.
3.4 FLANKING SOUND INSULATION

Penetrations
Ductwork: >
Detail, or cross refer to Mechanical services for sound attenuation arrangements.
Pipework: >
Detail, or cross refer to Hydraulic services for acoustic lagging. Nominate sealant.
Abutments
Sealant:
- Strip: >
- Sealant: >
E.g. closed cell foam strips and gunned acoustic sealant..
Trims: >
E.g. project specific architrave material to protect the sealant and allow movement.
Cable management
Power outlets: Do not install power outlets back to back. Separate adjoining outlets with a continuous
layer of he nominated wall insulating material.
Alternative: Proprietary acoustically isolated back to back outlets.
Ducted skirtings: If a ducted skirting extends continuously across an abutment, pack the cavities firmly
with bulk insulating material for 300 mm each side of the abutment and scribe and seal the joint.

4 SELECTIONS
4.1 SCHEDULES
Bulk insulation schedule
Type
A B C
Product
Material
Type
Thickness
Density
Application
Product: If the system is specified by proprietary name, some of the other schedule items may be unnecessary and can be
deleted.
Material: Mineral wool, glass fibre, polyester etc.
Type: Batt, blanket.
Application: Framed and lined partitions, suspended ceilings. Plenum bulkheads etc.
Board insulation schedule
Type
A B C
Product
Material
Type
Thickness
Density
Application
deleted.
Material: Compressed glasswool, polystyrene, recycled rubber, surface fixed panels.
Some manufacturers offer a heavy density compressed glasswool rigid panel with the following physical characteristics:
• Thickness: 13 mm.
3
• Density: 168 kg/m .
Consult the technical data.
Application: Cavity masonry, floor underlay, component of wall lining system etc.

Flexible sheet insulation schedule

Type
A B C
Product
Material
Thickness
Surface weight
Application
deleted.
Material: Loaded vinyl.
Some manufacturers offer a loaded vinyl sheet with the following physical characteristics:
• Thickness: 3 mm.
2
• Surface weight: 4.5 kg/m .
Application: Plenum bulkhead etc.

SPRAYED MINERAL FIRE PROTECTION ENCLOSURE
SPRAYED MINERAL FIRE PROTECTION
This worksection is applicable to spray-applied mineral fire protection coatings applied to structural steel substrates. These, and
related, coatings can also be applied to concrete, timber, masonry, plastics and other substrates, and can also be specified in
performance terms (necessitating contractor-design and testing). It is based on the BCA deemed-to-satisfy requirements (in the
BCA Specification A 2.3), and the relevant recommendations of the guide standard AS 3784.1.
• Fire-stopping for fire stopping.
• Painting for applied decorative finishes.
• None.
• Location and application thickness could be noted on the drawings.
1 GENERAL

General
have no overlaps.
- Fire-stopping.
- Painting.
1.2 STANDARDS
Sprayed mineral fire protection
Materials and components: To BCA Specification A2.3.
Execution: To BCA Specification A2.3.

BCA Specification A2.3 contains a non-mandatory prescriptive solution which is deemed-to-satisfy the mandatory BCA
performance requirements, so if it is to be followed it must be specified. This worksection assumes that Specification A2.3
satisfies the needs of most projects. See also the Commentary.
1.3 INSPECTION
Notice
- Substrate preparation completed.
- Coating support installed.
1.4 SUBMISSIONS
Samples
General: Submit samples of each specified coating thickness, density, colour, texture and support
type.
Purpose: To be used as quality control references on site.
Substrate
Cleaning: Give notice of surface conditions which cannot be corrected by normal cleaning methods as
defined as hand tooling to AS 1627.2.
2 PRODUCTS
Proprietary alternatives to the generic NATSPEC Specification exist, which may not comply in every respect with this
specification. Amend the specification as required. If specifying proprietary alternatives, then compliance with the BCA
performance requirements must be satisfactorily demonstrated to the Authorities. Obtain fire resistance test reports to
AS 1530.4 to confirm that the product achieves the required performance criteria.
2.1 MATERIALS
Base
General: Either perlite or vermiculite.
Delete one in the specification, or allow the contractor to select. BCA Specification A2.3 allows either.
Standard: To BS 3797.
Binding agent
Gypsum plaster: To AS 2592.
Now made obsolescent, but still available. BCA Specification A 2.3 defaults to gypsum in Annexure to Table 1: clause 1.4, but
other possibilities (not permitted in BCA Specification A 2.3) might include portland cement to AS 3972 and high alumina
cement to BS 915-2, according to AS 3784.1 clause 6.1(b) on binding agents.
Fillers
General: Either hydrated lime or limestone.
Or, delete one. From AS 3784.1 clause 6.1(c).
Decorative and protective surface finishes
Compatibility: Conform to AS 3784.1, clause 6.3.
2.2 COMPONENTS
Metal components generally
Corrosion protection: As nominated in General requirements.
Ensure the corrosivity category for the project is nominated in General requirements. BCA Specification A2.3 Fire – resistance
of building elements, plaster reinforcement, defaults to galvanized steel wire mesh at Annexure to Table 1: clause 1.6. If this is
appropriate, delete the subclause above.
Expanded metal lath

See BCA Specification A 2.3 Annexure to Table 1: clause 1.6, for mass, mesh pitch and finish of lath used as reinforcement.
Aperture: 10 – 20 mm.

Aperture: 10 – 20 mm. (From AS 3784.1 clause 8.2.2(a) expanded metal lath.)

Furring channels >
For walls see BCA Specification A 2.3 Annexure to Table 1: clause 7.1 19 mm x 0.44 kg/m steel channel studs.
For columns and beams: 19 mm x 0.44 kg/m steel channels.
Self-furring expanded metal lath
Aperture: 10 – 20 mm.
Aperture: 10 – 20 mm. (From AS 3784.1 clause 8.2.2(a) expanded metal lath.)
Ribs: V-shaped at 100 – 150 mm intervals.
Ribs: V-shaped at 100 – 150 mm intervals. (From AS 3784.1 clause 8.2.2(b) ribbed expanded metal lath.)
Steel wire mesh

Reinforcing mesh is specified in BCA Specification A 2.3 Annexure to Table 1: clause 1.6. See also AS 3784.1 clauses 8.2.2(c)
and (d).
Welded rectangular mesh:
- Keying: Aperture 10 – 25 mm, wire diameter 0.7 – 1.6 mm.
Twisted hexagonal mesh: To AS 2423.
Twisted hexagonal mesh: To AS 2423. (From AS 3784.1 clause 8.2.2(d) galvanised twisted mesh.)
- Keying: Aperture 10 – 25 mm.
Keying: Aperture 10 – 25 mm, wire diameter 0.7 – 1.6 mm. (From AS 3784.1 clauses 8.2.1 (a) and 8.2.2(c) welded mesh.)
3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXECUTION GENERALLY

The mix for the plaster does not need to be specified - BCA Specification A 2.3 Annexure to Table 1: clause 1.4 for gypsum –
perlite and gypsum vermiculite plaster provides defaults.
Applicators
General: Must be licensed by the coating manufacturer to install the coating.
Surface preparation
Sprayed to contour: Immediately before applying the coating, remove materials which will impair
adhesion to the substrate, including mill scale, dirt, grime, oil, grease, dust, loose rust, non-compatible
primers and paint.
- Primer: >
If the occupancy might change such that the environment becomes damp and poorly ventilated – see AS 3784.1 clause 7.2.4
metal substrates. Must be compatible with the spray. May be needed on galvanized steel, too. Seek specialist advice.
Sprayed on metal lath: If paint on the steel sections is not compatible with the spray, apply an alkali-
resistant sealer which is compatible with the paint.
Stable gaps and joints wider than 15 mm: Bridge with an appropriate supporting material before
applying the spray.
Unstable gaps and joints: Provide a movement joint in the spray, with metal lath support on either side
of the joint.
Protection of areas not to be coated
General: Prevent damage from spillage, overspray, contamination and fallout.
e.g. by cleaning any off at the end of each working period. From AS 3784.1 clause 11.5 application – see also clause 11.7 on
protecting air vents, equipment and so on.
Sequence
General: Apply coatings after installation of supports, fixings and other attachments, but before
installation of items which may obstruct the application.
Sprayed to contour
Reinforcement: >

Either expanded metal lath, or steel wire mesh. BCA Specification A 2.3 allows a choice. Or, allow the contractor to make the
choice. Refer also to the Commentary.
Sprayed on expanded metal lath

Defaults respond to the information called for in BCA Specification A 2.3 Annexure to Table 1: clause 7.
Walls:
- Support: >
AS 3784.1 Table 1 suggests that either expanded metal lath or steel wire mesh can be used as keying mesh.
Columns:
- Support: >
Either expanded metal lath and furring channels, or self-furring expanded metal lath. Or leave it to the contractor. BCA
Specification A 2.3 allows a choice. AS 3784.1 Table 1 suggests that either expanded metal lath or steel wire mesh can be used
as keying mesh - BCA Specification A 2.3 is more restrictive.
Beams:
- Support: >
AS 3784.1 Table 1 suggests that either expanded metal lath or steel wire mesh can be used as keying mesh.
Fixing reinforcement and support
Fixing intervals are given in BCA Specification Annexure to Table 1: Table 11.4 gypsum – perlite and gypsum vermiculite
plaster sprayed to contour.
Flat substrates: >
Fixing might include welded expanded steel fixings in pre-drilled holes, hardened self-tapping screws in pre-drilled holes, or
threaded steel fixings, according to AS 3784.1 clause 8.2.3(b) application to flat surfaces.
- Fastening reinforcement to fixing: >
e.g. spring clips, wire ties, or bend over the pins, according to AS 3784.1. clause 8.2.3(b).
Encapsulated substrates – no support needed: Wrap and overlap reinforcement at joints and wire tie
together.
e.g. around rectangular or circular hollow sections. From AS 3784.1 clause 8.2.3(a) encapsulation of substrate.
Encapsulated substrates – additional support needed:
>
e.g. for I sections or channels. Possibilities include welded pins at 250 mm centres, steel banding, strong wire strands, small
steel channels or angles, according to AS 3784.1 clause 8.2.3(a).
Sprayed fire protection coatings thickness schedule
Application type Sprayed fire protection coating designation
SFPC1 SFPC2 SFPC3
Sprayed to contour
(minimum) (mm)
Sprayed on metal lath
(minimum) (mm)
State the thickness which will provide the required FRLs. Minima are given in BCA Specification A 2.3 Table 1. The contractor
may not know the required FRLs, and so may not be in a position to work out the required minimum thicknesses directly. An
alternative is to give the contractor the FRLs, requiring the contractor to work out the thicknesses, and the contract administrator
to check conformance.
Sprayed fire protection coating designation: Or, steel member designation. Either way, the designations defined here should be
used to annotate the drawings. Or, identify the elements here by name e.g. steel columns, steel beams at ground floor.
Number of coats
Coating ≤ 25 mm: >
One or two – either allowed in BCA Specification A 2.3 Annexure to Table 1: clause 1.4(a) on application requirements. Or,
leave it to the contractor.
Density
Density of dry coating: >

3
i.e. dry density recommended by manufacturer e.g. not to exceed 350 kg/m .
Spraying
General: Provide good cohesion in the coating.
Provide good cohesion in the coating i.e. by building up the required thickness as quickly as possible – see AS 3784.1 clause
11.5 application technique. Specify the outcome rather than the method.
External coatings
See AS 3784.1 clause 11.8 protection of spray used externally.
During setting: Prevent exposure to rapid drying, wind-driven rain, running water, freezing conditions,
structural movement, vibration or impact.
Detailing: Provide water shedding. Weather-seal at the coating-substrate interface with mastic sealant
or weather shields.
Finishes
For each location - schedule if necessary. Compatibility with the coating is essential. Consider specifying it in the Painting
worksection with cross references.
Colour: >
Texture: >
Fungicide: >
See AS 3784.1 clause 10 on fungal growth.
- Application: >
Either applied after coating is dry, added to the water, or included as powder in the dry mix, according to AS 3784.1 clause 11.6
on fungicides.
3.2 COMPLETION TESTS

Thickness measurements
See AS 3784.1 clause 11.9 on measurement of thickness for site control .
Criteria: Either of the following:
- Thickness ≥ 85% specified thickness, deficient area ≤ 1 m2, and no other deficient area within 3 m
of this deficient area.
- Thickness ≥ 75% specified thickness, deficient area ≤ 0.2 m2, and no other deficient area within 1 m
of this deficient area.
Thickness gauge: Where possible, use a reliable direct-reading pin-type thickness gauge with a base
plate of 25 mm diameter, of the sort shown in AS 3784.1 Figure 5. Otherwise use prefixed gauges
which will not impair fire performance.
Frequency of measurement:
- Flat substrates: 4 measurements for an area of 3 x 3 m, and 1 measurement for each additional
area of 3 x 3 m. Take measurements where thickness is likely to be low.
- Contoured substrates: As for flat substrates. For trapezoidal shapes take random measurements at
changes in plane. For I columns and beams, take ≥ 1 measurement per 3 m on each surface.
Check thickness across the flange and over the flange edges if the coating appears to taper on the
flanges.
- Substrates overlaid with expanded metal lath or steel wire mesh: As for flat and contoured
substrates. Measure thickness to the face of the overlay.
Dry density measurement
See AS 3784.1 clause 11.9.5 on density and Appendix B on determining density.
Criteria: Manufacturer's stated average dry density ± 15%.
Tools:
- Rule: Steel, accuracy of 1 mm.
- Balance: Accuracy ≥ 1%.
- Template: Known area ≥ 0.1 m2, sides ≥ 150 mm.

Method: Using the template, mark off the known area on a sample. Measure thickness of the sample
at ≥ 10 points using the thickness gauge. Cut out the complete marked-off sample and dry at 50°C
until constant mass is achieved. Determine the mass (kg) and calculate the dry density (kg/m3).
Frequency of measurement: >

Test results
General: Submit results of thickness and density measurements.

DEMOLITION INTERIOR
DEMOLITION
This worksection is applicable to the demolition and removal of internal building elements and services from within an existing
building.
• If the fitout demolition work opens an abutment to an adjoining property or opens an external wall or roof, use Demolition.
• The removal of miscellaneous furniture and equipment.
• None.
You may document this and related work on the drawings as follows:
• Scope of demolition.
• Relocation of items noted for re-use.
1 GENERAL

General
have no overlaps.
>
1.2 STANDARD
General
Demolition: To AS 2601.
1.3 INTERPRETATION
Demolished materials classes
Salvaged for re-use: Demolished materials scheduled for re-use in the works.
Demolished for removal: Other demolished materials.

DEMOLITION INTERIOR
Dilapidation record
The photographic and written record made before commencement of demolition work of the condition
of the existing building, adjacent buildings, and other relevant structures or facilities.
1.4 INSPECTION
Notice
- Services before disconnection or diversion.
- Contents of building before commencement of demolition.
- Site after removal of demolished materials.
- Services after reconnection or diversion.
1.5 SUBMISSIONS
Authorities
Evidence of compliance: Before commencing demolition, submit evidence of the following:
- Requirements of authorities relating to the work under the contract have been ascertained.
- A permit to demolish has been obtained from the appropriate authority.
- Precautions necessary for protection of persons and property have been taken and suitable
protective and safety devices provided to the approval of the relevant authority.
- Treatment for rodent infestation has been carried out and a certificate has been obtained from the
appropriate authority.
- Fees and other costs have been paid.
Investigation and work plan
Work plan: Submit the work plan before demolition or stripping work. Include the following information:
- The method of protection and support for adjacent property.
- Locations and details of necessary service deviations and terminations.
- If removal of asbestos or of material containing asbestos is required, the information specified in
NOHSC 2002 Code of Practice for the Safe Removal of Asbestos. Include information to be
supplied to the removalist clause 1.1, and information to be supplied by the approved removalist
clause 1.2.
- To AS 2601 Section 2.
Approval of a local authority may not apply to minor work. If not required, delete.
Records
Dilapidation record: Submit a copy of the dilapidation record for inspection.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

Demolished materials
Ownership: Ownership of demolished materials is described in the Demolished materials classes
table.
Re-use: If it is proposed to re-use demolished materials in the works, submit proposals.
Salvage: Recover without damage materials to be salvaged, for re-use in conformance with the
Salvaged materials for re-use schedule or for disposal in conformance with the Salvaged materials
for disposal schedule.
Removal: Remove from the site demolished materials which are the property of the contractor. Do not
burn or bury on site.
- Transit: Prevent spillage of demolishing materials in transit.
Burial of harmless non-degradable material such as bricks may be permitted to reduce costs. If so say so and allocate a
location.

DEMOLITION INTERIOR
Demolished materials classes table

Class Ownership
Salvaged for re-use Principal/Proprietor
Demolished for removal Contractor
Salvaged for re-use: e.g. hardware, equipment. If re-use is not permitted either delete or state “Re-use not permitted”.
Salvaged materials for re-use schedule

Item for re-use Location for re-use
3 EXECUTION
3.1 SUPPORT
Major support work, if known in advance to be necessary, should usually be designed by the structural engineer and included as
part of the contract, in which case it should be shown on the drawings and specified.
Temporary support
General: If temporary support is required, certification for its design and installation is required from a
professional engineer engaged by the contractor.
Existing buildings: Until permanent support is provided, provide temporary support for sections of
existing buildings which are to be altered and which normally rely for support on work to be
demolished.
3.2 PROTECTION
Encroachment
General: Prevent the encroachment of demolished materials onto adjoining property, including public
places.
Dust protection
General: Provide dust-proof screens, bulkheads and covers to protect existing finishes and the
immediate environment from dust and debris.
Security
General: If a wall or roof is opened for alterations and additions, provide security against unauthorised
entry to the building.
Temporary screens
General: Fill the whole of designated temporary openings or other spaces using dust and
weatherproof temporary screens, fixed securely to the existing structure, and install to ensure
appropriate shedding of water to avoid damage to retained existing elements or adjacent structures
and contents.
Type: Timber framed screens sheeted with fibre cement and painted. Seal the junctions between the
screens and the openings.
Designated openings: >
Temporary access
General: Provide a substantial temporary doorset fitted with a rim deadlock, and remove on
completion of demolition.
3.3 DEMOLITION
Scope of work

DEMOLITION INTERIOR
NATSPEC does not recommend scope of work clauses. Preferably show the extent of demolition on drawings supplemented
with drawing notes.
Dilapidation record
Purpose: Use the dilapidation record to assess the damage and making good arising out of demolition
work.
Availability: Keep the records of the investigations on site and available for inspection until practical
completion of the contract.
Concrete slabs
General: Using a diamond saw, neatly cut back or trim to new alignment with a clean true face existing
concrete slabs to be partially demolished or penetrated.
Explosives

General
General: Hazardous materials that have already been identified are set out in the Identified
hazardous materials schedule.
Identified hazardous materials schedule
Item Hazardous material Component
Complete where known or shown on the drawings.

Hazardous materials
General: Give notice immediately hazardous materials or conditions are found, including the following:
- Asbestos or material containing asbestos.
- Flammable or explosive liquids or gases.
- Toxic, infective or contaminated materials.
- Radiation or radioactive materials.
- Noxious or explosive chemicals.
- Tanks or other containers which have been used for storage of explosive, toxic, infective or
contaminated substances.
Asbestos removal
Method: Use wet removal methods as recommended in the Code of Practice for the Removal of
Asbestos (NOHSC 2002), including Part 4 for insulation and lagging, and Part 9 for asbestos cement.
Monitoring: Have dust monitoring performed by an independent testing authority.
3.5 COMPLETION
Notice of completion
General: Give at least 7 working days’ notice of completion of demolition so that adjacent structures
may be inspected following completion of demolition.
Making good: Make good any damage arising out of demolition work. Obtain written acceptance from
the owner of each adjoining property of completeness and standard of making good.
Temporary support
General: Clear away at completion of demolition.

LINING INTERIOR
LINING
This worksection is applicable to the installation of internal lining systems.
• Light timber framing for structural sheet bracing.
• Cladding for external cladding.
• Partitions – framed and lined for internal fitout partitions.
• Applied wall finishes for additional wall finishes applied over basic internal lining.
• None
• Locate and schedule the sheet lay-up of framed partitions on drawings.
4 GENERAL
4.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
General: Provide internal lining systems to the Selections.
The design and selection of the lining system should provide a surface that is:
• Resistant to impacts expected in use.
• Resistant to moisture encountered under expected environmental conditions.
• Free of irregularities.
• As a suitable substrate for the nominated final finish.

General
have no overlaps.
>

LINING INTERIOR
• Cladding.
• Applied wall finishes.
4.3 INSPECTION
Notice
Inspection: Give sufficient notice so that inspection may be made of substrate or framing before
installation of linings.
4.4 TOLERANCES
Surface
Flatness, twist, winding and bow: ≤ 1.5 mm deviation from a 1.5 m straightedge placed in any position.
5 PRODUCTS

Plasterboard
Location: >
Grade: >
AS/NZS 2588 defines four grades by performances requirements:
• Standard.
• Bracing.
• Water resistant.
• Fire resistant.
Thickness (mm): >
i.e. 10 mm, 13 mm, 16 mm or 25 mm.
Sheet width (mm): >
i.e. 600 mm, 900 mm, 1200 mm or 1350 mm.
Sheet length (mm): >
Edge finish: >
i.e. square, recessed or bevelled to suit the specified joint finish. See Figure 1 of AS/NZS 2588.
Fibrous plaster sheet
Now made obsolescent, but still available.
Glass fibre plasterboard

Now made obsolescent but still available
Fire resistant: Formulated for additional resistance to fire exposure.
Fibre cement
Wall and ceiling linings: Type B category 2.
Location: >
Type: >

LINING INTERIOR
Category: >
Cladding and soffit linings are manufactured as Type A Category 3, internal linings are Type B Category 2 and compressed
sheets are Type A Category 5.
Thickness (mm): >
Tongue and groove boards
- Grade to AS 2796.2: >
AS 2796.2 describes four grades, select (SEL), medium feature (MF), high feature (HF), and parquet clear.
- Grade: >
1 or 2.
- Grade: To AS 4785.2: >
AS 4785.2 describes five grades, clear (CL), appearance (AP), select (SEL), standard (STD) and utility (UTL).
Plywood and blockboard
Interior use: To AS/NZS 2270.
Marine plywood: To AS/NZS 2272.
Presealed plywood: Plywood presealed both sides and edges with a machine applied sealer.
Visible surfaces with a clear finish: Veneer quality A.
Other visible surfaces: Veneer quality B.
Grade: >
Back/face veneer: >
Bond: >
Plywood:
- Location or application: >
- Type: >
- Thickness (mm): >
- Bond:
“A” (water resistant) or “B”.
- Surface grade: >
Blockboard:
- Location or application: >
- Type: >
- Thickness (mm): >
- Bond: >
“A” (water resistant) or “B”.
- Surface grade: >
Wet processed fibreboard
- Interior use generally: General purpose.
. Bending strength: >
Bending strength: L, M or H, low, medium or high bending strength.
- Interior use heavy duty: Tempered (MR).
- Interior moisture area: Tempered (MR).
LINING INTERIOR
- Veneered hardboard: General purpose with a timber face veneer bonded to one side.
. Surface finish: >
. Thickness (mm): >
Softboard (Insulation board): To AS 1859.4.
- Surface finish: >
- Edge finish: >
- Bending strength >
- Thickness (mm): >
High pressure decorative laminate sheet
Particleboard
Classification: >
Standard (STD), moisture resistant (MR) or high performance (HP) intended for use in continuously humid conditions or for load
bearing application.
Coated steel
Fasteners
Steel nails: Hot dip galvanized.
Adhesives
Contact adhesives: To AS 2131.
For plasterboard: To AS 2753.
For wallboards: Mastic adhesive.
Sealants
Fire rated sealant: Non-hardening sealant compatible with the materials to be sealed and having a fire
rating equal to that of the partition it seals.
Acoustic sealant: Non-hardening sealant compatible with the materials to be sealed and having a
specific gravity of not less than 1.5 gm/cubic centimetre and of 100% polyurethane mastic.
6 EXECUTION

Conditions
Do not commence lining work until such time as the building or zone in question is enclosed and
weathertight and all wet trades have been completed.
Substrates or framing
General: Before fixing linings check and, if necessary, adjust the alignment of substrates or framing.
Battens
General: Fix at each crossing with structural framing members, or direct to solid walls or ceilings.
Provide wall plugs in solid backgrounds.
Ceiling linings
General: Do not install until at least 14 days after the timber roof structure is fully loaded.
General: Provide accessories and trim necessary to complete the installation.
Adhesives
General: Provide adhesives of types appropriate to their purpose, and apply them so that they transmit
the loads imposed, without causing discolouration of finished surfaces.

LINING INTERIOR
6.2 PLASTERBOARD LINING

Supports
General: Install timber battens or proprietary cold-formed galvanized steel furring channels as follows:
- Where framing member spacing exceeds the recommended spacing.
- Where direct fixing of the plasterboard is not possible due to the arrangement or alignment of the
framing or substrate.
- Where the lining is the substrate for tiled finishes.
Transverse walls: Locate noggings as follows:
- At least 150 mm from the horizontal joint.
- Ensure that noggings do not protrude beyond the face of studs.
Installation
Gypsum plasterboard: To AS/NZS 2589.1.
Fibre reinforced gypsum plaster: To AS/NZS 2589.2.
Framed construction: Screw or nail or combine with adhesive.
Metal stud frames: Screw using galvanized self tapping screws, or retain using proprietary clamping
straps and cover trims.
Masonry construction: Fix using adhesive direct to masonry.
Suspended ceilings: Fix using screw or screw and adhesive to ceiling members.
To furring channels: Fix using screw or screw and adhesive.
Multiple sheet layers
Application: Fire rated and acoustic rated walls.
Joints: Fill and flush up all joints and fixings in each layer and caulk up perimeters and penetrations
before commencing succeeding layers. Stagger all sheet joints by minimum 200 mm.
Joints
Flush joints: Provide recessed edge sheets and finish flush using perforated paper reinforcing tape.
Butt joints: Make joints over framing members or otherwise provide back blocking.
External corner joints: Make joints over metallic-coated steel corner beads.
Dry joints: Provide square edged sheet and finish with a UPVC joining section.
Control joints: Install purpose-made metallic-coated control joint beads at not more than 12 m centres
in walls and ceilings and to coincide with structural movement joints.
Wet areas: Install additional supports, flashings, trim and sealants as required.
Joints in tiled areas: Do not apply a topping coat after bedding perforated paper tape in bedding
compound.
6.3 FIBRE CEMENT LINING

Supports
General: Install timber battens or proprietary cold-formed galvanized steel furring channels as follows:
- Where framing member spacing exceeds the recommended spacing.
- Where direct fixing of the fibre cement is not possible due to the arrangement or alignment of the
framing or substrate.
- Where the lining is the substrate for tiled finishes.
Installation
General: Run sheets across the framing members. In flush jointed applications, stagger end joints in a
brick pattern and locate them on framing members, away from the corners of large openings. Provide
supports at edges and joints.
Timber framed construction: Nail only or combined with adhesive.
Steel framed construction: Screw only or combined with adhesive.
Wall framing: Do not fix to top and bottom plates or noggings.
- In tiled areas: Provide an extra row of noggings immediately above wall-to-floor flashings. Fix sheet
at 150 mm centres to each stud and around the perimeter of the sheet.

LINING INTERIOR
Masonry construction: Fix using adhesive direct to masonry, but do not fix direct to masonry as a
substrate for tiled finish.
Suspended flush ceilings: Fix using screw or screw and adhesive to ceiling members or support frame.
Do not fix sheets to the bottom chords of trusses.
Ceilings and soffits: Provide battens where fixing to underside of rafters, roof trusses and purlins.
Wet areas: To AS 3740.
Multiple sheet layers
Application: Fire rated and acoustic rated walls.
Joints: Fill and flush up all joints and fixings in each layer and caulk up perimeters and penetrations
before commencing succeeding layers. Stagger all sheet joints by minimum 200 mm.
Joints
- Movement joints in walls: Position a stud parallel to the joint on each side.
- Movement joints in ceilings and soffits: Provide movement joints to divide ceilings into bays not
larger than 10.8 x 7.2 m and soffit linings into bays not larger than 4.2 x 4.2 m or 5.4 x 3.6 m.
Provide framing parallel to the joint on each side. Do not fix the lining to abutting building surfaces.
Dry joints: Provide square edged sheet and finish with a UPVC joining section.
Control joints: Provide purpose-made metallic-coated control joint beads at ≤ 7.2 m centres in walls
and ceilings and to coincide with structural movement joints.
Wet areas: Provide additional supports, flashings, trim and sealants as required.
Joints in tiled areas: Bed perforated paper tape in bedding compound. Do not apply a topping coat.
- Movement joints: Space to suit joints required in tiling.
- Internal corners: Reinforce with metallic-coated steel angles. In corners subject to continuous
moisture, flash over the angle and under the sheeting with continuous bitumen coated aluminium
flashing.
6.4 TONGUE AND GROOVE TIMBER LINING

Installation
General: Whenever possible provide single lengths of boards when installed horizontally. Provide
single lengths only when installed vertically.
Stained or clear finished boards: Select board to give a random pattern. At corners return the same
board to give a continuous grain pattern.
Fixing: Nail twice to each crossing except for secret nailed profiles.
Nailheads: Treat visible nailheads as follows:
- In stained or clear finishes: Drive flush.
- In opaque finishes: Punch below surface and fill flush with putty after the surface has been primed.
Joints
End grain joints: Install boards so that butt joints are in compression.
Internal corners: Scribe.
External corners: Mitre.
Corner joint treatment: Vary as required or detail on the drawings.
Boards
Location: >
Timber species: >
Grade: >
Profile: >
Thickness (mm): >
Width (mm): >
Orientation of boards: >

LINING INTERIOR
6.5 TIMBER PANEL LINING

General
Location: >
Panel material: >
Installation: Set out in even panels with joints coinciding with framing members.
Fixing:
- Plywood and hardboard: Wallboard adhesive or pin fixed to timber frame, screw fixed to steel frame.
Punch pin heads just below surface.
- Laminated plastic: Wallboard adhesive.
6.6 CALCIUM SILICATE BOARD LINING

Material
General: Rigid low-density autoclaved calcium silicate board. Provide accessories, fastenings,
adhesives, fillers and protective coatings.
Timber floor protection
Preparation: Ensure the timber floor is flat and smooth.
Under layer: Calcium silicate board. Lay the sheets butt jointed in a brick pattern (joints staggered in
one direction). Fix to the floor with screws countersunk below the board surface, and stopped with a
hard setting filler. Similarly fill edge and joint irregularities. Sand flush.
Upper layer: Autoclaved fibre cement flat sheet, thickness 6 mm. Lay the sheets in a brick pattern.
Stagger the joints in the upper and under layers. Fix to the under layer with countersunk self-tapping
screws and ceramic tile adhesive.
Metal stud frame protection
Using lining and core filling to metal stud frames to provide a fire resistance level to AS 1530.4.
Lining: 9 mm thick calcium silicate board. Screw fix with butt joints to both sides of the frame through
calcium silicate frame facing strips.
Core filling:
- For 60/60/60 fire resistance level: Mineral wool of ≥ 23 kg/m3 density, 60 mm thick.
- For 120/120/120 fire resistance level: Two layers, each 30 mm thick, of mineral wool of minimum
density 100 kg/m3, placed with staggered joints.
Timber stud frame protection
Using lining to timber stud framing to provide 60/60/60 fire resistance level to AS 1530.4.
Lining: Calcium silicate board in two 9 mm thick layers. Nail fix with butt joints to both sides of the
frame. In walls up to 3 m high provide full height sheets without horizontal joints.
Clearance: Leave 12 mm gap between the top and outside edges of the linings and the adjacent
surfaces. Fill the gap with vermiculite plaster. Similarly fill the joints in the first layer to at least 150 mm
each side of the point where a joint in the second layer will cross.
Fire resistance level schedule
Element Location Fire resistance level (to
AS 1530.4)
Joints
General: Make butt joints true and flush. For single layer construction provide 6 mm thick cover strip
on the rear face of the joint. For multi-layer systems stagger the joints in the inner and outer layers at
least 100 mm.
Access panels
Maximum panel size: 1500 mm long x 750 mm wide.

LINING INTERIOR
Panel fixing: Fix to structure with masonry anchors. For single layer systems provide 75 x 25 mm
battens of calcium silicate fixed to the structure.
6.7 CEILING ACCESS

General
Location: Provide personnel access ways to each separate ceiling space.
Size (mm): >
Type: >
Material: Match adjacent ceiling.
Opening size: Maximise the space available within a 600 x 600 mm ceiling grid.
Types
Trimmed personnel access ways: Plain cover supported on all sides by timber trim fixed to underside
of ceiling.
Flush personnel access ways: Cover fitted with rebated frame and set flush with the surrounding
ceiling.
6.8 TRIM
General
General: Provide trim such as beads, mouldings and stops to make neat junctions between lining
components, finishes and adjacent surfaces.
Describe where prompted or refer to detail. Locate to your office documentation policy.
Timber trim
Hardwood: AS 2796.1.
- Grade: >
See AS 2796.2 and AS 4785.2.
Cypress pine: AS 1810.
- Grade: To AS 4785.2.
Components
Door architraves: >
. Grade: >
. Size (h x t) (mm): >
Window architraves: >
. Grade: >
Timber skirtings: >
. Grade: >
. Profile: >
- Fixing:
. Masonry: Fix to wall plugs.
. Stud walls: Fix to bottom plates.
Ducted skirtings: >
- Height: >
- Face plate finish: >
- No. channels: >
Plasterboard cornice: >

LINING INTERIOR
- Size: >
Timber cornices: >
. Grade: >
. Profile: >
Picture rails: >
. Grade: >
. Profile: >
Dado rails: >
. Grade: >
. Profile: >
Pelmet: >
. Grade: >
. Profile: >
Trim to free edges: >
. Grade: >
. Profile: >
7 SELECTIONS
7.1 SHEET LINING

Sheet lining schedule
Lining designation L1 L2 L3
Location
Type
Thickness (mm)
Configuration
Edge type
Joint type
Fixing
Level of finish
Battens:
- Size (mm)
- Spacing
Lining trim:
- Re entrant corners

LINING INTERIOR
Lining designation L1 L2 L3
- Salient angles
- Edge trim
- Shadowline
Fire rated materials (e.g. expanded vermiculite boards) can be most easily identified by proprietary item.
Location: e.g. bulkheads, fire-rated ceiling, room type or identifier, or use Lining designation on drawings or in a Finishes
schedule or Wall type schedule.
Configuration: e.g. “Horizontal”, “Vertical”, “Double thickness”.
Joint type: e.g. “Butt” or “Flush”.
Level of finish: To AS/NZS 2589.1
Level 0 Temporary construction Appendix C
Level 1 Concealed work Appendix D
Level 2 Warehouse, storage area Appendix E
Level 3 For heavy texture or paper finish Appendix F
Level 4 Domestic construction Clause 7
Level 5 For gloss or semi-gloss paint finish Appendix G

PARTITIONS – SYSTEMS INTERIOR
PARTITIONS – SYSTEMS
This worksection is applicable to complete proprietary partition systems.
• Doors and hatches and Door hardware for partition door leafs and hardware.
• Partitions – framed and lined for framed and lined (drywall) partitions built in situ.
• Partitions – glazed for framed and glazed partitions and frameless glass partitions.
• Cubicle systems or Terrazzo precast for toilet or shower partitions.
• Room dividers for room dividers.
• Applied wall finishes for decorative claddings to partitions.
• None.
• Indicate the location and a scheduled description of partitions on drawings to your office documentation policy.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
General: Provide partitions in conformance with the Selections and as follows, where H is the height
of the partition:
- To remain stable and not show signs of deflection or permanent deformation and without rattle.
- To support structural design actions, including designated eccentric loads (e.g. loads on attached
shelves or brackets), so that deflections will not exceed:
. H/180 in door frames.
. H/500 for eccentric loads on partitions.
. The lesser of H/240 or 30 mm for partitions subjected to wind actions and lined with a flexible
cladding.

General
have no overlaps.

>
• Windows.
• Glazing.
• Door hardware.
• Partitions – framed and lined.
• Cubicle systems or Terrazzo – precast.
• Room dividers.
1.3 INTERPRETATION
Definitions
- Partition – fully demountable: A partition system in which any component may be demounted
without damage, using only small hand tools, and subsequently reassembled without cutting,
trimming or refinishing.
- Partition – semi demountable: A partition system in which the major components are designed to
be removed and reused but panels or linings, which are likely to be damaged during removal, are
not.
- Partition – non demountable: A partition system in which major components, such as panels or
linings, are likely to be damaged during removal and may require cutting, trimming or structural
repair before reuse.
1.4 INSPECTION
Notice
Inspection: Give sufficient notice so that inspection may be made of the following stages:
- Set-out before installation.
- Installation of framing / fixings before they are enclosed.
1.5 SUBMISSIONS
Samples
General: Submit samples as follows:
- A sample, at least 300 mm square, of each panel type.
- Floor and ceiling fixings and adjustments.
- Samples at least 100 mm long of each structural section, including posts, sills, transoms, door
frames, ceiling channels and metal channel headrails, and each moulding, cover strip and bead.
- Skirting, skirting duct, skirting duct stop ends, returns and removable covers.
If prototypes are specified, separate samples of visible components may not be necessary.
Prototype
General: Erect a prototype of each partition type, including at least one example of each component in
the system.
- Location and extent: >
Preferably show on the drawings the location and extent of the prototype and the number and type of components to be
included. Delete if the size of the project does not justify a prototype.

Shop drawings
General: Submit shop drawings of each partition type, showing the following details and associated
information where applicable:
- Dimensions, clearances, tolerances.
- Door frame details.
- Glazing methods.
- Large scale details of construction methods of assembly, trim, jointing and finishing.
- Methods of fixing partitions and linings.
- Method of providing reticulation of services, access to services, and service outlets.
- Performance data of components and assemblies.
- Specification of materials and finishes.
Subcontractors
General: Submit name and contact details of proposed manufacturers and installers.
Type-test reports
General: Submit type-test reports to verify conformance with the Partition performance schedule
and as follows:
Fire hazard properties:
- Average specific extinction area (non-sprinklered buildings): < 250m2/kg to AS/NZS 3837.
- Group number: To AS/NZS 3837 and BCA Spec A2.4, or AS ISO 9705.
- Smoke-Developed index: To AS/NZS 1530.3.
- Smoke development rate: < 750 percent-minutes to AS ISO 9239.1.
- Smoke growth rate index (non-sprinklered buildings): < 100 to AS ISO 9705 and BCA Spec A2.4.
Spread of flame index: To AS/NZS 1530.3.
- Impact resistance, glazed partitions: To withstand impact without permanent deformation, damage,
failure of fastenings and the like.
. Energy level (J): >
Select energy level from AS/NZS 2208 Appendix B. e.g. “90 J” for confined spaces such as showers, “135 J” or “203 J” for
larger spaces, and for light and heavy doors respectively, “541 J” for virtually unlimited moving body acceleration paths.
The AS/NZS 2208 Appendix D method is used to test safety glazing materials (laminated or toughened safety glass) for
grading. The performance criteria and human dynamics data upon which the test is based are described in Appendix B. Delete
if testing for impact resistance is not required.
. Test method: Use the apparatus and procedure of the shot-bag test of AS/NZS 2208,
Appendix D.
- Impact resistance, lightweight partitions: To withstands impact without permanent deformation,
damage, failure of fastenings and the like.
. Drop height (mm): >
. Test method: Use the apparatus and procedure of the sand-bag test of ASTM E695 and BCA
Specification C1.8.
- Pressure resistance: To withstand a uniformly distributed load normal to the plane of the partition
without permanent deformation or damage or excessive deflection:
Uniformly distributed load: e.g. 0.25 kPa – 0.5 kPa if in cyclonic area.
. Load: >
. Test method: ASTM E72 and BCA Specification C1.8.
- Weighted sound reduction index (Rw): To AS/NZS 1276.1 or ISO 717-1.
- Weighted standardised level difference (DnT,w): To AS/NZS 1276.1 or ISO 717-1.
1.6 TOLERANCES
General
Deviation (from true grid lines and planes): 1:1000 up to 3 mm maximum.
Misalignment (of adjoining surfaces at grid junctions): 1 mm maximum.

Panel thickness: + 1 mm maximum, - 0.

Length and width: ± 1/1000th of the dimension or 0.5 mm, whichever is the greater.
Flatness, twist, winding and bow: Maximum 1.5 mm deviation from a 1.5 mm straightedge placed in
any position.
Maximum deviation of edges from the intended true line: 1 mm.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PARTITIONS
General
General: Provide proprietary non-load-bearing partition wall framing and lining comprising cold formed
steel or extruded aluminium members, or both, in conformance with the Partition construction
schedule.
Building movements
General: Provide clearances or movement joints so that partitions are not damaged by structural
building movements such as long term slab deflection. Where fire resistance or acoustic properties are
specified provide a resilient foam or mastic seal having properties equal to those required for the
partition.
Control joints
General: Provide for control joints in sheet finishes where required by the structural frame or the Lining
worksection.
Metal frames
Aluminium alloy: 5005.
Coated steel: To AS 1397.
Plenum baffles
Impregnated vinyl: Lead impregnated vinyl sheeting hung as a curtain from the slab soffit.
Plasterboard: Plasterboard sheets bonded together (if more than one layer).
Select materials and detail baffles to maintain the weighted sound reduction index nominated for the partition
3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
General
General: Prepare the base to receive the partitions. If fixing partitions on carpet, fix bottom track over
polyethylene film.
Pre-conditioning
General: Condition wood based product components in the anticipated environment for two weeks
prior to assembly.
Set out
General: Set out the partitions so that the partition grid, as expressed in panel joints and centrelines of
frame members, coincides with the ceiling grid and the building grid, as applicable.
3.2 ERECTION
Partition erection
General: Install the partitions so they:
- Are plumb, level, on their correct alignments, and firmly fixed.
- Have adequate top support by fixing the top plate to the ceiling structure or slab soffit, or are
stabilised by lapping and fastening intersecting or butting plates together.
- Have bottom plates fixed at 600 mm maximum centres generally, and 100 mm maximum from ends.
- Have studs fixed to the bottom plates at door frames, corners and intersections with self-tapping
screws, not with pop rivets or crimping.
- Have studs spaced as required by the lining, but in any case at 600 mm maximum centres.

Edit to suit partition system.

Fastening
General: Assemble the frames at door openings with self-drilling self-tapping screws or with blind
rivets.
Fixing
General: Conceal fixings. For demountable items provide fixings capable of being repeatedly removed
and replaced without damage to finishes.
Fixing to masonry: Provide masonry anchors of expansion or chemical grout type. Do not provide
explosive-driven fastenings.
Fixing to suspended ceilings: Provide adequate top support to the partition without damage to the
ceiling components.
Protection
General: Protect existing work from damage during the installation and make good any damage.
Provide temporary coverings if necessary.
Splicing
General: Splice plates at ends to maintain continuity and alignment.
Sound properties
General: Preserve the sound reduction properties of partitions by sealing flanking sound transmission
paths during installation, including junctions between partitions and other building surfaces, air gaps
around doorsets, recesses, such as pelmets and blind boxes and cut-outs for services. Avoid cut-outs
next to or back-to-back with each other.
Sealing methods: Use appropriate sealing methods, such as purpose-made solid profiled inserts,
durable resilient gaskets or closed cell foam strips. Provide solid resilient materials in preference to
foamed materials whenever possible.
Preferably show on the drawings the actual methods and materials for sealing junctions with the building structure.
Details of partition junctions with window mullions may have to accommodate deflection while maintaining acoustic properties.
Support
General: Provide additional support in the form of noggings, trimmers and studs for fixing hardware,
fixtures and fittings. Box studs to frame door openings, and provide additional top support independent
of the ceiling, where the studs are fixed to the underside of an exposed grid ceiling.
Bracing: Independently brace the partition if sufficient bracing is not provided by the building structure.
3.3 SERVICES
Services access
General: Conceal reticulation of associated building services, either within cavities in the partition
structure, or within ducted skirtings supplied as part of the partition system, or both. Provide removable
or demountable components of the partition system, for access to services concealed within partition
cavities.
Service holes
General: For services within the partition utilise factory precut flared holes, or provide site cut holes
punched or drilled on the centreline of the member and fit proprietary plastic bushes or grommets.
Splice additional stiffening to studs if site cut service holes exceed 1/3 the depth of the member.
Show sufficient details of the services on the drawings (e.g. diagrammatic service runs, cable, pipe or duct sizes, outlets, etc.).
The clause Submissions requires the method of reticulation to be shown on the shop drawings. Consider access for repairs,
etc. Show access panels on the drawings.
3.4 PLENUM BAFFLES

Baffles
General: Install plenum baffles so that they fit closely up to the surfaces of the building structure,
service ducts, pipes and conduits and to the top of the partition or to the top of the suspended ceiling
structure directly above the line of the partition. Seal the joints, penetrations and intersections with a
suitable material so that the required performance is maintained.
Required for sound attenuation when partitions do not extend to the underside of the structural soffit.

Fire rated partitions

General: Except where a suspended ceiling of equivalent fire resistance is to be provided, either
extend fire resistant partitions to the soffit of the fire rated structural system above, or provide plenum
baffles of equivalent fire-resistance.
Edit, or delete if detailed.
Rw rated partitions
General: Except where a suspended ceiling of equivalent Rw rating is to be provided, either extend the
partitions to the soffit of the structural system above, or provide plenum baffles. The ceiling and baffle
to provide a combined rating equivalent to the partition rating.
Edit, or delete if detailed.
3.5 COMPLETION
Installer’s warranty
General: Submit the installer’s warranty against defective materials and workmanship for a minimum
period of 10 years.
- Warranty terms: >
Warranty terms: State requirements, if any, additional to those in the template, for each relevant item.
Maintenance manual
General: On completion submit a maintenance manual including recommendations for the care and
maintenance of the partitions, and instructions for demounting and relocation where applicable, for the
reinstatement of acoustic properties after relocation and for the attachment of fixtures. Include a list of
manufacturers and suppliers of the various partition system components.
4 SELECTIONS
4.1 SCHEDULES
Partition construction schedule
Type
A B C
Proprietary system
Demountability
Lining:
- Side A
- Side B
- Fixing
- Edge
Trim:
- Skirting
- Head
Glazing
Framing
Plenum baffles
Demountability: E.g. fully demountable, semi demountable or non demountable.

Partition performance schedule

Type
A B C
Additional structural actions
Weighted standardised level difference
DnT,w
- Group number
- Smoke development rate
- Smoke-Developed index
- Spread of flame index

PARTITIONS – FRAMED AND LINED INTERIOR
PARTITIONS – FRAMED AND LINED
This worksection is applicable to internal partitions framed in either lightweight steel or timber and lined; as a complete trade
package.
• Light timber framing and Lining or Light steel framing for framed internal loadbearing walls or framed walls integral to the
building (i.e. domestic construction).
• Doors and hatches and Door hardware for partition door leafs and hardware.
• Acoustic insulation for acoustic treatment.
• Partitions – systems for proprietary partition systems.
• Partitions – glazed for glazed partitions.
• Cubicle systems or Terrazzo – precast as appropriate for toilet or shower partitions.
• Applied wall finishes for decorative claddings to partitions.
• None.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
General: Provide internal lining systems to the Selections.
The specifiers aims include documenting partitions that are expected to be:
• Free of irregularities.
• A suitable substrate for the nominated final finish.

General
have no overlaps.

>
• Acoustic insulation.
• Cubicle systems or Terrazzo – precast.
1.3 INSPECTION
Notice
Inspection: Give sufficient notice so that inspection may be made of wall framing before installation of
linings.
1.4 TOLERANCES
General
any position.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 LIGHT STEEL FRAMES

Wall framing
General: Proprietary framing system of folded steel strip lipped studs and channel section top and
bottom tracks and noggings.
Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating to AS 1397.
Nominate the product if appropriate.
2.2 TIMBER FRAMES

Wall framing
Gauging: Provide gauged timbers in studs, noggings and plates for double faced walls.
Timber species or group: Radiata pine.
Seasoning: Required.
Stress grade: F5 to AS/NZS 1748.
Or “F8” to “F14” (unseasoned hardwood), “F5” (Radiata pine), “F5” to “F7” (Oregon).
2.3 LINING
Plasterboard
Fibrous plaster sheet
Fibre cement
Wall and ceiling linings: Type B category 2.

Adhesives
General: Provide adhesives of types appropriate to their purpose, and apply them so that they transmit
the loads imposed, without causing discolouration of finished surfaces.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
Substrate
General: Prepare the substrate to receive the partitions. On carpet, fix bottom tracks over polyethylene
film.
Set out
General: Set out the partitions so that the partition grid, as expressed in the centreline of frame
members, coincides with the ceiling grid and the building grid, as applicable.
Conform to tolerances as follows:
- Misalignment (of adjoining surfaces at grid junctions): 1 mm maximum.
- Deviation (from true grid lines and planes): 1:1000 up to 3 mm maximum.
3.2 LIGHT STEEL FRAMES

Tracks
General:
- Fix bottom tracks to floor substrate.
- Fix top wall tracks to suspended ceiling tracks.
- Fix deflection head tracks to the floor slab soffit.
Fixing to masonry: Provide masonry anchors of expansion or chemical grout type. Do not provide
explosive-driven fastenings.
Track fixing: ≤ 600 mm centres, and 100 mm from ends. Splice plates at ends to maintain continuity
and alignment.
Stud framing
General: Provide studs in single lengths without splices. Rotate intermediate studs into tracks for
friction fixing. Screw fix jamb studs, corner studs and wall intersection studs to tracks.
Fix noggings at 1350 mm maximum centres vertically and as required for skirtings and wet area lining.
Detail wet area wall and floor systems, and installation requirements for sanitary fittings.
Lintels: Install a stiffened top plate lintel for spans ≤ 1800 mm.
Specify or detail a truss built up from frame members for larger openings.
Jambs
General: Install boxed double studs at jambs to all openings.
Vary as required for integral door frame/lining systems.
Additional frame support
General: Provide noggings for the fixing and support of:
- Floor mounted fixed joinery units and furniture.
- All wet area fittings and fixtures.
- All grab rails and handrails.
Timber nogging: Provide 240 x 40 mm timber nogging with proprietary stud fixing brackets for wall
hung sanitary fittings.
Stud stiffening: Provide stud stiffening to support wall hung joinery units with:
- Full height close fitting timber inserts.
- Boxed steel lipped studs.
Select from alternatives or detail on drawings. Coordinate with Joinery.
Structural floor movement joints
General: Discontinue walls over joints with detached double studs and ensure bottom plates are not
fastened across joints.

Stud service holes

General: Utilise factory precut flared holes, or provide site cut holes punched or drilled on the
centreline of the member and fit proprietary plastic bushes or grommets. Splice additional stiffening to
studs if site cut service holes exceed 1/3 the depth of the member
Show sufficient details of the services on the drawings (e.g. diagrammatic service runs, cable, pipe or duct sizes, outlets, etc.).
Consider access for repairs, etc. Show access panels on the drawings.
Metal separation
General: Install lagging to isolate non-ferrous service pipes and accessories from the metal framing.
Earthing
Permanent earthing: Required.
Temporary earthing: Provide temporary earthing during erection until the permanent earthing is
installed.
CCA treated timber
General: Do not fix in contact with cold-formed steel framing.
Cavity Walls
General: If bridging is nominated follow the manufacturer’s recommendations.
Staggered stud framed walls
General: Provide 64 mm studs staggered at 300 mm centres set in 92 mm top and bottom plates so
that each face has stud fixings at 600 mm centres.
Vary as required or detail on drawings.
Acoustic requirements
General: If steel stud walls are noted for acoustic treatment isolate the frames from floors, ceilings and
vertical abutments with beads of non-hardening sealant compatible with the materials to be sealed
and having a specific gravity of not less than 1.5 gm/cm3.
3.3 TIMBER FRAMES

Moisture content
General: Do not commence construction of wall framing unless the moisture content of the timber has
been tested to AS 1080.1 and values obtained as follows:
- Airconditioned buildings: 8 to 10%.
- Intermittently heated buildings: 10 to 12.5%.
- Unheated buildings: 12 to 15%.
If these values are not achieved allow for acclimatisation.
Wall framing
General: Construct wall frames to AS 1684.2 Section 6 as appropriate for internal walls.
Gauging: Provide gauged timbers in studs, noggings and plates for double faced walls.
Acoustic requirements
General: If walls are noted for acoustic treatment isolate the frame from floors, ceilings and vertical
abutments with beads of non-hardening sealant compatible with the materials to be sealed and having
a specific gravity of not less than 1.5 gm/cubic cm.
3.4 LINING
Framing
General: Before fixing linings check and, if necessary, adjust the alignment of substrates or framing.
Plasterboard
Gypsum plasterboard: To AS/NZS 2589.1.
- Level of finish: >
Basic plasterboard installation requirements are covered by AS/NZS 2589.1 which defines six levels of finish:
Level 0 Temporary construction Appendix C
Level 1 Concealed work Appendix D
Level 2 Warehouse, storage area Appendix E
Level 3 For heavy texture or paper finish Appendix F
Level 4 Domestic construction Clause 7

Level 5 For gloss or semi-gloss paint finish Appendix G

Framed construction: Screw or nail or combine with adhesive.
Metal stud frames: Screw using galvanized self tapping screws, or retain using proprietary clamping
straps and cover trims.
Butt joints: Make joints over framing members or otherwise provide back blocking.
Control joints: Install purpose-made zinc coated control joint assemblies incorporating compressible
beads and backed with flexible mastic. Locate control joints ≤ 12 m centres in uninterrupted walls, at
structural movement joints, joints required in tiling and at changes in background.
Wet areas: Install additional supports, flashings, trim and sealants as required.
Joints in tiled areas: Do not apply a topping coat after bedding perforated paper tape in bedding
compound.
Fibre cement
General: Run sheets across the framing members. In flush jointed applications, stagger end joints in a
brick pattern and locate them on framing members, away from the corners of large openings. Provide
supports at edges and joints.
Timber framed construction: Nail only or combined with adhesive.
Steel framed construction: Screw only or combined with adhesive.
Wall framing: Do not fix to top and bottom plates or noggings.
- In tiled areas: Provide an extra row of noggings immediately above wall-to-floor flashings. Fix sheet
at 150 mm centres to each stud and around the perimeter of the sheet.
Control joints: Install purpose-made zinc coated control joint assemblies incorporating compressible
beads and backed with flexible mastic. Locate control joints ≤ 7.2 m centres in uninterrupted walls, at
structural movement joints, joints required in tiling and at changes in background.
Joints in tiled areas: Bed perforated paper tape in bedding compound. Do not apply a topping coat.
Internal corners: Reinforce with metallic-coated steel angles. In corners subject to continuous
moisture, flash over the angle and under the sheeting with continuous bitumen coated aluminium
flashing.
3.5 TRIMS
General
General: Provide trim such as beads, mouldings and stops to make neat junctions between lining
components, finishes and adjacent surfaces.
Describe where prompted or refer to detail. Locate to your office documentation policy.
Timber trim
Hardwood: AS 2796.1.
- Grade: >
See AS 2796.2 and AS 4785.2.
Cypress pine: AS 1810.
- Grade: To AS 4785.2.
Standard general purpose medium density fibreboard (STD MDF): To AS/NZS 1859.2.
Components
Door architraves: >
. Grade: >
Window architraves: >

. Grade: >
Timber skirtings: >
. Grade: >
. Profile: >
- Fixing:
. Masonry: Fix to wall plugs.
. Stud walls: Fix to bottom plates.
Ducted skirtings: >
- Height: >
- Face plate finish: >
- No. channels: >
Plasterboard cornice: >
- Size: >
Timber cornices: >
. Grade: >
. Profile: >
Picture rails: >
. Grade: >
. Profile: >
Dado rails: >
. Grade: >
. Profile: >
Pelmet: >
. Grade: >
. Profile: >
Trim to free edges: >
. Grade: >
. Profile: >
Junctions at abutments
Material: >
Finish: >
Specify here or note as detailed.

3.6 COMPLETION
Protection
General: Protect existing work from during the installation and make good any damage. Provide
temporary coverings if necessary.
4 SELECTIONS
Light steel framing schedule

Property P1 P2 P3
Wall type
Member size:
- Lipped wall studs
- “C” channel wall studs
- Wall stud tracks
- Deflection head tracks
Nogging tracks
Stud spacing
Thickness (BMTmm)
- Non-fire rated
- Fire rated
Configuration
- Floor to ceiling
- Floor to floor slab soffit
- Cavity wall
. With bridging
. Without bridging
- Staggered stud wall
- Curved wall
Select sizes and stud spacing to suit the lining details, wall type and the maximum wall height as set out in the tables published
by the manufacturer. Nominate BMT (base metal thickness).
Wall types include single leaf walls, cavity walls with or without bridging, staggered stud wall frames or curved walls.
Light timber framing schedule

Property P1 P2 P3
Wall type
Size:
- Wall studs
- Plates
- Deflection head tracks
- Nogging
Stud spacing
Configuration
- Floor to ceiling
- Floor to floor slab soffit
- Cavity wall

Property P1 P2 P3
. With bridging
- Without bridging
- Staggered stud wall
- Curved wall
Member sizes: Nominate sizes or call for conformance with AS 1684.Sections 6 of AS 1684 parts 2, 3 and 4 specify non-
loadbearing partitions.
Deflection head: Nominate a light steel product or detail on drawings.
Stud spacings: 450 mm or 600 mm are the AS 1684 alternatives. May be shown on the drawings. Select to suit the sheeting or
lining.
Sheet lining schedule

Lining designation P1 P2 P3
Material
Grade
Lining system
Thickness (mm)
Configuration
Edge type
Joint type
Fixing
Cornice
Material: Plasterboard, fibre cement.

Plasterboard grade: AS/NZS 2588 defines four grades by performances requirements:
• Standard.
• Bracing.
• Water resistance.
• Fire resistant.
Consult the manufacturer’s literature for information on availability and system performance. Fire rated materials can be most
easily identified by proprietary item.
Fibre cement grade: The standard for cellulose fibre cement flat sheets AS/NZS 2908.2 classifies sheets according to their
application (Type A or B) and mechanical and minimum modulus of rupture (Category 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5). Internal linings are Type
B Category 2.
Lining system: Select to suit the wall function i.e. fire rated walls, acoustic requirements. Consider nominating a supplier’s
system reference number to ensure compliance for particular properties e.g. CSR 075 for -/120/120 FRL and Rw 45-54.
Fire-rated construction has particular abutment requirements.
Configuration: e.g. “Horizontal”, “Vertical”, “Double thickness”.
Joint type: e.g. “Butt” or “Flush”.
Cornice:
• For flush jointed sheeting e.g. plasterboard, scotia cornice is available 55 mm, 75 mm or 90 mm.
• Shadowline trim at top wall track.
• Set plaster joint.
• Refer to 3.5 TRIMS

Partition performance schedule

Type or location
P1 P2 P3
- Group number
Weighted sound reduction index (Rw)

PARTITIONS – BRICK AND BLOCK INTERIOR
PARTITIONS – BRICK AND BLOCK
This worksection is applicable to internal non-load bearing brick and block construction of a simple nature associated with
interior fitout works.
• Brick and block construction for facebrick, exterior or load bearing brick or block construction.
• Stone masonry for stone masonry.
• None.
• Consider documenting the location and a scheduled description of masonry walls on drawings.
• Locate fire rated walls and nominate FRL(s).
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
General: Provide internal non-load bearing brick and block walls to the Selections.

General
have no overlaps.
>
1.3 STANDARD
General
Familiarity with this standard is essential. Design to AS 3700 is assumed not to be the contractor’s responsibility. This
worksection assumes the selection of masonry units has been made to conform to AS 3700 with regard to wall dimensions and
fire resistance levels.

AS 3700 is cited in the BCA for structural sufficiency, and for sound transmission.
AS 3700, Section 11, Construction covers general requirements for construction, including protection of materials, moisture
content of masonry units, bedding, preparation of movement control joints, cutting and chasing of masonry units, rate of
construction, construction during adverse weather conditions, construction of grouted masonry, protection of new and
incomplete work, tolerances, cavity construction, jointing, installing damp-proof courses and flashings, cleaning, and other
matters not repeated in this specification. Only particular requirements for the project should be added to this specification.
1.4 INTERPRETATION
Definitions
General: For the purposes of this worksection the definitions in AS 3700 clause 1.5.2 apply:
1.5 INSPECTION
Notice
Inspection: Give sufficient notice so that inspection may be made of the following stages:
- Bottoms of block core holes, before grouting.
- Control joints, ready for insertion of joint filler.
- Lintels, in position.
Hold and witness points are defined in the General requirements worksection. Add Hold points, if required.
1.6 TOLERANCES
Facework
For a simplification of AS 3700 Table 11.1 for commonly required tolerances and for additional tolerances for critical elements,
see the text in the Commentary. Incorporate here if preferred.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
Only particular requirements for the project should be added in the project specification. See AS 3700 clause 1.4. The standard
contains defaults which should be adequate for most small-works masonry.
Bricks and blocks
Minimum age of clay bricks: 7 days.
Mortar materials
Additives or admixtures:
- Air-entraining agents: To AS 1478.1.
- Methyl-cellulose water thickeners: To be designed for use in brickwork or blockwork.
- Plasticizers or workability agents: To be designed for use in brickwork or blockwork.
Lime: To AS 1672.1.
Masonry cement: To AS 1316.
- Type: GP.
cement will be to Type GB or Type LH.
Proportions: Conform to the Mortar mix table.
Sand: To be fine aggregate with a low clay content and free from efflorescing salts, selected for colour
and grading.
Water: To be clean and free from any deleterious matter.
White cement: To have iron salts content ≤ 1%.

Mortar mix table

Mortar class Cement, lime, sand ratios Water thickener
to AS 3700
Clay Concrete Calcium silicate
Masonry cement
1:0 to 0.5:3 1:0 to 0.5:3 1:0 to 0.5:3 Optional
M3 1:0:4 1:0:4 n/a No
M4 1:0:3 n/a n/a No
Portland cement
M2 1:2:9 n/a n/a No
M3 1:1:6 1:1:6 n/a Optional
1:0:5 1:0:5 1:0:5 Yes
M4 1:0.5:4.5 1:0.5:4.5 n/a Optional
1:0:4 1:0:4 1:0:4 Yes
Edit to the mortar mixes required for the project, and schedule the location where each is to be used.
2.2 COMPONENTS
To be to the Corrosion resistance and durability table or provide proprietary products with metallic
and/or organic coatings of equivalent corrosion resistance:
Designate corrosivity category of the project in General requirements. Delete the tables for corrosivity categories that do not
apply.
These tables are an interpretation of various standards and the BCA.. Edit to suit the project and coordinate with other
worksections.
Note that the Corrosivity categories relate to those in AS/NZS 2312 which are more recent than in AS 3700. See Commentary
to General requirements for more discussion.
See also the various parts of AS/NZS 2669 where there are duplex protective coatings systems as well as those given here. If
internal elements are being painted lower levels of zinc-coating may be considered.

Situation Lintels Wall ties, connectors and Minimum cement
other structural content (mortar
proof course proof course
Internal: Includes Galvanize after - Galvanize after fabrication M2
building fabric fabrication 300 g/m2 300 g/m2
protected from salt - Metallic-coated sheet
and moisture by Z275/AZ150
vapour barriers, - Galvanized wire 300 g/m2
sarking, sheathing - In line galvanized sections
and building wraps. with after fabrication
coating repair ILG/150

Corrosion resistance and durability table – Medium corrosivity category

proof course proof course
protected from salt - Galvanized wire 300 g/m2
and moisture by - Metallic-coated sheet
vapour barriers, Z275/AZ150
sarking, sheathing
and building wraps.
Corrosion resistance and durability table – High corrosivity category

protected from salt
and moisture by
vapour barriers,
sarking, sheathing
and building wraps.
Connectors and accessories

Flashings and damp-proof courses
Steel lintels
Angles and flats: To AS/NZS 3679.1.
Cold formed proprietary lintels: To be designed to AS/NZS 4600.
Corrosion protection: To AS/NZS 2699.3.
Galvanizing: Do not cut after galvanizing.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
Bond
New work: Stretcher bond.
Existing work: Rod and bond to match existing.
AAC units: Running 100 mm stagger bond.
Mortar mixing
General: Measure volumes accurately. Machine mix for at least six minutes.
Building in
Heads of some steel door frames may be used as lintels. Consult manufacturer.
Embedded items: Build in wall ties and accessories as the construction proceeds. If it is not
practicable to obtain the required embedment wholly in the mortar joint in hollow unit brickwork or
blockwork, fill appropriate cores with grout or mortar.
Steel door frames: Fill the backs of jambs and heads solid with mortar as the work proceeds.

Construction at different rates or times

General: If two or more adjoining sections of masonry, including intersecting walls, are constructed at
different rates or times, rake back or tie the intersections between those sections so that monolithic
structural action is obtained in the completed work.
Holes and chases
General: If not required, do not cut holes and chases.
Joining to existing
General: Do not tooth new masonry into existing work. Provide straight joints incorporating flexible
masonry anchors.
Show on the drawings.
Joints
General: Lay solid and cored units on a full bed of mortar.
Face-shell bed hollow units: Fill perpends solid.
If wall is to be plastered, rake not more than 10 mm to give a key.
Thickness: 10 mm.
Joints and cutting
General: Set out bricks or blocks with joints of uniform width and minimise cutting of masonry units.
Control joints
General: Provide flexible masonry anchors:
- Spacing: >
Rate of construction
General: Regulate the rate of construction to eliminate joint deformation, slumping or instability.
Rods
76 mm high units: 7 courses to 600 mm.
Aerated autoclaved concrete blocks and perforated clay blocks will be to rods other than those listed in the template.
Protection from contamination
General: Protect masonry materials and components from ground moisture and contamination.
3.2 CONTROL OF MOVEMENT

Ageing of concrete
Minimum age of concrete supports to clay bricks: 28 days.
Contraction joints for concrete and calcium silicate masonry
Maximum length of continuous wall: 8 m.
Minimum width of control joint: 10 mm.
Expansion joints for clay brickwork
Maximum length of continuous wall: 8 m.
Minimum width of control joint: 10 mm.
Joint width
Vertical joints: 20-25 mm.
Horizontal joints: 15-20 mm.
Filler material
General: Provide compatible sealant and bond breaking backing materials which are non-staining to
masonry. Do not use bituminous materials with absorbent masonry units.
- Bond breaking materials: To be non-adhesive to sealant, or faced with a non-adhering material.
- Foamed materials: To be closed-cell or impregnated, not water-absorbing.
Fire rated control joints
General: If a control joint occurs in an element of construction required to have a fire resistance rating,
construct the control joint using fire stopping materials so that the fire resistance rating of the element
is not reduced.

- Fire stopping: To AS 4072.1.

Joint filling
Installation: Clean the joints thoroughly and insert an easily compressible backing material before
sealing.
Sealant depth: Fill the joints with a gun-applied flexible sealant for a depth of at least two-thirds the
joint width.
3.3 STEEL LINTELS

Location
General: Provide 1 lintel to each wall leaf in conformance with the Steel lintel schedule.
Installation
General: Do not cut on site. Keep lintels 6 mm clear of heads of frames. Pack mortar between the
angle upstand and supported masonry units. Install the long leg vertical.
Minimum bearing each end:
- Span ≤ 1000 mm: 100 mm.
- Span > 1000 mm: 150 mm.
Propping: To prevent deflection or excessive rotation, temporarily prop proprietary cold-formed lintels
until the masonry reaches its required strength.
- Minimum propping period: 7 days.
4 SELECTIONS
4.1 SCHEDULES
Brick and block construction schedule
Type or location
A B C
Bricks and blocks
Name or type
Fire resistance level:
- FRL
- Core filled
- Block type
Work size
Built-in components
Lintel type
Control joints
Backing rod
Primer
Sealant
Width
Grout
Composition
Mortar
Proportions or class

Type or location
A B C
Unit joints
Bond
Depth
Shape or profile
Use the columns A, B and C to schedule type or location. Delete or add columns as required.
Give sufficient information to identify the required unit; or show this information on the drawings. Alternatively refer to approved
samples.
Name or type: Verify that the nominated manufacturer can supply the selected bricks or blocks in the necessary quantities,
including purpose-made specials if required, in time to meet the construction program. Alternative sources may be given where
practicable.
Fire resistance level: Core filled or block type (Scoria) are alternatives. If bricks are used nominate FRL only.
Unit joints: “Ironed with a 12 mm diameter rod”, “Cut and struck”, “Weatherstruck”, “Flush jointed”, “Raked out 5 mm deep and
ironed square (or half round)”, “Broomed”, “To match existing”, or “As shown on the drawings”, etc. Raked joints are generally
not recommended. The exposed mortar face should be compressed. Tuck pointing, if required, should be clearly specified.
Work size: Commonly 230 x 110 x 76 mm for bricks and 390 x 190 x 190 mm for blocks, but many other sizes are available (e.g.
for blocks: 90, 140 and 290 mm thick). For AAC blocks and perforated clay blocks, check with manufacturers. For AAC units the
wall blocks are all 200 mm high and 600 mm long – thickness ranges from 75 to 300 mm.
Steel lintels schedule
Opening Opening loading Dimensions (mm)
dimensions (mm) type
D1 D2 Thickness
See BCA Housing Provisions Figure 3.3.3.5 for acceptable sizes in domestic situations.
Consult structural engineer before using proprietary steel lintels with concrete or calcium silicate bricks, or clay bricks with more
than 25% perforation. Mortar mix type 1 cement:1 lime:6 sand is the weakest that may be used.
If proprietary lintels are required, specify. Heads of some steel door frames may be used as lintels. Consult manufacturer.
Precast proprietary concrete lintels are also available and may be specified as an alternative to steel.

PARTITIONS – GLAZED INTERIOR
PARTITIONS – GLAZED
This worksection is applicable to internal non-load bearing framed and frameless glass partitions, and glazed door leafs.
• Doors and hatches for timber panel door leafs.
• Door hardware for door hardware.
• Glazing for glass items associated with joinery items and mirrors.
• Partitions – systems for demountable partitions with glazed modules.
• Partitions – framed and lined for non-loadbearing framed and lined partitions.
• Applied wall linings for glass lining applied to wall surfaces.
• Partitions – framed and lined for half height glazed partitions.
• None.
• None.
• Indicate the location and type of partitions on drawings to your office documentation policy.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
General: Provide glazed partitions to the Selections.

General
have no overlaps.
- Partitions – framed and lined.

1.3 DESIGN
Glass type and thickness
Standard: To AS 1288, where no glass type or thickness is given.
1.4 STANDARD
Standard
Cut-to-size quality: To AS/NZS 4667.
Laminated and toughened glass process: To AS/NZS 4667.
1.5 INTERPRETATION
General
Twin ground plate: Plate glass ground simultaneously on both faces so that uniform glass thickness
and parallel faces are maintained within close limits.
Terminology for work on glass: To AS/NZS 4668.
1.6 INSPECTION
Notice
- Commencement of glazed partition installation.
- Openings prepared to receive internal windows.
- Framed and lined partitions ready to receive the framed and glazed component.
1.7 TESTS
Weighted sound reduction index (Rw) type-tests
Proprietary double glazed systems: Interpolation between test results for similar systems is acceptable
provided as follows:
- Dimensional (thickness or width) differences do not exceed a ratio of 1:1.5.
- Each tested system differs from the proposed system by not more than one variable of one of the
following elements:
. Cavity: Width dimension.
. Cavity reveal: Acoustic absorption treatment.
. First panel: Glass type, glass thickness.
. Mounting: Type, seal type.
. Second panel: Glass type, glass thickness.
1.8 SUBMISSIONS
Samples
Do not call for samples unless warranted by the job size. Specify any samples additional to the requirements of the worksection
e.g. for texture or finish, reflective or protective surface coatings, embedded wire pattern.
General: Submit samples, each at least 200 x 200 mm, showing specified visual properties and the
range of variation, if any, for each of the following types of glass or glazing plastics:
- Tinted or coloured glass or glazing plastics.
- Surface modified or surface coated glass.
- Patterned or obscured glass or glazing plastics.
- Ceramic coated glass.
- Wired glass.
- Mirror glass.
Framing systems: Submit samples as follows:
- Prefinished production extrusions showing the limits of the range of variation in the selected finish.


Shop drawings
- Full size sections of members.
- Glazing details.
- Layout (sectional plan and elevation) of the window assembly.
- Methods of assembly.
- Provision for expansion.
- Clearances and tolerances.
- Glass processing as required for fixing hardware to frameless glass doors.
Subcontractors
General: Submit names and contact details of proposed manufacturers and installers.
Delete if not required i.e. the framing system is selected and detailed.
Noise reducing glazed assemblies: Submit a certificate from an independent testing authority showing
that the glazed assemblies comply with the specified weighted sound reduction index (Rw).
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GLASS
Glass types
Classification and description: To BS 952-1.
Glass and glazing materials
Glass and glazing materials generally: Free from defects which detract from appearance or interfere
with performance under normal conditions of use.
Glass tolerances
Size, squareness and flatness: To AS/NZS 2208.
Plate and sheet (i.e. not patterned):
- Roller wave: Maximum 0.15 mm.
Float glass quality
Glazing: Select Quality q3 to ASTM C1036.
Bullet-resistant glazing panels
Classification: >
These are defined in AS/NZS 2343 as follows:
• Class G0 – resistant to attack by a 9 mm military parabellum hand gun.
• Special class – refer to Appendix B Table B1.
Panel materials: >
The standard allows any combination of glass or plastic. If particular materials are required, say so here.
Panel opacity: >
i.e. transparent or opaque.


Safety glasses
Includes toughened, laminated, wired, and organic-coated glass, and safety glazing plastics.
Type: Grade A.
The required grade (A or B) is specified in AS 1288 Section 5 for each application.
Heat soaking: Required for toughened glass in curtain walls.
Ceramic coated glass
General: Heat strengthened or toughened glass with a coloured ceramic coating fused to and made
an integral part of the surface: To ASTM C1048, Condition B.
Opacified glass
General: Glass with an opacifier permanently bonded to the inner face.
Unacceptable blemishes in heat-treated flat glass (including tinted and coated glass)
Standard: To ASTM C1048.
Annealed glasses schedule
Generic term Integral properties Partition type Door leaf type
Clear float, general
quality
Body tinted float Colour
Surface modified float Colour
Surface coated % reflectance
(reflective) float
Base glass
Base glass colour
Plate, polished, clear
Plate, polished, body Colour
tinted
Plate, polished, twin
ground
Sheet, clear
Sheet, body tinted Colour
Patterned, clear Pattern
Patterned, body tinted Pattern
Colour
Wired cast (clear) Pattern
Wired cast (body tinted) Pattern
Colour
Wired polished (clear)
Wired polished (body Colour
tinted)
The maker’s brand name is often the best way to identify tinted, reflective, and patterned glasses.
Clear float, general quality: “General” and “silvering” are two qualities of float.
Body tinted float:
• Colour: Consult manufacturer – grey, bronze, green, blue.

Surface modified float: Consult manufacturer.

Surface coated (reflective) float: The reflective film may be available on either clear or body tinted float. Consult manufacturer.
Plate, polished, clear: Now rare, superseded by float. Twin ground plate is used where uniform thickness and parallel surfaces
are important (e.g. large mirrors).
Sheet, clear: No longer made in Australia. Some imported sheet may be available.
Patterned: Also known as “cast” or “figured rolled”. Proprietary patterns best described by the manufacturer’s brand name.
Patterns include “diffuse reflection” (“picture glass”).
Wired cast (body tinted): Do not use body tinted wired (cast or polished) in locations exposed to the sun; fracture may result.
Partition type: e.g. P1, locate on drawings or a Finishes schedule.
Door leaf type: e.g. D1, locate on drawings and a Door schedule.
Processed glasses schedule
Generic term Glass type (base Partition type Door leaf type
glass) and other
properties
Mirrors Clear float, silvering
quality
Mirrors, venetian Clear float, silvering
silvered quality
Obscured glass Type
Process
Texture
Heat strengthened Base glass
Base glass colour
% reflectance
Toughened safety Base glass
Base glass colour
% reflectance
Safety organic coated
Glass type (base glass): The glass to which the process is applied. Any of the above glasses may be processed; for availability,
consult manufacturer.
Mirrors: Float is the most common glass type, but the process can be applied to any flat glass, and to polycarbonate sheet.
Obscured glass:
• Process: e.g. “Sandblast obscuring”, “Acid etching”. For terminology and other processes, see AS/NZS 4668.
• Texture: The terms fine, medium, coarse may be used.
Heat strengthened: Toughened safety: and Safety organic coated: In principle any annealed glass may be used as the base
glass.
Fabricated glass units schedule

Generic term Glass types Partition type Door leaf type
(constituent glasses)
and other properties
Laminated safety glass External sheet (corridor)
Internal sheet (room)
Intermediate sheet (if
any)

Generic term Glass types Partition type Door leaf type

(constituent glasses)
and other properties
Interlayer type
Interlayer colour
Interlayer thickness
Laminated security Ballistic attack
resistance
Glass types (constituent glasses): In principle any of the above annealed and processed glasses may be used; consult
manufacturers for combinations actually available.
Laminated safety glass:
• Interlayer: May be coloured, reflective, etc. Consult manufacturer.
Laminated security: See AS/NZS 2343 for transparent, opaque and translucent panels (glass or plastics).
• Ballistic attack resistance: See AS/NZS 2343 clause 4 for classifications.
Special glasses schedule

Generic term Properties Partition type
Flashed or pot glass Type
Colour
Structural glass (opaque Colour
coloured)
Ceramic coated glass Base glass
Ceramic coating colour
Opacified glass Base glass
Opacifier material
Flashed or pot glass:

• Type: Either “flashed” (a layer of colour on clear glass) or “pot” (the whole thickness is tinted) or both.
2.2 GLAZING MATERIALS

General
Glazing materials (including putty, glazing compounds, sealants, gaskets, glazing tapes, spacing
strips, spacing tapes, spacers, setting blocks and compression wedges): Appropriate for the
conditions of application and the required performance.
Jointing materials
General: Provide recommended jointing and pointing materials which are compatible with each other
and with the contact surfaces and non staining to finished surfaces. Do not provide bituminous
materials on absorbent surfaces.
Glazing tapes
Standards: To AAMA 800, Products coded 804.3, 806.3, 807.3, as applicable.
Type: Non cellular (solid) elastopressive seals.
Location or function: >
Material:

BS 4255-1.
- Flexible polyvinyl chloride (PVC): To BS 2571, E type compounds, colour fastness grade B.
2.3 PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION

Safety glazing materials
General: Identify each piece or panel, to AS 1288.
Noise reducing glazed assemblies
General: Label each panel with a legible non-permanent mark, self-destroying when removed, stating
and certifying the Rw rating, and identifying the testing authority. Remove when directed.
Bullet-resistant panels
Marking: To AS/NZS 2343.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 GLASS PROCESSING

General
Processing: Perform required processes on glass, including cutting, obscuring, silvering and bending.
Form necessary holes, including for fixings, hardware, equipment, access holes and speaking holes.
Process exposed glass edges to a finish not inferior to ground arrised.
Glass processing schedule
Glass element Location Type of process Finish
Glass element: For example:

• Frameless doors.
Type of process: For example:
• Penetrations for patch fittings and hardware.
• Edge finishes: Arris, flat, round, bullnose, etc. Ground arrised edges are most common.
• Bevelling: Plain, mitre, feather edge, double, etc. Specify a width for plain and feather. Finish is usually polished.
Finish:
• Smooth ground or polished.
• Obscuring: Sandblast obscuring, emery obscuring, acid embossing.
• Various finishes: See BS 952-2, or consult glass merchant.
• Safety marking: As recommended in AS 1288 clause 5.1 note 6.
3.2 PARTITION GLAZING

Framed glazing
Assembly: Provide beads or snap-in beads and resilient (PVC, butyl or similar) glazing tapes, gaskets
and inserts, so that the glass is held firmly without distortion and withstands the specified loadings.
Frameless installations
General: Join the vertical edges of adjacent glass panels with a silicone jointing compound.
3.3 COMPLETION
Cleaning
General: Strip protective coverings, replace damaged glass and leave the work clean, polished, free
from defects, and in good condition.

4 SELECTIONS
4.1 SCHEDULES
Framed and glazed partition construction schedule
Type or location
P1 P2 P3
Partition framing suite
Door framing suite
Frame:
- Basic grid (l x b) (mm)
- Material
- Exposed member finish
- Exposed member colour
Trim
Skirting
Type or location: Edit to project Finishes schedule.

Framing suites: Nominate proprietary system.
Trim: Plain angle, shadow angle. Use manufacturer’s descriptions.
Skirting: Nominate proprietary item or refer to a detail.
Frameless glass partition construction schedule
Type or location
P1 P2 P3
Partition top and bottom restraint suite
Door patch fitting suite
Partition:
- Exposed member material
Trim
Type or location: Edit to project Finishes schedule.

Fixing suites: Nominate proprietary system.
Glazed partition performance schedule
Type or location
A B C
Weighted sound reduction index (Rw)

CUBICLE SYSTEMS INTERIOR
CUBICLE SYSTEMS
This worksection is applicable to partitioned cubicles for toilets and showers. The material can be adapted for changing areas
and various decontamination cubicles such as air showers.
• Glazing for glazed shower screens.
• Terrazzo precast for precast terrazzo cubicle partitions.
Some projects may include items not covered by NATSPEC. You may need to create new text, modify this text or use an
applicable worksection. For example:
• Paint booths.
• None
• Layout and dimensions to your office documentation policy.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
General: Provide cubicles in conformance with the Selections and as follows:
- Consistent in finish treatment.
Products and finishes should be selected as follows:
• With surfaces that will allow graffiti removal by specialist cleaning agents without sustaining damage.
• Resistant to the level of vandalism expected in use.

General
have no overlaps.
>

1.3 INTERPRETATION
Definitions
- Compressed cellulose cement sheets: Factory prefinished double faced autoclaved high density
fibre cement sheets with square stone cut edges ground smooth and arrised.
- Cubicle: A small space or compartment partitioned off, often within a wet area.
- Dry processed fibreboard: A panel manufactured with adhesives under pressure and heat from
fibres of wood and other lignocellulosic material with a forming moisture content of less than 20%.
- Environmental conditions as defined in AS/NZS 1859.1 for wood based panel classification
purposes:
. Dry conditions: Conditions approximating a well ventilated temperate environment (temperature
< 25ºC, relative humidity exceeding 65% for only a few weeks a year).
. Humid conditions: Conditions approximating tropical areas (temperature often in excess of 25ºC,
relative humidity regularly exceeding 85%), or the conditions of a wet area.
. Wet areas: Areas within buildings with water supply and drainage systems.
- High pressure decorative laminates (HPDL):
. Panels consisting of core layers impregnated with phenolic and/or aminoplastic resins and a
surface layer(s) impregnated with aminoplastic resins (mainly melamine resins).
. Sheets consisting of layers of fibrous sheet material (e.g. paper) impregnated with thermosetting
resins and bonded together under heat and pressure of at least MPa, with decorative face(s).
- Metal faced board: Sheet metal (usually stainless steel) adhesive fixed moisture resistant
particleboard.
- Particleboard: A panel manufactured with adhesives under pressure and heat from particles of wood
and other lignocellulosic material.
1.4 INSPECTION
Notice
- Set-out before installation.
1.5 SUBMISSIONS
Samples
- Each selected panel and door finish, at least 300 mm2, with associated selected edgestrips and
trims.
- All hardware and metal components in the selected finish.
If the specification does not state selected properties such as colour and texture, the effect of this clause is to require the
submission of samples covering the full range of those properties. The specification should define the item with enough
precision, either by description, or by reference to preselected samples, or as a proprietary item, to enable the contractor to
identify (and price) it.
Prototype
General: Erect a prototype of each partition type, including at least one example of each component in
the system.
- Location and extent: >
Preferably show on the drawings the location and extent of the prototype and the number and type of components to be
included. Delete if the size of the project does not justify a prototype.
Shop drawings
General: Submit shop drawings to a scale not smaller than 1:50, showing the following:
- Overall layout and dimensions.
- Materials, thicknesses and finishes of elements including doors, divisions, fronts, pedestals and top
rail.
- Assembly hardware.
- Door hardware type and location.
- Relationship of assembly to adjacent building elements.
Subcontractors
Type- test reports
General: Submit the results of a type test for graffiti removal from the nominated surface for spray
paint and permanent markers.
- Spray paint: >
- Permanent markers: >
1.6 TOLERANCES
Assembly
Deviation (from true grid lines and planes): 1:1000 up to 3 mm maximum deviation.
any position.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT SYSTEMS

HPDL sheet faced reconstituted wood-based panels
Panel material:
- All panels and doors: >
e.g. High performance particleboard or high performance medium density fibreboard.
Panel thickness (minimum):
- Divisions 18 mm.
- Fronts, nibs and doors 25 mm.
Panel Standards:
- Particleboard: To AS/NZS 1859.1.
- Dry processed fibreboard: To AS/NZS 1859.2.
Facing:
- All panels and doors: Faced on visible surfaces and edges with HPDL sheet.
- Fronts and divisions: Faced on visible surfaces and edges with 1.3 mm HPDL post forming sheet,
fabricated into one-piece with a 50 mm radius cove at the front and division junction.
Facing standards:
- High pressure decorative laminates (sheets made from thermosetting resins): To AS/NZS 2924.1.
- Adhesives (for bonding decorative thermoset laminates (contact adhesives)): To AS 2131.
Sheet metal faced reconstituted wood-based panels
Panel material:
- All panels and doors: >
Panel thickness (minimum):
- Divisions 18 mm.
- Fronts, nibs and doors 25 mm.

Panel standards:
- Particleboard: To AS/NZS 1859.1.
- Dry processed fibreboard: To AS/NZS 1859.2.
Sheeting:
- Stainless steel: Grade 316.
- Edges: Adhesive fixed stainless steel folded channels.
- Finish: Satin.
Stainless steel sheeting with a satin finish is usually specified for graffiti and vandal resistance. Vary as required e.g. zincalume
steel and/or powdercoat finish.
HPDL panels
Material:
- All panels and doors: Compact high pressure decorative laminate panels with an integral surface
finish and edges sealed by the manufacturer.
Thickness:
- 13 mm (typical).
Compressed cellulose cement panels
Material:
- All panels: Factory prefinished compressed cellulose cement sheets with square stone cut edges
ground smooth and arrised.
- Doors: >
- Door facing: HPDL.
Panel thickness:
- Divisions: 18 mm.
- Fronts: 24 mm.
- Shower seats: 24 mm.
- Doors: 18 mm.
Panel finish: Factory applied two pack polyurethane.
Standards:
- Particleboard doors: To AS/NZS 1859.1.
- Dry processed fibreboard doors: To AS/NZS 1859.2.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
Suspension beam
General: For suspended systems provide a suspension beam consisting of a mild steel channel,
located immediately above the ceiling framing along the line of the partition fronts. Build the ends into
masonry structure or provide end fixings to the structure as necessary to transfer the load. Drill the
bottom flange of the channel for the partition fixing bolts.
Hardware
Fixing hardware: Bolts, dowels, brackets, standards, cappings and stabilising bars supplied to
complete the cubicle assembly.
Door furniture: As nominated in the Cubicle schedule.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 PANELS
Pre-conditioning
General: Condition wood based product components in the anticipated environment for two weeks
prior to assembly.

Manufactured cubicle systems

Assembly: Attach divisions and nibs to walls and fronts with purpose-made proprietary fixings. Cut
nibs and divisions that abut walls as required to plumb the assembly and seal edges as instructed by
the manufacturer.
Floor mounted fronts: Fix to the floor with proprietary fittings, and fix at the top to a metal channel
headrail, supplied as part of the system, running continuously across the fronts and fixed to the walls
at each end. Form the channel into a box section over doorways by snapping in a mating channel
insert.
Suspended fronts: Hang the fronts from a suspension beam with galvanized mild steel M10 bolts and
attachments, incorporating a means of height adjustment, supplied as part of the system.
Floor mounted fronts and suspended fronts are alternatives. Edit as required.
Heads of openings: Fix stabilising head channels, screwed to the tops of the partitions. Provide an
infill strip to the channel across the opening.
3.2 ACCESSORIES
Shower seats
Fix by the following:
- Anodised aluminium channel to exposed edge, secured to walls at each end.
- Product assembly detail.
- Proprietary wall bracket.
Select, and delete alternatives and/or refer to details.
4 SELECTIONS
4.1 SCHEDULES
Cubicle schedule
Properties Types
A B C
Manufactured cubicle systems
Product name
Product material
Cubicle type
Front support
Finish
- Type
Colour
Doors
Cubicle product material
Solid core flush doors to AS 2688
Finish
Shower seat
Product
Material
Type
- Fixed
- Folding

Properties Types
A B C
Fixing
Finish
Hardware
Indicator bolts
Spring hinges
Rising butt hinges
Coat hook / door stop
Not standard to the cubicle product
Finish

TERRAZZO – PRECAST FINISH
TERRAZZO – PRECAST
This worksection is applicable to precast terrazzo elements and/or products including toilet and shower cubicle partitions, stairs
and door thresholds.
• Terrazzo in situ for in situ terrazzo topping.
• Stone and terrazzo tiling for terrazzo floor tiling.
• None.
• Import this material as required to Stone and terrazzo tiling for terrazzo components that form part of terrazzo faced stairs.
• Import this material as required to Joinery for terrazzo components that form part of custom made joinery fixtures.
Dimensions given on the drawings should not be repeated in the Selection tables of this worksection, and vice versa.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
General: Provide precast terrazzo units to the Selections.
The aim of the designer is to select products and finishes:
• With surfaces that will allow graffiti removal by specialist cleaning agents without sustaining damage.
• Resistant to the level of vandalism expected in use.

General
have no overlaps.
>
• Terrazzo – in situ.

1.3 INTERPRETATION
Definitions
- Terrazzo: Mixtures of binders, marble or glass aggregates and water, dried, cured, ground to
expose the aggregate, sealed and polished to provide a finished surface.
- Substrate: The surface to which the terrazzo is to be bedded or attached.
1.4 INSPECTION
Notice
- Set-out before installation of assemblies.
- Precast items on site before installation.
1.5 SUBMISSIONS
Samples
- Terrazzo: Three sample panels, each at least 300 mm x 300 mm, of every type of surface colour,
pattern and finish specified, showing two extremes and the middle of the range.
- All hardware and metal components in the selected finish.
Prototype
General: Erect a prototype of each cubicle partition type, including at least one example of each
component in the system.
- Location and extent: As noted on drawings.
Show on the drawings the location and extent of the prototype and the number and type of components to be included. Delete if
the size of the project does not justify a prototype.
Shop drawings
General: Submit shop drawings of the terrazzo work showing relevant details, including the following,
if applicable:
- Dimensions of precast items.
- Overall layout and dimensions of precast terrazzo assemblies.
- Thicknesses and finishes of cubicles including doors, divisions, fronts, pedestals and top rail
- Assembly hardware.
- Cubicle door hardware type and location.
- Relationship of assembly to adjacent building elements.
Subcontractors
Type test reports
General: Submit a tested terrazzo sample for graffiti removal as follows:
- Nominate the cleaning agent.
- Mark an approved sample with spray paint and permanent markers.
- Clean half of each marked area.
- Repeat with alternate cleaning agents until approved.
1.6 TOLERANCES
Cubicle partitions and precast elements
Thickness:

- Free standing units: ± 1.5 mm.

- Bedded units: ± 3 mm.
any position.
Deviation of edges from the intended true line:≤ 1.5 mm.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PRECAST UNITS GENERALLY

Type
General: Terrazzo units, precast cured and finished under factory conditions.
Composition
General: Carry the facing mix right through, unless precast units consist of a facing or facings bonded
to a core of different material, and the minimum facing thickness is maintained.
Facing
General:
- Mix proportions 4 cement: 9 aggregate by weight.
- Water/cement ratio 18 L water per 40 kg cement.
Minimum thickness: 13 mm, or gauge of coarsest aggregate plus 3 mm, whichever is the greater.
Core materials
General: Cement, sand, coarse aggregate.
Fabrication
General: Cast the units in suitable moulds and compact. Fully bond the facing to the core by placing
the second mix immediately after the first. Where units are designed for bedding, suitably key the
bedding surface.
Reinforcing
General: Machine-welded mesh for terrazzo partitions to AS/NZS 4671.
Handling
General: Avoid damage and deflection. Do not subject units to handling stresses until they have
attained their 28 day compressive strength, except that grinding of units may commence upon the
attainment of half this strength. Replace damaged units.
Finishing
General: Polished on visible faces and edges. Free edges arrised 3 mm radius. Drilled for hardware.
2.2 CUBICLE PARTITIONS

Assembly
Panel thickness: 40 mm.
Doors: 18 mm thick high moisture resistant particleboard faced on visible surfaces and edges with
high pressure decorative laminate sheet.
Suspension beam
General: For suspended systems provide a suspension beam consisting of a mild steel channel,
located immediately above the ceiling framing along the line of the partition fronts. Build the ends into
masonry structure or provide end fixings to the structure as necessary to transfer the load. Drill the
bottom flange of the channel for the partition fixing bolts.
Finish: Galvanized.
Hardware
Fixing hardware: Provide bolts, dowels, brackets, standards, cappings and stabilising bars as supplied
to complete the cubicle assembly.
Door furniture: Provide furniture to the Cubicle partition schedule.

2.3 COMPONENTS
Stair units
General: Provide and install precast terrazzo finishing units to the Precast stair schedule.
Joinery units
General: Provide and install precast terrazzo finishing units to the Precast joinery finishes schedule.
Door thresholds
General: Provide and install precast terrazzo door thresholds to the Precast door thresholds
schedule.
Window sills
General: Provide and install precast terrazzo window sills to the Precast window sills schedule.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 CUBICLE PARTITIONS

Panel fixing
Secret fixing: Set partitions in position and fix to wall and floor backgrounds. Complete the assembly
with brass dowel joints. Extend wall and floor finishes to terrazzo units with a movement joint at
abutments. Bed fronts solidly to the floor with two 6 mm diameter brass dowels.
Exposed fixing: Assemble the partitions after wall and floor finishes are complete. Fix through brass
channels / angles with dome head bolts and nuts. Support free-standing fronts on a tubular floor
standards grouted into drilled pockets in the floor slab.
Secret and exposed fixings are alternatives. Delete as required.
Heads of openings: Fix stabilising head channels, screwed to the tops of the partitions. Provide an
infill strip to the channel across the opening.
Shower seats
Fix by:
- Anodised aluminium channel to exposed edge, secured to walls at each end.
- Product assembly detail.
- Proprietary wall bracket.
The above fixings are alternatives. Delete as required or refer to details.
3.2 ADHESIVE FIXING

Type
General: Provide adhesives compatible with the materials and surfaces to be adhered.
Product: Type D Dispersion to AS 4992.1 (Int).
- Cement-based adhesives on wood, metal, painted or glazed surfaces, gypsum-based plaster.
- Organic solvent-based adhesives on painted surfaces.
3.3 MORTAR BEDS

Proportioning
General: Select proportions from the range 1:3 – 1:4 cement:sand to obtain satisfactory adhesion.
Provide minimum water.
3.4 PROTECTION
Generally
General: Protect finished work from damage during building operations.

3.5 COMPLETION
Maintenance manual
General: On or before practical completion, submit a manual of recommendations on the care and
cleaning of the installed terrazzo, including published instructions for the maintenance of the terrazzo
finishes.
4 SELECTIONS
This schedule refers to the selection of the cubicle types by their properties, but does not locate them within the project. For this
you should prepare a separate document e.g. a Finishes schedule to locate the various cubicles by reference to a designation
code or abbreviation or show them on the drawings.
4.1 SCHEDULES
Cubicle partition schedule
Properties Types
A B C
Terrazzo cubicle systems:
- Cubicle type
- Facing aggregate:
. Size
. Colour
- Matrix colour
- Assembly
- Front support
Division:
- Height
- Width
Front:
- Height
- Width
Nib:
- Height
- Width
Doors:
- Height
- Width
- Finish
Shower seat:
- Product
- Material
- Type:
. Fixed
. Folding

Properties Types
A B C
- Fixing
- Finish
Hardware:
- Indicator bolts
- Spring hinges
- Rising butt hinges
- Coat hook/door stop
- Additional hardware not standard to
the cubicle product
- Finish
Precast stairs schedule

Properties Types
A B C
Precast stair units generally:
- Product
- Facing aggregate:
. Size
. Colour
- Matrix colour
- Fixing:
. Mortar underbed
. Dowelled
- Reinforcement:
. Dimensions
. Mass
Terrazzo treads:
- Size:
. Length
. Width
. Thickness
- Fixing:
. Mortar underbed
. Dowelled
- Reinforcement:
. Dimensions
. Mass
- Anti-slip strips
Terrazzo risers:
- Size:
. Length

Properties Types
A B C
. Width
. Thickness
- Fixing:
. Mortar underbed
. Dowelled
- Reinforcement:
. Dimensions
. Mass
Terrazzo stair strings:
- Size:
. Length
. Width
. Thickness
- Fixing:
. Mortar underbed
. Dowelled
- Reinforcement:
. Dimensions
. Mass
Thickness: It is good practice to have a minimum tread thickness of 38 mm; normally strings and risers are 25 mm thick.
However, always ensure that there is adequate mass for housing dowels.
Anti-slip strips: e.g. “Preformed silicon carbide strips set in grooves 25 mm back from each tread nosing to finish slightly proud
of the surface”.
Precast joinery finishes schedule
Properties Types
A B C
Precast units generally:
- Product
- Facing aggregate:
. Size
. Colour
- Matrix colour
- Fixing:
. Mortar underbed
. Dowelled
- Reinforcement:
. Dimensions
. Mass
Terrazzo bench tops:
- Size:
. Length

Properties Types
A B C
. Width
. Thickness
- Fixing:
. Adhesive
- Reinforcement:
. Dimensions
. Mass
Terrazzo frontals:
- Size:
. Length
. Width
. Thickness
- Fixing:
. Adhesive
- Reinforcement:
. Dimensions
. Mass
Precast door thresholds schedule

Properties Types
A B C
- Product
- Facing aggregate:
. Size
. Colour
- Matrix colour
- Fixing:
. Mortar underbed
. Dowelled
- Reinforcement:
. Dimensions
. Mass
Terrazzo door thresholds:
- Size:
. Length
. Width
. Thickness
- Fixing:
. Mortar underbed
. Dowelled
- Reinforcement:

Properties Types
A B C
. Dimensions
. Mass
Precast window sills schedule

Properties Types
A B C
- Product
- Facing aggregate:
. Size
. Colour
- Matrix colour
- Fixing:
. Mortar underbed
. Dowelled
- Reinforcement:
. Dimensions
. Mass
Terrazzo window sills:
- Size:
. Length
. Width
. Thickness
- Fixing:
. Mortar underbed
. Dowelled
- Reinforcement:
. Dimensions
. Mass

ROOM DIVIDERS INTERIOR
ROOM DIVIDERS
This worksection is applicable to operable walls, folding doors and accordion doors.
• Doors and hatches for doors in regular door openings and rooms divided by multiple sliding doors.
• Overhead doors for overhead doors and industrial and commercial doors.
• Acoustic insulation for ceiling baffles.
• Joinery for work associated with installation details.
• Door hardware.
• None.
Show the following on drawings to your office documentation policy:
• Size.
• Number and arrangement of panels.
• Stacking pattern.
• Pass door.
• Provision for ceiling baffle.
• View panels.
• Corkboard, whiteboard etc.
• Distribution of finishes.
• Joinery associated with installation.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
General: Provide room dividers to the Selections:
Select products that are:
• Consistent in finish treatment.
• Panels of balanced construction.
• To operate smoothly for the expected life of the installation under normal conditions of usage.

General

have no overlaps.
- Doors and hatches.
- Door hardware.
• Overhead doors.
• Acoustic insulation.
• Joinery.
1.3 INTERPRETATION
Definitions
- Flush door panels: Door panels having two plane faces which entirely cover and conceal its
structure.
- Flush door panels with blockboard core: Door panels consisting of a core plates of timber strips laid
edge to edge , and to which are bonded no less than two sheets of veneer on each face.
- Balanced construction: A construction of flush doors in which the facings on one side of the core are
essentially equal in thickness, grain direction, properties and arrangement to those on the other side
of the core. It is such that the forces induced by uniformly distributed changes in moisture content
will not cause warpage.
- Room dividers: Proprietary systems comprising overhead tracks and carriages supporting doors or
panels which are linked, or can be linked, to provide complete partition-type enclosures within
defined limits, and which may be opened by sliding and stacking to the sides of openings, inclusive
of manufacturers’ standard operating gear, hardware, and accessories necessary for satisfactory
performance.
. Folding doors: Centre-hung door panels hinged together, stacking by sliding and pivoting.
. Accordion doors: Double-walled dividers in which the walls comprise twin rows of paired folding
door panels, or equivalent paired folding walls of flexible material attached to pantograph frames,
the pairs linked together at the centre and suspended from the points of linkage.
. Operable walls: Partition panels independently suspended and stackable, with provision for
linking together at the vertical edges and for preventing lateral movement at the bottom when
closed.
1.4 INSPECTION
Notice
- Overhead tracks installed before dividers/door panels are hung and ceiling installed.
- Completion of assembly.
1.5 TESTS
General: Type test operable room dividers required to have a particular weighted sound reduction
index (Rw) rating, to AS/NZS 1276.1 or ISO 717-1.

Both AS/NZS 1276.1 and ISO 717-1 are cited in the BCA. Nominate the extent and/or locations of field testing. Specify or detail
work required to prevent flanking sound paths such as a ceiling baffle and treatment of abutting elements.
1.6 SUBMISSIONS
Samples
- Finishes to prepared surfaces with associated selected edgestrips and trims.
- Colour range samples of facings and prefinished production material.
- Manufacturer’s standard door furniture items.
Subcontractors
General: Submit names and contact details of proposed installers.
Delete if installation is by the supplier noted in Selections.
Shop drawings
General: Submit shop drawings showing details as follows:
- General arrangement and stacking.
- Pass door(s).
- Details of each assembly, component and connection.
- Information relevant to fabrication, surface treatment and installation.
- Details of structural support of the head track.
- Thickness and fabrication details of toughened glass panels.
- Hardware.
Consider calling for an Engineer’s certificate for the structural support of the head track from the supplier/installer if not covered
by the Consultant Structural Engineer.
An acoustic plenum baffle should be detailed to accommodate the proposed track support.
1.7 TOLERANCES
Tolerances
Length and width of panels: ± 1/1000th of the dimension or 0.5 mm, whichever is the greater.
any position.
2 EXECUTION
2.1 COMPLETION
Maintenance manual
General: Submit manufacturer’s published recommendations for service use.
Cleaning
Temporary coating: On or before completion of the works, or before joining up to other surfaces,
3 SELECTIONS
There is a variety of different types available, from domestic scale folding and accordion doors to operable walls of framed
panels capable of dividing openings 10 m high.

The different types have varying requirements for structural load support, access for track fixing and adjustment, tolerance on
floor level, etc.
Consult the manufacturers. Use the schedules to specify the options necessary to define particular types, and non-standard
hardware and accessories, if required.
3.1 FOLDING DOORS

Pre-conditioning
Condition wood based product components in the anticipated environment for two weeks prior to
assembly.
Folding doors schedule
Designation FOL1 FOL2 FOL3
Product
Door arrangement
Door panels:
- Size (mm)
- Hanging weight (kN/m2)
- Material
- Facing
- Finish
Hinges:
- Material
- Colour
- Finish
Track:
- Material
- Size (mm)
Carriages:
- Wheels
- Distribution
Weighted sound reduction index (Rw) to
AS/NZS 1276.1 or ISO 717-1
Hardware:
- Item
- Material
- Finish
Designation: If there are several different folding doors in the project, give each one a designation (mark) by which it can be
referred. Use this designation on the drawings.
Product: Specification by proprietary item (manufacturer’s standard door suite), will automatically cover most of the items in this
schedule.
Door arrangement: e.g. “Single, attached at jamb”, “Single floating (latches to either jamb)”, or “Double (attached to both jambs,
joins in the centre)”. State “Cavity stacking” if required.
Door panels:
• Size: Width x thickness.
• Material: e.g. “Solid core”.
• Facing: e.g. “Wood veneer” (state species), “Vinyl”, “Laminated plastic” (state colour, texture, etc.).
• Finish: (To veneers) e.g. “Clear lacquer prefinish”.

Hinges:
• Material: e.g. “Vinyl extrusions”.
Track:
• Material: e.g. “Extruded aluminium”. Consult manufacturers. Height adjustment may be available.
3.2 ACCORDION DOORS

Accordion doors schedule
Designation ACC1 ACC2 ACC3
Product
Door arrangement
Hanging weight (kN/m2)
Timber doors:
- Material
- Facing
- Finish
Vinyl doors:
- Pantograph
- Covers
- Facing
Connector hinges:
- Material
- Colour
Track:
- Material
- Size (mm)
Carriages:
- Wheels
- Distribution
AS/NZS 1276.1 or ISO 717-1
Hardware:
- Item
- Material
- Finish
Designation: If there are several different accordion doors in the project, give each one a designation (mark) by which it can be
schedule.
joins in the centre)”.
Timber doors: Options are as for folding doors.
Timber doors: and Vinyl doors: are alternatives; delete one.
Vinyl doors:
• Pantograph: e.g. “Plated steel”.
• Covers: e.g. “Semi-rigid 5 ply laminated vinyl fabric, removable and replaceable in situ”.

• Facing: e.g. “Vinyl” or “Wool fabric”. Specify colour.

Connector hinges:
• Material: e.g. “Extruded vinyl”.
3.3 OPERABLE WALLS

Operable walls schedule
Designation OPW1 OPW2 OPW3
Product
Door arrangement
Stacking arrangement
Panel suspension
Panel type:
- Size (mm)
- Construction
- Sheeting
- Facing
- Finish
Edge locking of panels
Lateral movement prevention
Track:
- Material
- Size (mm)
Carriages:
- Wheels
- Distribution
Power operation
AS/NZS 1276.1 or ISO 717-1
Hardware:
- Item
- Material
- Finish
Designation: If there are several different operable walls in the project, give each one a designation (mark) by which it can be
schedule.
joins in the centre)”. State “Cavity stacking” if required.
Stacking arrangement: May be shown on the drawings. Many arrangements are possible, depending on whether the panels are
suspended at one or two points.
Panel suspension: “Single point” or “Two point”.
Panel type: There is a wide variety of types available. Consult manufacturers.
Lateral movement prevention: e.g. “Floor guides” or “Retractable horizontal seal, requiring no floor guide”.
Power operation: Available with some types of operable walls.

SUSPENDED CEILINGS INTERIOR
SUSPENDED CEILINGS
This worksection is applicable to proprietary suspended internal ceilings and external soffits of dry construction with suspension
systems attached to a supporting structure.
• Acoustic insulation for acoustic insulation to walls and bulk acoustic insulation laid over ceiling systems.
• Partitions – systems or Partitions – framed and lined for plenum barriers.
• Lining.
• None.
• Show ceiling types and coordination of combined services on reflected ceiling plans.
• Show particular requirements for the sheet linings can be on the drawings or scheduled either in this worksection or in
Lining. Do not duplicate.
4 GENERAL
4.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
General: Provide suspended ceilings as follows and to the Selections.
- To remain stable without deflection, permanent deformation, or rattling.
The aim of the designer is to select products and finishes resistant to moisture encountered under expected environmental
conditions.

General
have no overlaps.
NATSPEC 528 [Insert date[

- Acoustic insulation for bulk insulation laid over ceiling systems.

- Lining for suspended flush ceilings and direct fix ceilings.
4.3 STANDARDS
General
Suspended ceilings: To AS/NZS 2785.
AS/NZS 2785 definitions do not include timber systems that form part of AS/NZS 2589.1.
4.4 INTERPRETATION
Definitions
AS/NZS 2785 specifies the minimum requirements for the design, construction, installation, maintenance and testing
requirements for suspended ceiling systems of dry construction with suspension systems attached to a supporting structure. It is
intended for use in commercial, industrial and residential applications. For luminaires incorporated in suspended ceilings,
AS/NZS 2785 clause 4.9 cites AS 2946.
4.5 INSPECTION
Notice
- Completed ceiling before site painting, if applicable.
- The suspension system before installation of the ceiling panels or lining.
4.6 SUBMISSIONS
Samples
- Accessories: Visible accessories including hatches and curtain tracks.
- Ceiling material: Sheet, panel, tile and strip, with insulation, showing the extremes and mean of
variation in colour, pattern, or texture of the proposed finish.
- Methods: Methods of jointing, fixing, height adjustment, retaining and removing panels.
- Suspension: Sections proposed for suspension system, including wall angles and trim.
Prototypes
General: Provide, in a suitable position, a sample of each ceiling system, including at least one
example of each of the specified components, including services terminals.
- Size: At least 10 m2.
Preferably show the location and extent on the drawings, together with the number and type of components (panels, suspension
members, etc.) to be included. Delete if a prototype is not required.
Installation
Set-out: Submit proposed set-out indicating cut panels if any, before installation.
The drawings should show the ceiling grid or building grid, or both. When choosing a grid module, consider the availability of
panel sizes, and building access.
Cutting strawboard panels
General: If cutting is unavoidable, submit details of the methods proposed for maintaining the integrity
of the boards at cut edges.
Shop drawings
General: Submit shop drawings showing the relevant details of the ceiling system as follows:
- Calculations: Structural design calculations demonstrating the ability of the system to perform to
requirements.

- Demountability: Methods of achieving demountability.

- Details: Large scale details of construction, suspension system, methods of assembly, trim and
fixing, showing dimensions, clearances, and tolerances.
- Partition attachment: Method of attaching heads of partitions to the ceiling support members.
- Specification: Specification of material to be used, finishes to exposed members, corrosion
protection, performance data of components and assemblies, and other pertinent information.
- Vibration reduction: Method of reducing contact vibrations between structure and ceiling.
Type tests
See BCA C1.10 which references Specification C1.10. Specification C1.10a is an alternative. Select the appropriate properties
and test methods according to the BCA specification alternative.
General: Submit type-test reports to verify conformance with the Suspended ceilings performance
schedule and as follows:
All these reports should be readily available for most proprietary ceilings.
- Fire hazard properties:
. Average specific extinction area (non-sprinklered buildings): < 250 m2/kg to AS/NZS 3837.
Situations without sprinkler systems must have a smoke growth rate index not more than 100 when tested to AS ISO 9705 and
2
BCA Specification A2.4, or an average specific extinction area less than 250 m /kg when tested to AS/NZS 3837.
. Group number: To AS/NZS 3837 and BCA Spec A2.4, or AS ISO 9705.
Specification C1.10a Table 2 has group number requirements for linings. Materials used as a finish, surface, lining, or
attachment to a wall or ceiling must be a Group 1, 2 or 3 material. Materials group number may be determined either by:
• Testing in accordance with AS ISO 9705, or
• Prediction in accordance with BCA Specification A2.4 using data obtained by testing to AS/NZS 3837.
. Smoke-developed index: To AS/NZS 1530.3.
. Smoke development rate: < 750 percent-minutes to AS ISO 9239.1.
. Smoke growth rate index (non-sprinklered buildings): < 100 to AS ISO 9705 and BCA Spec A2.4.
. Spread of flame index: To AS/NZS 1530.3.
- Weighted suspended ceiling normalized level difference: To AS/NZS 1276.1 or ISO 717-1.
- Weighted sound absorption coefficient: To AS ISO 11654.
5 PRODUCTS
5.1 LININGS
Fibrous plaster tiles
Standard: To AS 2185 with hard cast plaster face.
Now made obsolescent, but still available.
Lining, panels or tiles

General: Provide in conformance with the Suspended ceiling construction schedule.
Plasterboard panels
Glass fibre reinforced gypsum plasterboard: To AS 2590.
Now made obsolescent but still available
Plasterboard: To AS/NZS 2588.
Suspension system
General: Provide in conformance with the Suspended ceiling construction schedule.

6 EXECUTION
6.1 INSTALLATION
Show on the drawings the location and extent of the suspended ceiling and where appropriate the basic grid layout. See also
AS/NZS 2785 Section 4 on installation. Delete the installation clauses for materials not required for the project. Consult
manufacturers for particular installation requirements for other materials.
Ceiling grid
General: Set out the ceiling grid so that panel joints and centrelines of visible suspension members
coincide with grid lines shown on the drawings. If not otherwise shown, set out so that opposite
margins are equal.
Pattern and texture: Set out patterned or heavily textured materials to give consistency in direction of
pattern or texture.
Special sized panels: Provide special sized purpose-made panels to fill non-standard margins,
openings and penetrations.
Cut tile edges
General: Conceal, or finish to match prefinished edges.
Generally only plain units or units within a random pattern will be considered for approval to cut.
Luminaires
General: Fit luminaires within the ceiling grid system to ensure that distortion, overloading or excessive
vertical deflection is prevented. Support luminaires on the ceiling primary grid members.
Partitions
General: If partitions are attached to the underside of the ceiling systems include the partition mass in
the seismic mass of the ceiling.
Proprietary systems
General: Provide suspended ceilings as complete proprietary systems, each fabricated by one
manufacturer and installed by a specialist installer of demonstrated capacity.
Protection
General: Protect existing work from damage during the installation.
Stability
General: Install the ceilings level; and fix so that under normal conditions there is no looseness or
rattling of ceiling components.
Structure-borne sound
General: Provide a ceiling system which does not amplify structure-borne sound. Provide suitable
proprietary products or systems for reducing contact vibrations between structure and ceiling.
6.2 SUPPORTS
The suspension system may comprise hangers or struts depending on which direction the load is applied. External ceilings will
be subjected to upward wind loads and will therefore require strutting members, see AS/NZS 2785 Appendix A.
Bracing
General: Provide bracing to prevent lateral movement and to resist the imposed horizontal seismic
force.
The ceiling where it abuts glazing should be braced at the perimeter, to prevent the ceiling from transferring horizontal load to
the glazing under seismic activity.
Bulkheads
General: Construct bulkheads and other similar ceiling formations as an integral part of the ceiling
structure. Brace bulkheads to prevent lateral movement. If the ceiling is terminated at a bulkhead,
provide for seismic requirements.
External suspended soffits
General: Support external suspended soffits on rigid strutting members capable of carrying the
imposed loads. Install downstrutting members to minimise any eccentricity, and ensure that the
upward and downward wind loads are carried through to the supporting structure.

Fasteners
General: Install fasteners so that they are not visible in the finished ceiling. Do not use screw fasteners
in tension in materials less than 3 mm thick.
Movement joints
Abutments: Install the ceiling to allow for differential movement with abutting surfaces.
Exterior ceiling systems are subjected to additional thermal movement, due to the uncontrolled nature of the environment. The
spacing of control joints should take account of these additional thermal effects.
Alignment: Install the ceiling with control joints to correspond in location and direction to those in the
structural frame. Do not bridge any control joint in the structural frame with the ceiling.
Prefinishes
General: Repair damaged prefinishes by recoating.
Support members
Grid members: If required, notch grid members at the junction with the perimeter trim to ensure the
panels lie flat on the perimeter trim.
Services: Do not suspend from services (e.g. ductwork) unless the service has been designed to
accept the ceiling load. In locations where services obstruct the ceiling supports, provide bridging and
suspension on each side of the services. Do not support services terminals on ceiling tiles or panels.
Spacing: Space the support members as required by the loads on the system and the type of ceiling,
and allow for the installation of services and accessories, including ductwork, light fittings and
diffusers. Provide additional back support or suspension members for the fixing of such items.
Suspension system
Failure: Provide a ceiling system such that failure of any one suspension point does not cause a
progressive failure of the ceiling.
Height adjustment: Provide height adjustment by means of a length adjustment device at each
suspension point, permitting length variation of at least 50 mm. Do not attach the suspension system
to the lip of purlins.
If particular height adjustment devices are not permitted, say so here. The use of threaded rod systems does not necessarily
constitute a stronger ceiling grid system.
6.3 PANELS
General
Fitting: Fit panels accurately and neatly, free from air leakage and staining. Provide additional support
and bracing to panels which are required to carry dead loads other than the panel's own weight.
Panel lock clips: If panels are exposed to wind loads or if required for security, insert panel lock clips
at the junction of carrier rails and panels.
Plasterboard trim: Provide purpose-made corner beads, casing beads and stop beads.
Trim: Provide trim at junctions with other building elements and surfaces, such as walls, beams and
penetrations, consistent with the style, materials and finishes of the ceiling system generally.
Insert type and proprietary name, or delete if the prescriptive specification in the template is sufficient.
Installation: e.g. “In accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations”.
Finish: e.g. “Painted”.
Type: e.g. “Standard 90 mm scotia cornice”, “Moulded plaster sprinkler cornice”.
Control joints
Location: Provide for control joints in sheet finishes where required by the Lining worksection. Where
possible, position joints to intersect lighting fixtures, vents or air diffusers.
Or show on the drawings. See AS/NZS 2785, clause 4.13.
Movement joints: Form movement joints with purpose-made control joint beads.
Curtain recesses
General: Provide curtain recesses as part of the ceiling system, including the provision of supporting
brackets for curtain tracks.
Curtain tracks: Provide curtain tracks, including end stops and runners.

Show on drawings and refer to the detail.

For package (multiple-prime) contracting, note that curtain tracks may not be installed by the suspended ceiling contractor.
Service penetrations
General: Provide openings for, and fit the ceiling system up to, all services elements such as light
fittings, ventilation outlets, detectors, sprinklers and loudspeakers.
Provide for ceiling access panels where necessary to light fittings, sprinkler control valves, and the like.
6.4 ACCESS PANELS

Finish
General: Match the ceiling panels in appearance and performance.
Identification
General: Provide each access panel with an identification mark.
Non-demountable ceilings
General: Provide access panels supported and anchored to permit ready removal and refixing.
Reinforcement
General: Reinforce the back of the access panel to prevent warping and facilitate handling.
6.5 COMPLETION
Maintenance manual
General: On completion, submit a manual of recommendations for the care and maintenance of the
ceiling, and operating instructions for demounting if applicable.
Spares
Applies mainly to demountable systems where the tiles, etc., are liable to suffer from handling. Suspension system members
should need less replacement. Vary the quantities stated, as required.
General: Supply spare matching tiles and accessories of each type for future replacement purposes.
Store the spare materials on site where directed.
Supporting system: One spare supporting member (hanger or framework member) for every 100
members (or part thereof) of the same type installed in the ceiling.
Tiles, panels, strips: One spare unit for every 50 units (or part thereof) installed in the ceiling.
7 SELECTIONS
7.1 SUSPENDED CEILINGS

Suspended ceiling construction schedule
Type or location
A B C
Demountability
Suspended ceiling system:
- Type
- Material
Ceiling material:
- Lining
- Panels
- Tiles
- Form

- Panel size (mm)

- Thickness (mm)
- Pattern
- Colour
- Type
- Mineral fibre content
- Standard
- Grade
- Pitch (mm)
- Depth (mm)
- Edge type
- Density
- Backing
- Surface
- Finish
Trim
If the names of firms and proprietary types are quoted here, much of the data required by this schedule may be unnecessary.
Suspended ceiling system type: Nominate for flush set ceilings, tiles or panels.
Demountability: Required or not.
If using perimeter trim and exposed support grid it is necessary to notch the grid members at the junction with the perimeter trim
to ensure the panels lie flat on the trim. The extra cost may not be warranted in all cases. Specify if required.
Suspended ceiling performance schedule
Sound insulation properties need to be specified by means of the appropriate quantities which must be described using the
correct terms, symbols and units.
Type or location
A B C
Additional structural actions
- Group number
Weighted suspended ceiling normalized level
difference, Dn,c,w
Weighted sound absorption coefficient, αw
Additional structural design actions: See AS/NZS 2785 clause 3.2. Specify only those actions additional to those given in
General requirements.

• Suspended ceilings designed in accordance with AS/NZS 2785 only cover non-trafficable ceiling systems. If the plenum or
roof space is to be accessible for maintenance personnel on temporary or permanent walkways, make appropriate
provision here and, if necessary, on the drawings. Specify the imposed loadings for the supporting framework of access
hatches and loading from access ladders. Specify the supporting framework and any structures e.g. catwalks, under the
appropriate worksection e.g. Light steel framing.
• The standard states that access hatches are not be used for personnel to enter plenum spaces.
• For earthquake mass of the ceiling, see AS/NZS 2785 clause 3.3.4.2.
Consider other actions loads e.g. from ductwork, bulkheads, equipment, not carried independently of the ceiling system.
AS/NZS 2785 clause 3.1.2 requires that the ceiling system remain structurally sound, without maintenance for a period of 15
years. AS/NZS 2785 Appendix F (Informative) addresses material selection and performance with reference made to
AS/NZS 2312.
Acoustic performance may, to a degree, be specified by performance in terms of sound insulation properties.
Refer to the Commentary for information regarding the BCA requirements for sound insulation.

ACCESS FLOORS INTERIOR
ACCESS FLOORS
This worksection is applicable to pedestal access floor systems, covered by AS 4154.
• Concrete finishes for substrate surface treatment (i.e. sealants to suppress dust).
• Joinery for ramps if not part of the access floor system.
• Carpets for carpet finish.
• Non-pedestal systems (not covered by AS 4154), in which the panels (often of particleboard) are supported on a system of
modular base tiles laid on the subfloor.
• None.
• Layout, height and dimensions to your office documentation policy.
• The location of perforated or louvred panels and similar accessories should be shown on the drawings. If perforated panels
are specified, the percentage open area should also be stated.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
General: Provide access floors as follows and to Performance.
Products and finishes should be selected to be resistant to impacts expected in use.
Consider calling for a warranty, and add to the Warranty schedule in General requirements.

General
have no overlaps.
>

1.3 STANDARDS
General
Access floors: To AS 4154.
Check with floor system manufacturers when using the worksection – some may not be working to the standards. Calling up a
proprietary system may render much of this worksection redundant.
AS 2834, which covers, in part, computer access floors. It covers many matters other than floors, and deals with non-access
floors. For access floors it cites AS 4154, yet repeats or paraphrases some of that standard’s contents, often as
recommendations, which can be confusing. See for example AS 2834 Appendix B2.3 and B2.4 (informative), and AS 4154
clauses 3.4 and 4.5.2.
1.4 INSPECTION
Notice
- Subfloor services installed before access floor installation.
- Floor panels placed before surface covering, if not integral.
1.5 SUBMISSIONS
Prototype
Description: Erect a prototype of the access floor, including at least one example of each of the
components.
Samples may also be required, depending on method of specifying. Particularly for factory-applied finishes such as carpet or
vinyl.
Location and extent: >
Shop drawings
General: Submit shop drawings showing the relevant details of the access floor system including the
following where applicable:
- Floor plan layout showing grid modules, interruptions to grid, location of stringers, panels requiring
drilling or cut-out for services, location of non-standard panels (if any), grilles, registers, and
perforated panels.
- Stringer section showing material and dimensions.
- Panel section showing construction, materials, dimensions and finishes.
- Pedestals showing material, dimensions, limit of vertical adjustment, method of locking, methods of
attachment to floor and to stringers or panels.
- Edge details and junctions with adjoining work.
Type tests
AS 4154 clause 4.2.1 stipulates testing to AS 4155.4 and AS 4155.5. Testing to the other standards cited here is not a
requirement of the standard.
General: Submit the results of type tests as follows:
- Fire hazard properties to AS/NZS 1530.3: Required.
- Dimensional tolerances:
See AS 4154 clauses 3.3 on panel flatness, squareness and dimensions and 4.2.2 on criteria for acceptance.
. Testing to AS 4155.1: Required.
The criteria for squareness in AS 4155.3 equates to ± 0.5 mm for 600 x 600 mm tiles.
- Electrical resistance of computer access floors to AS 4155.6: Required, use the form given in
AS 2834 Appendix D.
AS 2834 references AS 4155.6, but also provides a near identical test method in the “informative” Appendix D3. See AS 4154
clause 4.5.1.1, which sets criteria which apply only to floors for “sensitive” computer equipment. The contractor is unlikely to
know if the equipment is “sensitive”, so you should advise if the criteria apply.

- Structure:
See AS 4154 clauses 5.2.1 and 5.2.2 on static, ultimate, dynamic impact and dynamic rolling loads..
Air leakage of air plenums
Testing: Required.
Test pressure (Pa): >
Coordinate with equipment and/or airconditioning specifications. Check if it is carried out by the airconditioning contractor. Edit
as required..

Manufacturer’s data: Submit manufacturer’s published product data including diagrams and
illustrations.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE
Use of this clause assumes that the contractor will design the access floor installation, at least in detail. This may not be
appropriate if the contract is of the “construct-only” type. If using this clause, ensure that prescriptive requirements do not
conflict. Also, review the General subsection.
Use
Area function: >
e.g. “General office”, “Computer room”, “Clean room”. If there is more than one area function in the project, prepare a separate
schedule for each.
Intended use of system: >
Must be specified – see AS 4154 Appendix A2, and clause 2.1.2. Choices include the following:
• A readily accessible underfloor space suitable for running electrical, mechanical, computer or communication services and
the like.
• An air supply plenum. See AS 2834 clause 2.1.5.
• A return air passage, which may include provision for laminar airflow as required in clean room systems.
Classification of environment type for computer access floors, to AS 2834:
>
“Type 1”, “Type 2”, “Type 3” or “Type 4”. See AS 2834 clause 1.5 for classification of environment types for computer
equipment. Access floors are recommended for Type 1, usually not warranted for Type 2, and not required for Types 3 and 4.
Stability
General: Provide a completed floor system which is rigid, free from vibration, creep, squeaking, and
the like, which has a smooth and uniform finished surface, and which will maintain these conditions
when sufficient panels have been removed for normal access.
Access for maintenance: >
See AS 4154 clause 2.1.3, which stipulates “adequate” access but does not state what this might be. If required, qualify this
requirement here.
Air tightness of air plenums
If the underfloor space is to be used as a plenum, state requirement in terms of air pressure and loss per square metre of
surface per hour.
General: Provide an edge to edge fit of the panels which is air tight within the following limits:

- Maximum: >
- Minimum: >
Dimensional tolerances of installations
AS 4154 only covers vertical tolerances, at clauses 3.2.2 and 3.2.3, and squareness of individual panels, at 3.3.2. Specify
maximum/nominal gap between panels.
On height difference between adjacent panels, the standard’s default of 0.75 mm may be too generous.
Horizontal dimensions (mm):
- Maximum deviation from true floor grid: >
e.g. “3 mm”.
- Maximum deviation of a grid line from straight:
>
e.g. “1:1000, up to 3 mm”.
Fire rating
Indices: >
Must be specified (see AS 4154 Appendix A2). Requirements of computer equipment in this respect are often more stringent
than the BCA requirements - it is suggested that all indices should be set at zero for computer access floors. This would
preclude woodcore floors.
2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Types
See AS 4154 clause 1.4. Type: Adjustable or non-adjustable. Must be specified (see AS 4154 Appendix A2).
Adjustability: Required.
Or, “Not required”.
Stringers: >
State whether required or not. Stringer-supported systems provide a higher degree of stability than stringerless systems (each
suitable for particular purposes). Consult manufacturers. Stringerless systems may be gravity held, or gravity held and located
by punched tabs, threaded fasteners, and the like. They are not recommended for use in computer rooms unless provided with
a positive location and locking facility between floor panels and pedestal head.
Strength grade: >
“Light”, “Medium”, “Heavy” or “Extra heavy”. See AS 4154 Section 5. Must be specified (see AS 4154 Appendix A2).
Floor heights
Must be specified, according to AS 4154 clause 3.1.2.
Finished floor above subfloor (mm): >
Must be specified (see AS 4154 Appendix A2).
Maximum height of floor (mm): >
From AS 4154, Note to clause 3.1.2. Applies to adjustable floors. May be reduced to 80 mm if adjustability is not required.
Minimum height of floor: 150 mm.
Minimum underfloor clearance to computer access floors: 300 mm.
Recommended in AS 2834, Note to clause 2.1.4, which suggests absolute minima of 250 mm (when used as an airconditioning
plenum) and 150 mm (when used only for conduits, small pipes and signal cables).
2.3 PEDESTALS
If a proprietary system is selected modify the component description to suit those offered by the manufacturer.
Description
Material: >
e.g. “Steel”, “Aluminium”. Specify grades.
Finish: >
Head to panel connection: >
For stringerless systems. e.g. “Gravity”, “Lugs”, “Bolts”. Delete if not applicable.

Floor fixing: >

e.g. adhesive, metal fasteners, mechanical anchors.
Adjustable floors
General: Incorporate in each unit a means of height adjustment within the limits specified, without
requiring rotation of the head, and a means of locking the adjustment to prevent accidental
displacement.
Height adjustment limits (mm):
- Maximum extension: >
- Minimum extension: >
Means and range must be specified, according to AS 4154 clause 3.1.2.
Materials
General: Non-combustible, made using materials with melting point ≥ 350°C.
From AS 2834 Appendix B2.2, for computer equipment.
Pedestal location
General: Under every corner of every panel.
2.4 STRINGERS
Delete for stringerless systems.
Description
Material: >
Finish: >
Form: >
Roll-formed or die-formed metal channels, box or T-sections. May be continuous or removable.
Spanning: In both directions between pedestals.
Connection to pedestal heads: >
e.g. drop-on (i.e. gravity fixed), snap-on (i.e. mechanically interlocked), clamped or bolted.
Materials
General: Non-combustible, made using materials with melting point ≥ 350°C.
From AS 2834 Appendix B2.2, for computer equipment.
2.5 PANELS
Pan-type, die-cast, and welded steel panels are all descriptions of products which are available only with the system of
particular manufacturers. Some panel types have a tendency to warp as a result of wetting (e.g. with cleaning fluids). Check.
Description
Form: >
Possibilities include the following:
• Pan-type panels: Metallic-coated 0.6 mm thick pressed steel top and bottom pans enclosing and bonded to a 25 mm thick
particleboard core.
• Die-cast panels: Die cast aluminium edge machined after casting, with ribbed stiffeners.
• Welded steel panels: A flat hard-rolled steel top sheet welded to a die-formed steel bottom pan.
• Perforated panels: Welded steel panels with perforations. For air supply or return with subfloor as air plenum. Optional
slide dampers are available for air volume regulation.
• Grate panels: Chemical-resistant aluminium grate panels. For high volume laminar air return from “clean rooms”.
Material: >
Core: >
e.g. for welded steel panels, foamed lightweight concrete, particleboard, or coreless.
Edge strips: >
For example:
• Extruded rigid vinyl section mechanically locked between the top and bottom panels (pan-type).

• Extruded plastic section pressure-inserted into a machined recess and fastened with adhesive (die-cast).
• Purpose-made vinyl strip pressure-bonded and mechanically locked to the panel (welded steel), for resilient finish
coverings. Alternatively, may be surfaced with purpose-made wrap-around carpet tiles.
• Finish: e.g. for welded steel panels, factory applied corrosion-resistant coating.
Finish: >
Dimensions
Coordinating size: 600 x 600 mm.
Minimum size of cut tiles (mm): >
Overall thickness (mm): >
Maximum weight: 18 kg.
Must be specified, according to AS 4154 clause 3.1.1. Consider manual handling legislation, generally based on the National
Occupational Health and Safety Commission (NOHSC) document “National Code of Practice for Manual Handling” . This
recommends that loads which are routinely manually lifted, lowered or carried be generally below about 18 kg, with an absolute
maximum occasional load of 55 kg.
Cut outs
General: Provide cut outs for cable access and air grilles as necessary.
Edge cut outs: Provide stringer or pedestal, or both, support.
Omitted panels: Permanently omitted panels are not permitted.
Labelling
Especially applicable to some non-pedestal systems.
Non-standard panels: Identify for relocation purposes.
Service identification labels: Provide self-adhesive labels identifying services and their direction. Fix to
the visible surface of the floor panel, and under carpet finish if any.
Panels over items such as window cleaning harness anchors should also be identified. Labels may be provided by services
contractors. Delete if not required
2.6 ACCESSORIES
Ramps
Slope: Maximum 1:8.
Load characteristics: Match floor panels.
AS 2834 Appendix B2.6 also suggests compliance with AS 1428 (AS 1428.1 is widely cited in the BCA). Specify cover plates
(e.g. flush extruded aluminium) at access floor junction.
Stairs >
Describe or refer to details.
Railings >
Alternatives:
• Describe or refer to details.
• May be part of proprietary system.
• May require electrical grounding.
• Delete if not required.
Vertical edging panels >
Where the access floor does not cover the whole of the room. Also called fascia panels. Describe front and back faces, cores,
and accessories. Perimeter support is often provided by angles. A row of edge pedestals may be preferred.
Skirting trims >
Services
Electrical outlets: >
Data outlets: >
Telephone outlets: >
Combined services boxes: >

Fire extinguisher access plugs: >

Cable access grommets: >
Electrical outlets; Data outlets; Telephone outlets; and Combined services boxes: Specify type e.g. inset flush. Combined boxes
2
are the norm. Specify rate e.g. number per 10 m , and/or indicate locations.
Sound dampening
Pedestal head gaskets: >
Stringer pads: >
Air grilles to air plenums
Product: >
Alternative: Specify material, blade size, vane design, and dampers e.g. integral fire damper.
Conductive air grilles: Insulate from electrical earth.
Non-conductive air grilles: Do not expose metal screws.
From AS 4154, Note to clause 4.5.2.
Air flow rating: Base on pressure differential of 25 Pa with damper fully open, if applicable, and
maximum face velocity of 2 m/s.
From AS 2834 Appendix B2.3.
Adjustability: >
e.g. “Required” - state method if warranted.
Air plenum dividers >
Dividers may also be required for fire or smoke compartmentation, for example. Specify fire rating, or construction. Specify
gaskets, sealants.
Lifting devices
General: Required.
Number: >
Marking: If panels must not be lifted from the side, mark lifting devices “Lift panel vertically at centre”.
From AS 4154, Notes to clause 3.4.2.
2.7 FINISHES
Panels
Integral floor finishes: Required.
- Material: >
e.g. High pressure laminate is recommended in AS 2834 Appendix B.4.2. Alternatives are:
• Antistatic PVC
• Antistatic carpet – which should contain permanent integral electrical resistance, rather than relying on applied treatments,
according to AS 2834 Appendix B.4.2.
- Adhesive: >
Delete if integral to the product. Otherwise consider adhesives that are moisture resistant, waterproof and electrically
conductive.
- Surface treatment: Preserve conductive properties of floor surface.
From AS 2834 Appendix B2.7. The materials requirements of AS 4154 clause 4.4 only apply to integral floor finishes, according
to AS 4154 clause 2.1.5. For non-integral carpet, for example, use the Carpets worksection and coordinate.
Underside facing: Non-combustible.
Underfloor
General: Metallic coated finish to metal understructure.
Sealing
Perimeter gap sealing method: >
Describe or refer to details. Should be specified, according to AS 4154, Note 1 to clause 3.2.1.
Vermin sealing of underfloor space: Required.
Vermin sealing of underfloor space: From AS 2834 Appendix B2.12. Not carried out by access floor contractors.

Subfloor surface treatment

Sealant: >
e.g. Required. From AS 2834 Appendix B2.11. Probably not carried out by access floor contractor. Underfloor waste traps need
to be topped up from time to time to maintain the seal.
Sealant treatment: >
Specify here or refer to Resilient finishes.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Protection
General: Provide temporary protection from surface damage and concentrated loads, during
installation of access floor and of items which it supports.
Site cutting
General: Provide edge trim to site cut panels.
3.2 COMPLETION
Maintenance manual
General: On completion, submit bound recommendations for the care and maintenance of the access
floor, and operating instructions for panel removal and height adjustment.
Contents: Include the following information:
- Limitation on maximum and minimum height of floor, cross-bracings, stringers or additional pedestal
fixings required above a particular height.
- Limitation on adjustability.
- Installed mass of system per square metre.
- Maximum number and positions of panels that may be temporarily removed during servicing without
endangering safety of floor system.
- Method of cleaning of floor covering with particular reference to adhesives and panel substrate, wet
mopping, and use of waxes and floor polishes.
- Equipotential bonding method.
Derived from AS 4154 Appendix A3. Clause 4.7 requires protective finishes to be specified, which appears to conflict with the
Appendix. The Note to Clause 4.5.1.2 suggests that the manufacturer normally advises equipotential bonding method.
Spares
General: Supply pedestals, stringers and uncut floor panels (including finishes) of each type at a rate
of 2% of total installation.
Storage location: >
Making good
Corrosion: Replace corroded elements.
Cleaning
General: Clean access floor thoroughly and dust free, before delivery of items which it supports.
Air plenum: Vacuum underfloor area so it is free of dust, metal filings and the like.
Generally carried out by a specialist cleaning company. From AS 2834 Appendix B2.5. Dust-free surfaces are imperative in
plenum and laminar air flow return spaces especially.

JOINERY INTERIOR
JOINERY
This worksection is applicable to the shop fabrication and site installation of custom made joinery fixtures.
• Metalwork for custom-made metal fixtures.
• Applied wall finishes for fabricated and in situ applied wall finishes.
• Painting for site painting.
• Shop painting opaque lacquers and enamels, and clear finishes.
• None.
• Note additional noggings or stud stiffeners required for the support of wall hung units in Partitions – framed and lined.
• Import applicable material from Stainless steel benching, or Metalwork, for stainless steel features to joinery fixtures.
• Import applicable material from Stone and terrazzo tiling, for stone finishes to joinery fixtures.
• Import applicable material from Glazing for processed glass features or finishes.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
General: Fabricate and install joinery items to backgrounds undamaged, plumb, level, straight and free
of distortion and to the Tolerances table.
Tolerances table
Property Tolerance criteria
Plumb and level 1 mm in 800 mm
Offsets in flush adjoining surfaces < 0.5 mm
Offsets in revealed adjoining surfaces < 2 mm
Alignment of adjoining doors < 0.5 mm
Difference in scribe thickness for joinery items centred between walls < 2 mm
Doors centred in openings zero

General

JOINERY INTERIOR
have no overlaps.
>
• Glazing.
• Metalwork.
• Painting.
1.3 INSPECTION
Notice
- Shop fabricated or assembled items ready for delivery to the site.
- Site erected assemblies on completion of erection, before covering up by cladding and encasing.
- Surfaces prepared for, and immediately before, site applied finishes.
1.4 SUBMISSIONS
Samples
General: Submit samples to the Sample table.
Sample table
Description No. of samples
Each type of board to be used complete with finish and edge stripping 2
Each type of joint 2
Typical item of hardware indicating each finish 2
Samples of the selected stone cladding showing the maximum expected variation 2 x 3 variants
Samples of the selected timber veneer showing the maximum expected variation 2 x 3 variants
Patch of each nominated fabric 2
The finish to all stainless steel items 2
Complete timber bench cupboard door, including hardware 1
Complete drawer front, including hardware 1
Samples cost money and take up time. Delete or amend this clause if sheets, finishes and edges are conventional and if
proprietary hardware is specified.
Shop drawings
General: Submit shop drawings to a scale not smaller than 1:50, showing:
- Overall dimensions.
- Materials, thicknesses and finishes of elements including doors, divisions, shelves and benches.

JOINERY INTERIOR
- Type of construction including mitre joints and junctions of members.

- Hardware type and location.
- Temporary bracing, if required.
- Procedures for shop and site assembly and fixing.
- Locations of benchtop joints.
- Stone benchtop layout including joint arrangement and penetrations.
- Locations of sanitary fixtures, stoves, ovens, sinks, and other items to be installed in the units.
- Relationship of fixture to adjacent building elements.
- Proposals for the break-up of large items as required for delivery to the site.
- Proposed method of joining the modules of large items.
If delivery involves a goods lift nominate the car size and capacity.
These shop drawing requirements assume the installation is fully detailed. Edit as required.
2 PRODUCTS
The prompts for this subsection set out the range of characteristics which need to be considered when specifying sheet
products. If there are several locations or applications requiring differing types or grades of sheet, tabulate or complete a
separate schedule for each, so that a notation on a drawing would call up the appropriate type of sheet.
2.1 JOINERY MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS

Joinery timber
- Grade: >
Three grades are provided in AS 2796.3, select (SEL), medium feature (MF) and high feature (HF).
- Grade: >
1 or 2.
- Grade: >
Separate grades are given for pinus and non-pinus species of clear (FCL), select (FSEL), standard (FSTD) and utility (FUTL).
An additional furniture appearance grade (FAP) is specified for the pinus species.
Plywood
Interior use generally: To AS/NZS 2270.
Interior use, exposed to moisture: To AS/NZS 2271.
Grade: >
E.g. Decorative, select and general purpose.
AS/NZS 2270 grades plywood by the quality of the face and back veneers as set out in Table 1.1
Non-structural glued laminated timber
Standard: AS 5067.
Service class: >
AS 5067 service classes are based on the temperature and humidity of the in service environment. Typical applications are as
follows:
• Service class 1: Interior framing, staircases.
• Service class 2: Kitchens, vanities, painted outdoor furnitre.
• Service class 3: Sauna benches, unpainted outdoor furniture.
Appearance grade: >
AS 5067 grades appearance as follows:
• Select grade good 1 side, e.g. bench tops.
• Select grade good 2 sides, e.g. exposed stair treads.

JOINERY INTERIOR
There are also industrial and non-appearance grades.

AS/NZS 1859.4 defines wet-processed fibreboard as panel material with a nominal thickness of 1.5 mm or greater,
manufactured from lignocellulosic fibres (derived from wood or other materials) with application of heat and/or pressure, the
bond of which is derived from the felting of the fibres and the panels are manufactured with a forming moisture content greater
than 20%.
- Classification: >
- Bending strength: >
Particleboard
AS/NZS 1859.1 defines particleboard as panel material manufactured under pressure and heat from particles of wood (wood
flakes, chips, shavings, sawdust, and similar) and/or lignocellulosic material form (flax shivers, hemp shives, bagasse
fragments, rice hulls, wheat straw and similar) with addition of an adhesive.
- Classification: >
bearing application. Alternatively, quote the manufacturer’s designations when specifying particleboard if you do not feel
comfortable with the generic provisions. Both standard and high moisture resistant grades are available overlaid with a range of
finishes, most commonly low pressure melamine and timber veneers. Matching melamine edge strips are usually available for
melamine overlaid particleboard and there is a degree of coordination between the range of decorative overlaid boards and
decorative laminated sheets. Check manufacturers’ current availability lists before specifying. Standard grade particleboard is
available edge stripped in solid timber and is suitable for raw shelving etc.
Melamine overlaid particleboard: Particleboard overlaid on both sides with low pressure melamine.
Dry-processed fibreboard (MDF)
AS/NZS 1859.2 defines dry-processed fibreboard as panel material with a nominal thickness of 1.5 mm or greater,
manufactured from lignocellulosic fibres (derived from wood or other materials) with application of heat and/or pressure, the
bond of which is derived from a synthetic adhesive added to the fibres and the panels are manufactured with a moisture content
less than 20%. Refer also to the Commentary.
Alternatively, ultra low density (STD Ultra LDF), low density (STD LDF), high density (STD HDF), moisture resistant (MR HDF)
or (MR MDF) or high performance (HP MDF).
Melamine overlaid medium density fibreboard: Medium density fibreboard (STD MDF) overlaid on both
sides with low pressure melamine.
Decorative overlays
AS/NZS 1859.3 covers low pressure melamine and PVC film, both referred to in this worksection, and paper foils and wood
veneer. If using wood veneer, specify “ordering code” in Table 6.1, and species.
High-pressure decorative laminate sheets
While decorative laminated sheets can be specified by reference to AS/NZS 2924.1, it is expected that proprietary items will
normally be scheduled if choice of colour is critical. The wide range of products available are generally covered by
AS/NZS 2924.1, Table 1 which defines the classes and typical applications. These classes have suffixes for standard type
(Type S), Type P (postformable) and Type F (defined reaction to fire). See standard for full information.
Class Definition Typical applications

CG (S or F) Compact general purpose High performance, self supporting vertical or horizontal
surfaces
HD (S or F) Horizontal heavy duty High performance horizontal surfaces
HG (S, For P) Horizontal general purpose General horizontal surfaces and high performance
vertical surfaces

JOINERY INTERIOR

VG (S, For P) Vertical general purpose General vertical surfaces and light duty horizontal
surfaces
VL (S) Vertical light duty Light duty vertical surfaces
Thickness (minimum):
- For horizontal surfaces fixed to a continuous background: 1.2 mm.
- For vertical surfaces fixed to a continuous background: 0.8 mm.
- For post formed laminate fixed to a continuous background: 0.8 mm.
- For vertical surfaces fixed intermittently (e.g. to studs): 3.0 mm.
- For edge strips: 0.4 mm.
Stone facings
General: Provide stone slabs within the visual range of the approved samples. Repair mud veins or
lines of separation that are integral to the selected pattern with resin fillers and back lining.
Timber veneers
General: Provide veneers slip matched and flitch batched and falling within the visual range of the
approved samples.
Cut type: >
E.g. rotary, quarter cut.
Veneer arrangement: >
Nominate book matching if required.
Toughened glass panels
Provide: >
Cross refer to selections in Glazing.
2.2 JOINERY ITEMS

If joinery work is fully detailed you could cross refer to the drawings and add the following notes as an alternative to the
materials and components listed separately below for typical joinery items or assemblies.
General
Provide materials noted on drawings as follows:
- Joinery components and their location, indicative construction details, scribes and trims, materials,
dimensions and thicknesses, and finishes shall be as detailed.
- All dimensions noted on drawings shall be confirmed on site after the completion of partitions.
- Finishes selections are noted in the Finishes schedule.
- Hardware and equipment: Major items shall be noted on drawings where they occur and all
hardware and equipment items are noted in the FF&E schedule.
Delete if joinery is not fully detailed.
2.3 DOMESTIC KITCHEN ASSEMBLIES

The selection of medium density fibreboard or particleboard can in most cases be left to the fabricator. Vary the specification if
you have a preference. Colour availability is more restricted in particleboard substrates. High moisture resistant particleboard is
the default. Its use is essential in all domestic kitchen locations. Vary if a standard particleboard substrate is acceptable. Only
the high moisture resistant grade of medium density fibreboard is available in the melamine overlaid products.
Standard
The associated installation standard, AS/NZS 4386.2, is a mix of “shalls” and “shoulds” and should be cited with care if at all. It
may be better to use it as a guide for the preparation of installation clauses. For design brief preparation, see SAA HB111.
AFRDI Blue Tick: >
See Commentary to Workstations in the Miscellaneous furniture worksection.

JOINERY INTERIOR
Plinths
Built-in cupboards, particularly in domestic kitchens, usually consist of a plinth, a carcass and a top. The plinth is scribed to the
floor to provide a level base for the carcasses. Usually the plinth forms the toe recess. Given the needs of on site working,
moisture resistance and durability, plywood is probably the best general substrate. Other materials may be required e.g. to
match timber or tile skirtings.
Material: Select from the following:
- Exterior general purpose plywood.
- High moisture resistant particleboard.
- High moisture resistant medium density fibreboard.
Thickness: 16 mm.
Fabrication: Form up with front and back members and full height cross members at not more than
900 mm centres.
Finish: High-pressure decorative laminated sheet.
- Class: >
- Type: >
- Pattern: >
- Texture: >
- Colour: >
- Fasteners: Conceal with finish.
Installation: Scribe to floor and secure to wall to provide level platform for carcasses.
Carcasses
- Melamine overlaid high moisture resistant particleboard.
- Melamine overlaid high moisture resistant medium density fibreboard.
Thickness: 16 mm.
16 mm board is generally adequate for most construction. Vary the thickness if appropriate.
Joints: Select from the following:
- Proprietary mechanical connections.
- Dowels and glue.
- Screws and glue.
- Proprietary joining plates and glue.
Adjustable shelves: Support on proprietary pins in holes bored at equal centres vertically.
- Spacing: 32 mm.
A variety of hole size and drilling centres are in use, vary as required. For bookshelves a maximum span of 600 mm is
recommended.
- Class: >
- Type: >
- Pattern: >
- Texture: >
- Colour: >
A common practice is to use a white melamine overlaid board for construction generally and to laminate gable ends, exposed
backs and insides to the selected colour. This eliminates the need for secret fixings and gives the widest choice of colour.
Alternatively, secret fixings can be used and melamine overlaid board used throughout except for bench tops. Heavy duty
melamine overlaid boards are available which are claimed to match the performance of laminated surfaces. Specify by
proprietary item if required.
Fasteners: Conceal with finish.
Installation: Secure to walls at not more than 600 mm centres.
Drawer fronts and doors

JOINERY INTERIOR
- Melamine overlaid high moisture resistant particleboard.

- Melamine overlaid high moisture resistant medium density fibreboard.
Thickness: 16 mm.
Maximum door size: 2400 mm high, 900 mm wide, 1.5 m2 on face.
Drawer fronts: Route for drawer bottoms.
Finish: >
Colour: >
Drawer backs and sides
A variety of proprietary systems as well as traditional construction is available; the default here gives good construction and
finish.
Material: PVC film wrapped particleboard.
i.e. PVC on both faces and all edges.
Thickness: 12 mm.
Colour: >
Installation: Mitre corners leaving outer skin of foil intact, finish with butt joints, glue to form carcass
and screw to drawer front. Route for drawer bottoms.
Drawer bottoms
Material: PVC film laminated hardboard.
PVC film faces: >
“One” or “Two”.
Thickness: 3 mm.
Colour: >
Laminated benchtops
If you give a layout of joints, bear in mind the practicalities of transport and on site handling. Edit Submissions accordingly.
Material: High moisture resistant particleboard.
Benchtop thickness: 33 mm.
- Class: >
- Type: >
- Pattern: >
- Texture: >
- Colour: >
Exposed edges: Extend laminate over shaped nosing, finishing > 50 mm back on underside. Splay
outside corners at 45°.
Balance underside: Laminate undersides of benchtops.
Installation: Scribe to walls. Fix to carcass at least twice per 600 mm length of benchtop.
Joint sealing: Fill joint with sealant matching finish and clamp with proprietary mechanical connectors.
Stone benchtops
Material:
Natural stone or Re-constituted stone
- Type >
- Thickness >
Benchtop backing:
- Material >
- Thickness >
- Finish >
- Sealant >
Balance underside: Laminate undersides of benchtops.

JOINERY INTERIOR
Nominate or refer to detail:

• Edge treatment.
• Joints.
• Junctions with other materials.
Solid plastic benchtops: Import material as required from Stone benchtops.
Drawer and door hardware

Specify by proprietary item and schedule if required. Refer to the Door and window hardware worksection which covers items
such as hinges, keys, locks, latches, furniture and door controllers. Also consider locks and keys, if required.
Hinge types: Concealed metal hinges with the following features:
- Adjustable for height, side and depth location of door.
- Self closing action.
- Hold open function.
. Angle of opening: >
- Nickel plated.
Variables include “overlay” (amount of side panel covered by the door, e.g. full overlay, half overlay and inset) and hinge arm
cranking (amount that the hinge arm is cranked from the straight e.g. 10 mm means an offset of 10 mm) and opening angle.
Leave these to be selected by the fabricator, unless you have particular requirements.
Piano hinges: Chrome plates steel, extending full height of doors.
Slides: Metal runners and plastic rollers with the following features:
- 30 kg loading capacity.
- Closure retention.
- White thermoset powder coating.
Slides are available in a fully concealed pattern if required and with a variety of features including full and over extension and
self closing action. Specify any features required.
Pulls: >
Stops: >
There is a wide range of proprietary hardware available and those that may need to be considered include:
• Knobs and handles (pulls).
• Stays and flap hinges.
• Catches (particularly child-proof safety catches - recommended where drugs and chemicals are stored).
• Locks.
• Shelf supports and revolving units.
• Wardrobe and hanging accessories.
• Wireware.
• Extension and swivel mechanisms.
2.4 TIMBER STAIRS

General: Provide materials to the Stairs schedule.
Stairs schedule
Member Timber species or group Finished sizes (mm)
Carriages
Closed string
Cut string
Beads
Treads
Risers

JOINERY INTERIOR

Nosing bead
Soffit lining
2.5 TIMBER BALUSTRADES

General: Provide materials to the Balustrades schedule.
Balustrades schedule
Newels
Handrails
Balusters
Fascia
Bead
2.6 PROPRIETARY CIRCULAR STAIRS

General
General: Provide and install a proprietary spiral or geometric circular timber stair system assembled
from prefabricated components, inclusive of balustrade, self supporting between floors.
Product: >
Timber species or group: >
Overall diameter (mm): >
Net width of flight (mm): >
Direction down: >
Tread options: >
Balustrade options: >
3 EXECUTION
3.1 JOINERY
General
Joints: Provide materials in single lengths whenever possible. If joints are necessary make them over
supports.
Framing: Frame and trim where necessary for openings, including those required by other trades.
Openings: Provide openings for the following:
>
Provide openings for the following e.g. equipment: If scheduling required openings be sure to be comprehensive, or leave this
trade coordination matter to the contractor.
Fasteners
The range of fasteners available is so wide that it is not recommended that specifiers nominate types unless they have a
particular requirement in mind. Some fasteners have the advantage of a knock-down capability and this may be a consideration.
Stapling and nailing are excluded but may be acceptable in some classes of work. If sufficient for your purposes, say so.
Visibility: Do not provide visible fixings except in the following locations:
- Inside cupboards and drawer units.
- Inside open units in which case provide proprietary caps to conceal fixings.
Visible fixings: Where fastenings are unavoidable on visible joinery faces, sink the heads below the
surface and fill the sinking flush with a material compatible with the surface finish. In surfaces which

JOINERY INTERIOR
are to have clear or tinted finish provide matching wood plugs showing face (not end) grain. In
surfaces which are to have melamine finish provide proprietary screws and caps finished to match.
Fix joinery units to backgrounds as follows:
- Floor mounted units: 600 mm centres max.
- Wall mounted units: To each nogging and/or stud stiffener.
Fixings: Screws with washers into timber or steel framing, or masonry anchors.
Adhesives
As in the case of fasteners, the choice of these is best left to the fabricator who should rely on the adhesive manufacturer’s
recommendations.
General: Provide adhesives to transmit the loads imposed and to ensure the rigidity of the assembly,
without causing discolouration of finished surfaces.
Decorative laminated sheets: Contact adhesive to AS 2131.
Finishing
Junctions with structure: Scribe benchtops, splashbacks, ends of cupboards, kickboards and returns
to follow the line of structure.
Joints: Scribe internal and mitre external joints.
Edge strips: Finish exposed edges of sheets with edge strips which match sheet faces.
- Solid timber edge strips: >
Specify or detail any special edge strip requirements e.g. solid timber throughout, or to bench tops only. Nominate if veneer or
plastic.
Matching: For surfaces which are to have clear or tinted finish, arrange adjacent pieces to match the
grain and colour.
Hygiene requirements: To all food handling areas and voids at the backs of units to all areas, seal all
carcass junctions with walls and floors, and to cable entries, with silicone beads for vermin proofing.
Apply water resistant sealants around all plumbing fixtures and ensure the sealants are fit for purpose.
Labelling
General: Permanently mark each unit of furniture with the manufacturer's name, on an interior surface.
3.2 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

General
General: Deliver joinery units to site in unbroken wrapping or containers and store so that its moisture
content is not adversely affected. Do not store in areas of wet plaster. Keep storage to a minimum by
delivering items only when required for installation.
Back prime surfaces concealed by backgrounds.
Examine joinery units for completeness and remedy deficiencies.
Acclimatisation
General: Acclimatise the joinery items by stacking it in the in-service conditions with air circulation to
all surfaces after the following construction operations are complete:
Background
General: Damp clean and vacuum background surfaces that will be permanently concealed.
3.3 TIMBER STAIRS

Set out
General: Set out stair rod to give uniform risers and uniform treads respectively in each flight.
Fabrication
Closed strings: Trench for treads and risers.
Cut strings: Profile for treads and risers. Mitre riser ends.

JOINERY INTERIOR
Treads: Arris nosings pencil round. Return nosings at cut strings. Groove for riser tongue in closed rise
stair. Set rise 19 mm back from nosing.
Top tread: Flush with finished floor, otherwise to match stair treads. Provide similar tread section as
nosing to floor edges around stair well.
Risers: Tongue to tread. Mitre to string in cut string stairs.
Installation
General: Glue joints in internal work. In closed rise stairs wedge treads and risers to strings. Plant two
glue blocks behind each tread to riser junction. Trim floors to carry ends of stairs and around stair well.
Stair bolts (to open rise close string stairs): 8 mm diameter mild steel, one at each end and one at
centre of flight, transversely between strings. Draw strings tight against ends of treads.
Fascia: Of depth sufficient to overlap 19 mm below ceiling, fixed to floor joists hard up under nosing.
Trim: Provide beads and mouldings as necessary, including a scotia or similar planted under the tread
nosing against the risers and cut strings, a bead between wall strings and wall, and a bead behind the
fascia over the ceiling finish.
Soffit lining
General: Fix to 38 x 38 mm nailing battens notched and nailed to the underside of treads and risers of
closed rise stairs at the centre of flights and at each side.
3.4 TIMBER BALUSTRADES

Determine design loads for balustrades in accordance with AS/NZS 1170.1 and AS/NZS 1170.2.
General
General: Provide a balustrade to the stair and landing, consisting of newels, handrail, balusters, and
associated mouldings.
Newels
General: Halve and bolt to strings. Turn tops to detail.
Handrails
General: On edge. Bullnose arrises 13 mm radius. Stub tenon to newels.
Balusters
General: At 100 mm centres. Stub tenon to handrail at top and to tread or floor at bottom.
3.5 COMPLETION
Maintenance manual
Cleaning
Temporary coatings: On or before completion of the works, or before joining up to other surfaces,
General: Remove all dust, marks and rubbish from all surfaces and internal spaces. Clean and polish
all self finished surfaces such as anodised and powdercoated metals, sanitaryware, glass, tiles and
laminates.

METALWORK INTERIOR
METALWORK
This worksection is applicable to what is generally known as architectural metalwork such as handrails, access ways, screens,
guards, furniture, flagpoles, ladders, sunscreens, and decorative items.
• Structural steel for structural steel items.
• Roofing for rainwater goods.
• Glazing for toughened glass component of balustrades.
• Stainless steel benching for stainless steel benching and associated fitments and bench/sink units that form part of custom
made metal fixtures.
• Pure zinc items, polished or weathered finish.
• None.
• Import applicable material from this worksection to Applied wall finishes and Joinery for metal trims and fixings.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
General: Provide metal fixtures that are:
- Undamaged, plumb, level and straight.
- Free of surface defects or distortions.
The design should ensure the fixture remains secure and functional for the expected life of the installation.

General
have no overlaps.
>

METALWORK INTERIOR
• Glazing.
• Painting.
1.3 INSPECTION
Notice
- Shop fabricated or assembled items ready for delivery to the site.
- Commencement of shop or site welding.
- Site erected assemblies on completion of erection, before covering up by cladding and encasing.
- Steel surfaces prepared for, and immediately before, site applied finishes.
1.4 SUBMISSIONS
Samples
- Each type of joint.
- Each type of finish.
- Sections for use in fabricated work.
Samples required for: >
Nominate metal fixtures that require samples for design conformation.
Shop drawings
- Details of fabrication and components.
- Details of fabrication involving other trades or components.
e.g. toughened glass balustrade panels, proprietary louvres.
- Information necessary for site assembly.
Shop drawing certification
Usethis subclause if structural design is required in the preparation of shop drawings, certification for its design and installation
is required from a Professional Engineer engaged by the Contractor. This situation may arise for work outside of the Consultant
‘s brief e.g. the installation of proprietary doors or balustrades.
General: Engage a Professional Engineer and submit certification for the design and installation of:
>
Nominate the item or component.
Tests
Stainless steel: Before fabrication commences, submit satisfactory evidence that relevant procedure
test plates have passed the tests specified in AS/NZS 1554.6.
See AS/NZS 1554.6 clause 4.6 on the method of qualification of welding procedure by testing.
Materials
Manufacturer’s data: Submit manufacturer’s published product data including standard drawings and
details.

METALWORK INTERIOR
Stainless steel: For each batch of stainless steel supplied to the works, submit the certificate of
compliance or test certificate specified in the applicable standard.
Execution
Welding procedures: Submit details of proposed welding procedures before fabrication.
Welding dissimilar metals: Submit the following details:
- Type and thickness of materials to be welded.
- Proposed joint preparation and welding procedures.
- Proposed filler metal.
- Expected dilution (proportion of fused parent metal in the weld metal).
Fastenings to aluminium (including aluminium alloys): If cadmium-plated steel fastenings are
proposed, submit proposals.
2 PRODUCTS

Component member sizes including wall and sheet thicknesses should be shown on the drawings. Otherwise a series of
component schedules, on a project specific basis, will need to be prepared.
Metals
Performance: Provide metals suited to their required function, finish and method of fabrication, in
sections of strength and stiffness adequate for their purpose.
Copper alloys (brass, bronze, etc.)
Composition and designations: To AS 2738.
Rivets
General: Blind rivets where available in the required metal.
A blind rivet is one which can be used where the back or inside of the material being riveted is not accessible. It is not
necessarily a sealed rivet; the method of forming can leave a hole through the centre of the rivet. Sealed type blind rivets are
generally available only in aluminium and copper. Stainless steel and monel metal rivets must be sealed with a silicone sealant
inserted in the hole and finished flush.
Masonry anchors
General: Proprietary types comprising screws or bolts in self-expanding sockets.
Masonry plugs
General: Screws in purpose-made resilient plastic sockets.
2.2 STAINLESS STEEL FINISHES

Many specialist decorative finishes exist:
• Specialist grinding and polishing: e.g. random ground, hairline finish, tartan and engine turned.
• Patterned and bead blasted.
• Acid etched on a silk screened pattern.
Sample
General: Provide a finish to match the sample in terms of the mill grade and finish process.
Sample identification: >
Pre Assembly
Mechanically polished and brushed finishes: Apply grit faced belts or fibre brushes that achieve uni-
directional finishes with buffing as required to the following:
Grade: >
Select from the grade, usually nominated with the sample. If so, edit as required. No.4 is for general purpose sheet products but
can be matched for tube. No. 6 to 8 give increasing reflectivity and are buffed after abrasive brushing.
Bead blasted finish: Provide a uniform non-directional low reflective surface by bead blasting. Do not
use sand, iron or carbon steel shot. Blast both sides of austenitic grades of stainless steel to equalise
induced stress.
Non directional low-reflective finishes achieved by blasting with a variety of materials. Edit for alternatives

METALWORK INTERIOR
Electrolytically coloured finish:

An electro-chemical process that achieves a smooth reflective surface that enhances corrosion resistance.
- Colour: >
Available colours range from bronze, gold, red, purple, blue and green depending on the surface film thickness.
Patterned / textured:
Pattern rolled finishes with or without the pattern being imprinted through to the reverse side.
- Product: >
Post assembly pre-treatment
Heat discolouration: Remove by pickling.
Welds: Grind excess material, brush, and polish to match the pre assembly finish.
Post assembly finish
Electropolish finish for external installations: Provide an electro-chemical process to stainless steel
grade 316.
Brushed electropolish finish:
- Pre-assembly finish: No. 4 brushed finish.
- Post assembly finish: Provide an electro-chemical processed finish to achieve a No. 7 to No. 8
brushed finish.
Mirror electropolish finish:
- Pre assembly finish: Mill finish 2B or mirror polished finish.
1D: Hot rolled, annealed and with mill scale removed. Normally used for non-decorative applications.
2D: Low reflective matt surface more refined than 1D.
2B: Smooth reflective grey sheen that forms the basis for most polished and brushed surfaces.
2R: Highly reflective.
- Post assembly finish: Provide an electro-chemical processed finish to achieve a No. 8 mirror finish.
Completion
Cleaning: Clean and rinse to an acid free condition and allow to dry. Do not use carbon steel
abrasives or materials containing chloride.
Protection: Secure packaging or strippable plastic sheet.
3 EXECUTION

The general provisions of the template may need to be supplemented by specific requirements for particular installations. Table
3.2 of AS 1562.1 is a guide to compatibility of metals. AS 1562.1 is cited in the BCA, but not in connection with this matter.
Aluminium structures
Standard: To AS/NZS 1664.1 or AS/NZS 1664.2.
Metals
Performance: Provide metals so that they transmit the loads imposed and ensure the rigidity of the
assembly without causing deflection or distortion of finished surfaces.
Incompatible metals: Separate using concealed layers of suitable materials in appropriate thicknesses.
Fasteners
Performance: Provide fasteners so that they do not cause galvanic corrosion.
Materials: Provide fasteners in materials of mechanical strength and corrosion resistance at least
equal to that of the lowest resistant metal joined.
To copper and copper alloys: Provide copper or copper-alloy fixing devices only.
To aluminium and aluminium alloys: Provide aluminium alloy or non-magnetic stainless steel fixing
devices only.
To stainless steel: Provide appropriate stainless steel materials only.
Fabrication
Workshop: Fabricate and pre-assemble items in the workshop wherever practicable.

METALWORK INTERIOR
Edges and surfaces: Keep clean, neat and free from burrs and indentations. Remove sharp edges
without excessive radiusing.
Tube bends: Form bends in tube without visibly deforming the cross section.
Colour finished work: Match colours of sheets, extrusions and heads of fasteners.
Thermal movement: Accommodate thermal movement in joints and fastenings.
Fabrication tolerances
Structural work generally: ± 2 mm from design dimensions.
Joints
General: Fit joints to an accuracy appropriate to the class of work. Finish visible joints made by
welding, brazing or soldering using grinding, buffing or other methods appropriate to the class of work,
before further treatment.
Self-finished metals: Free of surface colour variations, after jointing.
Joints: Fit accurately to a fine hairline.
Marking
General: Provide suitable and sufficient marks or other means for identifying each member of site-
erected assemblies, and for their correct setting out, location, erection and connection. Mark bolted
connections to show the bolting category. Do not mark stainless steel by notching.
Splicing
General: Provide structural members in single lengths.
3.2 WELDING AND BRAZING

General
Quality: Provide finished welds which are free of surface and internal cracks, slag inclusion, and
porosity.
Site welds: Avoid site welding wherever possible. If required locate site welds in positions for down
hand welding.
Butt weld quality level: Not inferior to the appropriate level recommended in AS 1665 Appendix A.
If the minimum quality level specified here is not acceptable, show the required level on the drawings.
Brazing
General: Ensure brazed joints have sufficient lap to provide a mechanically sound joint. Do not used
butt joints relying on the filler metal fillet only.
Filler metal: >
3.3 STAINLESS STEEL FABRICATION

For general advice, refer to the current edition of “Australian Stainless Reference Manual”, produced by the Australian Stainless
Steel Development Association (ASSDA). Refer also to the Stainless steel benching worksection, for commercial kitchen
benching. See also WTIA Technical Note TN 16.
Welding stainless steel
Certification of welders: To AS 1796.
Riveting
General: Riveting may be used only to join stainless steel sheet or strip less than 1 mm thick. Drill (not
punch) the rivet hole, and drive the rivet cold. On completion, clean and passivate the riveted
assembly.
Soldering
General: Do not solder stainless steel.
3.4 METAL FIXTURES

If metalwork is fully detailed you could cross refer to the drawings and add the following notes as an alternative to the materials
and components listed separately below for typical metal fixtures or assemblies.
General
General: Provide metal fixtures noted on drawings as follows:

METALWORK INTERIOR
- Components and their location, indicative construction details, scribes and trims, materials,
dimensions and thicknesses, and finishes shall be as detailed.
- All dimensions noted on drawings shall be confirmed on site.
- Finishes selections are noted in the Finishes schedule.
- Hardware and equipment: Major items shall be noted on drawings where they occur and all
hardware and equipment items are noted in the FF&E schedule.
Delete if metalwork is not fully detailed.
3.5 PIPE RAIL BALUSTRADES

Assembly
The following is an example that may suit fire stair balustrades. Repeat the clause as required for other applications.
Determine design loads for balustrades in accordance with AS/NZS 1170.1 and AS/NZS 1170.2.
Provide and install: >
Material: >
If steel tube state “DN50 - Medium” to AS 1074.
If stainless steel state “Nom. 50”, grade “304” (or “316” in corrosive environments) to AS 1769.
Pipe sizes:
- Posts: >
- Top rail (handrail): >
- Mid rail: >
- Finish: >
Finish: Nominate paint or unfinished galvanizing.
Fabrication
Method: Welding.
Joints: Produce smooth unbroken surfaces at joints. Scribe the joints between posts and rails. Make
end-to-end joints over an internal sleeve.
Bends: Make changes of direction in rails by evenly curved pipe bends.
Free ends: Seal the free ends of pipes with fabricated or purpose-made end caps.
Fixing to structure
General: Provide fabricated predrilled or purpose-made brackets or post bases, and attach the
pipework to the building structure with fixings, including bolts into masonry anchors, and coach screws
or bolts into timber, of metal compatible with the pipework.
Galvanizing
General: If possible, complete fabrication before galvanizing; otherwise apply a zinc-rich primer to
affected joint surfaces
3.6 METAL STAIRS

Assembly
The following prompt may suit a simple access stair. Vary and/or repeat the clause as required for other applications.
Materials, design and construction: Comply with the recommendations of AS 1657.
Material: >
Member sizes:
- Strings: >
- Treads/risers: >
- Landing frame: >
- Landing deck: >
- Toe board: >
- Top rail (handrail): >
- Mid rail: >
- Finish: >

METALWORK INTERIOR
E.g. galvanising.
Fabrication
Method: Welding.
Joints: Produce smooth unbroken surfaces at joints. Scribe the joints between posts and rails. Make
end-to-end joints over an internal sleeve.
Bends: Make changes of direction in rails by evenly curved pipe bends.
Free ends: Seal the free ends of pipes with fabricated or purpose-made end caps.
Fixing to structure
General: Provide fabricated predrilled or purpose-made brackets or post bases, and attach the
pipework to the building structure with fixings, including bolts into masonry anchors, and coach screws
or bolts into timber, of metal compatible with the pipework.
Galvanizing
General: If possible, complete fabrication before galvanizing; otherwise apply a zinc-rich primer to
affected joint surfaces.
3.7 PROPRIETARY STAIR SYSTEMS

Product
Nominate proprietary system
Materials, design and construction: Comply with the recommendations of AS 1657.
Helical metal stairs: A proprietary system, mechanically assembled and fixed in place, comprising the
following:
- A central steel tube column.
- Prefabricated metal treads sleeved over and cantilevered from the column.
- Top landing.
- Balustrade and handrail to stair and landing.
- Spacers, fixings and accessories necessary to complete the system.
Location: >
Diameter (mm): >
Location: If not shown on the drawings.
Diameter: For helical stairs, if not shown on the drawings.
3.8 FIXED LADDERS

Assembly
Show dimensions and arrangement (direction of flights, landing locations, etc.) on the drawings.
Standard: AS 1657.
General: Fix ladder stiles securely to the building structure at tops and bottoms of flights, and at
intermediate points.
Describe ladder type e.g. step tread type, rung type.
Location: >
Material >
“Steel”, “Stainless steel”, or “Aluminium”.
Landing surface: >
“Chequerplate”, “Welded grid” (plain or serrated surface), “Punched plate”.
Ladder cage: >
Safety device: >
Ladder cage: and Safety device: These are alternatives. The latter applies to rung type ladders only. Delete either or both if not
required.

METALWORK INTERIOR
3.9 CAST ALUMINIUM PANELS

Panels
General: Fix ladder stiles securely to the building structure at tops and bottoms of flights, and at
intermediate points. Provide and install proprietary cast aluminium decorative panels for use as
balcony or stair infill panels, or other non-structural purposes such as decorative friezes and brackets.
Type of panel >
e.g. “Balcony (stair balustrade) infill”, “Frieze”.
Location: >
Finish: >
“Natural aluminium”, “Thermoset powder coat”, etc.
Fixing: Fix to the building structure or other building elements either:
- With a proprietary mechanical fixing system of integral fixing lugs, end connections and the like, and
aluminium or stainless steel accessories.
- Using aluminium to aluminium welding to AS 1665.
Or select an alternative.
3.10 CORNER GUARDS

Guards
General: Where salient corners of the structure are required to be protected from mechanical damage,
provide metal corner guards as follows:
- Consisting of rolled angle sections or sections fabricated from metal sheet bent to the radius or
angle of the corner.
- Fitting close to adjoining surface finishes.
- Solidly grouted up at the back as necessary to eliminate voids.
- Securely fixed by a method which does not cause distortion in the guard surface, and consists of
either concealed built in lugs, or flush countersunk head fixings into masonry anchors.
Location: >
Material: >
e.g. “Mild steel angle”, “Mild steel sheet”, “Stainless steel sheet”.
Dimensions (mm):
- Height: >
- Angle leg length: >
- Sheet thickness: >
- Corner radius: >
Finish: >
e.g. “Galvanized and/or painted”.
Fixing: >
“Bolts”, “Lugs”, etc.
Material: >
3.11 RESILIENT DOCK BUMPERS

Product
General: Provide and install a proprietary system of fabric reinforced rubber pads pressure laminated
and bolted between galvanized mild steel fixing angles.
Location: >
Pad dimensions (mm):
- Thickness: >
- Length overall: >

METALWORK INTERIOR
- Height: >
Fixing: Bolt or weld the angles to the dock structure.
3.12 COMPLETION
Maintenance manual
Cleaning
Temporary coatings: On or before completion of the works, or before joining up to other surfaces,

STAINLESS STEEL BENCHING INTERIOR
STAINLESS STEEL BENCHING
This worksection is applicable to stainless steel benches and associated fitments usually for commercial applications such as
kitchens, laboratories and hospitals.
• Joinery for domestic sink units.
• Metalwork for custom-made stainless steel fixtures and stainless steel finishes.
• Large stainless steel fabrications such as exhaust flues for heavy industries.
• None.
• Dimensions given on the drawings should not be repeated in this worksection, and vice versa.
• The dimensions that have been given in the worksection text are to set a standard for the information shown on the shop
drawings on the assumption that the designer will supply outline drawings only.
Therefore some of the prompts or dimensions given here may be redundant in a project that has been fully detailed, and should
be deleted.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
General: Provide stainless steel fixtures that are:
- Free of surface defects or distortions.
- To remain secure and functional for the expected life of the installation.
- Installed to conform to Heath authorities having jurisdiction over the installation.

General
have no overlaps.
>

AS 1756 has a type test for strength and support in normative Appendix A for domestic sinks, which could be adapted here.
1.3 INSPECTION
Notice
- Fabrication complete, before delivery.
- Installation complete.
1.4 SUBMISSIONS
Shop drawings
General: Submit shop drawings showing the following:
- Bench/bench junctions.
- Welded joints.
- Standard drawings for proprietary components.
- Installation details required by Health Authorities.
Site welding
General: If site welding is proposed, submit details indicating location and process.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
Stainless steel
Plate, sheet and strip: To ASTM A240/A240M.
Bar: To ASTM A276.
Pipe: To ASTM A554.
Neither AS 1769 nor AS 1528.1 covers square tube. Local manufacturers work to the ASTM.
Type: 304.
304 is the usual choice. The alternative, type 316, is suitable for more corrosive environments such as some laboratory
benching. For critical applications, seek professional advice on grade selection.
Stainless steel sheet
Surface finish: No. 4, not including to underside of shelves, and door and drawer backs.
Or HL (Hairline). No. 4. is defined in ASTM A480, cited in ASTM A240. No. 4 is also known as ‘general purpose polished finish’,
and is widely used for restaurant and kitchen equipment. HL (Hairline) is more polished than 4.
Thickness: 1.2 mm minimum.

Or, 1.6 mm. But check other specified thicknesses first.
Particleboard
Classification: Moisture resistant (MR).
Plywood
Classification: General purpose.

2.2 COMPONENTS
Fasteners
Stainless steel fasteners are mostly imported. The metric standards referenced in the Adhesives, sealants and fasteners
worksection are mostly ISO-based and can be used for metric stainless steel fasteners. For imperial fasteners, American ANSI
standards would be appropriate.
Material: Stainless steel.
Dimensional system: Metric.
Bolt and screw heads: Polished, pan type or countersunk.
Hexagon heads may be used in concealed locations.
Hardware
Or chrome-plated brass.
Handles: >
e.g. 150 mm D-handles.
Sealants
The use of the term “food grade” has been avoided as it is undefined by manufacturers and standards. Some manufacturers
certify that their product can meet the requirements of the United States Food and Drug Administration.
Type: Neutral cure one-part silicone.
Performance: Flexible. Resistant to physical and chemical damage characteristic of installed
environment. Resistant to growth of mould, bacteria and fungi. Colourfast.
Curing period: Less than 4 days to a depth of 10 mm.
Peel strength (minimum): 100 kPa.
Colour: >
e.g. Grey, silver, black, white.
Adhesive
Type: Spray contact adhesive.
Or 2 pack flexible tile adhesives. Epoxy is too brittle.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 FABRICATION GENERALLY

Stainless steel welding
Refer to AS/NZS 1554.6 clause 3.1.2, Appendix B and Appendix G, for what may need to be specified. See WTIA TN11 for a
commentary on the AS/NZS 1554 series. Defaults for welding materials, quality and joints taken from AS 1756.
Process: Gas tungsten arc welding.
Weld type: Butt.
Or, fillet. Butt is best.
Internal weld category: Level 2.
External weld category: Class B.
Surface finish: Grade I, 120 grit.
Welding materials: Compatible with metal being welded.
Weld quality: Free from imperfections such as cracks and pits. Grind and polish to give required
surface finish. Continuous exposed welds.
Joints: Strength at least that of parent metal. Free from crevices and folds.
Joint position: At corners and edges as far as possible. Minimise joints in flat panels.
Protection
General: Provide temporary self-adhesive plastic film to stainless steel surfaces.

Hardware fixing
General: Drill and tap, or weld fix.
Linishing grain direction
Benches and shelves: Lengthwise.
Bowls: Horizontal to sides, parallel to bench grain to bottom. Mitre at bottom corners.
Abutting surfaces: Parallel where possible.
3.2 BENCH TOPS FABRICATION

Bench tops
Material: Stainless steel sheet.
Thickness: 2 mm.
Overall bench width: >
Commonly 600 mm, or to suit equipment. See AS 4027. Delete if shown on the drawings.
Bench height: To top of dry bench and to top of perimeter bead to wet bench.
Commonly 900 mm. Delete if covered on, or in conflict with, the drawings.
Bench lengths: Maximum, to minimise number of bench/bench junctions.
Exposed corners: Radius exposed corners at least 5 mm, including back vertical corners of upstands.
5 mm radius comes from the urinals standard. 3 mm is an alternative.
Internal back vertical corners: Fuse only from behind.
Wet bench perimeter: Except at wall flashing, provide a raised bead, with a fascia.
Raised bead could be a 45° splayed bead 20 mm high, 25 mm wide. Nominate if required.
Dry bench perimeter: Except at wall flashing, provide a fascia.
Fascia
Fascia height: >
Commonly 50 mm. Delete if shown on the drawings.
Fascia return: >
e.g. 15 mm at the bottom, finishing 35 mm clear of bench legs, giving a 50 mm set back. Delete if shown on the drawings.
Drainer
Drainer falls to sinks: 1:50, 450 mm long.
Drainer surface: Plain.
From AS 1756. Domestic pressed sinks may be fluted or dimpled. Edit as required.
Falls:
- To dishwashing machine: Between 1:100 and 1:72, 1800 mm maximum length.
- Fascia: Fall to match.
Or, horizontal - ensure fascia depth is adequate.
Wall splashback
Type: Integral.
Height above bench: >
e.g. 150 mm minimum, to suit tile coursing if any. Delete if shown on the drawings.
Ends: Return.
Return to non-tiled wall: >
e.g. 20 mm 45° splayed, 15 mm down flush with wall. Delete if shown on the drawings.
Return to tiled wall: >
e.g. as for non-tiled wall, or 20 mm horizontally, 20 mm up under tiles. Delete if shown on the drawings.
Fixing to support frame

Type: Spot weld threaded stainless steel M5 studs to underside of bench top, centred over framing
members, and 2 studs per front-to-back framing member. Ensure stud fixing does not indent the
bench top. Provide star washers and nuts.

Or for lighter use (e.g. domestic), screw to timber backing. Text may not suit a timber-backed bench top.
Sound deadening
Type: >
Select from the following:
• Anti-drum material (cheapest and perhaps least effective).
• 16 mm particleboard, continuous, adhesive-fixed to underside of bench top, sealed at edges.
• 16 mm or 18 mm plywood, continuous, adhesive-fixed to underside of bench top, sealed at edges.
• High moisture resistant Glamapyne™
3.3 BOWL FABRICATION

Bowls
May be integral with the draining surface, or welded to it for complex shapes. Stamping or pressing is used for domestic sinks.
Type: Deep drawn stainless steel.
Thickness:
- Capacity < 75 L: 1.6 mm.
- Capacity ≥ 75 L: 2 mm.
Internal radii: 25 mm minimum.
AS 1756 (domestic sinks) specifies a minimum of 5 mm.
Minimum depth: 250 mm.
Or, 150 mm. AS 1756 (domestic sinks) specifies 125 mm.
Wastes:
A 3.5 mm minimum recess is commonly provided around outlet.
- Size (minimum): DN 50.
- Nut and washer: To AS 1589 or AS 2887. Locate with the washer to the underside of the bowl.
- Position: Centred in single bowls, adjacent in double bowls.
Or, in the rear corner 100 – 112 mm minimum from the sides of the bowl. Or show on the drawings and delete here.
- Plug: Heavy-duty commercial.
Consider specifying a chain for security.
- Pot sinks: Extended lever handle type, with 50 mm ball valve.
Falls: In the long dimension.
Fall to waste (minimum):
- Capacity < 75 L: 10 mm.
- Capacity ≥ 75 L: 25 mm.
Revise to suit shape of bowls.
3.4 FRAME FABRICATION

Bench top support frame
Support: Provide sufficient support so that no load is placed on the waste pipe or water connections.
- Design deflection (maximum): 3 mm.
5 mm in AS 1756.
Members: 31.8 x 31.8 x 1.6 mm stainless steel pipe. Seal ends.
Extent: Perimeter and at sides of bowls, with additional members spaced as follows:
- 1.6 mm sheet: 350 mm maximum centres.
- 2 mm sheet: 500 mm maximum centres.
Revise figures upwards for timber-backed bench tops e.g. for 2 mm sheet, 900 mm may be satisfactory.
Maximum unsupported area: 0.3 m2.
Connections: Welded.

Fixing to bench top: Predrill for studs.

Or for lighter (e.g. domestic) use, screw fix to timber.
Bench legs
Members: 31.8 x 31.8 x 1.6 mm stainless steel pipe. Seal ends.
Or 25.4 x 25.4 x 1.6 mm.
Fixing to bench top support frame: Weld all around at junctions.
Spacing: 1200 mm maximum.
Or 1000 mm, or 1500 mm. Consult fabricator - the further apart the more flexible the bench in use.
Fixing to walls: Predrilled 100 x 50 x 2 mm stainless steel plate welded to legs at 600 mm high.
Adjacent to walls: 50 – 150 mm clear of wall.
Clear of wall to allow for coved skirtings. Alternatively bench can be fixed to wall with stainless steel angles, or ‘P’ frame bracket.
Feet: Nylon or chrome-plated aluminium, adjustable vertically ± 25 mm. Threaded section must not
protrude from leg.
3.5 SHELVING FABRICATION

Under bench shelving
Thickness: 1.6 mm.
Or, 1.2 mm.
Width: >
Or show on drawings.
Exposed edges: >
e.g. turn down 32 mm, return 12 mm. Delete if shown on the drawings.
Back edges: >
e.g. turn up 25 or 50 mm, return 12 mm at 60°, finish 75 mm clear of wall. Clearance is for waste pipes and so forth, to avoid
penetrations. Delete if shown on the drawings.
Height to underside of shelf edge: >
e.g. 230 mm, 250 mm, 300 mm. Delete if shown on the drawings.
Shelf support: 30 x 30 x 5 mm stainless steel angles.
- Extent: Perimeter, with additional angles spaced to give a maximum unsupported area of 0.3 m2.
- Connections: Welded.
Or stainless steel 31.8 x 31.8 x 1.6 mm pipe, with sealed ends to stop vermin such as cockroaches!
Fixing of support to legs: Welded.
Could be done on site, or not if the bench is shipped as a 3D frame.
Fixing of shelf to support: >
Screw or stainless steel pop rivets.
Over bench shelving
Thickness: 1.6 mm.
Or 1.2 mm.
Width: >
e.g. 300 mm. Delete if shown on the drawings.
Exposed edges: >
e.g. turn down 35 mm, return 12 mm. Delete if shown on the drawings.
Back edges: >
e.g. turn up 25 or 50 mm, 25 mm clear of wall. Delete if shown on the drawings.
Height to underside of shelf edge: >

e.g. 1350 mm, or 1400 mm, or 1560 mm if there are pot hooks underneath. Delete if shown on the drawings.
Shelf support: 25.4 x 25.4 x 1.6 mm stainless steel pipe. Seal ends.
- Spacing: 900 mm maximum.
- Fixing to wall: 50 x 50 x 5 mm stainless steel plate, fixed with at least two M8 bolts. Weld the
support centrally on the lower edge of the plate.
Or use L-shaped brackets.
Fixing of shelf to support: Threaded M5 studs through tube with nuts on underside. Seal between shelf
and support.
Or weld fix, possible if the bench is shipped as a 3D frame.
3.6 DRAWERS FABRICATION

Drawers
Thickness: 1.2 mm.
Construction: Welded.
Frames: Removable, and interchangeable with other drawer frames. Provide extension-type drawer
slide mechanism and front panel. Open top and bottom, for insert liner. Provide rubber stops at rear.
Front panel: 20 mm thick double pan construction.
Drawer liners: Removable.
- Dimensions (internal): >
e.g. 380 mm wide, 500 mm deep, 125 mm high. Size to suit pan sizes. See AS 4027. Delete if shown on the drawings.
Housing: Back and 2 sides, of a neat external appearance.
- Dimensions (external): >
e.g. 450 mm wide, 550 mm deep, 200 mm high. Size to suit liner sizes. Delete if shown on the drawings.
Runners: Incline to rear so drawers roll closed. Provide stop so drawer cannot be pulled out
accidentally.
- Type: >
Filing cabinet type runners, or aluminium ball bearing roller guides. Stainless steel runners are difficult to get.
Locks: Chrome-plated brass.
Or stainless steel (hard to get)? Alternatively, provide for padlocks.
3.7 INSTALLATION GENERALLY

Welding
General: Do not site weld.
Site (or field) welding is not recommended but may be unavoidable.
Sealing
Gaps < 5 mm wide: Apply sealant at the following locations:
- Butt joints between benches.
- Between benches, including flashings, and walls.
- Spaces and gaps under benches.
Gaps ≥ 5 mm wide: Close with stainless steel infill panels.
Floor fixing
8 mm diameter stainless steel dowels, sealed to floor with silicone sealant.

3.8 COMPLETION
Protection
General: Temporary self-adhesive plastic film: Remove from stainless steel surfaces.
Maintenance manual
General: Required.

WORKSTATIONS INTERIOR
WORKSTATIONS
This worksection is applicable to the supply of office workstations.
• Joinery for joinery items.
• Miscellaneous furniture for other loose furniture and other fixed items that are capable of retrofitting.
• None.
• Show the location and layout of workstations to your office documentation policy.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities

General
have no overlaps.
>
• Joinery for joinery items.
• Miscellaneous furniture for other loose furniture and other fixed items that are capable of retrofitting.
1.3 INSPECTION
Notice
- Workstations fabricated and ready to be delivered to the site.
- Workstations delivered to site before installation.

- Building locations or substrates prepared to receive workstations before the furniture is installed.
1.4 TESTS
Movable office and workstation screens: Type test screens required to have a particular weighted
sound reduction index (Rw) rating, to AS/NZS 1276.1 or AS/NZS ISO 717-1.
AS/NZS ISO 717-1, reproduced from ISO 717-1, supersedes AS/NZS 1276.1.
1.5 SUBMISSIONS
Subcontractors
Shop drawings
General: Submit shop drawings showing the following information where relevant:
- Construction, assembly and fixing details for custom designed (non standard) furniture items.
- The proposed layout for furniture installations.
Delete Shop drawings if the installation is comprised entirely of proprietary items. Preliminary shop drawings may be requested
from tenderers during the tender period. List any information required on shop drawings additional to that specified e.g. office
landscape layout; typical construction and assembly details, methods of fixing, dimensions and tolerances.
Installation
General: Submit the manufacturer’s standard drawings and details showing:
- Methods of construction.
- Height adjustment mechanism and leg.
- Assembly and fixing, with dimensions and tolerances.
- Connection methods for all removable components.
Samples
- Sections proposed to be used for frames.
- Colour range samples of facings and prefinished production material.
- Manufacturer’s standard cable management items.
1.6 INTERPRETATIONS
Definitions
- Workstation: A system comprising an assembly of demountable acoustic screens, work tops, mobile
pedestal or credenza storage units, drawer units, individual bookshelves, ceiling ducted services
with power poles or floor ducted cable enclosures, and accessories necessary for satisfactory
assembly and installation.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
The material specifications for particular furniture items should be obtained from the manufacturer or supplier, and included with
the specification of the item (if the specification is generic rather than by proprietary item).
Fire hazard
General: Do not provide materials which, when subject to fire conditions, will emit excessive smoke or
dangerous fumes.
Properties:

Verification: Submit the results of product type tests.
Textile upholstery fabrics
Performance classification (minimum): 3.
Performance classification 3 is described in AS 2687 as “Domestic medium duty/commercial light duty”. Other classifications are
1 (delicate), 2 (domestic light duty), 3 (domestic medium duty/commercial light duty), 4 (domestic heavy duty/commercial
medium duty) and 5 (commercial heavy duty).
Wool and woolblend fabrics:
- Woolmark/Woolblendmark: Required.
The Australian Wool Research and Promotion Organization operates the Woolmark and Woolblendmark schemes.
Flexible cellular polyurethane
Applications: Generally as recommended in AS 2281 Appendix A.
Dry-processed fibreboard
Melamine overlaid medium density fibreboard: Medium density fibreboard (STD MDF) overlaid on both
sides with low pressure melamine.
Decorative overlays
2.2 WORKSTATIONS
Standard
Workstations: AS/NZS 4443 and AS 3590.2.
AS/NZS 4443 sets out the requirements for the evaluation, design and selection of office panel systems/workstations.
AS 3590.2 sets out guidelines for the selection of furniture for desktop, screen-based worksections in offices.
Dimensional tolerances (maximum)
Misalignment (of adjoining surfaces at grid junctions): 1 mm.
Deviation (from true grid lines and planes): 1:1000 or 3 mm.
Screen thickness: + 1 mm, - 0 mm.
File drawers: Allow clearance for fie tabs.
Strength and stability
Imposed loads: Provide a screen system which is as follows:
- Capable of the minimum load carrying capacity:
. 1000 mm high screens – 330 kgs over a 900 mm module.


- Will support the designated imposed eccentric loads (e.g. loads on attached shelves or brackets).
- Deflects under designated imposed eccentric loads less than 1:1000 or 3 mm, whichever is the
lesser.
- Under the above non axial load conditions the screen top shall not deflect from the vertical more
than 10 mm.
Imposed eccentric loads: >
e.g. A person sitting on the edge – 90kg, or a particular item.
Height adjustment
Desk tops: By the user from a seated position without the need of special tools.
Adjustment mechanism: To be recessed when not in use, and accessible when desks are positioned
against a wall or another desk.
Handing: Adjustment mechanism to be capable of re-handing.
Feet: Adjustable with 2.5 mm jacking glides.
Locks
Location: All storage units.
Keying: Key alike for each workstation. Key to differ with other workstations.
Key supply: >
e.g. 2 master keys and 2 indiidual keys for each lock.
2.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

Use of this clause assumes that the contractor will select the workstation installation, at least in detail. This may not be
appropriate if the contract is of the “construct-only” type. If using this clause, ensure that prescriptive requirements do not
conflict. Also, review the General subsection.
Service reticulation
General: Provide ducted cable pathways as an integral part of workstations not screens.
Standards
Cabling installation: AS/ACIF S009.
Electrical equipment: To AS 3100.
Electrical portable outlet devices: To AS 3105.
Plugs and socket-outlets for stationary appliances: To AS/NZS 3131.
Telecommunications installations: To AS 3084.
Wiring installation: To AS 3000.
Delete standards not applicable.
Certification
General: Design ducted cable pathways to minimise interference between low voltage power wiring
and data/voice applications.
Pathways: Provide certification from a minimum of 2 cable manufacturing suppliers to signify that
pathways comply and that their telecommunications cabling systems will operate satisfactorily in the
pathways provided.
Cabling management hardware
Pathways:
- General: Provide cable pathways with separate channels within the modular furniture, for installation
of power/telecommunications wiring.
- Capacity: Size ducting to allow for two power circuits and sixteen telecommunications cables. Allow
for looping of excess cable lengths. Provide cable fixing points in both channels.
- Material: Ferrous metal construction, powder coated with a fixed, continuous metal barrier.
- Installation: Install ducting throughout each screen section including entry to the legs and/or cable
access points nominated on drawings.
- Access Points: Provide professionally finished plastic moulded surrounds to suit all cutouts required.
Remove all sharp edges.

- Covers: Provide ducts covers and cable retention clips/strips on all pathway entry points.
- Cables: Provide space for connection of power chargers and powerboards.
Soft wiring:
- Provide interface point between furniture soft cabling and the fixed wiring.
- Soft wiring is supplied and installed by workstation contractor. Coordinate with electrical contractor
as to specification of soft wiring and method of installation.
- Electrical: Provide bonding of all sections to the building earthing system.
3 EXECUTION

Fabrics
Fabric surfacing: Prepare and apply so that the finished surface is smooth and without irregularities.
Fabric upholstery: Make the front of the upholstered component in one piece between pipings, if any,
with side joins at the rear or underside. Fix with upholsterer’s staples.
Piping: 3 mm diameter beads with core.
Installation
General: Install each workstation system in its required location as follows:
- Using concealed fixings.
- So that the components of the system may be demounted and reassembled using standard hand
tools, or special tools supplied as part of the system.
Serviced equipment
General: If equipment requiring connection to power, telex, computer, telephone or other services is to
be installed as part of the workstation system, make the necessary service connections. Provide all
penetrations and grommet covers.
Show on the drawings or specify here the serviced equipment to be installed as part of the workstation system, e.g. power
outlets, telex, telephone, computer.
Keyboard supports: Fit the keyboard support section of computer equipment with a mechanism
capable of being operated by a seated person to raise and lower the keyboard above or below the
level of the work surface.
AFRDI Blue Tick: >
3.2 COMPLETION
Cleaning
General: All exposed surfaces, accessories and cable ducts.
Floors: Remove dust and debris.
Warranties
General: Submit the installer’s warranty against defective workmanship or wrong installation.
Maintenance manual
- Recommendations for demounting and relocation.

4 SELECTIONS
4.1 WORKSTATIONS
Product >
If the workstation installation is of proprietary items edit the sections as appropriate.
Screens
Core material: >
Finish: >
Height (mm): >
Frame finish: >
Rw rating: >
Work surfaces
Core material: >
Thickness: >
Edgestrips: >
Finish: >
Height (mm): >
Height adjustment: >
e.g. “Between 680 mm and 740 mm”.
Ends and divisions
Core material: >
Finish: >
Height (mm): >
Shelves
Core material: >
Thickness: >
Finish: >
Height (mm): >
Divisions per shelf: >
Support: Adjustable brackets.
Cable management
Cable tray:
- Location: >
- Material: >
Cable duct:
- Skirting: >
- Desk height: >
- Number of channels: >
- Cover plate finish: >
Edit tray or duct as required.
Power outlet: >
Data outlet: >
Skirtings
Material: >
Finish: >

Height (mm): >

Furniture
Door/drawer pulls: >
Drawer slides: >
Accessories >
e.g. “Mobile storage units”, “Shelves”, “Power poles for ceiling reticulated services”.

MISCELLANEOUS FURNITURE INTERIOR
MISCELLANEOUS FURNITURE
This worksection is applicable to loose furniture and other fixed items that are capable of retrofitting. Furniture will usually be
specified as proprietary items, with particular requirements (e.g. layouts) shown on the drawings. Room-by-room furniture
schedules may be included in the project specification, although NATSPEC does not offer a standard format. There is no
reference standard.
• Joinery for custom-made joinery.
• Metalwork for custom-made metal items.
• Workstations.
• Cementitious toppings for installation of mobile shelving units.
• Purchasing and delivery arrangements that may be required.
• None.
• Fixtures, Fittings and Equipment Schedule for details and location of miscellaneous furniture to your office documentation
policy.
1 GENERAL

General
have no overlaps.
>
may be work that is closely associated with this work, e.g.:
• Joinery for custom-made joinery.
• Workstations.
• Metalwork for custom-made metal items.
• Cementitious toppings for installation of mobile shelving units.

1.2 INSPECTION
Notice
- Custom-built furniture items fabricated and ready to be delivered to the site.
- Furniture items delivered to site before installation.
- Building locations or substrates prepared to receive furniture before the furniture is installed.
1.3 TESTS
Fire hazard limits
General: If a spread of flame index or smoke developed index is required for a furniture item, type test
to AS/NZS 1530.3.
AS/NZS 1530.3 is cited in the BCA at Specification A2.4..

Movable office and workstation screens: Type test screens required to have a particular weighted
sound reduction index (Rw) rating, to AS/NZS 1276.1 or AS/NZS ISO 717-1.
Delete if acoustic insulation is not required. AS/NZS ISO 717-1, reproduced from ISO 717-1, supersedes AS/NZS 1276.1
1.4 SUBMISSIONS
Subcontractors
Shop drawings
- Construction, assembly and fixing details for custom designed (non standard) furniture items.
- The proposed layout for furniture installations.
Preliminary shop drawings may be requested from tenderers during the tender period.
List any information required on shop drawings additional to that specified e.g. office landscape layout; typical construction and
assembly details, methods of fixing, dimensions and tolerances. Delete if not required.
Installation
assembly and fixing, with dimensions and tolerances.
2 PRODUCTS
On furniture generally, refer to the standards, code of practice and other technical documents produced, or being produced, by
the Australian Furniture Research and Development Institute (AFRDI).

Fire hazard
dangerous fumes.
2.2 MATERIALS
The material specifications for particular furniture items should be obtained from the manufacturer or supplier, and included with
the specification of the item (if the specification is generic rather than by proprietary item).
Steel tube
Surface:
- For painted work: Semi-bright.
- For electroplated work: Bright.
Steel sheet
Surface finish:
- For electroplating: P (plating quality).

- For painting: B (bright) or M (matt).

Stainless steel
Grade: >
e.g. 304 for normal applications, 316 for corrosive environments.
Finish: Surface finish 4 (general purpose polished).
Textile upholstery fabrics
Performance classification (minimum): 3.
Performance classification 3 is described in AS 2687 as “Domestic medium duty/commercial light duty”. Other classifications are
1 (delicate), 2 (domestic light duty), 3 (domestic medium duty/commercial light duty), 4 (domestic heavy duty/commercial
medium duty) and 5 (commercial heavy duty). Edit as required.
Wool and woolblend fabrics:
- Woolmark/Woolblendmark: Required.
The Australian Wool Research and Promotion Organization operates the Woolmark and Woolblendmark schemes.
Flexible cellular polyurethane
Applications: Generally as recommended in AS 2281 Appendix A.
Decorative overlays
3 EXECUTION

Fabrics
Fabric surfacing: Prepare and apply so that the finished surface is smooth and without irregularities.
Fabric upholstery: Make the front of the upholstered component in one piece between pipings, if any,
with side joins at the rear or underside. Fix with upholsterer’s staples.
Piping: 3 mm diameter beads with core.
3.2 SCREENS
Movable office screens
This clause is for freestanding self-supporting screens for dividing workspaces, not demountable partitioning of the sort
specified in the Partitions – systems worksection.
Location >
Alternatively, you could locate these items on the drawings.
Type: Proprietary modular floor mounted screens, consisting of purpose-made solid and semi-glazed
panels forming divisions, fronts and nibs assembled and installed with purpose-made fixings.
Panels:
- Width (mm): >
- Height (mm): >
- Thickness (mm): >
- Floor clearance (mm): >
- Weighted sound reduction index (Rw): >

- Curve radius (mm): >
Shelf mounting strips: >
e.g. “Recessed”, “Surface mounted”.
Skirting: >
“PVC”, “Stainless steel 1.2 mm thick, No. 4 finish”.
Cable ducting: >
e.g. “Required” or “Not required”.
Floor mounting: >
e.g. “Chrome plated brass feet”, “Stainless steel feet, No. 4 finish”.
Screens fire hazard schedule
Fire hazard limit Index to AS/NZS 1530.3
Spread of flame
Smoke developed
Delete indices if not required.
3.3 CONTAINERS, BINS, CABINETS

Use this subsection to locate specification notes for other cabinet and storage elements such as lockers, credenzas, wardrobes
and plant containers.
Letter box
Type: Proprietary metal letter box with corrosion resistant, weatherproof body, weather protected letter
slot, lockable hinged door, house or unit number, and accessories necessary for correct installation.
Waste bins
Type: Prefinished proprietary products manufactured from metals or plastics in standard sizes and
colours.
Material: >
e.g. “Acrylic”, “Paint prefinished steel”, “Stainless steel”.
Size (mm): >
Colour: >
Quantity: >
3.4 CABINETS
Lateral filing cabinets
Vertical filing cabinets
Mobile pedestals
The AS 5079 series provides standards for the determination of strength, stability, performance characteristics and durability.
A lateral cabinet has the width greater than the depth. A vertical cabinet has the depth equal or greater than the width.
3.5 SHELF UNITS

For industrial shelving refer to AS 4084 and AS 4084 Supplement 1.
Office shelving systems
Steel shelving:

Now made obsolescent but still available.

- Finish to steel: >
Timber shelving: A proprietary modular system incorporating the following:
- Rigidly self-braced frame, extendable in modular increments.
- Shelf height adjustable in increments not exceeding 50 mm.
- Shelves capable of carrying a minimum uniformly distributed load of 55 kg/m of span, without
deflection exceeding 5 mm.
- Other accessories necessary for the satisfactory erection and service use of the shelving.
Arrangement:
- Type: >
e.g. “Closed” or “Open”.
Layout: >
e.g. “Single sided” or “Double sided”.
- Bay width (mm): >
- Shelf depth (mm): >
Accessories >
“Parts box”, “Drawer tray”, “Pigeon holes”, “Signs label holder”. Show locations on the drawings.
Library shelving systems
Steel shelving
- Steel shelving: To AS 2273.
- Finish to steel: >
Arrangement:
- Layout: >
e.g. “Single sided” or “Double sided”.
- Shelf depth (mm): >
- Nominal height (mm): >
- Shelf spacing (mm): >
Accessories >
e.g. “End post covers”, “Shelf labelling system”, “Book end system”, “Levelling device”.
Mobile shelving
The recess for shelving tracks must be specified to be formed by the contractor as part of the floor finish, screed, or structural
floor.
System:
- General: A proprietary system consisting of closed-type steel shelving units mounted on floor tracks.
Methods of operation: >
Select one of these alternatives.
• Manual: By fixed pull handle.
• Mechanical: By manually operated folding crank handle and geared chain drive, incorporating a safety device for the
protection of persons working in the aisles.
• Semi-automatic: By power booster. Nominate location e.g. each unit or each second unit.
Static unit location: >
e.g. “At one end”, “At each end”.
Bases: Mount each unit on a base of structural steel sections supporting the unit between bearings,
incorporating necessary bearing and guide wheels.

Bearing wheels: Cast iron, ball bearing, with crowned running surface.
Tracks: Provide bearing and guide tracks which are bright mild steel sections adequately fixed to the
structural concrete floor. Where tracks are to be flush with the finished floor surface, provide linings or
edge trim for recesses required for floor guides, operating gear, or the like.
Bays:
- Height: >
- Width: >
- Storing system: >
e.g. Shelving, hanging files.
Locking: Provide a pin-tumbler lock to lock together all continuous units in a single key operation.
- Lock location: >
e.g. “In one end unit”, “In each end unit”.
Dust protection: Provide replaceable resilient rubber strips to the contact edges of the units.
Shelving: Steel units, single sided in the case of end units, otherwise double sided, fitted with
adjustable steel shelving, together with manufacturer’s standard accessories.
Finish: Pre-coat with a factory-applied oven baked enamel.
3.6 DISPLAY SURFACES

Chalk boards
Location: >
Chalk board panels: Hardboard 5 mm minimum thickness, with an applied long life, fine finish chalk
board surface of good abrasive properties, producing clear sharp edged chalk lines.
- Hardboard: To AS/NZS 1859.4 standard hardboard Type GP.
Chalk board surface: Primer and at least 2 finishing coats of modified alkyd epoxy, infra-red heat
dried, with an abrasive in the final coat.
Chalk boards arrangement schedule
Panel type Size (mm) Arrangement
Panel type: “Fixed” or “Swinging leaf”. Preferably show the panel arrangement and sizes on the drawings.
Wall fixing: Fix the chalk board to the wall with at least 4 sets of interlocking brackets, of sufficient
strength to withstand the forces produced by a 90 kg load swinging on the end of an open swing leaf
at right angles to the fixed board surface.
Swinging leaves: Fix swing leaves with reinforced pivot points at either end of the wall mounted board
with minimum 10 mm diameter mild steel pivot pins through 5 mm (minimum) thick zinc plated steel
pivot plates. Provide a 6 mm thick ebonite washer to the bottom plate.
Map rails: Continuous clear anodised aluminium extruded section incorporating a cork pin-up strip and
sliding paper chart hanger rail, screwed to a rebated support rail fixed to the wall above the chalk
board, or constructed integrally with the top of the wall mounted board.
Trim: Trim the edges of the chalk board and swing leaf panels with clear anodised extruded aluminium
sections, mitred at corners. Reinforce the corners with steel right angled corner joints.
Chalk rails: Trim the bottom of the fixed board with a section incorporating an integral chalk rail.
Applied lines: 3 mm wide yellow painted lines formed straight, true and even, using durable paint of an
equivalent life to the chalk surface and capable of frequent abrasion by eraser without fading or wear.
- Graph surface: 1000 x 1000 mm graph marked in 100 x 100 mm squares.
- Stave surface: Four staves spaced approximately 90 mm apart with individual lines of staves
spaced approximately 38 mm apart.

Projection surfaces: A matt white projection screen wrapped at least 25 mm over the edges of a
hardboard backing and fixed by adhesives and staples. Do not adhere screen material to the
hardboard face surface, but allow it to set freely with sufficient stretch to achieve and hold a flat
surface.
Maintenance instructions: Locate in the bottom left-hand corner of the board fix an instruction sheet of
pressure sensitive film listing procedures for the care and maintenance of the board surface.
Pinboards
Location: >
Pinboard panels:
- Thickness: At least 6 mm.
- Facing: Felt.
Alternatively, hessian, etc.
- Board: Fibre insulating board to AS/NZS 1859.4.
Alternatively, cork board, etc.
Backing: Fix board to a 6 mm plywood backing with PVA emulsion adhesive.
Size (mm): >
Trim: Trim the edges of the pinboard panels with timber or clear anodised aluminium sections, mitred
at corners.
Installation: Attach the panels to building substrates with either of the following:
- Wallboard adhesive to AS 2329.
- Masonry wall plugs and chromium plated raised head screws over chromium plated cup washers.
- Concealed keyhole slots over screwheads in the substrate (for demountable pinboards).
Whiteboards
Location: >
Whiteboard panels: White seamless vitreous enamel surface on sheet steel base, resistant to chipping
and fracture when the base is slightly flexed, fixed with a suitable contact adhesive to a backing of
primed particleboard at least 12 mm thick.
- Size (mm): >
- Surface: Suitable for use with fast-evaporation, dry-erase pens.
- Edges: Trim the edges of the panels with hollow square aluminium sections mitred at corners.
- Pen rails: Proprietary aluminium section fixed to the full width of the bottom edge of the board.
Installation: Attach the panels to building substrates with either of the following:
- Wallboard adhesive to AS 2329.
- Masonry wall plugs and chromium plated raised head screws over chromium plated cup washers.
- Concealed keyhole slots over screwheads in the substrate (for demountable whiteboards).
3.7 RETRACTABLE PROJECTION SCREENS

General
Location: >
Type: Proprietary extendible screen system for front projection, mounted on a spring-loaded roller so
as to be fully retractable when not in use.
Screens: Flexible synthetic fabric, flame retardant and mildew resistant, presenting a flat plane surface
when extended.
Screen surfaces: Textured to control the distribution of projected light evenly over a wide viewing
angle.
- Type: >
e.g. “Matt”, “Lenticular”, or “Beaded”.
Finishes: Metal components factory prefinished by plating, anodising, or a thermoset powder coating.
Size (mm): >

Floor mounted retractable projection screens

General: A screen system extendable from a bottom roller, with a retractable extension arm, on a floor
mounting providing adequate stability when the screen is extended, and consisting of either of the
following:
- A folding metal tripod.
- A floor stand capable of assembly without tools.
Hanging retractable projection screens
General: A screen system extendable from a top roller, suspended from proprietary hanging brackets
fixed to the building structure, with provision for mechanical locking in the fully or partially extended
pull-down positions.
Motorised screens
General: Screen extension and retraction operated by an electric motor mounted in the roller,
activated by a limit switch with automatic stops in the terminal (up or down) positions, and at
adjustable preset intermediate positions.
Accessories >
e.g. “Carrying case”, “Extra control stations” or “Remote control for motorised screens”. Consult manufacturer’s catalogues.
3.8 LOOSE FURNITURE

Consider adding selections, numbers and locations in the form of a FF&E Schedule (fixtures, finishes and equipment).
Fixed height chairs
AFRDI Blue Tick: >
Height adjustable swivel chairs
Standard: To AS/NZS 4438
AFRDI Blue Tick: >
Office desks
Standard: To AS/NZS 4442
AFRDI Blue Tick: >
Plastic monobloc chairs
AFRDI Blue Tick: >
School chairs
AFRDI Blue Tick: >
School tables and storage furniture
AFRDI Blue Tick: >
3.9 COMPLETION
Warranties
Maintenance manual
- Recommendations for demounting and relocation.

EXTINGUISHERS AND BLANKETS INTERIOR
EXTINGUISHERS AND BLANKETS
This worksection is applicable to fire extinguishers and fire blankets. Products used must be on the Scientific Services
Laboratory Register of Accredited Products - Fire Protection Equipment. The specification should reflect any extra requirements
of local statutory authorities. The principal product standards are the AS/NZS 1841 series and AS 2444.
• Fire-stopping, for fire stopping materials and accessories.
• Hydrants, Hose reels, Sprinklers and Fire detection and alarms, for fire systems.
• Signs and display.
• Statutory signs related to fire systems in Signs and display.
• Statutory signs related to the location of portable fire extinguishers in Signs and display.
• Locate extinguishers and blankets on drawings to your office documentation policy.
1 GENERAL

General
have no overlaps.
>
• Fire-stopping.
• Signs and display.
• Hydrants.
• Hose reels.
• Sprinklers.
• Fire detection and alarms.

1.2 AUTHORISED PRODUCTS

General
General: Provide equipment listed in the SSL Register of Accredited Products – ActivFire register or
fire protection equipment.
The Register of Fire Protection Equipment, as issued by Scientific Services Laboratory under its ActivFire Scheme includes
portable extinguishers and residential fire protection equipment.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 EXTINGUISHERS
Standards
General: Provide portable fire extinguishers and location signs as follows:
- General requirements: AS/NZS 1841.1.
- Water: AS/NZS 1841.2.
- Wet chemical: AS/NZS 1841.3.
- Foam: AS/NZS 1841.4.
- Powder: AS/NZS 1841.5.
- Carbon dioxide: AS/NZS 1841.6.
- Non-rechargeable: To AS/NZS 1841.8.
Selection and location: To AS 2444.
AS 2444 is cited in the BCA at clause E1.6 for selection, location and distribution of portable fire extinguishers. The various
extinguisher standards are not called up as such in AS 2444, so there is no conflict here. Delete if you have documented
selection and location.
There are StandardsMark licensees to Parts 2 to 6 of AS/NZS 1841.
Fire extinguishers schedule

Designation FE1 FE2 FE3
Location
Number
Unit type
Classification and rating
Nozzle type
Maximum force to operate lever
Maximum force to frangible seal
Cabinet:
- Type
Security
Waterproof cover
Normally selection and location is the designer’s responsibility, not the contractor’s.
Location: and Number: Usually shown on the drawings.
Unit type: Refer to AS 2444 and AS/NZS 1850 for available options, listed under Standards.
Classification and rating: Refer to AS/NZS 1850 for available options e.g. 4A, 40B.
Maximum force to operate lever: Use where this is likely to be critical e.g. 100 N.
Cabinet:
• Type: Details may be shown on the drawings.

• Security: e.g. break glass.

Waterproof cover: Size and type.
2.2 BLANKETS
Fire blankets
General: To AS/NZS 3504.
Selection and location: To AS 2444.
Fire blankets schedule
Location Number Size
3 EXECUTION
3.1 COMPLETION
Maintenance
See BCA clause I1.1 on maintenance of safety installations.
Fire extinguishers: To AS 1851.1.
Fire blankets: To AS 1851.1.

WINDOW COVERINGS INTERIOR
WINDOW COVERINGS
This worksection is applicable to window coverings both decorative and blockout comprising, curtains and blinds, manual and
power operated.
• Windows.
• Metalwork for the inclusion of sun screens and awnings.
• Windows.
• None.
• Coordinate connections for power operated window coverings with the appropriate Electrical Services worksection.
• Locate and identify window coverings and operating systems on drawings to your office documentation policy.
1 GENERAL

General
have no overlaps.
>
• Windows.
• Joinery for pelmets/recesses.
• Electrical design and install for connections for motorised units.
1.2 INSPECTION
Notice
- Building locations or substrates prepared to receive window coverings before installation.

1.3 SUBMISSIONS
Installation
assembly and fixing, with dimensions and tolerances.
Samples
- Colour range samples of fabrics, facings and prefinished production material.
- Manufacturer’s standard control system furniture items.
Subcontractors
General: Submit names and contact details of proposed installers.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
Fire hazard
dangerous fumes.
Properties:
Verification: Submit the results of product type tests.
Fabrics
Uncoated woven and knitted fabrics: To AS 2663.1.
Coated woven and knitted fabrics: To AS 2663.2.
- Performance classification (minimum): 2.
2 is for “medium performance”, 1 is for short life fabrics, and 3 is for “high level of performance”. Edit as required.
3 PRODUCTS
3.1 INTERNAL
Curtains
Internal window dimensions:
Width: >
Height: >
Or as shown on drawings.
Fabric: >
Do not repeat if noted in a Finishes Schedule.
Backing: >
e.g. blackout or brownout.
Track system: >
Pelmet: >

Describe or detail the curtain head.

Operating system: >
e.g. Manual or motorised.
Motorised system: >
Select the system, describe the functions and nominate the location of the equipment and switching.
Aluminium Venetian blinds – Internal
Width: >
Height: >
Product identification: >
Omit the following if the product is nominated.
Slat material: High tensile aluminium alloy.
Thickness: 0.175 mm.
0.22 mm thick for 50 mm slats.
Flexibility: The crowned slat to bend 180° around a 12.5 mm radius without permanent deformation.
Slat width: >
e.g. 16 mm with 4 mm slat overlap, 25 mm with 5 mm slat overlap, 50 mm with 9 mm slat overlap.
Clutch: >
e.g. Required.
Cord: 1.5 mm thick polyester with braided jacket and safety tassel, and ladders for location and
control.
Top and bottom rails: 0.5 mm aluminium zinc coated steel powdercoat finish.
Refer to manufacturer for 50 mm slat blinds.
Colour: >
- Solar optical properties: >
Consult manufacturer’s catalogue for the available range.
Operating system: >
e.g. Manual or motorised by system nominated by the manufacturer.
Operating control: Incorporate automatic down stop/automatic up stop/low speed tilting/remote
control/switch control.
Aluminium Venetian blinds – Between glass
Width: >
Height: >
Slat material: High tensile aluminium alloy.
Thickness: 0.175 mm.
0.22 mm thick for 50 mm slats.
Flexibility: The crowned slat to bend 180° around a 12.5 mm radius without permanent deformation.
Slat width: >
e.g. 16 mm with 4 mm slat overlap, 25 mm with 5 mm slat overlap.
Tilt: External knob control.
Cord: Internal 1.5 mm thick polyester with braided jacket and safety tassel and ladders for location and
control.

Omit chord operation if blind raise option is not required.

Top and bottom rails: 0.5 mm aluminium zinc coated steel powdercoat finish.
Colour: >
Operating system: >
Operating control: Incorporate automatic down stop/automatic up stop/low speed tilting/remote
control/switch control.
Plastic Venetian blinds
Width: >
Height: >
Slat material: Extruded polystyrene.
Thickness: 3 mm nominal.
Slat width: 50 mm nominal.
Cord: Internal 2.3 mm thick polyester, 400N breaking load.
Tape: To allow a 42 mm pitch between ladders and a 8 mm slat overlap.
Head rail: Aluminium zinc coated steel “U” section sized to contain the entire control mechanism,
powdercoat finish.
Matching pelmet: >
e.g. Required, or as detailed.
Colour: >
Operating system: >
Timber Venetian blinds
Width: >
Height: >
Slat material: >
e.g. Western red cedar, clear finish, or as nominated by the manufacturer for an opaque finish.
Thickness: 3 mm nominal.
Slat width: >
46 mm for clear finished timber, 50 mm for opaque finished timber.
Cord: Internal 2.3 mm thick polyester, 400N breaking load.
Tape: To allow a 42 mm pitch between ladders and a 8 mm slat overlap.
Head rail: Aluminium zinc coated steel “U” section sized to contain the entire control mechanism,
powdercoat finish.
Matching pelmet: >


Colour: >
Operating system: >
Timber shutters
Width: >
Height: >
Slat material: >
e.g. Western red cedar, clear finish, or as nominated by the manufacturer for an opaque finish.
Thickness: 6 – 8 mm nominal.
Slat width: 89 mm with a 30 mm dent rebate for a consistent overlap over the drop of 7 – 25 mm.
Tilt rod: Match louvres with a nylon connector.
Operating method: >
e.g. Standard hinged, parliament hinged, bi-fold on track or sliding on track.
Operating hardware: >
e.g. As supplied or as detailed.
Matching pelmet: >
Colour: >
Fabric shades
Width: >
Height: >
Shade material: Honycomb cell material of anti static 100% spun bonded polyester yarn.
Cell width: >
10 mm or 20 mm.
Top and bottom rails: Aluminium, powdercoat finish.
Colour: >
Operating system: >
Privacy sheers / shades

Width: >
Height: >
Shade material: Sheer fabric bonded to vanes of anti static 100% spun bonded polyester yarn.
Fabric type: >
e.g. Semi-opaque or opaque.
Top and bottom rails: Aluminium, powdercoat finish.
Colour: >
Operating system: Drawn by a continuous chord loop tethered to a wand to operate the vanes.
Pleated shades
Width: >
Height: >
Shade material: Pleated woven polyester fibre.
Fabric type: >
e.g. Semi-opaque or opaque with aluminium backing..
Top and bottom rails: Extruded aluminium, powdercoat finish with hold down brackets.
Colour: >
Operating system: Manual operation by 9 mm polyester chord incorporating cord lock and cord
equaliser.
Vertical louvre blinds
Width: >
Height: >
Type: Louvres supported by a carrier system which traverses on wheels and operates with a friction
spring loaded clutch mechanism.
Vertical blind fabrics: To AS 2663.3.
Louvre blades: Vinyl coated fabric blades in single, straight lengths finishing 10 mm above floor or sill
level, without twists, warp, bows, edge ripples or fraying. Fix a weight into a pocket formed in the
bottom of each blade.
- Blade width (mm): >
e.g. 100 mm or 127 mm available.
- Colour: >
Spacings: Space the blades evenly with plastic spacers which lock into the carrier rail to provide a
continuous linkage, and fix with sealed plastic slat holders carried by plastic rotation pivots. Connect
the bottoms of the blades by a plastic link chain with reversers.
Tracks:
- Material: Extruded aluminium alloy 6063-TS, 1.2 mm thick.

- Track size (mm): >

- Track finish: >
e.g. “Anodised”, “Powder coated”.
Operation
- General: Single bead continuous loop chain controlling the functions of tilting and drawing.
- Operation mode: >
e.g. “Centre opening”, “One way opening”.
Internal roller blinds
Holland blinds:
- Material: >
Woven polyester or polymer coated glass fibre.
- Fabric treatment: >
e.g. Antimicrobial protection.
- Operation: >
Spring loaded, chain drive or motorised.
- Colour: >
4 EXECUTION
4.1 INSTALLATION
General
Fixing: Secure the tracks with ceiling clamps so that there are neither light gaps nor fixings through the
track.
Refer to details.
4.2 COMPLETION
Warranties
Consult or negotiate with manufacturers for warranty terms, and specify only such terms as are actually available. Cross refer to
Warranty schedule, General requirements.
Maintenance manual
Nominate items that require a maintenance manual.

TAPESTRIES INTERIOR
TAPESTRIES
This worksection is applicable to wall-hung tapestries woven using the Gobelin method. It was developed with the Victorian
Tapestry Workshop. There is no central standard.
• Applied wall finishes for stretched fabric wall panels.
• Provide separate documentation for the commissioning and production of the cartoon.
• None.
• Show size and location on drawings to your office documentation policy.
• Fixing points and/or structural modifications to the substrate.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
General: Provide wall hung tapestry(s) as follows:
- As a true representation of the cartoon translated into the tapestry medium.
- Hung plumb and free of wrinkles.

General
have no overlaps.
>
1.3 INSPECTION
Notice

TAPESTRIES INTERIOR
- Cartoon, complete.
The cartoon is the full-size rendition of the source artwork, mounted immediately behind the warp threads of the loom to guide
the weavers while the tapestry is being woven. The first payment to the VTW (if used) will usually have occurred by this time.
- Tapestry, 50% complete.
The second of three payments to the VTW usually occurs here.
- Tapestry complete, on the loom.
The cutting off ceremony, if any, occurs at this point. The final payment to the VTW is usually due here.
- Installation of tapestry.
Ceremony: Give sufficient notice so that the principal may attend the cutting off or unveiling ceremony.
1.4 SUBMISSIONS
Samples
Threads: Submit selected colourways.
These colourways may require discussion with the artist, if living, and sometimes the architect and/or interior designer. Delete if
not required.
Woven samples
Woven samples: Submit at least three samples each at least 200 x 200 mm.
The VTW has provided anything between 1 and 6 samples. Woven samples are not always prepared, but they represent
research for VTW, and can be discussed with artist, and sometimes the client.
1.5 PROTOTYPES
Maquette
Artist/designer: >
Work: >
Tapestries are commonly based on a commissioned or existing artwork, generally very much smaller than the tapestry. The
VTW itself is sometimes responsible for creating the artworks. Also, submission of the design with an indication perhaps of
interpretation (by the weaver), and intended colours or weave, may be required. Describe the maquette required.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
Woollen weft thread
The weft thread usually runs horizontally across the tapestry, though some tapestries are woven on their side because of the
type of design (e.g. design incorporates long vertical lines), because of size constraints, or because of strength and time
considerations (vertical stitching is the weakest point in the tapestry, and is slow to weave).
Wool: Australian, 28 mm sourced from Corriedale crossbreed sheep.
Corriedale crossbreeds are characterised by fine, long wool.
Yarn: Fine durable 3/20s worsted, with smooth, even fibres that lie parallel, giving a strong, even twist
that is uniform in diameter, not liable to ‘pilling’ or ‘fluffing’.
- Mill: >
e.g. Macquarie Textiles Group, 32 Lincoln Square, Carlton VIC 3053, the VTW’s source for yarn.
Warp thread
The warp thread runs vertically through the tapestry while it is being woven, and cannot be seen in the final product. It has to be
strong and durable enough to carry the weight of the tapestry without distortion over time. Some tapestries are woven sideways.
Type: Strong purpose-made cotton seine twine.
Seine twine can be supplied by VTW and made available to other weavers.
Warp count: Select from 6, 9, 12, 14 or 24.
i.e. thread size.

TAPESTRIES INTERIOR
Weft thread dying

Dyestuffs: Ciba-Geigy Lanaset™ dyestuffs, colourfast.
Dying process: Ensure clarity and accuracy.
Basic palette: 60 colours.
The VTW offers 60 colours, each with six or seven shades.
Total palette: 370 colours.
The VTW offers 370 colours.
Weft thread mothproofing

Mothproofing agent: Perigen™.
Suppliers
e.g. Victorian Tapestry Workshop. If this subclause is used, and VTW is nominated, the text above dealing with woollen weft
thread and warp thread is redundant and could be deleted. The VTW makes its thread available to other weavers.
Dyed and mothproofed woollen weft thread: >
Warp thread: >
2.2 COMPONENTS
Support batten
General: Predrilled aluminium plate, faced with 50 mm wide heavy-duty hook and loop fastening tape,
fixed with rivets and adhesive.
Length: Width of tapestry, less 25 mm.
Thickness: 4 mm.
Height: 100 mm.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 TAPESTRY FABRICATION

Tapestry method
General: Hand-made Gobelin.
This method, used by the VTW, has its roots in 14th century France. The VTW uses high-warp vertical looms.
Tapestry size
Width (mm): >
Height (mm): >
The biggest single piece available from the VTW is 7.8 m wide and any height (only one loom this size is available). Pieces can
be joined (using hook and loop fastening) together to make even larger tapestries, but then the support system described here
2
would need to be modified. The support system described here assumes a minimum size of 1 x 1 m (1 m , or 3 kg), say.
Density of weave
Warp setting (mm): >
e.g. 5 mm (2 to the cm), for a coarse textured tapestry with a lively surface, or 2.5 mm (4 to the cm) for a fine textured tapestry
with a regular flat grain.
Weft thread fineness (number of yarn strands):
>
e.g. from 5 to 16 yarn strands, according to size of yarn and needs of design. 12 to 16 is for coarse textured tapestries.
Weight (nominal): 2.5 kg/m2.
2 2
An alternative approach to specifying density of weave. May range from 1.5 to 3 kg/m , typically 2.5 kg/m .
Finishing
Vital where slits run horizontally and carry weight, as in tapestries woven on their side.
Stitching: Stiffen slits in tapestry by stitching them as part of the weaving process.
Beating: Beat the tapestry well down so that no warp can be seen and there are no wrinkles or ridges
on the surface.

TAPESTRIES INTERIOR
Edges: Reasonably straight, so as not to disturb the eye or the design.

Hems: Locate at the top and bottom of the tapestry. To the top and bottom hem, sew in weavers’
initials and date of weaving. Stitch the hems back on the reverse of the tapestry.
- Hem size: 70 – 120 mm.
The top hem is essential (not used if the tapestry is woven on its side), as it is used to carry the hook and loop fastener, and
hence the weight of the entire tapestry.
Selvedges: Stitch on 40 mm wide cotton twill binding tape.
Fastener: Stitch and adhesive-fix a 50 mm wide heavy-duty hook and loop fastening tape to the top
hem, on the reverse of the tapestry. Set in 5 mm from edges.
Marking
General: Stitch a label to the reverse of the tapestry, lower left hand side, stating the following:
- Artist’s name and signature.
- Title of tapestry.
- Signatures of weavers.
- Date of commencement.
- Identity of fabricator, with contact details.
- Identity of principal.
- Materials used, including warp count and warp setting.
The label certifies authenticity.
Preparation for transportation
Tapestry: Lay tapestry flat on a clean surface. Cover using acid-free tissue paper. Roll the tapestry
around a 100 mm diameter PVC-U pipe, also covered using acid-free tissue paper, so that the hook
and loop fastening tape is left facing out.
- Pipe length: Tapestry width + 100 mm.
Support batten: Place within the PVC-U pipe.
Whole: Wrap in calico, and then in bubblewrap and then black polyethylene sheet, minimum 200 mm,
sealed using tape.
Fabricator >
e.g. Victorian Tapestry Workshop. If VTW is nominated some of what has gone before could be omitted, as it describes VTW’s
standard practice. It is likely that the fabrication (i.e. weaving) of the tapestry will be contracted as a nominated subcontract, in
which case the demarcation between the work of the NSC and the contractor needs to be clearly defined. This worksection may
therefore be split, with one part covering the work of the NSC, and the other covering the work of the contractor.
3.2 TAPESTRY DELIVERY

Delivery
General: Deliver the prepared tapestry to the site.
Often arranged by VTW using a specialist art courier. Check the goods lift capacity for large items.
3.3 TAPESTRY INSTALLATION

Generally the batten is installed by the contractor, and the VTW often supervises hanging.
The positioning and lighting of the tapestry need to be carefully considered. For example, lights should be angled at least 45° to
the tapestry, to ensure optimum colour resonance. The VTW’s ‘Guidelines for the lighting of tapestries’, by Wendy Jackson-
Brooks, should be consulted.
Tapestries should not be hung where they might be subjected to unusual levels of dust or moisture. They should not be
exposed to prolonged direct sunlight. They should not be hung near ventilation extract grilles, as the air drawn over the surface
of the tapestry can cause heavy dust and grease accumulation.
Unwrapping
Method: Using clean hands, or wearing clean white cotton gloves, remove plastic, bubblewrap and
calico. Remove support batten from PVC-U pipe. Do not remove the tapestry. Retain the wrapping.
Support batten
Fixing: Screw fix the support batten horizontally to the wall. Select screws to suit substrate and weight
of tapestry.

TAPESTRIES INTERIOR
Alternatively could be bolt-fixed, or suspended by wires or chains from a picture rail.

Height of batten above floor (top edge) (mm):
>
- Screw type: Countersunk, flat cross-head.
Fixing holes: 300 mm maximum centres, 5 mm diameter, countersunk, alternating top and bottom of
batten.
Assumes screw fixing to walls. Not done by VTW.
Tapestry
Installation: Install the tapestry flat against the support batten and the wall. Extend the tapestry at least
10 mm beyond each end of the support batten. Conceal the support batten.
Method: Using clean hands, or wearing clean white cotton gloves, carry the rolled tapestry to the
support batten, supporting it at each end. Starting at one end, attach the hook and loop fastening tape
on the tapestry to the hook and loop fastening tape on the support batten. Then unroll the tapestry
slowly. Retain the PVC-U pipe.
Label: Do not remove the label on the reverse of the tapestry.
3.4 MAINTENANCE
On warranties, VTW normally does not accept any liability for tapestries.
Cleaning
General: At installation, and then every 2 months during the defects liability period, remove dust and
lint from the surface of the tapestry.
Method: Either brush using a stiff small clothes brush, or vacuum using a purpose-made fabric nozzle.
Defects liability period for the project may be 6 or 12 months, from practical completion.
Wrapping and PVC-U pipe
General: Store on site.
Location: >
Maintenance manual
General: Submit a maintenance manual, describing handling and cleaning processes and regimes.
Tapestries do not need extensive maintenance. For example, they should be vacuumed or brushed 1 or 2 times a year. They
should never be folded, but should always be rolled - the pipe and wrapping they were delivered with should be retained for this
purpose. Tapestries are inherently mobile artworks - part of their longstanding appeal. The VTW can supply detailed guidelines
on maintenance and transportation of tapestries, and offers a repair service.

SIGNS AND DISPLAY INTERIOR
SIGNS AND DISPLAY
This worksection is applicable to house signage, display and statutory signs. Signage for switchboards, pipework, etc should be
dealt with in the appropriate technical worksection, but coordinated with this worksection.
• Light steel framing or Light timber framing as applicable for the structures for large signs.
• Cladding or Lining as applicable for the surfaces for large signs.
• Mechanical general requirements, Hydraulic general requirements and Electrical general requirements for marking labels
for the identification of the contents or pipes, conduits and ducts.
• Emergency evacuation lighting for illuminated emergency exit signs.
• Schedules of graphic posters and commissioned artwork.
• A completed schedule of carpark signposting as noted in AS 2890.1 Section 4.
• None.
• The specification assumes details and locations are indicated on drawings to your office documentation policy.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
General: Provide signage systems to the Selections.
The specifiers aims include documenting signage that are expected to be:
• Appropriately secured.
• Located within a clear line of vision.
• To contrast with the background.
• With clean, well defined edges or arises, and free from blemishes.

General
have no overlaps.
>

You may wish to direct the contractor to other worksections where there may be work that is closely associated with this work
,such as:
• Cladding.
• Mechanical general requirements, Hydraulic general requirements and Electrical general requirements.
• Emergency evacuation lighting.
1.3 STANDARDS
Signs
General: Public information signs as applicable:
- AS 2899.1 General information signs.
- AS 2899.2 Water safety signs.
- AS 2899.3 Hospital signs.
Safety signs - design and use: To AS 1319.
Signs and graphics for disabled access: AS 1428 Parts 1 and 2.
1.4 INTERPRETATION
Definitions
- Changeable plate systems: Sign systems consisting of fixed plate holders to which may be attached
or inserted removable interchangeable sign plates.
- Variable room identification system: Changeable plate systems incorporating fixed room numbers
and removable name strips.
- Changeable letter systems: Sign systems consisting of display boards or holders into which can be
inserted removable individual letters, numbers, etc.
- Illuminated signs: Signs consisting of cabinets enclosing an illuminated source, lighting translucent
face panels bearing the specified signage.
- House signage: Internal and external project specific signs.
- Statutory signage: Signs prescribed by the BCA and statutory authorities.
1.5 INSPECTION
Notice
- Custom-built graphics items fabricated and ready to be delivered to the site.
- Graphics items delivered to site before installation.
- Building locations or substrates prepared to receive graphics items before they are installed.
1.6 SAMPLES
General
Materials: Submit samples showing each colour and finish of exposed graphics materials and
accessories. If there is a range of colours and/or textures for a particular item, submit samples
showing the extremes and mean of the range.
Fabricated items: >
Specify any required samples of fabricated graphics items, e.g. “Cast (or cut-out) characters” (state which alphabet or numeral
characters are required), “Engraved plate showing ...”.
1.7 SUBMISSIONS
Shop drawings

- Layout, construction and fixing details for custom designed (non standard) sign systems.
- Large scale (full size if practicable) lettering layouts for individual letter signs.
- Computer generated graphic images.
- Full size spacing templates for individually mounted characters.
- Location template drawings for anchorages to permanent construction. Show type of anchorage.
- Wiring diagrams for illuminated signs.
2 PRODUCTS
Obtain the material specifications for particular graphics items from the manufacturer or supplier, and include with the
specification of the item (if the specification is generic rather than by proprietary item).
2.1 MATERIALS
Materials standards
Aluminium:
- Plate for engraving: Alloy and temper designation 6063-0.
- For casting: To AS 1874.
Stainless steel: Surface finish designation 4 (general purpose polished).
Plastics:
- UPVC sheet: Semi-rigid sheet.
- Rigid cellular polystyrene: To AS 1366.3, class VH for cut-out shapes.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 WORKMANSHIP
Production
General: Form graphics items accurately with clean, well defined edges or arises, free from blemishes.
Engraving to two layer plastic laminate: Lettering excavated to expose the lower laminate.
Engraved and filled: Lettering precision excavated and filled colouring material. Clean faces of all
filling material.
Casting: Produce shapes free of pits, scale, blow holes or other defects, hand or machine finished if
necessary.
Laser cut: Individual vinyl letters with self adhesive backing.
Printed lettering: Lettering and graphic images screen / digitally printed on:
- Film with self adhesive backing.
- Acrylic sheet.
- Aluminium plate.
- Stainless steel plate.
Large format digital printing: Lettering and graphic images screen printed film with self adhesive
backing.
Lettering and graphic images screen printed film with self adhesive backing.
Signwriting: Lettering and graphic images hand painted direct to the background by a tradesman with
recognised qualifications and demonstrated experience.
Large format digital printing on adhesive fixed film is often an alternative to hand signwriting.
Fabricated: Three dimensional, formed as follows:
- Laser cutting from solid material and hand finished as necessary.
- Moulding: Individual plastic hollow three dimensional characters and shapes formed by:
. Injection moulding.
. Vacuum forming.

- Built-up individual shapes by fabricating the faces and edges from separate pieces neatly and
securely joined.
Installation
General: Install signage level and plumb, securely mounted, with concealed theft-resistant fixings. Fix
self adhesive signs free of bubbles and creases.
4 SELECTIONS
If graphic symbols are to be used, the decision on their use should be made by the designer. The detailed design of the sign by
the manufacturer must comply with the specification.
4.1 GENERAL SIGNS

General signs refers to house signs and public information signs.
Sign type schedule
Designation S1 S2 S3
Sign type
Sign plate holder:
- Material
- Finish/colour
- Fixing method
- Size (l x h x t) (mm)
Sign plate:
- Material
- Size (l x h x t) (mm)
- Finish/colour
- Fixing method
Characters:
- Material
- Method of forming
- Letter height/thickness (mm)
- Finish/colour
- Typeface
- Filling
- Fixing method
The Sign type schedule offers three designation codes or abbreviations. Extend designations as required. The designation
codes should also be shown on the drawings.
Sign type: e.g. fixed individual characters, photoprinted plates, engraved plates, fixed room identification system, changeable
plate system, variable room identification system, changeable letter system.
Characters:
• Material: Metals, plastics, timber, concrete - be specific.
• Method of forming: e.g. “Cast”, “Cut-out”, “Moulded”, “Built-up”.
• Typeface: e.g. a standard typeface specified by name, such as “Helvetica”.
• Fixing method: Plates may be permanently fixed or part of a changeable plate sign system.

Sign schedule
Location Designation Text Notes
Location: Shown on drawings or list here.

Designation: Use code defined in the Signage type schedule.
Text: Nominate the required wording, symbols, or numbers.
Changeable letter systems schedule
Location: >
Display board:
- Material: >
Usually plywood.
- Covering: >
Usually felt.
- Colour: >
Frame or case:
- Material: >
e.g. “Anodised aluminium”, “Polished timber” or other.
Enclosure: >
e.g. “Sliding glass doors”, “Hinged glass door(s)” or other. Delete if not enclosed.
Locking: >
If enclosed, manufacturer’s standard locking system, or special system cross-referred to the Window hardware and Door
hardware worksections.
Fixing method: >
Letters:
- Material: >
e.g. “Moulded acrylic” or “Moulded polystyrene”.
- Colour: >
Consult manufacturers for options.
- Quantity: >
Nominate the total number required.
External post and panel systems schedule
Supporting framework:
- Material: >
Panels:
- Material: >
- Method of attachment: >
Illuminated signs schedule
Electrical fittings: Provide a junction box for power connection, and the necessary lamps with proper
mountings, protection, and accessories including wiring transformers and insulators.
Location: >
Cabinet:
- Material: >
e.g. sheet metal (aluminium, metallic-coated steel), acrylic.

- Supports: >
- Fixing method: >
Face panels:
- Material: >
e.g. “Acrylic”.
- Form: >
e.g. “Moulded to detail” or “Flat”.
- Colours: >
Text: >
Lettering, symbols, logos, etc. May be shown on the drawings.
Illumination:
- Type: >
e.g. “Front lit” or “Back lit”.
- Lamps: >
e.g. “Fluorescent”, “Neon”. Consult manufacturers for specification of standard provisions.
Painted signs
Location: >
Text: >
Plaques
Location: >
Material: >
Method of forming: >
Finish: >
Text: >
4.2 STATUTORY SIGNS

Required fire door
Position - Adjacent to the door
- To the side of the door that faces a person seeking egress
Message
- Auto door with auto hold FIRE (SMOKE) DOOR – DO NOT OBSTRUCT
open device FIRE (SMOKE) DOOR
- Self closing door DO NOT OBSTRUCT
- Door discharging from an DO NOT KEEP OPEN
exit FIRE SAFETY DOOR – DO NOT OBSTRUCT
Letter size 20 mm
Sign type Printed acrylic sheet adhesive fixed
Compliance BCA D2.23

Required smoke door

Position - Adjacent to the door
- To the side of the door that faces a person seeking egress
Message
- Auto door with auto hold SMOKE DOOR – DO NOT OBSTRUCT
open device SMOKE DOOR
- Self closing door DO NOT OBSTRUCT
- Door discharging from an DO NOT KEEP OPEN
exit FIRE SAFETY DOOR – DO NOT OBSTRUCT
Letter size 20 mm
Non-required stair, ramp or escalator

Position Outside the shaft near all doors opening to the shaft
Message DO NOT USE THIS STAIRWAY IF THERE IS A FIRE
(or)
Do not use this stairway if there is a fire
Letter size 20 mm (upper case)
16 mm (lower case)
Compliance BCA Spec D1.12
Fire control room

Position External face of the door
Message FIRE CONTROL ROOM
Letter size 50 mm
Compliance BCA Spec E1.8
Lifts – warning
Position Near every call button for passenger lift(s)
Message DO NOT USE LIFTS IF THERE IS A FIRE
(or)
Do not use lifts if there is a fire
Letter size 10 mm (upper case)
8 mm (lower case)
Sign type Incised, inlaid or embossed on metal, wood, plastic or similar plate
securely and permanently attached to the wall; or letters incised or inlaid
directly into the surface of the material forming the wall
Compliance BCA E3.3
Access to lift pits

Position At the landing side of the doorway
Message DANGER LIFTWELL – ENTRY OR UNAUTHORISED PERSONS
PROHIBITED – KEEP CLEAR AT ALL TIMES
Letter size 35 mm minimum
Sign type Incised, inlaid or embossed

Exit signs, Class 2, 3 and 4 in lieu of illuminated exit signs

Position - To the side remote from the exit or balcony
- To an entrance door of a sole occupancy unit in a Class 2 or 3 building
or Class 4 part
Message EXIT
Letter size 25 mm
Compliance BCA E4.5 and E4.7
Fire exit offence notice (NSW)

Position Adjacent door providing access to (but not within) a fire exit stair,
passage or ramp
Message OFFENCES RELATING TO FIRE EXITS
It is and offence under the Environmental planning and Assessment Act
1979:
- To place anything in or near this fire exit that may obstruct persons
moving to and from the exit, or
- To interfere with or obstruct the operation of any fire doors, or
- To remove, damage or otherwise interfere with this notice.
Letter size > 8 mm (title)
> 2.5 mm (rest)
Compliance Environmental Planning and Assessment Regulation 2000 clause 183
Fire exit offence notice (ACT)

Position Adjacent door providing access to (but not within) a fire exit stair,
passage or ramp
Message OFFENCES RELATING TO FIRE EXITS
Under the Fire Brigade Act it is an offence to:
- Place anything in this stairway or any associated passageway leading
to the exterior of the building which may impede the free passage of
persons;
- Interfere with or cause obstruction or impediment to the normal
operation of fire doors providing access to this stairway; or
- Remove, damage or otherwise interfere with this notice.
Letter size > 20 mm (title)
> 3 mm (rest)
Sign type Engraved and filled in contrasting colours
Compliance BCA ACT D1.101
Escalators
Position Each end of escalator
Message Prescribed notice/pictogram AS 1735.5 Fig. 3.9
Letter size
Sign type By manufacturer
Compliance Prescribed notice/pictogram AS 1735.5 Fig. 3.9

Fire hose reels and fire hydrants

Position Cupboard door or adjacent the FHR
Message FIRE HOSE REEL (and/or) FIRE HYDRANT
Letter size External cabinets: 75 mm
Internal cabinets: 50 mm
Sign type White adhesive backed vinyl
Compliance AS 2441
AS 2419.1
BCA E1.3 and E1.4
Hose reel system valve

Position At any system valve that can isolate flow in the hose reel water supply
main
Message FIRE SERVICE VALVE – CLOSE ONLY TO SERVICE FIRE HOSE
REELS
Letter size 8 mm
Sign type Label with engraved non-ferrous metal tag
Compliance BCA E1.4 (b)(v)(D)
Sliding fire door

Position Each side of door directly over the opening
Message WARNING
SLIDING FIRE DOOR
(and)
100 x 50 mm arrow
Letter size 50 mm min
Compliance BCA C3.6
Warden Intercommunications Point (WIP)

Position Door for WIP
Message WARDEN INTERCOMMUNICATIONS POINT
Compliance AS 2220
Portable fire extinguishers

Position Cabinet
Message FIRE EXTINGUISHER
Sign type Adhesive backed vinyl
Compliance BCA E1.6
AS 2444 clause 3.6
Fire Brigade

Portable fire extinguishers – location signs

Position As nominated in AS 2444 clause 3.2 at every installed extinguisher
nominated BCA Table E1.6
Message Prescribed graphic
Letter size
Sign type Computer generated adhesive backed vinyl graphic
Compliance BCA E1.6
AS 2444 clause 3.3
Fire Brigade
Fire point
Position As nominated in AS 2444 clause 3.8 at each fire point
Message FIRE POINT (and prescribed graphic)
Letter size
Compliance AS 2444 clause 3.8
Fire blankets
Position As nominated in AS 2444 clause 6.4 at every blanket location
Message Prescribed graphic
Letter size
Compliance BCA E1.6
AS 2444 clause 5.1, 5.3 and Fig 5.1
Fire Brigade
Termite protection
Position Meter box or similar
Message Indicate:
- The method of protection
- The date of installation
- The life expectancy of a chemical barrier as listed on the National
Registration Authority label
- The installer’s recommendation for inspections
Letter size
Sign type Laminated page(s)
Compliance BCA B1.3 (i)(ii)
AS 3660.1 Appendix C or D as appropriate
Regulatory carpark signs: Low clearance

Position Entry to overhead obstruction where clearance is:
- 3 m or less – car and light van use only
- 4.6 m – all other cases
Message LOW CLEARANCE 2.2 m
Letter size As prescribed AS 2890 clause 4.3.4 (a)
Sign type RTA standard
Compliance AS 2890.1 clause 4.3.4

Regulatory carpark signs: Stop and Give Way

Position As required for traffic control
Message Graphic nominated AS 2890.1 clause 4.3.4(b)
Letter size
Regulatory carpark signs: Speed limit

Message Graphic nominated AS 2890.1 clause 4.3.4(c)
Letter size
Regulatory carpark signs: Hump warning

Message Graphic nominated AS 2890.1 clause 4.3.4(d)
Letter size
Regulatory carpark signs: Steep grade warning

Message Graphic nominated AS 2890.1 clause 4.3.4(e)
Letter size
Disabled access
Position As nominated BCA D3.3, and AS 1428.1 clause 14.5.1
To each:
- Sanitary facility
- Accessible entrance
- Accessible lift(s)
- Path of travel to accessible facilities
Message International symbols to AS 1428.1 clause 14
Letter size AS 1428.2 clause 16, Table 1
Compliance BCA Spec A1.3, D3.3(c),D3.6
AS 1428.1

Braille and tactile signs

Position To each:
- Sanitary facility
- Accessible entrance
- Accessible lift(s)
- Path of travel to accessible facilities
Message International symbols to AS 1428.1 clause 14 for access or deafness
Letter size BCA Specification D3.6
Sign type Adhesive fixed polyvinyl membrane with raised message
Compliance BCA D3.6
AS 1428.1
Deafness
Position Where hearing augmentation is installed BCA D3.7
Message International symbols to AS 1428.1 clause 14
Letter size BCA Specification D 3.6, clause 16, Table 1 AS 1428.2
Compliance BCA D3.7
AS 1428.1
Plant room signs – Lift Machine Room (LMR) – door

Position External face LMR door
Message DANGER
ENTRY OF UNAUTHORISED PERSONS PROHIBITED
Letter size 25 mm (Danger)
10 mm ( message)
Compliance AS 1735.2
Plant room signs – (LMR)

Position Internal face LMR door
Message DOORS TO BE KEPT CLOSED WHEN THIS EQUIPMENT IS
UNATTENDED
Letter size
Plant room signs – (LMR) – emergency key

Position Adjacent LMR door
Message MACHINE ROOM EMERGENCY KEY
Letter size > 3 mm

Plant room signs – Generating sets

Position To single doors or left hand leaf of double doors
Message WEAR HEARING CONSERVATION PROTECTION TO AS 1319
WARNING – THIS SET MAY START AT ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE
Letter size 50 mm
Sign type Printed acrylic sheet adhesive fixed, red on white background
Compliance
Main switchboard, excluding Class 1 dwellings

Position Main entry or fire indicator panel
Message Indicate location of main switchboard
Letter size
Compliance AS/NZS 3000 clause 2.9.8
Fire orders – Alpine areas

Position Main entrance to each storey.
Message FIRE ORDERS followed by an explanation of the following:
- Method of operation of the alarm system and location of call points
- Location and method of operation of the fire fighting equipment
- Location of exits
- Evacuation procedure
Letter size
Compliance BCA G4.9
Swimming pools – South Australia

Position Label to manual shut off valve
Message WARNING
RE-OPEN THIS VALVE IMMEDIATELY AFTER USING A VACUUM
CLEANER
THE POOL MUST NOT BE USED WHILE A VACUUM CLEANER IS IN
USE
Letter size 2.5 mm
Sign type Printed acrylic sheet adhesive fixed, contrast to background and
resistant to UV, water and pool chemicals
Compliance BCA SA G 1.1
Safety curtains – NSW

Application In a Class 9b building used as a place of public entertainment.
Position On curtain
Message Safety curtain
Letter size To be able to be read from all parts of the auditorium
Sign type Printed acrylic sheet adhesive fixed, contrast to background and
resistant to UV, water and pool chemicals
Compliance BCA NSW H101.10

Safety curtains – operating controls – NSW

Application In a Class 9b building used as a place of public entertainment
Position At safety curtain operating controls
Message (Indicate its use and operation)
Letter size
Sign type
Stages – automatic smoke and heat vents for stages – NSW

Application In a Class 9b building used as a place of public entertainment.
Position At operating controls
Message (Indicate its use and operation)
Letter size
Sign type
Doorways and doors – Public Entertainment – NSW

Position Any doorway or opening within sight of the audience but not intended for
egress
Message (Indicate its purpose)
Letter size
Sign type Must not be internally illuminated
Compliance BCA NSW D2.19
Sliding doors – Public Entertainment – NSW

Position Any doorway or opening within sight of the audience but not intended for
egress
Message (Indicate, to persons seeking egress, the potential for swinging the door
open in an emergency)
Letter size
Sign type
Stage – Load notice – NSW

Position Adjacent to the stage door
Message (Indicate the actual distributed and concentrated load for which the stage
has been designed)
Letter size 50 mm
Sign type

PLASTERING FINISH
PLASTERING
This worksection covers traditional wet plastering and rendering, though proprietary and special systems may feature in the
project specifications and drawings. It includes work on lath, and on panelling of various materials.
• Painting for high build finishes.
• Trowel applied high build finishes (Granosite).
• Proprietary plastering systems developed for autoclaved aerated concrete products.
• None.
• Locate plastering systems on drawings and schedules to your office documentation policy.
5 GENERAL
5.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
General: Provide plaster finishes as follows:
- Resistant to impacts expected in use.
- Free of irregularities.
- Consistent in texture and finish.
- Firmly bonded to substrates for the expected life of the application.
- As a suitable substrate for the nominated final finish.

General
have no overlaps.
>

PLASTERING FINISH
• Painting.
5.3 INTERPRETATION
Abbreviations
Created to allow cross-referencing between the Mixes table, Corrosion resistance and durability table and other
documentation e.g. finishes schedules.
General: For the purpose to this worksection the abbreviations given below apply.
- CRF: Cement render – finish.
- CRM: Cement render – medium.
- CRS: Cement render – stronger.
- CRW: Cement render – weaker.
- GPF: Gypsum plaster – finish.
The Abbreviations subclause can be edited to suit the project or deleted if not required.
Definitions
- Plastering: The process of coating the framing or solid surfaces of a building with a plastic material
which hardens and then may be decorated or remain self-finished.
- Application: A separate thin layer, which together with other layers forms one coat.
- Substrate: The surface to which plaster is applied including lath or lath fixed to framing.
- Base coat: A coat of a multi-coat plaster system which is applied before a finish coat, excluding any
bonding treatment.
Can mean, for example:
• Browning coats.
• Floating coats.
• Pricking-up coats.
• Scratch coats.
• Straightening coats.
- Bonding treatment: A treatment of a background which improves adhesion of a plaster system, not
including a base coat.
Can mean, for example:
• Dash coats.
• Slurry coats.
• Splash coats.
• Splatterdash coats.
- Finish coat: The final coat of a multi-coat plaster system which may receive decoration or receive
finishing treatment, including terms as follows:
. Bedding coat.
. Hardwall plaster.
. Setting coat.
. Skim coat.
. Whiteset plaster.
- Finishing treatment: The treatment applied to a finish coat which may include processes and results
as follows:
As distinct from finish coats, finishing treatments describe what is done to the finish coat, which, in one-coat work, is integral
with the base coat. Many types exist and can be found in the field or in text books. A photograph could be included in the
documentation or an actual building referenced and a sample should be required.
. Ornamental: Patterned surfaces achieved by working the hardening plaster with a trowel or other
tool.
PLASTERING FINISH
These are patterned surfaces achieved by working the hardening plaster with a trowel or other tool. Examples include:
• Ashlar.
• Combed.
• English cottage.
• Fan texture.
• Scraped.
• Sgraffito.
. Plain: Even surfaces achieved by working the hardening plaster with a float or other tool.
These are even surfaces achieved by working the hardening plaster with a float or other tool. Examples include:
• Steel trowel: A satisfactory finish is difficult to achieve in cement-based work. Use only if the cement-based finish is to be
painted with paint requiring a very smooth hard background.
. Sprayed: Textured surfaces achieved by projecting plaster onto a background using a purpose-
designed machine also known as “tyrolean”.
. Stippled: Textured surfaces achieved by working the hardening plaster with a stiff brush.
Textured surfaces can be achieved by working the hardening plaster with a stiff brush.
. Thrown: Rough surfaces achieved by throwing plaster onto a background or pebbles onto a
plastic plaster base.
These are rough surfaces achieved by throwing plaster onto a background or pebbles onto a plastic plaster base. Examples
include rough cast, harling, and pebble-dash.
- Movement control joints: Includes isolation joints, construction joints and crack control joints.
- Plaster: A mixture of binders, aggregate and water which are applied to backgrounds in a plastic
state and dry and cure to a hard surface which may subsequently be decorated.
. Cement: Plaster containing Portland cement as the principal binder.
. Gypsum: Plaster containing hydrated or anhydrous calcium sulfate as the principal binder.
- Plastering system: One or more coats of plaster and associated treatments comprising some or all
of the following in sequence:
. Base coat 1 or 2.
. Bonding treatment.
. Finish coat.
. Finishing treatment.
- Render, rendering: Plaster, plastering, usually single coat in more than one application and usually
cement:lime:sand.
5.4 INSPECTION
Notice
- Prototypes ready for inspection.
- Backgrounds immediately before applying base coats.
- Finish treatments before decoration.
5.5 SUBMISSIONS
Prototypes
Plaster systems: Prepare prototypes of each plaster system complete with beads and other embedded
items:
- Size: 1200 x 2400 mm.

PLASTERING FINISH
6 PRODUCTS

Accessories
Beads: To be metal proprietary sections manufactured to be fixed to backgrounds and/or embedded in
the plaster to form and protect plaster edges and junctions.
Lath: To be a proprietary product manufactured from raised expanded metal for use with plaster.
- Mass/unit area: ≥ 1.84 kg/m2.
- Material thickness: ≥ 0.70 mm.
- Mesh size: 9.5 x 28.6 mm.
Metallic-coatings: For beads or lath in cement plaster: To the Corrosion resistance and durability
table.
Admixtures
Plasticizers or workability agents: Do not use in cement plasters.
The use of admixtures should not be permitted unless there is confidence that there will be an improved outcome. Their use in
lieu of suitable sands should be resisted unless no reasonable alternative is available.
Aggregates
Sand: To be fine, sharp, well-graded sand with a low clay content and free from efflorescing salts.
See the Commentary on this topic.
Autoclaved aerated concrete plaster
General: To be a proprietary product manufactured for use with the wall system.
Bonding products
General: To be proprietary products manufactured for bonding cement-based plaster to solid
backgrounds.
Cement
- Type: GP.
Type GP is a general purpose cement. Other types are defined in the standard and there is a separate standard for masonry
cement which contains plasticisers and other additives. The mixes specified here are for Portland cement Type GP. Do not
permit the substitution of masonry cement for general purpose cement or of plasticisers for lime without full consideration.
Colouring products
General: To be proprietary products manufactured for colouring cement plaster.
Integral pigment proportion: ≤ 5% by mass of cement.
Cornice cement
General: To be a proprietary product manufactured for use with the cornice.
Cornices
Cast plaster: To AS 2185 and AS 2590.
AS 2185 and AS 2590 are now made obsolescent, but still available.
General: To the Corrosion resistance and durability table or proprietary products with metallic
and/or organic coatings of equivalent corrosion resistance.

PLASTERING FINISH

Designate corrosivity category of the project in General requirements. Delete the tables for corrosivity categories that do not
apply.
Situation1 Metal lath, beads and embedded items Minimum cement content
(mix type) above damp-
proof course
Internal Galvanize after fabrication 300 g/m2 CRW
Metallic-coated sheet Z275/AZ150
External Galvanize after fabrication 300 g/m2 CRW
Stainless 316 CRM
Powder-coated aluminium
1
Situation
Corrosion resistance and durability table– Medium corrosivity category

proof course
2
Internal Galvanize after fabrication 300 g/m CRW
Metallic-coated sheet Z275/AZ150
External Stainless 316 CRM
1
Situation
Corrosion resistance and durability table– High corrosivity category

proof course
2
Internal (if plaster is Galvanize after fabrication 300 g/m CRW
painted) Metallic-coated sheet Z275/AZ150
External Stainless 316 CRS
1
Situation
Curing products
General: To be proprietary products manufactured for use with the plaster system.
Gypsum plaster
General: To be a proprietary product containing calcium sulfate hemihydrate conforming to AS 2592
with additives to modify setting.
AS 2592 is now made obsolescent, but still available.
Lime
General: To be in the form of lime putty made as follows:
- Dry hydrate of lime to AS/NZS 1672.1 and water which has stood for ≥ 24 hours without drying out.
- Quicklime and water which has stood ≥ 14 days without drying out.
In plastering lime should not be used straight from the commonly available hydrated lime bag. This product is quicklime that had
been partially hydrated by addition of water to leave a powder which should be further slaked and allowed to mature as a putty.

PLASTERING FINISH
Mixes
General: Select a mix ratio to suit the conditions of application in conformity to the Mixes table.
Measurement: Measure binders and sand by volume using buckets or boxes. Do not allow sand to
bulk by absorption of water.
Plaster mixing: Machine mix ≥ 3 < 6 minutes.
Strength of successive coats: Ensure successive coats are no richer in binder than the coat to which
they are applied.
Mixes table
Mix type Application Upper and lower limits of proportions
by volume
Gypsum Cement Lime Sand
Cement render coats CRS Dense and smooth - 1 0 3
in: concrete and masonry - 1 0.5 4.5
- Single or multi-coat Thrown finishing
systems with treatments
integral finishing Tiled finishes
treatments Gypsum finishes
- Base coats in multi- Cement finishes
coat systems with CRM Clay or concrete masonry - 1 0.5 4.5
cement or gypsum - 1 1 6
finishes
CRW Lightweight concrete - 1 1 6
masonry and other weak - 1 2 9
backgrounds
Cement finish coats CRF Cement render base coats - 1 1 1.5
- 1 2 2
Gypsum finish coats GPF Cement render base coats 3 - 1 -
1 - 3 -
Movement control joint products

General: To be proprietary products manufactured for use with the plastering system and to
accommodate the anticipated movement of the backgrounds and/or the plaster.
Water
7 EXECUTION
7.1 PREPARATION
Substrates
General: Ensure substrates have:
- Any deposit or finish which may impair adhesion of plaster cleaned off.
- If framed or discontinuous, support members in full lengths without splicing.
- If solid or continuous, excessive projections hacked off and voids and hollows filled with plaster
stronger than the first coat and not weaker than the background.
not plaster backgrounds showing surface moisture.
to remove 2 mm of the laitance and expose the aggregate then apply a bonding treatment.
Painted surfaces: Remove paint and hack the surface at close intervals.
Untrue substrates: If the substrate is not sufficiently true to ensure conformity with the thickness limits
for the plaster system or has excessively uneven suction resulting from variations in the composition of
the background, apply additional coats without exceeding the thickness limits for the background or
system.

PLASTERING FINISH
There may be particular locations, or particular types of substrates (e.g. “dense concrete”, “existing brickwork”) required to
achieve particular types of plaster finish. Such variations are best minimised. Particular substrate preparation may be required
e.g. “Scabbling”, “Bonding treatment”, or a combination of methods. If so, specify them but only if it is certain what is required.
Beads
Location: Fix beads as follows:
- Angle beads: At all external corners.
- Joints in beads: Use dowels to maintain alignment.
- Drip beads: At all lower terminations of external plaster.
- Mechanical fixing to background: ≤ 300 mm centres.
- Movement control beads: At all movement control joints.
- Stop beads: At all terminations of plaster and junctions with other materials or plaster systems.
Bonding treatment
General: If bonding treatment is required, throw a wet mix onto the background as follows:
- Cement plaster: 1 part cement to 2 parts sand.
- Gypsum plaster: 1 part gypsum to 2 parts sand.
Curing: Keep continuously moist for ≥ 5 days and allow to dry before applying plaster coats.
Thickness: From ≥ 3 < 6 mm.
Proprietary bonding products may also be specified or approved.
Embedded items
General: If there are water pipes and other embedded items, sheath them to permit thermal
movement. Ensure embedded items conform to the Corrosion resistance and durability table.
Lath
Location:
- Chases: If chases or recesses are ≥ 50 mm wide, fix metal lath extending ≥ 75 mm beyond each
side of the chase or recess.
- Fit metal lath to masonry and concrete backgrounds:
>
Nominate location where sufficient mechanical key can not be attained by scabbling and bonding.
- Metal and other non-porous backgrounds: Fix metal lath to provide a key.
Installation:
- General: Run the long way of the mesh across supports with strands sloping downwards and
inwards from the intended face of the plaster.
- Fixing: Mechanically fix at ≤ 150 mm centres.
- Laps: Tie with 1.25 mm galvanized wire ≤ 150 mm. Do not stop edges of sheets at corners but bend
around.
- On solid backgrounds: Space the lath ≥ 5 mm clear of the background.
- Support spacing: ≤ 400 mm.
7.2 APPLICATION
Plastering
Base coats: Scratch-comb each base coat in two directions when it has stiffened.
Metal lath: Press the plaster through the apertures of expanded metal lath and wings of beads.
Finishing treatments
Plain:
- Bag: To be a finish mainly free from sand by rubbing the finish coat with a Hessian pad when it has
set firm.
- Carborundum stone: To be a smooth finish free from sand by, rubbing the finish coat with a fine
carborundum stone when it has set hard.
- Foam float: To be an even surface by a wood or plastic floating the finish coat on application and
finishing with a foam float to a fine sand textured finish.

PLASTERING FINISH
- Steel trowel: To be a smooth dense surface by steel trowelling which is not glass-like and is free
from shrinkage cracks and crazing.
- Wood or plastic float: To be an even surface by wood or plastic floating the finish coat on
application.
Incidental work
General: Return plaster into reveals, beads, sills, recesses and niches. Plaster faces, ends, and soffits
of projections in the background, such as string courses, sills, pilasters and corbels. Run throating on
soffits of external projections neatly finished. Trim around openings. Plaster exposed inside of built-in
cupboards.
Joining up
General: If joining up is required, ensure joints will be imperceptible in the finished work after
decoration.
General: Provide movement control joints in the finish to coincide with movement joints in the
background. Ensure that the joint in the background is not bridged during plastering.
- Depth: Extend the joint right through the plaster and reinforcement to the background.
- Width: 3 mm, or the same width as the background joint, whichever is greater.
Damp-proof courses: Do not continue plaster across damp-proof courses.
Plastering on metal lath: Provide movement joints to divide the plastering area into rectangular panels
≤ 10 m2.
V-joints: Provide V-joints, cut right through the plaster to the background, at the following locations:
- Abutments with metal door frames.
- Abutments with other finishes.
- Junctions between different backgrounds.
Decorative joints
General: Apply decorative joints in the second coat of two coat work as follows:
>
Describe or detail joints and locate them on elevations.
Plaster thickness
General: Conform to the Plaster thickness table.
Plaster thickness table
Plaster Application Upper limit of thickness (mm)
Single coat Multi-coat systems
systems
Base coat(s) Finish coat System
Cement render On smooth dense 12 10 4 13
base coats and concrete and
cement or masonry
gypsum finish On clay and concrete 15 13 4 16
coats masonry and other
backgrounds
Temperature
General: If the ambient temperature is ≤ 10ºC or ≥ 30ºC ensure that the temperature of mixes,
backgrounds and reinforcement are, at the time of application, ≥ 5ºC or ≤ 35ºC.
7.3 TOLERANCES
General
Tolerances: Conform to the Tolerances table.

PLASTERING FINISH
Tolerances table
1
Features : Verticality in 2000 mm 2
Soffits: Horizontality in 2000 mm 4
Walls: Verticality in 2000 mm 4
Walls: Flatness2 in 2000 mm 3
1
Features: Conspicuous horizontal or vertical lines including external corners, parapets, reveals,
heads, sills, movement control joints and mouldings.
2
Flatness: Measured under a straightedge laid in any direction on a plane surface.
7.4 COMPLETION
Cornices
General: Accurately cut and mitre corners. Match and align ornament. Unless required, or full lengths
are not available, do not make butt joints in the length of a cornice.
Installation: Butter edges, mitres and joins for the full length of the cornice with adhesive:
Mechanical fixing: If projection across ceiling ≥ 400 mm, provide additional mechanical fixing:
- Fixing centres: ≤ 600 mm.
Curing
General: Prevent premature or uneven drying out and protect from the sun and wind.
Keeping moist: If a proprietary curing agent is not used, keep the plaster moist as follows:
- Base coats and single coat systems: Keep continuously moist for 2 days and allow to dry for 5 days
before applying further plaster coats.
- Finish coats: Keep continuously moist for 2 days.
8 SELECTIONS
8.1 SCHEDULES
Plastering construction schedule
Property Type
A B C
Background material
Base coat(s)
Finish coat
Mix type or properties
This schedule lists typical properties of the finished work and the products and/or processes which you may need to specify by
defining values for the properties.
You can edit the body of the specification and/or you can provide further information here.
Values can be words or numbers with units. You can have a single column of values or you can have multiple columns to define
different 'types' which can then be referenced on schedules and drawings. Use the specification to define one or more types and
not to locate or enumerate them – use drawings and schedules to do that.
as required.

CEMENTITIOUS TOPPINGS FINISH
CEMENTITIOUS TOPPINGS
There is a Product Partner for this worksection. Click the logo to be redirected to their page .
This worksection is applicable to cement-based toppings on floors and steps. There is no relevant standard in Australia but
there are numerous guides available from BRANZ and the Cement and Concrete Association.
• Polymer cement and polymer modified cement toppings (see BS 8204-3).
• Resin or polymer seamless toppings.
• Self-levelling or self-smoothing underlays to floor finishes.
• Backgrounds other than cast in situ concrete.
• None.
• Show the location of this and other floor finishes on drawings to your office documentation policy.
• Use the specification to define the type(s) of toppings.
• Show the arrangement and details of joints should on the drawings.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
General: Provide cementitious toppings in conformance with Selections.

General
have no overlaps.
- Concrete in situ.

- Terrazzo in situ.
1.3 INTERPRETATIONS
Abbreviations
- BCS: Bonded – cement and sand.
- BFC: Bonded – fine concrete.
- FFC: Floating – fine concrete.
- MGR: Monolithic – granolithic.
- SFC: Separated – fine concrete.
Definitions
- Concrete class:
. Normal: Concrete which is specified primarily by a standard compressive strength grade.
. Special: Concrete which is specified to have certain properties or characteristics different from, or
additional to, those of normal-class concrete.
- Granolithic: Synonymous with monolithic.
- Movement control joints: Includes isolation joints, construction joints and crack control joints.
- Screed: Synonymous with topping.
- Substrate: The surfaces on which toppings are placed.
- Topping: Mixture of binders, aggregate and water applied to subfloors in a plastic state and dried
and cured to a hard surface.
- Topping function:
. Levelling: Topping placed to receive applied floor finishes.
. Wearing: Topping placed to act as the finished floor.
- Topping method:
. Bonded: Topping which is bonded to a hardened concrete subfloor from which laitance has been
removed and a bonding agent applied.
. Floating: Topping which is separated from a hardened concrete subfloor by a resilient layer.
. Monolithic: Topping placed on a plastic concrete subfloor so that a chemical bond is created
between the concrete and the topping.
. Separated: Topping which is separated from a concrete subfloor by a membrane.
1.4 SAMPLES AND SUBMISSIONS

Product conformity
- Declaration of conformity by an AS/NZS ISO 9001 quality management system certified supplier:
. Premixed concrete: Production assessment to AS 1379.
Product information
General: Submit product data as follows:
- Admixtures.
- Bonding products.
- Colouring products.
- Curing products.
- Sealing products.

- Slip-resistant products.
- Surface treatment products.
Product samples
General: Submit samples of products as follows:
- Colouring products.
- Movement control joint products.
- Slip-resistant products.
- Surface treatment products.
Prototypes
General: Prepare prototypes of each topping type:
- Size: 1200 x 2400 mm.
Vary size if required or delete.
1.5 INSPECTIONS AND TESTS

Construction inspections
General: Give notice to allow inspections as follows:
- Backgrounds ready for laying of toppings.
- Prototypes ready for inspection.
Add or delete as required.
Construction tests
General: Test and assess conformity of construction as follows:
- Flatness and levelness: If flatness and levelness properties are required:
This is a test of finished work and would only be for super-flat floors. Delete if ASTM E1155 requirements are not specified.
. Method: To ASTM E1155.
- In situ crushing resistance/soundness: If a soundness category is required:
BS 8204-3 describes a BRE screed tester which creates an indentation which can then be measured. This is a test of finished
work and would only be specified for special floors. Other properties that could be specified would be wear resistance and slip
resistance. Delete if BS 8204-1 requirements are not specified.
. Method: To BS 8204-1.
- Slip resistance: If a slip resistance grade is required:
If a slip resistance grade is required specify the requirements and, possibly, in situ testing.
. Method: To AS/NZS 4586 Appendix A.
. Occurrence: Five positions selected for each surface type at random.
1.6 TOLERANCES
General
Thickness:
These tolerances are intended to accommodate the combinations of concrete sub-floor variations and nominal thicknesses
specified.
- Thickness < 15 mm: ± 2 mm.
- Thickness ≥ 15 < 30 mm: ± 5 mm.
- Thickness ≥ 30 mm: ± 10 mm.
Flatness: Measured under a 3000 mm straightedge laid in any direction on a plane surface:
- Grade A: < 3 mm.
- Grade B: ≥ 3 < 5 mm.
- Grade C: ≥ 5 < 10 mm.
These tolerances are unlikely to be precise enough for superflat pavements required in high bay warehouses. See ACI 302.1R
and ASTM E1155 test method for determining Ff floor flatness and Fl floor levelness numbers. Note that Austroads AP-G63
specifies 3 mm for new highways and 5 mm for local roads so grade C is quite generous.

2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCTS
There is a wide range of products available. Only the most general descriptions are provided but these may be sufficient unless
specific products are selected.
Admixtures
The use of admixtures should not be permitted unless there is confidence that there will an improved outcome.
Aggregates
Coarse aggregate: To be nominal single size.
Fine aggregate: To be fine, sharp, well-graded sand with a low clay content and free from efflorescing
salts.
Aggregates have a significant impact on shrinkage. The sizes given are ranges.
Bonding products
General: To be proprietary products manufactured for bonding cement-based toppings to concrete
backgrounds.
Cement
- Type: GP.
Colouring products
General: To be proprietary products manufactured for colouring cement toppings.
Integral pigment proportion: ≤ 5% by mass of cement.
Concrete
- Class: Normal.
Curing products
General: To be proprietary products manufactured for use with cement-based toppings and with the
floor finish to be laid on the toppings.
Mixes
General: Provide concrete as follows or select mix proportions to the Mixes table.
- Air entrainment: ≤ 3%.
- Nominal coarse aggregate size: ≤ 0.3 x topping thickness.
- Slump: 80 mm.
- Standard strength grade: N25.
Water quantity: Use the minimum necessary to achieve full compaction and prevent excessive water
being brought to the surface during compaction.
Mixes table
Mix type Thickness (mm) Upper and lower limits of proportion
by mass (mm)
Cement Fine Coarse
aggregate aggregate
Bonded – cement and BCS 35 1 3 0
sand 1 4.5 0
Bonded – fine concrete BFC 40 1 3 1
1 3 2
Floating – fine concrete FFC 100 1 3 1
1 3 2
Monolithic – granolithic MGR Floors and treads: 25 1 2 1
Risers, strings and
skirtings: 13

Mix type Thickness (mm) Upper and lower limits of proportion

by mass (mm)
Cement Fine Coarse
aggregate aggregate
Separated – fine concrete SFC 70 1 3 1
1 3 2
This table, as an alternative to pre-mixed concrete to AS 1379, allows a degree of flexibility to select a mix to suit the conditions.
Can be edited to suit or left to stand.
Movement control joint products

General: Provide products manufactured for use with cement based toppings and accommodate the
anticipated movement of the backgrounds and/or the toppings.
Sealing products
General: Provide proprietary products manufactured for the sealing of movement joints in cement-
based toppings.
Slip-resistance products
General: Provide proprietary products manufactured to improve the wet-slip resistance of toppings.
- Silicon carbide granules:
. Granule size: ≥ 300 < 600 µm.
. Colour: Black.
- Silicon carbide two-part resin:
. Granule size: ≥ 300 µm.
. Colour: Black.
Surface treatment products
General: Provide proprietary products manufactured for use with cement- based toppings to change
the characteristics of the surface of the finished topping.
Reinforcement
- Mesh: SL62.
Water
3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
Backgrounds
General: Ensure backgrounds have:
- Any deposit which may impair adhesion of monolithic or bonded toppings cleaned off.
- Excessive projections hacked off and voids and hollows filled with a mix not stronger than the
background nor weaker than the topping.
- Hardened concrete roughened by scabbling or the like to remove 2 mm of the laitance and expose
the aggregate.
Bonded toppings
General: Before laying topping wash the subfloor with water and use a bonding product or treat as
follows:
- Keep wet for ≥ 2 hours.
- Remove surplus water and brush on neat cement or a clean slurry of cement and water.
- Place the topping while the slurry is wet.

3.2 APPLICATION
Laying
General: Spread the mix and compact. Strike off, consolidate and level surfaces to finished levels.
Monolithic toppings: Lay while concrete subfloor is plastic and surface water is no longer visible.
Toppings over 50 mm thick:
- Lay in two layers of equal thickness.
- Place a layer of reinforcement between the layers of toppings. Lap reinforcement 100 mm and tie.
Do not create four way laps.
Floating and trowelling
Machine float finish:
- After levelling, consolidate the surface using a machine float.
- Cut and fill and refloat immediately to a uniform, smooth, granular texture.
- Hand float in locations inaccessible to the machine float.
. Flatness: Grade B.
Steel trowel finish: After machine floating finish as follows:
- Use power trowels to produce a smooth surface relatively free from defects.
- When the surface has hardened sufficiently, use steel hand trowels to produce the final
consolidated finish free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance.
. Flatness: Grade A.
Wood float finish: After machine floating finish as follows:
- Use wood or plastic hand floats to produce the final consolidated finish free of float marks and
uniform in texture and appearance.
. Flatness: Grade A.
Floor finish dividers
General: Finish cementitious toppings at junctions with differing floor finishes with a corrosion resistant
metal dividing strip suitable fixed to the background, with top edge flush to the finished floor. If
changes of floor finish occur at doorways make the junction directly below the closed door.
Monolithic toppings
Margins: Integrally form margins in the topping material.
Coved skirtings: Form coves in the topping material, and finish the top to a neatly struck line. Mitre
internal and external angles.
. Nosing: Bullnose to 10 mm radius.
This is a default only, in the absence of further consideration. Joints should be detailed and the arrangement shown on the
drawings.
General: Provide movement control joints to divide toppings into bays as follows
- Form in situ using square edge steel forms and trowelling a 3 mm radius to edges.
- Form a groove, extending at least one quarter the depth of the section, either by using a grooving
tool, by sawing, or by inserting a premoulded strip.
- Install a movement control joint product.
Bay sizes:
- Area: ≤ 15 m2.
- Length to width ratio: ≤ 1:1.5.
Joints in background: Provide movement control joints in toppings to coincide with joints in the
background.
Slip-resistance treatment
Stair treads: Form two grooves and fill with a silicon carbide two-part resin.
- Dimensions: 10 mm deep, 15 mm wide, length ≥ width of tread less 100 mm.
- Position:
. First groove: Centre 35 mm from tread nose.

. Second groove: Centre 60 mm from step nose.

Plane surfaces: Apply silicon carbide granules after floating and before the topping surface has set,
and trowel into the surface so that the granules remain exposed.
- Application rate: 1 kg/m2 evenly distributed.
Surface colouring
General: Apply the colouring product after floating and before the topping surface has set and trowel
into the surface so that it is even in colour.
Surface treatment
General: Apply the surface treatment after floating and before the topping surface has set.
Temperature
General: If the ambient temperature is ≤ 10ºC or ≥ 30ºC ensure that the temperature of mixes,
backgrounds and reinforcement are, at the time of application, ≥ 5ºC or ≤ 35ºC.
Weather bars
General: Provide a corrosion resistant metal weather bar under hinged external doors. Locate under
the centres of closed doors.
3.3 COMPLETION
Curing
General: Prevent premature or uneven drying out and protect from the sun and wind.
Curing: Use a curing product or, as soon as it has set sufficiently, keep the toppings moist by covering
with polyethylene film for ≥ seven days.
Sealing joints
General: If required, seal joints as follows:
- Formed joints ≤ 25 mm deep: With filler and bond-breaker.
- Sawn joints: Full depth of cut.
Surface treatment
General: If required:
- Grind and seal: Wood float finish and after curing for ≥ 14 days grind to remove the upper 2 mm of
topping surface and apply the surface treatment product.
- Polish and seal: Steel-float finish and after curing for ≥ 14 days apply the surface treatment product.
4 SELECTIONS
4.1 SCHEDULES
Cementitious toppings construction schedule
Property Type
A B C
Thickness
Topping function
Topping method
Flatness
Levelness
Slip resistance
Crushing resistance/soundness
This table lists typical properties of the finished work and the products and/or processes which you may need to specify by
defining values for the properties.
You can edit the body of the specification and/or you can provide further information here.

Values can be words or numbers with units. You can have a single column of values or you can have multiple columns to define
different 'types' which can then be referenced on schedules and drawings. Use the specification to define one or more types and
not to locate or enumerate them – use drawings and schedules to do that.
as required.

TERRAZZO – IN SITU FINISH
TERRAZZO – IN SITU
This worksection specifies in situ cementitious and resinous terrazzo floor systems. It was originally compiled with the
Australian Stone and Terrazzo Association. Particular requirements such as type of terrazzo, materials, underbeds, bonding and
precast details may be shown on the drawings or incorporated in the specification. There is no relevant standard.
• Terrazzo – precast for terrazzo cubicle partitions and precast terrazzo units including stairs and door thresholds.
• Stone and terrazzo tiling for terrazzo floor tiling.
• None.
• The layout of finishes and the location of movement joints are assumed to be shown on drawings.
5 GENERAL
5.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
General: Provide in situ terrazzo topping to the Selections.

General
have no overlaps.
- Concrete in situ.

• Terrazzo precast.
5.3 INTERPRETATION
Definitions
- Terrazzo: Mixtures of binders, aggregates, and water; dried, cured and ground to expose the
aggregate; and sealed and polished to provide a finished surface.
- Cement matrix terrazzo: Facing aggregate in a cement based matrix.
- Resin terrazzo: Facing aggregate in a resin matrix.
- Substrate: The surface to which the terrazzo is to be applied.
5.4 INSPECTION
Notice
- Completion of substrate preparation.
- Separation layer in place.
- Items to be embedded, including heating coils, reinforcement, dividing strips, in place.
- Underbed placed and surfaced to receive the topping.
- Topping placed and surfaced before finishing.
- Completion of finishing.
- Movement joints formed and ready for filling with joint filler.
5.5 SUBMISSIONS
Samples
The only satisfactory way of specifying terrazzo surface colours, patterns and finishes is by reference to approved samples.
25 kg samples are required for 10 mm nominal size aggregate if it is to be tested to AS 1141. 10 kg samples are required for
fine aggregate if it is to be tested to AS 1141.
- Terrazzo: Three sample panels, each at least 300 mm x 300 mm, of every type of surface colour,
pattern and finish specified, showing the extremes of the range.
- Facing aggregate: For each surface type, a 25 kg sample of the natural stone aggregate to be used
in the facing layers, showing the range of aggregate size.
- Fine aggregate: For each surface type, a 10 kg sample of the sand (if any) to be used in the facing
layers.
- Cement: For each surface type, a 1 kg sample of the cement or cement blend to be used in the
facing layers.
- Divider strip: A 150 mm length of each type of section proposed.
- Movement joints: A 150 mm length of the proposed joint filler.
- Proprietary carborundum anti-slip strips: A 150 mm strip.
See the Commentary on slip resistance.
Subcontractor
Shop drawings
General: Submit shop drawings of the terrazzo work showing relevant details, including the following,
if applicable:

- Method of bedding or attachment to the base.

- Thickness of beds, underbeds and toppings.
- Separation layer type.
- Reinforcement of underbed.
- Divider strips, type and location.
- Movement joints and jointing material.
5.6 TOLERANCES
General
Thickness:
- Thickness < 15 mm: ± 2 mm.
- Thickness ≥ 15 < 30 mm: ± 5 mm.
- Thickness ≥ 30 mm: ± 10 mm.
Flatness: Measured under a 3000 mm straightedge laid in any direction on a plane surface:
- Grade A: < 3 mm.
- Grade B: ≥ 3 < 5 mm.
- Grade C: ≥ 5 < 10 mm.
These tolerances are intended to accommodate the combinations of concrete sub-floor variations and nominal thicknesses
specified. They are unlikely to be precise enough for superflat pavements required in high bay warehouses. See ACI 302-1R
and ASTM E1155 test method for determining Ff floor flatness and Fl floor levelness numbers. Note that Austroads (AP-G63)
specifies 3 mm for new highways and 5 mm for local roads so grade C is quite generous.
6 PRODUCTS
6.1 CEMENT MATRIX TERRAZZO

Water
General: Free from matter harmful to terrazzo or to items embedded in it or in contact with it.
Cement
Type to AS 3972: GP.
Colour: Grey or white, or a blend of grey and white, as required by the surface colour.
Aggregates
See AS 2758.1 clause 14 on impurities in aggregates.
Sand: Fine aggregate.
Coarse aggregate (in underbeds and cores): Dense natural rock aggregate.
Facing aggregate: Dense natural rock aggregate.
- Characteristics: Natural stone, angular in shape, as distinct from elongated or flaky, graded within
the required sizes, free from dust, and free from deleterious material.
- Aggregate type: Marble.
Calcareous rocks other than marble, capable of taking a polish and being suitable for terrazzo finishes, include onyx, travertine
and serpentine. Glass is often added. Edit as required.
Pigments
BS EN 12878 covers pigments for the colouring of cement and lime based materials.
General: Resistant to lime bloom and efflorescence.
Pigment proportion: ≤ 5% by weight of cement.
Varies. Follow manufacturers’ recommendations or test for strength.
Reinforcement
See AS 3600 clause 19.2 on materials and construction requirements for reinforcing steel.

Protective coating: Galvanized.

Reinforcement supports: Purpose-made concrete or plastic reinforcement supports, for supports which
will be visible on the surface of the terrazzo in its final position.
Divider strips
Preformed strip: A proprietary expansion joint consisting of a neoprene filler sandwiched between
plates with lugs or ribs for mechanical keying of depth appropriate to the topping thickness and such
that the strip is anchored firmly in the underbed and set flush with the finished surface.
Material: >
Colour: >
e.g. Brass, Aluminium, stainless steel.
Sealant joint material
General: Two-pack self-levelling non-hardening mould resistant, one-part silicone or polyurethane
sealant, shore hardness > 35 applied over a backing rod of compressible closed cell polyethylene
foam with a bond-breaking surface. Finish flush with the tile surface.
Coved divider strips
General: Select from the following:
- Provide matching divider strips formed to the cove radius, and insert in the cove to coincide with the
divider strips in the adjoining plane surfaces.
- Saw cut and infill with silicon sealant.
Cement matrix terrazzo mix
Mix proportions (by weight): 4 cement:9 facing aggregate.
Water:cement ratio: 18 L water:40 kg cement.
6.2 RESIN TERRAZZO

Compatibility
General: Ensure the compatibility of the resin terrazzo materials with the grout, sealer, and primer.
Colouring material
General: Provide colouring material which is permanent, stable, compatible with the matrix, and
factory-dispersed into the resin by the manufacturer.
Grout
General: Resinous material.
Primer
General: Prime the substrate before installing the resin terrazzo.
Divider strips
General: A proprietary neoprene “T” section.
Resin terrazzo is widely recommended for use in areas where food acids, chemicals and the like are in contact with floor
surfaces. Avoid the use of metal (especially brass) divider strips.
7 EXECUTION
7.1 SUBSTRATE PREPARATION

Cleaning
General: Remove deleterious materials which could adversely affect adhesion. Leave the surface
dust-free and clean. If removal is not possible, render harmless using remedial treatment.
Deleterious materials include grease, oil, paint, loose material, clay, soil, retarders, curing or parting agents, or any surface
treatment or additive.
Substrates for adhesives
General: Ensure that substrates which will receive adhesives are dry, with a moisture content below
6%. Cure concrete substrates before application.

Preparation for bonding

General: Prepare the substrate either by roughening the surface after screeding, or by removing the
hardened surface to a depth of at least 2 mm. Expose the aggregate and leave a clean, firm granular
surface for the permanent adhesion of the finish.
Non-horizontal substrates: To vertical or steeply sloping surfaces or soffits, securely fix a non-
corrosive steel mesh to the substrate.
Resin terrazzo
General: Finish the substrate using a steel float.
7.2 SEPARATION LAYER

Delete this clause if a vapour barrier is specified that will also act as a separation layer. A separation layer is recommended if
there is a risk of movement in the substrate or a risk of differential shrinkage between the terrazzo and the substrate.
Bitumen emulsion
Grade: Slow-setting grade ASS/170-60 or CSS/170-60.
Application: Ensure that the substrate is free of surface irregularities which could cause mechanical
bonding of the terrazzo. Brush the emulsion on over the substrate to a thick paint consistency.
7.3 VAPOUR BARRIER

If the substrate slab is subject to damp, a vapour barrier will be necessary. The bituminous emulsion separation layer may be
sufficient; if not consider membranes as specified in the Waterproofing worksection. The Terrazzo toppings schedule provides
for selecting the membrane. These can also act as separation layers. Delete if not required.
General
General: If the substrate slab is subject to damp, provide a vapour barrier consisting of one of the
following:
- Asphalt tanking membrane: A proprietary waterproofing membrane at least 5 mm thick, of
bituminoid asphalt materials, reinforced with fabric and a layer of corrosion-resistant metal foil, laid
generally to AS CA55.
- Butyl rubber membrane: A proprietary waterproofing membrane of black butyl rubber at least
1.5 mm thick, adhesive fixed.
7.4 UNDERBEDS
Mix proportions (by volume)
Underbed ≤ 40 mm thick: 1 cement:4 sand.
Underbed > 40 mm thick: 1 cement:2 sand:3 coarse aggregate, graded up to 13 mm.
Slump
General: ≤ 60 mm maximum.
Minimum thickness
Placed over separation layer: 40 mm.
Bonded: 20 mm.
Bonded, heating coils embedded: 60 mm.
Maximum thickness
General: 75 mm.
The minimum and maximum thicknesses specified are those recommended by the Stone and Terrazzo Association of NSW. If
particular thicknesses are required specify them here.
Reinforcement
General: Provide reinforcement for underbeds ≥ 40 mm thick as follows:
- Type: Galvanized.
- Mesh size: >
Select mesh to suit the underbed thickness.

7.5 PLACING UNDERBEDS

Method of placement >
e.g. Bonded or On separation layer.
The bonded method may be used to reduce the thickness of the terrazzo installation if the foregoing risks of dampness do not
exist. It is also recommended for use if heating coils are to be embedded in the underbed.
Placing
General: Place the underbed over the prepared surface or separation layer and float to the required
levels or slopes within 3 hours of placing.
Cementitious matrix underbeds: Roughen the surface to provide a key for the terrazzo topping.
Resin matrix underbeds: Steel float.
Bonded method
Omit if not bonded.
General: Thoroughly dampen the surface of the substrate and leave it free of standing water.
Immediately before placing, scrub a coat of neat cement grout into the surface, or apply a proprietary
adhesive.
Reinforcement
General: Place reinforcement 13 mm above the bottom of the underbed, or above heating coils if
installed. Lap joints and tie with galvanized wire. Terminate reinforcement at movement joints.
Setting divider strips
General: Set divider strips accurately and firmly to the required locations and levels, with epoxy
mortar.
7.6 MIXING
In situ cement-matrix terrazzo
General: Manufacture by volume-batching or weigh-batching the dry ingredients, machine mixing with
the minimum water consistent with workability, laying or casting, rolling to compact and to remove
excess water, grinding, grouting, polishing and curing.
7.7 PLACING TOPPING

Cementitious terrazzo toppings
On underbed: Place the topping as soon as possible after placing the underbed. Immediately before
placing, scrub a coat of neat cement grout, of the same cement type as the topping, into the surface.
Place the topping between the divider strips and screed level.
Monolithic placing: As soon as the surface water has disappeared from the newly placed concrete
substrate, scrub a coat of neat cement grout, of the same cement type as the topping, into the surface.
Set the divider strips into the substrate accurately, firmly, and to the required levels, and make good
as necessary to the substrate surface. Place the topping between the divider strips while the substrate
is still “green”, and screed level.
“No underbed” monolithic placing is not generally recommended for cementitious toppings unless the terrazzo contractor also
places the substrate. Edit alternatives as required.
Finishing: Seed the surface with facing aggregate, matching that of the mix and trowel in. Roll using
heavy rollers until excess water has been extracted. Trowel to a uniform surface revealing the line of
the divider strips.
Resin matrix toppings
General: Place resin terrazzo topping in the resin manufacturer’s recommended manner.
It is quite customary to place resin matrix terrazzo directly on the substrate, as long as there is no risk of hydrostatic pressure.
Method of placement: >
e.g. “On underbed”, or “Monolithic”.
Topping
Finished thickness (mm): >
e.g. (in situ cementitious terrazzo): “16 mm minimum”, (resin matrix terrazzo): “6 mm”.

7.8 FALLS AND LEVELS

General
General: Grade terrazzo floors to even falls where required. Otherwise, lay level.
Finished levels: Maintain finished floor levels without step or break at changes of floor finish including
carpet.
Flatness: Deviation of the finished surface under a 3 m straightedge laid in any direction on an area of
uniform grade: ≤ 3 mm.
Substrate levels: Grade or step the surface of the substrate slab to maintain the minimum thickness of
terrazzo underbed and finishes. Limit the ratio of maximum to minimum underbed thickness to 3:2.
7.9 CURING
If heating coils are incorporated in the underbed, they should not be filled with heated water until at least 28 days after
commencement of curing.
Cementitious surfaces
Curing: Keep the cementitious surfaces, including underbeds, toppings and grouting, in a moist
condition for at least 7 days from the time of placing or until the commencement of the next process.
Curing agents: Do not use proprietary agents.
Resin terrazzo
General: Do not apply chemical curing agents to the substrates of resin terrazzo toppings.
Or obtain the approval of the resin manufacturer, if chemical curing agents are proposed.
7.10 FINISHING
Cementitious toppings
Grinding: At least 3 days after placing the topping, machine grind the surface first using coarse grit,
and then immediately afterwards using a fine grit. Keep the surface wet during grinding. Prevent water
from carrying grinding products into the drainage system.
Grouting: Remove grinding dust and fines using water and rinse the surface thoroughly using clean
water. Grout the wet surface with cement to match the matrix colour. Fill voids. Cure the grout until
stoning commences.
Stoning: At least 3 days after grouting, machine grind using fine grit and hand stoning where
necessary until the surface shows at least 75% of facing aggregate.
Cleaning: Immediately upon completion of stoning, wash the surface using mild detergent soap or a
solution of non-discolouring neutral cleaner and rinse.
Sealing: As soon as the surface is dry, apply a penetrating sealer, free from harmful ingredients,
specially prepared for terrazzo.
Resin matrix terrazzo
General: Grind and polish in the recommended manner, including grouting and sealing.
7.11 MOVEMENT JOINTS

Sometimes called expansion joints. Their purpose is to accommodate movement in the tiles or the substrate, or both. Movement
may be caused by tile growth, substrate shrinkage, thermal expansion and contraction, and the like. See also the Commentary
on this topic.
General
- Location:
. Around the perimeter of the floor.
. To divide large tiled areas into bays, maximum 5 m wide, maximum 16 m2.
. At changes in substrate.
Depth of joint: Right through to the substrate.
Sealant width: 6 – 25 mm.
Location
Divider strip:
- Joint side-plate
material
- Neoprene colour
- Width
- Fixing
- Product
- Material
- Insert colour
Sealant:
- Type
- Colour
Width (mm)

Divider strip:
Sealant:
7.12 JOINT ACCESSORIES

General: Finish tiled floors at junctions with differing floor finishes with a corrosion resistant metal
dividing strip suitably fixed to the substrate, with top edge flush with the finished floor. Where changes
of floor finish occur at doorways make the junction directly below the closed door.
Type: >

Material: >
Weather bars
Type: >
Material: >
Finish: >
Dimensions: >
Fixing: >
7.13 COMPLETION
Protection
General: Protect finished work from damage during building operations.
Maintenance manual
General: On or before practical completion, submit a manual of recommendations on the care and
cleaning of the installed terrazzo, including published instructions for the maintenance of the terrazzo
finishes.
8 SELECTIONS
8.1 SCHEDULES
Terrazzo toppings schedule
Designation T1 T2 T3
Terrazzo type
Location
Surface:
- Colour
- Pattern
- Finish
Facing aggregate:
- Type
- Size(s) (mm)
- Resin matrix
Pigments:
- Type
- Proportions
Non-horizontal substrate:
- Mesh material
- Mesh size (mm)
- Separation layer type
- Vapour barrier type
If there is more than one type of terrazzo in the project, prepare a separate schedule for each one.
Terrazzo type: e.g. “In situ cementitious terrazzo” or “In situ resin terrazzo”.
Location: Specify the location if not shown on the drawings or in a finishes schedule.
Surface:
• Finish: e.g. “To approved sample”; otherwise describe here.

Facing aggregate:
• Size(s): Delete if the size range is controlled by approved samples. According to the Stone and Terrazzo Association of
NSW, producers grade marble chips in accordance with the following table:
Grade Sizes (mm)
00 0-2
0 2-3
1 3-6
2 6 - 10
3 10 - 13
4 13 - 16
5 16 - 20
6 20 - 22
7 22 - 25
8 25 - 30
A common mix is equal parts of grades 1 and 2. Larger sizes make for more durable paving.
Pigments: Consult manufacturers for types and proportions.
Non-horizontal substrate:
• Mesh material: and Mesh size: e.g. “Stainless steel, 200 x 200 mm welded mesh, 3 mm diameter wires”.
• Separation layer type: Normally bituminous emulsion. Delete if not required.
• Vapour barrier type: e.g. “Asphalt tanking membrane”, “Butyl rubber membrane”. The bituminous emulsion separation layer
may be sufficient. Delete if the substrate is damp-proofed by other means. For in situ resin terrazzo delete this item if
bonding the topping directly to the substrate.

WATERPROOFING – WET AREAS FINISH
WATERPROOFING – WET AREAS
This worksection is applicable to membrane applications to wet areas and is written with reference to AS 3740 and AS/NZS
4858.
• Cementitious toppings.
• Ceramic tiling.
an applicable worksection. For example
• Swimming pools.
• Ceramic tiling.
• Locate extent of membrane and relevant details on the drawings.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
General: Provide wet area waterproofing systems which:
- Are graded to floor wastes to dispose of water without ponding.
- Prevent moisture entering the substrate or adjacent areas.
The following are characteristics of the product and should be considered when making selections:
• Able to accommodate anticipated environmental conditions.
• Able to remain serviceable after material shrinkage and loss of elastic properties.
• Resistant to traffic and falling objects.
• Chemically compatible with the surrounding building materials.

General

have no overlaps.
>
• Cementitious topping.
• Terrazzo – in situ.
• Ceramic tiling.
1.3 STANDARDS
Wet areas
AS 3740 is intended to apply to residential buildings but notes, in clause 1.1 Scope that it may apply to other buildings where
the use of wet areas is similar to that in residential buildings. The design requirements, Section 2, nominate the extent and
detailing of waterproofing for typical situations. Nonetheless it is recommended that project specific details be provided to
eliminate any conflict in interpretation. Schedule shower bases in the Wastewater worksection – the standard covers acrylic,
fibreglass and stainless steel.
1.4 INTERPRETATIONS
Definitions
- Bond breaker: A system preventing the membrane bonding to the substrate, bedding or lining.
- Membranes: Impervious barriers to liquid water which may be:
. Installed below floor finishes.
. Installed behind the wall sheeting or render and termed External.
. Installed to the face of the wall sheeting or render and termed Internal.
. Liquid applied in liquid or gel form and air cured to form a seamless film.
. Sheet in sheet form with joints lapped and sealed.
- Waterproof (WP): The property of a material that does not allow moisture to penetrate through it.
- Waterproofing systems: Combinations of membranes, flashings, drainage and accessories which
form waterproof barriers and which may be:
. Loose-laid.
. Bonded to backgrounds.
- Water resistant (WR): The property of a material that restricts moisture movement and will not
degrade under conditions of moisture.
- Wet area: An area within a building supplied with a floor waste.
1.5 INSPECTION
Notice
- Substrate preparation completed.
- Secondary layers preparation completed.
- Before membranes are covered up or concealed.

1.6 SUBMISSIONS
Shop drawings
Submit shop drawings showing:
- Junctions with vertical surfaces and upstands.
- Junctions at perimeters.
- Drainage details.
- Movement control joints.
- Flashings.
- Penetrations.
- Corners.
- Terminations and connections.
Delete if appropriate project specific detailing is provided.
Execution records
Placing records: Photographically record the application of membranes and information as follows:
- Date.
- Portion of work.
- Background preparation.
- If exposed to the elements at the time of application, weather during application and curing.
- Protection provided from traffic and weather, if exposed.
For large or complex projects consider adding the following requirement:
• “Personnel: Employ a suitably qualified person to monitor the placing and protection of the membrane and prepare a daily
report.”
Samples
General: Submit 300 x 300 mm samples of each type of membrane.
Products documentation
General: Submit copies of product manufacturers:
- Installation instructions.
- Material safety data sheets (MSDS).
- Type tests certificates verifying conformance to AS/NZS 4858.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCTS
Membranes
AS/NZS 4858 is cited in AS 3740 which is cited in the BCA.
Membrane systems
General: To be a proprietary membrane systems having one of the following stating that the system is
suitable for the intended external waterproofing, as follows:
- A current Australian Building Product and Systems Certification Scheme certificate issued by ABCB
(Australian Building Codes Board).
- A current appraisal report issued by either CSIRO Building Products and Systems Appraisals.
- A current BRANZ report.
Shower tray
General: Purpose-made jointless shower tray, with wall upstands at least 50 mm higher than the hob
upstands. Set hob masonry on the inside of the tray hob upstands.
PVC, copper, stainless steel. See CSIRO Appraisal 185, for example. Delete if an external shower base is scheduled in
Sanitary fixtures.

3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
General
Prepare backgrounds as follows:
- Fill all cracks in backgrounds wider than 1.5 mm with a filler compatible with the membrane system.
- Fill voids and hollows in concrete backgrounds with a concrete mix not stronger than the
background.
- Remove excessive projections.
- Remove deleterious and loose material.
- Leave the surface clean and dust free.
Moisture content
Concrete backgrounds: Cure for > 21 days.
Moisture content: Verify that the moisture content of the background is compatible with the water
vapour transmission rate of the membrane system by testing to AS/NZS 2455 Appendix B.
- Hygrometer test: Seal a hygrometer to the background for > 16 hours and measure the relative
humidity of the air between the instrument and the slab.
- Electrical resistance test: Connect a resistance meter to the slab and read the moisture content.
Falls
General: Verify that falls in backgrounds are < 1.5°.
Joints and fillets
Internal corners: Provide 45° fillets.
External corners: Round or arris edges.
Movement control joints: Prepare all background joints to suit the membrane system.
Priming
General: If required, prime the backgrounds with compatible primers to ensure adhesion of membrane
systems.
3.2 APPLICATION
Protection
General: Protect membrane from damage during installation and for the period after installation until
the membrane achieves its service characteristics that resist damage.
Drains
Floor wastes: Turn membrane down onto the floor waste puddle flanges, and adhere.
Hobs
General: Extend membrane over the hob and into the room at least 50 mm. For hobless showers
extend 1800 mm into the room.
Sheet joints
Bituminous sheet membranes:
- Side laps > 50 mm.
- End laps > 100 mm.
Synthetic rubber membranes:
- Factory–vulcanized laps > 40 mm.
- Field side laps > 50 mm for side laps.
- Field end-laps > 100 mm for end laps.
PVC membranes:
- Factory welded laps > 30 mm.
- Field–welded laps.
- If used over insulation boards > 100 mm.
- Other instances > 75 mm overlaps in other instances.

Curing of liquid applied systems

General: To the manufacturers instructions.
Curing: Allow membrane to fully cure before tiling.
Acrylic membranes must be allowed to cure (often 7 days) before tiling over, otherwise they will probably fail. Ensure
compliance with the manufacturers instruction.
General: Locate over movement control joints in the substructure.
Fillets and bond breakers: If movement between substrates is expected, provide of sufficient
dimension to allow the membrane to accommodate the movement.
Bonded membranes: Carry movement joints in the substrate through to and into the surface finish.
Membrane terminations
Edge protection: Provide > 150 mm upturns.
Anchoring: Secure sheet membranes along the top edge.
Edge protection: Protect edges of the membrane.
Waterproofing above terminations: Waterproof the structure above the termination to prevent moisture
entry behind the membrane using tiler’s angle and finish overlaps.
Membrane vertical penetrations
Pipes, ducts, and vents: Provide separate sleeves for all pipes, ducts, and vents and have fixed to the
substrate.
Membrane horizontal penetrations
Sleeves: Provide a flexible flange for all penetrations, bonded to the penetration and to the membrane.
Membrane about doors and windows
General: Install membrane prior to the fixing of door or window frames.
Overlaying finishes on membranes
Compatibility: If a membrane is to be overlayed with another system such as tiles, pavers, provide an
overlaying system that is compatible with and not cause damage to the membrane.
Bonded or partially bonded systems: If the topping or bedding mortar requires to be bonded to the
membrane, provide sufficient movement joints in the topping or bedding mortar to reduce the
movement over the membrane.
Flood test
Application: Perform a flood test prior to the installation of surface finishes.
Set-up:
- Measure for dryness the wall/floor junction of adjacent spaces the slab soffit below using the
hygrometer test method.
- Record the result for each area.
- Dam the doorway(s) and seal floor wastes and drainage outlets to allow 50 mm water level.
- Fill space with clean water and leave overnight.
Evaluation:
- Make a visual inspection of the wall/floor junction of adjacent spaces and of the slab soffit below for
obvious water or moisture.
- Test the same areas for dryness using the hygrometer test method, and compare the results to the
measurements taken prior to flooding.
Compliance:
- Evidence of water from the visual test: Failure.
- No visual evidence of water: Proceed with the hygrometer test.
- Increase in test results before and after flooding: Failure.
A flood test is recommended where the wet area is over a habitable space particularly that of another occupant. Delete if not
required.
Specify here the approval criteria set up for the project. If necessary nominate a hold point.

4 SELECTIONS
4.1 SYSTEMS
Seamless wet area membranes Type and/or location
A B C
Proprietary system
Material type
CSIRO moving joint test
Tensile stress at break (MPa)
Tensile strain (elongation at the break) %
Priming
Number of coats
Reinforcement
Base layer
Top layer
Method of application
Application rate/coat (l/m2)
Dry film thickness (total) (mm)

can be deleted.
Material type: e.g. “Butyl”, “Acrylic polymer”, “Coal tar modified polyurethane”. May be fabric reinforced.
Method of application: e.g. “Spray”, “Roller”.
Sheet membrane systems
Single layer system Type and/or location
A B C
Proprietary system
Sheet type
Sheet thickness (mm)
Base weight (kg/m2)
CSIRO moving joint test
Tensile stress at break (MPa)
Tensile strain (elongation at the break) %
Priming
Bonding agent
Method of applying
can be deleted.

Sheet type: e.g. “Polymeric” (EPDM, butyl, etc.), “Polymer modified bitumen”.
Method of applying: e.g. “Proprietary adhesive”, “Heat weld”.
Shower tray
Product
Material
Dimensions

CERAMIC TILING FINISH
CERAMIC TILING
This worksection is applicable to floor and wall ceramic tiling. Tiles may be specified by manufacturer’s brand name or by
generic type, plus essential characteristics such as size, colour, surface, edge type etc. Bedding, grouting, fixing and jointing
requirements should also be specified. There is no central standard, though the BS 6431 series is used for the tiles themselves.
• Segmental pavers – mortar bed, or Segmental pavers – sand bed for brick, stone and concrete pavers.
• Stone cladding for interior and exterior stone cladding or facing.
• Stone and terrazzo tiling for stone and manufactured stone tiling and terrazzo tiling.
• External tiling directly exposed to weather.
• Tiling subject to permanent immersion e.g. swimming pools.
• None.
substrates
• Use the Flooring and decking worksection for framed substrates
• Use the Waterproofing – wet areas worksection for waterproofing wet areas.
• Layout, set-out point, tiling pattern and movement joints to your office documentation policy.
For bathrooms generally, see SAA HB52. Ceramic tile is deemed to comply with the BCA requirements for fire hazard indices
(see BCA Specification C1.10).
The tiling system selected should be suitable for substrate deflections as follows:
• Floors span > 3.0 m: < 1:480.
• Floors spans < 3.0 m: < 1:360.
• Walls: < 1:360.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
General: Provide tiling systems to walls, floors and other substrates as follows and/or to the
Selections:
- Set out with joints accurately aligned in both directions and wall tiling joints level and plum.
adjacent areas.
Ceramic tiles should be selected to be resistant to impacts expected in use and to be slip resistant.

General
have no overlaps.
- Waterproofing – wet areas for wet area membranes.
• Concrete finishes, for substrate finish.
• Lining, for substrate installation.
• Plastering, for substrate application.
1.3 INTERPRETATION
Definitions
- Adhesives:
. Dispersion ( D): Adhesives in which the binders are in the form of aqueous polymer dispersion
. Reaction resin ( R): Adhesives in which in the binders are synthetic resins with mineral fillers and
The adhesive definitions are based on AS 4992.1(Int).
- Substrates: The surfaces on which tiles are bedded.
generally over 20 mm thick used as coverings for floors and supported over continuous substrates.
- Tiles: Thin slabs made from clays and/or other inorganic raw materials used generally as coverings
for floors and walls and adhered to continuous supporting substrates.
. Cementitious: Cement based tile products.
. Dry-pressed: Tiles made from a finely milled body mixture and shaped in moulds at high
pressure. Also known as Type B.
. Extruded: Tiles whose body is shaped in the plastic state in an extruder then cut to size. Also
known as Type A.
The tile definitions are based on AS 4662. The standard tabulates shape types by four water absorption groups.
- Wet areas: Areas within buildings with water supply and drainage systems.
- Acoustic underlay: A resilient underlay providing acoustic isolation.

1.4 INSPECTION
Notice
1.5 SUBMISSIONS
Samples
General: Submit labelled samples of tiles, including fittings, accessories, grout and sealants,
illustrating the range of variation in colour and finish.
grading is necessary . Where tiles and accessories are specified as proprietary items use this clause as a means of
confirmation.
Sample panels
General: Prepare a sample panel of each type of tiling system as follows:
- Size: > 2 m2.
- Obtain approval.
- Preserve the panel until related work is complete.
Quality: The sample panel shall be the benchmark of quality of execution for the project.
For large projects consider asking for a prototype room comprising the complete wall and floor tiling and nominate an approval
process.
Execution
Margins: If it appears that variations in joint widths or overall dimensions will avoid cut tiles, submit a
proposal.
1.6 TESTS
General
General: Submit type tests as follows:
- Slip resistance to AS/NZS 4586: >
insulation field test option for verification of conformance with the BCA is adopted, nominate tests as determined under
AS ISO 717.2
Submit a report of flood tests conducted on site as noted in Waterproofing – wet areas.
Tiling should not proceed without a successful flood test of wet area membranes. A method is suggested in the Commentary
and should be specified in Waterproofing – wet areas . Delete if not required.

Assessment
. Marking and Classification of tiles with regard to water absorption and shaping to AS 4662.
. Marking and Classification of tile adhesive to AS 4992.1(Int).

. Weighted normalised impact sound pressure level to AS ISO 717.2 as measured for the acoustic
underlay as part of the entire tiling system.
1.8 TOLERANCES
Completed tiling
Tolerances table
Alignment: Deviation of the finished tiles from a 3 m straight edge laid < 3 mm
against any joints
Flatness: Deviation of any plane surface under a 3 m straight edge laid < 3 mm
in any direction on an area of uniform grade
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 TILES AND ACCESSORIES

Tiles
Many tiles available in Australia may not conform to AS 4662. It tabulates shape types by four water absorption groups. Delete
this reference and the requirement under Product conformity if you do not expect the tiles selected to conform to the standard.
Tactile ground surface indicators: To AS/NZS 1428.4.
Coves, nosings and skirtings: To be matching stop-end and internal and external angle tiles moulded
for that purpose.
Exposed edges: To be purpose-made border tiles with the exposed edge (whether round, square or
cushion) glazed to match the tile face. If such tiles are not available, mitre tiles on external corners.
Accessories
General: Provide tile accessories to the Accessories schedule which match the composition, colour
and finish of the surrounding tiles.
Coves, nosings and skirtings
General: Provide matching stop ends and internal and external angle tiles moulded for that purpose.
Accessories schedule
Location
Type
Size (mm)
Colour
List accessories such as glazed round edge tiles, step treads to stairs, landings, and thresholds, sills, copings and tile vents
over bath vents.
2.2 ADHESIVES
General
Standard: To AS 2358 or AS 4992.1(Int).
Type
General: Provide adhesives to the Wall tiling schedule and to the Floor tiling schedule and
compatible with the materials and surfaces to be adhered.

conditions.
2.3 MORTAR
Materials
Lime: To AS 1672.1.
salts.
Water: To AS 3958.1.
Bedding mortar
Proportioning: Select proportions from the range 1:3 – 1:4 cement:sand to obtain satisfactory
adhesion. Provide minimum water.
Terra cotta tiles: Use proprietary polymer modified mortar.
Alternatively: Site gauged. Site gauged mixes are preferred by experienced tradesmen as it gives them the opportunity to make
adjustments for moisture content.
Water
2.4 GROUT
Type
Terra cotta tiles: Use proprietary polymer modified grout.
noted for adhesives.
Pigments
See BS EN 12878 for specifications. Grout colour can be nominated in the template Schedules.
3 EXECUTION
Refer to AS 3958.1 and AS 3958.2 and also to BRANZ 003 and SAA HB52 for guidance.
3.1 SUBSTRATES
General: Before tiling, allow at least the following times to elapse (for initial drying out and shrinkage)
for these substrates:
- Concrete blockwork: 28 days.
- Toppings on slabs and rendering on blockwork: A further 21 days.

3.2 PREPARATION
If Waterproofing – wet areas is not included, import wet area membranes and include here.
Ambient temperature
General: If the ambient temperature is < 5 or > 35°C, do not lay tiles.
Substrates
- Clean and free of any deposit or finish which may impair adhesion or location of tiles.
- If framed or discontinuous, support members are in full lengths without splicing.
- If solid or continuous, excessive projections are hacked off and voids and hollows are filled with a
cement:sand mix not stronger than the substrate nor weaker than the bedding.
If there are particular requirements for substrate preparation to suit a particular tiling system, specify them here.
Trial set-out
General: Prepare a trial tile set-out to each area as follows to:
- Maximise the size of equal margins of cut tiles.
- Walls to mark accommodation of fittings.
3.3 TILING GENERALLY

Sequence
General: Fix wall tiles before floor tiles.
Cutting and laying
Cutting: Cut tiles neatly to fit around fixtures and fittings, and at margins where necessary. Drill holes
without damaging tile faces. Cut recesses for fittings such as soapholders. Rub edges smooth without
chipping.
Laying: Return tiles into sills, reveals and openings. Butt up to returns, frames, fittings, and other
finishes. Strike and point up beds where exposed. Remove tile spacers before grouting.
Variations
General: Distribute variations in hue, colour, or pattern uniformly, by mixing tiles or tile batches before
laying.
Protection
Floor tiles: Keep traffic off floor tiles until the bedding has set and attained its working strength.
3.4 SETTING OUT

Tile joints
Joint widths: Set out tiles to give uniform joint widths within the following limits:
- Floors:
. Dry pressed tiles: 3 mm.
. Extruded tiles: 6 mm.
. Vitrified: 3 to 5 mm.
. Quarry tiles: 6 to 12 mm.
. Chemical resistant epoxy jointed tiling: 5 to 6 mm.
- Large and/or irregular floor tiles: 6 to 12 mm.
- Mounted mosaics: To match mounting pattern.
- Walls:
. Dry pressed tile: 1.5 mm.

. Extruded tile: 6 mm.

These values are drawn from AS 3958.1 and may be varied as required to suit tiles or the effect required.
Margins
General: Provide whole or purpose-made tiles at margins where practicable, otherwise set out to give
equal margins of cut tiles. If margins less than half tile width are unavoidable, locate the cut tiles where
they are least conspicuous.
Fixtures
General: If possible position tiles so that holes for fixtures and other penetrations occur at the
intersection of horizontal and vertical joints or on the centre lines of tiles. Continue tiling fully behind
fixtures which are not built in to the tiling surface. Before tiling ensure that fixtures interrupting the tile
surfaces are accurately positioned in their designed or optimum locations relative to the tile layout.

Grading
General: Grade floor tiling to even and correct falls to floor wastes and elsewhere as required. Make
level junctions with walls. Where falls are not required lay level.
Fall, general: 1:100 minimum.
The Building and Construction Council of NSW suggests a minimum fall of 1:60 in their “Medium Density Housing Quality
Scheme: Quality Handbook” (1994).
Fall, in shower areas: 1:60 minimum.
3.6 BEDDING
Preparation of tiles
Adhesive bedding: Fix tiles dry; do not soak.
See the Commentary on the topic of adhesive bedding.
Mortar bedding: Soak porous tiles in water for half an hour and then drain until the surface water has
disappeared.
Terra cotta tiles: Use pre sealed tiles or apply a breathable sealer and lay dry. If a final sealed finish is
selected, use a compatible laying sealer.
Edit these alternatives as required.
Bedding
General: Use bedding methods and materials which are appropriate to the tile, the substrate, the
conditions of service, and which leave the tile firmly and solidly bedded in the bedding material and
Thin adhesive beds
General: Provide only if the substrate deviation is less than 3 mm when tested with a 3 m straight
edge. Cover the entire tile back with adhesive when the tile is bedded.
Thickness: 1.5 – 3 mm.
Thick adhesive beds
evenly distributed coverage after laying as follows:
- Domestic internal walls: > 70%.
- Domestic internal floors: > 80%.
- Other wall and floors: > 90%.
- Wet areas and bench tops: 100%.
Pattern of distribution of adhesive: As illustrated in AS 3958.1. Verify by examining one tile in ten as
work proceeds.
Wall tile spacers: Do not use spacer types that inhibit the distribution of adhesive.

Use of cruciform spacers can result in some adhesives failing. The sliding motion is required to break the skin and facilitate
adhesion.
Curing: Allow the adhesive to cure for the period nominated by the manufacturer prior to grouting or
allowing foot traffic.
Mortar beds
For floor tiles: Either lightly dust the screeded bed surface with dry cement and trowel level until the
cement is damp, or spread a thin slurry of neat cement, or cement-based thin bed adhesive, on to the
tile back. Do not provide mortar after initial set has occurred.
- Nominal thickness: 20 to 40 mm.
Thick reinforced beds: Place mortar bed in two layers, and incorporate the mesh reinforcement in the
first layer.
Mechanical fixing
General: Provide a proprietary system of support and fixing appropriate to the type of tile and the
substrate conditions.
3.7 MOVEMENT JOINTS

General
may be caused by tile growth, substrate shrinkage, thermal expansion and contraction, and the like. See also the Commentary.
- Location:
. To divide large tiled areas into bays, maximum 5 m wide, maximum 16 m2.
Location
Divider strip
- Joint side-plate
material
- Neoprene colour
- Width
- Fixing

Proprietary slide plate

- Product
- Material
- Insert colour
Sealant:
- Type
- Colour
- Width (mm)

Divider strip:
Sealant:

Grouted joints
Edges of tiles: Grout exposed edge joints.
Epoxy grouted joints: Ensure that tile edge surfaces are free of extraneous matter such as cement
films or wax, before grouting.
Mosaic tiles
Grouting mosaics: If paper faced mosaics are to be bedded in cement mortar, pre-grout the sheeted
mosaics from the back before fixing. After fixing, rub grout into the surface of the joints to fill any voids
left from pre-grouting. Clean off surplus grout. When grout has set, wash down. If necessary use a
proprietary cement remover.
Caulked joints
Use where it is necessary to seal joints between tiles and other surfaces to keep them watertight. If movement is anticipated,
use a movement joint. If watertightness is not required, grouting may be sufficient.
General: Provide caulked joints filled with sealant and finished flush with the tile surface as follows:
- Where tiling is cut around sanitary fixtures.
- Around fixtures interrupting the tile surface, for example pipes, brackets, bolts and nibs.
- At junctions with elements such as window and door frames and built-in cupboards.
Width: 5 mm.
Depth: Equal to the tile thickness.

Describe either by proprietary item or by essential properties such as material, size (including radius of coves and nosings),
pattern, colour. Specification by proprietary item (brand name and manufacturer) will usually be the most certain method of
getting the right formulation for a particular purpose.


Type: >
Material: >
e.g. “Ribbed brass strip, 1 mm thick”.
Weather bars
Type: >
Material: >
Finish: >
Dimensions: >
Fixing: >
3.10 COMPLETION
Spare tiles
Store the spare materials on site.
Vary the quantity if required.
Storage location: >
Cleaning
General: Clean tiled surfaces using an appropriate tile cleaning agent, and polish.
See also the Commentary on slip resistance.
4 SELECTIONS
4.1 SCHEDULES
Wall tiling schedule
Designation WT1 WT2 WT3
Tile type:
- Size (mm)
- Colour
- Surface
Adhesive bedding:
Tile or bond pattern
Mechanical fixing:
- Support system
- Fixing method
Grout:
- Type


- Colour
- Pigment proportions
- Special properties
If there is more than one type of wall tiling, complete a schedule column for each type (three columns are provided). Schedule
items are redundant if information is fully shown on the drawings.
Tile type: Terms denoting generic types of ceramic tiles include quarries, glazed, semi glazed and vitrified (homogeneous,
granito), and terms denoting shapes and arrangements, e.g. tessellated, mosaic. Mosaics may be paper faced or gauze
backed. There are also glass mosaics. Define the tile type by the manufacturer’s proprietary brand name if possible, or by the
generic term plus essential characteristics such as size, colour, surface and edge type. For special purposes it may be
necessary to specify other properties such as abrasion class, slip resistance, and chemical resistance.
Rely on approved samples for general quality compliance.
item designation.
Mechanical fixing: If required, preferably specify a proprietary system and suitable tiles. Some systems include both primary and
secondary supports.
Grout:
• Type: e.g. “Cement-based proprietary grout”, “Epoxy based grout”. For epoxy, state whether 2 or 3 part, or specify as a
proprietary item.
• Colour: See the commentary to Grout.
• Pigment proportions: These may vary with different pigments. Consult manufacturers. In some cases it may be necessary
to test the mix for strength.
• Special properties: e.g. resistance to water, heat, chemical attack, cleansing agents, mould or bacteria, or select an
appropriate proprietary item.
Floor tiling schedule
Designation FT1 FT2 FT3
Tile type:
- Size (mm)
- Colour
- Surface
- Tactile tile:
. Colour
- Slip resistance
- Wet pendulum
- Wet bare foot ramp
- Oil wet ramp
- Edge
- Classification with respect to water absorption and
shaping
Impact insulation laboratory value:
- Weighted normalised impact sound pressure level (and
spectrum adaption term if applicable) Ln,w + (Cl)
Impact insulation field test:
- Weighted standardised impact sound pressure level (and
spectrum adaption term if applicable) L, nT,w + (Cl)
Acoustic underlay:
- Product
- Manufacturer

Designation FT1 FT2 FT3

Slip resistance grade
Separation layer:
- Location
- Type
Bedding:
- Type
- Thickness (mm)
- Reinforcement
Grout:
- Type
- Colour
Tile type, bedding and grout, refer to instructions to the Wall tiling schedule.
Edge: Tiles for chemical resistant floors should be machine cut to provide precision edges.
Slip resistance grade: Refer to Commentary.
Tactile tiles: See AS/NZS 1428.4.
Tactile tile colour: A colour contrast is required, in both wet and dry conditions, between the tactile indicators and the adjacent
surface and that the colour provides a luminance contrast to the surrounding surface of not less than 0.3 (30%).
Separation layer:
Bedding: Traditional mortar beds are now usually confined to thick bed applications such as floor tiling where the bed thickness
is varied to obtain falls, or where the bedding is over a separation layer. Edit as required. Site gauged mixes are preferred by
experienced tradesmen as it gives them the opportunity to make adjustments for moisture content.
adhered over a cured mortar screed. Mortar beds laid over separation layers may need to be reinforced.

STONE AND TERRAZZO TILING FINISH
STONE AND TERRAZZO TILING
There is a Product Partner for this worksection. Click the logo to be redirected to their page .
This worksection is applicable to stone tiling, industrial cast stone tiling, terrazzo tiling (cementitious and resinous) and
manufactured cementitious tiling on various substrates.
• Segmental pavers – mortar bed for external stone and cementitious paving.
• Segmental pavers – sand bed for segmented pavers.
• Stone cladding for external or internal stone cladding, mechanically fixed.
• Terrazzo in situ for terrazzo topping.
• Ceramic tiling for ceramic tiling.
• External wall tiling directly exposed to weather.
• None.
substrates.
• Use the Flooring and decking worksection for framed substrates.
• Use the Waterproofing – wet areas worksection for waterproofing wet areas.
• Layout, set-out point, tiling pattern and movement joints to your office documentation policy.
For bathrooms generally, see SAA HB52.
The tiling system selected should be suitable for substrate deflections as follows:
• Floors span > 3.0 m: < 1:480.
• Floors spans < 3.0 m: < 1:360.
• Walls: < 1:360.
construction.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
General: Provide tiling systems to walls, floors and other substrates as follows and to the Selections:
- Set out with joints accurately aligned in both directions and wall tiling joints level and plum.

adjacent areas.
Tiles should be selected to be resistant to impacts expected in use and to be slip resistant.
Standards
Installation: Follow the guidance given in AS 3958.1.

General
have no overlaps.
- Waterproofing – wet areas for wet area membranes.
• Lining.
• Plastering.
• Ceramic tiling.
1.3 INTERPRETATIONS
Definitions
- Adhesives:
. Dispersion (D): Adhesives in which the binders are in the form of aqueous polymer dispersion
. Reaction resin (R): Adhesives in which in the binders are synthetic resins with mineral fillers and
The adhesive definitions are based on AS 4992.1(Int).
- Substrates: The surfaces on which tiles are bedded.
generally over 20 mm thick used as coverings for floors and supported over continuous substrates.
- Tiles: Thin slabs made from clays and/or other inorganic raw materials used generally as coverings
for floors and walls and adhered to continuous supporting substrates.
. Natural stone: Tiles cut from natural stone.
. Industrial cast: Tile products of reconstituted stone. Also known as manufactured stone.
. Cementitious: Manufactured cement based pre-finished tiles.

. Terrazzo – cementitious: Manufactured cementitious terrazzo tiles formed in a suitable machine

to give sufficient compaction and density to the finished surface, and moisture cured before
grinding and honed at the place of manufacture. Thickness usually 35 mm.
. Terrazzo – resin: Manufactured terrazzo tiles with the facing aggregate in a resin matrix and pre
polished. Thickness usually up to 22 mm.
The tile definitions are based on AS 4662. The standard tabulates shape types by four water absorption groups.
- Wet areas: Areas within buildings with water supply and drainage systems.
1.4 INSPECTION
Notice
1.5 SUBMISSIONS
Samples
General: Submit labelled samples of tiles, grout and sealants, illustrating the range of variation in
colour and finish.
grading is necessary. Where tiles and accessories are specified as proprietary items use this clause as a means of
confirmation.
Sample panels
General: Prepare a sample panel of each type of finish as follows:
- Size: ≥ 2 m2.
- Obtain approval.
- Preserve each panel until related work is complete.
The sample panel shall be the benchmark of quality of execution for the project.
Size: ≥ 2 m2.
For large projects consider asking for a prototype room comprising the complete wall and floor tiling and nominate an approval
process.
Execution
Margins: If it appears that minor variations in joint widths or overall dimensions will avoid cut tiles,
submit a proposal.
1.6 TESTS
General
Type tests: Submit as follows:
- Slip resistance to AS 4586: >
- Stone tile properties: >
See Commentary notes under Stone tile selection regarding CSIRO BEST tests for stone tiles. Select the test you may
require and call for the recommended outcome. Alternately, seek the advice of a stonework consultant.

insulation field test option for verification of conformance with the BCA is adopted, nominate tests as determined under
AS ISO 717.2.
Flood tests: Submit a report of flood tests conducted on site as follows:
>
Tiling should not proceed without a successful flood test of wet area membranes. A method is suggested in the Commentary
under Flood test and should be specified in Waterproofing.

General
. Marking and Classification of tile adhesive to AS 4992.1(Int).
. Weighted normalised impact sound pressure level to AS ISO 717.2 as measured for the acoustic
underlay as part of the entire tiling system.
1.8 TOLERANCES
Completed tiling
Tolerances table
Alignment: Deviation of the finished tiles from a 3 m straight edge laid < 3 mm
against any joints
Flatness: Deviation of any plane surface under a 3 m straight edge laid < 3 mm
in any direction on an area of uniform grade
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCTS
Stone tiles
General: Repair mud veins or lines of separation that are integral to the selected pattern with resin
fillers and applied back lining.
Resin terrazzo
General: Provide colouring material which is permanent, stable, compatible with the matrix, and
factory-dispersed into the resin by the manufacturer.
Acoustic underlay
General: To be a proprietary product recommended by the manufacturer as being intrinsic to and
compatible with the tiling system.
2.2 ADHESIVES
General
Standard: To AS 2358 or AS 4992.1(Int).
Type
General: Provide adhesives to the Wall tiling schedule and to the Floor tiling schedule and
compatible with the materials and surfaces to be adhered.

conditions.
2.3 MORTAR
Materials
Lime: To AS 1672.1.
salts.
Water: To AS 3958.1.
Bedding mortar
Proportioning: Select proportions from the range 1 cement:3 sand – 1 cement:4 sand: to obtain
satisfactory adhesion. Provide minimum water.
Alternatively: Site gauged. Site gauged mixes are preferred by experienced tradesmen as it gives them the opportunity to make
adjustments for moisture content.
2.4 GROUT
Type
noted for adhesives.
Pigments
See BS EN 12878 for specifications. Grout colour can be nominated in the template Schedules.
Water
Grout to resin terrazzo tiles: Resinous material supplied by the tile supplier.
3 EXECUTION
Refer to AS 3958.1 and AS 3958.2 and also to BRANZ 003 and SAA HB52 for guidance.
3.1 SUBSTRATES
General: Before tiling, allow at least the following times to elapse (for initial drying out and shrinkage)
for these substrates:
- Concrete blockwork: 28 days.
- Toppings on slabs and rendering on blockwork: A further 21 days.
3.2 PREPARATION
If Waterproofing – wet areas is not included, import wet area membranes and include here.

Trial set-out
General: Prepare a trial tile set-out to each area as follows to:
- Maximise the size of equal margins of cut tiles.
- Walls noting accommodation of fittings
Ambient temperature
General: It the ambient temperature is < 5 or > 35°C, do not lay tiles.
Substrates
- Clean and free of any deposit or finish which may impair adhesion or location of tiles.
- If framed or discontinuous, support members are in full lengths without splicing.
cement:sand mix not stronger than the substrate nor weaker than the bedding.
Curing: Before tiling, allow in situ concrete to cure for < 6 weeks before placing tiles.
If there are particular requirements for substrate preparation to suit a particular tiling system, specify them here.
3.3 TILING GENERALLY

Sequence
General: Fix wall tiles before floor tiles.
Cutting and laying
Cutting: Cut tiles neatly to fit around fixtures and fittings, and at margins where necessary. Drill holes
without damaging tile faces. Cut recesses where necessary for fittings such as soapholders. Rub
edges smooth without chipping.
Laying: Return tiles into sills, reveals and openings. Butt up to returns, frames, fittings, and other
finishes. Strike and point up beds where exposed. Remove tile spacers before grouting.
Resin terrazzo tiles: Apply to thin-bed adhesive.
Variations
General: If necessary, distribute variations in hue, colour, or pattern uniformly, by mixing tiles or tile
batches before laying.
Protection
Floor tiles: Keep traffic off floor tiles until the bedding has set and attained its working strength.
3.4 SETTING OUT

General
Patterns should be shown on the drawings, as should locations of movement joints.
Joint widths: Set out tiles to give uniform joint widths as follows:
- Floors:
. Stone tiles: 3 mm.
. Large and/or irregular floor tiles: 6 < 12 mm.
Terrazzo tile joints: 1.5 mm or gauged by the thickness of the trowel.
- Walls:
. Stone tiles: 1.5 < 4.5 mm.
These values are drawn from AS 3958.1 and may be varied as required to suit tiles or the effect required. Check joint widths for
stone tiles with the supplier.

Margins
General: Provide whole or purpose-made tiles at margins where practicable, otherwise set out to give
equal margins of cut tiles. If margins less than half tile width are unavoidable, locate the cut tiles where
they are least conspicuous.
Fixtures
General: If possible position tiles so that holes for fixtures and other penetrations occur at the
intersection of horizontal and vertical joints or on the centre lines of tiles. Continue tiling fully behind
fixtures which are not built in to the tiling surface. Before tiling ensure that fixtures interrupting the tile
surfaces are accurately positioned in their designed or optimum locations relative to the tile layout.

General
General: Grade floor tiling to even and correct falls to floor wastes and elsewhere as required. Make
level junctions with walls. Where falls are not required lay level.
Fall, general: 1:100 minimum.
The Building and Construction Council of NSW suggests a minimum fall of 1:60 in their “Medium Density Housing Quality
Scheme: Quality Handbook” (1994).
Fall, in shower areas: 1:60 minimum.
Flatness: Maximum deviation of the finished surface under a 3 m straight edge laid in any direction on
an area of uniform grade:
- < 3 mm.
Alignment: Deviation of the finished tiles from a 3 m straight edge laid against any joints:
- < 3 mm.
Change of finish: Maintain finished floor level across changes of floor finish including carpet.
3.6 BEDDING
Preparation of tiles
Adhesive bedding: Fix tiles dry; do not soak.
See the Commentary on the topic of adhesive bedding.
Mortar bedding: Soak porous tiles in water for half an hour and then drain until the surface water has
disappeared.
Edit these alternatives as required.
Bedding
General: Use bedding methods and materials which are appropriate to the tile, the substrate, the
conditions of service, and which leave the tile firmly and solidly bedded in the bedding material and
Thin adhesive beds
General: Provide only if the substrate deviation is less than 3 mm when tested with a 2 m straight
edge. Cover the entire tile back with adhesive when the tile is bedded.
Thickness: 1.5 – 3 mm.
Thick adhesive beds
evenly distributed coverage after laying as follows:
- Domestic internal walls: > 70%.
- Domestic internal floors: > 80%.
- Other wall and floors: > 90%.
- Wet areas and bench tops: 100%.
Pattern of distribution of adhesive: As illustrated in AS 3958.1. Verify by examining one tile in ten as
work proceeds.

Wall tile spacers: Do not use spacer types that inhibit the distribution of adhesive.
Use of cruciform spacers can result in some adhesives failing. The sliding motion is required to break the skin and facilitate
adhesion.
Allow the adhesive to cure for the period nominated by the manufacturer prior to grouting or allowing
foot traffic.
Mortar beds
For floor tiles: Either lightly dust the screeded bed surface with dry cement and trowel level until the
cement is damp, or spread a thin slurry of neat cement, or cement-based thin bed adhesive, on to the
tile back. Do not provide mortar after initial set has occurred.
- Nominal thickness: 20 – 40 mm.
Thick reinforced beds: Place mortar bed in two layers, and incorporate the mesh reinforcement in the
first layer.
Traditional mortar beds are now usually confined to thick bed applications such as floor tiling where the bed thickness is varied
to obtain falls, or where the bedding is over a separation layer. Site gauged mixes are preferred by experienced tradesmen as it
gives them the opportunity to make adjustments for moisture content.
Mechanical fixing
General: Provide a proprietary system of support and fixing appropriate to the type of tile and the
substrate conditions.
3.7 MOVEMENT JOINTS
3.8
General
may be caused by tile growth, substrate shrinkage, thermal expansion and contraction, and the like. See also the Commentary.
- Location:
. To divide large tiled areas into bays, maximum 5 m wide, maximum 16 m².


Location
Divider strip:
- Joint side-plate
material
- Neoprene colour
- Width
- Fixing
- Product
- Material
- Insert colour
Sealant:
- Type
- Colour
- Width (mm)

Divider strip:
Sealant:

Grouted joints
Edges of tiles: Grout exposed edge joints.
Epoxy grouted joints: Ensure that tile edge surfaces are free of extraneous matter such as cement
films or wax, before grouting.
Grouting cementitious terrazzo tiles: Thoroughly work grout into tile joints by flood grouting.
Caulked joints
Use where it is necessary to seal joints between tiles and other surfaces to keep them watertight. If movement is anticipated,
use a movement joint. If watertightness is not required, grouting may be sufficient.
General: Provide caulked joints filled with sealant and finished flush with the tile surface as follows:
- Where tiling is cut around sanitary fixtures.
- Around fixtures interrupting the tile surface, for example pipes, brackets, bolts and nibs.
- At junctions with elements such as window and door frames and built-in cupboards.
Width: 5 mm.
Depth: Equal to the tile thickness.


Describe either by proprietary item or by essential properties such as material, size (including radius of coves and nosings),
pattern, colour. Specification by proprietary item (brand name and manufacturer) will usually be the most certain method of
getting the right formulation for a particular purpose.

Type: >
Material: >
e.g. “Ribbed brass strip, 1 mm thick”.
Floor finish divider strips for resin terrazzo tiles: A proprietary neoprene “T” section.
Resin terrazzo is widely recommended for use in areas where food acids, chemicals and the like are in contact with floor
surfaces. The use of metal (especially brass) divider strips should not be permitted under such conditions.
Weather bars
Type: >
Material: >
Finish: >
Dimensions: >
Fixing: >
3.11 COMPLETION
Cementitious terrazzo tiled surfaces
General: In situ grind and polish the completed installation with equipment nominated by the tile
supplier.
Spare tiles
Store the spare materials on site.
Specify a quantity here only if the requirement of the Template is not adequate.
Storage location: >
Cleaning
General: Clean tiled surfaces using an appropriate tile cleaning agent, and polish.
See also the Commentary on slip resistance.

4 SELECTIONS
4.1 SCHEDULES
Wall tiling schedule
Tile type:
- Size (mm)
- Colour
- Surface
Adhesive bedding
Mechanical fixing:
- Support system
- Fixing method
Grout:
- Type
- Colour
Tile type: e.g. Stone type or product identifier. Rely on approved samples for general quality compliance.
item designation.
Mechanical fixing: If required, preferably specify a proprietary system and suitable tiles. Some systems include both primary and
secondary supports.
Grout:
• Type: e.g. “Cement-based proprietary grout”, “Epoxy based grout”. For epoxy, state whether 2 or 3 part, or specify as a
proprietary item.
• Colour: See the commentary to Grout.
• Pigment proportions: These may vary with different pigments. Consult manufacturers. In some cases it may be necessary
to test the mix for strength.
• Special properties: e.g. resistance to water, heat, chemical attack, cleansing agents, mould or bacteria, or select an
appropriate proprietary item.
Floor tiling schedule

Properties Types
FT 1 FT 2 FT 3
Body tiles:
- Name
- Work size
- Material:
. Stone type
. Manufacturer’s stone product

Properties Types
FT 1 FT 2 FT 3
. Cementitious tile product
. Terrazzo tile product
- Colour
- Surface finish
- Slip resistance:
. Wet pendulum
. Wet bare foot ramp
. Oil wet ramp
- Weighted normalised impact sound pressure
level (and spectrum adaption term if applicable)
Ln,w + (Cl)
- Weighted standardised impact sound pressure
level (and spectrum adaption term if applicable)
L, nT,w + (Cl)
Separation layer:
- Location
Acoustic underlay
- Product
- Manufacturer
Accessories
Beddings
- Mortar bedding
- Adhesive bedding
Grout colour
Sealer product name
- Stone
- Terrazzo
Tile type, bedding and grout, refer to instructions to the Wall tiling schedule.
Slip resistance grade: Refer to Commentary.
Separation layer:
Bedding: Traditional mortar beds are now usually confined to thick bed applications such as floor tiling where the bed thickness
is varied to obtain falls, or where the bedding is over a separation layer. Site gauged mixes are preferred by experienced
tradesmen as it gives them the opportunity to make adjustments for moisture content.
adhered over a cured mortar screed.
• Thickness: Mortar beds laid over separation layers may need to be reinforced.
Stone sealer: Select a product with a demonstrated ability to maintain slip resistance.

APPLIED WALL FINISHES FINISH
APPLIED WALL FINISHES
This worksection is applicable to custom made wall panels, in situ applied wall linings and the in situ application of specialist
wall finishes. There are no published standards, Australian or otherwise, for the specialist finishes utilised by interior designers.
• Stone cladding for artificial cast stone panels.
• Joinery for custom made joinery.
• Metalwork for custom made metal fixtures.
• Plastering for general trade plastering.
• Stone and terrazzo tiling for stone surfaces.
• Painting for general trade painting.
• Lining.
• Some projects may include items not covered by this worksection. You may need to create new text, modify this text or use
• None.
• This worksection contains a number or typical wall finishes. Add particular finishes as appropriate.
• Use Partitions – framed and lined for additional noggings or stud stiffeners required for the support of wall hung units.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
General: Provide in situ coating systems to substrates as follows and to Selections:
- Consistent in colour, gloss level, texture and dry film thickness.
- Free of runs, sags, blisters, or other discontinuities.
- Fully opaque.
- Fully adhered.
Fabricate and install wall panels to backgrounds:
- Undamaged.
- Plumb and level.
- Straight and free of distortion.
Selection and detailing should ensure finishes are resistant to expected impacts in us and to environmental degradation.

General

have no overlaps.
Related worksections
Conform to associated worksections as follows:
- Lining.
1.3 INTERPRETATION
Definitions
- Dry processed fibreboard (MDF): A panel manufactured with adhesives under pressure and heat
from fibres of wood and other lignocellulosic material with a forming moisture content or < 20%.
- High pressure decorative laminates (HPDL):
. Panels consisting of core layers impregnated with phenolic and/or aminoplastic resins and a
surface layer(s) impregnated with aminoplastic resins (mainly melamine resins).
. Sheets consisting of layers of fibrous sheet material (e.g. paper) impregnated with thermosetting
resins and bonded together under heat and pressure (< 5 MPa), with decorative face(s).
- Particleboard: A panel material with a nominal thickness of 1.5 mm or greater, manufactured from
lignocellulosic fibres (derived from wood or other materials) with application of heat and/or pressure,
the bond of which is derived from a synthetic adhesive added to the fibres and the panels are
manufactured with a moisture content less than 20%.
- Wet processed fibreboard (Hardboard): A panel material with a nominal thickness of 1.5 mm or
greater, manufactured from lignocellulosic fibres (derived from wood or other materials) with
application of heat and/or pressure, the bond of which is derived from the felting of the fibres and
the panels are manufactured with a forming moisture content greater than 20%.
1.4 INSPECTION
Notice
Give sufficient notice so that inspection may be made of items fabricated off site before delivery.
1.5 SUBMISSIONS
Shop drawings
General: Submit shop drawings to a scale not smaller than 1:50, showing the following:
- Procedures for shop and site assembly and fixing.
Goods lift: If delivery involves a goods lift nominate the car size and capacity.
Samples
General: Submit samples to the Sample table.

Sample table
Description No. of samples
Each type of board to be used complete with finish and edge stripping 2
Samples of the selected timber veneer showing the maximum expected 2 x 3 variants
variation
Patch of each nominated fabric 2
The finish to all stainless steel items 2
Selected glass products 1 each
Selected fabric types 1 each
Selected wall panel finish 1 each
Samples cost money and take up time. Delete or amend this clause if sheets, finishes and edges are conventional and if
proprietary hardware is specified.
1.6 TOLERANCES
Wall panels
Length and width of panels: ± 1/1000th of the dimension or 0.5 mm, whichever is the greater.
any position.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
Fire hazard indices for all materials when tested as follows:
- AS/NZS 1530.3:
. Spread of flame index: ≤ 0.
- AS/NZS 1530.3:
. Smoke developed index: ≤ 3.
Facing materials:
- AS/NZS 1530.2:
. Flammability index: < 5.
2.2 TIMBER
Joinery timber
- Grade: >
Three grades are provided in AS 2796.3, select (SEL), medium feature (MF) and high feature (HF).
- Grade: >
1 or 2.
- Grade: >

Separate grades are given for pinus and non-pinus species of clear (FCL), select (FSEL), standard (FSTD) and utility (FUTL).
An additional furniture appearance grade (FAP) is specified for the pinus species.
2.3 SHEET PRODUCTS

The prompts for this subsection set out the range of characteristics which need to be considered when specifying sheet
products. If there are several locations or applications requiring differing types or grades of sheet, tabulate or complete a
separate schedule for each, so that a notation on a drawing would call up the appropriate type of sheet.
Plywood
Interior use generally: To AS/NZS 2270.
Interior use, exposed to moisture: To AS/NZS 2271.
- Classification: >
- Bending stress: >
Particleboard
- Classification: >
bearing application. Alternatively, quote the manufacturer’s designations when specifying particleboard if you do not feel
comfortable with the generic provisions. Check manufacturers’ current availability lists before specifying.
Melamine overlaid particleboard: Particleboard overlaid on both sides with low pressure melamine.
Dry-processed fibreboard
Alternatively, ultra low density (STD Ultra LDF), low density (STD LDF), high density (STD HDF), moisture resistant (MR HDF)
or (MR MDF) or high performance (HP MDF). See also the Commentary on this topic.
Medium density fibreboard (STD MDF) overlaid on both sides with low pressure melamine to
AS/NZS 1859.3.
2.4 LAMINATE
The wide range of products available are generally covered by AS/NZS 2924.1 Table 1 which defines the following classes and
typical applications – the standard should be consulted for full information.

CG (S or F) Compact general purpose High performance, self
supporting vertical or horizontal
surfaces
HD (S or F) Horizontal heavy duty High performance horizontal
surfaces
HG (S, For P) Horizontal general purpose General horizontal surfaces and
high performance vertical
surfaces
VG (S, For P) Vertical general purpose General vertical surfaces and
light duty horizontal surfaces
VL (S) Vertical light duty Light duty vertical surfaces
These classes have suffixes for standard type (type S), type P (postformable) and type F (defined reaction to fire).
While decorative laminated sheets can be specified by reference to AS/NZS 2924.1, it is expected that proprietary items will
normally be scheduled unless choice of colour is not critical.

Check availability with the manufacturer.
2.5 VENEERS
Tabulate if more than one type of decorative timber or vinyl veneer is required. Use schedule only if basic defaults in Template
are not suitable for certain applications. A blanket reference to the standard will not necessarily give you the material or the
standard you require.
Timber veneer
Veneer quality: To AS/NZS 2270.
Grades (minimum requirement):
- Select grade, veneer quality A, for visible surfaces to have clear finish or to have no coated finish.
- General purpose grade, veneer quality B, for other visible surfaces.
Decorative timber veneer (grade S)
Veneered item: >
e.g. “Wall panels”.
Veneer timber species: >
Type of cut: >
e.g. “Sliced”, “Semi-rotary peeled” or “Rotary peeled”.
Matching arrangement: >
“Book”, “Centre”, “Diamond”, “Random” or “Slip”.
2.6 GLASS
Colourback glass lining
General: 6 mm toughened glass with a factory applied opaque coating to the back.
See also the Commentary on this topic.
Mirror glass lining
General: 6.38 mm laminated glass.
StandardsMark: Not required.
Reflective surface: Silver layer deposited on the glass.
Protective coatings: Electrolytic copper coating at least 5 µm thick, and 2 coats of mirror backing and
edge sealing paint having a total dry film thickness of at least 50 µm and compatible with the adhesive.
2.7 LIQUID APPLIED FINISHES

Metallic-coating systems
General: Liquid applied veneer incorporating real metal fines.
e.g. Axolotl Metal Finishes. These finishes are usually proprietary coating systems.
2.8 SPECIALIST PLASTERING SYSTEMS

Polished plaster
General: In situ applied plaster system incorporating selected stone dust in a proprietary matrix
producing a smooth polished surface with visual patterning.
Glass bead coatings
General: Glass beads bound in a proprietary matrix factory applied to MDF panels.

Product or applicator: >

These plastering systems are usually applied by artisans working in conjunction with firms specialising in new or revived finishes
e.g. Di Emme Products.
3 EXECUTION

Components
Accuracy: Build components square and install plumb.
Joints: Provide materials in single lengths whenever possible. If joints are necessary make them over
supports.
Framing: Frame and trim where necessary for openings, including those required by other trades.
Fasteners
General: The range of fasteners available is so wide that it is not recommended that specifiers nominate types unless they have
a particular requirement in mind. Some fasteners have the advantage of a knock-down capability and this may be a
consideration.
Visibility: Do not provide visible fixings except where detailed as a design feature. Where fastenings
are unavoidable on visible surfaces, sink the heads below the surface and fill the sinking flush with a
material compatible with the surface finish. In surfaces which are to have clear or tinted finish provide
matching wood plugs showing face grain (not end grain).
Adhesives
General: The choice of adhesives is best left to the fabricator who should rely on the adhesive manufacturer’s
recommendations.
General: Provide adhesives to transmit the loads imposed and to ensure the rigidity of the assembly,
without causing discolouration of finished surfaces.
Decorative laminated sheets: Contact adhesive to AS 2131.
Finishing
Joints: Scribe internal and mitre external joints.
Edge strips: Finish exposed edges of sheets with edge strips which match sheet faces.
- Solid timber edge strips: >
- Matching: For surfaces which are to have clear or tinted finish, arrange adjacent pieces to match the
grain and colour.
Specify or detail any special edge strip requirements e.g. metal trim.
Delivery and storage

General: Deliver panel units to site in unbroken wrapping or containers and store so that its moisture
content is not adversely affected. Do not store in areas of wet plaster. Keep storage to a minimum by
delivering items only when required for installation.
Back prime surfaces concealed by backgrounds.
Acclimatisation
General: Acclimatise wood based items by stacking them in the in-service conditions with air
circulation to all surfaces after the following construction operations are complete:
Background
General: Damp clean and vacuum background surfaces that will be permanently concealed.

3.2 FABRIC PANELS

General
General: Provide and install fabric panels as follows:
- Size: >
- Height: >
- Width: >
Alternative: Refer to partition elevations on drawings.
Subsurface padding: >
e.g. Fire retardant compressed polyester.
Fabric tensioning frame: >
e.g. Fire retardant rigid PVC framing system by Snap-Tex Systems Australia. Nominate size and profile.
Fabric: >
Alternative: Refer to a Finishes Code Index.
Edgestrip trim: >
Alternative: Refer to details. Fix trims with high strength contact adhesive.
Substrate: >
e.g. Plasterboard with joints fully set and sanded.
Installation: >
Usually in accordance with the supplier’s printed specification by an installer licensed by the supplier.
Location: >
Alternative: Refer to drawings or a Finishes Schedule.
3.3 WALL LINING

General
General: Provide and install linings applied to walls as follows:
Size:
- Height: >
- Width: >
Material:
- Glass:
. Edges: >
. Colour: >
e.g. 6 mm toughened colourback glass as noted in a Finishes Code Index, with edges arrised and ground.
- Composite panels:
. Product: >
. Face material and finish: >
. Edges: >
. Thickness: >
e.g. 4 mm aluminium faced composite panels (“Alucobond”, “Alpolic”) as noted in a Finishes Code Index.
Substrate: >
e.g. Plasterboard with joints fully set, sanded and painted with one coat of sealer.
Adhesive: Non-acidic silicone adhesive. Apply at the rate recommended by the manufacturer.
Installation: Clean the back of the glass panel and apply “wallnuts” of adhesive together with double
sided adhesive tape for temporary support, and affix directly to the substrate.
Location: >

3.4 WALL PANELS

General
General: Provide and install panels fixed to walls as follows:
Size:
- Height: >
- Width: >
Material:
- Glass:
. Edges: >
. Colour: >
e.g. 6 mm toughened colourback glass as noted in a Finishes Code Index, with edges arrised and ground.
- Composite panels:
. Product: >
. Face material: >
. Edges: >
. Thickness: >
e.g. 4 mm aluminium faced composite panels (“Alucabond”, “Alpolic”) as noted in a Finishes Code Index. Edges can be mitred
and folded over the backing panel.
- Timber veneer:
. Timber species: >
. Veneer arrangement: >
. Edgestrips: >
e.g. Veneers quarter cut and book matched as noted in a Finishes Code Index.
- High pressure decorative laminate:
. Product: >
. Colour: >
. Edge treatment: >
e.g. Laminate as noted in a Finishes Code Index.
Substrate: >
e.g. Plasterboard with joints fully set and sanded.
Backing panels: >
For example:
• Under glass or composite panel: 10 mm MDF.
• Timber veneer/laminate panels: 18 mm MDF with backing veneer.
Fixing to panels:
- Adhesive: Non-acidic silicone adhesive. Apply at the rate recommended by the manufacturer.
- Installation: Clean the back of the glass panel and apply “wallnuts” of adhesive together with double
sided adhesive tape for temporary support, and affix directly to the panels.
Panel edge treatment: >
Alternative: Refer to details. Fix trims with high strength contact adhesive.
Installation: >
e.g. Hang panels on pairs of split battens comprising aluminium “Z” extrusions, or unequal aluminium extruded channels
(Aluminium Specialties H1553), or timber battens with bevelled meeting edges. Fix horizontal rows of split battens at 600 mm
c/c. Joiners often have a preference.
Location: >

3.5 LIQUID APPLIED FINISH

General
General: Apply liquid coating systems as follows:
Proprietary system: >
Product name: >
Finish designation: >
e.g. Axlolotl Metal Finishes, nominate finish or refer to a Finishes Code Index.
Substrate: >
Substrate preparation:
- New surfaces: Remove oil, rust and scale.
- Previously finished surfaces: Remove paint by bead or grit blasting.
- Fill surface imperfections with a product appropriate for the substrate.
Primer: Apply the primer recommended for the substrate by the finish supplier.
Finish application: In accordance with the finish supplier’s printed instructions.
Aging: >
Aging is an additional step that can produce a controlled amount of patina to copper, bronze and brass finishes.
3.6 SPECIALIST PLASTERING SYSTEMS

General
General: Apply specialist plastering systems as follows:
- Substrate: >
- Proprietary system: >
- Description: >
- Colour: >
- Pattern: >
The substrate recommended for most of these finishes is 9 mm fibre cement. This should be specified in Linings and located in
a Finishes Schedule.

RESILIENT FINISHES FINISH
RESILIENT FINISHES
This worksection is applicable to resilient sheet and tile laid finishes and seamless applied flooring with associated underlay. It
also covers seamless in situ coatings and synthetic sporting surfaces.
• Carpets for carpets.
• None.
• Nominate the locations of finishes and finish abutments, movement joints and note fixed partitions on drawings to your
office documentation policy.
4 GENERAL
4.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
Install resilient floor coverings to backgrounds as follows and/or to Selections:
- To remain secured for the warranty life of the covering.
- To remain consistently smooth for the warranty life of the covering.
- To form the pattern required.

General
have no overlaps.
>
• Concrete finishes for substrates.
• Flooring and decking for substrates.
• Access floors.

• Floor sanding and finishing for substrates.
4.3 INTERPRETATION
Definitions
- Resilient floor coverings classification: To BS EN 685.
- Substrate: The building element to which the finish is to be applied. Includes “subfloor” as defined in
AS/NZS 2455.1.
- Underlay: A layer of sheet material or in situ filling on the substrate to provide a suitable surface for
the resilient covering.
4.4 INSPECTION
Notice
- Completion of laying underlay, if any.
- Substrate immediately before fixing resilient finishes.
- Finished surface before applying sealers or polishes (if any).
- Completed installation.
4.5 TESTS
Seamless finishes site tests
Select or delete if the following two tests as required.
Epoxy base coat test: Using the base coat epoxy as an adhesive, glue to the prepared base, at
approximately 4 m centres, at least four M10 hexagon steel bolts. When the adhesive has set, pull the
bolts off the surface using a lifting apparatus. The test has failed if the fracture occurs at the glue line
or within the epoxy. For each failure, carry out 2 further tests in the same area after rectification.
Adhesion test, cross cut method: To AS 1580.408.4, modified as follows:
Use adhesion tests for seamless in situ finishes only. AS 1580.408.4 is modified because, as it stands, it is not suitable for
coatings thicker than 125 µm.
This Standard sets out a method for assessing the adhesion of liquid applied coatings to substrates by applying and removing
pressure sensitive adhesive tape over cuts made in the coating.
- Sample: Delete clause 5.
- Test areas: Delete clause 8(a). Select the areas to be tested on the in situ finished surface, at the
rate of one test area per 10 m2 of surface (or part thereof) for surfaces up to 40 m2, one to 25 m2 for
surfaces 40 – 200 m2, and one to 50 m2 for surfaces greater than 200 m2. Test the areas 24 – 48
hours after application.
- Procedure: Delete clauses 8(c)(i) and (ii) and 8(k). Make 6 cuts, spaced 2 mm apart, or 3 mm apart
if the average film thickness exceeds 150 µ and the substrate has an uneven profile.
- Test report: Delete clauses 9(c) and 9(j).
- Acceptance: Test results are acceptable if classified 0, 1, or 2 to Table 1.
4.6 SUBMISSIONS
Samples
If the specification does not state selected properties such as colour and texture, the effect of this clause is to require the
submission of samples covering the full range of those properties. The specification should define the item with enough
precision, either by description, or by reference to preselected samples, or as a proprietary item, to enable the contractor to
identify (and price) it. Where the covering is specified as a proprietary item use this clause as a means of confirmation.
Range: Submit labelled samples of resilient finishes illustrating the range of colour, pattern or texture
as seen in the finished work.
Minimum size per sample:

- Sheet: 450 x 450 mm.

- Tiles: A whole tile or 0.09 m2, whichever is the greater.
- Linear accessories (coving, skirting, stair nosing, protection strips, and the like): A piece 300 mm
long.
Welded joints: Submit a sample joint 300 mm long.
Seamless finishes
Seamless materials: Build up samples on a suitable base, showing the thickness of each coat.
Size: 450 x 450 mm.
Identification
Labelling: Label each sample, giving brand, product name, and manufacturer’s code reference
(including the code for each coat of multi-coat work).
Sample panels
Location: >
Size (mm): >
Call for sample panels only when large areas are specified. Delete if not required.
Trial set-out: Prepare a trial set-out before fixing.
Subcontractors
Tests
Manufacturer’s test data: Submit independent testing authorities’ reports of factory or type tests
showing that materials comply with cited standards.
Manufacturer’s data: Submit the manufacturer’s published product data for each type of finish, and
recommendations for its application in the project, including, where relevant the following:
- Composition, thickness, finish and time between coats for multi-coat work.
- Thickness and width of sheet or size of tile.
- Adhesive and jointing method.
- Resistance to wear, indentation, chemicals, light, fire, and the like.
- Flexibility and bending strength.
5 PRODUCTS
5.1 MARKING
Identification
General: Deliver materials to the site in the manufacturer’s original sealed containers legibly marked to
show the following:
- Manufacturer’s identification.
- Product brand name.
- Product type.
- Dimensions and quantity.
- Product reference code and batch number.
- Date of manufacture.
- Material composition and characteristics such as volatility, flash point, light fastness, colour and
pattern.
- Handling and installation instructions.
5.2 UNDERLAYS
A thin cementitious type underlay may be used as an isolating barrier of known resistance beneath antistatic or conductive
flooring if required. Other special underlay systems are available for the reduction of impact noise, these may be laid directly on
the substrate, or over an isolation pad or board, an embedded reinforcing mat is usual. Consult manufacturers of both underlay
and floor covering for compatibility and installation requirements.

Cementitious
General: Polymer modified cementitious self smoothing and levelling compound.
- Surface tolerance: To AS/NZS 2455.1 clause 1.4.
- Thickness: 3 mm minimum.
Fibre cement underlay
Standard: To AS/NZS 2908.2, Type B, category 2 minimum.
Thickness: 5 mm minimum.
Hardboard underlay
Classification: General purpose medium board, manufactured specifically as flooring underlay.
Thickness: 5.5 mm.
5.3 SHEETS AND TILES

Edges of sheets and tiles
General: Ensure edges are firm, unchipped, machine-cut accurately to size and square to the face,
and that tile edges are square to each other.
Cork tiles
Standard: To BS EN 12104.
Most of the cork tiles imported from Portugal are 305 x 305 mm square. Cork is not suitable for very heavy wear although
3
densities over 450 kg/m may be available for heavy contract use.
Linoleum
Corklinoleum
Rubber
Standard: To BS 1711.
Generally synthetic, available in various grades for specific uses e.g. where oils, fat, grease, acids and solvents are used. The
surface is commonly moulded into patterns - usually raised studs. Static dissipative grades are available for static control -
protection against electro-static discharge (ESD).
Polyvinyl chloride (PVC)
Resilient floor covering, jute or polyester felt backing: To BS EN 650.
Resilient floor covering, with foam layer: To BS EN 651.
Proprietary PVC products will generally be imported and comply with overseas standards. See RAIA EDG PRO13 and PRO14,
on PVC. Where slip resistance is a requirement ensure that the product maintains its resistance for the product’s service life.
See also the Commentary on slip resistance. Consult the manufacturer on suitability for service conditions, especially for severe
conditions such as underfloor heating or high humidity.
Vinyl bench topping
General: Fully flexible homogeneous sheet.
Counter topping grade is available but is less durable than laminate for heavy usage. Antistatic material is available where static
control is required, consult with manufacturer for special installation procedures.
Adhesives
Select adhesives recommended by the resilient finishes manufacturer. Special adhesives may be required for antistatic and
conductive applications.
Flexible terrazzo tiles
General: Marble or granite chips bedded in a flexible thermoset resin matrix, precision ground and
polished.
Conductive sheet vinyl
See the Commentary on conductive flooring.
General: Unbacked flexible PVC sheet with carbon particles permanently heat and pressure fused
throughout the thickness of the material with electrical resistance within the range of surface
resistance specified in AS 2834 clause 2.1.2, when tested to AS 4155.6.

AS 2834 sets out the environmental requirements for computer accommodation and clause 2.1.2 describes floors.
Antistatic sheet vinyl
General: Unbacked flexible PVC sheet, with antistatic properties.
Sheet vinyl products with antistatic properties generally refer to static dissipative grades, that provide for static control and
protection against electro-static discharge (ESD), however some standard products will provide some degree of control and may
prove adequate. See AS 2834 Appendix D (informative) for the control of static electricity in computer accommodation, test
methods are described.
Acoustic sheet vinyl

General: Unbacked flexible sheet vinyl laid over separate closed cell foam underlayment.
Underlayment thickness: 2 mm.
For built up applications using a separate acoustic underlay, a tested system from a single manufacturer is a to be preferred to
combining products from different manufacturers. Single layer resilient backed sheet vinyl will provide an alternative but with a
lower insulation rating.
Inlaid vinyl sheet
General: A layer of vinyl chips inlaid in a translucent vinyl matrix, bonded to a moisture resistant
backing.
5.4 SEAMLESS FINISHES

Epoxy base coat
General: An odourless, non-flammable, low toxicity, two pack pigmented epoxy resin of selected
colour, chemically cured, capable of bonding on to fresh or damp concrete when applied by brush or
roller.
On epoxies generally, see RAIA AN 14.01.615
Polyurethane undercoat
General: Two-pack aromatic polyurethane.
Use for both undercoat and top coat on external floors or floors subject to direct sunlight.
Polyurethane top coat
General: Two-pack light stable aliphatic polyurethane.
Cement rubber-latex
Type: A mixture of Portland or high alumina cement, aggregate, fillers and pigment, gauged with a
stabilised aqueous emulsion of rubber-latex, natural or synthetic.
5.5 SYNTHETIC SPORTING SURFACES

AS 3541.1 provides information on the different types of synthetic sporting surfaces and base layers for both indoor and outdoor
applications. Synthetic surfaces are defined, and the parameters which should be measured along with the basic safety
requirements are outlined. An extensive range of proprietary synthetic sporting surfaces and base layers are available for both
indoor and outdoor applications. See SAA HB49.2 on various synthetic sporting surfaces and subfloors (extracts from
AS 3541.1).
Standard
6 EXECUTION
6.1 SUBCONTRACTORS
General
General: Use specialist installers recommended by the materials manufacturers.
6.2 PREPARATION
Substrates
General: Ensure substrates conform to the Substrate tolerance table and are as follows:
- To AS/NZS 2455.1 or AS/NZS 2455.2, as appropriate.
- Clean and free of any deposit or finish which may impair adhesion or location and functioning of
movement joints.

Substrate tolerance table

Property Length of straight edge laid in Max. deviation under the
any direction straight edge
Flatness 3m 3 mm
Smoothness 150 mm 1 mm
Projections 50 mm 0.5 mm
Cleaning concrete surfaces: Mechanically remove the following surface treatments:

- Sealers and hardeners.
- Curing compounds.
Cleaning timber surfaces: Remove oil, grease and traces of applied finishes.
Concrete substrate correction: Remove projections and fill voids and hollows with a levelling
compound compatible with the adhesive.
Consider including the following:
“If raised areas are corrected by grinding test the freshly exposed concrete surface for pH and obtain verification of compatibility
with the adhesive”. Freshly exposed concrete has high alkalinity and problems have been encountered overseas.
Timber substrate correction: Remove projections. If conformance to the Substrate tolerance table
can not be achieved fix an underlay in brick pattern with joints avoiding substrate joints.
Moisture content: Do not commence installation unless:
- Concrete: The moisture content of the concrete has been tested to AS/NZS 2455.1 Appendix B and
the values in clause 2.4.2 (c) have been obtained.
- Plywood and timber: the moisture content of battens/joists or plywood background has been tested
to AS 1080.1 and values obtained as follows:
Seamless fnishes
Seamless flooring on concrete substrates: Prepare the substrate surface by one of the following
methods and vacuum clean prior to priming:
- Acid etching to using a solution of hydrochloric acid and water in equal parts, applied at 0.5 L/m2.
After reaction, wash concrete and allow to dry.
- Shot blasting.
- Scabbling.
- Rotary disk sanding.
- Needle gunning (small areas).
- Bush hammering (small areas).
Fixtures: Remove door stops and other fixtures, and refix in position undamaged on completion of the
installation.
Working environment
General: Do not start work before the building is enclosed, wet work is complete and dry, and good
lighting is available. Protect adjoining surfaces.
Conditioning
General: Stabilise the room temperature for seven days prior to, and two days after, installation of
resilient finishes, as follows:
- Areas with airconditioning installed: Run airconditioning at operational temperature.
- Airconditioned areas not operational: Maintain a room temperature range of < 30º > 18ºC.
- Underfloor heating: Turn off heating and allow background to stabilise at the temperature
recommended by the carpet manufacturer.
- Un-airconditioned areas: Install at < 30º > 18ºC.
Expose both faces of each sheet of underlay for > 24 hours before fixing.

Stack resilient sheet and tile floor covering for > 48 hours before installation.
6.3 SHEET AND TILE INSTALLATION

Sheet set out
General: Set out sheets to give the minimum number of joints. Run sheet joints parallel with the long
sides of floor areas, vertically on walls.
Tile set out
General: Set out tiles from the centre of the area. Wherever possible cut tiles at margins only, to give a
cut dimension of at least 100 mm x full tile width. Match edges and align patterns. Arrange the material
so that variation in appearance is minimised.
Joints
Non-welded: Butt edges together to form tight neat joints showing no visible open seam.
Delete if joints are welded.
Junctions
General: Scribe neatly up to returns, edges, fixtures and fittings. Finish flush with adjoining surfaces.
Rolling
General: Where rolling is required, roll the finish in 2 directions before the adhesive sets, using a 70 kg
multi-wheeled roller.
Change of finish
General: Maintain finished floor level across changes of floor finish including carpet.
Cleaning
General: Keep the surface clean as the work proceeds.
Finishing schedule
Sheet and tile type Finish Rolling after laying
Finish: e.g. “Buffable water emulsion polish”, “Two-pack clear polyurethane” (cork); “Buffable metallized emulsion polish”,
“Buffing only” for slip-retardant sheet (PVC); “Two coats buffable metallized emulsion polish” (cushion backed sheet vinyl).
6.4 TILING
Cork tiles
Laying: Provide a water-based latex adhesive. Do not use pins.
Finishing: Sand after laying.
Cork tiles can be sealed or given a clear finish.
Two-pack polyurethane will give the floors a harder finish with some loss of resilience. Coordinate with the Painting worksection.
Rubber tiles
General: Keep tiles flat during storage. Before laying allow the tiles to relax and decompress, and
ensure that the backs are free of loose material.
Adhesive:
- Horizontal surfaces: Solvent-free epoxy mechanically mixed and used only within the limit of pot life.
- Stair skirtings, stop ends, external mouldings and vertical surfaces: Neoprene contact adhesive
applied to both the tile or accessory and the substrate surface. Fix when both surfaces are touch
dry.
Laying: Lay tiles in stretcher bond. Match edges and align joints and studs. Ensure that the whole
surface of the tile or accessory is in contact with the substrate.
Stretcher bond reduces the possibility of the tiles lifting at the point where the four corners join. Chequerboard may be preferred
otherwise.

Finishing: Sweep, vacuum, and wash using clean warm water and household soap only, to remove
foreign matter, including protective wax coating. Buff when dry. Provide a suitable polish if
recommended in conjunction with buffing.
6.5 VINYL SHEETING

Welded joints
Select from the alternatives and note in the Welded joints schedule.
Heat welding: After fixing, groove the seams using a grooving tool and weld the joints with matching
filler rod and using a hot air welding gun. When the weld rod has cooled, trim off flush.
Was developed specifically for homogeneous sheet. It may be used for vinyl chip sheet but will be more conspicuous than cold
welding and will not have the same strength as heat welding in homogeneous sheet.
Cold welding: Apply seaming compound 100 mm wide to the substrate centrally under the seam. Roll
the seam until the compound is forced up into the joint. Clean off flush using a damp cloth.
Is less conspicuous and may be preferable for that reason.
Epoxy jointing: Join seams with epoxy adhesive.
For slip retardant vinyl sheet.
Welded joints schedule
Sheet and tile type Welding type
Conductive vinyl sheeting

General: Install conductive vinyl sheet on a copper grid comprising copper tape 80 µm thick x 10 mm
wide adhered to the floor with conductive adhesive. Lay copper tape along each length of sheet vinyl
and connect it at right angles to a 1 MΩ resistor. Connect to earth with copper tape at 20 – 30 m2
intervals.
Provide an earthing system if electrical resistance to earth or a conductive floor is required. The earthing grid will consist of
metallic strips laid directly under the flooring material, connection to building is made by a qualified electrician – a back up
connection is recommended. Metal fixtures and fittings should be isolated from the flooring. Additional requirements e.g.
earthing rails, placement of switches and outlets outside the area, atmosphere ionisation and humidity controls may be required
– include these under the relevant worksection.
6.6 SEAMLESS FLOORING

General
Seamless flooring: Do not install seamless flooring when the temperature in the laying area is outside
the recommended range.
Protection
General: Keep traffic off finished work for 60 hours.
Polyurethane
This specification is generally suitable for acid resistant floors. Consult manufacturers for other proprietary formulations.
Epoxy base coat: Apply colour epoxy base coat or coats at a rate which gives a finished thickness of
at least 250 µm.
Vinyl chips: Spread vinyl chips evenly over the floor into the epoxy base coat or into the first
polyurethane coat, or both.
Sanding: After the first or second polyurethane coat has been applied, sand the surface lightly using
power sander. Remove sanded material by vacuuming.
Polyurethane top coats: Apply at least 3 polyurethane top coats so that the epoxy base coat does not
show through and provide a total thickness of polyurethane above the chips of at least 200 µm, and a
total thickness of the top coats of at least 50 µm.

Anti-slip surface: Sprinkle glass beads at the rate of 125 g/m2 into the first polyurethane coat applied
after sanding, and while the floor is still wet.
Epoxy and polyester
Select either alternate or adjoining bays.
Laying in alternate bays: Divide the floor into bays up to 2 m wide. Lay every alternate bay. Where
required provide screed rails firmly anchored and accurately set to levels. Complete each bay in one
continuous operation to eliminate visible joints.
Intermediate bays may be laid the next day. First remove screed rails, and prime edges.
For large jobs.
Laying in adjoining bays: Divide the floor into bays up to 2 m wide. Where required provide screed
rails firmly anchored and accurately set to levels. Complete the floor in one continuous operation, to
ensure bonding and to eliminate visible joints.
For smaller jobs.
Sealing and finishing: After the screeded floor has cured (at least 12 hours after laying) remove loose
material and irregularities from the surface. Apply sealer to the surface in 2 coats, the second within
48 hours of the first.
Anti-slip surface: Incorporate anti-slip aggregates into the second sealer coat.
6.7 STAIRS
Rubber
Smallest tiles: Half tile.
Nosing tiles: Purpose-made matching tread, nosing and riser tile. Accurately scribe, cut and fit to
perimeters. Close butt seams.
Rubber nosing tiles are an alternative to forming standard tiles to radius. Proprietary anti-slip PVC or aluminium, or PVC
combined riser, nosing and tread are also available. Stair stringer profile with tapered edge is available in 300 mm width.
Vinyl
Preformed: Provide purpose-made vinyl stair finish combining riser, nosing and tread in the one
element. Lay each step consecutively with the joint at the bottom of each riser.
Formed in situ: Fit the sheet vinyl to each tread, and to the riser above, in one piece, coved in the
angle. Accurately scribe, cut and fit to stair nosings and perimeters.
Stair nosings
Aluminium: Purpose-made extruded anti-slip aluminium nosing.
Vinyl: Purpose-made moulded anti-slip section, matching the stair finish.
Stair finishes schedule
Location
Nosing
Colour
Pattern
Material
6.8 JOINTS AND ACCESSORIES

At areas of heavy use, particularly with wheeled traffic, consider specifying a prototype test for the joint product installation using
the anticipated wheeled equipment.
Junctions
General: Finish junctions flush with adjoining surfaces. Where changes of floor finish occur at
doorways locate the joint on the centreline of the closed door leaf.
If the floor finish is to be divided into bays, specify here the bay size, dividing strip or joint filler. Delete if not required. be subject
to heavy use.

Seamless finish junctions

General: Make the junction or exposed edge by one of the following methods:
- V-joint: Form the V-joint in the concrete base and carry the finish into the joint.
- Overlap: Carry the finish 100 mm past the junction line to be overlapped by the adjoining finish.
Accessories
General: Provide purpose-made matching moulded accessories for nosings, coves, skirtings, edge
cover strips and finishes at junctions, margins, and angles, if available. Otherwise form accessories
from the sheet material. Provide solid backing for radiused coves and nosings.
Accessory type Location
Accessory type: Specify required accessories, such as nosings, wedge fillets, tile edge trim, wall and capping trim and state
whether they are to be a proprietary item, purpose-made or formed (see Junctions).
For floor wastes to wet areas consult with manufacturer for special requirements e.g. flanged fittings to clamp over finish, and
coordinate with the Sanitary drainage clause in the Wastewater worksection.
Cover strips
General: Provide edge cover strips at junctions with different floor finishes and to exposed edges.
Metal cover strip: Extruded tapered strip 25 mm wide, of the same thickness as the sheet or tile. Fix
with matching screws to timber bases or to masonry anchors in concrete bases, at 200 mm maximum
centres.
- Material: >
e.g. ‘Brass’, ‘Stainless steel’ or ‘Aluminium’.
UPVC cover strip: Feather-edge strip matching the floor finish, fixed with contact adhesive.
- Width (mm): >
e.g. ‘25 mm’, ‘50 mm’.
- Colour: >
Movement joints
Location: Provide movement joints as follows:
- Over structural (isolation, contraction, expansion) joints.
- At junctions between different substrates.
Depth of joint: Right through to the substrate.
Sealant width: 6 – 25 mm.
Movement joint materials – sheet flooring
Movement joint materials – seamless finish
General: Carry the seamless finish material over the edges and down the sides of the control joint in
the base.


Location
Divider strip:
- Joint side-plate
material
- Neoprene colour
- Width
- Fixing
- Product
- Material
- Insert colour
Sealant:
- Type
- Colour
- Width (mm)

Divider strip:
Sealant:
Vinyl skirting
Select from the following.
Feather edge: Moulded PVC skirting section.
Intended for use with PVC or similar flat surface floor finishes, feather edge provides coverage of floor termination at the vertical
surface. Occasionally used where partitions are retro fixed over carpet.
Flat skirting: Flat PVC skirting section.
Flat PVC skirtings are intended for use with carpet and provide a solid margin to assist the carpet laying process. Skirtings may
be cut from sheet material but are more costly.
Fixing: Scribe as necessary. Mitre corners. Fix to walls with contact adhesive.
Minimum height: 100 mm.
Rubber coved skirtings and margins
General: Form from smooth flat sheet matching the colour and total thickness of the rubber flooring.
Scribe and mitre at internal corners.
External corners and stop ends: Provide purpose-made matching moulded pieces.
If moulded pieces are not available to match the rubber floor finish, consider using vinyl skirtings.
Coves and nosings
Provide where a continuous surface is required e.g. Wet areas, wet mopping, hygiene and clean rooms. A sealant or cover
mould may be necessary at the joint with the wall finish, the door jamb profile and width may require special consideration to
ensure a sealed overlap where the coving terminates at the door jamb.

Coved skirtings: Carry the flooring material up over a profiled coving section to form skirting, weld all
joints.
Location: >
State location if not shown on the drawings.
Minimum radius: Formed in situ:
- Vinyl finishes: 20 mm.
- Rubber finishes: 25 mm.
Vary radius as required.
6.9 COMPLETION
Protection
General: Keep traffic off floors until bonding has set or for 24 hours after laying, whichever period is
the longer. Do not allow water in contact with the finish for 7 days.
Reinstatement: Repair or replace faulty or damaged work. If the work cannot be repaired satisfactorily,
replace the whole area affected.
Warranties
General: For each type of resilient finish specified, submit the installer’s warranty of the workmanship
and application.
Warranty terms: >
Consult or negotiate with manufacturers for warranty terms, and specify only such terms as are actually available. State
requirements, if any.
Certificate of compliance
General: Provide a Certificate of compliance for antistatic and conductive floor installations.
Maintenance manual
General: Submit manufacturer’s published use, care and maintenance requirements for each type of
finish.
Spare materials
General: Supply spare matching covering materials and accessories of each type for future
replacement purposes. Store the spare materials on site where directed.
Spare material schedule
Material Quantity Storage location
Cleaning
Consult resilient finish manufacturers for cleaning instructions and recommendations on polishing, etc. Polyurethane reinforced
vinyls do not require sealing or polishing (they are mopped and dry buffed), and other vinyl floors only require mopping. For
installations in existing buildings, consult the building user as to current maintenance procedures, type of polish used, etc., and
make the new installations compatible as far as possible.
General: Clean the finished surface. Buff and polish. Before handover, mop and leave the finished
surface clean and undamaged on completion.
Cleaning antistatic and conductive flooring
General: Do not use sealers, wax or floor polish. Clean using a mild neutral detergent and lukewarm
water. A clean floor may be dry buffed using a normal scrubbing machine and a white nylon pad.
Sealers and polishes affect or destroy the antistatic properties.

7 SELECTIONS
7.1 SCHEDULES
Sheet and tile schedule
Designation RF1 RF2 RF3
Type
Form
Colour
Pattern
Tile laying pattern
Sheet width (mm)
Thickness (mm)
Vinyl chip size (mm)
Surface
Tile dimensions (mm)
Underlay
Much of the scheduled information will be unnecessary if resilient finishes are specified by proprietary item.
Include any particular requirements not otherwise specified, such as resistance to wear, indentation, chemicals, light or fire.
Consult manufacturer.
Type: e.g. ‘Linoleum’, ‘Cork’, ‘Rubber’, ‘Vinyl (PVC)’, ‘Antistatic vinyl’, ‘Conductive vinyl’, ‘Cushion backed vinyl’, ‘Vinyl counter
topping’.
Form: e.g. ‘Sheet’ or ‘Tile’ (Vinyl, linoleum, cork, rubber); Unbacked flexible sheet, Semi-rigid floor tiles, Flexible floor tiles, Inlaid
vinyl sheet (PVC).
Pattern: e.g. ‘Marbled’ or ‘Plain’ (Linoleum, PVC).
Tile laying pattern: e.g. “Checkerboard” or “Stretcher bond”.
Thickness: e.g.:
• For cork: 4.75 mm or 6.3 mm (6.3 mm is recommended for concrete floors).
• For rubber: 2.7, 4, 5, or 6 mm.
• For flexible terrazzo tiles: 4.76 mm.
• For flexible PVC sheet or tiles: 1.5, 2, 2.5 or 3 mm.
• For semi-rigid PVC tiles: 1.5, 2, 2.5, or 3 mm.
• For linoleum sheet or tiles: 2 or 2.5 mm.
Surface:
• For cork: Smooth surface only.
• For rubber: May be smooth, textured, or studded. For studded sheet or tile state form and profile of studs. Consult
manufacturer for available forms.
• For PVC: Normally smooth surface, but various textured or inlaid anti-slip surfaces are available. Semi-rigid tiles may have
a factory-applied protective coating. Consult manufacturer for details of the available surfaces.
Tile dimensions: 300 x 300 mm is standard size for PVC tiles and 305 x 305 mm for Portuguese cork tiles. Rubber tiles are
usually 1000 x 1000 mm or 500 x 500 mm. Consult manufacturer for available sizes and thicknesses.
Underlay: e.g. ‘Trowelled’, ‘Hardboard’, ‘Fibre cement sheet’. Consult manufacturers of resilient flooring for recommended
underlay for particular applications. State thickness.

Seamless finishes schedule

Designation SF1 SF2 SF3
Type
Colour
Pattern
Surface
Minimum finished dry film thickness ( m)
Undercoat
Edge finish
Underlay
Much of the scheduled information will be unnecessary if resilient finishes are specified by proprietary item.
Type: e.g. ‘Polyurethane seamless finish’, ‘Cement rubber-latex seamless finish’, ‘Epoxy and polyester seamless finish’. Epoxy
and polyester seamless finish can provide chemical resistance, impact resistance, abrasion resistance and decontaminable
surface suitable for food processing plants, warehouses and storage areas, cold stores and freezers, fish and meat processing
plants.
Colour: and Pattern: Consult manufacturers.
Surface: e.g. ‘Anti-slip’ (polyurethane, epoxy and polyester); ‘Trowelled smooth’ (cement-latex).
Minimum finished dry film thickness: Consult manufacturers.
Undercoat: (Polyurethane) ‘Use top coat formulation’ if the floor is external or subject to direct sunlight. Otherwise delete.
Edge finish: e.g. ‘Brass, stainless steel or aluminium cover strip’, ‘V joint’, ‘Overlap’.
Underlay: e.g. ‘Trowelled’, ‘Hardboard’, ‘Fibre cement sheet’.
Seamless flooring schedule
Seamless finish type
Laying method:
- Number of coats
- Spreading rate per coat
- Time between coats for multi-coat work
Laying method: e.g. “In alternate bays” (for large jobs), or “In adjoining bays”.
• Number of coats: Depends on required thickness.
• Spreading rate per coat: Consult manufacturers.
• Time between coats for multi-coat work: Consult manufacturers.
Synthetic sporting surfaces schedule
Designation SS1 SS2 SS3
Type
Sport/activity
Underlay
Surface product
Fire performance: Maximum indices to
AS/NZS 1530.3:
- Ignitability
- Spread of flame
- Heat evolved

Designation SS1 SS2 SS3

- Smoke developed
Surface marking method
Type: “Indoor” or “Outdoor”.

Sport / activity: See AS 3541.1 Table 1 “Guide to surfacing materials”.
Underlay: Consult the manufacturer of the proprietary surface for recommendations as to the need for, and type of, underlay.
Surface marking method: See AS 3541.1 clause 12 for guidance.

CARPETS FINISH
CARPETS
This worksection is applicable to broadloom carpet, carpet tiles and associated underlay materials.
• Resilient finishes for vinyl, rubber and epoxy floor finishes.
• General requirements
• Coir or seagrass matting.
• None.
• Nominate the locations of finishes and finish abutments, movement joints and note fixed partitions on drawings to your
office documentation policy.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
Lay carpet to backgrounds as follows and/or to the Selections:
- To remain secured for the warranty life of the carpet.
- To remain consistently smooth for the warranty life of the carpet.
- To form the pattern required.

General
have no overlaps.
>
• Concrete finishes for substrates.
• Flooring and decking for substrates.
• Access floors.
• Floor sanding and finishing for substrates.

CARPETS FINISH
1.3 INTERPRETATION
Definitions
- Substrate, subfloor: The surface on which the textile floor covering or the underlay is to be laid.
1.4 INSPECTION
Notice
- Each batch of material upon delivery to the works.
- Subfloor prepared to receive the carpet installation.
- Fixings, edge strips, and underlay installed ready to lay carpet.
- Completed carpet after cleaning and before covering for protection.
Hold points, if required, should be inserted here. e.g. moisture content in concrete substrates.
1.5 TESTS
General
Tests: Arrange for the Australian Wool Testing Authority Limited (AWTA) as follows:
- Take random samples in accordance with AS/NZS 2119.
- Conduct the specified testing.
- Submit the original copy of each relevant test report.
If sampling is not to be done by the testing authority, specify how the samples are to be authenticated to the satisfaction of both
parties.
Test groups
General: In the Tests table the letters T, S and Q each comprise one test group, defined as follows:
- Type test group (T): Tests on samples of carpet having the same specification, but not necessarily
from carpet manufactured for the project. Authenticated test reports less than 12 months old are
acceptable.
Type test group (T) may be required to assist in the preselection of the type or colouration of the carpet, or to evaluate
properties such as colourfastness, electrostatic protection, or fire resistance before final selection.
If the manufacturer is prepared to warrant compliance with the relevant properties, this test may not be required.
- Specification test group (S): Tests on samples taken before laying from carpet manufactured for the
project.
- Quality assurance test group (Q): Tests on samples taken from the site during laying or from the
manufacturer’s premises before dispatch to the site.
The Quality assurance test group is a restricted series of tests selected to ensure compliance with critical properties which may
be subject to variation during a production run.
Number of tests
For each type of test group (T, S or Q) perform the number of tests given in the Number of tests
schedule as follows:
- For each type of carpet specified.
- For each specified area (or part thereof) of installed carpet.
Number of tests schedule
Test group type Number of tests Per installed area
T One only not applicable
S each 5000 m2
Q each 5000 m2
Number of tests:
• T: (If used) one only, because there is no point in testing properties that can vary from batch to batch on samples other
than those made for the project. Delete if type tests are not required.

CARPETS FINISH
2
• S: e.g. “One”. All properties designated “S” would be tested once for each 5000 m or part.
2
• Q: e.g. “Three”. Each property designated “Q” would be tested three times for each 5000 m or part. For jobs less than
2
500 m “nil” may be appropriate.
Properties to be tested
General: Test the properties in each group, by the appropriate test method, as described in the Tests
table.
Tests table
Carpet property: Designate only the test properties which are relevant to the purpose.
Carpet property Test method Test group

Colour fastness:
- To artificial light AS 2001.4.21 T S Q
- To water AS 2001.4 E01 T S
- To rubbing AS/NZS 2111.19.1 T S
- To shampoo solution AS/NZS 2111.19.2 T S Q
- To solvents AS 2001.4.16 T S
Treatment:
- For insect resistance AS 2001.6.1 S
- For fire resistance AS/NZS 1530.3 T
Dichloromethane extractable AS 2001.3.4 S Q
matter of pile
Pile structure:
- Total pile mass AS/NZS 2111.11 S
- Pile mass above substrate AS/NZS 2111.5 S Q
- Tuft density AS/NZS 2111.9 S
- Tuft withdrawal force AS/NZS 2111.15 S Q
Burning behavior AS/NZS 2111.18 T
Bond strength between AS/NZS 2111.16 S Q
backing components
Electrostatic protection:
- Electrical resistance AS 4155.6 S
- Electrostatic propensity AATCC TM 134 S
Soft underlay property:
- Mass per unit area AS/NZS 2111.3 Q
- Fibre content AS 2001.7.5 Q
- Performance AS 4288 T
- Thickness BS 4051 Q
- Thickness deviation AS 4288 Q
- Extractable matter AS 2001.3.4 Q
Tile dimensions BS 5921 S Q
Pile yarn construction:
- Yarn count AS 2001.2.23 S
- Twist level AS 2001.2.14 S
If the Australian Carpet Classification Scheme (ACCS) grade is specified, in the Carpet and laying schedule, many if not all of
these tests do not need to be specified.
The placing of the letters “T”, “S” and “Q” in the column headed Test group is intended to indicate a typical selection of tests for
each group; vary as required for the project.
Treatment:
• For insect resistance: AS 2001.6.1 is the biological referee method using moth or carpet beetle larvae, and can involve a
certain amount of delay in obtaining results.
Dichloromethane extractable matter of pile: Not suitable for the extraction of polyester of polyolefin pile fibres.
Pile structure: Include total pile mass only for woven and unbacked samples.

CARPETS FINISH
Bond strength between backing components: Applicable only to tufted carpets which have a secondary backing. Foam-backed
carpets are sometimes subject to a peel strength test with totally different performance criteria.
Electrostatic protection:
• Electrical resistance: This test is the most appropriate for electronic equipment protection. It is similar, but not identical, to
the test described in AS 2834 Appendix D. This test is cited here for consistency with the Access floors worksection.
• Electrostatic propensity: This test may be specified where uncomfortable electrostatic shocks are unacceptable. Values
below 2500 V at a relative humidity of 25% are usually acceptable, but this will not necessarily eliminate electronic
equipment faults.
Pile yarn construction: Include yarn count and twist level only if yarn on cones will be available.
1.6 SUBMISSIONS
Samples
General: Submit labelled production run samples illustrating the range of colour, pattern, texture and
pile yarn available in the required carpet types.
Sample size:
- Carpet: 1 m long x roll width or 1 m wide, whichever is less.
- Tiles: 4 x tile size.
Edge strip: Submit a 300 mm length of each type.
Underlay: Submit one labelled sample.
- Size: At least 600 x 600 mm.
Penetrations: Submit one production carpet sample with a penetration access cut as specified in
Laying carpet.
Accessories: Submit one sample of each of the following:
- Carpet gripper.
- Heat-bonding tape.
- Bonding adhesive.
Stitching: Submit one sample, at least 1 m long, of a stitched seam.
Prototype
Size: Lay a sample area at least 10 m2 of each type of carpet, including underlay, accessories, and
3 m of typical seam.
Location: >
Consider whether the project size warrants a sample area, or whether a smaller area than that called for here will suffice.
Subcontractors
General: Submit name and contact details of proposed suppliers and installers.
More than one firm may be named, and the Conditions of tendering may require tenderers to state which firm they intend to use.
Shop drawings
General: Submit drawings indicating the proposed layout, including location of joints in carpet
installations.
Installation
AS/NZS 2455.1 clause 2.3.2(k) requires the (sub)contractor to submit a floor covering plan for residential installations. Delete if
not appropriate.
Floor covering plan: Submit a floor covering plan before installation.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CARPET
Tolerances
Tolerances can be critical e.g. where corridor size and carpet body size are nominally the same. Delete if not appropriate.

CARPETS FINISH
Batching
General: Carpet laid in a single area and of a single specified type, quality, colour and design, must
come from one manufacturing batch and dye lot.
Insect resistance
Insecticide: Provide carpets and underlays composed entirely of materials either inherently resistant to
insect attack, or treated against insect attack, including by moth and carpet beetle, by application of
insecticide to the yarn during the dyeing or scouring process.
Approved insecticides
General: Provide insecticides listed in the Approved insecticides table.
Alternatives: Other agents may be used provided they comply with the recommended application
levels promulgated from time to time by the Woolmark Company for Level 4 protection.
Approved insecticides table
Insecticide Minimum level of application (per cent on weight of wool
pile fibre)
Dyebath application Scouring application
Eulan U33 0.36% 0.45%
Mitin LP 0.44% 0.54%
Perigen 0.25% 0.32%
Fire resistance
General: Provide carpet which does not exceed the indices specified when a sample, clamped at the
edges to an incombustible substrate without underlay or padding, is tested to AS/NZS 1530.3 and
AS ISO 9239.
Indices: >
Important where the relevant building code specifies limits for the type of occupancy, e.g. foyers, theatres. If the carpet is to be
used in lift cars it must comply with AS 1735 (various parts are widely cited in the BCA).
Electrical resistance
General: Provide carpet which is within the range of surface resistance specified in AS 2834 clause
2.1.2, when tested to AS 4155.6.
AS 2834 sets out the environmental requirements for computer accommodation and clause 2.1.2 describes floors. AS 2834
requires that the surface resistance or bulk resistance shall be not less than 500 kilo-ohms and not more than 20 gigaohms. The
minimum value is specified as a protection against electric shock, and the maximum value as a protection against the build up
of undesirable electrostatic charges which affect sensitive computer installations.
Electrostatic propensity
Criterion: Provide a maximum electrostatic propensity value for carpet of 2500 V at a relative humidity
of 25%.
Important to prevent personal discomfort and equipment damage due to static electricity in floors where computers are located.
Test method: AATCC TM 134.
2.2 CARPET TILES

Carpet tiles
Type: “Non-stick”, non-curling tiles capable of being taken up without damage and then relaid in
different positions.
Marking: On the back, showing recommended direction of laying.
Carpet tile tolerances:
- Edge dimensions: ± 2 mm.
- Squareness: Maximum difference of 2 mm between lengths of diagonals.
2.3 MATS
Coir mats
General: Provide a mat made to fit each designated mat recess to the Mats schedule.

CARPETS FINISH
Mats schedule
Location Mat type Mat size (mm) Recess trim
Location: e.g. Door GD1.

Mat type: e.g. Coir, rubber, woven synthetics and hinged aluminium and carpet composites - are best specified as proprietary
items. Options such as colour, depth and durability should also be addressed.
Mat size: A dimension of at least 1.25 m, preferably 2 m, in the direction of travel at doorways is recommended.
2.4 UNDERLAYS
Standard
Fibre cement underlay
Thickness: 5 mm minimum.
Hardboard underlay
Classification: General purpose medium board, manufactured specifically as flooring underlay.
Thickness: 5.5 mm.
Hard underlay sheets are used if the substrate (e.g. an existing floor) cannot be brought to an acceptable surface.
Soft underlay
2.5 ADHESIVES AND TAPES

Standard
Adhesives
General: Compatible with the floor covering material, and suitable for bonding it to the subfloor.
Type: >
e.g. Peel up or permanent stick or delete if not adhesive fixed. Subject to manufacturer’s advice on suitability, adhesive fixing
may be used to fix carpet direct to concrete (but not timber) subfloors, or to hard underlays. Resists partial rucking of tufted
carpet subject to wheeled or heavy foot traffic. The peel-up method has the advantage of easy removal. The permanent stick
method makes the carpet difficult to remove for replacement, but is otherwise preferable.
Friction compound: Suitable for holding tiles in position without permanent sticking.
Hot-melt adhesive tapes
General: Commercial grade glass fibre and cotton thermoplastic adhesive coated tape 60 mm wide on
a 90 mm wide metal foil base and backed with silicon-coated release paper.
There may be other types. Consult the carpet manufacturer for recommendations on type, grade and size of tape suitable for
the selected carpet.
2.6 STRIPS
Preformed gripper strips
General: Commercial grade plywood carpet gripper strip with 3 rows of rust-resistant angled pins of
length appropriate to the carpet type.
Or architectural grade. AS/NZS 2455.1 covers domestic grade and commercial grade gripper strips.
Size (minimum): 33 mm wide x 7 mm thick.
Location: At edges, except where edge strips are used. Provide double gripper strips to edges where
recommended.

CARPETS FINISH
Edge strips
Type: Heavy duty edge strip appropriate to the floor covering type (tackless or adhesive fixed),
capable where necessary of accommodating different levels of adjacent floor finishes.
Form: Metal moulding or extrusion, with vinyl inserts.
Colour: >
Location: At exposed edges of the carpet, and at junctions with differing floor finishes or finishes of a
different thickness. Where edge strips occur at doorways, locate the junctions directly below the
closed door.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 SUBSTRATE
Substrates
AS/NZS 2455.1 Appendix A requires the (sub)contractor to seek advice from the purchaser about relevant details of the subfloor
and contains extensive contractual requirements.
General: Ensure substrates conform to the Substrate tolerance table and are as follows:
- To AS/NZS 2455.1 or AS/NZS 2455.2, as appropriate.
movement joints.
Substrate tolerance table
Property Length of straight edge laid in Max. deviation under the
any direction straight edge
Flatness 3m 6 mm
Smoothness 150 mm 1 mm
Concrete substrate correction: Remove projections and fill voids and hollows with a levelling
compound compatible with the adhesive.
Timber substrate correction: Remove projections. If conformance to the Substrate tolerance table
can not be achieved fix an underlay in brick pattern with joints avoiding substrate joints.
Moisture content: Do not commence installation unless:
values obtained as follows:
. ≤ 5.5% when tested by the electrical resistance method.
The higher the electrical resistance of a given material, the more likely it is to contribute to electrostatic build up problems.
. ≤ 70% when tested by the surface hygrometer test.
- Plywood: The moisture content of battens/joists or plywood background has been tested to
AS 1080.1 and values obtained as follows:
Fixtures: Remove door stops and other fixtures, and refix in position undamaged on completion of the
installation.
Conditioning
AS/NZS 2455.1 Section 2 covers conditioning of carpet and subfloor, temperature conditions of material and laying area,
operation of airconditioning and underfloor heating, installation of hard and soft underlays, and laying procedures, including
seaming, joining, stretching, and various fixing methods.

CARPETS FINISH
General: Stabilise the room temperature for seven days prior to, and two days after laying carpet as
follows:
- Areas with airconditioning installed: Run airconditioning at operational temperature.
- Airconditioned areas not operational: Maintain a room temperature range of < 35º > 10ºC.
- Underfloor heating: Turn off heating and allow background to stabilise at the temperature
recommended by the carpet manufacturer.
- Un-airconditioned areas: Install at < 35º > 10ºC.
Expose both faces of each sheet of underlay for > 24 hours before fixing.
Unroll the carpet and soft underlay and allow them to come to the temperature of the in-service
environment before laying.
3.2 LAYING CARPET

Standard
Setting out
General: Lay the carpet in continuous lengths without cross joins in the body of the area. Where
unavoidable cross joins occur at doorways, locate the joins directly below the closed doors.
Restricting cross joins to doorways can lead to undue expense, particularly in direct-stick installations. Amend as you see fit.
Note requirement for proposed layout in shop drawings under Submissions.
Joints in underlay: Ensure joints in underlay do not coincide with carpet joints. Do not carry underlay
over carpet grippers or edge strips.
Partition layout: Confirm that permanent partitions have been installed before starting carpet laying.
Fixing underfelt
To timber floors: Secure underfelt with staples at 100 mm centres at edges and joints, in parallel lines
600 mm apart.
Stapling is an option in AS/NZS 2455.1 clause 3.5.3 (f). Delete if dual bonded underlay (double stick) is noted below.
To concrete floors: Glue continuously at edges and joints with a 100 mm wide strip to each piece, and
at 600 mm centres both ways with 150 mm diameter patches.
Seaming methods
Woven carpet: Machine or hand sew. Do not provide glued taped seams.
Tufted carpet: Seam with hot-melt adhesive tape.
Fixing
Permanent stick method: Immediately after laying, and again one hour later, roll the carpet from the
centre diagonally towards each edge using a 65 kg multi-wheeled roller. Do not roll foam-backed
carpet.
Dual bonded underlay: Fix with adhesive between carpet and underlay, and between underlay and
subfloor.
Gripping system: Preformed gripper strip and tackless edge strip. Space fixings at 150 mm maximum
centres.
Nominate fixing method in SELECTIONS.
Cutting laid carpet

Method: Where penetrations through laid carpet are necessary for electrical, telephone or other
outlets, cut the carpet either by cross cutting or by cutting rectangular or circular openings.
Cutting holes in concrete floors: Protect the carpet and remove concrete particles and dust on
completion. Replace the cut carpet over the opening without any signs of fraying or other damage, and
fix with a peel-up adhesive, or resew.
3.3 LAYING CARPET TILES

General
Set out: Do not provide cut tiles which are less than half tile width. Provide full tiles in doorways. Keep
joint lines straight.

CARPETS FINISH
Laying: Do not allow the pile to catch in the joint when laying. Do not tack or sew the tiles to the floor
or to each other.
Pattern: >
Wool pile tiles are usually laid chequerboard.
Fixing
Perimeter and grid system: Fix with friction compound under tiles in a 10 x 10 grid pattern. Do not fix
other tiles.
Direct stick system: Adhesive fix to 100% of floor area.
Dual bonded underlay: Fix with adhesive between carpet and underlay, and between underlay and
subfloor.
Nominate fixing method in SELECTIONS.
Fixing cut tiles: Adhesive fix to 100% of tile.
3.4 LAYING ON STAIRS

Fixing method
To concrete stairs: Adhesive fixing.
To timber stairs:
- Closed rise types: Tackless method, with a gripper strip in each angle between treads and risers.
- Open rise types: Adhesive fixing.
Laying method
Closed rise types: Apply the floor covering continuously to the treads and risers.
Open rise types: Wrap the carpet around the tread and neatly butt join beneath the nosing if a
separate nosing is required, or if not, in the centre of the underside of the tread.
Show details on the drawings. If a separate nosing is not used, the substrate nosing should be shown rounded to 18 – 25 mm
radius.
Stair nosing type >
e.g. “Approved extruded anti-slip aluminium nosing” or “Purpose-made moulded anti-slip vinyl section”, or specify by proprietary
name.
3.5 CARPETED SKIRTINGS

General
Laying: Fix skirting carpet to the wall, and neatly terminate the top edge.
Location: >
Specify location(s) here if not shown on the drawings.
Method of fixing: >
Termination method for top edge: >
e.g. “Turn and staple”, “Edge strip”. Preferably show details on the drawings.
3.6 COMPLETION
Maintenance manual
Contents: Submit a maintenance manual containing a technical specification of the carpet installation
and setting out the manufacturer’s recommendations, approved by the Australian Wool Corporation in
the case of products containing wool, for its use, care and maintenance. Include the names and
addresses of the suppliers and manufacturers of each component.
For major carpet installations. Delete if not required.
Spares
Spare material: Supply spare matching materials of each type, colour and design of carpet from the
same batch for future replacement purposes.
Offcuts: Retain carpet offcuts exceeding 0.5 m2 in area and 450 mm in both length and width.

CARPETS FINISH
Labelling: Label spare and offcut material appropriately, including the location of the laid area
corresponding to each batch. Securely and separately package each batch in a suitable wrapping.
Quantity of spare material: At least 1% of the quantity installed, in full or part length rolls.
Storage locations: >
Cleaning
Progressively clean the work. Remove waste, excess materials and adhesive.
Final cleaning: When the installation is complete, clean the carpet as necessary to remove extraneous
matter, marks and soiling and to lift the pile where appropriate.
Protection: provide fabric drop sheets. Do not use plastic sheeting. If wheeled traffic is to follow carpet
installation protect with hardboard sheets butted and fixed with adhesive tape.
4 SELECTIONS
4.1 SCHEDULES
Carpet underlay schedule
Carpet designation C1 C2 C3
Location
Hard underlay
Soft underlay:
- Use classification
- Type
Hard underlay: e.g. “Hardboard” or “Fibre cement”. May include “seamless” underlays on rough concrete floors to bring them to
an acceptable surface. Examples are cement, rubber-latex and magnesite (specified in the Resilient finishes) and cementitious
toppings. Transfer them here only if they are to be provided by the carpet installer.
Soft underlay: AS 4288 Table 2 designates performance requirements and nominates deflection and compression results after
dynamic loading for each of the intended use classifications.
Use classification: Select from AS 4288 clause 5 as follows:
• LR – Light residential use, not suitable for stairs.
• GR – General residential use.
• L – Luxury use, domestic/ commercial where high energy absorption is desirable.
• GC – General commercial use, suitable for normal foot and wheel traffic
• HC – Heavy commercial use, suitable for heavy foot and wheel traffic and castor chairs.
Type: Select from:
• Needlefelt: 60% animal fibre and 40% jute, reinforced with polypropylene scrim with a minimum mass of 50 g/m², or
hessian fabric with a minimum mass of 150 g/m². A 60/40 hair-jute underlay gives good wear and resilience and is
recommended, particularly for carpet with sewn seams. Minimum mass of 1187 g/m². Needlefelt soft underlays are suitable
for large areas, heavy use, and fire resistance.
• Cellular plastics (polymeric): High density polymeric foam sandwiched between reinforced carrier fabric.
• Cellular rubber: Heavy-duty vulcanised rubber, waffle pattern, with a backing of reinforcing fabric. Heavy-duty vulcanised
rubber, waffle pattern, with a backing of reinforcing fabric of either hessian, spun nylon, or polyester. Rubber underlays are
suitable for small areas with light use, and are more resilient than felted types.
Most carpet tiles do not require underlay – some incorporate a sponge underlay.
Carpet and laying schedule

See also the Commentary on this topic.

CARPETS FINISH
Location
Generic type
Colour and pattern
ACCS Grade
Structure classification to AS 2454
Surface appearance (style)
Colour fastness (minimum rating):
- Artificial light
- Water
- Rubbing
- Shampoo solution
- Solvents
Pile fibre:
- Mean fibre diameter (µm)
- Extractable matter of pile (% maximum)
- Composition
- Pile finish
Pile yarn construction:
- Method of manufacture
- Yarn ply
- Yarn count (tex)
- Twist level
Pile structure:
- Total pile mass (g/m2)
- Pile thickness above substrate (mm)
- Pile mass above substrate (g/m2)
- Tuft density (tufts/100 mm):
in machine direction
transverse to machine direction
- Tuft withdrawal force (N)
Primary backing:
- Type
- Construction
- Mass (g/m²)
Secondary backing:
- Type
- Construction
- Mass (g/m2)
Bond strength between backing components (N)
Treatments:
- For insect resistance

CARPETS FINISH
- For fire resistance:
ignitability index
spread of flame index
smoke developed index
- Electrostatic protection
Dimensions (mm)
Fixing method
Seaming method
If there is more than one type of carpet installation, complete a schedule for each type. Delete items from the schedule which
are not applicable to the carpet type (or write “Not applicable”). Consult carpet manufacturers for technical and performance
requirements of selected carpet types, or specify outright by proprietary item.
If specifying by proprietary item, identify the manufacturer, brand name, catalogue number, pile fibre and other characteristics
sufficient to identify and price the selected carpet. If these particulars are not available, specify by the generic properties in this
schedule.
Location: e.g. “Shown on the drawings”, or specify here the floors, stairs and other surfaces to be carpeted. Use the defined
codes.
Generic type: e.g. the “structure classification” of AS 2454, in which the basic categories are pile carpets and non-pile carpets.
Pile carpets are subdivided into woven pile (plain, Jacquard, Wilton, Axminster), tufted pile, knitted, bonded, needled (most
carpet tiles), knotted, and flock.
Colour and pattern: Select colour from a large (1 m²) sample under final lighting conditions. Wilton is restricted to a maximum of
five colours.
ACCS Grade: Carpets are graded under the Australian Carpet Classification Scheme, which has been operated by the Carpet
Institute of Australia (CIA) for over 15 years. Specifying this grade means that many of the generic items dealt with in the
schedule do not need to be addressed at all. Carpets are graded in terms of durability and appearance retention, with 6
residential grades, and 8 contract grades, running from Light Duty, to Extra Heavy Duty and Stairs.
Pile fibre:
• Composition: Wool, nylon, polypropylene, acrylic, polyester, viscose, cotton or hair, or percentage mixtures of these such
as 80/20 wool-nylon. Also, anti-static nylon which contains stainless steel threads.
• Pile finish: Cut pile, loop pile or cut-loop pile.
• Pile thickness above substrate: Dense carpet with short pile wears better than less dense carpet with longer pile of the
same mass.
Primary backing: Jute for weft, cotton or polypropylene or PVA for warp. Note that some backings act as vapour barriers causing
condensation damage to timber or particleboard subfloors. Plastic backing for carpet tiles is more stable than bitumen backing.
Secondary backing: For some tufted (non-woven) carpets.
Treatments: Static and fire are less of a problem for wool than for other carpet types.
Dimensions: For carpet tiles, and for width of broadloom (commonly 3.66 m) or body (690 or 910 mm) carpet.
Fixing method: AS/NZS 2455.1 covers gripper, direct-stick, and double-bond systems. Generally, select from the following:
• Direct permanent stick for latex foam backed and fibre bonded pile carpets, and non-pile carpets. Only high density carpets
should be direct-stuck.
• Friction compound for carpet tiles (often, one tile in six).
• Gripper strip for all other carpets.
Where adhesive-fixing, permanent stick is preferred to peel-up although it makes carpet replacement more difficult. Adhesive
fixing is generally suitable for concrete floors or hard underlays, but not timber floors.
Seaming method: See AS/NZS 2455.1 clause 3.3.2. Hand sewn is better than taped.
There are possible health risks from some chemicals used in carpet manufacture, installation and maintenance, particularly
styrenebutadiene latex backing, and the glues used to fix down some carpets and carpet tiles.
Refer to BCA Specification C1.10 for fire hazard properties requirements. Carpet is not a deemed-to-comply material, nor is it
exempted.

FLOATING PANEL FLOORS FINISH
FLOATING PANEL FLOORS
This worksection is applicable to manufactured floating panel floor systems on various substrates. It assumes the provision of a
substrate or a supporting structure for an underlay.
• Flooring and decking for strip flooring nailed to framed substrates, platform floors and external open jointed decking.
• Applied timber flooring for fitted block parquet and mosaic parquet flooring, strip flooring adhesive fixed to a continuous
substrate and adhesive fixed manufactured panel flooring.
• Floor sanding and finishing for sanding and finishing.
The following worksections must be included if this worksection is used on a concrete substrate, to provide a complete
specification:
The following worksections must be included if this worksection is used on a framed and sheeted substrate, to provide a
complete specification:
• Flooring and decking
• None.
• Set out floor patterns and location of movement joints on drawings to your office documentation policy.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Ventilation requirements are set out in the BCA Volume 2 clause 3.1.2.3 Site Surface Drainage and 3.4.1 Sub-floor Ventilation.
Note the requirements vary for climate zones. Open spaces under timber floors can be subjected to hot drying wind at times that
could shrink the flooring and in these circumstances a vapour barrier is recommended under the flooring.
Responsibilities
General: Provide floating flooring systems to backgrounds as follows and/or to the Selections:
- Appropriately smooth and flat for the intended use.
- Form the pattern required.
- With the timber content of the panel at its equilibrium moisture content.

General

have no overlaps.
>
1.3 INTERPRETATION
Definitions
The flooring definitions are specific to NATSPEC. They can be edited to suit the project or deleted if not required.
- Substrate: The building element to which the panel flooring is fixed.
e.g. concrete slabs, bearers and joists, or structural sheet floor framing.
Under these conditions, timber would be expected to be dimensionally stable.
- Feature: Any figure, grain, natural variation or colour which affects timber appearance.
See the Commentary on timber.
- Flooring:
. Continuously-supported: Flooring which is supported by, and directly fixed to, continuous
supporting surfaces.
. Floating: Any manufactured flooring panel system not fixed to the substrate.
Floor panels that are not adhered to the substrate are marketed as “Floating floors”. Flooring systems fixed to the substrate with
resilient mounts are not included in this category.
. Manufactured floor panels: Manufactured flooring with wearing and decorative surfaces of timber
or plastic laminated to supporting layers of plywood usually with tongues and grooves along the
lengths of the boards.
- Underlay: Sheet material fixed to supporting structure and forming part of the substrate on which
flooring may be continuously supported.
Underlay sheeting of plywood or particle board is often recommended to correct the background or to provide support for
adhesive fixed flooring on suspended timber floors.
- Acoustic underlay: A resilient underlay intended to absorb sound.
If the acoustic properties of the background do not conform to the BCA an acoustic underlay will be required under the underlay
sheeting.
1.4 INSPECTION
Notice
- Substrate: Immediately before flooring.


- Trial set-out: Before execution.
1.5 TESTS
Moisture content
Test method for concrete substrate: To AS/NZS 2455.1 Appendix B.
1.6 SUBMISSIONS
Product samples
General: Submit samples of each timber flooring product illustrating the range of variation in colour
and figure in conformance with the Samples table.
Samples table
Laying instructions
General: Submit floor product manufacturer’s detailed laying instructions.
1.7 TOLERANCES
Tolerances
Deviation of the finished floor surface: ≤ 3 mm under a 3 m straight edge laid in any direction.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCTS
Flooring panels
General: To be a proprietary flooring system nominated in the Floating panel floor table.
Underlay
General: To be a proprietary closed cell foam sheeting that is integral to the flooring system.
Acoustic underlay
General: Closed cell foam sheeting perforated to receive adhesive beads.
Nominate a product which together with all components of the floor system delivers the impact sound laboratory value
nominated in the Floating panel floor table.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 Preparation
See the Commentary on preparation.
Storage
General: Deliver panel flooring to site in unbroken wrapping or containers and store so that its
moisture content is not adversely affected. Do not store on the substrate until the moisture content of
the background is suitable for the installation of the floor. Do not store in areas with wet plaster.
Acclimatisation
See the Commentary on acclimatisation.

it in the in-service conditions for a minimum period of two weeks with air circulation to all surfaces as
follows:
Substrates generally
movement joints.
levelling compound compatible with the adhesive.
Flatness: < 3 mm. deviation of the surface under a 3 m straight edge laid in any direction with no
abrupt variations greater than 1 mm over 250 mm.
Moisture content
See the Commentary on moisture content.
the values in clause 2.4.2 (c) have been obtained.
Acclimatisation: If these values are not achieved allow for acclimatisation.
Vapour barrier: Lay 200 µm high-impact resistant polyethylene. Lap 300 mm, seal the laps with
pressure-sensitive tape and return up the vertical surfaces and trim at the level of the flooring.
A vapour barrier is recommended over new concrete substrates. Delete if not required.
3.2 FIXING
Construction – trial set-out
General: Prepare a trial panel set-out to each area as follows to:
- Maximise the size of equal margins of cut panels.
Floating floor system
General: Roll out underlay, remove wrinkles and lay panels dry as determined in the trial set-out.
Acoustic flooring systems
General: Install all components as follows: >
Insert the installation details of the floor system nominated by the acoustic underlay supplier.
General: Provide joints:
- Against vertical building elements: 12 mm wide, cork filled.
- To divide floors into maximum dimensions of 6 m: 4 mm wide silicone sealant filled.
Locate joints on drawings and divide complex plan shapes (i.e. “L” shapes) into rectangles. See also the Commentary.
Room environment
General: During fixing and stabilising, operate the heating system of radiant heated or airconditioned
rooms at 1.5°C above normal maximum temperature.

3.3 COMPLETION
Protection
General: Provide protection as follows:
- Floors: With used carpet taped at all joints. Do not cover with sheet plastic.
Spare flooring products
General: Supply an extra 5% of flooring products, to be stored on site as spares.
Storage location: >
4 SELECTIONS
These schedules refer to the selection of the product/material by its properties, but do not locate it within the project. For this
code or abbreviation of the finish, or show them on the drawings.
4.1 SCHEDULES
Floating panel floor table
Property Type
A B C
Manufactured flooring panels
Product
Timber wearing surface:
- Species or group
Plastic laminate wearing surface:
- Finish name
Profile
Impact sound insulation laboratory value:
Acoustic underlay:
- Product
- Manufacturer
Substrate timber product moisture content
This table lists typical properties of products and/or processes which you may need to specify by defining values for the
as required.
Impact sound: See the Commentary on impact sound.
Product moisture content: Normally supplied at 10% to 12.5%, check availability if timber is required outside this range for
particular environmental conditions. See Commentary on this topic.

If slab heating is to be installed seek advice from the floor product supplier. Consider an alternative finish.

APPLIED TIMBER FLOORING FINISH
APPLIED TIMBER FLOORING
This worksection is applicable to adhesive fixed timber flooring products with associated underlays, which include fitted block
parquet and mosaic parquet flooring, strip flooring adhesive fixed to a continuous substrate, and adhesive fixed manufactured
panel flooring. There is no reference standard.
• Fitted block parquet and mosaic parquet flooring.
• Strip flooring, adhesive fixed to a continuous substrate.
• Adhesive fixed manufactured panel flooring.
• Flooring and decking for flooring nailed to framed substrates and external open jointed decking.
• Floating panel floors for floating manufactured panel flooring.
• Floor sanding and finishing for completion of all timber floors.
The following worksections must be included if this worksection is used on a concrete substrate, to provide a complete
specification:
The following worksections must be included if this worksection is used on a framed and sheeted substrate, to provide a
complete specification:
• Floors with particular acoustic performance.
• None.
• The set out of floor patterns and location of movement joints to your office documentation policy.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
The ventilation requirements are set out in the BCA Volume 2 clause 3.1.2.3 Site Surface Drainage and 3.4.1 Sub-floor
Ventilation. Note the requirements vary for climate zones. Open spaces under timber floors can be subjected to hot drying wind
at times that could shrink the flooring and in these circumstances a vapour barrier is recommended under the flooring.
Responsibilities
General: Provide timber parquet flooring systems to backgrounds as follows and/or to the Selections:
- Appropriately secured.
- Appropriately smooth and flat for the intended use.
- Form the pattern as required.
- Structurally adequate.

- Suitable for the applied finish.

- At its equilibrium moisture content.

General
have no overlaps.
- Light timber framing.
- Floor sanding and finishing.
1.3 INTERPRETATION
Definitions
The flooring definitions are specific to NATSPEC. They can be edited to suit the project or deleted.
General: For the purposes of this worksection the definitions given below apply:
- Substrate: The structure that supports the flooring (e.g. concrete slabs, bearers and joists, or
structural sheet floor framing).
- Feature: Any figure, grain, natural variation or similar which affects timber appearance.
See the Commentary on timber.
- Flooring:
. Continuously-supported: Flooring which is supported by, and directly fixed to, continuous
supporting surfaces.
. Fitted: Intermittently-supported flooring fitted between the bottom wall or wall plates of each room.
. Platform: Flooring laid over the whole of the joisted floor structure prior to the erection of external
and internal wall frames.
. Manufactured floor panels: Manufactured flooring with wearing and decorative surfaces of timber
or plastic laminated to supporting layers of plywood usually with tongues and grooves along the
lengths of the boards.
. Mosaic parquet: Mosaic parquet panels bonded to a background either directly or over an
underlay. (AS 2796.1)
. Wood block parquet: Parquet made from wood blocks, sometimes of different species, sizes and
shapes, arranged in a pattern, intended to be bonded to a background either directly or over an
underlay. (AS 2796.1)
- Parquet: Timber mosaic panels or blocks bonded to a background either directly or over an
underlay.
. Mosaic parquetry panels: Pre assembled timber finger modules held together to form tiles or
panels.
. Block parquet: Square groups of pre finished timber blocks laid individually.

- Underlay: Sheet material fixed to supporting structure and forming part of the substrate on which
flooring may be continuously supported.
1.4 INSPECTION
Notice
- Substrate before laying flooring.
- Trial set-out: Before execution.
- Completed installation before the application of coated finishes.
Add destructive pull test for adhesive if applicable.
1.5 TESTS
General: Confirm that the moisture content of timber flooring products, as delivered, matches the
moisture content of the substrate as measured on site. If there is a mismatch allow for acclimatisation.
Test method for concrete substrate: To AS/NZS 2455 Appendix B.
1.6 SUBMISSIONS
Product samples
General: Submit samples of each timber flooring type illustrating the range of variation in colour and
figure in conformance with the Samples table.
Samples table
Verification
Certificate: Submit a supplier’s certificate (which may be included on an invoice or delivery docket)
verifying conformance to grading and noting moisture content. Do not brand timber products.
Timbers for which certification is required: >
timbers for which certification is required.
Inspection: If neither branding nor certification is adopted, submit a report by an independent
inspecting authority verifying conformance.
Advice can also be sought from timber advisory services.
For extensive installations consider calling for current assessments of conformity as follows:
• Mark of conformity of a JAS-ANZ accredited third party applied to the product verifying grading and moisture content.
• Declaration of conformity by an AS/NZS ISO 9001 quality management system certified supplier of acoustic underlay
products verifying the weighted normalised impact sound pressure level to AS ISO 717.2 as applied to floor systems
incorporating an acoustic underlay.

1.7 TOLERANCES
Tolerances
General: Maximum deviation of the finished floor surface under a 3 m straight edge laid in any
direction: 3 mm.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCTS
Adhesive
See the Commentary on adhesives and on adhesion checking..
Generally: Provide adhesives to the Applied timber flooring schedule and as follows:
- Compatible with the materials and surfaces to be adhered.
- Alkali resisting.
- Solvent and water content: ≤ 40%.
- Shear strength when cured (average): ≥ 1.47 MPa.
- Elasticity: Sufficient to withstand continuous expansion and contraction of boards.
- Will not break down under service.
Ventilation: Provide adequate ventilation appropriate for moisture curing.
Acoustic underlay
General: Closed cell foam sheeting perforated to receive adhesive beads.
If the acoustic properties of the background do not conform to the BCA an acoustic underlay will be required under the underlay
sheeting. Nominate a product which together with all components of the floor system delivers the impact sound laboratory value
noted in the Applied timber flooring schedule.
2.2 TIMBER FLOORING AND SUBSTRATES

Timber
Marking: Identify timber by branding on faces or edges which will be concealed in the works as
follows:
- Flooring: TQL Accredited Timber Flooring Manufacturers Program. (formally TRADAC).
- Hardwoods:
. Australian Timber Industry Certification Quality Scheme.
. Plantation Timber Association of Australia Certification.
Substrates
Plywood: Plywood Association of Australia Quality Control and Product Certification Scheme.
Particleboard/MDF: Australian Wood Panels Association Incorporated.
Grading
Grading: Conform to the Grading table.
Product Standard Grade
Hardwood AS 2796.1 Parquet clear
Plywood AS/NZS 2269 Bond Type A
3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
See the Commentary on preparation.

Storage
General: Deliver timber flooring to site in unbroken wrapping or containers and store so that its
moisture content is not adversely affected. Do not store on the background until the moisture content
of the background is suitable for the installation of the floor. Do not store in areas of wet plaster.
Acclimatisation
See the Commentary on acclimatisation.
it in the in-service conditions for a minimum period of two weeks with air circulation to all surfaces as
follows:
Substrates
movement joints.
levelling compound compatible with the adhesive.
Flatness: < 3 mm. deviation of the surface under a 3 m straight edge laid in any direction with no
abrupt variations greater than 1mm over 250 mm.
The removal of curing and /or stripping agents may require grinding.
Moisture content
See the Commentary on moisture content.
- Concrete substrate: The moisture content of the concrete has been tested to AS/NZS 2455.1
Appendix B and values obtained as follows:
. ≤ 5.5% when tested by the electrical resistance test.
. ≤ 70% when tested by the hygrometer test.
If these values are not achieved allow for acclimatisation.
Floors on concrete slabs
General: Fix plywood underlay to the concrete slab so that their top surfaces are aligned.
- Spacing of fasteners: < 600 mm.
Nominate resilient pads if required for particular outcomes. Resilient pad spacing of < 600 mm is for a 1.5 KPa floor load. Vary
as required. Ensure the fixing method does not compromise the effect or the resilient mount.
Fixing: Fix at 45° to the direction of parquet flooring pattern.
Underlay movement control joints: Provide joints of widths as follows:
- Against vertical building elements: 12 mm.
- Between sheets: 6 mm.
Vapour barrier: Provide a vapour barrier as follows:
- Under plywood: 200 µm high-impact resistant polyethylene. Lap 300 mm, seal the laps with
pressure-sensitive tape and return up the vertical surfaces and trim at the level of the flooring.
- Under parquet adhesive: A liquid applied membrane compatible with the adhesive system.
A vapour barrier is recommended over new concrete substrates. Delete if not required.
Acoustic underlay
General: Apply the bonded acoustic underlay nominated in the Applied timber flooring schedule to
the manufacturer’s instructions.
Prepare details in consultation with the acoustic underlay manufacturer to ensure the complete flooring assembly meets with
acoustic requirements.
Floors on steel joists
General: Screw fix plywood underlay to the steel joists so that their top surfaces are aligned.
Trial set-out
General: Prepare a trial parquet tile or panel set-out to each area to:
- Maximise the size of equal margins of cut parquet tiles or panels.
Room environment
General: During fixing and stabilising, operate the heating system of radiant heated or airconditioned
rooms at 1.5°C above normal maximum temperature.
Adhesion check
Destructive pull test: >
Required or not required. If required import the following to the text.
On completion of substrate preparation and before the application of a liquid applied membrane, glue down a minimum of 5 x
300 mm long off cuts of the flooring timber, gluing only half the length of each block. Place randomly around the whole area, and
include at any suspected problem area.
After 24 hours, lever off the bonded pieces by the free end and examine the bond failure in each test sample.
Acceptable bond failure:
• If there is a combination of substrate, glue and wood failure in each test sample.
Unacceptable bond failure:
• If the concrete pulls off as a crust or as a plug.
• If removal is easy or if bonding to the wood or to the surface is poor (adhesive comes away cleanly from these surfaces)
Notify the superintendent of unacceptable bond failure.
3.2 FIXING
Sheet flooring
Installation: Lay the length of the sheets at right angles to the supports. Stagger the end joints and
locate them centrally over joists. If panels are not tongue and grooved provide noggings or trimmer
joists to support the edges.
- Particleboard flooring: To AS 1860, Class 1.
AS 1860 is cited in this manner in the BCA at clause B1.4 (k) for structural sufficiency. Quote the manufacturer’s designations
when specifying particleboard if you do not feel comfortable with the generic provisions. Class 1 flooring is a moisture resistant
board. Class 2 is not suitable for use in Australia. Refer also to CSIRO Appraisal 88, which deals with flooring grade plastic
tongued particleboard with fungicide, for wet area flooring in two thicknesses, to suit 450 and 600 mm joist spacings.
- Plywood flooring: Fix sheeting to the supports with adhesive and nail.
Sheet flooring fixing centres: Maximum 300 mm on each support.
See the Commentary on movement control joints.
General: Provide joints:
- Against vertical building elements: 12 mm wide cork filled.
- To divide floors into maximum dimensions of 6 m: 4 mm wide silicone sealant filled.
Locate joints on drawings and divide complex plan shapes (i.e. “L” shapes) into rectangles.
Parquet, panel and strip flooring

See the Commentary on parquet
General: Apply adhesive as follows:

- Evenly with a trowel toothed to the dimensions nominated by the adhesive manufacturer.
- With combing grooves at right angles to the general direction of the parquet pattern or at 45 degrees
to basket weave pattern.
- Contact between parquet and adhesive: 75%. Verify by lifting and examining 1 panel or block in 20.
- Spread as much adhesive as can be covered in 20 minutes.
- Dip parquet blocks to back face only.
Lay parquet as follows:
- Position on to the adhesive and press without sliding.
- Clamp starting and finishing rows to prevent sideways movement.
- Ensure adhesive does not bleed through at joints.
- Remove excess adhesive progressively.
- Hold down in contact with the adhesive over night.
- If pins or nails are used as well as adhesive for parquet blocks, punch below the surface without
bruising. Fill holes to match the blocks.
3.3 COMPLETION
Protection
General: Provide protection as follows:
- Floors: With hardboard taped at all butt joints. Do not cover with sheet plastic.
Spare flooring products
General: Supply an extra 5% of flooring products, to be stored on site as spares.
Storage location: >
4 SELECTIONS
These schedules refer to the selection of the product/material by its properties, but does not locate it within the project. For this
4.1 SCHEDULES
Applied timber flooring schedule
Property Type
A B C
Parquet flooring
Product:
- Name
- Species
- Grade
- Pattern
Adhesive
Profile
Adhesive fixed strip flooring
Species or group
Grade

Property Type
A B C
Adhesive
Profile
Underlay
Underlay material
Thickness
Fixing
- Adhesive
Nailing method
Vapour barrier
Impact insulation field test value:
Acoustic underlay
- Product
- Manufacturer
This schedule lists typical properties of products and/or processes which you may need to specify by defining values for the
This single schedule may be divided into multiple schedules if you prefer. It may be used merely as a checklist in which case
ensure that essential properties are adequately defined in other documents. You can add or delete rows and columns and edit
their names as required.
Grade: High Feature Grade if available for the species selected, otherwise Select Grade.
Adhesive: Refer to the Adhesive bedding table in the Commentary.
Moisture content: Normally supplied at 10% to 12.5%, check availability if timber is required outside this range for particular
environmental conditions. See Commentary Table F1 - moisture content of flooring for the expected equilibrium moisture
content likely to be encountered.
Impact sound: See the Commentary on impact sound.
If slab heating is to be installed seek advice from the floor product supplier. Consider an alternative finish.

FLOOR SANDING AND FINISHING FINISH
FLOOR SANDING AND FINISHING
This worksection is applicable to basic floor sanding of timber substrates for other finishes, basic floor sanding as the first stage
preparation for clear coating systems, finish sanding for clear coating systems and the selection and application of clear coating
systems.
This has not been included in Painting as the application of clear floor finishes is usually done by the floor sander. If this is not
the case import the material to Painting.
• Painting for applied finishes to external decking and clear or opaque finishes to timber items other than floors.
• None.
• The extent of the finish could be shown on a floor finishes plan to your office documentation policy.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
Basic sanded surface: Provide as follows:
- To an even plane.
- Free of irregularities.
- Suitable for finish sanding.
- As a suitable substrate for a carpet finish.
- As a suitable key for an adhesive fixed resilient finish.
Finish sanded surface: Provide as follows:
- As a suitable key for an applied coating system.
- That will result in a clear finished surface free of scratch marks when observed standing.
Coating system: Provide as follows and/or to the Selections:
- Of a consistent film thickness throughout the surface.
- Of a consistent level of gloss.
- Without edge bonding.

General

have no overlaps.
>
• Carpets.
• Applied timber flooring.
• Painting.
1.3 INTERPRETATION
Definitions
- Basic sanding: Sanding procedures resulting in an even plane surface free of irregularities.
- Finish sanding: Sanding procedures resulting in a surface suitable for the application of the coating
system.
- Coating system: Applied materials to enhance wear and protect the flooring material.
- Filling: Treatment to enhance the surface appearance by:
. Flood filling: To fill the pores of open-grained timber or minor cracks in parquetry.
. Stopping: To fill punched nail head cavities.
- Staining: Treatment to alter the colour of the timber surface.
- Sealing: Treatment to:
. Prevent excessive penetration of coating system.
. Prevent edge bonding by the coating system.
- Edge bonding: The tendency of some coating systems to glue the edges of strip flooring and
parquetry panels which prevents an even distribution of movement gaps.
1.4 INSPECTION
Notice
- Before surface preparation of timber.
- Completion of finish sanding.
- After staining.
- After application of each clear finishing coat.
1.5 SUBMISSIONS
Samples
General: Submit samples of the coating system illustrating the finished effect on the selected floor
surface in accordance with the Samples table.

Samples table
Consider an ancillary space for a prototype as a benchmark of quality for large applications
Product conformity
- Product register entry for the coating system to the Australian Paint Approvals Scheme (APAS).
- Declaration of conformity by an AS ISO 9001 quality management system certified supplier to the
requirements of Appendix P “Uniform Paint Standard” to the Standard for the Uniform Scheduling of
Drugs and Poisons (SUSDP).
Application of coating systems
General: Submit proposals.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ABRASIVES
Grades
General: Select abrasives in accordance with the Abrasives table.
Abrasives table
Floor hardness Basic sanding Finish sanding Sanding between
finish coats of
Initial cuts Final sand coating system
Hard F24 to F30 F40 to F60 F80 to F120 F150 or finer
Mild F36 to F40 F60 to F80 F100 to F120 F150 or finer
Soft F60 to F80 F80 to F100 if F120 F150 or finer
necessary
This table is based on DR 99464. For abrasive belts and sheets and coated abrasives see AS/NZS 4525, AS/NZS 4526,
AS/NZS 4527, AS/NZS 4528, AS/NZS 4529, AS/NZS 4530, and AS/NZS 4533.
Hard flooring: Timber with a wearing surface not easily cut with an abrasive.
Mild flooring: Timber with a wearing surface easily cut with an abrasive.
If scratching persists during the final sanding re-sand with a finer grade of abrasive.
2.2 FINISH
Filler
General: Non-oil based and compatible with the coating system.
Oil based fillers can bleed into the timber. If used they should be applied after the first coat of the coating system.
Sealer >
Include a sealer in Selections if the coating system selected is known to cause edge bonding in strip flooring or parquet.
Coating system
Type: Provide the coating system nominated in Selections.
Quality: Provide premium quality lines.
Combinations:
- Do not combine clear finishes from different manufacturers in a coating system.

- Provide only the combinations of filler, stain and sealer recommended by the manufacturer of the
top coats.
Deliver all products to the site in the manufacturer’s labelled and unopened containers.
For assistance in the selection of a coating system refer to the Coating systems table in the Commentary.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
Sanding procedure
General: Provide sanding procedure as follows:
Floor type Proposed use of floor surface
As flooring substrate As a finished surface
New floor Basic sanding Basic sanding and finish sanding
Existing floor – poor condition Basic sanding Basic sanding and finish sanding
Existing floor – good condition - Finish sand only
Edit as required.
Lighting
General: Provide supplementary lighting to allow close examination of the entire process.
Substrate
General: Do not commence sanding until:
- Adhesives have cured.
- Floor heating has been switched off for 48 hours.
- Filler has dried as indicated by the colour fading.
Ensure substrates are clean and free of any deposit which may impair the following:
- Application of the coating system.
- Adhesion of resilient finishes.
Preparation
General: Punch nails 3 mm below the surface. Remove tacks. Fill open grained timber with materials
compatible with those used in subsequent finishing operations.
3.2 SANDING
Basic sanding – general
General: Remove irregularities caused by cupping or mismatching of the flooring materials, with a
drum type sanding machine and coarse abrasives.
Basic sanding – strip flooring
General: First cut at 45° to the length of the boards, second cut at 90° to the first cut, and third cut
parallel to the length of the boards.
Boundary areas: Bring to the same surface condition as the main sanded area, using disc sanding.
Inaccessible areas: Hand scrape to produce an even, plane surface.
Basic sanding – parquet
Uneven or hard flooring: First cut at 45° to the direction of the grain of the wood, second cut at 90° to
the first cut, third cut at 45° to the first cut, and fourth cut at 90° to the third cut.
Inaccessible areas: Hard scrape to produce an even, plane surface.
Stopping and filling
General: Select a colour to produce an average match with the final coated timber in tone, colour and
texture.
Fill minor cracks and stop punched nails with a putty knife.

Fill deeper holes in layers > 6 mm allowing each fill to dry. Ensure cavities are filled slightly above the
surface without air pockets.
Flood fill porous timber with the cloth application of water based filler diluted to a creamy consistency.
Finish sanding – strip flooring
General: After basic sanding, cut twice parallel to the length of the boards using increasingly fine
abrasives. If hard surfaces show excessive scratching apply an initial cut at 90° to the grain direction.
Inaccessible areas: Hand scrape to produce the same surface condition as the main sanded area.
Water based coating system: For a water based coating system use a final grade of paper of minimum
F220 screen back.
Finish sanding – parquet
General: After basic sanding, cut twice parallel to the fourth basic sanding cut, then cut twice again in
that direction using increasingly fine abrasives.
Boundary areas: Bring to the same surface condition as the main sanded area.
Inaccessible areas: Hand scrape to produce the same surface condition as the main sanded area.
For a water based coating system use a final grade of paper of minimum F220 screen back.
Cleaning
General: After each sanding operation remove all dust by all of the following:
- Removal from cracks by hand.
- Vacuum cleaning.
- Tack rag cleaning.
3.3 COATING SYSTEM

“Wet paint” warning
General: Place notices conspicuously and do not remove them until the coating system has cured and
hardened.
Application
General: Apply the coating system in accordance with the manufacturer’s printed instructions.
Maintain a wet edge throughout the whole area.
Sanding
General: Fine sand between coats only within the depth of the finish, and remove dust.
3.4 COMPLETION
Cleaning
General: Vacuum clean the area and protect with fabric drop sheets. Do not use plastic sheeting.
4 SELECTIONS
4.1 SCHEDULE
Sanding
Provide:
- Basic sanding: >
- Fine sanding: >
Finishing
Provide:
- Coating system: >
Include the following additional applications of materials/products compatible with the coating system:
- Staining: >
- Filling: >
- Stopping: >
- Sealing: >

PAINTING FINISH
PAINTING
This worksection is applicable to the in situ application of coating films.
• Metals and prefinishes for shop applied paint finishes to services components.
• Timber finishes and treatment for preservative and water repellent treatments.
• Steel – hot dip galvanized coatings or Steel – protective paint coatings for protective coatings to structural steel and to
external metal fixtures.
• Floor sanding and finishing for clear finishes to timber floors.
• None.
• Adapt the schedules in Selections to a Finishes schedule to your office documentation policy.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
General: Provide coating systems to substrates as follows and as scheduled:
- Consistent in colour, gloss level, texture and dry film thickness.
- Free of runs, sags, blisters, or other discontinuities.
- Paint systems fully opaque.
- Clear finishes at the level of transparency consistent with the product.
- Fully adhered.
- Resistant to environmental degradation within the manufacturer’s stated life span.

General
have no overlaps.

PAINTING FINISH
>
• Metals and prefinishes for shop applied paint finishes to services components.
• Timber finishes and treatment for preservative and water repellent treatments.
• Steel – hot dip galvanized coatings or Steel – protective paint coatings for the protection of structural steel and external
metal fixtures.
• Floor sanding and finishing for clear finishes to timber floors.
1.3 STANDARDS
Painting
General: Comply with the recommendations of those parts of AS/NZS 2311 and AS/NZS 2312 which
are referenced in this worksection.
1.4 INTERPRETATION
Definitions
AS/NZS 2310 provides a comprehensive dictionary of painting terms. The following have been selected to assist interpretation
of this worksection.
- Substrate: The surface to which a sealant must bond.
- Background: The surface to which the undercoat is applied.
- Paint: A product in liquid form, which when applied to a surface, forms a dry film having protective,
decorative or other specific technical properties.
AS/NZS 2311 Table 4.1 describes paint types and Appendix D Table D1 relates the paint type to the APAS number and the
Australian Standard number.
- Sealer: A product used to seal substrates to prevent:
. Materials from bleeding through to the surface.
. Reaction of the substrate with incompatible top coats.
. Undue absorption of the following coat into the substrate.
- Primer, prime coat: The first coat of a painting system that helps bind subsequent coats to the
substrate and which may inhibit its deterioration.
- Undercoat: An intermediate coat formulated to prepare a primed surface or other prepared surface
for the finishing coat.
- Finish coat: The final coat of a coating system.
- Gloss: The optical property of a surface, characterised by its ability to reflect light specularly.
- Sheen: Gloss which is observed on an apparently matt surface at glancing angles of incidence.
- Levels of gloss finish: When the specular direction is 60 degrees, a surface with the following
specular gloss reading are defined as follows:
. Full gloss finish between 50 and 85 gloss units.
. Semi gloss between 20 and 50 gloss units.
. Low gloss between 5 and 20 gloss units ( also known as low sheen).
. Flat finish < 5 gloss units (also known as matt).
- Opacity: The ability of a paint to obliterate the colour difference of a substrate.
- Adhesion: The sum total of forces of attachment between a dry film and its substrate. See AS 1580
for tests to assess adhesion.
- Gloss unit: Numerical value for the amount of specular reflection relative to that of a standard
surface under the same geometric conditions.

PAINTING FINISH
Gloss levels can be measured on site in gloss units with a digital gloss meter.
1.5 INSPECTION
Notice
- Painting stages:
. Completion of surface preparation.
. After application of prime or seal coats.
. After application of undercoat.
. After application of each subsequent coat.
- Clear finishing stages:
. Before surface preparation of timber.
. Completion of surface preparation.
. After staining.
. After sanding of sealer.
. After application of each clear finishing coat.
Hold points, if required, should be inserted here. A project wide halt between each coat is considered impractical. Paintwork
should be able to be inspected at various stages of completion in one visit, for example. If the paintwork is critical e.g. to
external steelwork in a marine environment, stipulate notice required in the project specification.
1.6 TESTS
Fire retardant systems
General: Minimum indices, when tested to AS/NZS 1530.3, on a substrate representative of the
intended use, for paint systems specified as Low flame spread or Fire retardant:
- Spread of flame index: 3.
- Sum of Ignitability index and Heat evolved index: 7.
- Smoke developed index: 3.
Paint tests schedule
Delete if not required. Generally testing of paint products is not relevant if they are specified by APAS numbers.
Item to be tested (paint Test method (to Test criteria Number of tests
or painted surface) AS 1580)
Supply the details for each of the coated samples required to be tested e.g.
• Item to be tested: Specify the paint or painted material to be tested.
• Test method: State test method to AS/NZS 1580, or AS/NZS 1530.3 in the case of fire retardant systems.
Consider whether the job warrants the cost of laboratory testing of paint materials and nominate a specific authority, if required.
1.7 SUBMISSIONS
Clear finish coated samples
General: Submit pieces of timber or timber veneer matching the timber to be used in the works,
prepared, puttied, stained, sealed and coated in accordance with the specified system, of sufficient
size so that, each piece can be cut into 4 segments, marked for identification, and distributed as
directed.
Opaque coated samples
General: Submit, on representative substrates, samples of each coating system showing surface
preparation, colour, gloss level, texture, and physical properties; to the Coated samples schedule.

PAINTING FINISH
Coated samples schedule

Substrate Paint system Colour Sample size
Wet samples
General: Submit two 500 mL samples, clearly labelled, of each type of paint to be tested; to the Wet
samples schedule.
Wet samples schedule
Paint type Colour
Delete Wet samples if paint is not to be tested.
Paint
General: Submit the paint manufacturer’s published material safety data sheets (MSDS) showing the
health and safety precautions to be taken during application.
Maintenance manual: Submit the paint manufacturer’s published recommendations for maintenance.
Proposed products
Proprietary materials: If the brand of paint has not been specified, submit the proposed brand of paint
and paint line, at least 3 weeks before the paint is required.
Execution
General: Submit name and contact details of proposed specialist applicators.
Product conformity
- Product register entry: Australian Paint Approvals Scheme (APAS).
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PAINTS
See the Commentary on paints.
APAS specifications
General: Provide paints and other materials which are scheduled in the Australian Paint Approvals
Scheme “List of Approved Products” as complying with cited APAS specifications.
Quality: If the product is offered in a number of levels of quality, provide premium quality lines.
Combinations
General: Do not combine paints from different manufacturers in a paint system.
Clear timber finish systems: Provide only the combinations of putty, stain and sealer recommended by
the manufacturer of the top coats.
Delivery
General: Deliver paints to the site in the manufacturer’s labelled and unopened containers. Ensure
containers of materials specified by a APAS specification code are labelled accordingly.
Tinting
General: Provide only products which are colour tinted by the manufacturer or supplier.
If tinting is by contractor, add tinters or stainers only if this is without detriment to the durability or aesthetic performance of the
product.

PAINTING FINISH
Toxic ingredients
General: Comply with the requirements of Appendix P Uniform Paint Standard to the Standard for the
Uniform Scheduling of Drugs and Poisons (SUSDP).
Appendix P contains three schedules. The first lists toxic pigment components such as barium and cadmium, the second lists
toxic solvents, and the third deals with lead. First Schedule paints are banned, in Appendix P, for use on roofs, furniture, fences,
and gates, surfaces of non-industrial buildings and in premises used for products intended for human consumption. Third
Schedule paints are banned, in Appendix P, from use on roofs, furniture, fences, walls, gates, buildings, bridges and in
premises used for products intended for human consumption. Check for any state variations..
Putty
Non-timber substrates: Oil-based or polymeric based.
Timber finishes: Lacquer or water based only.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
Refer to the Commentary on preparation.
Standards
General: To AS/NZS 2311 Sections 3.
Protection of steelwork: To AS/NZS 2312 Sections 4.
Order of work
Other trades: Before painting, complete the work of other trades as far as practicable within the area
to be painted, except for installation of fittings, floor sanding and laying flooring materials.
Clear finishes: Complete clear timber finishes before commencing opaque paint finishes in the same
area.
Protection
Fixtures: Remove door furniture, switch plates, light fittings and other fixtures before starting to paint,
and refix in position undamaged on completion of the installation.
Adjacent surfaces: Protect adjacent finished surfaces liable to damage from painting operations.
“Wet paint” warning
General: Place notices conspicuously and do not remove them until paint is dry.
Restoration
General: Clean off marks, paint spots and stains progressively and restore damaged surfaces to their
original condition. Touch up damaged decorative paintwork or misses only with the paint batch used in
the original application.
Substrate preparation
General: Prepare substrates to receive the painting systems.
Cleaning: Clean down the substrate surface. Do not cause undue damage to the substrate or damage
to, or contamination of, the surroundings.
Filling: Fill cracks and holes with fillers, sealants, putties or grouting cements as appropriate for the
finishing system and substrate, and sand smooth.
Clear finish: Provide filler tinted to match the substrate.
Clear timber finish systems: Prepare the surface so that its attributes will show through the clear finish
without blemishes, by methods which may involve the following:
- Removal of bruises.
- Removal of discolourations, including staining by oil, grease and nailheads.
- Bleaching where necessary to match the timber colour sample.
- Puttying.
- Fine sanding (last abrasive no coarser than 220 grit) to show no scratches across the grain.
Preparation
General: Prepare substrates to the Preparation schedule.
Use the Preparation schedule to expand the Worksection provisions, for particular substrates and finishes. Delete if not
required.

PAINTING FINISH
Add here any specific requirements in addition to the general provisions of AS 2311 Sections 3 and 7 or AS/NZS 2312 Sections
4 and 10. Refer to the Commentary.
Preparation schedule
Substrate Preparation method Applicable standard
3.2 PAINTING
Standards
General: To AS/NZS 2311 Section 6.
Protection of steelwork: To AS/NZS 2312 Section 8.
Consider adding a subclause as following:
“Applicator
Certified under the Painting Contractors’ Certification Program, or an approved equivalent”.
The PCCP Scheme, established by APAS, is supported by the Blast Cleaning and Coating Association, the Corrosion
Prevention Centre, the Australian Institute of Steel Construction, and the Australian Paint Manufacturer’s Federation. This is
likely to be a requirement for public sector projects. There are few certified contractors at present.
Light levels
General: During preparation of surfaces, painting, and inspection, maintain light levels such that the
luminance (photometric brightness) of the surface is equal to the specified permanent artificial
illumination conditions or 400 lux, whichever is the greater.
Drying
General: Use a moisture meter to demonstrate that the moisture content of the substrate is at or below
the recommended maximum level for the type of paint and the substrate material.
Paint application
General: Apply the first coat immediately after substrate preparation and before contamination of the
substrate can occur. Apply subsequent coats after the manufacturer’s recommended drying period
has elapsed.
Priming before fixing
General: Apply one coat of wood primer (2 coats to end grain) to the back of the following before fixing
in position:
- External fascia boards.
- Timber door and window frames.
- Bottoms of external doors.
- Associated trims and glazing beads.
- Timber board cladding.
Spraying
General: If the paint application is by spraying, use conventional or airless equipment which does the
following:
- Satisfactorily atomises the paint being applied.
- Does not require the paint to be thinned beyond the maximum amount recommended by the
manufacturer.
- Does not introduce oil, water or other contaminants into the applied paint.
Paint with known health hazards: Provide masking, ventilating and screening facilities generally to the
standards set out for spray painting booths, AS/NZS 4114.1 and AS/NZS 4114.2.
Sanding
Clear finishes: Sand the sealer using the finest possible abrasive (no coarser than 320 grit) and avoid
cutting through the colour. Take special care with round surfaces and edges.

PAINTING FINISH
Repair of galvanizing
General: For galvanized surfaces which have been subsequently welded, prime the affected area.
Primer: To APAS-2916, two pack.
Tinting
General: Tint each coat of an opaque coating system so that each has a noticeably different tint from
the preceding coat, except for top coats in systems with more than one top coat.
Services
General: If not embedded, paint new services and equipment including in plant rooms, except
chromium, anodised aluminium, GRP, UPVC, stainless steel, non-metallic flexible materials and
normally lubricated machined surfaces. Repaint proprietary items only if damaged.
4 SELECTIONS
4.1 PAINT SYSTEMS

Alternatives for paint system descriptions are offered as follows:
• By APAS.
• By brand.
Edit as required.
Paint system description by APAS specification
General: Where nominated in the Painting schedule, apply the paint system specified in the APAS
paint system tables.
The Painting Schedules refer to the paint system by its final coat. If a paint or clear finish system is referred to by its APAS
specification code edit and include the APAS Paint System Tables as appropriate.
Paint system description by brand

General: Where nominated in the Painting schedule, apply the paint system specified in the Brand
name paint system tables.
The Painting Schedules refer to the paint system by its final coat. If a paint or clear finish system is referred to by the
manufacturer’s brand name, create Brand name paint system tables similar to the APAS paint system tables to specify in
addition to the final coat, the manufacturer’s appropriate stains, primers, sealers and undercoats, that are suitable for the
substrate and compatible with the finish coat and each other.
If a surface is to be painted but no system is nominated select the system from AS/NZS 2311 clause 5.1, using System 1 where
a choice is offered.
Number of coats
General: Unless specified as one coat or two coat systems, each paint system consists of at least 3
coats.
Specify additional coats if necessary to:
• Prepare porous or reactive substrates with prime or seal coats consistent with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
• Achieve the total film thickness or texture.
• Achieve a satisfactory opacity.
Colour selection
See the Commentary on colour selection.
General: As nominated in the Painting schedules.
If colours are not selected and located in a Finishes Schedule or Colour Schedule in the tender documents, nominate the
maximum number of colours.

PAINTING FINISH
4.2 PAINTING SCHEDULES

Interior painting schedule
Paint code Substrate Paint system Colour name or code
Substrate: In some of these paint systems the Substrate column includes various precoated metals. These will usually be
structural steel surfaces, for which the protective precoating (primer or system) has been specified in the Structure’ Group of
worksections. In these cases the applicable systems offer for selection a range of additional coats, compatible with those
precoats, to complete the site painting.
Colour name or code: Do not use AS/NZS 2311 or AS/NZS 2312 paint reference numbers (see Equivalence table in the
Commentary) - these do not link to a particular specification. Using other Australian standards (e.g. AS 3730 series - see
AS 3730.100 for guidance) is not recommended - proof of compliance with these standards may be impossible to obtain. No
manufacturers are currently licensed under the StandardsMark scheme for these standards (check the register at
http://register.sai-global.com/Supplierquery.asp ) and, to be effective, various parameters need to be quantified in the project
specification. APAS specifications have done this for you.
Exterior painting schedule

Paint code Substrate Paint system Colour name or code
Paint code: The paint code is the project specific identifier for reference in a Finishes Schedule.
Substrate: The substrate is required to reference the APAS or Brand paint system.
Paint system: The paint system refers to either APAS e.g. “Semi-gloss latex: interior” or Brand e.g. “Wash and wear”. Nominate
in the column heading “APAS Paint system” or “Dulux (or other) Paint system”.
Colour name or code: The selected colour that may be coded for reference to a Finishes Schedule.
The Painting schedules describe the paint system with reference to the substrate but does not locate the finish within the
project. Prepare a separate document e.g. a Finishes Schedule to locate the various paint systems or note them on drawings,
by reference to the Paint Code.
Paint system characteristics schedule

Paint system Characteristic Requirements
Characteristic: e.g. “Minimum dry film thickness:”, “Texture profile:”, “Gloss level:”. See Paint systems schedules for examples
of paint systems to which these additional requirements may apply.
In particular, for Texture finish, latex - interior, and Texture finish, latex - exterior, specify minimum dry film thickness and texture
profile. For One pack polyurethane clear - Interior, and Two pack polyurethane clear - Interior, specify gloss level.
Requirements: e.g. for minimum dry film thickness, 300 µm; for texture profile, Medium; for gloss level, Flat, Low gloss, Semi-
gloss, Gloss or Full gloss.

PAINTING FINISH
4.3 APAS PAINT SYSTEM TABLES

General
General: Provide the paint type and coating sequence noted in the APAS Paint System Tables for
each of the paint systems listed in the Interior painting schedule and the Exterior painting
schedule, and for each substrate to which those systems are applied in the project.
The codes for each coat are APAS Specification codes.
Include the APAS Paint system tables and edit as required.
Flat latex: Interior
Substrate 1st Coat 2nd Coat 3rd Coat
Existing paintwork (solvent-borne) 0260/4 0260/4
Existing paintwork (latex) 0260/4 0260/4
Concrete 0172 0260/4 0260/4
Tilt-up concrete 0171 0260/4 0260/4
Cement render 0172 0260/4 0260/4
Fibre cement 0172 0260/4 0260/4
Masonry 0172 0260/4 0260/4
Set plaster 0171 0260/4 0260/4
Fibrous plaster 0171 0260/4 0260/4
Glass reinforced gypsum plaster 0171 0260/4 0260/4
Plasterboard (paper faced) 0172 0260/4 0260/4
Iron and steel 0032 0260/4 0260/4
Aluminium 0035/3 0260/4 0260/4
Metallic-coated steel 0134 0260/4 0260/4
Oil-based air-drying primed metal 0260/4 0260/4
Organic or inorganic zinc primed metal 0171 0260/4 0260/4
Timber 0183 0260/4 0260/4
Particleboard 0183 0260/4 0260/4
Medium density fibreboard 0172 0260/4 0260/4
Hardboard, unprimed 0183 0260/4 0260/4
Pre-primed board 0260/4 0260/4
Organic fibreboard 0183 0260/4 0260/4
UPVC 0016/1 0260/4 0260/4
Glass reinforced plastic 2971 0260/4 0260/4
Low gloss latex: Interior

Concrete 0172 0260/3 0260/3

PAINTING FINISH
Cement render 0172 0260/3 0260/3

Sprayed ceiling 0172 0260/3 0260/3
Fibre cement 0172 0260/3 0260/3
Masonry 0172 0260/3 0260/3
Set plaster 0171 0260/3 0260/3
Iron and steel 0032 0260/3 0260/3
Aluminium 0035/3 0260/3 0260/3
Timber 0183 0260/3 0260/3
UPVC 0016/1 0260/3 0260/3
Flat or low gloss latex: Exterior

Concrete 0280/3 0280/3
Cement render 0280/3 0280/3
Fibre cement 0280/3 0280/3
Compressed fibre cement 0171 0280/3 0280/3
Masonry 0280/3 0280/3
Iron and steel 0032 0280/3 0280/3
Aluminium 0035/3 0280/3 0280/3
Organic or inorganic zinc primed metal 0280/3 0280/3

PAINTING FINISH
Cat. epoxy zinc phosphate primed metal 0280/3 0280/3

Timber 0183 0280/3 0280/3
Exterior grade hardboard 0181 0280/3 0280/3
UPVC 0280/3 0280/3
Semi-gloss latex: Interior

Concrete 0172 0260/2 0260/2
Cement render 0172 0260/2 0260/2
Fibre cement 0172 0260/2 0260/2
Masonry 0172 0260/2 0260/2
Set plaster 0171 0260/2 0260/2
Iron and steel 0032 0260/2 0260/2
Aluminium 0035/3 0260/2 0260/2
Timber 0183 0260/2 0260/2
UPVC 0016/1 0260/2 0260/2
Semi-gloss latex: Exterior

Concrete 0280/2 0280/2

PAINTING FINISH

Masonry 0280/2 0280/2
Iron and steel 0032 0280/2 0280/2
Aluminium 0035/3 0280/2 0280/2
Timber 0183 0280/2 0280/2
UPVC 0280/2 0280/2
Gloss latex: Interior

Concrete 0172 0260/1 0260/1
Cement render 0172 0260/1 0260/1
Fibre cement 0172 0260/1 0260/1
Masonry 0172 0260/1 0260/1
Set plaster 0171 0260/1 0260/1
Iron and steel 0032 0260/1 0260/1
Aluminium 0035/3 0260/1 0260/1
Timber 0183 0260/1 0260/1

PAINTING FINISH

Gloss latex: Exterior

Concrete 0280/1 0280/1
Masonry 0280/1 0280/1
Iron and steel 0032 0280/1 0280/1
Aluminium 0035/3 0280/1 0280/1
Timber 0183 0280/1 0280/1
UPVC 0280/1 0280/1
Semi-gloss, solvent-borne: Interior

Existing paintwork (solvent-borne) 0016/1 0015/3 0015/3
Existing paintwork (latex) 0016/1 0015/3 0015/3
Concrete 0172 0015/3 0015/3
Cement render 0172 0015/3 0015/3
Fibre cement 0172 0015/3 0015/3
Masonry 0172 0015/3 0015/3
Set plaster 0171 0015/3 0015/3

PAINTING FINISH

Iron and steel 0032 0015/3 0015/3
Aluminium 0035/3 0015/3 0015/3
Oil-based air-drying primed metal 0016/1 0015/3 0015/3
Timber 0016/1 0015/3 0015/3
Particleboard 0016/1 0015/3 0015/3
Hardboard, unprimed 0016/1 0015/3 0015/3
Pre-primed board 0016/1 0015/3 0015/3
Organic fibreboard 0016/1 0015/3 0015/3
UPVC 0015/3 0015/3
Full gloss, solvent-borne: Interior

Concrete 0172 0015/2 0015/2
Cement render 0172 0015/2 0015/2
Fibre cement 0172 0015/2 0015/2
Masonry 0172 0015/2 0015/2
Set plaster 0171 0015/2 0015/2
Iron and steel 0032 0015/2 0015/2
Aluminium 0035/3 0015/2 0015/2
Timber 0016/1 0015/2 0015/2

PAINTING FINISH
Particleboard 0016/1 0015/2 0015/2

Pre-primed board 0016/1 0015/2 0015/2
UPVC 0015/2 0015/2
Full gloss, solvent-borne: Exterior

Iron and steel 0032 0015/1 0015/1
Aluminium 0035/3 0015/1 0015/1
Timber 0181 0016/1 0015/1
Pre-primed exterior grade hardboard 0016/1 0015/1 0015/1
UPVC 0015/1 0015/1
Texture finish, latex: Interior

Concrete 0118/3 0118/3
Masonry 0118/3 0118/3
Iron and steel 0032 0118/3 0118/3
Timber 0016/1 0118/3 0118/3
Particleboard 0016/1 0118/3 0118/3

PAINTING FINISH
Texture finish, latex: Exterior

Substrate System
Concrete 0117/3 system
Cement render 0117/3 system
Fibre cement 0117 system
Masonry 0117/3 system
Iron and steel 0117 system
Metallic-coated steel 0117/3 system
Timber 0117 system
One pack varnish clear: Interior

Existing clear finish 0114
Timber 0114 0114
Particleboard 0114 0114 0114
Medium density fibreboard 0114 0114 0114
One pack polyurethane clear: Interior

Concrete 0208 0208 0208
Timber 0205 0205
Particleboard 0205 0205
Cork 0205 0205
Two pack polyurethane clear: Interior

Timber 0206 0206 0206
Particleboard 0206 0206 0206
Cork 0206 0206 0206
Two pack epoxy, water-borne: Interior

Existing paintwork 0167 0167
Concrete 0171 0167 0167
Cement render 0171 0167 0167
Fibre cement 0171 0167 0167
Masonry 0171 0167 0167
Iron and steel 0032 0167 0167
Aluminium 0035/3 0167 0167

PAINTING FINISH

Metallic-coated steel 0134 0167 0167
Oil-based air-drying primed metal 0032 0167 0167
Cat. epoxy zinc phosphate primed metal 0167 0167
Timber 0183 0167 0167
Opaque timber finish, latex: Exterior

Existing timber finish (latex) 0280/5
Masonry 0280/5 0280/5
Iron and steel 0032 0032 0280/5**
Timber 0280/5 0280/5
Particleboard 0280/5 0280/5
Organic fibreboard 0280/5 0280/5
Exterior grade hardboard 0280/5 0280/5
UPVC 0280/5 0280/5
**
4th Coat 0280/5
Semi-transparent oil-based timber finish

Substrate 1st Coat 2nd Coat
Existing semi-transparent timber finish 0115
Timber 0115 0115
Paving paint - Semi gloss

Existing paintwork 0200/1
Concrete 0200/1 0200/1
Clay brick 0200/1 0200/1
Timber 0200/1 0200/1
Particleboard 0200/1 0200/1
Cork 0200/1 0200/1

PAINTING FINISH
Roofing paint, latex

Concrete 0012/2 0012/2
Iron and steel 0032 0032 0012/1 **
Timber 0183 0012/2 0012/2
UPVC 0012/2 0012/2
** 4th Coat 0012/1
Roofing paint, solvent-borne

Existing paintwork (solvent-borne) 0011 0011
Existing paintwork (latex) 0011 0011
Iron and steel 0032 0011 0011
Metallic-coated steel 0134 0011 0011
Oil-based air-drying primed metal 0011 0011
Organic or inorganic zinc primed metal 0134 0011 0011
Clear water repellent for masonry

Substrate 1st Coat 2nd Coat
Concrete 0116/1 0116/1
Masonry 0116/1 0116/1
Low flame spread coating

Substrate System
Existing low flame spread paintwork Topcoat of relevant system
Concrete 0064/3
Cement render 0064/3
Fibre cement 0064/3
Masonry 0064/3
Iron and steel 0064/1 system
Metallic-coated steel 0064/2 system
Timber 0064/4 system
Particleboard 0064/4 system

PAINTING FINISH
Clear graffiti barrier

Substrate System
Existing paintwork 1441/1
Concrete 1441/1
Cement render 1441/1
Fibre cement 1441/1
Masonry 1441/1
Timber 1441/1
4.4 BRAND NAME PAINT SYSTEM TABLES

st
If the selection is a paint system by brand, modify the APAS table to substitute the manufacturer’s recommendations for the 1 ,
nd rd
2 , and 3 coats.

WALL PAPERING FINISH
WALL PAPERING
This worksection deals with wallpapers of various materials and their installation. For projects which may include items not
covered by this worksection new text or modifcation of this text may be required. Examples include 'Commercial vinyl or fabric'
in which text from the manufacturer's recommendations can be incorporated. There are no relevant standards.
• Applied wall finishes for applied wall finishes in panel form and fabric in framed panels.
• Tapestries for tapestries.
• Commercial vinyl or fabric: Create text from the manufacturer’s recommendations.
• None.
• Document particular design applications on drawings.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
General: Provide paper hanging as follows and to the Selections.
- Consistent in colour, pattern and texture.
- Free of sags, blisters, or other discontinuities.
- Fully adhered.
- Resistant to environmental degradation within the manufacturer’s stated life span.

General
have no overlaps.
>

• Lining.
• Painting.
• Tapestries.
1.3 INSPECTION
Notice
- Completion of surface preparation.
- After hanging of lining paper.
- Wallpaper set out before hanging.
- After hanging of subsequent wallpapers.
1.4 SUBMISSIONS
Samples
General: For each type of wallpaper, submit a sample the width of the roll, and at least 2 m long or the
length of one pattern repeat, whichever is the greater.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
Adhesives, size, fillers
General: Provide adhesive which is water-borne starch, cellulose or synthetic resin with fungicide
added. Provide proprietary size, fungicidal wash and filler.
Latex size: Provide for fabric-backed or heavyweight vinyl, heavily embossed coverings or foil, or if the
paper is to be applied to gloss or semi-gloss surfaces.
Papers
General: Provide rolls of wallpaper or lining paper of one colour or design which are from the same
batch and have the same production number.
Lining paper types
General: Provide lining paper appropriate to the surface as follows:
- Badly cracked surfaces: Strong brown.
- Damp walls: Pitch coated.
- Surfaces liable to move: Cotton backed.
- Other surfaces: Common pulp quality, in the range 165 – 365 kg per ream.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL WORKMANSHIP

Generally
General: Tightly butt sheet edges closely to each other and to adjoining features. Do not make
horizontal joints within vertical drops.
Protection
General: Protect floors and other finished surfaces against soiling and marking.
Removable fittings
General: Remove hardware and other removable fittings before paper hanging.
Ambient conditions
General: Provide adequate ventilation to the work area during the hanging and drying periods. Carry
out paper hanging under conditions which will not adversely affect the finished work. Do not hang

paper in extremely hot weather. Complete the painting of adjoining surfaces and allow them to dry out
before paper hanging.
Electrical safety
General: Keep metallic wallpaper away from contact with live wires or metal components of power
points or switches.
3.2 SUBSTRATES
Plaster and cement substrates
Preparation: Ensure that the substrate is sound and chemically neutral. If the wallpaper is of an
impervious type, wash the substrate with a fungicidal wash. Fill substrate irregularities, holes and
cracks. Rub down the whole surface with a carborundum block, glass paper, or the like. Remove nibs,
excrescences, dirt, greasy or loose material and powdery films.
Dryness: Do not apply wallpaper to damp surfaces. Allow new or newly repaired surfaces to dry out
before papering. Dry out rendered substrates for at least 4 weeks, longer in humid conditions. If
required, demonstrate with a moisture meter that the moisture content of the substrate is within
satisfactory limits.
Sealing: Apply one coat of pigmented sealer as recommended by the wallpaper manufacturer. Allow
the paint to dry then lightly rub down.
- Substrates for non-impervious wallpapers: In addition to sealing, apply one coat of cellulose based
size, followed by lining paper.
- Substrates for impervious metal foils: Remove minor imperfections, apply one coat of ready mixed
latex size, and allow to dry. Apply pre-pasted lining paper, or unpasted lining paper using cellulose
type adhesive. Rub down when dry and apply a second lining to achieve a smooth surface. Allow to
dry and lightly rub down. When thoroughly dry (at least 48 hours) apply the metallic foil.
Previously painted substrates
Sand surfaces: Wash down with a suitable detergent cleaner and remove contaminants, then rub
down with wet and dry paper until loose particles are removed and the surface provides a key. Then
apply one coat of flat, solvent-borne interior paint or (on glossy surfaces) a general purpose
undercoat.
Unsound surfaces:
- Flaking or peeling paint: If flaking exceeds more than 5% of the area, remove the entire paint film.
Otherwise remove the loose and flaking paint and feather edge the sound paint. Then wash down
as for sound surfaces and prime the areas from which paint has been removed.
- Underbound finishes (such as kalsomine and distemper): Remove entirely by washing, then
proceed as for sound surfaces.
- Latex paint surfaces: Test by maintaining a water-soaked sponge in contact with the surface for 15
minutes. Then rub the area so treated with a damp cloth of a contrasting hue. If the paint colour
comes off on the cloth, wash down the background and seal. If not, wash and rub down as for
sound surfaces.
- Gloss or satin solvent-borne painted surfaces: Test by making a 50 mm long cut into the paint film
then two 25 mm cuts across the first at right angles. Press a piece of 25 mm wide cellulose tape
over these cuts and pull off rapidly. Repeat the test in at least 3 areas. Strip those layers of paint
that are removed with the tape and similar suspect paint. Then wash down as for sound surfaces
and prime the areas from which paint has been removed. If the paint is sound, wash and rub down
as for sound surfaces.
Previously papered substrates
General: Remove the old wallpaper and wash the surface down before proceeding as for plaster and
cement substrates.
Mould treatment
General: Stop mould growth and sterilise affected areas before redecoration. Use fungicidal wash.
Prevent the fungus spores spreading. Ensure that there is no immediate regrowth.
3.3 PASTING
Generally
General: Keep paste off wallpaper faces. If paste gets on to the face, wipe it off with a damp sponge
after hanging each strip and trimming to skirting, ceiling, picture rail or other boundary.

Soaking
Soaking: Wet pre-pasted papers with warm water unless otherwise recommended by the
manufacturer. After wetting or pasting, and before hanging, allow papers of the same type to soak for
equal times, and long enough to allow their fibres to expand to the maximum.
Hanging: Hang lining paper, paper backed vinyls, oriental wallpapers and thin papers immediately
after pasting. Hang thicker papers after they have soaked long enough for the paper to become limp.
When hanging plastic-faced cloths, make an allowance for shrinkage which may occur after hanging.
Unpasted wallpaper
Apply paste evenly to the substrate for hessian wallpaper, not to the back of the wallpaper. Paint
expanded polyethylene on the reverse side with emulsion paint and fix with a PVA adhesive.
3.4 LINING
Application
General: Line the substrate with lining paper before hanging duplex, flock, metallic foils, hand-printed
or heavyweight and grassweave type wallpapers.
Hanging
General: Hang the lining paper in a direction transverse to the final paper. Either butt the joins, or
leave them slightly open, or overlap them and when dry tear off to a feather edge. Cross line or double
line (i.e. vertical lining covered by horizontal lining) before hanging final paper on blemished wall
surfaces or before hanging metallic foils.
3.5 WALLPAPER APPLICATION

Matching
General: Match rolls for discrete areas or groups of surfaces before hanging. Irrespective of roll
markings, check the colour, pattern and texture by eye in a good light, before beginning to cut the
wallpaper. Accurately align the pattern in adjoining sheets.
Hanging
General: Where both ceiling and walls are to be papered, paper the ceiling first. Correctly position the
first strip of paper with regard to the overall design. Hang the first strip on each wall to a plumb line.
Trimming
General: Where wallpaper is not supplied trimmed, remove selvedge with a straight edge cutting
wheel attachment.
Corners
General: Do not attempt to turn more than 30 mm of wallpaper sheet width around any corner, salient
or re-entrant. Measure the distance to the corner at both ends of the drop, add an equal amount
(approximately 30 mm) to each measurement, and cut the sheet accordingly. The balance of the
sheet, if of appropriate width, may be used as the next sheet to continue papering around the corner.
Keyword: Re-establish vertical seams plumb after turning corners.
Re-entrants: In re-entrant corners, lap the next sheet over the 30 mm turned strip so that the edge of
the sheet fits right up to the corner. If the overlap is in vinyl sheet, glue it with a latex or PVA type
adhesive.
Salients: At salient corners, make a butt jointed seam between the turned strip and the next sheet.
Seams
General: Make butt jointed seams. Do not overlap except as specified for corners. Control the amount
of paste used so that it does not squeeze out along the joint line under normal brushing or rolling
pressure during application. Do not use a seam roller on embossed or flock wallpapers.
3.6 COMPLETION
Spare material
General: Set aside partially used rolls, and supply at completion.
Cleaning
General: On completion of paper hanging leave surfaces clean and dust free.
Removable fittings: Replace on completion.

4 SELECTIONS
These schedules refer to the selections of the product/material by its properties, but do not locate it within the project. For this
Paper hanging schedule
Finish designation Type 1 Type 2 Type 3
Lining paper
Wall paper
Mould treatment
Adhesive
Size
Filler
Wallpaper: State either of the following:

• The proprietary wallpaper line (with colour and pattern if not in the paper title) for each surface.
• If a proprietary wallpaper is not being selected, provide a description sufficient to enable the contractor to identify (and
price) the wallpaper.
If the principal/proprietor is supplying the wallpaper for which a provisional sum has been allowed, this schedule is still required
to …

MECHANICAL DESIGN AND INSTALL MECHANICAL
MECHANICAL DESIGN AND INSTALL
This worksection is applicable to simple mechanical installations in which the mechanical design will be undertaken by the
contractor without the involvement of a specialist mechanical consultant. It deals with packaged airconditioning systems (ducted
and non-ducted) and straightforward mechanical ventilation.
In choosing to do this, the specifier (usually an architect) takes on the responsibilities of a specialist mechanical consultant. See
the cautionary advice in the Commentary.
It is strongly recommended that the specifier:
• Ensures that all relevant information is made available at the time of tendering.
• Ensures that the design is undertaken by people with suitable qualifications and experience.
• Obtains certification on completion that the design and installation has been carried out in accordance with all statutory and
contractual requirements.
See the commentary for a list of suggested issues to be considered.
• Packaged airconditioning.
• Room airconditioners.
• Ductwork.
• Ductwork insulation.
• Fans.
• Air grilles.
• Mechanical commissioning
• Mechanical maintenance.
Unlike all other mechanical worksections, this worksection does not rely on Mechanical general requirements.
• None.
• Show the areas to be airconditioned and ventilated.
• Show the preferred location of fans and airconditioning plant.
• Show or make allowance for duct routes.
1 GENERAL
1.1 Aims
Responsibilities
General: Provide airconditioning and mechanical ventilation.
Outline the extent of airconditioning and mechanical ventilation required, for example by referring to the spaces served and
functions (e.g. toilet exhaust) to be achieved. The extent of mechanical services can be shown on the drawings or detailed in
the specification.

Airconditioning load calculations

Calculate the cooling and heating loads using one of the following:
- Manual methods: AIRAH DA9, ASHRAE or Carrier.
- Electronic methods: ACADS-BSG Camel, Carrier E20 or Trane Trace.
Selecting a plant based on either no calculation or incorrect calculation is the cause of many systems not performing as
intended. The same applies to intentionally undersized plant. The methods specified are in common use and should result in
2
reliable answers if correctly used. Calculations based on other methods or rule of thumb rates (for example 120 W/m ) should
be rejected.
Design
General: Provide systems designed in conformance with the following.
See the Commentary for discussion of issues relating to design.
Outside design conditions: Use outdoor design conditions listed in AIRAH DA9, Table 1 or Table 1A
for the location geographically closest to the site and Comfort (or Non-Critical Process) Conditions.
Inside design conditions:
- Summer: 24ºC dry bulb, 50% relative humidity
- Winter: 21ºC dry bulb.
These are commonly accepted ‘comfort’ conditions. Alter if the Principal requires different values and for special situations.
Most packaged airconditioning plant is rated for cooling for 27°C dry bulb and 19°C wet bulb (47% relative humidity). It will have
less capacity at the above conditions hence the need to select plant for its actual operating conditions, not the nominal rating
conditions. By setting controls for lower temperatures (say 24°C), installations sized for 27°C will still achieve tolerable
conditions most of the year although not on days of extreme ambient conditions. The use of 27°C for room condition will result in
significantly smaller and cheaper installations but probably more complaints.
Temperature variation: Limit the temperature difference in airconditioned spaces served by the same
zone or system to 3ºC as follows:
- Between any 2 points in the space from floor level to 1500 mm above floor level.
- > 2000 mm from cooking equipment and > 1000 mm from any other appliance.
- When outside conditions are in the range specified above.
- After the plant has been operating for one hour.
- With the temperatures measured in the same 5 minute period.
This is a key test of the adequacy of the design and installation. The installation should not only maintain temperatures within
the specified range at the temperature sensor, it should also limit temperature variations within the space. If the plant is not
correctly sized, badly zoned or the installation defective it will show up through excessive temperature variations between parts
of the airconditioned space. Temperature logging to validate this can be directed under Commissioning.
Zoning: Divide the systems into temperature controlled zones to meet the stated permissible limits in
temperature variation, and the system divisions stated in the equipment schedule.
Fresh air: Supply fresh air to spaces with airconditioning systems via the air handling system.
The cost of supplying the correct amount of fresh air to meet the BCA (i.e. AS 1668.2) requirements can be considerable. It can
therefore have a significant financial impact and cause variability in design and install tender prices. Provide sufficient
information so the fresh air requirement can be accurately determined by the contractor.
Windows, walls, floors and roofs: Refer to drawings for construction and insulation.
As an alternative to including details on the drawings, provide construction details including insulation material R value.
Internal window shading: Refer to Window schedule.
See Commentary to Window schedule.
Lighting load: Refer to drawings for lighting layout and details.
The specification and drawings must show enough information for the contractor to be able to calculate heat gains from lights
and equipment. In the case of lights this is probably easiest done by showing the lighting layout on the drawings but the
documents must also include information on the power including control gear of each type of fitting. Exercise caution with
2
tenders that are qualified by area rates (W/m ) for lights and equipment.
Internal equipment loads: Refer to Internal airconditioning loads schedule.
See Commentary to Internal airconditioning loads schedule.
No. of people: Refer to Internal airconditioning loads schedule.

See Commentary to Internal airconditioning loads schedule.
Supply air: To each airconditioned space ≥ 4.5 L/s/m2 at all times the plant is operational.
2 2
The value of ≥ 4.5 L/s/m is a reasonable minimum for office areas with 2.7 m ceilings. A value of 6.0 L/s/m will give a greater
degree of flexibility for partitioning changes and location of diffusers. Perimeter areas near windows and high heat load areas
like conference rooms will have significantly higher supply air rates. Supply air should not be confused with Fresh air, which is
2
typically 1 L/s/m in offices.
Ambient noise emitted: Lower than the level that can be heard within a habitable room in any
neighbouring premises, regardless of whether any door or window to that room is open.
Fire separation: Refer to drawings.
If the space includes or is bounded by a firewall there will be implications for the mechanical services. The location of fire walls
should be shown on drawings and any other related information provided to the contractor.
Heating: Use reverse cycle plant to provide heating. Divide airconditioned areas between systems so
that cooling and reverse cycle heating can be provided simultaneously.
Reverse cycle heating is considerably more energy efficient than electric resistance heating.
In a well designed installation the plant will be divided so that, for example, one unit serving the perimeter areas can heat while
another serving internal areas cools. Avoid systems where the plant cools all the air and then reheats some in individual zones
as it is more expensive to operate and not environmentally friendly.
Supplementary heat for zoning or other purposes: May be provided by electric duct heaters but must
be < 20% of the total heating load.
Duct design: Size ductwork as follows:
- Rigid sheet metal duct: ≤ 6 m/s and ≤ 1.2 Pa/m.
- Flexible duct: ≤ 4.0 m/s.
Energy efficiency: Notwithstanding the class of building, conform to BCA Volume Specification J5.
This extends the coverage beyond the building Classes mandated by BCA. State and territory variations may also apply.

General
have no overlaps.
- Windows.
Outside air louvres are included in Windows.
1.3 STANDARDS
General
Mechanical ventilation: To AS/NZS 1668.1 and AS 1668.2, as required by the Building Code of
Australia.
The BCA requires that where its requirements for natural ventilation are not satisfied, mechanical ventilation must be provided.
Either identify areas requiring mechanical ventilation on the drawings or include in the specification.
System compliance with AS 1668.2-1991 (and AS/NZS 3666.1) is deemed-to-satisfy BCA ventilation requirements for habitable
rooms etc. under clause F4.5. The alternative is the provision of natural ventilation to BCA clause F4.6.
AS 1668.2-2002 is not currently cited by the BCA. It includes performance criteria for natural ventilation as well as for
mechanical ventilation. AS 1668.2 is also deemed-to-satisfy the BCA requirements for car park ventilation, the alternative again
being provision of natural ventilation (also covered in AS 1668.2).

Refrigeration systems: To AS/NZS 1677.2 and the recommendations of SAA HB40.1 and
SAA HB40.2.
Microbial control: To AS/NZS 3666.1, AS/NZS 3666.2 and the recommendations of SAA/SNZ HB32.
1.4 SUBMISSIONS
See Mechanical quotation checklist in the Commentary for assistance in assessing submissions.
General
Before starting work, submit the following:
- Outside design conditions, corresponding geographic location and source of data.
- Calculated total and sensible cooling capacities and heating capacity.
- Name of calculation method used.
- Makes and model numbers of proposed equipment.
- Total and sensible cooling capacities and heating capacity of the proposed equipment, adjusted for
the specified outdoor and indoor conditions and any effects of the proposed plant configuration.
- Any assumptions on which the calculations are based.
- Details of any departures from this specification.
- Details of fire provisions.
- A drawing of the proposed duct, pipe and equipment layout. Show proposed zoning and methods of
heating.
- Licence numbers and type of licences held by persons responsible for the installation.
Note that persons licensed for certain types of work (e.g. electricians) may be licensed to service appliances but not to install
airconditioning systems.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 AIRCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT

Standards
Ducted airconditioners: To AS/NZS 3823.1.2.
Non-ducted airconditioners: To AS/NZS 3823.1.1.
Equipment
Performance: Provide equipment as follows:
- Is made by a manufacturer with a demonstrated ability to provide spare parts and service promptly
to the site.
- Will operate within the specified range of outdoor design conditions under the calculated loads
without excessive head pressure or icing.
- Is labelled to AS/NZS 3823.2.
Alternatively specify a particular manufacturer or that the contractor select from a list of acceptable manufacturers. Suitable text
might be:
Supply equipment from one of the following manufacturers:
• Manufacturer’s name.
Reverse cycle units: Provide an effective outdoor coil defrost facility that prevents room temperature
dropping more than 2°C during defrost.
Head pressure control: Provide manufacturer’s standard heat pressure control kit on units that operate
in cooling mode at low ambient temperatures.
Cabinet: Aluminium, powder coated steel or moulded ABS plastic with metallic-coated steel or
stainless steel fasteners. Insulate and vapour seal cabinet and drain trays to prevent external
condensation under all operating conditions.
Drain trays: Aluminium, stainless steel or plastic to collect all moisture inside indoor and outdoor units.
Filters: Washable panel type. Performance when tested to AS 1324.2:

- Test Dust No. 1: ≥ 20% efficiency.

- Test Dust No. 4: ≥ 85% arrestance.
The performance given is the minimum recommended by AS/NZS 3666.1 clause 2.4.
- Dust holding capacity: ≥ 130 g at 125 Pa against Test Dust No 4 for a nominal 600 mm x 600 mm
cell.
This is a typical value, adjust to suit the project.
Coils: Copper tube with aluminium plate fins.
Controls
Provide the following functions:
- Temperature control for each zone located to accurately sense zone temperature.
- Fan speed selection for multi and variable speed fans.
- Time switch for each system with ≥ 6 temperature programs per day, separate programs for each
day of the week, manual set point override and Vacation temperature set back.
2.2 ELECTRIC DUCT HEATERS

General
Elements: Sheathed in steel or nickel alloy. Provide with brazed spiral steel fins.
Frames: Assemble elements in a galvanized steel frame with terminal connections contained in an
enclosed terminal box.
Heating section: Install to allow access to the terminal box and removal of the assembly without
disturbing other components.
Fin rating: < 20 W/m2.
2.3 GRILLES AND DIFFUSERS

General
Size and locate diffusers to provide even air distribution and temperatures without draughts.
Ceiling diffusers: Provide at least one per airconditioned room and at least one per 12 m2.
2
The rate of at least one per 12 m usually suits office areas and allows some spares to accommodate partitioning. Large open
areas and spaces with high ceilings (say above 3.6 m) may be permitted to have fewer. Spaces with high internal loads such as
cafeterias often need more.
Construction:
- Variable volume diffusers: Powder coated pressed steel.
- All others: Powder coated aluminium.
Dampers: Provide a damper to each diffuser and grille. If connected by flexible duct, locate the
damper at the duct spigot unless a damper in this position is inaccessible.
Supply diffusers and grilles
Louvre ceiling diffusers: Multi-bladed, removable core 4-way blow configuration, fitted with a matt
black blanking plate for 1, 2, or 3-way blow, as appropriate. If the outlet neck is smaller than the outlet
necessary to suit the louvre face size, provide a matt black reducer neck.
Variable volume diffusers: Self powered outlet with room temperature sensing and actuator to adjust
air volume. Where heaters are installed, provide duct sensing which reverses the control action during
heating.
Side wall registers: Double deflection type with horizontal front louvre blades and vertical rear blades
at 19 mm maximum centres, capable of field adjustment of air throw over the range ± 45°. Support
blades > 600 mm long at mid point on a notched support bar.
Return or exhaust grilles – indoor
Ceiling and wall louvre type: Half chevron louvres at 25 mm maximum centres.
Egg crate type (ceiling use only): Elements at 90° to each other, and at 15 mm maximum centres.
Door grilles: Full chevron, 50% minimum free area. Frame to suit door thickness.
External intake and discharge louvres
General: Refer to Windows worksection.

2.4 FANS
General
Guards: Provide galvanized steel or bronze mesh guards.
Steel components: Corrosion protect by zinc plating or better.
Motors in air stream: Direct mount to impellers with minimum Class 155 insulation to AS 2768. Provide
terminal boxes external to fan casings and wired to fan motors.
Motor minimum degree of protection: IP55.
Bearings: Provide sealed for life or grease packed bearings.
Balancing: Dynamically balance impellers.
Connections: Provide flexible duct connections at fan.
Centrifugal and mixed-flow in-line fans
Casings: Rectangular or circular manufactured from metallic-coated steel sheet, fibreglass or plastic
with spigot or flanges for duct mounting.
Impellers: Backward or forward curved blades, constructed from metallic-coated steel, aluminium or
polypropylene. Provide fans with non-overloading power characteristics.
Axial flow aerofoil fans
Casings: Tubular, flanged at each end, constructed from mild steel, fully welded, hot dip galvanized
after fabrication to AS/NZS 4680 with coating thickness and mass to Table 1. Provide access panels,
securely bolted to casings and sealed with neoprene gaskets, for maintenance.
Impellers: Provide aerofoil section blades constructed from cast aluminium alloy or glass fibre with
adjustable pitch. Provide fans with non-overloading power characteristics.
Inlet cones: Provide aerodynamically shaped cones to unducted fan inlet or outlets.
Propeller fans
Mounting: Mount on contoured diaphragm plate.
Impellers: Aluminium or UV stabilised ABS or polypropylene.
Window or wall mounted fans
Propeller type: To AS 2681 complete with isolating mountings, discharge cowls or louvres, birdmesh
guards and backdraft shutters.
Roof mounted fans
Type: Centrifugal, mixed flow, axial flow aerofoil or propeller. Comply with the respective clauses
above.
Housing: House fans in compact bases fitted with weathering skirts and manufactured from zinc-
coated steel or UV stabilised plastic or composite.
Finish:
- Metallic-coated steel: UV stabilised powder coat to match roof colour.
- Other materials: Manufacturer’s standard colour.
Vertical discharge fans: Provide weatherproof galvanized steel, plastic or aluminium backdraft
dampers where the weather may enter when units are stopped.
Birdmesh: Where backdraft dampers are not fitted, provide birdmesh guards.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 DUCTWORK
Standard
Ductwork: To AS 4254.
Rigid duct
Material: Metallic-coated sheet steel to AS 1397, coating class G2/Z275.
Coating class Z275 is by far the most common for ductwork. Critical corrosive environments may require more protection.
Flexible duct
Material: Alumidised fabric clamped on formed metal helix with insulation blanket wrapped around
duct and covered with an outer vapour barrier.

Installation: Install flexible duct as straight as possible with minimum number of bends. Maximise bend
radius. Check for and rectify any crushed flexible duct.
Support: To AS 4254. Limit sag to < 40 mm/m.
Duct insulation
Insulate ducts to reduce heat gain and prevent condensation. Provide continuous vapour barrier
around ducts carrying conditioned air. Insulate flexible connections on ducts carrying air below
ambient temperature.
Cleaning
Clean interior of ductwork progressively during installation.
Insulation and sealing: Notwithstanding the class of building, conform to BCA Volume Specification
J5.2.
Mandatory provisions for Class I buildings are covered by BCA Volume 2 clause 3.12.5.3.
3.2 REFRIGERATION PIPEWORK

General
Conform to equipment manufacturer’s recommendations for the refrigerant used.
Pipes: To AS/NZS 1571.
Deemed to comply: Split system manufacturer’s standard pre-charged piping kit.
Pipe insulation
Insulate all refrigerant and drain piping that may sweat with chemically blown closed cell nitrile rubber
in tubular form to ASTM C534. Apply to manufacturer’s recommendations. Protect insulation from
sunlight and mechanical damage.
Insulation thickness: 13 mm for pipes < DN 20, 19 mm otherwise.
Condensate drains
Provide trapped ≥ DN 20 condensate drains to AS/NZS 3666.1 from each indoor coil and safety tray.
Provide drains from each reverse cycle outdoor coil unless casing freely drains to a roof or other
location where condensate will not cause damage or pond.
3.3 UNIT INSTALLATION

General
Supply all components and install to manufacturer’s recommendations.
Outdoor equipment: Provide clearance around units for condenser air flow and maintenance access.
Ensure discharge air does not short-circuit to condenser intake.
Equipment at ground level: Mount on 100 mm high concrete plinth or equivalent impervious material.
Duct connections: Provide internal or external flexible duct connections at indoor unit.
Vibration isolation
Suspended units: Provide ≥ 4 metal spring or rubber-in-shear isolation mountings with ≥ 25 mm static
deflection and 98% isolation efficiency.
Floor mounted units: Provide neoprene waffle pads. Bolt in place.
Safety trays
If leaks or condensation from equipment could cause nuisance or damage to the building or its
contents, provide a galvanized steel safety tray under the equipment.
3.4 COMPLETION
Commissioning
Commission the systems to manufacturer’ recommendations using instruments calibrated within the
past 12 months. Check ductwork for leaks. Test all safety controls by simulating fault.
Air quantities: Balance systems to accord with design air quantities.
Tolerance on air quantities: +10%, -0%.
Temperature recording: Provide electronic data logger or thermohydrograph to record temperatures at
nominated locations and times for periods of 7 days. Prove that temperatures are within specified
tolerance.

Delete if not required. Although it may be regarded as excessive, for simple, low cost projects, temperature recording can assist
in dealing with disputes over ‘comfort’.
Check list: Submit signed commissioning check list on completion.
Cleaning
Clean filters, outdoor coils, grilles and diffusers on completion.
Operating and maintenance instructions
Provide written operating and maintenance instructions containing:
- Contractor’s contact details for service calls.
- Manufacturer’s maintenance and operation literature.
- Manufacturer’s warranty certificates if the manufacturer’s warranty period is greater than the defects
liability period.
- Description of day to day operation.
- Setting of time switches.
- Schedule of recommended maintenance.
Record drawing: Provide a drawing of the system as installed.
3.5 MAINTENANCE
This clause assumes maintenance will be included in the contract along with a warranty. This is the preferred arrangement as it
prevents conflict over warranty liability if manufacturer’s recommended maintenance have not been followed. A less desirable
alternative is to handle maintenance on a do-and-charge basis.
General
Provide corrective and preventative maintenance on the installation.
Maintenance period: The greater of 12 months from the date of commissioning of the systems and the
duration of the Defects Liability Period.
The plant should have at least 12 months warranty and maintenance period to ensure it operates through the full range of
cooling and heating seasons.
Warranty: Warrant the installation for the whole of the maintenance period.
Corrective maintenance: Attend site and undertake corrective maintenance within 24 hours of receipt
of verbal or written advice.
Preventative maintenance: Provide preventative maintenance recommended by the equipment
manufacturer. Provide all materials including consumable items and refrigerant.
Maintenance reports: Provide a signed maintenance report setting out the work done and any
measured values after each visit.
4 SELECTIONS
4.1 AIRCONDITIONING LOADS

Windows schedule
Window location Internal window shading
Window location: Provide a short description, e.g. Ground Floor Showroom or North, East and West Facades.
Internal window shading: Insert internal shading type e.g. Light coloured, open weave curtains or None. If windows have
effective internal shading (which is closed when airconditioning is operating) cooling load and plant cost can be reduced
considerably. If there is no shading or curtains are open airconditioning load and operating cost will be higher.
This schedule could be expanded if glazing systems with different thermal properties are provided in the project. (For example
performance and non-performance glass.) If this is the case include U-value and shading coefficient for each glazing type.

Internal airconditioning loads schedule

Room or area Use No. of people in Amenity grade to Internal
room AS 1668.2 equipment load
See Commentary for information on completing the Internal airconditioning loads schedule.
4.2 EQUIPMENT
Non-ducted airconditioning system schedule
Non-ducted
system
designation
Plant location and
area served
System type
Minimum Energy
Star rating
Plant location
Non-ducted system designation: Insert suitable description or code, e.g. Ground Floor.
Plant location and area served: Indicate preferred plant location or show on drawings. To be effectively airconditioned and meet
specified performance, areas served must be confined by closable doors and windows.
System type: There is a large variety of unit sizes and types available broadly divided into one piece and split systems. Provide
a suitable description or refer to a manufacturer’s model range. Do not state a size or imply one through a model number.
Minimum Energy Star rating: See www.energyrating.gov.au, a joint initiative of Commonwealth, State and Territory government
agencies. This web site provides a searchable list of registered airconditioner star ratings and energy consumptions.
Plant location: For split systems indicate preferred plant location or show on drawings. Outdoor units must be in locations that
do not cause hot air to recirculate or excessive noise in neighbouring properties.
Ducted airconditioning system schedule
Ducted system
designation
Areas served
System type
Minimum Energy
Star rating
Plant location
Ducted system designation: Insert suitable description or code.

Areas served: Provide list of rooms served, e.g. Ground Floor. To be effectively airconditioned and meet specified performance,
areas served must be confined by closable doors and windows.
System type: Specify either One piece package or Split system as appropriate. Do not state a size or imply one through a model
number.
Minimum Energy Star rating: See www.energyrating.gov.au, a joint initiative of Commonwealth, State and Territory government
agencies. This web site provides a searchable list of registered airconditioner star ratings and energy consumptions.
Plant location: Indicate preferred plant location or show on drawings. Outdoor units must be in locations that do not cause hot
air to recirculate or excessive noise in neighbouring properties.

Air grilles schedule

Function Air grille type
Supply diffusers and grilles
Return air grilles
Return air path
Air grille type: Insert type from those in Grilles and diffusers.
Return air path: As written, the worksection will provide door grilles in partitioned-off rooms and wall or ceiling return air grilles. If
other arrangements required, specify. The following example is for a situation where sound isolation or privacy is required:
• Provide acoustic transfer ducts to <list rooms> and central return air grille <insert preferred location>.

HYDRAULIC DESIGN AND INSTALL HYDRAULIC
HYDRAULIC DESIGN AND INSTALL
This worksection is applicable to simple hydraulic installations in which the hydraulic design will be undertaken by the contractor
without the involvement of a specialist hydraulic consultant. It deals with hot and cold water services, sanitary plumbing and
drainage, stormwater, natural gas and LP gas installations.
References to services that do not form part of the project works (e.g. LPG systems) should be deleted.
See the Commentary for important cautionary notes on the use of this worksection.
• Service trenching.
• Roofing for roof plumbing.
• None.
• Show the locations of hose reels on the drawings.
• Show the location and type of sanitary fixtures on the drawings.
• Roof plumbing should be covered in the Roofing worksection and detailed on the drawings.
• Locate subsoil drains on the drawings.
• Show the location and arrangement of solar hot water heaters on the drawings.
• Show locations and types of gas appliances on the drawings.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
General: Provide hydraulic services systems subject to the site and other constraints below:
The system design may be described in terms of the performance required.
For contractual reasons this summary should not attempt to be a 'Scope of Work' or to imply that it includes ALL work although
the content may appear to be very similar to what has traditionally been included in 'Scope of Work' clauses.
Do not use vague phrases like 'to the complete satisfaction of the superintendent' or blanket phrases like 'and all other work
necessary to compete the contract'.
On completion the installed systems should be verified according to the performance parameters established. Expand or edit to
suit the project. The list of headings is not exhaustive but corresponds generally to the content of this worksection.
- Cold water services: Connect the cold water supply system to the Network Utility Operator's main
through a stop valve and meter. Provide the cold water installation from the meter to the draw-off
points or connections to other services.
This is typical text. Edit to suit the project.
- Hot water services: Provide the hot water installation from the cold water connection points to the
draw-off points or connections to other services.
This is typical text. Edit to suit the project.

- Hose reel system: >

Describe the required system. Delete if not applicable.
- Sanitary plumbing and drainage: >
Describe the required system.
- Stormwater: >
Describe the required system.
- Subsoil drainage: >
Describe the required system. Delete if not applicable.
- Gas: >
Include the name of the gas, either 'Natural gas' or ' Liquefied petroleum gas' and pressure. (This worksection is only applicable
to these gas types.) Include the source of supply and extent of the installation. If LPG, include the storage arrangements. As
these may be leased include supply and payment arrangements. Delete if not applicable.
Authority submissions: Make submissions (including notices) to authorities relating to the works.
Constraints
The following site and other constraints apply to the hydraulic services on this project:
>
Describe the site constraints on the hydraulic services.
See the Commentary for more information and suggestions on constraints.
Design
Extent: Provide all additional design work necessary to complete the documented hydraulic services.
Qualification: Use only appropriately experienced and qualified persons to undertake hydraulic design
work. If requested, provide documents verifying the qualification and experience.

General
have no overlaps.
- Service trenching.
- Roofing for roof plumbing.
depends.
1.3 STANDARDS
General
Plumbing and drainage: To AS/NZS 3500.0, AS/NZS 3500.1, AS/NZS 3500.2, AS/NZS 3500.3 and
AS/NZS 3500.4 and the Plumbing Code of Australia.
Authorised products: Listed in the WaterMark Product Database, unless otherwise required by the
Network Utility Operator.
Requirements for fittings generally are specified in the AS/NZS 3500 series, AS/NZS 3718, SAA MP52 and the ATS 5200
series. AS/NZS 3718 sets out the requirements such as design, material quality requirements, construction and authorisation
procedures for tapware. It supersedes the parts of SAA MP52 dealing with these matters.

Certification under the WaterMark scheme is required under Part G of the Plumbing Code of Australia.
Copper pipe and fittings-installation and commissioning: To AS 4809.
Gas: To AS 5601.
Microbial control: To AS/NZS 3666.1 and AS/NZS 3666.2.
Some water systems must be maintained to AS/NZS 3666.2, under the BCA. For more advice on microbial control, refer to
SAA/SNZ HB32.
1.4 INTERPRETATION
Abbreviations
- LPG: Liquefied petroleum gas.
Definitions
- Network Utility Operator: A person who undertakes the piped distribution of drinking water or natural
gas for supply or is the operator of a sewerage system or a stormwater system.
This definition is based on the wording in the Plumbing Code of Australia but expanded to include natural gas. The Network
Utility Operator is also commonly known by names like the supply authority, water board etc.
1.5 INSPECTION
Notice
- Excavated surfaces.
- Concealed or underground services.
See the Commentary for other possible inclusions.
1.6 SUBMISSIONS
Drawings
The General requirements worksection contains general provisions for shop drawings. This clause sets out the specific
drawings required for the services.
Edit the list of drawings to be provided to suit the project.
Coordination is the responsibility of the contractor and will be covered directly or indirectly in the contract (and subcontracts).
Where services are carried out as subcontracts the use of any coordination clause would be in essence to define and remind
the contractor and in turn the subcontractors of their contractual obligations in general. For services it may be necessary to
specifically define installation or execution, however generalised coordination clauses that are implicit in the contractual
responsibilities should be avoided or used with extreme caution. e.g. coordinate with other above ceiling services, structure,
ceiling suspension etc.
General: Minimum A1 drawing size.
Standard: To AS 1100 Parts 101, 201, 301, 401 and 501 as applicable.
Drawings: Submit the following:
- Building work drawings showing all building work required to complete the hydraulic services.
- Detailed drawings, at 1:100 scale or larger, showing:
. Pipework and equipment layout and sections showing the work to be installed in strata, that is,
shown at the level that the services are installed. Do not submit 'glass floor' drawings.
. Location, type, grade and finish of piping, fittings, valves, meters, pipe supports, access openings,
cover plates, valve boxes and access pits.
. Location, type and other relevant details of sanitary ware, appliances and water heaters.
. Long sections of below ground drainage.
- Piping schematic drawings.
- Copy of submission drawings required by authorities and copies of approvals.

Inclusions: Include the following on the drawings:

- On-site stormwater detention areas.
- Construction ancillaries including erosion control measures, removal of excavation spoil and surface
restoration, road barriers and trafficable cover plates in the public domain.
- Relevant survey levels, site and floor set out points.
Execution details
General: Before starting the respective portions of the installation, submit the following:
- Embedded services: Proposed method for embedding services in concrete walls or floors or chasing
into concrete or masonry walls.
- Fixing of services: Typical details of locations, types and methods of fixing of services to structure.
- Inaccessible services: If services will be enclosed and not accessible after completion, submit
proposals for location of service runs and fittings.
- Proposals for location of exposed piping.
Samples
General: Provide samples listed in the Samples schedule.
Technical data
Exercise caution when handling submitted technical data. If received as part of the tender, technical data effectively is a counter
offer and can negate the effect of the documents. This clause is for data submitted after the contract has been let. Avoid terms
like 'acceptance' or 'approval' of items submitted as this may lead to disputes if they are not in accordance with the documents.
It is the specifier's responsibility to document what the project requires and the contractor's to supply it. The contract
administrator is not responsible for 'checking' submissions for conformity to the documents hence the requirement that any
proposed departures from the documents be identified by the contractor, not searched for by the contract administrator.
Certification: Submit certification that the plant and equipment submitted meets the requirements and
capacities of the contract documents except for departures that are identified in the submission.
The clause provides that unless the contractor identifies changes to the documented requirements in their submission, the
submission of equipment details does not vary the documented requirements. This is to address the situation where the
contractor submits a specific item of equipment that meets the specified performance but is found later to vary from the
documents in some construction detail that was not identified in the submission. The contractor cannot rely on 'acceptance' of
the item through the technical data submission process unless the departure from the documents has been identified.
Submissions: Submit technical data for all items of plant and equipment.
2 EXECUTION
2.1 INSTALLATION
Accessories
General: Provide the accessories and fittings necessary for the proper functioning of the systems,
including taps, valves, outlets, pressure and temperature control devices, strainers, gauges and
pumps.
Isolating valves: In addition to valves required to meet statutory requirements, provide valves so that
isolation of parts of the system for safe isolation of the system in the event of leaks or maintenance
causes a minimum of inconvenience to building occupants.
Arrangement
Edit to suit project and ensure intended access is shown on the drawings and that the plant is arranged to permit inspection,
maintenance and removal.
In hospitals and similar situations extend to exclude locations over patients who may not be able to move to avoid leaks.
Ensure that access to meet statutory requirements is shown on the drawings. This is particularly true of high level equipment
and roof mounted equipment. See AS 1470, AS 1657, AS/NZS 1892.1 and AS/NZS 2865 for relevant requirements.
Services and equipment: Locate and arrange so that:
- Failure of plant and equipment (including leaks) does not create a hazard for the building occupants
and causes a minimum or no damage to the building, its finishes and contents.
- Inspection and maintenance operations can be carried out in a safe and efficient manner, with a
minimum of inconvenience and disruption to building occupants and without damaging adjacent
structures, fixtures or finishes.

Connections to Network Utility Operator mains

General: Excavate to locate and expose the connection points and connect to the Network Utility
Operator mains. On completion, backfill and compact the excavation and reinstate surfaces and
elements which have been disturbed such as roads, pavements, kerbs, footpaths and nature strips.
Embedded pipes
The embedding of pipes under pressure in concrete is widely regarded as poor practice and one to be avoided. Some standards
such as AS 2118.9 prohibit embedding entirely while others discourage the practice. The precautions in AS 2896 are used here
for situations where embedding cannot be avoided. The Concrete in situ worksection requires that concrete not be poured until
pressure testing has been successfully completed.
General: Do not embed pipes that operate under pressure in concrete or surfacing material of a
building without prior written approval. If embedding is approved:
- Install in continuous lengths without fittings.
- Do not lay across joints between adjoining sections of concrete through which reinforcement does
not extend.
- Use only copper pipe with the minimum number of joints.
- Conform to AS 2896 clause 4.3.3.3.
- Pressure test and rectify leaks before the concrete is poured.
Penetrations and fixing
See also BCA Clause F5.6 and Specification F5.2 for restrictions on chasing etc. intended to limit sound transmission.
Fixing: If non-structural building elements are not suitable for fixing equipment and services to, subject
to prior approval, fix directly to structure and trim around holes or penetrations in non-structural
elements.
Limitations: Do not penetrate or fix to the following without prior approval:
- Structural building elements including external walls, fire walls, fire doors and access panels, other
tested and rated assemblies or elements, floor slabs and beams.
- Membrane elements including damp-proof courses, waterproofing membranes and roof coverings.
Fire rated building elements: Seal penetrations with a system conforming to AS 4072.1.
Membranes: If approval is given to penetrate membranes, provide a waterproof seal between the
membrane and the penetrating component.
Non-fire rated building elements: Seal penetrations around conduits and sleeves. Seal around cables
within sleeves. If the building element is acoustically rated, maintain the rating.
Pipe sleeves: If piping or conduit penetrates building elements, provide metal or PVC-U sleeves
formed from oversize pipe sections.
Piping
General: Install piping in straight lines, plumb and to uniform grades. Arrange and support the piping
so that it remains free from vibration and water hammer, while permitting movement in both structure
and services. Keep the number of joints to a minimum. Prevent direct contact between incompatible
metals.
Concealment: If practicable, conceal piping and fittings requiring maintenance or servicing so that they
are accessible within non-habitable enclosed spaces such as roof spaces, subfloor spaces and ducts.
Keep pipelines in subfloor spaces at least 150 mm above ground and ensure access can be provided
throughout for inspection. Provide at least 25 mm clearance between adjacent pipelines (measured
from the piping insulation where applicable).
Cover plates: Where exposed piping emerges from wall, floor or ceiling finishes, provide cover plates
of stainless steel or non-ferrous metal finished to match the piping.
Differential movement: If the geotechnical site investigation report predicts differential movements
between buildings and the ground in which pipes are buried, provide movement control joints in the
pipes.
For buildings supported independently of the underlying ground, differential movements can occur between the suspended
ground floor of the building and the ground in which the pipes are buried. Examples include piered slabs constructed on fill-as-
formwork or on void formers on reactive ground (also referred to as expansive soil).
The movement control joint is most appropriately located at the point where the pipe is last effectively restrained by the building
(either at the point of building-in or at the last supporting strap where the pipe is hung from the structure).

Pipe support materials: To be the same as the piping or galvanized or non-ferrous metals, with
bonded PVC or glass fibre woven tape sleeves where needed to separate dissimilar metals.
Pits
Location: Install below-ground water meters, control valves and gas regulators in concrete access pits
with removable pit covers.
Internal dimensions: To give 300 mm clear space all around the fittings in the pit.
Concrete: Grade N20 to AS 1379, 100 mm thick, reinforced with F82 fabric.
Pit covers: To AS 3996.
Installation: Grade floor to a point on one side and drain to the stormwater drainage system. Carry the
pit walls up to 50 mm above finished ground level. Cast in the pit cover frame flush with the top.
Trowel the top smooth.
Valve boxes
Location: Install underground isolating valves in cast-iron valve boxes with removable covers. Provide
cast-iron sluice valve covers for access to sluice valves.
Identification: Mark the box covers with the name of the service.
2.2 PAINTING, FINISHES AND MARKING

Exceptions
General: Do not paint chromium or nickel plating, anodised aluminium, glass reinforced plastic,
stainless steel, non-metallic flexible materials and normally lubricated machined surfaces.
Finishes
General: Finish exposed piping, including fittings and supports, as follows:
- In internal locations such as toilet and kitchen areas: Chrome plate copper piping to AS 1192
service condition 2, bright.
- Externally and steel piping and iron fittings internally: Paint.
- In concealed but accessible spaces (including cupboards and non-habitable enclosed spaces):
Leave copper and plastic unpainted except for identification marking. Prime steel piping and iron
fittings.
Valves: Finish valves to match connected piping.
Marking and labelling
Specify project marking systems, detailing what is to be marked and how.
General: Mark services and equipment to provide a ready means of identification.
- Locations exposed to weather: Provide durable materials.
- Pipes, conduits and ducts: Identify and label to AS 1345.
Consistency: Label and mark equipment using a consistent scheme across all services elements of
the project.
Pipeline identification
Delete if not required – it is not a common requirement.
Buried piping: Lay detectable plastic warning tape printed with the name of the service, 300 mm above
buried piping, for the full length of the piping.
Material identification marking: If pipes have grade or class identification markings install so that the
markings are visible for inspection.
2.3 HOT AND COLD WATER SERVICES

Fittings and accessories
General: Provide the fittings necessary for the proper functioning of the water supply system, including
taps, valves, backflow prevention devices, pressure and temperature control devices, strainers,
gauges and automatic controls and alarms.
Hot water temperature
AS/NZS 3500.4 clause 1.9.2 requires water that is supplied to sanitary fixtures used primarily for personal hygiene purposes in
early childhood centres, schools, nursing etc. to be ≤ 45°C and ≤ 50°C in all other buildings. It provides several acceptable
solutions including thermostatic mixing valves and hot water heaters designed to deliver water at ≤ 50°C.

Line strainers
Type: Low resistance, Y-form bronze bodied type, with screen of dezincification resistant brass,
stainless steel or monel.
Screen perforations: 0.8 mm maximum.
Pressure control valves
Provide reduction valves, pressure limiting valves or ratio valves, which produce the necessary
reduction in pressure.
Piping insulation
Standard: To AS/NZS 3500.4 Section 8.
The 2003 edition of AS/NZS 3500.4 includes extensive requirements for energy efficiency including piping insulation in Section
8. Maps in the standard define Climate regions form which the required insulation thermal performance can be determined.
Application: Fit insulation tightly to piping surfaces without gaps. Minimise number of joints. Insulate
fittings for the same thermal resistance as the piping insulation. Install the insulation on unions and
other items requiring service so that it is readily removable. Provide supports formed to fit around the
insulation so the insulation thickness is reduced by < 10%.
- Polyester in moulded tubular sections faced with factory bonded aluminium foil laminate or integral
polyester scrim.
- Polyolefin foam: Cross linked closed cell polyolefin foam faced with factory bonded aluminium foil
laminate.
- Elastomeric foam insulation: Chemically blown closed cell nitrile rubber in tubular sections to
ASTM C534. Use only solvent-based adhesive supplied by insulation manufacturer and designed
specifically for the material being used.
- Spread of flame index: 0.
Tapware
General: Provide the tapware in accordance with the Sanitary fixtures schedule.
Nominate type in the Sanitary fixtures schedule if not covered by proprietary item e.g. vandal-proof, plastic, metal, glass.
Finish and colour may also need to be stated. See Template specification. AS/NZS 3718 specifies requirements for metallic
taps, plastic taps, handsprays, mixing taps, mechanical (non-thermostatic), tap sets and jumper valves.
Metal heads and handles: Provide brass fittings or suitably bush to prevent electrolysis and growth.
Plastic heads and handles: Provide break-resistant fittings of a compact nature, to prevent fracture
and exposure of jagged or rough edges.
Tap positions: Locate hot tap to the left of or above, the cold tap. If there is sufficient space, install with
valve spindles vertical.
Vandalproof heads: If available, provide vandalproof or anti-tampering devices for the designated
types.
Thermostatic mixing valves
General: Water temperature regulated by a single hand control, capable of delivering water at the
temperature of either of the supply systems and at any temperature in between and suitable for
controlling single or multiple outlets, as appropriate.
Controls: Incorporate the following:
- A temperature sensitive automatic control which maintains temperature at the pre-selected setting
and rapidly shuts down the flow if either supply system fails or if the normal discharge water
temperature is exceeded.
- Hot water flush facility.
2.4 WATER HEATERS

General requirements for installation of water heaters are specified in AS/NZS 3500.4 Section 5 and Section 6. Supplementary
heating for solar systems is specified in AS/NZS 3500.4 Section 6.
Specify here requirements not shown on the drawings.

AS/NZS 3500.4 prescribes a minimum storage temperature of 60°C to inhibit the growth of legionella bacteria. It further sets the
maximum temperatures for the delivery at fixtures leading to the use of a tempering valve, water mixing valve or other approved
device.
Refer to AS 3498 derived from parts of AS 1056, also AS/NZS 2712 (see below), AS/NZS 3350 Parts 2.21 and 2.35 and
AS 4552.
Standard
Since 1 October 1999 all unvented electric storage hot water heaters manufactured in or imported into Australia have been
required to comply with the Minimum Energy Performance Standards (MEPS) Regulations of AS 1056.2. This performance is
available at www.energyrating.gov.au. Specifiers desiring greater energy efficiency could consider setting a lower maximum
MEPS value. For example, the maximum heat load to AS 1056.2 for a 315 litre water delivery is 2.66 kW.h/day but heaters are
available with losses as low as 2.17 kW.h/day, a reduction of almost 20%. Some heaters listed at www.energyrating.gov.au do
not meet the standard.
Energy performance: To AS 1056.1.
Gas hot water heaters: To AS 4552. If a flue damper is available for the water heater supplied, provide
one.
Tariff
General: Install so that the heating system qualifies for the tariff concession or subsidy offered by the
statutory authority.
This applies to electric storage heaters. Delete if gas. State the supply authority tariff concession (if any) for which the heater is
to be suitable e.g. off peak.
Solar water and heat pump systems
General: Provide a proprietary automatic water heater comprising solar collector and storage
container, with or without supplementary heating unit and including connections, controls and
necessary fittings.
2.5 HOSE REELS

General
General: Provide hose reels with swivel hose guides in accordance with the Fire hose reels
schedule.
Given the design impact of hose reels they should be located on the architectural drawings. For special cases consider
including:
• Nozzle material: If nothing specified probably plastic but brass is also available.
• Hose material: e.g. rubber or PVC.
• Painting system: If manufacturer's standard is not sufficient e.g. full gloss, solvent-borne, interior. Refer to the Metals and
prefinishes worksection for other available systems.
General: Submit evidence of listing in the ActivFire Register of Fire Protection Equipment.
The register is available from http://www.activfire.gov.au/. This was formerly the SSL Register of Accredited Products - Fire
Protection Equipment.
Installation: To AS 2441.
Commissioning: Conform to the recommendations of SAA HB92.
2.6 STORMWATER
Roof plumbing is covered in the Roofing worksection. If there are design requirements they should be covered in that
worksection. Roof drainage system design is dealt with in AS/NZS 3500.3 Section 3.
Cleaning
General: During construction, use temporary covers to openings and keep the system free of debris.
Pipe laying
General: Lay pipelines with the spigot ends in the direction of flow.
Downpipe connections
General: Turn up drain branch pipelines to finish 50 mm above finished ground or pavement level.

Pits
Cover levels: Locate the top of covers or gratings, including frames as follows:
- In paved areas: Flush with the paving surface.
- In landscaped areas: 25 mm above finished surface.
- Gratings taking surface water runoff: Set to receive the runoff without ponding.
Stormwater drains
Preferably show the type and size of stormwater pipelines and jointing and bedding requirements on the drawings. Alternatively,
requirements not shown on the drawings or specified in AS/NZS 3500.3 or the worksection, may be specified here.
See AS/NZS 3500.3 clause 2.5 for types of materials and limitations on the use of each material for stormwater installations.
Consult with relevant authorities about other restrictions on the use of particular materials.
General: Provide stormwater drains to connect downpipes, surface drains, subsoil drains and drainage
pits to the outlet point or point of connection.
Downpipe connections: Turn up branch pipelines with bends to meet the downpipe, finishing 50 mm
(nominal) above finished ground or pavement level. Seal joints between downpipes and drains.
Encasement
Delete if concrete encasement is not required. Otherwise, state where encasement is required.
General: If necessary, encase the pipeline in concrete at least 150 mm above and below the pipe and
150 mm each side or the width of the trench, whichever is the greater.
Concrete: Grade N20 to AS 1379.
Lined surface drains-half round pipe
General: Provide surface drains lined with half round pipe, including bedding and jointing.
Show location on the drawings.
Lined surface drains-grated trenches
General: Provide precast or cast in situ concrete lined trenches with bitumen coated cast-iron or
galvanized steel gratings.
Show location on the drawings.
2.7 SUBSOIL DRAINS

General
General: Provide subsoil drains to intercept groundwater seepage and prevent water build-up behind
walls and under floors and pavements. Connect subsoil drains to surface drains or to the stormwater
drainage system as applicable.
The location of subsoil drains should be shown on the drawings. See AS/NZS 3500.3 Section 6 and Appendix M for a method of
design.
Connection: Connect subsoil drains to the stormwater drainage system.
Jointing: Provide tees, couplings or adaptors at junctions of subsoil pipes to AS 2439.1.
Filters: UV resistant geotextile material with a permeability ≥ 10 times that of the native soil and
capable of retaining particles of 0.25 mm size. Securely fit or join the sock at each joint.
Subsoil drains: Provide proprietary perforated plastic pipe.
2.8 SANITARY PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE

Vent pipes
Staying to roof: If fixings for stays penetrate the roof covering, seal the penetrations and make
watertight.
Terminations: Provide bird-proof vent cowls of the same material and colour as the vent pipe.
Sanitary fixtures
Provide sanitary fixtures in the Sanitary fixtures schedule complete with all accessories necessary
for correct installation and use.
2.9 GAS
Standards
AS 5601 is identical to AG 601 and deals with both natural gas and LPG.

Reticulated gas systems: To AS 5601.

Commercial appliances: To AS 3814.
LPG storage
Determine the required storage capacity and locate the LPG storage on the drawings ensuring that the required separation
distances in AS/NZS 1596 (for tanks) and AS 5601 Appendix J (for cylinders) are achieved.
Location and installation of LPG cylinders and tanks: To AS/NZS 1596.
Hoods: Provide a weatherproof protective steel cover to the valve and regulators of 450 L capacity
tanks, together with hinge pins, padlock and key.
Certificate holders: On LPG tanks provide a galvanized steel pipe for storage of current storage
system approval and test certificates. Fit one end with a brass plug and the other with a threaded
brass cap. Weld to the support member of the tank or cylinder. Mark the threaded cap with the phrase
'LPG CERTIFICATES'.
Portable appliance connections
Type: Self-sealing, chrome plated.
Show locations of portable appliance connections on the drawings.
Underground piping
Marker plates: Provide galvanized steel or brass marker plates at ground level at each change of
direction in the underground pipeline, engraved to show the direction of the line and name of the
service. Inset marker plates in 150 x 150 x 150 mm concrete blocks, with the tops set flush with
ground level.
Commissioning
General: On completion of installation and testing, turn on isolating and control valves and purge and
charge the system.
Purging: Comply with the recommendations of AS 5601 Appendix D.
Appliances: Commission appliances.
Charging: Hand over the system fully charged with gas.
Wall boxes
General: Provide wall boxes to house above ground valves and regulators.
Construction: 1.2 mm galvanized steel plate continuous welded box construction with metal frame
door, glazed with 2.5 mm clear float glass. Provide lock, keys and two 100 mm brass hinges.
Marking: Adhere to the glass a 200 x 100 mm white laminated plastic label, engraved with red letters
'IN CASE OF EMERGENCY BREAK GLASS AND SHUT VALVES'.
2.10 COMPLETION
This clause does not include regular maintenance, for example on thermostatic mixing valves. Add if required.
Testing
Hydrostatic tests: Do not install insulation until the piping has been tested. Pressure test cold and hot
water services to AS/NZS 3500.1 Section 16. Include pipe joints, valve seats, tap washers and
strainers. Repair as necessary, replace if damaged and retest.
Performance: Carry out verification tests and measurements to demonstrate compliance with the
documents.
Reports: Submit reports indicating observations and results of tests and compliance or non-
compliance with requirements.
Completion
Completion and testing requirements are dealt with in detail in the respective sections of the AS/NZS 3500 series and AS 5601.
Hot and cold water services: On completion, flush pipelines using water and leave them clean.
Stormwater and wastewater services: On completion, flush the system using water and leave clean.
Gas installation: On completion of installation and testing, turn on isolating and control valves and
purge and charge the installation.
Charging
General: On completion of installation, commissioning, testing and disinfection, fill the hot and cold
water systems with water, turn on control and isolating valves and the energy supply and leave the
water supply system in full operational condition.

LPG systems: Fill gas storage containers and replace gas used in testing.
This requires the contractor to supply the initial fill of LPG. The LPG supply contract may require otherwise.
These are typical provisions. Edit to suit the project.
General: Provide written operating and maintenance instructions containing:
- Contractor's contact details for service calls.
- Manufacturer's maintenance and operation literature.
- Manufacturer's warranty certificates if the manufacturer's warranty period is greater than the defects
liability period.
- Description of day-to-day operation.
- Schedule of recommended maintenance.
- Heated water systems: Maintenance instructions to AS/NZS 3666.2.
- Recommendations for the operation, care and maintenance of gas appliances, storage tanks,
valves, regulators and their associated fittings.
Record drawings
It is important that the record drawings show the actual, as opposed to the design, location of services, particularly buried
services.
General: Provide a drawing of the system as installed. Include all shop drawings. Show dimensions,
types and location of the services in relation to permanent site features and other underground
services. Show the spatial relationship to building structure and other services. Include all changes
made during commissioning and the maintenance period.
Domestic cold water or fire mains: Show the pressure available at the initial connection point and the
pressure available at the most disadvantaged location on each major section of the works.
Diagrams: Include diagrammatic drawings of each system.
Services below ground: Where pipes and fittings are below ground show the depth and dimensioned
references that will allow the future location of the service for maintenance or expansion.
Stormwater: If storm water pipes are shown include the pipe size and pipe grade together with the
maximum acceptable flow and the actual design flow.
Training
General: Explain and demonstrate to the principal's staff the purpose, function and operation of the
installations.
3 SELECTIONS
3.1 SUBMISSIONS
Samples schedule
Sample required Details and inclusions
Include details of the required samples. Mock-up of sanitary fixtures may be appropriate to verify clearances etc.

3.2 PIPING
System piping schedule
System Pipe material and Grade or class Jointing method Bedding material
nominal size
Cold water
Hot water
Sanitary plumbing
Sanitary drainage
Stormwater
Gas
Alternatively omit the schedule and leave selection of materials to the contractor as permitted in the Standards. Regardless of
what the contractor selects, metal pipe is specified for some critical applications in the Template such as pipe embedded in
concrete.
3.3 COMPONENTS
Appliance schedule
Appliance Description Accessories Colour/finish
Show locations and types of appliances on the drawings.

Description: Either describe functionally or provide manufacturer's name and catalog number.
Fire hose reel schedule
Type or location
A B C
Mounting type
Reel type
Reel material
Reel diameter (mm)
Nozzle type
Hose length (m)
Alternatively show the type and details on the drawings and delete this schedule.
Mounting type: e.g. recessed or fixed. This affects operation too e.g. swivel hose guide, for most installations, or swinging hose
reel, for recessed installations.
Reel type: e.g. drum or cage. Also material, diameter.
Nozzle type: e.g. jet or spray or jet only.
Hose length: Typical standard lengths are 18, 25, 30 and 36 m.
Sanitary fixtures schedule
Fixture Description Accessories and Colour/finish
tapware

Fixture Description Accessories and Colour/finish

tapware
Show locations and types of fixtures on the drawings.

Description: Either describe functionally or provide manufacturer's name and catalog number. Include relevant details e.g.
number of tap holes. If appropriate include water efficiency rating to AS/NZS 6400 e.g. A up to AAAAA
Accessories and tapware: Either describe functionally or provide manufacturer's name and catalog number.
Water heater schedule

Type or location
A B C
Water heater type
Heat source
Storage water heaters
Water storage volume (litres)
Rated hot water recovery (litres) at a rise of (°C)
Instantaneous water heaters
Flow rate (25°C water temperature rise)
Electric hot water heaters
Heating elements (number x watts)
Gas hot water heaters
Gas input (MJ/h)
Solar hot water heaters
Number of collector panels
Solar collector
Collector performance
Boost energy source
Heat pump hot water heaters
Maximum rated input power (watts)
Show the location of the water heaters on the drawings. For solar heaters include the location of solar collectors.
Water heater type: e.g. indoor storage, indoor instantaneous, outdoor storage.
Heat source: e.g. electric, off-peak electric, gas, solar, heat pump.
Rated hot water recovery (litres) at a rise of (°C): e.g. 250 litres at 50°C. This is redundant if the heating element rating or gas
input is specified.
Container construction: describe materials, e.g. vitreous glass coated steel.
Maximum water supply pressure (kPa): Additional pressure control valves may be required to match the supply pressure to the
heater.
Maximum allowable stand-by heat loss (kW.h/24h): Include if lower values than in AS 1056.1 are required. May be omitted
otherwise.
Tariff arrangements: if elements are to be wired for separate electrical tariffs describe what is required.
Flue damper required: e.g. yes or no. Flue dampers substantially reduce losses when the burner is off.
Boost energy source: e.g. Gas, input (MJ/h) or electric elements (number x watts). Omit if no boost provided.

Maximum rated input power (watts): e.g. 1200. There is currently no MEPS rating for heat pump water heaters. (They are
however much more efficient than other, non-solar, types.) One way of specifying energy efficient performance is to set an
upper limit on input power. For a given rated delivery a lower input power indicates a more efficient heater.
3.4 LPG STORAGE

LPG storage systems schedule
Type or location
A B B
Storage type
Total capacity (L)
Number of cylinders
Method of securing and supporting
Enclosure
Fittings
Storage type: e.g. tank or cylinder.

SANITARY FIXTURES HYDRAULIC
SANITARY FIXTURES
This worksection is applicable to the selection and installation of sanitary fixtures. AS/NZS 3500.0 uses the term fixtures
generically for all receptacles that discharge into the sanitary plumbing or sanitary drainage installation. It distinguishes between
soil fixtures and waste fixtures. A soil fixture includes WC pans, urinals and slop hopper. Waste fixtures covers all fixtures that
are not soil fixtures. The reference standards are the AS/NZS 3500 series which are cited in the Plumbing Code of Australia.
For a systematic approach to the assessment of risks of plumbing procedures, see SAA MP78.
Information on the water conservation and water efficiency ratings are available from the Water Services Association of
Australia website http://www.wsaa.asn.au/. For shower heads, dishwashers, clothes washers, urinals and tap outlets, specify
water efficiency to AS/NZS 6400 e.g. A up to AAAAA (5A). All toilet systems must have an AAA rating. Note that in some areas
dual-flush 6/3 litre WC suites are mandatory.
• Tapware.
• Wastewater.
• Specialised fixtures such as those for laboratories and hospitals.
• Some types of custom-made fixtures may be more appropriately covered in other worksections such as Timber fixtures.
• Non-sanitary bathroom fixtures such as grab rails and soap dispensers should be included in Tapware. Custom-built vanity
cabinets should be included in the appropriate worksection, for example, Timber fixtures.
• None.
• The locations of fixtures should be shown on the drawings keyed, if appropriate, to the Schedules. If critical (e.g. required
by BCA and the AS 1428 series) include mounting heights and the like.
• In general manufacturers' installation details should be adequate and need not be repeated but it may be necessary to add
detail on the drawings or add text for specific fixtures such as bidettes and bidets, flush valves, urinal assemblies and WC
pans.
• If the project is to be delivered in trade packages include details of who supplies sanitary fixtures and the respective
responsibilities.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
General: Provide sanitary fixtures as follows and to the Selections.

General
NATSPEC `777 [Insert date]

have no overlaps.
- Tapware.
- Wastewater.
If using General requirements (Hydraulic) (for example in a trade package specification) delete references to Hydraulic general
requirements. In other cases the Hydraulic general requirements worksection should not be deleted as it contains material on
which this worksection depends.
1.3 INTERPRETATION
Abbreviations
- WC: Water closet.
1.4 STANDARDS
Authorised products
Standard: Listed in the WaterMark Product Database, unless otherwise required by the Network Utility
Operator.
General material quality requirements and authorisation procedures are covered by SAA MP52 which cites a number of sanitary
ware standards, including AS 1172.1 (WC pans), AS 1172.2 (WC cisterns), AS 1371 (plastic toilet seats), AS 1756 (household
sinks), AS 3588 (shower bases and shower modules) and AS 3861 (spa baths). AS/NZS 1229 (laundry troughs and tubs) and
AS/NZS 1730 (washbasins) are not cited.
SAA MP52 covers general material quality requirements and authorisation procedures. Requirements for tapware are dealt with
in AS/NZS 3718 which supersedes the parts of MP52 dealing with tapware.
Certification under the WaterMark scheme is required under Part G of the PCA.
Standards
Sanitary fixtures: To the ATS 5200 series.
Design for access and mobility: AS 1428.1, AS 1428.2 and AS 1428.3.
Edit or delete to suit project. Specific requirements for persons with disabilities are covered in the BCA and the AS 1428 series.
These may influence factors such as the selection and location of fixtures and accessories.
1.5 SUBMISSIONS
Certification
General: Submit evidence that proposed fixtures are listed in the WaterMark Product Database.
Since certification is mandatory this should not be necessary. Delete unless there is concern about the possible supply of
uncertified products.
Samples
General: Submit samples listed in the Samples schedule.
Provide a list of the samples required in the Samples schedule. Delete subclause and schedule if no samples are required.

2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCTS
Laundry troughs and tubs
Sealants
General: Use only sealants that do not support microbial growth.
AS/NZS 3666 requires that sealants not support microbial growth. Many commonly uses silicone based sealants do not meet
this requirement and will support the growth of fungus. Colour to match fixture.
Wash basins
3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
General
Accessories: Use manufacturer's brackets and accessories where these are available and suitable for
the mounting substrate.
Protection: Deliver fixtures to site protected from damage under site conditions by coatings, coverings
and packaging. Remove only sufficient protection to permit installation.
Installation
If critical show dimensions such as mounting heights and set out on the drawings. Make sure that the dimensions conform to the
requirements of applicable standards and codes such BCA and the AS 1428 series.
Connections: Connect to each fixture supply and waste services. Install plumb and level.
Cutting and fitting: If it is necessary to cut and/or fit substrate to install an item carry out this before the
surface is finished or painted. Remove items when required for painting and protect until re-installed.
Reinstall when painting and finishing is complete. Cap or plug the open ends of pipes.
Substrate and fixings: Before installation make sure that the substrate to which the fixtures are to be
installed is adequate. In solid walls confirm adequacy of the material at fixing locations.
Additional text and/or details on the drawings may be required to ensure fixing details are adequate for the substrate materials
involved and likely loads, including those from possible abuse.
Noggins: In framed construction provide a solid noggin at each fixing point.
Vitreous china fixtures
General: Undertake preparation, assembly, connections to water supply and sanitary plumbing,
application of slurries and sealants in sequence. Install the fixture without stressing its attachment
points.
3.2 FIXTURES
Baths
Standard: Install to AS/NZS 2023 Appendix B.
Frame supports: Make sure that all legs or feet are equally loaded.
Position: Set bath firmly with required points fully supported, level and flush.
Ventilation: Provide ventilation to enclosed spaces under each bath.
Size: Aggregate free area of ventilating openings ≥ 5000 mm2.
Wall hung basins
General: Set basins firmly to walls or vanities as detailed. Connect through trap to the drainage
system.
Shower cabinets
General: Install to manufacturer's recommendations and details. Make sure that doors fit closely and
accurately. Test for water egress around sides and base.

Shower bases
General: Sit base firmly in place to manufacturer's recommendations and details and connect to
drainage service, ready for following work.
Waterproofing - wet areas covers shower trays provided under shower floors for waterproofing purposes.
Vanities
General: Install to manufacturer's recommendations and details. Seal top and upstand to wall surface.
Seal cut surfaces to prevent moisture penetration.
3.3 COMPLETION
Damage
General: Inspect all work and replace or repair to factory condition damaged or marked fixtures and
components.
Protective coatings
General: On completion remove all protective coatings, stickers and the like and clean surfaces.
Check and clean debris from traps.
4 SELECTIONS
If sanitary fixtures are not detailed on the drawings they may be specified here. The use of proprietary item catalog or model
numbers will simplify specifying.
If specifying sanitary fixtures as proprietary items include the manufacturer’s name, model name or catalog number, colour etc
for specified proprietary items.
The schedules include features typically offered as options. If the selected make and model does not offer the option the
respective feature may be deleted. Add other characteristics and features as required.
Include associated tapware in Tapware, not in these schedules. Where the tapware is installed directly on the fixture the tap
arrangement must be included so the correct number of holes can be provided.
4.1 SANITARY FIXTURES

Baths schedule
Type or location
A B C
Brand
Catalog number or model
Material
Size
Type
Wall thickness
Waste outlet size
Installation and support
Overflow
Notes on the Baths schedule

For spa baths, see AS 3861. For design, construction and operation of spa pools see AS 2610 parts 1 and 2 and SAA HB112.
Material: e.g. cast iron or pressed steel vitreous enamelled, vitreous china or plastic and composite materials, all allowed under
AS/NZS 2023. If cast iron, include the grade if other than T150.
Size: e.g. 1675 x 900 mm.
Type: e.g. built-in, inset, free standing.
Wall thickness: Include if more than the minimum in the standard.
Waste outlet size: e.g. DN 40 or DN 50.

Installation and support: Select from options in AS/NZS 2023 Appendix B e.g. frame supports, fully bedded, floor pad support.
Overflow: State if required or omit if not required.
Basins schedule
Type or location
A B C
Brand
Material
Colour
Bowl size (nominal)
Soap recesses
Sides
Supports
Overflow
Taps and spouts
Trap
Location
Rim height from floor
Notes on the Basins schedule

Material: e.g. vitreous china, selected colour (or state colour), stainless steel.
Bowl size: e.g. 450 x 410 x 140 mm deep.
Soap recesses: e.g. 1, 2, or not required.
Sides: e.g. with splashback, anti-splash rim, flat rim, tile skirt, blade skirt.
Supports: e.g. built-in brackets, bolt on wall brackets, chromium plated towel rail legs and brackets, matching pedestal and
brackets made for and supplied with the basin.
Overflow: State if required or not required.
Taps and spouts: To define the number and size of holes required. e.g. 2 taps, central outlet, or 2 combined tap and spouts or
single mixer. Include taps etc in Tapware.
Trap: State type and material.
Location: e.g. corner unit or vanity unit.
Rim height from floor: if not detailed on the drawings.
Bidettes and bidets schedule
Type or location
A B C
Brand
Type
Material
Type
Water supply
Load test to AS 3494 Appendix A

Notes on the Bidettes and bidets schedule

Bidets are not suitable for direct connection to the potable water supply. A separate supply (hot and cold) is required.
Bidettes with the prescribed minimum air gap measured after tapware has been fitted may be directly fitted to the potable water
supply.
Include associated tapware in Tapware.
Type: e.g. bidet or bidette.
Material: e.g. vitreous china or stainless steel allowed under AS 3494.
Type: e.g. douche spray blow the rim of the bowl or fitted with over-the-rim taps.
Water supply: e.g. to suit either bidet or bidette.
Cisterns schedule
Type or location
A B C
Brand
Type
Material
Colour
Nominal flush (litres)
Cleaners sinks schedule

Type or location
A B C
Brand
Flush valves schedule

Type or location
A B C
Brand
Laundry tub schedule

Type or location
A B C
Brand

Shower cabinets schedule

Type or location
A B C
Brand
Shower bases schedule

Type or location
A B C
Brand
Stainless steel sinks schedule

Type or location
A B C
Type
Grade
Thickness
Bowls
Taps and spouts
Waste outlet
Outlet plug
Trap
Appliance connections
Drainer
- Location
- Surface
- Overall length (sink and drainer)
- Overall width
- Splashback
- Tiling flange
- Fascia
- Drainer backing
- Backing to splashback and fascias
Sink support
Bench inset sink
Notes on the Stainless steel sinks schedule

Type: e.g. sink and drainer or bench inset sink.
Grade: State grade if other than 304 otherwise delete.

Thickness: e.g. light duty bench tops 1.2 mm, heavy duty tops 1.6 mm.
Bowls: State number of bowls e.g. single, double and sizes e.g. 381 x 330 x 152 mm deep.
Taps and spouts: To define the number and size of holes required. e.g. 2 taps, central outlet, or 2 combined tap and spouts or
single mixer. Include taps etc in Tapware.
Waste outlet: State materials for top flange e.g. stainless steel and body e.g. copper alloy to AS 1589, or PVC to AS/NZS 1260.
Outlet plug: State material e.g. vulcathene and, if required, attachment to sink e.g. stainless steel chain and staple.
Trap: State type and material.
Appliance connections: Insert requirements for connection to dishwashers etc. Provide details on the drawings or describe in
the specification if necessary.
Drainer:
• Location: e.g. one side of bowls (and which side) or both sides of bowls.
• Surface: e.g. fluted or plain.
• Overall length (sink and drainer): e.g. 1000 mm, 1200 mm, 1400 mm, 1600 mm, 1800 mm.
• Overall width: e.g. 460 mm.
• Splashback: e.g. at back, or at back and sides.
• Tiling flange: e.g. at back, or at back and sides.
• Fascia: e.g. at front, at front and sides, or flat rim insert pattern.
• Drainer backing: e.g. bond under pressure with an appropriate adhesive to 19 mm thick moisture resistant particleboard, or
to seasoned timber 19 mm thick. Do not specify anti-drumming compound if solid bonded backing is specified.
• Backing to splashback and fascias: e.g. as for drainer backing.
Sink support: e.g. on cupboard and bench unit specified in Timber fixtures.
Bench inset sink: e.g. bench top unit (bowl only, no draining board) with integral beaded rim for sealing to bench top.
Urinal assemblies schedule
Type or location
A B C
Type
Flushing system
Outlet connector
Foot grating
Supports
Cisterns
Trap
Water efficiency rating to AS/NZS 6400
Notes on the Urinal assemblies schedule

Type: e.g. wall mounted vitreous china (include colour) or stainless steel.
Flushing system: e.g. integral flushing rim, chromium plated button spreaders, stainless steel button spreaders.
Outlet connector: e.g. fit with domed CP brass grating, without dome waste.
Foot grating: If required e.g. stainless steel hinged open bar grating of suitable strength.
Supports: Include if wall hung e.g. built-in brackets, bolt on wall brackets.
Cisterns: e.g. Siphon flushing cisterns including sparge and overflow pipes. Fix to wall with masonry anchors. Run sparge pipes
from cisterns down wall face of duct, pass through wall above spreaders, and connect to spreaders (refer to AS/NZS 3500.1
Section 10 for cisterns, flush and sparge pipes).
State if overflow pipe discharge is required e.g. internal, external or shown on the drawings.
State flushing action e.g. automatic, manual pull chain, cord, push button.
Trap: State type e.g. integral or separate and material if separate.
Water efficiency rating to AS/NZS 6400: e.g. A up to AAAAA (5A). See Commentary.
For stainless steel urinals include:

• Grade, either 304 or 316.

• Thickness e.g. 1.6 mm. AS/NZS 3982 stipulates a minimum of 1.2 mm for slab, stall and trough urinals.
• Surface finish designation - standard suggests satin or non-reflective i.e. No. 4.
• Length e.g. as shown on the drawings.
• Button spreader material e.g. chromium plated or stainless steel.
• Outlet position and size e.g. as shown on the drawings.
• Anti-drumming compound e.g. waterproof type capable of adhering to stainless steel and withstanding impact forces likely
to be encountered during the service of the fixture. Finish the surface to a smooth plane.
Vanity schedule
Type or location
A B C
Brand
Top style
Taps and spouts
Cabinet finish
Cabinet hardware
Taps and spouts: e.g. 2 taps, central spout, or 2 combined tap and spouts.
WC pans, schedule
Type or location
A B C
Type
Brand
Material
Colour
Seat form
Trap
Type: e.g. close-coupled, pedestal, wall hung.

Seat form: e.g. open-front, closed front.
Trap: e.g. P, S.
Samples schedule
Type or location
A B C
Provide list of required samples. If a sample installation (as opposed to sample supply only) is required indicate where this is to
be and other related details.

TAPWARE HYDRAULIC
TAPWARE
This worksection is applicable to taps and tapware and includes related fittings such as towel rails. The reference standards are
the AS/NZS 3500 series which are cited in the Plumbing Code of Australia.
For a systematic approach to the assessment of risks of plumbing procedures, see SAA MP78.
• Sanitary fixtures.
• Specialised tapware such as those for laboratories and hospitals.
• Electronically operated taps.
• Show locations of fittings and particular requirements, if any, on the drawings.
• If critical (e.g. required by BCA and the AS 1428 series) include mounting heights and the like.
• If the project is to be delivered in trade packages include details of who supplies tapware and the respective
responsibilities.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
General: Provide tapware.

General
have no overlaps.

TAPWARE HYDRAULIC
- Sanitary fixtures.
If using General requirements (Hydraulic) (for example in a trade package specification) delete references to Hydraulic general
requirements. In other cases the Hydraulic general requirements worksection should not be deleted as it contains material on
which this worksection depends.
1.3 STANDARDS
Authorised products
Standard: Listed in the WaterMark Product Database, unless otherwise required by the Network Utility
Operator.
Requirements for fittings generally are specified in the AS/NZS 3500 series, AS/NZS 3718, SAA MP52 and the ATS 5200
series. AS/NZS 3718 sets out the requirements such as design, material quality requirements, construction and authorisation
procedures for tapware. It supersedes the parts of SAA MP52 dealing with these matters.
Certification under the WaterMark scheme is required under Part G of the Plumbing Code of Australia.
Standards
Design for access and mobility: AS 1428.1, AS 1428.2 and AS 1428.3.
Edit or delete to suit project. Specific requirements for persons with disabilities are covered in the Plumbing Code of Australia,
BCA and the AS 1428 series. These may influence factors such as the selection and location of fixtures tapware and
accessories.
1.4 SUBMISSIONS
Certification
General: Submit evidence that proposed tapware is listed in the WaterMark Product Database.
Since certification is mandatory this should not be necessary. Delete unless there is concern about the possible use of
uncertified products.
Samples
General: Submit samples listed in the Samples schedule.
Provide a list of the samples required in the Samples schedule. Delete subclause and schedule if no samples are required.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCTS
Accessories
General: Provide chrome plated brass escutcheons and cover plates over visible penetrations.
Sealants
General: Use only sealants that do not support microbial growth.
AS/NZS 3666 requires that sealants not support microbial growth. Many commonly used silicone based sealants do not meet
this requirement and will support the growth of fungus.
Colour: To match fixture.
Insert specific colour if required.
Tap and valve heads

Metal heads and handles: Provide brass fittings or a suitable bush to prevent electrolysis and growth.
Plastic heads and handles: Provide compact fittings designed to prevent fracture and exposure of
jagged or rough edges.
Vandal proof heads: Provide vandal proof or anti-tampering devices for the designated types.
Nominate type of head (e.g. vandal-proof, plastic, metal, glass) in Selections schedule if not covered by proprietary item. Finish
and colour may also need to be stated.
AS/NZS 3718 specifies requirements for metallic taps, plastic taps, hand sprays, mechanical mixing taps (non-thermostatic), tap
sets and jumper valves.

TAPWARE HYDRAULIC
Water efficiency
Information on the water conservation and water efficiency ratings is available from the Water Services Association of Australia
(WSAA) website http://www.wsaa.asn.au/. The Association currently lists about 300 rated products.
For shower heads, dishwashers, clothes washers, urinals and tap outlets, specify water efficiency to AS/NZS 6400 e.g. A up to
AAAAA (5A). All toilet systems must have at least a 3A rating.
Include the water efficiency rating in the Selections schedules.
See Commentary for more information.
Shower heads: To AS/NZS 3662.
Water efficient tapware: Tested and labelled with their water efficiency rating to AS/NZS 6400.
SAA MP52 and AS/NZS 3500.4 cite AS 4032 for thermostatic mixing valves. AS 4032.1 covers performance requirements.
AS 4032.2 covers tempering valves and temperature actuated devices. AS 4032.3 covers field testing and maintenance.
Appendix D of AS 3498 disputes the adequacy of the performance requirement of AS/NZS 4032.2 in relation to scalding and
uses more stringent criteria for water temperature.
In some situations hot water heaters confirming to AS 3498 are an alternative to thermostatic mixing valves under
AS/NZS 3500.4.
See Commentary for more information.
General: Water temperature regulated by a single hand control, capable of delivering water at the
temperature of either of the supply systems and at any temperature in between, and suitable for
controlling single or multiple outlets, as appropriate.
Controls: Incorporate the following:
- A temperature sensitive automatic control that maintains temperature at the pre-selected setting and
rapidly shuts down the flow if either supply system fails, or if the normal discharge water
temperature is exceeded.
Volume control may also be required but this is difficult to achieve for multi-outlet fixtures. Unequal supply pressures are
balanced by pressure reduction valves installed at the mixing valve inlet.
- Hot water flush facility.
This refers to facility to disengage thermostat temperature control during pasteurisation procedures.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
General
General: Install to manufacturer's recommendations. Use manufacturer's recommended tools and
templates.
Location
General: Locate to dimensions shown on the drawings.
Show dimensions on the drawings. Make sure that the dimensions conform to the requirements of applicable standards and
codes such BCA and the AS 1428 series.
Installation
General: Install level, plumb and true to line in the required location. Make sure moving parts function
freely and without obstruction. Do not modify supplied units.
Seal: Provide resilient seals between fixtures and backnuts.
Cutting and fitting
General: If it is necessary to cut and/or fit substrate to install an item carry out this before the surface
is finished or painted. Remove items when required for painting and protect until re-installed. Reinstall
when painting and finishing is complete. Cap or plug the open ends of pipes.
Tap positions
General: Locate hot tap to the left of, or above, the cold tap.

TAPWARE HYDRAULIC
3.2 COMPLETION
Adjustment
General: Inspect and adjust tapware correct and smooth operation. Replace units where adjustment
does not rectify incorrect or defective operation.
Damage
General: Inspect all work and replace or repair to factory condition damaged or marked fixtures and
components.
Foreign matter: Inspect for presence of foreign matter particularly on tap seats. Remove if found.
Replace damaged seats.
Protective coatings
General: On completion remove all protective coatings, stickers and the like and clean surfaces.
Check and clean debris from traps.
Field testing and maintenance: To AS 4032.3.
4 SELECTIONS
If taps and outlets and the like are not shown on the drawings they may be specified here. The use of proprietary item catalog or
model numbers will simplify specifying.
The schedules include features typically offered as options. If the selected make and model does not offer the option the
respective feature may be deleted. For example if the selected tapware is available only with ceramic disks this need not be
included in the schedule.
Add other characteristics and features as required.
4.1 TAPWARE
Bath tapware schedule
Type or location
A B C
Brand
Finish
Outlet type
Plug
Spindle
Vandal resistant construction
Use this schedule for tapware and tapware sets such as:
• Bath mixer.
• Bath sets.
• Diverter sets.
Finish: Include type of finish, colour (if relevant) and trim material and finish (if relevant).
Outlet type: e.g. aerated or plain.
Plug: State if required and type.
Spindle: e.g. ceramic disc or jumper valve. Some models may only be available with one or the other.
Vandal resistant construction: State if required, otherwise omit.

TAPWARE HYDRAULIC
Basin tapware schedule

Type or location
A B C
Brand
Finish
Outlet type
Plug
Spindle
• Basin mixer.
• Basin sets.
• Vanity basin mixer.
• Vanity basin sets.
Outlet type: e.g. aerated or plain, fixed or swivel.
Plug: State if required and type.
Water efficiency rating to AS/NZS 6400: e.g. A up to AAAAA (5A). See the Commentary for more information.
Laundry trough and tub tapware schedule
Type or location
A B C
Brand
Laundry extension arm type
Laundry extension arm extension
Finish
Mounting
Spindle
Laundry extension arm type: e.g. telescopic, folding or plain, swivel or fixed.
Laundry extension arm extension: e.g. 250 mm.
Mounting: e.g. wall or hob.

TAPWARE HYDRAULIC
Shower tapware schedule

Type or location
A B C
Brand
Finish
Hand shower
Shower head
Spindles
Hand shower: State if required, including bracket support, protective coating, etc.
Shower head: State type e.g. fixed flow, adjustable flow, and connection type fixed or swivel, with or without arm.
Spindles: e.g. ceramic disc or jumper valve. Some models may only be available with one or the other.
Water efficiency rating to AS/NZS 6400: e.g. A up to AAAAA (5A). See the Commentary for more information.
Sink tapware schedule
Type or location
A B C
Brand
Finish
Outlet reach
Outlet type
Plug
Spindle
For Cleaners sink taps include size e.g. DN15 and whether bib or bib hose.
Outlet reach: e.g. 150 mm.
Outlet type: e.g. aerated or plain, fixed or swivel.
Plug: State if required with sink sets.

TAPWARE HYDRAULIC
Other tapware schedule

Type or location
A B C
Brand
Finish
Spindle
• Cistern set (conventional or mini).
• External standpipe (DN15 or DN20).
• Hose cock.
• Pillar cock.
• Washing machine sets.
Vandal resistant construction: State if required and, if relevant, whether removable key is to be provided.
Proprietary fittings and fixtures schedule
Type or location
A B C
Brand
Dimensions
Material and finish
Number off
Use this schedule for proprietary fittings and fixtures such as:
• Bath rails.
• Coat hooks.
• Grab rails.
• Shower seats.
• Shower shelves.
• Soap dishes.
• Toilet roll holders.
• Tooth brush holders.
• Towel rails.
• Towel rings.
• Towel supply shelves.
• Vanity shelf.
• Wall cabinets.
Modify the schedule or add to the features listed to suit the fittings covered.
Material and finish: Include type of finish, colour (if relevant) and trim material and finish (if relevant).

TAPWARE HYDRAULIC
Number off: e.g. if required in pairs. Delete otherwise.

Samples schedule
Type or location
A B C
Provide list of required samples. If a sample installation (as opposed to sample supply only) is required indicate where this is to
be and other related details.

ELECTRICAL DESIGN AND INSTALL ELECTRICAL
ELECTRICAL DESIGN AND INSTALL
This worksection is applicable to simple electrical installations in which the electrical design will be undertaken by the contractor
without the involvement of a specialist electrical consultant.
• None.
This worksection provides a brief specification for a design and installation package of work and is intended for use when there
is an extensive package of work to be designed by the contractor.
In choosing to do this, the specifier (usually an architect) takes on the responsibilities of a specialist electrical consultant. A
worksection Template such as this cannot cover all possible projects or situations so the specifier using it needs to be aware of
the limitations of the approach and their own limitations and responsibilities, particularly in relation to professional and public
liability. It is strongly recommended that the specifier:
• Ensures that all relevant information is made available at the time of tendering.
• Ensures that the design is undertaken by people with suitable qualifications and experience.
• Obtains certification on completion that the design and installation has been carried out in accordance with all statutory and
contractual requirements.
Specifiers should consider the professional and public liability implications of undertaking responsibility for design without the
involvement of an electrical consultant. Do you have the necessary expertise? Does your professional liability insurance cover
you for this? If transferring responsibility to the contractor you should be sure that the contractor has all relevant design and
safety information.
1 GENERAL
1.1 AIMS
Responsibilities
General: Provide electrical systems to the Selections:
Schedule a summary of the principle electrical systems to suit the project.
For contractual reasons this summary should not attempt to be a ‘Scope of Work’ or to imply that it includes ALL work although
the content may appear to be very similar to what has traditionally been included in ‘Scope of Work’ clauses. Do not use vague
phrases like ‘to the complete satisfaction of the superintendent’ or blanket phrases like ‘and all other work necessary to compete
the contract’. If the services are part of a single prime contract do not include subcontractors (as opposed to contractor’s)
responsibilities here. For example the contractor is responsible for all cranage so do not imply that it is the responsibility of a
subcontractor.
Statutory authorities and other bodies may levy fees, payment of which are normally the responsibility of the contractor.
Preliminaries defines the responsibilities, within the terms of the general conditions of contract, for the payment of fees by the
contractor and principal.
• Do not include statements about payment of fees in this worksection.
• Ensure that fee payment responsibilities of contractor and principal are adequately covered in Preliminaries.
• If the principal has already paid some fees include details in Preliminaries so that allowance is not duplicated.

Qualification
General: Use only persons appropriately experienced and qualified to undertake the electrical design
work on the systems documented.
Performance
General: Carry out verification tests and measurements to show compliance with the specification.
The system design may be described in terms of the performance required. On completion the installed systems should be
verified according to the performance parameters established.

General
have no overlaps.
1.3 STANDARD
General
Electrical systems: To AS/NZS 3000, AS/NZS 3008.1 and SAA HB301.
Telecommunications cabling: To AS/ACIF S008, AS/ACIF S009, AS/NZS 3080 and SAA HB29.
Degrees of protection (IP code): To AS/NZS 60529.
EMC: To AS/NZS 61000.
2 EXECUTION
2.1 GENERAL
General
Arrangement: Arrange services so that services running together are parallel with each other and with
adjacent building elements.
Fixing: If non-structural building elements are not suitable for fixing equipment and services to, fix
directly to structure and trim around holes or penetrations in non-structural elements.
Installation: Install equipment and services plumb, fix securely and organise reticulated services
neatly. Allow for movement in both structure and services.
Lifting: Provide heavy items of equipment with permanent fixtures for lifting as recommended by the
manufacturer.
Suspended ground floors: Keep all parts of services under suspended ground floors > 150 mm clear of
the ground surface. Make sure services do not impede access.
Submissions
Samples: Provide samples of all accessories and luminaires.
Technical data: Submit documentation to fully describe the proposed installation.
Installation of accessories
General: Install accessories in conformance with the Installation of accessories table.
Flush mounting: Provide flush mounted accessories except in plant rooms.
Mounting heights: To on-site direction
Restricted location: Do not install wall boxes across junctions of wall finishes.
Surface mounting: Proprietary mounting blocks.
Specify areas where accessories may be mounted direct to the building service.

Installation of accessories table

Wall construction Installation and concealed cabling facilities
Rendered masonry partition Flush wall box with conduit chased into wall
Double sided face brick partition Vertically mounted flush wall box with conduit
concealed in cut bricks
Face brick external cavity wall Flush wall box with thermoplastic insulated cables
in conduit run in cavity and tied against inner brick
surface, or thermoplastic sheathed cables run in
cavity
Stud partition Rewirable
Installation of ceiling mounted appliances

Connections: Provide flush mounted outlets on the ceiling next to support brackets.
Fixing: Provide support brackets fixed through ceiling to the building structure. Brace appliances that
have excessive bending moments, are heavy or vibrate, to prevent horizontal movement.
Manuals
General: Conform to the Operation and maintenance manuals clause in General requirements.
Certification
General: Submit certification that the plant and equipment submitted meets all requirements and
capacities of the contract documents except for departures that are identified in the submission.
2.2 LOW VOLTAGE POWER SYSTEMS

General
General: Provide a complete operational low voltage power system, comprising the following and to
the Selections:
- Supply.
- Metering.
- Consumers mains.
- Submains.
- Final subcircuits.
Submissions
Technical data: Submit documentation to fully describe the proposed installation. As a minimum
provide:
The electrical system design should be supported by documentation to verify compliance with AS/NZS 3000. Basic coordination
functions such as cable routes and cupboard layouts should be documented.
- Single line diagram(s).
- Fault levels at switchboards.
- Maximum demand calculations.
- Cable and conductor cross sectional area and insulation type.
- Submain cable routes and support or enclosure method.
- Switchboard cupboard layouts including risers.
- Busduct systems including routes, dimensions and connection details.
- Certify compliance with AS/NZS 3000 clause 1.8, for electrical services.
Accessories
General: Provide the following and to the Selections:
- General power outlets.
- Isolating switches.
- Three phase outlets.
Wiring systems

Generally to AS/NZS 3000. Nominate other standards if required. The BCA cites AS/NZS 3013 for electrical conductors
supplying certain substations or switchboards, classification not less than WS53W, is one deemed-to-comply solution.
Selection: Provide wiring systems appropriate to the installation conditions and the function of the
load.
Thermal insulation: In walls filled with thermal insulation, install cables in PVC conduit.
Power cables
General: Copper cable generally, multi-stranded except for MIMS.
Minimum size:
- Lighting subcircuits: 1.5 mm2.
- Power subcircuits: 2.5 mm2.
- Submains: 6 mm2.
Voltage drop: Install final subcircuit cables within the voltage drop parameters dictated by the route
length and load.
Fault loop impedance: Provide final subcircuit cables selected to satisfy the requirements for
automatic disconnection under short-circuit and earth fault/touch voltage conditions.
Dummy load tests
General: Where electrical tests are required and the actual load is not available, provide a dummy
load equal to at least 75% of the design load.
2.3 SWITCHBOARDS
General
General: Provide proprietary switchboards to the following and to the Selections:
- Main switchboard.
- Distribution boards.
Rated short-circuit currents: Design for the maximum prospective symmetrical r.m.s. current values at
rated operational voltage, at each assembly incoming supply terminal, excluding effects of current
limiting devices.
Standards
Standard: To AS/NZS 3000, AS/NZS 3439.1 and AS/NZS 3439.3.
AS/NZS 3439.1 covers the construction, testing, forms of separation and arrangement of type tested and partially type tested
assemblies.
AS/NZS 3439.3 covers the particular requirements for low voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies, such as distribution
boards and control panels, intended to be installed in places where unskilled persons have access for their use.
AS/NZS 3439.1 provides detailed guidance for designers specifying switchboard assemblies.
Statutory authority’s equipment
General: Refer to local supply authority service rules to determine their requirements. Install
equipment supplied by the statutory authority, and provide wiring to complete the installation.
Rated short-circuit currents
General: The rated fault capacity of the assembly enclosure, busbars and outgoing protective devices
is equal to the fault level of the system at the assembly.
Cable entries
Single core cables rated > 300 A: Arrange to minimise eddy currents.
Tariff meter compartment: Install the statutory authority’s tariff metering equipment in a separated,
sealed meter compartment or separate meter panel.
Construction
Fixing: Before making interpanel connections, fix assemblies and metering equipment enclosures into
position, level and plumb.
Cable entries: Neatly adapt one or more cable entry plates, if fitted, to accept incoming cable
enclosure. Provide the minimum number of entry plates to leave spare capacity for future cable
entries. Do not run cables into the top of weatherproof assemblies.
Single core cables rated > 300 A: Pass separately through non-ferrous gland plates. Do not provide
metal saddles.

Cable enclosures: Continue cable enclosures to or into assemblies and fit cable entry plates so that
the IP rating of the assembly and the fire rating of the cable are maintained.
Cable supports: Support or tie mains and submains cables within 200 mm of terminations. Provide
cable supports suitable for stresses resulting from short-circuit conditions.
2.4 SWITCHBOARD COMPONENTS

Protective devices
Provide protective devices which grade and coordinate for overcurrent, let through energy, and earth
faults.
Switch-isolator and combination fuse-switch units
Combined fuse switch units are not commonly used and are reserved for existing installations or for high fault levels.
Standard: To AS/NZS 60947.1 and AS/NZS 3947.3.
Rated current: To suit unit installed in enclosure.
Rated fault capacity: Provide units selected for short-circuit making capacity that is at least the fault
level at assembly incoming terminals.
Breaking capacity: At least the rated full load current.
Rated duty: Uninterrupted in non-ventilated enclosure.
Operation: Independent manual operation including positive ‘ON/OFF’ indicator.
Locking: Provide for padlocking in the ‘OFF’ position.
Handles: Removable only when switch is in open position.
Fuse links: Isolated when switch contacts are open.
Moulded case and miniature circuit breakers
Moulded case circuit breakers are commonly used for current ratings less than 1600 A.
Moulded case breakers: To AS/NZS 60947.1 and AS/NZS 3947.2.
Miniature circuit breakers: To AS/NZS 60898.1 or AS 3111.
Fault capacity ≥ 10 kA: To AS 3947.2 and AS/NZS 60947.1.
Fault capacity < 10 kA, current rating < 100 A: Miniature overcurrent circuit breakers to AS/NZS
60898.1 or AS 3111
Mounting: Mount circuit breakers so that the ‘ON/OFF’ and current rating indications are clearly visible
with covers or escutcheons in position. Align operating toggles of each circuit breaker in the same
plane.
Clip tray chassis: For miniature overcurrent circuit breakers provide clip tray assemblies capable of
accepting single, double, or triple circuit breakers, and related busbars. Provide moulded clip-on pole
fillers for unused portions.
Residual current devices
Also called earth leakage devices.
Integral type: Incorporate earth leakage in circuit breaker protection operation. To AS/NZS 61009.1.
Maximum tripping current: 30 mA.
Residual current devices Types III and IV do not provide adequate personal protection. See AS 3190 clause 5.1. AS 3190 will
be superseded (in part) by AS/NZS 61009.1 in the year 2009.
Fuses with enclosed fuse links
Fuses are typically used for high fault current installations.
It is the designer’s responsibility to ensure that fuse links are sized to ensure effective discrimination with other in-line protection
devices.
Standards: To AS/NZS 60269.1, AS/NZS 60269.2.0 and AS/NZS 60269.2.1.
Fault level: Provide fuses suitable for the fault level at the assembly, and which discriminate with other
protective equipment.
Let-through energy and peak cut-off current: To suit protected equipment.
Utilisation category: Distribution/general purpose: gG.

Fuse-holders: Mount fuse-holders so that fuse carriers may be withdrawn directly towards the operator
and away from live parts. Provide fixed insulation which shrouds live metal when the fuse carrier is
withdrawn.
Barriers: Provide barriers on both sides of each fuse link, preventing inadvertent electrical contact
between phases by the insertion of screwdriver.
Fuse links: Enclosed, high rupturing capacity type mounted in a fuse carrier. If necessary for safe
removal and insertion of the fuse carrier, provide extraction handles. Mount on clips within the spares
cabinet.
Identification: Clearly indicate Australian manufacturer or distributor.
Contactors
The designer should determine the appropriate duty and rating of the contactors.
Standard: To AS/NZS 60947.4.1.
Rated operational current: Full load current of the load controlled.
Minimum rating: 16 A.
Contacts life: 1 million operations at AC-3 or DC-3.
Mounting: Mount with sufficient clearance to allow full access for maintenance, removal and
replacement of coils and contacts, without the need to disconnect wiring or remove other equipment.
Auxiliary contacts: Provide auxiliary contacts with at least one normally-open and one normally-closed
separate contacts with rating of 6 A at 230 V a.c.
Interconnection: Do not connect contactors in series or parallel to achieve ratings.
2.5 LIGHTING
The design of lighting systems is a specialist task and guidance parameters are provided by the following standards:
• The AS/NZS 1158 series Parts 0, 1.1, 1.3, 2, 3.1, and 4 provides guidance for public lighting of roadways, pathways and
circulation spaces.
• The AS/NZS 1680 series Parts 0, 1, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5 and 3 applies to interior lighting.
• AS/NZS 1680.0 is cited in the BCA as this applies to interior lighting for safe movement.
• The AS 2560 series Parts 1, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 2.6, 2.7 and 2.8 applies to the design of sports lighting systems.
In a design and install contract verification of the installed system may be necessary. AS/NZS 3827 Parts 1 and 2 provides
guidance on lighting system performance and the methods to be used to establish compliance.
Delete the standards not required for this project.
General
General: Provide a complete operational lighting system, tested and commissioned.
Interior lighting standard: To AS/NZS 1680.
Exterior lighting standard: To AS/NZS 1158.
Proprietary equipment: Provide only proprietary luminaires, fittings and accessories.
Modifications and refurbishing: Carry out to the original manufacturer’s standards.
Minimum energy performance standards
General: To AS/NZS 4783.2 and AS/NZS 4782.2.
The minimum energy performance standard (MEPS) level for a particular ballast-lamp combination is the maximum permitted
corrected total input power of a ballast-lamp circuit specified in AS/NZS 4783.2. clause 6.4 specifies a minimum energy
performance standard (MEPS) for combinations of ballasts and type FD lamps. Should a higher standard be required delete this
clause and enter the required EEI classification in the following Energy efficiency clause.
The MEPS for fluorescent lamps as specified in AS 4782.2 is based on the initial and maintained efficacy of the lamp and a
prescribed CRI. This CRI will probably be lower, and therefore acceptable, compared tho that specified under Fluorescent
lamps which is based on the colour rendering requirement of the interior design.
Lamps
There is an IEC draft standard for extra-low voltage lighting systems for filament lamps.
Lamps: Provide all luminaires complete with lamps and accessories.
Verify operation: Install lamps in all luminaries and verify correct operation before completion
Standards:
- Fluorescent: To AS 4782.1.

- Incandescent: To AS 2325.
- Tungsten halogen: To IEC 60357.
Low voltage lamps: Provide lamps strictly in accordance with the luminaire manufacturer’s
recommendation.
On correlated colour temperature (CCT) and colour rendering index (CRI), see the AS/NZS 1680 series. A typical CCT in
commercial applications is between 3000 and 4000 K for linear and compact fluorescent lamps.
Dichroic lamps: Provide dichroic lamps with integral reflector which match the design specification.
Lighting control system
General: Provide the following and to the Selections:
- Lighting switches.
- Dimmers.
- Automatic control systems.
To minimise energy use consider specifying lighting controls such as dimmers, occupancy sensors and daylight sensors.
Documentation: Provide complete technical and operational documentation for the lighting control
system.
Installation
Supports: Mount luminaires on proprietary supports by means of battens, trims, noggings, roses or
packing material to suit location.
Completion
General: Verify the operation of all luminaires. Replace lamps which have been in service for a period
> 20% of the lamp life as published by the lamp manufacturer.
Contractor is to replace lamps which have been in service for extended periods during the installation and commissioning
process.
2.6 EMERGENCY EVACUATION LIGHTING

General
General: Provide a complete operational monitored, emergency evacuation lighting system, tested
and commissioned in accordance with AS/NZS 2293 and to the Selections.
Single-point system luminaires
The contractor is responsible for locating the single point luminaires for compliance with AS/NZS 2293.
Visual indicator lights: Provide a red indicator, readily visible when the luminaire is in its operating
location, which indicates that the battery is being charged.
Inverter system: Provide protection of the inverter system against damage in the event of failure,
removal or replacement of the lamp, while in normal operation.
Local test switches: Provide a momentary action test switch, accessible from below the ceiling, on
each luminaire to temporarily disconnect the mains supply and connect the battery to the lamp.
Common test switches: Provide a common test switch on the distribution board which disconnects
main supply to the luminaries and tests for discharge performance, after testing, this switch must
automatically revert to normal operating mode.
Monitored system
A monitored system is an alternative to a manual system and should be deleted if not required.
Data connection: Provide internal monitoring facilities and provision for the connection of data cabling
to a central monitoring computer where required for this project.
Amend to suit the project specific requirements in the schedules.
Proprietary systems: Use only proprietary systems with full compatibility between the monitoring
system, operating software, and the luminaries selected.
Batteries
Type: Lead-acid or nickel-cadmium batteries capable of operating each lamp at its rated output
continuously at least 2 hours during completion tests and 1.5 hours during subsequent tests.
Battery life: At least 3 years when operating under normal conditions at an ambient temperature of
25ºC and subjected to charging and discharging at 6 monthly intervals.
5 or 6 years is possible in some circumstances. See AS/NZS 2293.2 for system checks, and AS/NZS 2293.1 clause 2.3.

Marking: Indelibly mark each battery with its date of manufacture.

See also AS/NZS 2293.1 clause 3.3.3.5.
Power supply to single-point systems
General: Provide an unswitched active supply to each luminaire and exit sign, originating from the test
switch control panel.
Data monitoring for single-point systems
General: Provide a data cable system from each single-point luminaire connected to the monitoring
computer.
2.7 TELECOMMUNICATION CABLING

General
General: Provide a complete operational telecommunications cabling system, tested and
commissioned in accordance with AS/NZS 3080, AS/ACIF S009 and SAA HB29. Provide
accommodation for telecommunications cabling infrastructure complying with AS/NZS 3084 including
the detailed requirements of Appendix ZA, ZB and ZC. Include the following and to the Selections:
- Building distributor.
- Backbone cabling.
- Floor distributors.
- Consolidation points.
- Horizontal cabling.
- Telecommunications outlets.
- Fly leads.
Amend to suit the project.
AS/NZS 3080 provides guidance on the specification of telecommunications cabling systems.
AS/NZS 3084 provides guidance on the spatial needs and the general arrangement of telecommunications cabling systems,
and generally exceed the minimum safety requirements of ACIF TS 009.
System requirements
Application class to AS/NZS 3080 clause 6.3: E.
Balanced system to AS/NZS 3080 clause 7 (data): Category 6.
Balanced system to AS/NZS 3080 clause 7 (voice): Category 6.
Conformance: Certify the design and installation for conformance with AS/NZS 3080 in accordance
with the detailed requirements of clause 4.
System warranty: Warrant the specified communications cabling performance for a minimum of 15
years.
Performance warranties are commonly provided by telecommunications cabling system suppliers based on a pre qualified
selection of proprietary components.
Equipment racks
Type: 19 inch rack.
Free standing racks: Provide adjustable feet.
Modular connector patch panels
Terminations: Terminate directly to the modular connector.
Patch cords: Terminate cord ends with appropriate registered jacks.
Optical fibre termination panels
Break out trays: Provide fibre optic cable break out trays at each group of fibre optic cable
terminations.
Loom cables: Neatly loom cables and lay stripped cables into the break out tray.
Secure cables: Ensure that cables are secured by the sheath and that there is no stress on the fibre
optic cores.
Patch cords
General: Provide terminated patch cords for 60% of the total incoming and outgoing ports used.

Records
See AS/NZS 3085.1 and AS/ACIF S009.
Record book: Provide a record book at each cross connect.
Records in pencil: Complete the records in pencil for each termination and jumper, providing origin
and destination and type of service.
Location: Secure log books in each distribution frame records holder.
Identification and labelling, and record documentation: To AS/NZS 3085.1.
Cable separation
The separation specified in AS/ACIF S009, is based on insulation grading.
Low voltage cables: Separate telecommunications cables not enclosed in conduits or ducts from low
voltage services by at least 150 mm.
Electromagnetic interference (EMI): Provide clearance to minimise the effect of EMI where
communications cables are installed parallel and adjacent to power cables carrying loads in excess of
200 A.
Clearance is also needed for EMI purposes, particularly where parallel and adjacent power cables are carrying loads in excess
of 200 A.
Installation
Crossover: Install cables neatly and without crossovers between cables.
Loom size: Loom cables into groups not exceeding 50 cables, and hold looms in place using reusable
cable ties at least 20 mm wide. Do not exert compressive force on the cables when installing cable
straps.
Telecommunications outlets
Outlets: Provide RJ45 8 way modular jacks except where documented otherwise.
Generally 8 way modular jacks in either RJ45 (most common) or RJ6 form.
Pinouts: The pinouts vary with the application. Determine required pinouts before making cable
terminations.
The connections to these modular jacks differ depending on the application. The most common is Pinout type 568A.
Fly leads
General: Provide fly leads to 50% of the outlets installed.
Earthing system
AS/ACIF S009 applies, and contains a number of options.
Communication earth system (CES): Provide a communications earth terminal (CET) associated with
the local protective earth (PE) system adjacent to each electrical distribution board.
2.8 AUTOMATIC FIRE DETECTION

The contractor is responsible for compliance with AS 1670.1 and the local (statutory) fire authority requirements. Clearly define
the following areas of responsibility, which are often overlooked:
• Provision of interconnecting wiring and connection to the emergency warning and intercommunication system (EWIS),
sprinkler systems, door holders and mechanical plant, e.g. fire fan control panel.
• Provision of smoke detectors in air handling ductwork and their connection.
• Controlled door holders are sometimes included in the door hardware packages. Determine whether or not they form part
of this contract.
• Connection to access control system, security doors and electric door strikes.
General
General: Provide a fully operational, system, tested and commissioned in accordance with the
AS/NZS 1670 series.
Describe the general operation of the system, e.g. addressable, air sampling.
General: Provide equipment listed in the ActivFire Register of Fire Protection Equipment.
The register is available from http://www.activfire.gov.au/. This was formerly the SSL Register of Accredited Products - Fire

Base station monitoring system connection

Connection: Connect the installation to the fire alarm monitoring base station via telecommunication
carrier lines.
The connection of the system to the local fire alarm monitoring base station requires a dedicated telecommunications line,
therefore the contractor must pay a connection fee for this line, as well as rental during the commissioning period.
Specify in the system description schedule if the line rental is to be paid by the contractor during the maintenance period.
Installation wiring
ACA may be involved under the Telecommunications Act 1997 if the system is connected to telecommunications cabling - refer
to AS/ACIF S009.
Conductor size: ≥ 1.5 mm2 TPI 230 V rated, with red and white insulation.
Sheathing: Red.
Control and indicating equipment
See AS 4428.0 for testing of control and indicating equipment.
AS 4428.1, is cited in BCA Specification E2.2a, clause 5.
Air-handling fire mode control panels: To AS 4428.7.
Alarm investigation facility (AIF): To AS 4428.10.
Alarm signalling equipment: To AS 4428.6.
Wire-free alarm zone circuits: To AS 4428.9.
Fire indicator panels
General: Provide metal cubicle-type enclosures.
Consider the following:
• Location - preferably shown on the drawings.
• Mounting structure e.g. concealed fixings, or brackets.
• Doors material and finish - usually as for enclosure and hardware (handles, locks, etc.).
Isolation
General: Provide isolating facilities on fire indicator panels to enable tests to be carried out without the
transmission of alarm signals to the fire brigade.
Detectors
Coordinate with the mechanical services for provision of any duct mounted sampling units (DSUs) and integral or associated
smoke detectors.
The contractor is responsible for spacing and location of detectors to AS 1670.1 . See BCA Specification E2.2a Clause 3 for
mandatory requirements regarding smoke alarms. Smoke detectors provided to activate a smoke control system must be a
separate dedicated system incorporating control and indicating equipment with alarm verification facility and complying with
AS 4428.1.
Duct sampling units (DSUs): To AS 1603.13.
Heat detectors: To AS 7240.5.
Integral heat detector/alarm units: To AS 1603.3.
Point type smoke detectors: To AS 1603.2.
Multi-point aspirated smoke detectors: To AS 1603.8.
Optical beam smoke detectors: To AS 1603.7.
Integral smoke detector/alarm units: To AS 12239.
Self-indicating detectors
General: Provide a light emitting diode mounted in a clearly visible position, which illuminates
whenever detector operation causes an alarm condition to register on the fire indicator panel. Provide
self-indicating devices which, if faulty, will not render the detector inoperative under fire conditions.
Mounting positions of light emitting diodes:
- Visible detectors: On the outside of the detector or its base.
- Detectors concealed above ceilings: On the underside of the ceiling immediately below the detector.
- Detectors in other concealed spaces: On a visible panel close to the entry to the concealed space
housing the detector.

Installation
Consider extension brackets for detectors installed in ceiling spaces.
General: Install detectors so they can be easily inspected and tested in situ, and readily withdrawn for
service.
Integral smoke detector/alarm units: To AS 1670.6.
Manual call points
If required, consider the construction and finish of manual call point housings and whether or not they are to be incorporated in
mimic panels or sub indicator panels.
External alarm indication
Circuits: To AS 4428.1.
Strobe lights: To AS 1603.11.
Consider the preferred locations of strobe lights.
Magnetic door holders
Generally there are two main types, either holders that are built into the door head and form part of the door suppliers package,
or external wall mounted hold open devices which are included in the fire detection contract. In addition to magnetic door
holders, there is sometimes a requirement for a connection to electric door strikes, activated by access control systems. The
door strikes are generally connected directly to the fire detection system, so that they release in fire mode.
Coordinate with the architects door schedule.
Control facilities
General: Provide ancillary control device circuits and connections for automatically controlling and
releasing magnetic door holders to operate the relevant doors under fire alarm conditions.
Some doors may open under fire alarm conditions.
Fire fan control and indication panels
General: Provide fire detection and alarm signals for the fire fan control panel to be incorporated by
mechanical services.
Refer to AS/NZS 1668.1 clause 4.13.
2.9 EMERGENCY WARNING AND INTERCOMMUNICATION SYSTEM

General
General: Provide a complete operational emergency warning and intercommunication system, tested
and commissioned in accordance with AS 1670.4.
Accredited products: Provide equipment listed in the SSL Register of Accredited Products – Fire
Loudspeakers
Mounting: Securely fix to building elements. Flush mount in suspended ceilings and lift cars, and if
practicable elsewhere; otherwise surface mount in an enclosure.
In lift cars the lift contractor usually installs the speakers supplied by the EWIS contractor.
Wall mounting height: 150 mm below finished ceiling level.
Evacuation zones
Zones: Provide separate zones for each fire compartment, or a separate zone for each single storey.
Emergency intercommunications
Locate in warden intercommunication points in hydrant cupboards where next to fire stairs, for example, so as not to disrupt
egress and communications.
Warden intercommunication points: Connect, as separate circuits, warden intercommunication point
(WIP) handsets which are in the same zone.
Conferencing: Provide switching facilities which permit conference calls, between up to 5 warden
intercommunication points, to be initiated from any emergency control panel.

Lift cars: Provide a terminal block outside the lift motor room. Cable from the terminal block to central
control equipment. Provide a warden intercommunication point handset in each fire lift car.
A package specification will usually require the EWIS contractor to supply the handsets and the lift contractor to install them.
Ensure that the cabling from the terminal block to the lift cars is specified in the Lifts worksection (not in NATSPEC BASIC).
Marking: Permanently mark with unique circuit or serial numbers, concealed.
Circuit identification marking should be shown on record drawings.
2.10 ACCESS CONTROL

In some jurisdictions security systems can only be designed and installed by licensed persons. Obtain licence details, if this is
the case.
General
General: Provide a complete operational access control system, tested and commissioned in
accordance with AS/NZS 2053 and AS 2201 Parts 1, 3 and 5, as applicable.
AS 2201 covers intruder alarm systems; it does not specifically cover access control. The standard provides detailed coverage
of the design, installation and operation of alarm systems, including the performance requirements of detection devices,
monitoring stations, wire free systems and alarm transmission.
AS 2201.1 covers general design, construction, installation and maintenance of intruder alarm systems, as well as outlining, in
Section 5, the minimum requirements for any maintenance agreement.
AS 2201.3 nominates the minimum performance and reliability standards including false alarm rates for security alarm
detectors.
AS 2201.5 includes alarm transmission via dedicated paths, switched networks and wire free systems.
It is common practice in small installations to describe the performance and function of an access control system only, and the
final design and selection of the system and components is the responsibility of the contractor.
Processors or panels
Capacity: Provide separate entry/exit control modules for each designated door.
Users: Program the system to match the number of authorised users with unique access codes.
Time zones: At least 4 per day, with provision for weekends and public holidays.
Door control devices
General: Provide electric strikes, electric locks, drop bolts, or similar devices to suit door construction
and hardware.
Fail-safe: Connect door control devices in a fail-safe mode to permit egress in the event of power
failure.
Authorised products: Provide equipment listed in the SSL Register of Accredited Products - Fire
Glass doors: Provide tumbler, drop bolts or magnetic holders.
Double leaf doors (solid frame): Provide an electric strike or lock on the fixed leaf, connected to the
door frame by concealed flexible wiring.
Activation
Specify the particular method of obtaining entry for each door, typically:
• Magnetic readers, proximity, card or key. For cards or keys, specify the type of card or key to be supplied and the quantity,
including the quantity of pre-programmed cards or keys to be supplied for future issue.
• Key pads, with PIN programming.
• Punched cards.
• Remote, generally combined with an intercom.
Indicate whether local readers or key pads are to operate as stand alone units in the event of failure in the main processor
system.
General: Provide keypads, card readers or other activation devices, and locate next to entry points.
External: Provide weatherproof (IP56) hoods or housings for external units.
Mounting height: 1200 mm from floor level.
Vehicle control
Specify the particular method of obtaining entry, typically to match internal door activation. Describe the method of vehicle
entry/exit to be provided i.e. boom gates, roller shutters, gates.

Vehicle access control: Provide a vehicle access control system combining connection to vehicular
doors and boom gates, and interconnection to the main access control system.
Exit Loop detection: Provide a buried loop detection system adjacent to the exit point to activate boom
gates or vehicular doors on approach by a vehicle. Connect so that doors or gates close after a pre-
set time.
Push-button, or to match the entry system.
Interlock: Provide a photo electric beam safety interlock.
Interlock function: To prevent door or gate from closing until the vehicle has cleared the exit point.
Push-buttons and readers: Where practicable, provide direct wall mounting for push-buttons or
readers; otherwise provide a mounting bollard and extension arm.
Ensure that these are located within easy reach of the driver’s side window.
Mounting height: 1000 mm from floor level.
Reed switches: Provide heavy duty reed switches on both sides of vehicle doors, which generate a
door closed indication at the control panel.
Intercom
Base station: Provide an intercom base station at each external entry point, interconnected with the
individual local stations. Include speakers and microphones.
Construction: Wall mounted flush stainless steel panel.
Weatherproofing: IP56.
Dial: Digital push-button type.
Schedule: Provide a weatherproof (IP56) schedule holder and card identifying individual local stations.
Locate next to the intercom panel.
Local station: Provide wall mounted intercom local stations, interconnected with the base stations and
external entry points.
Type: Surface mounted, removable handset type.
Operation: Provide an audible tone device to indicate that the individual station is being called, and a
press-to-talk switch so that the local station can communicate with the base station only when the
switch is held down.
Door control: Provide integral momentary action door release switches to operate the door release or
opening mechanisms at each external entry point.
Interconnection to other services
General: Provide card readers or other devices to allow the interconnection to other systems as
required. Provide and connect wiring to the designated services.
Describe the systems interconnected to the access control system.
• Lift car controls, floors covered, location of readers, hours of operation.
• After hours air conditioning control, location of readers, hours of operation.
Describe the method of interconnection to other services such as lifts, air conditioning, lighting, and the location of readers.
Specify services to be connected.
For lift control, designate the lifts that require readers - readers are usually supplied by the security contractor but installed and
connected by the lift company responsible for the lift maintenance.
For airconditioning control, where after hours airconditioning is activated by the access control system, clearly define the area of
responsibility for interconnection to the mechanical services.
2.11 TELEVISION DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

General
General: Provide a complete operational analog and digital television distribution system, tested and
commissioned in accordance with AS/NZS 1367.
System design and performance: To AS/NZS 1367.
For Radio Frequency (RF) Isolation, see AS/NZS 1367. Note that devices which operate above 950 MHz may not meet the
isolation requirements in the range 5 MHz to 862 MHz.
Network operators
Delete and amend network operators to suit project requirements.

Free-to-air bands: Provide a system suitable for the reception of all local Free-to-air services:
Cable: Arrange with the cable network operator for the connection to their cable network. Comply with
the cable network operators' requirements.
Local: Provide video input sockets at the premises cabling head-end for the distribution of three in-
house video channels on the Free-to-air network.
Modify this clause to suit the project requirements for local signal sources and control.
If the location and function of the in-house programme source equipment is known then the connections between this
equipment and the head-end equipment should be specified.
Performance criteria
Describe the system required.
MATV systems may be single or dual type (e.g. one for terrestrially received free to air (FTA) with a second for direct satellite
Intermediate Frequency (I.F.) distribution, or one for FTA with a second for subscription (Pay) services, etc.).
Include suitable options for antenna locations in the documents.
Input to headend and amplifiers: Channel signal level: ≥ 60 dB(µV).

Mutual isolation between system outlets: ≥ 36 dB within the band 5 MHz to 862 MHz, within or
between premises.
System outlet range of levels: ≥ 60 dB(µV) and ≤ 80 dB(µV), at all times.
System outlet levels: ≥ 63 dB(µV) for all channels.
Digital television: Conform to the recommendations of the ‘Guidelines for consultants: Modification of
Master Antenna TV Systems to Accommodate Digital Terrestrial Television’ published by Digital
Broadcasting Australia.
The Digital Broadcasting Australia organisation publishes guidelines for consultants and other documents to aid designers and
installers. Some are available for free download at www.dba.org.au.
Cabling and component installation: Comply with the recommendations of AS 3815.
The designer should be aware of the limitations and minimum clearances required in the installation and termination of
distribution components especially coaxial cable. This is of particular concern at outlets in maintaining minimum bending radius
requirements for cable, allowing for ease of installation and quality of finish of the installed system.
For example, minimum wall box dimensions would need to be 120 mm x 120 mm x 40 mm deep, with the cable terminated with
a 90º crimp connector and outlet plate of square appearance. This has the added advantage of allowing for dual outlet sockets
and future expansion.
Specify partition widths to accept wall box clearances.
Safety requirements: For isolators, in particular, see AS/NZS 1367 for system design and component selection.
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC): AS/NZS 1367 states that the requirements of this standard are consistent with those of the
Australian Communications Agency (ACA).
2.12 LABELLING
If proprietary marking systems are required, for example, circuit identification, specify the system to be used, otherwise it can be
assumed that handwritten indelible pen marking will be acceptable.
General
General: Provide labels including control and circuit equipment ratings, functional units, notices for
operational and maintenance personnel, incoming and outgoing circuit rating, sizes and origin of
supply and kW ratings of motor starters.
Identifying labels
General: Provide labels fixed to access panels, doors, covers and escutcheon panels and internal
equipment, indicating the relevant worksection and component.
Single-line diagrams
Usually only required for main assemblies.
Custom-built assemblies: Provide single-line diagrams.
Format: Non-fading print, at least A3 size, showing the situation as installed.
Mounting: Enclose in a non-reflective PVC frame and wall mount close to assembly.
Marking cables
If particular labelling methods (including fixing, lettering or colours) are required, provide details.

General: Identify the origin of all wiring by means of legible indelible marking.
Identification labels: Provide durable labels fitted to each core and sheath, permanently marked with
numbers, letters or both to suit the connection diagrams.
Identify multicore cables and trefoil groups at each end with durable non-ferrous tags clipped around
each cable or trefoil group.
Telecommunications and television cabling
General: Label telecommunications cables. cross connects, outlets, in accordance with the
requirements of AS/NZS 3080, and SAA HB29 Figures 5-18.
Labels: Label cables to indicate the origin and destination of the cable. Label outlets to show the origin
of the cross connect, the workstation or outlet number, and the port designation.
Location marking
Cable route markers should be provided for all underground services.
General: Accurately mark the location of underground cables with route markers consisting of a
marker plate set flush in a concrete base.
Location: Place markers at each joint, route junction, change of direction, termination and building
entry point and in straight runs at intervals of not more than 100 m.
Concrete bases: 200 mm diameter x 200 mm deep, minimum.
Direction marking: Show the direction of the cable run by means of direction arrows on the marker
plate. Indicate distance to the next marker.
Plates: Brass, minimum size 75 x 75 x 1 mm thick.
Plate fixing: Waterproof adhesive and 4 brass or stainless steel countersunk screws.
Marker height: Set the marker plate flush with paved surfaces, and 25 mm above other surfaces.
Marker tape for electrical services: Where electric bricks or covers are not provided over underground
wiring, provide a 150 mm wide yellow or orange marker tape bearing the words ‘WARNING - electric
cable buried below’, laid in the trench 150 mm below ground level.
Labelling – minimum lettering heights
Main assembly designation: 25 mm.
Distribution assembly designations: 15 mm.
Small proprietary distribution boards: 10 mm.
Main switches: 10 mm.
Outgoing functional units: 8 mm.
Identifying labels (on outside of cabinet rear covers): 4 mm.
Danger, warning and caution notices: 10 mm for main heading, 5 mm for remainder.
Other labels including equipment labels within cabinets: 3 mm.
Label colours
Generally: Black lettering on white background except as follows:
- Main switch and caution labels: Red lettering on white background.
- Danger, warning labels: White lettering on red background.
Fixing
General: Fix labels securely.
Fixing methods: Use screws and double-sided adhesive. Fixed in extruded aluminium sections
attached to panels with rivets or countersunk screws.
Aluminium labels: Aluminium or monel rivets.
Restrictions: Do not use self-tapping or thread-cutting screws.
Permanent fixing: Fix labels permanently in place.

Label fixing table

Component Fixing scheme Type
Cables Origin and destination Self adhesive – wrap on
Cross connects Port Number Proprietary
Outlets SAA HB29 Figs 5-18 Engraved plate
Wall boxes SAA HB29 Figs 5-18 Engraved adhesive label
Patch cords Type of service Colour code
3 SELECTIONS
Duplicate and customise these Schedules, adding and deleting rows and columns, as required.
3.1 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

Electrical systems schedule
Electrical system Requirement
Low voltage power systems.
Cable support and duct systems.
Lighting systems.
Emergency evacuation lighting systems.
Telecommunications cabling systems.
Emergency warning and intercommunications
systems.
Fire detection/alarm system.
Television distribution system.
Electronic security systems.
Lightning protection system.
3.2 NORMAL SUPPLY

Normal supply schedule
Nominal supply voltage 240/230 V
Number of phases 3
Frequency 50 Hz
Number of wires – system 4
Neutral connection MEN
3.3 POWER DISTRIBUTION

Consumers mains design schedule
Type
Installation
Spare capacity %

Submains design schedule

Type
Installation
Spare capacity %
Final subcircuits design schedule

Type
Installation
Spare capacity %
3.4 SWITCHBOARDS
Main switchboard design schedule
Type
Location
Spare capacity %
Distribution switchboards design schedule

Type
Location
Spare capacity % % % %
3.5 ACCESSORIES
Component Manufacture Catalogue or Description/ Other/IP rating Special
reference rating
3-phase outlets
Isolating
switches
Socket outlets
Special purpose
outlets
3.6 LIGHTING
Lighting types and illumination levels schedule
Area description Proposed usage Lighting type Illumination level Completion test –
– Lux Lux

Lighting control schedule

Component Manufacture Catalogue or Description/ Special
reference rating
Light switch
Dimmers
Automatic controls
3.7 EMERGENCY EVACUATION LIGHTING

Lighting types schedule
reference rating
Emergency
luminaries
Exit signs
3.8 TELECOMMUNICATION CABLING

Building distributor design schedule
Type Rack mounted
Location
Spare capacity – minimum %
Space for active equipment %
Floor distributors design schedule

Distributor designation
Type Rack mounted Rack mounted
Location
Spare capacity – minimum % %
Space for active equipment % %
Telecommunications outlets schedule

reference rating
Telecommunications
outlet

Trade Briefs

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Trade Briefs

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

TENDERING GENERAL

Anticipated order of cost >

1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION

NATSPEC i [Insert date]

1.4 FURTHER INFORMATION

NATSPEC ii [Insert date]

1.5 PREPARATION OF TENDERS

NATSPEC iii [Insert date]

Evidence of contractor’s registration or licensing

Design and documentation

NATSPEC iv [Insert date]

1.6 SUBMISSION OF TENDERS

1.7 PROCEDURES AFTER TENDER PERIOD

NATSPEC vi [Insert date]

NATSPEC vii [Insert date]

NATSPEC viii [Insert date]

• Lump sum only.

NATSPEC ix [Insert date]

NATSPEC i [Insert date]

1.2 THE SITE

NATSPEC ii [Insert date]

NATSPEC iii [Insert date]

1.3 CONSTRUCTION PLANT

NATSPEC iv [Insert date]

NATSPEC v [Insert date]

1.4 BUILDING THE WORKS

NATSPEC vi [Insert date]

Order of work schedule

NATSPEC vii [Insert date]

Items to be supplied schedule

Date: Of delivery or availability, to permit preparation of program.

1.5 COMPLETION OF THE WORKS

1.6 PAYMENT FOR THE WORKS

NATSPEC viii [Insert date]

Anticipated progress claims schedule

NATSPEC ix [Insert date]

Authority conditions schedule

NATSPEC x [Insert date]

PRELIMINARIES – ABIC MW-1

NATSPEC i [Insert date]

1.2 THE SITE

NATSPEC ii [Insert date]

NATSPEC iii [Insert date]

1.3 CONSTRUCTION PLANT

NATSPEC iv [Insert date]

NATSPEC v [Insert date]

1.4 BUILDING THE WORKS

NATSPEC vi [Insert date]

NATSPEC vii [Insert date]

Items to be supplied schedule

Date: Of delivery or availability, to permit preparation of program.

1.5 COMPLETION OF THE WORKS

1.6 PAYMENT FOR THE WORKS

NATSPEC viii [Insert date]

Anticipated progress claims

NATSPEC ix [Insert date]

Authority conditions schedule

NATSPEC x [Insert date]

PRELIMINARIES – ABIC SW-1

1.2 THE SITE

NATSPEC ii [Insert date]

NATSPEC iii [Insert date]

1.3 CONSTRUCTION PLANT

1.4 BUILDING THE WORKS